25s

Ie ge het

~& =

ees

85 a18<

80%

Stree

esters tatetens

see ee.

pee ie ee eee

3. Be a-Oe He Fe Me Ee OR

cee Berka Hendy eee eee eH Ol oO Fe So. te -

~ ead *-

arte ee ee

Bee ere Oe

&. phn hat pa he

whe par tad ed ¥ nl

oh tn Or Bw

mgth bese es

a0 wid he be A 4

oz @=2-9_8:0n" ry

"alee eet Soe eee

Men fy = ete PS EP oe we Oe =

==2-2+-e_->.s- 3-3

ar at ee

fo Re Vo ttety®

— =e

ee os ee oe

hot bmteGot= Ds Gretel

ee ere ie

= hoe n.

Pp ham tm

ee ee

= ta tehe rea

F Ba Gora

FG e ete GM Morey eh Es

Sen

ent fee

2 Pete ®t -§ Mn Ua

aes em

= ‘=

*-9-9

te H~S~0- 8

om: Rove t= Has:

sue

Be’

Cee)

ee ee

wt OF eae as tee

aice.e

PG Pee Cx re es

ne Pe eee te Oe

Sr ee

rok

a OAR)

7 +e Oe ee et eet

oe Phe hae tha

fo ee

Cig->-G>0-

rs *

> Ga thet Re oe

oF Fe

mG eueee

‘eo eee

Raga ts et

: i =

iow te Ge Oe o>

ed Sete os eee

ee er ty

ees ee. ea

ee ed

o> Oa Orde

- SMA G:

Reva h- fod

wisteticerecane-e

Taste ;

+e be ert

9nd a tel B ©

ees O- I~ eam

cto Oe bode ats

aO<4> &< 4-H @

sGo bots teste’

pest)

ote Oo

we aoe

Os Fe.

saa <

re Sn Ge Oe te dee

= Gta

at O=he es

P+ Se@-

pee bt it

aie

see

mH a:

anette 2

vit+ eds

Boots

tat-

we irigegeeaeecee tee

¥ Pe

Pt se ey et eo ~

sees

nw Be

Seta a

ee. Poe Orbe

Un Pewee ete

7-3 @

2 be eee. -

es ee -@ 0-6-6-Fe

On Gat Me oe P= ete es

Gree oa

ve Betee-#

ee ee ee A

see Bctse =

oe PT)

OP b> PPOs Gee ee *

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

EDITED BY

THE SECRETARIES.

VOL. XXVI.

West Tf: to VE 1857.

SRA ADL DAD PLLPVIVPPII II IIA

“Tt will flourish, if naturalists, chemists, antiquaries, philologers, and men of

science, in difierent parts of Asia, will commit their observations to writing, and

send them to the Asiatic Society at Calcutta. It will languish if such communica-

tions shall be long intermitted; a ll die away, if they shall entirely cease.”

—Sirn WM. JONES.

PRINTED BY C. B. LEWIS, BAPTIST MISSION PRESS.

1858.

j ‘ uly } i ny? } Pret oi ’

; eerie ie een yah ' + Pare wh ae 3 at

- ue 1, ' Wis i f 1 ris toe . é

ar aS UNE TCR yc ae pe

; t yee Ay 2 i

v al Rey j ' ~

*, -

— Ed

= P

’

‘

, :

s [ Pht «he

F Paras

A , ’ i " wy Le

’ . 4

iv , teh ip? +.

é j

‘

s i

= ‘

! woh

a, Se

r ripe we ; «

’ Lad 5 .. "

Li! “hh

j A Aw 4 5 | | * ;

‘ : ts vier i

- ans aT tee | | Yo Lee ie

CONTENTS

Bahing tribe, Vocabulary of,

Buddhist Remains (ancient) at Pagan on the Irawadi, account

of, a sae ee soe ar

Darjiling, Sikkim Himalayah, Mean Temperature and fall of

rain at, 1848 to 1855, . :

Derdjat-Lower, Account of the dias ee district Of aaa

called Roh, forming the western boundary of the—with

notices of the tribes inhabiting if,...

Entomological Papers,

Jamera Pat in Sirgooja, Notes on, Pe ie

Kiranti dialects—Comparative Vocabulary of,

Kokan, Kashgar, Yarkund and other places in Central hen,

Notes on, ... ; me

Lagomys (new) and a new diragels rani the ay

region of Sikim and the proximate parts of Tibet,

Lycium, Indian species of, Notes on the, f

Magnetic Survey, Report on the progress of, and of the He:

searches connected with it, from November, 1855, to April,

1856, Ny we oe tae 54,

Report on the Proceedings of the Officers engaged

in the,

Meteorological epee ueons puheousts of ) feat at the she

veyor General’s Office, Calcutta, in the months of October,

November and December, 1856,

in the month of January, 1857,

in the month of February, 1857,

in the months of March, April, May, in

June, 1857,

in the yon of Faly 1857,

in the months of August, peptoled Oahabee

November and December,..........

Page

207

iv Contents.

Meteorological Register kept at the Office of the Secretary i

to Government N. W. P. Agra, for the months of Septem-

ber, October, November and December, 1856, Pe WL

Nanga Parbat and other Snowy mountains of the Himalaya

Range adjacent to Kashmir, Memo. on, saath OO

Nepal, Comparative Vocabulary of the broken tiles of, (eee

Pagan, Account of Buddhist remains in, : i

Pigeon (Indian) akin to the Stock-Dove of aera denaencies

of, with notices of other Columbine, : as LT

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society of Bengal se J anuary sai

February 1857... ae - ce GO

for Ach and April, 1857, ask ave BGS

ee for May, 1857, i i BaF 23.

—— for June, July, August, September ahd Oxsaneey

1857, sa 275

Shells (of India) Land aud Tega wale Notes on ih eke

tion of the Part I. ... ase ei we 245

Vayu tribe, Vocabulary of, — i. ele fe

Grammar of, Se 429

Vocabulary (Comparative) of the languages of ne = ‘vibes

of Nepal, . Ene : aot

of the several dialects of te Kinanti- language,... 350

—_—— and Grammar of Vayu Tribe, ae 372, 429

eee

of Bahing Tribe,

_ INDEX TO NAMES OF CONTRIBUTORS.

Anderson, T. Esq., M. D. Oude ees N otes 0 on the

Indian Species of Lycium, 52

Blyth, Edward, Esq. Description of a new Tad Been

akin to the ‘Stock-Dove’ of Europe; with Notices of other

Columbine, iS ee piece ea

Contents.

Hodgson, B. H. Esq., B. C.S. On a new Lagomys and anew

Mustela, inhabiting the north region of Sikim and the proxi-

mate parts of Tibet,

Comparative Vocabulary of the Biker Tribes of

Nepal, ey Se :

of the several dialects of bbe Kiranti foie

Vocabulary of the Vayu Tribe,

Grammar of the Vayu Tribe,

Vocabulary of the Bahing Tribe,

Leigh, Capt. R. T. Notes on Jamera Pat in Sirgooja,

Montgomerie, T. G., Lt. Engineers, Memorandum on the

Nanga Parbat and other Snowy Mountains of the Himalaya

Range adjacent to Kashmir,

Nietner, John, Esq. Entomological Papers,

Raverty, H. G., Lieut. An account of the Mountain ainio

forming the western boundary of the Lower Derajat, com-

monly called Roh, with notices of the tribes inhabiting it,...

Netes on Kokan, Kashgar, Yarkand, and

other places in Central Asia,

Schlagintweit, Adolphe and Robert, Esqrs. es on the oe O-

gress of the Magnetic Survey and of the Researches con-

nected with it; from November, 1855, to April, 1856,... 54,

Report on the Proceedings of the Officers engaged

in the Magnetic Survey of India, .

Theobald, W. Junr. Notes on the dunburion of some of ‘is

land and freshwater shells of India, Part I.

Yule, Capt. Henry. An account of the Ancient Buddhist he.

mains at Pagdn on the Irrawadi,

Withecombe, J. R., M. D. Mean temperature ae fall of rain

at Darjiling, Sikkim Himalayah,—1848 to 1855,

LOL OLLI oOo"

257

make

erg

‘

raiyNe seat gh?

y 7

' eu mgt

eu ei ‘ na

., is = al yt iy ‘ ma ae sige coat =.

i ? aa i) ; : din

ba > ¥ in |

7 waht 48

e 241ts byt) ‘J mL gts i: pit

) 7 : ea ee wand)

- ~ get, Te Jats wes

a TS - ce we ——_ = =|

a io 7

“

ees

4 bi

" _ ' e

* be ) ys i a f

‘ . 4 oe a ‘at

; a 4

af 4

; , & ee

7 _ pt

’

a; * é

» 7 i

‘

;

‘

= 4 y$

it)

. ~~

A 0 Oe

;

NOTICE.

The Secretaries wish to add that they cannot hold themselves re-

sponsible for any misprints in the earlier part of these Vocabularies,

especially those in No. V. The MSS. which Mr. Hodgson left with

them, when he quitted India, were in such a confused state from ink

and pencil interlineations that 16 was hopeless to avoid errors. This

was pointed out to Mr. H. who replied that the Secretaries must do

the best they could with them. This they have tried to do, but the

task of correcting the proofs has been very laborious.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

PPPOE LADLE LOL ILS IIL III LI SOIL OIL OE

Now? “1s57:

PDA DADIODIIIDIIIV™IIIYIPPADAIIVIIAAAADAE IA

An Account of the Ancient Buddhist Remains at Pagdn on the lra-

widt— By Captain Hunry Yuin, Bengal Engineers.

The Burmese monarchs derive their stem from the S’dkya kings

of Kapilavastu, the sacred race from which Gautama sprang. One

of them, Abhi-Raja by name, is said to have migrated with his

troops and followers into the valley of the Irawédi, and there to

have established his sovereignty at the city of Tagoung: a legend

manifestly of equal value and like invention to that which deduced

the Romans from the migration of the pious Al‘neas, the ancient

Britons from Brut the Trojan, and the Gael from Scota daughter of

Pharaoh.*

But that Tagoung was the early capital of the Burmans, appears

to be admitted, and is probable, supposing the valley of the Irawadi

to have been settled from the north. There, they relate, (as is

told also of Anurédhapura in Ceylon), a city or a succession of

cities had existed even during the times of each of the three Bud-

dhas who preceded Gautama. The last foundation of Tagoung

took place, according to story, in the days of Gautama himself, and

this city was the seat of seventeen successive kings.

From Tagoung a wild legend carries the dynasty to Prome, where

an empire under the Pali name of Sare Khettara (Sri Kshetra) was

* J see, however, since the text was written, that Lassen accepts the traditions

of the Indian origin of the Burmese Kings as genuine. (Indische Alterthwn-

skunde, II. 1034.)

+ Col. Burney in J. A. 8. B. vol. V. p. 157.

No. LXXXV.—New Serius. Von. XXVI. B

2 The Remains at Pagan. No. wh.

established about 484 B.C. It does not appear from the authori-

ties whether the kingdom of Tagoung is believed to have continued

contemporaneously with that of Prome.

There is no doubt that the frequent shiftings of their capitals is

characteristic of the Indo-Chinese nations, and is connected with

the facilities for migration presented by their great navigable rivers,

and by the unsubstantial nature of their dwellings. Still, one can-

not but have some suspicion that the desire to carry back to a re-

moter epoch the existence of the empire as a great monarchy, has

led to the representation of what was really the history of various pet-

ty principalities, attaining probably an alternate preponderance of

dominion, as the history of one dynasty of monarchs in various suc-

cessive seats.

Pegu, it need not be said, was an independent kingdom, though

several times subjected for a longer or shorter period by the Bur-

mans previous to the Jast conquest by Alompra, and twice at least

in its turn subjecting Ava.* Toungt also appears undoubtedly to

have been a separate kingdom for a considerable period, two of its

kings or princes in succession having conquered Pegu during the

sixteenth century ; and Martaban was the seat of an independent

prince for at least 140 years. ‘Tavoy was occasionally independent,

tuough at other times alternately subject to Pegu or Siam. Aracan,

bearing much the same relation to Burma that Norway did to

Sweden, preserved its independence till the end of the last century.

But besides these, there are perhaps indications of other principali-

ties within the boundaries of Burma proper. Kings of Prome are

mentioned in the histories of the Portuguese adventurers. Ferdi-

* In the thirteenth century three generations of Burman kings reigned over

Pegu. In 1554 or thereabouts, the king of Pegu, who was a Burmese prince of

Toungu, conquered Ava and its empire as far as Mogoung and the Shan state of

Thein-ni. This was the acme of Peguan prosperity, but even that was under a

Burmese sovereign. About 1613 the king of Ava became master of Pegu and all

the lower provinces. So matters continued tillthe Peguan revolt of 1740 and the

following years, which not only succeeded in the expulsion of the Burmans, but

in 1752 in the conquest of Ava. This brief ascendancy was upset in the same

year by the Hunter-Captain Alompra, whose dynasty still sits on the throne of

Ava, though Pegu has past into the hands of the Kalds.

1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 3

nand Mendez Pinto speaks of several other kingdoms on the

Trawadi; but he is to be sure a very bad authority. Father

Sangermano also, in his abstract of the Burmese chronicles, appears

to speak of contemporary kings of Myen-zain or Panya, Ta-goung

and Tsa-gaing.*

These instances may, however, originate only in the ambiguity of

the Burmese title Mun, which is applied equally to the King of

England and to the Governor General of India, to the king of

Burma and to all the high dignitaries and princes of his provinces.

The Empire of Prome came to an end, it is said, through civil

strife,t and one of the princes, in A. D. 107, flying to the north,

established himself at Pagan. According to the view taken by Craw-

furd and Burney, as well as Sangermano, the Burmese monarchy

continued under a succession of fifty-two or fifty-five princes, to the

end of the thirteenth century.

But the authority quoted by Mr. Masont (apparently an edition

of the royal chronicle) implies that the city founded, or re-founded,

in 107 was that of Upper Pagan on the Upper Irawadi closely

adjoining Tagoung, and that the Pagan of which we now speak was

not founded till 847 or 849.

The site of upper Pagan has been visited by Captain Hannay in

1835, and by the Rev. Mr. Kincaird in 18387.

Capt. Hannay says,§ “About a mile to the south of this

(Tagoung) is a place called Pagam-myo, which is now a complete

* Description of the Burmese Empire, pp. 42, 43.

+ The following quaint legend is related by Sangermano, On the day of the last

king’s death it happened that a countryman’s cornsieve, or winnowing fan, was

carried away by an impetuous wind. The countryman gave chase, crying out :

“Oh my cornsieve! oh my cornsieve!” The citizens, disturbed by the clamour,

and not knowing what had happened, began likewise to ery, “ Army of the Corn-

sieve! Soldiers of the Cornsieve!’’ A great confusion consequently arose and the

citizens divided themselves into three factions, who took up arms against one

another, and were afterwards formed into three nations, the Pyu, the Karan, and

the Burmese. (The Pyu were probably the people in the neighbourhood of

Prome; Karan or Kanran the Aracanese. See Payne in J. A. 8. B. XIII. 29.)

5% Natural Productions of Burma, II. 450.

§ M.S. Narrative of a journey from Ava to the Amber-mines near the Assam

frontier. (In Foreign Office, Calcutta.)

B 2

4 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1.

jungle, but covered with the remains of brick buildings ag far as

the eye can reach. There are also the ruins of several large tem-

ples which have now more the appearance of earthen mounds than

the remains of the brick buildings, and they are covered with jungle

to the top.” The people on the spot told Capt. Hannay that the

city was much more ancient than the other Pagan. And indeed we

heard this upper city spoken of as “old Pagan,” when we were at

the capital.

Some interesting discoveries in Burmese history and antiquities

may yet be made among the ruins of which Capt. Hannay speaks.

Nine of the oldest temples at Pagan are ascribed, according to

Crawfurd, to king Pyan-bya, circa 850. This coincides with the

reign and date to which Mr. Mason’s account assigns the foundation

of the city.

Here then twenty-one kings reigned in regular succession from

the middle of the 9th to the end of the 13th century, and here in

the year 997, under the apostleship of A-rahan and the reign of

Anau-ra-men-zan, Buddhism was established in its present shape as

the religion of the country.*

The history of the destruction of Pagd4n has been related by Col.

Burney from the Burmese chronicles.f Indignant at the murder

of an ambassador by the Burmese king, the Emperor of China sent

a vast army to invade Burma, The king, Narathee-ha-padé, in his

anxiety to strengthen the defences of his capital, pulled down, for

the sake of the materials, (so the chronicle relates), one thousand

large arched temples, one thousand smaller ones, and four thousand

square temples. But under one of these temples a prophetic

inscription of ominous import was found: the king lost heart, left

his new walls defenceless and fled to Bassein. The Chinese

advanced, occupied the city, and continued to pursue the Burman

army as far as Taroup-mau, or Chinese point, a considerable distance

below Prome. ‘This was in 1284,

Colonel Burney has indicated that this is the same Chinese

invasion which is spoken of by Marco Polo. Turning to that

traveller (in Purchas, vol. III. 98,) we find that when the Great

* Judson’s Life, I. 199, and Crawfurd, p, 491.

+ J, A.S. B, Vol. IV. p, 402,

1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 5

Khan minded to subdue the city of Mien, [the Chinese name for

Burma] he sent a valiant Captain, and an army chiefly composed of

jesters with whom his court. was always furnished.

It is curious enough to contrast the contemptuous view of the

Burmese enterprise here indicated, with the history of the same

event as given by the Burmans in their chronicle. Instead of an

army of jesters they represent the emperor to have sent a host of

at least six millions of horse, and twenty millions of foot, to attack

Pagan, and to have been obliged to reinforce these repeatedly before

they could overcome the resolute resistance of the Burmese, who

encountered the enemy near the mouth of the Bamo river.

From the mention of this locality it would appear that the

Chinese invasion took place by the route still followed by the main

body of the Chinese trade with Burma.

Pagan surprised us all. None of the preceding travellers to Ava

had prepared us for remains of such importance and interest. I do

not find any mention of Pagan and its temples before the middle of

the last century, when Capt. George Baker and Lieutenant North

were sent ona joint embassy to Alompra from the British settlement

at Negrais. Lieut. North died at Pagan, or rather at Nyoung-ti,

a considerable trading town at the northern extremity of the ruins,

On his way down, Capt. Baker seems to have staid a week at

“Pagang Youngoe.”’ He mentions the great number of pagodas in

the neighbourhood, and one in particular, “the biggest of any

between Dagon (Rangoon) and Momchabue (Moutshobo the resi-

dence of Alompra,) kept in good repair, and celebrated by the

people for haying one of their god’s teeth and a collar bone buried

under it.’’*

Colonel Symes visited some of the temples on his way both up

and down the river, and gives a somewhat vague account of the

Ananda, which was then undergoing repair at the expense of the

Prince Royal. He was told that the prince had collected gold for

the purpose of gilding it, an intention which the size of the building

renders improbable, and which certainly was not fulfilled.

Cox also describes the Ananda, and took some measurements with

the intention of making a plan of the building.

* Dalrymple’s Oriental Repertory, I. 171.

The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1.

Among the ruins of the ancient city on the 8th February, 1826,

the Burmese under the hapless Naweng-bhuyen, or “King of

Sunset,”’* made their last stand against Sir Archibald Campbell’s

army, which remained encamped there for some days afterwards.

Havelock, in his history of the Campaign, notices the namerous

monuments, but says; “the sensation of barren wonderment is the

only one which Pagahm excites. There is little to admire, nothing

to venerate, nothing to exalt the notion of the taste and invention

of the people which the traveller might already have formed in

Rangoon or Prome.” It will be seen presently that we differ widely

in opinion from Colonel Havelock.

The account that conveys the most truthful impression of Pagan

is probably that contained in the travels of Mr. Howard Malcom,

an American missionary traveller.

Mr. Crawfurd indeed devotes several pages of his admirable book

to the detailed description of some of these buildings, and gives an

engraving of that which he considered the finest architectural work

among them. rom his selection in this instance I utterly dissent.

The temple which he has engraved is, as compared with the

greater works at Pagan, paltry and debased. It is altogether

uncharacteristic of the peculiar Pagan architecture ; nor is it indeed

well or accurately represented in the print. Mr. Crawfurd’s

descriptions too, an accurate observer as he is, fail somehow to leave

with his readers any just impression of these great and singular

relics. From that preference of his which has been referred to,

it strikes me that he did not himself do justice to the grandeur or

interest of these buildings, and therefore could not enable his readers

to do so. With the assistance in illustration that we enjoy, we

ought to be able to do better.

In Pegu and lower Burma, the Buddhist pagoda is seldom found

in any other form than that of the solid bell-shaped structure,

representing (though with a difference) the topes of ancient India

and the Chaityas of Libet, and always supposed to cover a sacred

* Otherwise Laya-thooa. He fled to Ava, and appeared before the king de-

manding new troops. The king in a rage ordered him to be put to death. The

poor fellow was tortured out of life before he reached the place of execution.—

Judson’s Life, I, 295.

1857. | The Remains at Pagin. 7

relic. Images of Gautama are often attached to these, but do not

seem to be essential to them. The great Pagodas of Rangoon,

Prome, and Pegu are celebrated examples of this kind of edifice.

The type of the principal temples at Pagan is very different, and

they suit better our idea of what the word ¢emple implies. Remains

of this description but on a small scale, first attracted our attention

at Tantabeng, a place on the east bank of the Irawaddi some miles

above Yenangyoung.*

The buildings at Tantabengf were numerous, had an air of creat

antiquity, and were, as far as we examined them, on one general

plan. The body of the buildings was cubical in form, inclosing a

Gothic-vaulted Chamber. The entrance was by a projecting porch

to the east, and this porch had also a subsidiary door on its

north and south sides. There were also slightly projecting door-

places on the three other sides of the main building, sometimes

blank and sometimes real entrances. The plan of the building

was cruciform. Several terraces rose successively above the body

of the temple, and from the highest terrace rose a spire bearing a

strone general resemblance to that of the common temples of

Eastern India, being like the latter a tall pyramid with bulging

sides. The angles of this spire were marked as quoins, with deep

joints, and a little apex at the projecting angle of each, which gave

a peculiar serrated appearance to the outline when seen against the

sky. ‘These buildings were entirely of brick; the ornamental

mouldings still partially remained in plaster. The interior of each

temple contained an image of Gautama, or its remains. The walls

and vaults were plastered and had been highly decorated with

minute fresco painting.

Such is the substantial type of all the most important temples at

Pagan, though when the area of the ground-plan expands from 30

or 40 feet square to 200 or 300 feet square, the proportions and

details of the parts necessarily vary considerably.

* Mr. Oldham says that he saw a chambered pagoda as low down as Akouk-

toung (below Prome.) ‘There is a conspicuous one also at Thayet Myo. But they

are comparatively rare anywhere below the point named, and never, I think, of

the antique type here described.

+ These haye been photographed by Captain Tripe.

8 The Remains at Pagdn. { No. 1.

The Pagan ruins extend over a space about eight miles in length

along the river, and probably averaging two miles in breadth. The

present town of Pagan stands on the river side within the deeayed

ramparts of the ancient city, near the middle length of this

space.

This brick rampart and fragments of an ancient gateway shewing

almost obliterated traces of a highly architectural character, are the

only remains at Pagan which are not of a religious description. If

any tradition lingers round the site of the ancient palaces of the

kings, who reigned here for so many centuries, our party missed it.

Of the number of the temples at Pagan, I feel scarcely able to

form-any estimate, the few days which we spent there having been

chiefly devoted to a detailed examination of some of the most

important. But of all sizes I should not guess them at less than

eight hundred, or perhaps a thousand.

All kinds and forms are to be found among them; the bell-shaped

pyramid of dead brick-work in all its varieties; the same, raised

over a square or octagonal cell containing an image of the Buddha ;

the bluff knoblike dome of the Ceylon Dagobas, with the square

cap which seems to have characterized the most ancient Buddhist

Chaityas as represented in the sculptures at Sanchi, and in the

ancient model pagodas in the Asiatic Society’s Museum; the

fantastic Bo-phya or Pumpkin Pagoda, which seemed rather like

a fragment of what we might conceive the architecture of the moon,

than anything terrestrial; and many variations on these types.

But the predominant and characteristic form is that of the eruciform

vaulted temple, which we have described above.

Three at least of the great temples, and a few of the smaller ones

of this kind, have been from time to time repaired, and are still

more or less frequented by worshippers. But by far the greater

number have been abandoned to the owls and bats, and some have

been desecrated into cow-houses by the villagers.

In some respects the most remarkable of the great temples, and

that which is still the most frequented as a place of worship, is the

Ananda.

“This temple is said to have been builtin the reign of Kyan-yeet-

tha, about the time of the Norman conquest of England. Tradition

1857. ] The Remains at Pagan. 9

has it, that five Rahandahs, or Saints of an order second only toa

Buddha, arrived at Pagan from the Hema-winda or Himalayan

region. They stated that they lived in caves on the Nanda-mila

hill (probably the Nunda Devi Peak), and the king requested them

to give him a model of their abode, from which he might construct

a temple. The Rahandahs did as they were requested, and the temple

being built was called Wanda-tst gun or “ Caves of Nanda.” (PI. I.)

The term Ananda, by which the temple is now known, is a corrup-

tion, arising from the name of Ananda, the cousin and favourite

disciple of Gaudama, being so well known to the people. The

representation of a cave is a favourite style of building among the

Burmese for depositing images.* This is not wonderful among the

votaries of a religion which regards an ascetic life in the wilderness

as the highest state for mortals in this world.”’+

Major Phayre mentioned another probable origin of the name of

this temple, viz. from the Palee Ananta “the endiess;’ which

seems to be supported by the fact that another great temple close

at hand is called Thapinyu, “ The omniscient.’

To reach the Ananda we passed out through the principal eastern

gate of the ancient city. The remains of the defences form a

distinct mound and ditch, traceable in their entire circuit, and large

masses of the brick work still stand at intervals, but I saw none in

which any feature of the architecture, or portion of the battlements,

was distinguishable. The gate has some remains of architectural

design, and ornament of a rich character in plaster, with foliated

pilaster capitals and festcons; but these remnants have been

disfigured and obscured by the erection of two coarse modern

niches with figures of Warders. A few yards beyond the gate are

the square sandstone inscribed pillars mentioned by Mr. Crawfurd.

Their appearance is suggestive of great antiquity and interest.

But the expectation of the latter would probably be disappointed

by an interpretation. The character appeared to be square{ Bur-

* Several of the temples at Pagdn are named in this way; e. g. Shwé-ku,

The golden cave ;” Sembyo-ki, *‘ The white elephant cave,” &c.—H. Y.

+ Note by Major Phayre.

{I do not know whether it has been noticed that the circular form of the

ordinary Burmese character, as of the Ooria, the Tamul and several other South

10 The Remains at Pagan. Nosed.

mese of a very neat and uniform type, as indeed most of the

Burmese inscriptions are, and very much superior in execution to

what owr lapidary inscriptions were a century ago.

In the precincts of the Ananda we entered a large group of

monastic buildings, forming a street of some length. These in

beauty of detail and combination, were admirable. The wood

carving was rich and effective beyond description ; photography

only could do it justice.

Great fancy was displayed in the fantastic figures of warriors,

dancers, WVdts (spirits) and Bilis (ogres,) in high relief, that filled

the angles and nuclei of the sculptured surfaces. The fretted

pinnacles of the ridge ornaments were topped with birds cut in

profile, in every attitude of sleeping, pecking, stalking, or taking

wing. With the permission of a venerable and toothless poongyee we

looked into a chamber which was a perfect museum of quaint and

rich gilt carving, in small shrines, book chests, &c., not unlike the

omnium gatherum of a Chinese Josshouse. One chamber contain-

ed, among other things, a neat model of a wooden monastery with

its appropriate carving.

The most elaborate of these religious buildings is stated to have

been built only a few years ago by a man of Ye-nan-gyoung;

probably some millionnaire of the oil trade.*

In the same monastic street a brick building, in the external

form of a Kyoung, contains a corridor entirely covered with rude

paintings on the plaster. These are all, Major Phayre informs me,

representations of Jats or passages in the life of Gautama in various

periods of pre-existence. ‘The greater part of the scenes appeared

to depict the amusements and employments of ordinary life, such

as feasting, hunting, weaving, looking at plays, being shampooed,

and the like. The persons represented, like the marionnettes in

the puppet plays, were all exhibited with pure white complexions.

By a curious self-delusion, the Burmans would seem to claim that

Indian alphabets, is a necessary result of the practice of writing on palm leaves

with a style. Certain of the sacred books which are written in the square cha-

racter are inscribed with a black gum (the thit-see) used as ink,

* Photographed by Capt. Tripe,

ANANDA

4.0 Feet = an Inch.

Scalo

1857.] The Remains at Pagén. tf

in theory at least they are white people.* And what is still more

curious, the Bengalees appear indirectly to admit the claim; for our

servants in speaking of themselves and their countrymen, as dis-

tinguished from the Burmans, constantly made use of the term

‘Kalaé admi’—black man, as the representative of the Burmese

Kéld, a foreigner.

In one part of the series were some representations of punishment

in the Buddhist Hells. Demons were pictured beating out the

brains of the unhappy with clubs, or elephants trampling on them,

and in one place was a perfect picture of Prometheus; the victim

lying on the ground, whilst a monstrous unclean bird pecked at his

side.

From this monastic colony a wooden colonnade, covered with the

usual carved gables and tapering slender spires, led to the northern

doorway of the Ananda.

This remarkable building, with a general resemblance in charac-

ter to the other great temples, has some marked peculiarities and

felicities of its own. They all suggest, but this perhaps above them

all suggests, strange memories of the temples of Southern Catholic

Europe. The Ananda is in plan a square of nearly 200 feet to the

side, and broken on each side by the projection of large gabled vesti-

bules which convert the plan into a perfect Greek cross.f (Plate IT.)

These vestibules are somewhat lower than the square mass of the

building, which elevates itself to a height of 35 feet in two tiers of

windows. Above this rise six successively diminishing terraces

connected by curved converging roofs, the last terrace just affording

breadth for the spire which crowns and completes the edifice. The

lower half of this spire is the bulging mitre-like pyramid adapted

from the temples of India, such as I have described at Tantabeng:

the upper half is the same moulded taper pinnacle that terminates

the common bell-shaped pagodas of Pegu. The gilded tree caps the

* But so also thought some of the old travellers. Thus Vincent Leblanc says ;

“The people (of Pegu) are rather whites than blacks, and well shap’d.” I think

I have seen some brahmins fairer than any Burmans. But the average tint in

Burma is much lighter than in India. One never, I believe, sees a Burman to

whom the word black could be applied fairly,

+ See also Capt. Tripe’s photograph, No. ——.

c 2

12 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1.

whole at a height of one hundred and sixty-eight feet above the

ground.

The building internally consists of two concentric and lofty cor-

ridors, communicating by passages for light opposite the windows,

and by larger openings to the four porches. Opposite each of these

latter, and receding from the inner corridor towards the centre of

the building, is a cell or chamber for an idol. In each this idol is a

colossal standing figure upwards of 380 feet in height. They vary

slightly in size and gesture; but all are in attitudes of prayer,

preaching, or benediction. ach stands, facing the porch and

entrance, on a great carved lotus-like pedestal, within rails like the

chancel-rails of an English church. There are gates to each of these

chambers, noble frames of timber rising to a height of four and

twenty feet. The frame bars are nearly a foot in thickness, and

richly carved on the surface in undercut foliage; the pannels are

of lattice work, each intersection of the lattice marked with a gilt

rosette.

The lighting of these image chambers is perhaps the most singus

lar feature of the whole. The lofty vault, nearly 50 feet high, in

which stands the idol, canopied by a valance of gilt metal curiously

wrought, reaches up into the second terrace of the upper structure,

and a window pierced in this sends a light from far above the

spectator’s head, and from an unseen source, unon the head and

shoulders of the great gilded image. This unexpected ‘and partial

illumination in the dim recesses of these vaulted corridors, produces

avery powerful and strange effect, especially on the north side,

where the front light through the great doorway is entirely

subdued by the roofs of the covered approach from the monastic

establishments.*

These four great statues represent the four Buddhas who have

appeared in the present World: Period.

* “A similar artistic introduction of the light is mentioned by Mr. Fergusson

as characterising ‘the great rock-cut Basilicas of India.’” (Handbook of Arch. 1.

313.) May this not have been imitated in the Ananda, and may the fact not be

in some degree a confirmation of the legend, that caves were intended to be repre+

sented by these vaults ?

+ “ They are said to be composed of different materials as follows :

1857. | The Remains at Pagin. 13

The temple, like the other great temples here, is surrounded by

a square enclosure wall with a gate in each face. “That to the

north is the only one in repair. This was no doubt intended as

the principal entrance, and has the image of Gautama placed

there, but itis difficult to say why the western entrance was not

chosen for this distinction,* as it is directly in sight of the Tan-

Kyee hill and Pagoda, on the opposite site of the Irawadee, where

Gautama himself stood with his favourite disciple, Ananda, and

predicted the future building and greatness of the city of Pagan.

Perhaps the north was chosen as being the direction in which Gau-

’ tama walked after the moment of his birth.’’+

In the centre of the vestibule on the western side stands cut

in stone on an elevated and railed platform, a representation of

the impression of Gautama’s feet. In the galleries or corridors

running round the building, disposed in niches along the massive

walls, at regular distances apart, are numerous images of Gau-

tama, and sculptured groups of figures illustrating particular events

of his life. These have been covered over with a substance resem-

bling thitsee (black gum resin) and vermilion.t

“The image to the east is the Buddha Kankathan made of a sweet-scented

wood called Dan-tsa-goo. To the west is Ka-thaba, made of brass. To the north

Gautama, of Fir; to the south Ganno-goon of Jasmine-wood. Whatever the

original material of these images may have been, it appears now that the outer

coating of each is of plaster richly gilt over.” Major Phayre.

* Compare Cunningham’s Topes of Bhilsa, p.191. It there appears that at

No. 1 Tope at Sanchi, within the enclosure and immediately facing each entrance,

there is a large figure, once under a canopy. That to the east Major Cunningham

considers to be { KRAKUCHANDA, first mortal Buddha; that to the south

KANAKA; to the west KASYAPA; and to the north SAKYA SINHA”

(Gautama). Hence it would appear that the figures in the Ananda were not

placed arbitrarily, but according to orthodox Buddhistic tradition.—H. Y. .

+ Major Phayre.

t I extract the following detailed account of some of these curious groups

from Major Phayre’s notes. Lt. Heathcote, I. N. informs me that the number of

these sculptures is upwards of fifteen hundred.

“Several, indeed, most, of the images of Gautama in this temple have a different

physiognomy to those made by Burmese artists, and the Woondouk who accom-

panied me, asked if I did not notice a strong resemblance in the features to those

Buddhist images in the compound of the Asiatic Society at Calcutta, which have

14 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1.

The outer corridor is roofed with a continuous flying buttress,

or half pointed arch, abutting on the massive outer walls. The

inner corridor and cells are pointed vaults.

been brought from central India. There is undoubtedly a great similarity, so

that it is impossible not to conclude that these have been carved by Indian artists.

The following are the principal figures and groups illustrating events of Gautama’s

life. A recumbent female figure richly clad with large earrings, and pendent ears,

decked with numerous armlets from the wrist to the elbow; the figure and dress

are entirely in the Indian fashion. The hair of all the female figures in these

groups is bound up sideways in the form of a cornucopia, and in a fashion, cer-

tainly not Burmese. This is said to be the Princess Ya-thau-da-ya,* the wife of

Prince-Theiddat,+ i. e. Gautama, before he left his father’s kingdom and became

a hermit. The four predictive signs displayed to the Prince, and which, convinc-

ing him of the vanity of all earthly things, determined him to leave his father’s

palace and go forth to the wilderness, are here displayed in separate groups. ‘The

Prince, from his chariot, sees the decrepid man, the diseased, the dead and de-

eayed, and finally the Priest ordained. He chooses the latter state as the only

refuge from the ills of mortality. In another sculpture is represented a stately

female with her left arm round the neck of another, and both standing beneath a

tree. This is the figure of Gautama’s mother called Amay-dau-ma-ya,{ beneath

the Engyeen tree (Shorea robusta), when giving birth to her son while on a jour-

ney. She leans on the neck of her younger sister Gau-da-mee. A female atten-

dant is near at hand. On the right of the mother is seen the infant, as if just

born, but displaying his inherent glory, while three other minute figures of him

denote his being received by the three higher orders of beings, Byahmas, Nats and

men, the latter being lowest and receiving him on earth. This scene is repeated

four times in the temple with some small variations, ;

It would be tedious to recount in detail the whole of these interesting sculp-.

tures; but I will mention that they include Prince Theiddat} in his palace sur-

rounded by musicians and attendants, but dissatisfied with worldly splendour ;

then they show him taking a last look at his sleeping wife and child, before going

forth to the wilderness; mounting his horse, and leaving, despite of all opposi-

tion ; stringing a famous bow before the Court of his maternal uncle Thoopa-

bood-da,§ the King of De-wa-da-ha, who then bestowed on him in marriage his

daughter Ya-thau-daya.

All these and many others, the subjects of which, I did not recognize, but which

evidently relate to events in the life of Gautama, have no doubt been chiseled by

Indian artists at an early period.

* Yasodhara. + Siddhartha.

{ Maha Maya. § Supra-Budha.

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 15

One of the peculiar features of the Ananda is the curved slope

given to the roofs both of the porches and of the main building,

as if preserving the extrados of the arch which lies beneath. In

all the other temples the roofs are flat. This, with the massive

gables which are thus formed at the ends of the porches, and the

great scrolls, if we may call them so, at the wings of these gables,

probably go far in producing that association with the churches

of southern Europe to which I have alluded.*. Still these scrolls

are perfectly Burman, and seem identical with the horn-like orna-

ments which are so characteristic of the Burman timber buildings.

Here they are backed (another unique circumstance) by lions

rising gradatim along each limb of the gable or pediment. The

windows also of the main building, standing out from the wall

surface with their effective mouldings, pilasters, and canopies, recall

the views of some of the great Peninsular monasteries.

But not the exterior only was redolent of kindred suggestions.

The impression on us, (I speak of Major Allan, Mr. Oldham, and

myself,) as we again and again paced the dim and lofty corridors

of the Ananda, was that of traversing some sombre and gigantic

pile appropriated to the cabals and tortures of the Inquisition.

No architecture could better suit such uses. And in the evening,

as I sat in the western vestibule sketching the colossal idol before

me, the chaunted prayers of the worshippers before the northern

cell boomed along the aisles in strange resemblance to the chaunt

of the priests in a Roman Catholic cathedral.

Of the details of architecture I shall speak below, but before

proceeding to describe any of the other temples, it may be well

to notice the material of which they are built. This, I believe to

I should have mentioned that on the outside of the building, and about three

feet above the ground, glazed tiles are set closely all round it, having rude figures

of monsters on them, some riding camels and other animals unknown in Burmah.

These have Pali inscriptions on them, intimating that the figures represent the sol-

diers of the evil spirit, who sought to alarm Gautama from his resolution of be-

coming an ascetic and attaining Buddhahood.

* Compare the elevation of the entrance to one of the vestibules of the Ananda

with that very common facade of Italian churches. The analogy in the com-

position is, I think, very striking. The R.C. Church at Agra has a facade of this

type.

16 The Remains at Pagan. [INo-nk.

be in every case the same, viz. what we call in India kucha pukka

work, that is to say, brick cemented with mud only. Mr. Crawfurd

supposed the temples to be of brick and lime mortar. But 1

satisfied myself that this is not the case, and that the penetration

of the plaster, which had been applied to the walls and corridors,

into some of the joints had misled him.* We are not indeed ac-

customed in India to conceive of kucha pukka edifices two hundred

feet in height. Of these it is to be said that they are so massive

as to be practically almost solid; so that the vaults and corridors

rather resemble excavations in the mass than structural interiors.

It is also to be said, however, that they are built with a care and

elaboration which I never saw bestowed ona kucha pukka structure

in India, and which the Burmans of the present day seem remotely

incapable of in brickwork of any kind. On the outside at least,

in the better buildings, every brick has been cut and rubbed to

fit with such nicety that it is difficult, and sometimes not possible,

to insert the blade of a knife between the joints. The arches

and semi-arches are carefully formed of bricks moulded in the

radiating form of voussoirs. The peculiarity of these arches is

that in general the bricks are laid edge to edge in the curve of the

arch, instead of being laid parallel with its axis as among other

nations. The exterior archfaces of the smaller doors and windows

are, however, laid in the European way, with the bricks cheek to

cheek. .

The bricks are usually about 14 inches by 7, (I here speak

from memory,) and well moulded, but they are not very well burnt.

Such being the substance of the structure, all the ornamental

finish is consequently executed in the plaster, which, even without

view to ornament, would have been essential to the preservation

of the buildings.

Where the plaster has been kept in repair, the buildings remain

apparently perfect. Where the original plaster has decayed, and

has not been renewed, the temples are in ruins. But it is in the

latter only that we can learn to do justice to the spirit of art that

* Mr. Oldham notes his impression that the Bauddhi temple is built with lime

mortar.

1857. | "The Remains at Pagén. 17

adorned these monuments. The renewals and repairs have been

executed by barbarous and tasteless hands. Of this I shall speak

more fully by and bye.

The second great temple of Pagan is the Zhapinyu—“ the Omnis-

cient,”

It is stated to have been built in the reign of A-loung-tsee-chyoo

Men, grandson of the king who erected the Ananda, about the year

of our era 1100.*

It stands within the ancient walls, some five hundred yards to the

south-west of the Ananda, and its taper spire, rising to a height of

two hundred and one feet from the ground, overtops all the other

monuments.

Its general plan is not unlike that of the Ananda, but it does

not, like the latter, form a symmetrical cross. The eastern porch

alone projects considerably from the wall. The body of the building

forms a massive square of more than one hundred and eighty feet

to the side.

The characteristic of the Thapinyu is the great elevation of the

mass before considerable diminution of spread takes place, and the

position of the principal shrine high above the ground.

We have first a spacious two-storied basement like that of the

Ananda, then two receding terraces. But here the usual gradation

is interrupted. The third terrace, instead of rising a few feet only

like the others, starts at one leap aloft to a height of some fifty feet

in a truly massive and stupendous cubical donjon, crowned again

at top by a renewal of the pyramidal gradation of terraces, and by

the inevitable culminating spire.

Within this donjon, in a lofty vaulted hall opening by pointed

gateways to the east, north and south, and directly under the apex

of the spire, sits the great image of the shrine. This is, with one

exception, the only instance I have seen in these temples, in which

* The dates given are those traditionally ascribed to the temples, and are the

same with those already given by Crawfurd. Major Phayre considers the inscrip-

tions at Pagan, so far as he had time to examine them, to confirm these dates,

very reraarkable as they are under the circumstances.

18 The Remains at Pagan. [ No. 1.

the core of the building beneath the central spire had been hollowed

into a chamber.

The principal shrine of the temple being thus in the lofty upper

tower, the basement contains little of interest in the interior

arrangements. There is on the ground level but one corridor, with

images in the halls opposite the north, south, and west doorways.

The main, or eastern, doorway is faced by a staircase leading to the

upper terraces, but first to a curious mezzanine or entresol, forming

a double corridor, running round the basement story at the level

of the second tier of windows. ‘This also is a peculiarity of the

Thapinyu.

The Gauda-palen is the third and last of the greater temples

which have been kept in repair. (PI. III.) It dates from the reign

of Na-ra-pa-ti-tsi-thu, about A. D. 1160.

Crawfurd explains the name as signifying, “the throne of Gauda’’

—a Nat or spirit. Major Phayre, though unable to obtain a

satisfactory solution of the name, expresses strong disbelief that a

Buddhist temple could be named after a Nat.

Though of great size, and rising to a height of 180 feet, this

temple covers a considerably less area than the two already describ-

ed. It is within the city walls, and stands on lower ground than

they do; but being nearer the river it is very conspicuous in

approaching Pagdn from the southward. Gleaming in its white

plaster with numerous pinnacles and tall central spire, we had seen

it from far down the Irawadi, rising like a dim vision of Milan

eathedral. This enchantment it lost of course on nearer approach,

though still strongly suggestive of south-European church architec-

ture, more so perhaps than any other of these buildings except the

Ananda. It is cruciform in plan, and stands ona low parapetted

terrace irregularly following the outline.

lt is more compact and elevated in proportion to its bulk than

the two former buildings, but resembles them in general character,

exhibiting a massive basement with porches, and rising above in a

pyramidal gradation of terraces, crowned by a spire and héee. The

latter has broken from its stays at one side, and now leans over

almost horizontally, having torn with it the acorn of brick-work

which caps the spire, and threatening speedy downfall.

N.E VIEW of GAUDA-PALEN TEMPLE.

Photographed fron a Drawing by CAPTAIN H.YULE.

Titles By HM vimith, Sure, ral’ Office, (atari, How 1857

wi.) ~~, [

nian! wel a Se jee” Ki a of eo

cen % CP ght v1, {

vio: 4 ;

¥ ‘ ae ; a - . 7) ej + ;

' Tas igi e\ ey " “4

‘ Lae £

* " ’ j r

se & 4

hye 4,

r 5 ;

¢ Woe =;

i i . bis

5 a

‘

a \

as .

\ , ‘

ry y

n fl

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 19

From the last terrace, below the spire, we had a noble prospect of °

the vast field of ruined temples stretching north, east, and south,

and Mr. Grant devoted many laborious hours to sketching this

panorama.

All these three buildings have been kept in repair, and “ beauti-

fied’? in some churchwarden spirit, more to their loss than gain.

One other important temple within the city walls has also been

kept in repair. Its date is given by Mr. Crawfurd as about the

year 1200. ‘This is the Batddhi* described and delineated by him.

It is different in style from the other temples and very inferior in

size, majesty, and art. The basement is a quadrangular block of

no great height, supporting a tall spire strongly resembling that

of the ordinary Hindu shiwala, and still more strongly the sikra

of the Jain temples near the river Barakar, and of some of the

ancient Hindu temples delineated by Mr. Fergusson, such as

those at Bhubaneswar in Orissa and that at Barolli in Rajputana.

The latter, in general effect, has a considerable resemblance to the

Bauiddhi as seen from a distance.t Both base and spire are covered

with niches, bearing seated Gautamas, and interspersed with orna-

mental pannels and mouldings. This gives the building a very

rich appearance at a little distance, but, closely viewed, the exe-

eution is execrably rough and inaccurate, and there is an absence

of the whole spirit of art visible in. what I must call the greater

and purer works.

In these there is an actual sublimity of architectural effect, which

excites wonder, almost awe,and takes hold ef the imagination jn a

manner that renders apology for them as “ Burmese,” absurdly

out of place.f There is no such spell in Batddhi, which only re-

ealls the Hindu temple, of which a thousand specimens infinitely

superior in material and workmanship are to be seen at Benares

* Baiddhi signifies the Banian tree.

tT See Fergusson’s Axcient Architecture of Hindustan, Pl. VII., and Capt.

Tripe’s Photograph, No. —

t “We were all struck with awe” says Mr. Oldham, in his Journal “at the

littleness of our individual might in the presence of such evidence of combined

power and exertion.”

20 The Remains at Pagan. [Nowd.

and Mirzapur, to say nothing of the older and finer works in other

parts of India, of which I have scarcely any personal knowledge.

Omitting further consideration of the last named building, the

architectural elements of which the great temples are composed,

and hundreds of smaller ones in the same style, are nearly the

same in all, though combined in considerable variety.

The pointed arch is found in all, and is almost universally the

form of the doorways. It is, universally, enclosed in a framework,

or facade, exhibiting an arch dressing of a triangular or almost

parabolic shape, drooping in cusps of a characteristic form, and sur-

mounted by a sort of pediment of graduated flame-like spires and

horns of avery peculiar character. This cusped arch and these

flamboyant spires and horns are, in a modified form, part of the

style of ornament universal in the elaborate timber monasteries

of Burma. The style seemed to me more natural in the latter

material, and I felt more inclined to believe that the masonry or-

namentation had been, (as in so many other climates,) adapted

from that of timber, than the architecture of the temples modified

to suit the timber structures. This opinion has changed since my

return to Calcutta, and access to drawings has enabled me to trace

the prototype of this flamboyant ornament in the temples of Southern

India. Whether again this pattern did not originate in a preceding

timber model is too remote a question. Even in the cave temples

of Western India, Mr. Fergusson traces distinctly the limitation of.

timber construction.

In the greater doorways, this cusped arch face and pediment is

generally supported at each side by a semi-arch and semi-pediment

of like charcter, at a lower level.

All these arches and semi-arches rest on regular pilasters with base,

eapital, and cornice, the singular resemblance of which, both in

general character and in many of the details of mouldings, to the

pilasters of Koman architecture is startling, perplexing, and unac-

countable to me by any theory I have yet heard propounded, if

anything like the true date has been assigned to these buildings.

The following extracts from Mr. Oldham’s journal well express

the feeling with which several members of the mission involuntarily

viewed these structures with reference to their origin.

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. ps '

“So strongly unlike all other Burman buildings, can these have

ewed their origin to the skill of a western Christian or Missionary,

who may have adopted largely the ornamentation of the Burmese,

and ingrafted much of their detail and their arrangements on his

own idea of atemple? May not the true cross-like plan of the

Ananda be thus symbolical, and may he not, in the long-trusting

hope of a zealous worshipper of Christ, have looked forward to the

time when this noble pile might be turned from the worship of an

unknown God to the service of the Most High.” “I can’t think

any Burman ever designed or planned such buildings. They are

opposed to the general plan of their construction. The Shwe Koo

fone of the minor temples] might possibly be the work of Burman

mind, but I fancy not the others; or, if they did design them, the

Burmans of those days were very different from the Burmans of

the present day.”

Such an impression, I know, was almost irresistible at times when

on the spot. But, without going much into argument on the sub-

ject, I cannot think it probably founded in truth. There is not,

I believe, reason to believe that any missionaries, or Europeans

of any kind, found their way to these trans-gangetic regions in

the days when these temples were founded.* If there had been

* At the suggestion of a friend I annex an abstract of the chronology of

Burmese intercourse with the west. However imperfect, this abstract, which has

been compiled with considerable labour, will be, I trust, interesting, indepen-

dently of the question of the origin of these temples.

Ptolemy is, I believe, the only ancient geographer who gives any particulars of

these countries. He quotes his predecessor Marinus of Tyre (who lived about

A. D. 100) as referring to the log of one Alexander, who had voyaged along

these shores as far as Thinae and Cattigara, Great difference of opinion has ex-

isted as to the identification of these and the hitherward localities which he names.

Some, considering that the Aurea Chersonesus, which was passed in reaching the two

places above mentioned, can only answer to the Peninsula of Malacca, have carried

their locality as far eastward as the southern extremity of Camboja. But Gos-

selin* has shewn a strong reason to believe that the Aurea Chersonesus really

represents the protuberant Delta of the Irawadee, and that Thinae is rather to be

* Recherches sur la Geographie des anciens, Pav P. F, J. Gosselin. Paris,

1813. Vol. Lil.

22 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1.

communication we must go further back for it. And the points

of resemblance are rather to Roman architecture, properly so called,

identified with Tenasserim. There are abundant difficulties in the way of either

interpretation.

It is an interesting subject, but a great deal more learning and leisure than I

possess would be required to discuss it properly. Two arguments, however, may

be mentioned which appear strongly to favour Gosselin’s theory. Ptolemy de-

scribes the various rivers of the Chersonesus as mutually communicating, a cir-

cumstance which could not apply to the Malay Peninsula, but which applies

excellently to the waters of the Delta. These rivers, whose embouchures he names

Chrysoana, Palanda and Attabas, would therefore be three of the principal outlets

of the Irawadee. Again, immediately westward of the Chersonesus he places the

Sinus Sabaricus, and in this gulph the mouths of the river Besynga. Now, a

little below, in his sketch of the hydrography of India beyond the Ganges, the

Geographer says distinctly; ‘From the range of Meandrus flow down all the

rivers beyond Ganges, wntil you come to the river Besynga.” This remark seems

infallibly to identify Mons Meandrus with the Aracan Yomadoung and the river

Besynga with the Bassein branch of the Irawadee.

The Rey. Mr. Mason in his valuable book, “ The Natural Productions of Bur-

ma,’* following the more common arrangement of maps of ancient geography,

which makes the Sinus Sabaricus represent the Gulph of Martaban, traces Be-

synga in the Solwen, called by the Talaings Be-khung. But it may be suggested

that Bathein-khyoung (river of Bassein, in Burmese) affords at least as strong a

resemblance. And it is curious that this very gulph of Negrais, which we take

to be the Sinus Sabaricus, is called by several of the old travellers “the Sea

of Bara.”"f

Where the data are so vague, attempts at the identification of names are rather

amusing than profitable. But afew may be mentioned. Sada suits in locality

as well as name with Sandoway, which is mentioned at a very early period of

Burmese history.t Zabai has been identified by Gosselin with Tavoy. In

Ptolemy’s list of inland cities to the north of the Chersonesus occurs the name

of Mareura metropolis. The identity of this has been suggested§ with the ancient

city of Mauroya, which, as Col. Burney tells us from the Burman histories, pre-

* Published at Maulmain 1856. See under the head of Ethnology, p. 427.

+ Vide Cesar Frederick in Purchas, IJ. 1717 and Gasparo Balbi, id. p. 1724.

At the same time, be it said, I feel some misgiving that this Bara may be only

the Bar of Negrais. In Wood’s map, at the beginning of Syme’s Narrative, one of

the mouths of the Irawadee is called Barago, and I believe Barago Point is still the

name given by mariners to the extreme point of the delta.

t See Col. Burney in J. A. 8S. B. V. 163.

§ By Col. Hannay in his Sketch of the Singphos, 1847, p. 32, and by Mr.

Mason, I. p. 440.

1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 23

than to anything of later date, so far as I know, before the fif-

teenth century. And even this Roman character is so mixed up

ceded Tagoung as the seat of the Sakya kings. Mauroya is now known as

Mueyen, a town not far south from Bam6.

In Tugma metropolis, an inland city of the Aurea Regio, we have perhaps the

venerable city of Tagoung; in Tharra, an inland city of the Chersonesus, Thara-

wadee, or perhaps Thare-khettara, the ancient name of Prome; Satyrorwn Pro-

montorium we might be tempted to find in the point of Bili-gyoon or Ogre’s

Island, off Maulmain. At the northern confines of Mons Meandrus, Ptolemy,

true to this day, places the Nanga loge or Naga Lég, which he defines as truly to

mean ‘the Naked Folk.’ Eastward towards the Sine are the Kakobe, whom

Col. Hannay* finds in the Ka-khyens called by themselves Kakoos ; and near the

shores of the Magnus Sinus we find the Kadope or Kadote who may be the

Karens, called in the Talaing language, according to F’. Buchanan, Kadoon. Be-

yond them we get among tribes of Pirates, who are said to have skin like that of

a hippopotamus, not penetrable by arrows ; so we may decline to follow Ptolemy

any further. It may be noted that though the geographer characterises several

tribes in these parts as Anthropophagi, he affixes “ Emporium” to the names of

various places on the coast, which seems to indicate civilization and foreign trade.

Why these lands should have been termed the lands of silver and gold (Argen-

tea Regio, Aurea Regio, Chersonesus Aurea) may appear obscure, as they are not

now remarkably productive of those metals. There are, however, gold-washings

on a small scale in many of the rivulets both of Pegu and of the valley of the

upper Irawadee and of the Kyendwen, which may have been more productive in

ancient times. And the Argentea Regio may probably (as suggested by Col.

Hannay7) have been the territory including the Bau-Dwen, or great silver mine

on the Chinese frontier, which is believed to supply a large part of the currency

of Burma. Indeed Aurea Regio may be only a translation of the name Sona-

paranta, which is the classic or sacred appellation of the central region of Burma

between the Irawadee and the Kyendwen, always used to this day in the enu-

meration of the king’s titles. These regions may moreover have been the channels

by which the precious metals were brought from China, and the mountains near

the sources of the Irawadee which are said to be very productive of gold, and

possibly even at that remote period the profuse use of gilding in edifices may have

characterised the people, as it does now.

it seems, however, most probable that this practice was introduced with Bud-

dhism.t Yet even at the period of the first Buddhistic mission to this region,

* As above p. 2. + Ditto.

t The elaborate gilding of chapels and monastic cells in India and central

Asia is mentioned by Fahian, the Chinese pilgrim in the fifth century. (See

Laidlay’s translation, p. 18, &c.)

24 The Remains at Pagan. (iNest.

and blended with other touches and details so utterly un-Roman

and original, that one cannot conceive so spirited and effective a

fusion to have been produced by any chance Huropean aid.

at the conclusion of the third great synod, B. C. 241, it was known in India as

* Suvarna Bhuini’ the Golden Land.*

According to Mr. Mason, the ancient capital of the Talaings (of the Toungthoos

according to the tradition of the latter) was Thadung, or Satung, a city whose

traces still exist between the mouths of the Salwen and the Sitang. Suvanna-

bumme, he adds, but unfortunately stating no authority, is still the classic Pali

name of Satung.+}

In the beginning of the fifth century, Buddhaghosa, a Bramin of Magadha, visit-

ed Ceylon and there revised the Buddhist scriptures and re-translated them into

Pali. He carried his version with him to Pegu, and there made it known. In

A. D. 1171, a mission was sent from Burma to Ceylon, and ten years subse-

quently five men deeply versed in the Burmese scriptures came from Ceylon to

Pagan. One of the number is said to have been a Cambojan, and another a

Cingalese.t

The intercourse with Ceylon appears to have continued more or less till a late

period. It was not always an intercourse of merely a religious character. In one

instance, more particularly referred to at page 55 of the text, we find a king of

Ceylon carrying a hostile armament against the Burman countries (A. D. 11538) ;§

and in another we find ‘ Brama, king of Pegu,’ as he was called by the Portuguese,

sending to solicit the daughter of a king of Ceylon in marriage (about 1566.)||

It is scarcely possible that any intercourse should go on at the present day, if

we may judge by the surprise and incredulity of the Burmese courtiers when told

by Major Phayre that the sacred island of Lankadwipa also belonged to the

English. The last remarkable instance of intercommunication between Ceylon :

and Burma, of which, I am aware, occurred towards the end of the last century,

* “Sono and Uttaro were deputed to Suvarna Bhumi or Golden Land. As

this country was on the sea-coast, it may be identified either with Ava, the Aurea

Regio, or with Siam the Aurea Chersonesus, 6,000,000 of people are said to have

been converted, of whom 25,000 men became monks, and 1500 women became

nuns.’ Quoted from the Mahawanso by Major Cunningham in his Bhilsa Topes,

. 118.

+ Mason, as above p. 427. He also says that Maubee in the delta of the Ira-

wadee was called Suvanna nadee, River of gold. Sobana emporium and Sobanas

occur as the names of a town and river in Ptolemy’s list. And Chrysoanas, his name

for one of the rivers of the delta, looks like a translation of the same.

{ Mason—p. 453.

§ It is curious that in the reign of the preceding monarch of Burma, Alountsee-

thoo, it is said in the chronicles that “ the governors of Bassein, of other districts

in the Talaing country, the Kala governor of the island of Ceylon, and he of

Tenasserim, haying rebelled, were put down, and their countries taken possession

of.” (Mason, as above.)

|| Hist. of the discovery and conquest of India by the Portuguese, London, 1695.

1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 25

To return to details. The angles of all the chief buildings are

when the maintenance of caste-distinctions among the priesthood by the kings of

Candy, provoked the low-caste monks to organize an expedition to the orthodox

Buddhists of Burma, with a view to the restoration of equal rights.

That religious visits were made during the middle ages of the Burmese coun-

tries to the sacred spots of Buddhism in India, is proved by an inscription in

Burmese at Buddha-Gaya, discovered by the Burmese envoys who were sent to

Lord W, Bentinck in 1831-33. Some doubt attaches to the reading of the date

and the determination of the king whose repair of the temple it commemorates.

Burney ascribed it to the reign of Aloungtsee-thoo, A, D. 1109.

There is no mention of Pegu, by the Mahomedans of the 9th century, whose

travels were published by the Abbé Renaudot and are given in Pinkerton’s and

various other collections, nor so far as I can learn by any Western traveller till

the time of Marco Polo.

Indeed, the first opening for Christian travellers into Asia was in quite another

direction, and much further to the North. Monks of Italy, France and Flanders

jostled each other at the court of Kara Korum; and Mongol ambassadors found

their way to Paris and Northampton,* when as yet all that Europe knew of India

was derived from Strabo and Arrian.

It is probably Pagan which Marco Polo speaks of under the name of Mien, “a

great and noble city, the head of the kingdom.” Mien is said by Col. Burney to

be the Chinese name of Burma.¢ But Marco does not speak as if he had himself

been in the country, and there is only one unmistakeably Burmese feature in his

story. This is in the description of two towers in pyramid fashion which a cer-

tain king caused to be built near his sepulchre ; “ upon the top, round about the

balls” he says, “‘ many little gold and silver bells were hanged, which at the blow-

ing of the wind give a certain sound.” The date of the expedition which Marco

Polo relates is between A. D. 1272 and 1290.

In 1444, Nicolo di Conti,{ a Venetian, returned from five and twenty years’ tra-

velling in the Kast. He visited Racha (Aracan) on a river of the same name, and

thence “after seventeen days passing desert hills, came into a champaign coun-

try.” He must therefore have gone over the Aeng pass, or some other pass of the

Aracan Yoma. He speaks of the river of Ava, as greater than the Ganges; the

city of Ava, as fifteen miles in circuit, &c., the kingdom itself he calls Macin

* Rémusat, Mémoire sur les Relations Politiques des Princes Chrétiens, &c.

avec les Emperewrs Mongols, 1824, p. 154.

+ J. A. 8. B. IV. 400. Dr. Buchanan says that the Chinese of Yunan call

the Burmese Law meen, As. Res, V. 223. In DuHalde’s Maps, a distinction is made

between the kingdoms of Yaowa and Mien.

f Ramusio, I. 340, The narrative is very imperfect, which is to be regretted,

as it bears the stamp of honesty. A few additional particulars are given in Pur-

chas, IL, 159, from another version of di Conti’s travels,

26 The Remains at Pagan. [ No. 1.

formed into pilasters such as we have spoken of supporting a regu-

(Maha-chin doubtless, a name often applied in India to the little known Eastern

kingdoms indiscriminately). He is the first traveller, I believe, who mentions the

white elephant, and the name of Ava, which has not existed a century.* He

speaks also of the Burmese fashion of tattooing the body, as common both with

men and women. The latter do not now practise it, though among their Khyen

neighbours it is almost confined to the women.

Di Conti makes the singular statement that the people in their daily prayer said,

“God in Trinity keep us in his Law.” This, which at first sight looks like fic-

tion, is really an evidence of his veracity. He had doubtless heard of “the three

precious ones,” the triad of Buddha, Dharma, and Sanga, the Buddha, the Law,

and the Clergy; (see note by Rémusat in Pilgrimage of Fa-hian, Cal. 1848,

p- 42).+

In 1496, Pegu was visited by Hieronymo da Santo Stephano, a Genoese, who

is, I believe, the first Kuropean by whom Pegu is distinctly mentioned. He speaks

of it as a great city ruled by a “ Gran Signore” who possessed 10,000 elephants.

He was prevented from visitmg Ava by war between the two nations.{

About the same time or a little later, we find at Pegu another traveller, Lo-

dovico Barthema of Bologna. He gives few interesting particulars, but mentions

creat canes” (bamboos) “as large as a barrel,” and like all the travellers to these

parts, speaks much of the rubies, the original locality of which they all assign to

a city, or mountainous region called Capelan, beyond Ava. He also speaks of

Pegu and Ava as at war.§

With the extension of Huropean discovery in the beginning of the 16th century,

European traders and Portuguese adventurers began to haunt the coasts of Pegu.

The first Portuguese traveller known to us is Ruy Nunez d’Acunha, who was sent

thither by Alphonso d’ Albuquerque in 1511.||

* He is also the first traveller who mentions a strange, obscene, and barbarous

custom, which is spoken of so repeatedly by all travellers during the next 200

years, that it seems impossible to doubt its having existed, though I believe there

is not now the slightest trace of it; unless the practice be so, which some of the

Burmese warriors are said to retain, of inserting a piece of metal under the flesh

to make themselves invulnerable. Some old travellers ascribe to the Siamese

and Shans as well as the Burmese, the custom alluded to, The prevalence of

such a custom seems a strong corroboration of the idea expressed by Ritter (rd-

kunde V.171,) that the Burmans have not long emerged from barbarism. There

is a deep element of barbarism in the Burman character, but looking to Pagan

and other evidences, it may be doubted whether their civilization, such as it is,

was not fully greater eight centuries ago, than one century ago. The modified

practice referred to above is witnessed to by Mr. Howard Malcom, who was al-

lowed by one of the Christian converts at Ava to take several amulets of gold

from under the skin of his arm. (I. 307.)

+ In the letter which the king of Ava wrote to the Governor General in 1830,

His Majesty speaks of his “ observing the three objects of worship, namely, God,

his precepts, and his attendant or priests,’ (Buddha, Dharma and Sanga.)

t Ramusio Navigatiom et Viaggi, Venetia MDLXIII. I. p. 345.

§ Ditto Ditto, p. 165. || Purchas, II, 1681.

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 27

lar and bold cornice, and resting on a regular and varied series of

The travels of Odoardo Barbosa to this coast about 1520 are given in Ramu-

sio’s collection. He speaks of “ Verna” as a distinct kingdom from Ava, as many

later travellers do. Apparently Toungoo is meant.*

About the same time Antony Correa was sent by the Portuguese to negotiate

a treaty with the King of Pegu.t}

The celebrated Ferdinand Mendez Pinto was in these countries as a military

adventurer in 1545, and professes to have been present at the sieges of Martaban

and Prome. His relations are full of extravagant statements, and a great deal

of his geography is probably absolute invention. Still it is evident that he was

in the country. Among names still easily recognizable which he mentions, are

Dalaa (Dalla near the coast of the Delta), Digon (Dagon, 7. e. Rangoon), the

Province of Danaplu (Danobyu), Anseda (Henzada), and Meletay (Meaday).

The last he correctly describes as a fortress twelve leagues up the river from

Prome.t

Many of the old maps depict a certain ‘‘ Lake of Chimay” somewhere in the far

interior of the Indo-Chinese countries, whence issue all the great rivers of Eastern

India. But Ferdinand Mendez is probably the only traveller who declares he

had seen it. He gives it, however, a different name.

During the constant wars that went on between Siam, Pegu, Toungoo, Ava,

and Arracan, during this century, some Portuguese partisans appear generally to

have been found on either side. Thus in 1544, when Martaban was besieged by

“Parad, Mandara (as he is called by the Portuguese writers) || king of the Burmas”

(i. e. of Toungoo),{] we find among his force some galleys manned by Portuguese

under John Cayero, and five years later when the same prince invaded Siam and

attacked the capital, he had with him 180 Portuguese under James Surez de Melo,

whilst the king of Siam in his besieged city of Odio* had 50 Portuguese under

James Pereyra.f

Some years later when this conquering king of the Burmas had been murdered

* Ramusio, p. 316. + Modern Universal History, VI. 162.

t Elsewhere he speaks of the kingdom of Meletay, which other travellers have

reproduced as a kingdom of Melntay. It is curious that Malanda is one of

Ptolemy’s names for an inland city in this region.

§ Such a notion seems to have been generally diffused, probably from India

with the Buddhist legends. Doubtless it originated in the fact of the rise of the

Indus, the Sutlej, the Ganges, and the Tsanpoo within a space of little more than

two square degrees from that great world-water-shed on which lake Mansarowar

lies.

|| Probably Men-tara-gyee Phra, a common appellation of Burmese monarchs,

"| According to the history consulted by Sangermano, the kingdom of Toungoo

was founded by a Prince of Pagan in 1252. The conqueror, Paraé Mandara,

whom Sangermano calls Mentrasvedi, was the thirtieth prince of the line.

* Odia or Yuthia, the former capital of Siam, above Bankok.

+ History of the Discovery and Conquest of India by the Portuguese. London,

1695. IL. 134-8.

E 2

28 The Remains at Pagdn. [No. 1.

basement mouldings which run ali round the building.

by the “‘Shemin of Satan,” (Sitang or perhaps Thadung), and the latter contested

the throne with a member of the old royal house of Pegu, whom the Portuguese

call Shemindoo, he was killed before Pegu by the fortunate shot from the musket

of Gonzalo Neto. But in 1552 a second prince of Toungoo again got possession

of Pegu. This is the king called by the old writers Aleagar, or “ Brama king of

Peeu,’* who extended his conquests over Ava, Mogoung, Jangomai (Zimmé), the

west of Yunan, and other adjoining states, and the wealth and splendour of whose

court made Pegu so famous in Europe as an empire of fabulous magnificence.

Casper de Cruz, a Dominican, appears to have been to the East between 1550

and 1560. He speaks of the “ Brames” as “‘a great people, very rich of gold and

precious stones; chiefly of rubies; a proud and valiant nation. The country

very scarce of victuals. They wear their clothes painted or wrought. They are

somewhat like the Chinas in their faces; they have very rich gallant shippings

garnished with gold, in which they sail in the rivers; they use vessels of gold

and of silver; their houses are of timber very well wrought. ‘The kingdom is

very great. They have not commonly war with the Chinas, because of the great

mountains that are between the one and the other, and because the Chinas are

well fortified on that side,’ + &c. All which is very accurate.

In 1557, Bomferrus a Dominican missionary returned from Pegu. He had

spent three years in learning their language and mysteries, that he might preach

among them, “ but was soon forced to give over and return into India; for they

could not endure to hear any better knowledge than they had.”t This mission-

ary appears to have given a tolerable account of Buddhism as it exists in these

countries.

In 1569, Ceesar Frederick, a Venetian merchant, was in Pegu, and gave a very

interesting account of that country. That same “‘ Brama of Toungoo” was on the

throne, who was said to have twenty and six crowned heads at his command, and

to be able to bring into the field a million and a half of men of war!§ “ For

people, dominions, gold and silver” Mr. Frederick hesitates not to say, “he far

excels the power of the Great Turk, in treasure and strength.”

These expressions seem utterly preposterous, when we see what Pegu and Bur-

ma are in our day. All the old travellers use similar superlative terms in speak-

* His name in Burmese history is Tshen-byu-mya-yen “ Lord of many white

elephants.” He is the personage called by Pinto, “The Chaumigrem.” “ He

was born on a Wednesday” says the chronicle, ‘‘ and on the day of his death the

great Pagoda fell into ruins, an inundation covered the whole city, and a shower

of rubies fell from heaven.” (Sangermano, p. 45.)

+ In Purchas, III. p. 169.

t Purchas, V. p. 507. This Friar according to Sir Thomas Herbert, “ came

home professing that he had rather with St, Anthony preach among pigs than

among such a swinish generation.” Herbert's Travels, p. 359.

§ That is, more than twice the whole population of the British province of

Pegu in 1856,

1857.] The Remains at Pagan. 29

These cornices and basements are, in almost all the buildings,

ing of the Peguan monarchy at this time. Yet Frederick, and Fitch who fol-

lowed him a few years later, are men who give a sober and true account of other

matters, in which we still may compare their descriptions with facts as they are.*

It may perhaps be remarked that only at the end of the last century the

spectacles of Col. Symes appear to have shewn him in Burma a magnificent and

civilised empire, including a population which he estimated at seventeen millions.

Later experience has proved that the Colonel’s view of the magnificence and

civilisation was as exaggerated as his estimate of the population.

But making allowance for a similar tendency to the over-estimation of so dis-

tant a region by the older travellers, in reading their narratives it is impossible

to resist the conviction that the lower provinces at least of the Irawadee exhibited

in the 16th century a much more flourishing and wealthy community than now

exists in the delta, and we have, in the subsequent history of the country, the

causes of a great deterioration. The splendour of the Peguan monarchy was

very short-lived. In the time of the son of the conquering prince came a suc-

cession of internal and external wars, during which the country was harassed

and devastated, both by the cruelties of the savage king, and by invasions from

Arracan, Siam, Toungoo and Ava, by all which Pegu was reduced to the depths

of desolation and misery ; insomuch that Purchas, in a curious chapter “on the

destruction and desolation of Pegu,’’+ collected from the writings of numerous

eye-witnesses his contemporaries, thinks it appropriate to observe, that ‘‘ the

natives of Pegu are not quite extinct, but many of them are fled into other king-

doms.” Notices of the history of Pegu are defective during the greater part of

the 17th century, and I do not know what further wars took place during that

period, But towards the middle of the century following came its temporary

re-assertion of independence and even of supremacy, and its rapidly succeeding

subjection to the vengeance of Alompra. It is not surprising that Pegu should

never have recovered from calamities so repeated and disastrous. History

scarcely justifies the expectation that countries should recover, even in long

periods of comparative repose, from such universal and thorough devastation.

And the habits of the Burman races are not favourable to increase of population.

A singularly small portion of their children live to maturity.t

_* See for instance Frederick’s vivid and accurate account of the bore in the

Sitang, (Purchas, 11. 1716,) which I have lately had the opportunity of com-

paring with that of a good observer, Mr. T. Login.

+ V. p. 500.

{1 have just read in the course of my ordinary duties a report by Mr. T.

the ancient capital. He speaks incidentally of traces of extensive cultivation in

tracts which now scarcely shew two souls to the square mile. The vast ruined

pagoda of Mahkau, of which Mr. Login speaks in the same report, doubtless

represents the site of the castle of Maccao, mentioned by the old travellers as

30 The Remains at Pagan. BNgrk.

formed of the same succession of members, but it is only from the

Returning from this digression, we find in 1583 Gasparo Balbi, a jeweller of

Venice, visiting Pegu with a stock of emeralds. As with all the travellers about

this period, his ship made a port in the river of Bassein or one of its channels,

called by them Cosmi or Cosmin,* which seems at that time, distant as it was

from the capital, to have been the principal port of Pegu.

In entering the Bassein river his description of the gilded beacon temple of

Modaen on Pagoda point, and of the swarms of flies attracted by the ngapee

manufacture at Negrais, are pleasant to read in their graphic truth, after three

centuries nearly have past.

From Cosmin the travellers appear to have taken a route through the rami-

fied channels of the lower Delta, and Balbi mentions several great and fair cities

by the way.t In seven days they reached Dalla (near the mouth of the Rangoon

river,) and next day the “ citie of Dogon” (Rangoon,) where he describes the

great Pagoda, &c., in a manner still very recognizable,

Mr. Ralph Fitch, merchant of London, is the first Englishman who has given

an account of a visit to Pegu. He follows the same route as the last traveller,

by Cosmin to Dalla, Sirian and Pegu.

Fitch’s account of the capital appears to be borrowed to some extent from

that of his predecessor Frederick, which I have partly extracted in illustration

of my description of Amarapoora.{ From Pegu he extended his travels to

**Tamahey which is in the country of the Langeiannes whom we call Iangomes ;

it is five and twenty days’ journey north-east from Pegu.” ‘This Iamahey or

Jamahey is undoubtedly the Shan town of Zimmé, which has been very rarely

reached by any European traveller in modern times. Fitch describes it as “a

the place where goods for the royal city were discharged ; and where the king had

his gardens and his boat-races.

During the three years that have elapsed since the war that terminated in the

annexation of Pegu, in some of the districts which, directly or indirectly suffered

most, such as Padaung and Mendoon (West and North-west of Prome) scarcely

any favourable reaction has taken place.

The writer had an epportunity of seeing the state of the former small district

between the Arracan hills and the Irawadee, once covered with beautiful and

thriving towns and villages, in travelling from the Arracan coast to Prome in

March 1853, just as the war was closing. And one may conceive how deadly

and enduring would be the results of war, repeated year after year in such a

country, by various hosts of barbarians. Such, all these races eminently are in

war, whatever they may be in peace.

* T had always supposed from the narratives that Cosmin must have been

Bassein itself. But in Wood’s map (1795), the last which gives the name,

Cosmin is placed on another channel, to the eastward of the main Bassein river.

+ Frederick states that at all the villages on this route “ hennes, pigeons,

eggs, milke, rice, and other things be very good and cheape ;” a very different

state of things from the present, when our hungry surveyors complain that they

can get neither “ Hennes” nor eggs, let alone “ other things” for love or money.

{ See Major Phayre’s Mission to Ava page 160, (unpublished.)

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 31

study and comparison of the remains of the unrepaired and unbar-

very faire and great Towne with faire houses of stone,’ which is remarkable, if

true.

From the accounts of all the travellers of this period we derive the impression

of a thriving trade in the ports of Pegu. Martaban, we are told by Frederick

and Fitch, was frequented by many ships from Malacca, Sirian by ships from

Mecca (Mocha probably) and Achen, Cosmin by ships from Bengal, St. Thomé

(Madras) and Masulipatam.

Fitch was at Pegu in the end of 1586, and the kingdom seems still to have

stood in its glory.*

But only eleven years later, in 1598, Nicholas Pimenta, Visitor of the Jesuits

in India, relates the destruction of the Peguan monarchy, and the miserable

state of the country, as reported to him by ships which arrived at St. Thomé

when he was organizing a Mission for Pegu.

In March 1600, Boves, another Jesuit, writes that he was in the country

when the king besieged by the kings of Arracan and Toungoo surrendered, and

was put to death. “It is a lamentable spectacle,” says the Padre, “to see the

banks of the rivers, set with infinite fruit-bearing trees, now overwhelmed with

ruins of gilded temples and noble edifices; the ways and fields full of sculls and

bones of wretched Peguans, killed or famished, and cast into the river in such

numbers that the multitude of carcases prohibiteth the way and passage of any

ships ; to omit the burnings and massacres committed by this, the cruellest tyrant

that ever breathed.’ +

After his victory, the king of Arracan made over the port of Syrian to Philip de

Brito, a Portuguese partisan leader.{ De Brito, however, quarrelled with the

king of Arracan, and went to Goa to obtain the support of the Viceroy. During

his absence his followers proclaimed him king of Pegu. He continued to carry

things with a high hand for some years, capturing the son of his former patron

the king of Arracan, for whom he demanded a ransom of 50,000 crowns ;§ and

sometime afterwards he treacherously seized the person dnd treasure of the king

of Toungoo,|| with whom he had made alliance. In 1610 a traveller says of de

Brito ; “ He yet also domineereth and careth for nobodie.”4 He had married his

son Simon to a daughter of the king of Martaban,* which province had appa-

* Purchas, Vol. II.

+ Boves in Purchas, IT. 1748.

t Do. Do.

§ Hist. of Dise. and Cong. of India by the Portuguese, III. 138 etc. and Pur-

chas, V. p. 514.

|| Hence called by the Burmese Kala-ya-men, “The king whom the Kalis

seized.” Col. Burney in J. A. S. B. IV. 404.

aod Relations of strange ocewrrents by Peter Williamson Floris; in Purchas, I.

* Hist. of Discov. and Conq. as above.

32 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1.

barized temples that their full intention and true character can be

rently risen again to brief independence during the anarchy which succeeded the

fall of the Peguan monarchy.

In 16138, however, the king of Ava appeared on the field, and with a large army

besieged de Brito in Sirian, where the Portuguese leader made a desperate defence.

The king of Arracan, whom he had so grievously offended, sent 50 vessels to his

assistance, but they were captured by the Burmans. At last de Brito was betrayed

and carried to the king, who caused him to be “ spitted,” or impaled, and set up on

an eminence overlooking the Fort. In such misery he continued to live for two days.

His wife Donna Luisa de Saldanha was sent to Ava with the other captives.*

The dominance of Ava over the lower provinces dates from this time.

The king after having been crowned at Pegu, sent his brother to master the

southern states. He soon conquered Tavoy, and proceeded to besiege Tennas-

serim. Here Christopher Rebello, an outlaw from Cochin, with 40 Portuguese

and 70 slaves, in four galliots, attacked and routed the Burmese flotilla of 500

vessels.} .

A short time afterwards the king of Ava, fearmg the vengeance of the Portu-

guese, should they unite with his rivals of Arracan and Siam, sent ambassadors

(to Goa apparently) to the Portuguese Viceroy, to apologise for the killing of de

Brito, and offering to join in an attack on Arracan. The Viceroy agreed, and sent

an envoy in turn, but he was treated with true Burman nonchalance, and nothing

resulted.{

Though Mr. Fitch, and possibly other wandering English merchants, had visited

Pegu in the preceding century, no English convoy had at that time come to the

Indian seas for trade. The East India Company was first established in 1599, when

Pegu was in the depths of its desolation. Hence, though our trade had spread far

to the eastward, no attempt at intercourse with the Irawadee. delta had taken place

up to 1618. Curiously enough, the first intercourse originated from the east-

ward. A year or two before the period named, the English factor at Siam, Lucas

Anthonison by name, sent one Thomas Samuel to Zengomay (Zimmé),§ to inquire

into the prospects of trade there. Zimmé had been subject to the great king of

Pegu, but during the misfortunes of that monarchy in his son’s time, had been

taken by the Siamese. The king of Ava, whose power had risen, as we have seen,

on the fall of Pegu, and who was extending his conquests over most of the pro-

vinces that had been subject to the latter, obtained possession of Zimmé whilst

Samuel was there, and carried him, with other foreigners, to Pegu. There he

died, and his property was seized by the king.

* Hist. of Disc. as above, III. 191. See also Modern Universal Histy. (1781,)

vol. VI. p. 202; and Purchas, V. 502 and 514,

+ Hist. of Disc. as above, III, p. 197.

t Hist. of Disc. &e. p. 255.

§ Called by the Siamese Chang-mai,

TEMPLE caiteo SENPHYOKOO at PAGAN.

Photographed from a Drawing by CAPTAIN H. YULE.

Lathegraphad by XIE. Seath

1857. ] The Remains at Pagan. 33

made out.*

Every main cornice, for instance, is crowned with a sort of battle-

The relator, William Methold, in the supplement to Purchas’s Pilgrims, calls

the monarch king of Pegu, and at Pegu he appears to have held his court. But

he was in fact properly the king of Ava.

News was brought of Samuel’s death to Masulipatam where Lucas Anthonison

happened now to be factor for the Company. He took the opportunity of send-

ing two agents carrying a letter and present for the king, professedly to apply for

the restoration of Samuel’s effects, but also with a small adventure to make trial of |

the trade.

The agents were unfaithful. They misappropriated the proceeds of the trade,

and wrote most discouraging accounts of their treatment. But they were sent

back in April 1619, with most of Samuel’s property, as well as a present from the

king and a letter inviting trade.*

The history at this period is very obscure, but it would appear that soon after

the time mentioned, British intercourse with the Burman countries became more

free than it ever was again up to the annexation of Pegu. Dalrymple ascertained

from old documents at Fort St. George, that the English had settlements} at Prome

and Ava, as well as at Sirian, and even at a place on the borders of China, which

he conjectures to have been Bamd. The Dutch, who had a considerable trade

with Burma, likewise possessed factories in the Upper Provinces, and are said

to have been at this time in occupation of Negrais.

On some dispute with the Burmese Government, the Dutch threatened, or

attempted, to invite the interference of the Chinese. On this, both Dutch and

English were ejected.

In 1658 or 1659, when a Chinese force invaded Burma, and attacked the

capital, the guns on the ramparts of Ava are said to have been served by a party

of native Christians under a foreigner named Methari Kdtan, a name which Col.

Burney happily suggests to be intended for “ Mr, Cotton.”§

* A small but beautiful example of the Pagan architecture in its typical form

is the Sembyo-Ku or “ Cave of the white Elephant,”

* Methold in Purchas, V. 1006.

+ He says at the beginning of the 17th century. But it could not have been

earlier than the circumstances mentioned by Methold.

_f Thisis Dalrymple’s account. I find, however, in Valentyn’s great ‘ Beschry-

ving van Oost Indien,” or Description of the Dutch East Indies, (Dordrecht and

Amsterdam 1726) vol. V. pt. II. p. 126, that the Dutch had a factory at Sirian

from about 1631 till 1677, with subordinate factories at Ava and other places,

The Dutch Government of Coromandel sent several embassies to Ava also.

Valentyn ascribes the breaking up of the trade to the constant wars that were

going on in those regions.

§ J. A. 8. B. VI, 126.

34. The Remains at Pagéin. [No. 1.

mented parapet assuming in the repaired buildings a coarse incon-

gruous appearance in rude plaster-work. In the temples which

The trade seems to have revived towards the end of the century. In 1680

and 1684, the Company’s agents had made unsuccessful attempts to re-establish

factories in Burma or Pegu. In 1686-7 their attention was turned to Negrais ;

a survey was made of the island, and it was taken nominal possession of.

In 1695, Nathaniel Higginson, governor of Fort St. George, sent Mr. Edward

Fleetwood and Captain James Lesly as envoys to the court of Ava. Their

objects were to obtain the settlement of a factory at Sirian, the release of English

captives, and of a sloop belonging to one Bartholomew Rodriguez, which had

been confiscated, and the restoration of the effects of one Adrian Tilbury, a

merchant of Fort St. George, who had died at Martaban.

They carried presents to the amount of about 1000 pagodas, and a letter from

Governor Higginson, written in a very humble style. The presents were a

regular mercantile speculation. The envoys were to try to get as much as

possible in return, “ asking for more” if they found it feasible, and were them-

selves to get ten per cent. on the proceeds as an incitement to do their best.*

Mr. Fleetwood does not appear to have been a gentleman likely either to

impress the Burmese court with an exalted impression of his country, or to bring

back with him any interesting particulars of theirs. He seemed to think he had

made a great coup in providing himself with a letter of introduction to the king’s

mistress. The mission had as little success as it deserved under such auspices,

but the re-establishment of the factory at Sirian was conceded. Two years later

(1697) Mr. Bowyear was sent as chief of the factory at Sirian, and with a mission

to the court similar in its objects to Fleetwood’s. It appears from the instruc-

tions that the retwn-presents made to Fleetwood’s mission had been profitable

to Mr. Higginson, and he was not indisposed to repeat the speculation. But

he honourably adds ; “If the returns of the present shall stand in competition

with, or hinder, the restoring of Bartholomew Rodriguez his cargo, I had rather

forego the receiving of any returns for the present, than hinder the restoration

of the cargo.” No record of Bowyear’s mission has been found, and it is pro-

bable that he did not proceed to Ava, as the king died just after his arrival in

the country.t

In 1709, a Mr. Richard Alison or Allanson was sent as envoy to Ava. No

account of his mission has ever been printed. It appears from Hamilton’s ‘ New

account of the East Indies’{ that this gentleman was twice deputed to the court

of Ava. But the date of his other mission is unknown. From this point I shall

* Higginson’s Instructions to Fleetwood. In Dalrymple’s Oriental Repertory,

II. p. 337 et seq.

+ Bayfield ; see below.

t{ Edinburgh, 1727, Vol. II.

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 35

remain in their original state, such as Sudha Muni (of which I

have unfortunately no drawings,) and Sembyo-ké we find these

content myself mainly with a brief note of events, as the remaining history of

British intercourse with Burma has been fully related in a very able and inter-

esting paper by Dr. Bayfield, which is printed in the appendix to Pemberton’s

Report on the Eastern Frontier.*

The agent of the Company at Sirian, Mr. Smart, appears to have acted with

duplicity during the contests of the Burmese and Peguans for the possession of

Pegu, which ended in the temporary supremacy of the latter. In 1743, the

factory was burnt by them, and the establishment was withdrawn.

In 1752, the king of Tavoy, then for a short time independent, invited an

establishment. But his terms were unreasonable, and no movement was made

to act on his offer.

In 1753, a factory was established on Negrais, which was in fact taken pos-

session of in the Company’s name.

In 1755, we find a factory under Captain Baker existing at Negrais, during

the continued contests between Peguans and Burmese, the latter being again

in the ascendant. ‘The chief at Negrais urged on his Government that we should

take a decided part with the Burmans. But, about the same time, some English

ships at Dagon (Rangoon) took part with the Peguans.

In July of this year, Captain Baker and Lieut. North (who died at Pagén on

the way up) were sent by the resident at Negrais on an embassy to Alompra at

Mout-sho-bo. The usurper laughed at the idea of assistance from the English,

and the mission had no result. Captain Baker took observations on his way,

and made a map of the river, which is given by Dalrymple.

In 1751, Dupleix the Governor General of French India had sent an ambas-

sador to the king of Pegu, and obtained the concession of a factory at Sirian.

But in 1756, the Government at Pondicherry, contrary to an engagement of neu-

trality into which the factory had entered with Alompra, having sent succours

to the Peguans, and these having fallen into the hands of the conqueror, he mas-

sacred the officers, and carried the rest of the French as prisoners to Ava.t From

these prisoners some of the Burman Christians of the Dibayen district are said to

be descended.

* “ Historical Review of the Political relations between the British Govern-

ment in India and the Empire of Ava, from the earliest date on record to the

present year; compiled by G. T. Bayfield, acting assistant to the Resident in

Ava, and revised by Lt.-Col. Burney. Ava, 15th December, 1834.”

For the facts of the remaining history, I have made free use of this Review.

The original authorities are, for the times of Alompra, Dalrymple’s Oriental

Repertory ; for Symes’s first Mission and Crawfurd’s, their published narratives ;

for the other Missions, the original papers in the records of the Indian Govern-

ment. Where I have used other authorities they are referred to.

t Sonnerat, Voyage aux Indes Orientales. Paris 1806, III. 5.

EF 2

36 The Remaims at Pagan. [| No. 1.

battlements to be but the settings of embossed and glazed, and

sometimes also richly coloured, tiles, which in fact must have

In 1757, Alompra addressed a letter to the king of England, written on gold

adorned with rubies, which he delivered to a Mr. Dyer and others who visited

him at Rangoon.

In June of the same year Lieut. Newton, who was in charge of Negrais, deputed

Ensign Lister to go to the king with the pompous title of ambassador extraordi-

nary. He overtook Alompra on the river going up from Rangoon, and by dint

of some considerable bribery obtained the king’s signature to a treaty conceding

in perpetuity Negrais, and ground for a factory at Bassein, with freedom of trade,

in return for a pledge of military assistance fom the Company against the king’s

enemies. This treaty had never any practical effect.

1759. The greater part of the establishment at Negrais was withdrawn. And

on the 6th October in that year the whole of the remaining Europeans, with many

natives, were treacherously massacred by the Burmese. The king was said to

have suspected that the factory had been in communication with his enemies the

Peguans.*

In 1760, Captain Alves was sent’ with letters and presents from Holwell,

Governor of Fort William, and Pigot, Governor of Madras, to demand satisfac-

tion for the massacre, and liberty for the prisoners. Alompra had died on his

Siamese expedition a few months before Captain Alves’s arrival at Ava. He found

the city in rebellion, and the new king besieging it. He was plundered and other-

wise shamelessly treated. The prisoners were released, but the idea of satisfaction

was scouted, and Ensign Lister’s treaty was ignored.

The factory at Bassein was never re-established, but one appears to have been

kept up at Rangoon at least till 1782.

In 1769, the French East India Company sent an envoy to the court of Alom-

pra’s son Senphyoo-yen,} with the view of re-establishing their trade. ‘They.

obtained from the king the grant of a factory and other privileges, but these con-

cessions were never acted on.

1794. The Burmese, who had conquered Aracan in 1783 began to make inso-

* On the shore of the mainland, close to the north of Negrais is now being

laid out the new Port of Dalhousie. ‘The whirligig of Time has brought about

its revenges. The kingdom of Pegu, which the rough hunter conquered, has

past from his house to the hands of that power whose servants he treacherously

slew; and the city that will rise on the site of his crime will borrow a name

from the woody dells of Esk.” Blackwood’s Magazine, May 1856.

+ Called by Sonnerat ‘‘ Zekin-médou,” the Shembuan of Symes.

t Sonnerat, as above, p. 8. This author, whose voyages took place between

1774 and 1781, has a dissertation on the advantages of taking possession of Pegu,

for which he calculates that 1000 or 1200 Europeans would suffice, as the

Peguans would join them. He commences, prophetically ; “‘ 11 est certain que

les Anglais chercheront un jour 4 s’emparer du Pegu.” III. p. 60.

1857. ] The Remains at Pagin. 37

formed a briliant ‘‘ polychromatic” (to use the slang of the day)

coronet to each successive terrace of the temple.

lent and threatening demonstrations on the Chittagong frontier; and it was

known that the French were directing their attention to Burma as a good fulcrum

for attack or intrigue against British India. For these and other reasons, the

Governor General (Sir J. Shore) deputed an embassy to Ava under Captain

Michael Symes of His Majesty’s 74th Regiment.

It cannot be said that this mission was treated with much respect, or advanced

the estimation of the British power among the Burmans. Captain Symes was

treated as the envoy of an inferior power, and was undoubtedly himself imposed

on by Burmese pretensions. The whole colouring of his narrative tends to leave

a very exaggerated impression of the civilisation and magnificence of the Burmese

empire.

In 1796, in accordance with the permission conceded in the document given to

Captain Symes, Captain Hiram Cox was sent to act as resident at Rangoon on the

part of the Government of India. He had charge of some articles which the king

had commissioned through Symes. But he was not to proceed to court, unless

summoned.

He was summoned, and reached Amarapoora in January 1797. There, or in

its neighbourhood, he remained during nine weary months, bearing with singular

patience every kind of slight, indignity, and imposition, the history of which it is

quite painful to read. In October he returned to Rangoon, and in February he

was recalled by the Government, who (misled perhaps by the impression that

Symes had given) intimated their opinion that the conduct of the court must have

indicated personal dissatisfaction with Captain Cox. And the king and his min-

isters were addressed, notifying Cox’s recall and offering to appoint another gentle-

man in whom the Vice-president had the greatest confidence, should His Majesty

desire it.

Captain Cox’s private journal was published in 1821, some years after his death.

Several insolent communications were in the following years received from the

Viceroy of Rangoon, and the Governor of Aracan, and in

1802, Captain, now Colonel, Symes was sent again by Lord Wellesley. His

mission was attended by an escort of 100 sepoys, and equipped in a style charac-

teristic of the Governor General. He was to seek a treaty of alliance, the cessation

of extortionate exactions on trade, the establishment of a resident at court and of

a consul at Rangoon, and to claim Negrais or compensating commercial advan-

tages.

The mission was a total failure. The envoy was treated for three months with

the most mortifying neglect and deliberate insult, and at last quitted without

an audience of leave. It is not to be wondered at, that the Colonel published no

narrative of his second mission.

38 The Remains at Pagin. [No. 1.

In the basement mouldings, as truly seen in the older buildings,

the upper limb is an ogee carved in bold foliation of truly classical

character (see Pl. IV. Fig. 17.)

This, in the restorations and beautifications, even of such build-

ings as the Ananda, has been, by the coarse and tasteless percep-

tions of the modern architects, degraded into an idiotic and mis-

placed repetition of the battlemented crown of the cornice.

The basement again always centres in a sort of entablature or

In May 1803, the apprehension of French intrigue in Burma again induced the

Government to send Lieut. Canning as agent to Rangoon. But in consequence

of the insolent violence of the Ye-woon, who was in charge of the government

there, and insisted on opening all letters, Lieut, Canning judged it best to return

in November.

In 1804, an outrage was perpetrated on a British ship from Penang, which put

into Bassein for wood and water. No notice was taken of this.

1809. Capt. Canning was despatched as agent to Rangoon, with a special view

of explaining to the Burmese the nature of our blockade-system, which was then

enforced on the French isles, to protect British interests, and to watch the pro-

gress of the French in Burma.

He proceeded to Amarapoora at the king’s desire. He met with much better

treatment than either of the two last missions to the court, and the explanation,

which was the main object of his mission, was effected. But he did not leave

without receiving from the Woongyees two most impertinent letters to the Gover-

nor General.

1811. This year commenced those disturbed relations on the Aracan frontier,

which eventually led to the war of 1824. A native of Aracan called King Ber-

ring, or Khyen-bran, embodied a number of followers within our territory, and

invaded Aracan, In September Capt. Canning was sent to give explanations on

this matter, and to complain of the conduct of the Governor of Rangoon towards

British trade. Whilst he was still at Rangoon a gross violation of our territory

was committed by the Governor of Aracan. Additional instructions were sent to

Canning to complain of this and to demand the withdrawal of the Burmese troops

from the frontier. In consequence of a repetition of the offence he was recalled,

whilst repeated orders came from Amarapoora to send him to court, by force if

necessary. He despatched the presents, but returned to Bengal in August.

This was the last Mission up to the breaking out of war in 1824, It is not neces-

sary to follow here the repeated and complicated encroachments and provocations

which led to that event. War was declared on the 5th March, 1824, and the

peace of Yandabo was signed on the 24th February, 1826,

FRAGMENTS oF ARCHITECTURAL DETAIL

IN THE REMAIME AT PASANM

Proms Shilches kyT Olihars Foy: anal Capt: H Yale Bengal Engineers

VS Fisyeree LACKO,A erck 100 roby are dann te Scale

DETAILS of ARCHITECTURE at PAGAN

Photographed from a Drawing by CAPTAIN H. YULE.

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 39

dado set with alternate recessed pannels and projecting blocks

(PL IV. Figs. 11, 13.)

The true meaning of these has fortunately been preserved in

Ananda as well as in some of the more shattered buildings. In

these the pannels are occupied by tiles moulded in relief. In the

Ananda the tiles represent a variety of somewhat rude groups of

figures and animals with alphabetic characters over them.

In other smaller buildings we have seen them glazed and artis-

tically embossed, representing a variety of ornamental figures, some-

times the Greek honeysuckle (Fig. 6), prancing horses, pelicans,

&c.In the Sudha Muni these impannelled tiles were, like those

of the battlements, coloured in enamel.

Most of the shafts as well as bases and capitals of pilasters,

the cusped arches, flamboyant spires of the door and window cano-

pies, &c., and often too the cornice and basement mouldings, appear

to have been originally sculptured (in the stucco) with great

richness of effect.* And often this effect, in foliage and other

ornamentation, is produced by very slight indications and incisions

in the plastered surface. These incisions have been made with

such instinctive art, and suggestive skill, that, viewed at a little

distance, the most elaborate modelling could scarcely have produced

the desired effect more completely.

All this disappears before the ruthless hand of the restorer,

and is replaced by a rude plastered surface scratched without

taste, art or result. The old work, rough as it is sometimes, is

the bold rough sketch of an accomplished artist. The work of

the repairer, compared with it, is like a school-boy’s chalkings on

the wall.

I may now venture to point out a few analogies bearing on the

origin of this remarkable architecture. ’

My attention has not previously been turned to ancient Hindu

architecture, and over a great part of this Presidency there are

scarcely any remains affording opportunity to become acquainted

* See examples of this stucco-work in Pl. IV. Figs. 14, 15 and 16, for which

Iam indebted to the kind help of Mr. Oldham. Capt. Tripe’s illness on our

second short visit to Pagan unfortunately prevented the photographic illustration

of these and other details.

40 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1.

with it. But the result of the search that I have been able to

make in the Library of the Asiatic Society, since my return from

Burma, will perhaps establish the fact that nearly the whole of the

details are of Indian origin.

I have noticed the resemblance of the spire of these Pagan

temples to the common Hindu shiwala, But its absolute idenity

with a more ancient form of Hindu temple will be seen by a

comparison of the spire of the Ananda (Pl. I.) with the ancient

Indian “ Vimana”’ as given by Mr. Fergusson.

The most universal and characteristic feature in the Pagan

architecture is perhaps the pediment, or canopy, of flamboyant

spires over the doors and windows. Compare Figs. 8 and 10 of

Pl. V. copied from Ram Raz’s Essay on the Architecture of

southern India, with the window of Dhamayangyi at Pagan as

shewn in Pl. IV. Fig. 4, and it will be impossible, I think, to

doubt that this feature was derived from India.

The resemblance is still closer in the doorway of the great

temple of Dambil in Ceylon, as given in Sir J. HE. Tennent’s

book on Christianity in that island. I have not been able to find

any good views of the Ceylonese remains, otherwise I doubt not

that the closest type of the Burmese architecture would be traced

in these.

Compare again the horned and grinning heads which oceur so con-

stantly at Pagan in the ornamentation of pilasters, as in Figs. 8, 9

and 14, of Pl. IV. with heads of a similar character over the doorways

in Ram Raz’s examples just referred to. If there is any doubt as to

the identical origin of these it must disappear when we find at

Pagan such a head (Pl. 1V. Fig. 7.) occupying exactly the same

position as in the Indian doorway, and surrounded by the same

flame-like spires in both cases. This Gorgon-head, as Raffles calls

it, in nearly all the ancient Javanese temples, occupies the same

position over the doorways. It is there usually on an exaggerated

scale; but it assumes its most monstrous form in the “ Tiger-cave”’

of Cuttack, where a colossal tusked and grinning head envelopes

the whole entrance. (See Journ. As. Soc. of Bengal, 1847.) This

Gorgon-head, as well as the cusped arch and indications of the

flamboyant points, are seen in a plate, by the late Major Kittoe,

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 41.

of a niche at Badeswur containing an image of Parbati. (J. A. S. B,

vol. VIIT. p. 384.)

Take again the monstrous trunked and toothed creatures,

disgorging scroll-work, over the pilasters of the Dhamayangyi

window just referred to, and set them by the Indian monsters in

almost similar position, as shewn in Figs. 1, 38 and 8, in the

Plate of Analogies. Who can doubt that the one is derived directly

from the other ?

Look at the festoon ornament of beads and tassels pendant

from the mouths of monstrous grinning heads, as seen in the

Gaudapalen (Pl. LV. Fig. 9,) and in the Sembyo-ké. It is one

of those details which at first sight were strongly suggestive of

European origin. But it is absolutely identical with the adorn-

ments of a pillar in a temple on the Madras coast given by Col.

Mackenzie in his collections. Similar ornament is seen in the

Assam remains described in a late number of the Asiatic Society’s

Journal, on a pillar at Barolli in Rajpootana given by Fergusson

from Todd’s Rajasthan; and on a pillar at Jajeepoor in Cuttack,

figured by Major Kittoe in the Journ. As. Soc. Ben. Vol. VII.

p. 54; as well as in two sculptured pillars found in the sands of

the Ganges near Pubna, which now stand at the door of the

Asiatic Society's Museum in Calcutta. A modified rendering

of the same, Mr. Oldham tells me, he found on some of the

fragments at Benares College which are said to have been

brought from the ancient Buddhist Pagoda of Sarnath near that

city, and very lately on a sculptured stone which he lghted

on among the forests of the Nurbudda valley. Remark those

curious little peaks or acroteria which terminate so many of the

flat projecting mouldings in all the Pagan temples: (e. g. see

ict V. Hios! 9, 10, 11, 12, 18 and 17.) It is a feature found

all over India. It is given by Mr. Fergusson as one of the

characteristics in his generalized drawing of a Mantdépa, or vesti-

bule of an ancient Hindu temple; it appears in Lieut. Maisey’s

drawings of Kalinjar; it is seen in pillars represented by Col.

Mackenzie; and the closest resemblance, not only in this feature

but in the manner of its application, will be seen at a glance

on comparing the gate of Bhubaneswar in Orissa as given by

42 The Remains at Pagan. [No.w1.

Mr. Fergusson, with that very common form of doorway at

Pagan, of which an elevation is shewn in Pl. IV. Fig. 10. The’

same feature is seen in the Assam column figured by Capt.

Dalton, and is found on a large scale in the temples of Java (see

Raffles, vol. IT.)

The remaining figures in the plate of analogies have been brought

together for the sake of less defined resemblances of character.

Enough, however, has been made out, I think, to shew that all, or

nearly all the details of work at Pagdn must have had an Indian

origin, But this is far from removing the perplexity connected with

the origin of these buildings. Grant that all details were borrowed

from India. But where shall we find in India any model of the

composition ? where anything approaching the classical beauty of

the Sem-byo-ki, or the stupendous architectural majesty of the

Thapinyu and the Ananda ?*

The Burman, rejecting indeed, in the pride of his philosophy,

the idea of an Eternal Divinity, but recognizing the eternal sanc-

tities of nature and conscience, has reared nobler fanes and far

more worthy to become the temples of the true God than the

Hindu with his deities so numerous and impure.

I have said above, that nearly all the details at Pagan must have

had an Indian origin. But this does not apply to construction,

The arches and vaults, which are such marked features in the Pagan

temples, are quite unknown to ancient Hindu architecture. “ As

far as my own knowledge and researches go,” says Mr. Fergusson,

‘‘T am certain that I have never been able to detect any trace of

an arch in any ancient (Indian) building.” (Ancient Archit. of

Hindoostan, p. 12.)

Having no more to say on the general subject of this architecture,

I have still to offer a few notices of remarkable temples not yet

described in this Report.

* Perhaps the nearest analogy in general form is to be founded in the rock-cut

Raths (as they are called) of Mahabalipuram near Sadras.

There is also something, suggestive of the Pagan style in the general arrange-

ment of the great Javanese temples described by Raffles, (including the pecu-

liarity of the cruciform plan,) as well as in some of the details which I have

already noticed.

1857. | The Remains at Pagdn. 43

About three quarters of a mile south-east of the ancient city is

the great temple of Dhamayangyi.

This temple which dates from the reign of Kalé-Kya4 Men (“The

king dethroned by foreigners’’)* about A. D. 1152, in its general

arrangement resembles the Ananda more closely than any other,

and covers about the same area, though the greater bulk of the

vestibules, and greater height of the main walls of the building,

must have rendered it, when perfect, even more imposing. Views

of some of the architectural details of Dhamayangyf are given

in Pl. IV. Figs. 7 and 8. The upper part of the temple is all in

sad decay, and the six terraces and crowning spire have well

nigh become a shapeless pyramid of brick rubbish. The lower story,

however, is in good general preservation ; and, as it is nearly stript of

its plaster, it affords a good opportunity of examining the admirable

workmanship of these buildings, of which I have already spoken.

Where the plaster-work remains, it shews a boldness and richness

superior to anything in the more perfect temples. For the usual

horn-like wing of the door pediments is here generally substituted

a monstrous animal disgorging upcurving scrolls from his gaping

jaws (see Pl. 1V. Fig. 6.) Here too are seen in perfection those

perplexing pilasters with their quasi-Roman mouldings (Figs. 6

and 7); and here, to my delight, I discovered a perfect flat brick-

arch over’a window.f There were two of these in each wing of

the temple, and one of them in particular was as perfect in con-

struction, in joints and radiation, as any London builder could turn

* Col. Forbes (Eleven years in Ceylon) quotes the allusion in Crawfurd’s

Narrative to this dethroned founder of the temple, as remarkably confirmatory

of a passage in Turnour’s Epitome of the Singhalese chronology.

This passage states that “ the king of Cambodia and Avramana” having inflict-

ed many outrages and insults on Singhalese subjects and ambassadors, the king

Praa-krama-bahoo, who came to the throne A. D. 1153, sailed with a great ar-

mament, landed in Arvramana, vanquished the enemy, and obtained full satis-

faction.

Turnour says that Arramana “comprises probably the provinces between

Arracan and Siam.” It may perhaps be referred to Mramma, the true form I

believe of Burma.

+ See this arch in Pl. IV. Fig. 3.

44 The Remains at Pagén. [No. 1.

out. No suggestion of European or Indian aid would help here.

At least I doubt if m the 12th century the flat brick-arch was

known in Hurope,* .and I know that in the 19th it is one of the

most difficult things to get done decently in India. In one of the

other buildings, Mr. Oldham told me that he saw not only a flat

arch, (not, however, correctly radiated,) but also a segmental dis-

charging arch over it.

The interior of Dhamayangyi contains but one accessible corri-

dor. All the openings leading further inward have been built up,

for some unknown reason. I did not succeed in finding the stairs

leading to the roof. Major Phayre was more fortunate: his opi-

nion is that this temple never was finished or plastered in the

upper part. I think there are good reasons on the other side, but

the question is perhaps not worth arguing.

The arch of the western main entrance, and ovale the others,

have the edges of the intrados entirely composed of roughly dressed

stone voussoirs, regularly arranged as headers and stretchers.f

In the corner of the building and in the minor arches, stones are

introduced occasionally as binders.t This has been noticed by

Mr. Crawfurd, as well as the inscribed stones which are found in

the northern and western vestibules. In the latter, opposite the

entrance, is a remarkable group of sitting figures. §

The Dhamayangyi is encompassed by a high brick-wall of some

250 yards square. This wall is built with as much care and skill,

and with almost as elaborate mouldings, as the edifice which it

encloses, and consequently it remains very perfect. More beautiful

brick-work could scarcely be seen anywhere. The gates in the

centre of each side are, however, dilapidated.

Half a mile or more eastward of the Dhamayangyi is another

remarkable temple called the Sudah Mfwnt. In construction it

* The only flat stone-arches that I recollect to have seen in medieval buildings

are in the side-aisles of Roslin Chapel, in the chimney-piece of the great hall

in Glammis castle, and in the magnificent Saracen gateway of Cairo called Bab-

el-Fitoor.

t, See, Pl; TY Bigud:

t. Do: Fig, :2;

§ Given well in Capt. Tripe’s Photograph (No. )

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 45

resembles the Thapinyu, but is smaller, and has never been repaired

in later times. The brick-work of the upper part is much dilapi-

dated, as much so nearly as that of Dhamayangyi. But that this

temple was finished there can be no doubt. The plaster on the

walls of a staircase leading to the upper-terraces, at the height of

a man’s shoulder, was rubbed and polished, as if by the passage of

multitudes during ages of occupancy.

Major Phayre did not visit this temple, and I have not Nastia

to what date it is attributed. No one of the remaining structures

gives so vivid an idea of what these buildings must have been in

the brilliancy of their original condition. The plaster-work of the

pilasters and mouldings which remains is of a highly florid and

artistic character; the battlemented crown of the parapet is set

with large tiles embossed and enamelled in colours; the dado of

the basement with smaller tiles in the form of diamonds, ro-

settes, and other ornamental patterns ; and in the flamboyant rays

and spires of the pediments even up to the highest remaining ter-

races the tips were composed of pointed glazed white tiles, which

must once have given an extraordinary lustre and sparkling effect

to the elevation, a good deal of which is perceptible even in the

present decay.

The ground-plan is a single corridor, the vaults and walls of

which have been originally covered with tasteful diaper painting

in bright colours. This remains visible on the soffit of the arching,

but the walls have been white-washed over, and repainted in an

inferior style with life-size saints and Buddhas, and with a smaller

series of the Jats or pre-existences of Gautama.

The plan of the upper story is rather more complicated than

usual. There is a principal image chamber, with a well-lighted

corridor running all round it, but this inner chamber has not been

placed, as in the Thapinyu, centrically under the spire.

An enclosure wall surrounds the temple, equally remarkable with

that of Dhamayangyi for the beautiful finish of the brickwork.

To the north of this there is a second court, surrounded on three

sides by a curious range of vaulted and now dilapidated cells. We

could not ascertain the object of these, whether for the residence

of the religious order, or for the accommodation of worshippers

46 The Remains at Pagan. [No. 1,

from a distance, or merely for the deposit of images of Gautama.

No traces at least of the latter remained. At one side there was

a small house-like building, apparently once two-storied, which may

have been the residence of the Poongyee, or Prior, if this was in-

deed a conventual establishment, as it most probably was. There

was also a small tank surrounded by brick steps. The whole of

this court appeared to be of later date than the temple enclosure,

and of inferior workmanship.

The Shwé Ké or ‘Golden Cave,’ which an inscription, of which

Mr. Crawfurd has given a translation by Dr. Judson, assigns to

about the year 1552, is a very elegant and elaborately white build-

ing of no great size, and stands on an elevated terrace, within the.

city walls and near the Thapinyu. It is of the same general plan

and church-like appearance as the Gaudapalen, but with much

concentrated ornament. The projecting vestibule faces the north,

which is unusnal. In nearly all the other temples, which are not

absolutely symmetrical on the four sides, the principal entrance

is to the east. The interior is unusually light and spacious in

proportion to the area of the building. It isa square vaulted cham-

ber, in the centre of which rises a square mass of masonry support-

ing the spire, and on the four sides of which are so many

Gautamas. It contains several inscriptions; two of them, in very

clear and elegant square Burmese characters, being built into the

wall, and, as noticed by Crawfurd, covered with avery hard black

varnish so as pefectly to resemble black marble, though a knife

forcibly applied to the edge will shew the sandstone beneath.

There are several other minor temples of interest near Thapinyu.

A little to the south, and outside the ramparts, stands a group of

temples called Sem-byo-k4, to the beautiful details of which I

have several times referred. The most conspicuous of the ruins

to the westward of Thapinyu is marked by a very curious dome

and spire of the Ceylon Dagoba form, but both dome and spire

being polygons of twelve sides. This building, from several

peculiarities of aspect, is suggestive of great antiquity. The inter-

nal vault, which is of considerable height, springs from the ground

on every side. In one part of the entrance which, in its length

the thick mass of brickwork, exhibits various heights and construc-

1857. ] | The Remains at Pagan. A7

tions, a painted timber lintel has been used, now in utter decay.

Another part of the entrance vault is a ¢riangular arch (see Pl.

VY. Fig. 5,) about 9 or 10 feet in span, the outer arch which

defines the doorway being of the usual pointed form. This temple

is called Putho-Budoh-nya.

Between this and Thapinyu, an almost shapeless ruin, instead

of an arched doorway, has a massive stone lintel, now broken.

This is noticed by Crawfurd as containing Hindu sculptures. The

sculptures remain; two inside and several framed in pannels on

the exterior. ‘The figures have nearly all four arms, and have a

very Hindu character; one of them also in its action strongly

resembles the usual Hindu images of the Monkey-god Hanuman,

but the head is defaced. Major Phayre visited this temple in

company with the Woondouk, and has furnished a very interest-

ing note on the subject, which is given below.*

* Considering the very proximate derivation of the Buddhism of Burma

from the Buddhism of Ceylon, may not the following passage throw some

light on the subject. ‘The Malabar kings who at an early period had acquired

the sovereignty of Ceylon, on the failure of the native dynasty introduced the

worship of Vishnu and Shiva into the same temples with that of Buddha. The

innovation has been perpetuated, and to the present day the statues of these

conflicting divinities are to be found within the same buildings; the Diwalas

of Hindooism are erected within the same enclosures as the Wihares of the Bud-

dhists ; and the Kappoorales of the one religion officiate at the altars almost

beneath the same roof with the priests and neophytes of the other,’ (Sir J.

Emerson Tennent’s Christianity in Ceylon, p. 222.) The same singular fact is

mentioned by Mr. Hardy. (astern Monachism, p. 201.)

This is a small ruined pagoda, standing close to the Thap-pyi-nyo temple,

of the usual form of Buddhist hollow Pagodas. It has a stone-frame to the

doorway, which is unusual, This has been broken, from the imperfect con-

struction of the arched brickwork above. On either side of the doorway are

four niches in the outer wall of the building. These are all vacant but one,

in which is an erect stone-figure about eighteen inches high. It holds a lotus

bud in each hand and has a pointed crown or cap on its head. There are other

niches, on the side and back walls of the building, containing similar stone

figures. ‘These appear to be Indian in character, and one with a monkey-face

no doubt represents Hanuman.

Entering the temple, the throne, on which an image had evidently once been

placed, occupies as usual the centre of the building. It is now vacant. There

48 The Remains at Pagan. [Nock.

Some distance south of Sembyo-Ku is Thein-ma-tiet, of a size

considerably larger than the common run of the Pagan temples,

are also two empty places for upright images right and left of the throne; and

above these are deep niches for smaller images, one of which is still occupied.

An image of either kind, standing and sitting, has been displaced from the

original position, and these now lie on the ground in the temple. They are of

stone. One of the standing figures has disappeared altogether.

That which has come. from the smaller niche above is a seated figure with the

legs crossed, somewhat in the Buddha attitude. The figure has four arms, long

pendent ears, and a high cap or crown upon the head. The two left arms hold

a conch shell, and a mallet (?); the upper right hand has a ¢sek* or discus ;

the other hand is broken. The figure is supported by a ga-loon* or bird with

a man’s head. This is evidently an image of Vishnu.

The standing figure is about four feet high, and was pronounced by the

Woondouk who accompanied me, to represent the same person as the sitting

figure. This, however, is an error. It also has four arms; in the two right

hands are placed a sword and a trident, (supposed by the Burmese to be a

lotus bud.) In the left hands are a club anda mallet. The image is much dis-

figured, but its Indian anklets are visible, and beneath the feet is an animal

half broken away, but which probably represents a bull. The image no doubt

is that of Siva.

The figure up in the niche was too much concealed by the gloom to be minute-

ly observed. It was apparently riding on a bird.

The Woondouk considered the standing and the seated figures above de-

scribed as being images of Pa-ra-mee-thwa,f a Nat worshipped by Brahmans, and

that they, as well as some standing figures of plaster around the central throne,

had been introduced as subordinate guardian Nats, in honour of Buddha’s

image, which once occupied the central place. This image was no doubt of

plaster and has decayed by time.

This view of the fact of Hindu deities being introduced into a Buddhist

temple is quite consistent with the practice of the present day in Burma, At

the Shwé tsee-goon Pagoda in Pagan, which attracts more worshippers than any

other, there are in the enclosure figures of Nats to which the people make

offerings, in the very presence of Buddha’s images, though such is contrary to

the tenets of strict Buddhism.f

That these stone figures were, as supposed by Crawfurd, the principal objects

of worship in the small temple where they are found, I see no reason for con-

* The chakr and Garwr (Sansc.) are both appendages of Vishnu. (Y).

+ This term seems a corruption of Purmesiwar, applied I believe, to Siva.

t See page 226. (Y),

1857. | The Remains at Pagan. 49

though still to be classed as small among giants such as Thapinyu

and Gaudapalen. It is very much on the model of the latter, and

is surrounded by a brick enclosure-wall containing remains of other

buildings. It is full of paintings of large figures. On the wall,

against which the Gautama was placed, were some sixteen per-

sonages depicted, which looked excessively like stiff old figures of

the apostles on painted glass. In this, or another temple near it,

the whole corridor was diapered with minute paintings of Gautama

about an inch and a half square.

Not far from this, the outside brickwork having partly fallen

from a small solid conical pagoda, it became manifest that it was

a real brick-and-mortar palimpsest. It had been actually built

over another, and that other of highly finished construction, adorn-

ed with beautiful moulded tiles, &c.* This building formed a

sidering probable. I rather think with the Woondouk they were simply guar-

dian Nats around the Buddha, to whose memory the temple has been erected.

The Woondouk added, however, that these images may have been put into the

temple to attract Brahminical worshippers, which, as from indications elsewhere,

Indian workmen have apparently been employed on the Pagan temples and

sculptures, is not improbable.

* This incrustation of asacred building appears to be a common Buddhist

practice. The great Shwe Madau at Pegu is thus said to have been originally

built by two merchants, shortly after the age of Buddha, and to have been only

one cubit high, raised by the same individuals to12. (Symes’s Embassy, p. 192.)

Speaking of a great Pagoda at Bintenne near Kandy, Mr. Fergusson writes:

“The Mahawanso or great Buddhist history of Ceylon, describes the mode by

‘which this building was raised by successive additions, in a manner so illustrative

of the principle on which these relic shrines arrived at completion, that it is well

worth quoting.

The Thero Sarabhu, at the demise of the supreme Buddha receiving at his

funeral pile the thorax bone relic, brought and deposited it in that identical

dagoba [in which a lock of Buddha’s hair had been previously placed.] This

inspired personage causing a dagoba to be erected twelve cubits high, and en-

shrining it, thereon departed. The younger brother of King Devenampiatisso

(B. C. 250,) discovering this marvellous dagoba constructed another encasing it,

thirty cubits in height. King Duttagamini (B. C. 161) while residing there,

during his subjugation of the Malabars, constructed a dagoba encasing that one

eighty cubits in height. Thus was the Mohayangana dagoba completed. It is

possible that at each successive addition some new deposit was made: at least

50 The Remains at Pagén. [ No. 1.

sort of pair with another pagoda of similar appearance, in front

of a small temple of the church character, and the possible object

of the incrustation was to make it symmetrize in size with its

neighbour.

In passing eastward from the pagoda just mentioned we arrived

at the Shwé San-dau, a large and lofty pagoda of the Rangoon and

Prome type, on a high pyramidal base, and apparently once gilt.

Near it, our attention was attracted by a long gabled house, lighted

by a few small windows with flat arches in brick of a peculiar con-

struction. Looking in, at a small arched doorway, we found the

house to contain a Brobdignagian figure of Gautama recumbent

ou his side. It was built apparently of brick plastered. But a

finger of the hand from which the plaster had been knocked off,

was seen to be of sandstone gilt, as if some part at least of the

colossus had belonged to a former image of more splendid material.*

The eyes were open, and the face, which was the best part of

the figure, wore the usual placid smile. The vault of the long

chamber in which it lay was painted, rudely enough, with over-

shadowing palm-trees. The dimensions of the recumbent giant

were as follows: |

Top of diead. tontonk iat sai. hone 35 feet 5 inches.

Bork to feeti: 5 sac. sess tread 3h. eae ae VRS i

IN OBC so. Vastra nisin arsielte ame tileren Sotila ha eBe eee alc a

Wiidthwoficlyim, 3: ee eae ou eid te eee, Dy sh fuer $5

Lengthsef ear,/ .2iumneti sews, stat ea MO ee Hee si

most of the Topes examined in Afghanistan and the Punjab show signs of these

successive increments, and successive deposits, one above the other.” (Hand-book

of Architecture, 1. 9.)

The same peculiarity is found in some of the Nubian pyramids, and in the

Etrurian tombs. (Id. p. 291.)

* These gigantic figures are probably direct imitations of what ancient Bur-

man pilgrims had seen in Ceylon. At Dambool in that island, says Forbes

(I. 370,) a “chamber contains a gigantic and well executed figure of Buddha

recumbent, and the statue, as well as the couch and pillow on which he reclines,

is cut from the solid rock. This figure is 47 feet in length. The chamber is

long, narrow and dark; Gautama Buddha’s position and placid aspect, the.

stillness of the place, all tend to impress the visitor with the feeling that he is

in the chamber of death.”

1857. ] : The Remains at Pagan. 51

Preadth of shoulders, ...:.....-........ PA ges Ss s.

ePID se yyecesseecse lasses, (OO gy O i

eet yi foe .teccess.ssceee 104, 0 »

POU ae deck lad sSlsss65 ly. ee gf

11.3) Mae ee | CAS. en TAN | ve

Ree a Shas dve'nas sbi gd eles 440% 3 Rae aR) 0

On our mentioning this huge image after our return to the

steamers, a party started to visit it. They missed their way but

lighted on another, of similar character but much greater size! _

This last, I think, was stated 90 feet long.

On the east side of the Shwé San-dau was a small cromlech, of

unmistakable character used as a depository table of offerings.

It is the only thing of the kind I have heard of in the Burmese

countries, and is perhaps an accidental construction, and no relic of

primeval customs. The whole of the ground about the base of

Shwe San-dau on that side was paved with large masses of sandstone

about six feet long and ten inches thick, and this may both have

afforded the material and suggested the erection.

So much of Pagan and its remains we saw, but a vast area of

ruins remained unvisited by any of the party, and doubtless much

of interest has still to be examined. The time which we spent at

Pagan altogether was three days and a half in going up, and nearly

two days in coming down, but as nearly one whole day was

necessarily devoted to public and private letter-writing, and an-

other whole day was abstracted by an attack of fever, I should have

come away with much less material for the illustration of these

deeply interesting remains, had it not been for the kind assistance’

of Mr. Oldham, and Lieut. Heathcote.

I may conclude by introducing, not inappropriately, a note with

which Major Phayre has favoured me on the Burmese habit of serib-

bling on the walls of temples, instances of which abound at Pagan.*

* Had I thought of it sooner I might have written an amusing page or two

on the Burmese habit of scribbling upon walls. Brick walls white-washed are so

uncommon that when one is met with, the people appear to cover every corner

of it with figures drawn with charcoal, and written sentences. Their habit in

this respect is as inveterate as that of the English. Some of these writings are the

mere names of visitors to the temples, others are facetious, a few of the graye

H 2

52 Notes on the Indian species of Lyciwm. [No. 1.

Notes on the Indian species of Lycitum.—By TY. ANDERSON, Esq.

M. D. Oude Contingent.

In October, 1855, when passing through the Doab between the

Ravee and Beas, I gathered a specimen of Lycium Edgeworthii of

Dunal, a species founded ona plant sent to Dunal by Mr. Edge-

worth, from near Sirhind. The plant in my Herbarium is evi-

dently the same as that which Dunal has described, but after

most careful and repeated examination of a considerable number of

specimens in my possession, I am convinced that Dunal’s L.

Edgeworthii is only a variety of his L. Mediterraneum, the L.

Europaeum of Linneus. In order that his species L. Mediterra-

neum and L. Edgeworthii may be distinguished, he has refined their

specific characters so much, that they appear to be the descriptions

rather of trivial varieties than of permanent and well-marked species.

The differences between the specific characters of the species con-

sist of a line or two in the length of the calyx, a mark of no import-

ance, of minute differences in the length of the pedicels and pedun-

cles and of inconstant characters taken from the existence of minute

hairs at the insertion of the filaments in Lycium Edgeworthii. In

my specimens I found several flowers entirely glabrous. In Lycium

Europaeum the character is “‘ filamentis basi puberulis.”’ Characters

are also taken from the branches and spines, but the latter, in both

species, are of all shapes and sizes from a simple thorn + of an inch-

long to a spine 3 inches long, bearing leaves and flowers. Dunal

order. The following are specimens copied from the Baudhi Pagoda at Pagan.

“On the Ist day of the waning moon Dengyot 1216, A. D. 1854 Nga Phyoo,

Naga Kyen, and Ko Byeen, three persons, who live beneath the golden feet, wor-

shipped the images and Pagodas at Pagan.”

Here is another ;

“Palm juice and spirits do not drink; fowls and pigs do not kill; avoid these

(sins) that you may hereafter meet the Lord A-ri-ma-tee-ya,”* And again;

** Moung Kha and his wife have worshipped and presented offerings at all the

Pagodas—applaud! applaud!”

* Arimateeya, or Maitri, is the coming Buddha, who will be the fifth and last

of the present world-system. “No oath is considered by a Burmese with more

awe and solemnity, than to make him declare that in the event of his failing in

truth, may he never see the Boodh Arimadeya.” As. Res. XX. 178. (Y).

1857. ] Notes on the Indian species of Lycium. 53

supposes the colour of the corolla of L. Edgeworthii to be yellow :

in my specimens it is pale rose-coloured as in L. Kuropaeum.

Dunal has purposed to change the name of the Linnean L.

Europaeum to L. Mediterraneum, a change by no means applicable

to a plant widely diffused in India. I therefore retain the Linnean

name and propose the following specific character, which seems

applicable to both the Indian and Western plants.

L. Europaeum, fruticosum, cortice albido, ramis spinescentibus,

spinis teretibus, foliis 2—5 ad basin spinarum fasciculatis, obovato-

oblongis vel oblongo-cuneatis, pedicellis calyce longioribus, interdum

geminis, plerumque unifloris, calyce breviter 5—dentato glabro vel

puberulo, corolla calyce duplo longiore anguste infundibuliformi,

staminibus inclusis.

L. Europaeum, Linn, et auct.; Royle ill.

L. Mediterraneum Dun. in DOC. Prod. xiii. 523 (cum omnibus vari-

et.) L. Edgeworthit Dun. in DC. Prod. xiii. 525. L. indicum Wight

Icones t. 1403. 3

Has. in India prope Delhi Royle, Guzerat Wight, Sirhind Hdge-

worth, Panjab ad Umritsir, ZT. Anderson. |

Folia glabra vel punctulata }—1 unciam longa. Spinae axillares

nudae vel foliosae ;—1 unciam longae. Flores gemini vel saepius

solitarii e fasciculis foliorum. Calyx 5—dentatus cyathiformis 1—2

lineas longus, glaber. Corolla calyce longior infundibuliformis 4—6

lineas longa, roseo-alba. JF ilamenta filiformia inclusa inequalia,

uno cxteris breviore. Antherae parvae ovatae, basi bifidae. Stylus

eylindricus, staminibus longior. Stigma orbiculare, capitatum.

Pollen in aqua globosum. Ovarium ovatum. Bacca globosa parva.

In India, special care is required to guard against the undue

increase of species, since in this country, besides difficulties arising

from want of books of reference, natural causes make the determi-

nation of species more difficult than in Europe. One of the most

powerful of these is the sudden and complete change of climate

in many parts of the Peninsula of India, arising from the periodi-

cal recurrence of the rainy season, which often alters the Flora

from that of an arid plain to one consisting entirely of a large

number of tropical annuals. This climatic change also temporarily

affects the appearance or “ habit” of the perennial plants, causing

a wonderful luxuriance of growth and alteration of the foliage.

54 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1.

To these changes Lycium Europaeum is fully exposed. It is a native

of dry sandy plains, where before the rains it is stunted in all its

parts, but when the air and soil become charged with moisture an

expansion of all its parts takes place, fully accounting for the

multiform characters of its leaves and the diversity in the length

of the spines, ete.

feeport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey and of the Re-

searches connected with it, from November, 1855, to April, 1856.

By Rosrrt ScutaGintwetr, Lsq.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE RovrTzE.

My brother Adolphe and I left Agra on the 29th of November,

1855, and went through Dholpore and Chanda to Gwalior. We pro-

ceeded thence through a part of Bundelkund, by Dutteeah, Jhansi,

Tehri, and Dhamoonee to Saugor, which we reached on the 4th of

December.

From Saugor we took different routes. Adolphe proceeded by

Dhumow to Nagpore and Madras. I left Saugor on the 19th of

December, and proceeded by Maharajpore and Bermhan to Nur-

singpore, on the left side of the Nerbudda valley ; from thence I

proceeded by Jhansi Ghaut and Meergunge to Jubbulpore, where

I arrived on the 30th December.

The route which I followed from Saugor to Jubbulpore afforded

me the gratifying opportunity of examining the large deposits of

fossil remains of elephants, rhinoceros, hippopotami, &c., which are

exposed on the sides of the Nerbudda valley, and I have been able

to obtain a tolerably good collection of specimens.

During a stay of six days at Jubbulpore, I was engaged with a

series of barometrical and meteorological observations, and with

some experiments on the composition of the atmosphere, which were

afterwards repeated on the Umerkuntuk Hills.

1857. | Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 53

I started from Jubbulpore on the 6th of January, and went by

Mundlah, Ramgurh, Goruckpore and Karenchia up to Umerkuntuk

which forms a very important part of the water-shed of Central

India. Near it are the sources of the Soane and Tohilla, of the

Nerbudda, and of the Yrap, an affluent of the Mahanuddy.

I arrived at Umerkuntuk on the 20th of January, 1856, iid

having set up my meteorological instruments, which were regularly

registered during my stay, I made excursions to the sources of the

Tohila and Soane, and up to the summit of Rajmeergurh Hill, which

is one of the highest points of the Mekul range, East of Umerkun-

tuk. |

The plateau of Umerkuntuk afforded me a favourable opportunity

of making physical and meteorological experiments, and though the

absolute elevation is not very considerable (3,290 to 3,330 English

feet,) the data obtained for the decrease of the temperature of the air,

and of the ground, &c., may not prove without some interest for the

physical geography of Central India, when compared with similar data

obtained in the Himalayas, the Neilgherries, and Khasia Hills, &e.

I left Umerkuntuk on the 26th January, and proceeded vid Pain-

dra, Moonda, and Amukpore to Sohagpore; thence in a Northerly

direction, through Kanrodi and Ramnuggur, crossing the Soane

River twice, to Rewah, where I arrived on the 11th of February.

By Mungown and Sohagi, I went to Allahabad, and thence along

the Grand ‘Trunk Road to Agra, where I arrived on the 21st of

February.

At Agra the whole of the collections sent down last year from

the Himalayas, and those made during this cold season, were care-

fully re-packed for the purpose of being sent to England.

I left Agra on the 8th of March, and travelled wid Delhi to Saha-

runpore, and thence to Nahun, where I was engaged, for several

days, examining the geological structure of the Sewalik range. I

obtained many interesting tertiary fossils from various localities in

the Sewaliks.

I marched through Dugshaie to Simla, where I arrived on the

25th of March.

The observations made in the outer ranges of the Himalayas, and

in various localities in the environs of Simla, will be reserved for

the next Report, treating of the Himalayas.

56 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1.

METEOROLOGY.

Besides the daily registry of dry and wet bulb thermometers and

barometers, whilst on the march, a longer series of observations was

made at Saugor, Bermhan, Jubbulpore and Umerkuntuk ; at Sohag-

pore, Allahabad, Agra and Simla. These observations seem to lead

to the following conclusions.

The minimum temperature of the air was very regularly observed

to set in just before sun-rise, but there was never to be observed a

second depression of temperature immediately after sun-rise, as we

had observed in the Indian Seas in October, 1854.

The increase of temperature from sun-rise up to 11 o’clock a. Mm.

is specially rapid between the hours of 8 and 9 a. mu. I often no-

ticed an increase of temperature of 4 to 5 degrees centigrade

between these two hours.

The total increase from sun-rise to 11 o’clock was, at Saugor,

(15th to 19th December,) as much as 28 degrees centigrade; at

Jubbulpore it was from 12 to 15 degrees ; but at Umerkuntuk (20th

to 26th January) the difference between sun-rise and 11 o’clock

A. M. was only 83 to 9 degrees centigrade. Between 11 a. m. and

4 p. M., the variation of temperature was generally not very great—

not more than 3 or 4 degrees centigrade; but the decrease of tem-

perature between 4 Pp. M. and 7 P. M. was very rapid.

East of Jubbulpore, at Ramgurh, and as far as Umerkuntuk, the

minimum temperature of the day was very near the freezing point;

but I never observed a temperature lower than 382 degrees Fahren-

heit, or 0 degrees centigrade.

There was quite regularly a hoar-frost setting in, even if the mi-

nimum temperature of the air was 2 or 3 degrees above the freezing

point. The hoar-frost was produced by the great radiation of the

leaves and grass during the serene nights.

At Umerkuntuk itself I observed some remarkable irregularities of

temperature. Considering the cold temperatures experienced in the

stations of the Nerbudda valley, Westward of Umerkuntuk, it might

be expected to find the minimum temperature of the night at Umer-

kuntuk below zero; but on the contrary the minimum temperature

of the air on the plateau, at the end of January, was constantly 9

degrees and even 12 degrees centigrade above the freezing point.

1857. Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 57

It was therefore considerably warmer than the minimum of the val-

leys at the foot of the plateau. Besides the minimum does not

take place just before sun-rise, but one or one-and-a-half hour

earlier. The reason of this phenomenon is that during the night,

the cold air, which is heavier, flows down along the sides of the hills,

and accumulates at the bottom of the valleys, whilst at the top of

the small plateau itself, the cold air, which is locally formed by the

radiation of leaves and grass, is immediately carried away by the

winds into the surrounding atmosphere and re-placed by somewhat

warmer air. .

During the day-time the temperature at the top of Umerkuntuk

is of course much lower than in the valleys below. During my

stay there the highest observed temperature was 75 degrees Fahren-

heit, exceeding by 5 degrees Fahrenheit the maximum temperature

of all the other days.

There was only one day quite free of clouds during my stay at

Umerkuntuk. Generally, soon after 8 o’clock a. mM. quantities of

cirri dispersed all over the sky, and mitigated the full power of the

sun’s rays: they only dissolved themselves partially in the evening

before sun-set, some portions remaining even during the night.

Some rain fell on the 29th and 30th of January. It appeared to

have extended over a large area, and greatly affected the temper-

ature of the air, cooling it down so that the maximum temperature

was lowered more than 5 degrees.

From Jubbulpore up to Umerkuntuk, a strong South-West or

South wind set in very regularly between 9 and 10 a. m., and con-

tinued till 5 or 5-30 Pp. m. The nights were constantly calm. At

Umerkuntuk the wind blew from the same direction, but it was

quite calm during the rain falls. There was not the least wind on

the journey from Paindra to Rewah, where again a South-West wind

began.

_ Comparing my meteorological observations with those made during

the cold season of 1854-55 by my brothers and myself, in the

Southern parts of India, the Deccan, Mysore, &c., I find that in

Southern India there is, at equal elevations, never so cold a temper-

ature as I observed this season in Central India, in the valley of

the Nerbudda, &c.

58 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1.

In connexion with this fact it deserves mention, that in summer

the reverse takes place, and that the maximum heat of Central India,

at equal elevations, generally exceeds somewhat that of Southern

India.

Together with the observations of the dry and wet bulb thermo-

meters, the readings of the barometer were registered, and I have

been able to determine the heights of all important places on the

route followed. Some stations were determined both by the baro-

meter and the boiling point thermometer, which from its minute

and accurate divisions (each degree of Celsius is divided into 100

parts) and having been carefully compared at different heights with

barometers, may be considered as giving equally accurate results with

the barometer itself. On the journey from Sohagpore to Rewah,

I used only this instrument, as the barometer was leaking very much,

and some air had introduced itself into it.

The minimum of barometric pressure at about 4 P. mu. occurred

on the small plateau of Umerkuntuk, very nearly at the same time

as in the lower valleys and plains of Hindustan, and the daily vari-

ation of the barometer seems to be very nearly the same at Umer-

kuntuk as it is in the plains.

‘he temperature of the earth at different depths was determined

by the long thermometer (one metre in length.) For greater depths

I used a thermometer, the bulb of which was made extremely in-

sensible. The observations of the temperature of the ground at

Umerkuntuk, compared with similar data around the base of the

hill, afford some curious examples of the cooling influences which

extensive jungles have, upon the temperature of the ground. . At

Umerkuntuk the temperature was, 22nd to 25th January—

At one metre below the surface,............21° 2° Centigrade.

», two metres, WS UREN AN8 ANTAD | 21° 5 be

At Paindra, more than 1,000 feet lower than Umerkuntuk, the

temperature was, 27th to 29th of January—

At one metre below the surface,............ 20° 0’ Centigrade.

,», two metres, pM rare ae LU 21° 0’ i

I observed similar differences at Ramgurh, and at some other

stations West and North of Umerkuntuk, which are all 1,000 to

1,300 feet lower than the plateau.

1857.]| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 59

This anomalous phenomenon seems to be due to the following

causes. ;

The plateau of Umerkuntuk itself has comparatively little jun-

gle, and the ground is exposed freely to the action of the sun.

Round the base of Umerkuntuk, and especially on the slopes of the

hills, very thick and extensive jungles prevail, which keep the

ground moist and cool, as they prevent the heating of the surface

by the powerful tropical sun.

The meteorological observations which I had occasion to make

in many parts of the jungles of Central India, as well as those of

my brother Hermann in Assam, and of my brother Adolphe in the

Godavery jungles, offer many striking examples of the cooling

influence which extensive jungles exercise in India on the temper-

ature of the ground, as well as on the atmosphere.

The anomalous cooling of the ground by jungles is still more

apparent than the difference of temperature in the air of jungles

when compared with open districts, since the differences in the

temperature of the air are much more equalized by winds and atmo-

spheric currents.

At AgraI was enabled, through the kind assistance of Colonel J. T.

Boileau, the Chief Engineer, to ascertain the temperature of the earth

nearly 50 feet below the surface. The insensible thermometer was

sunk in a small shaft dug for the purpose, and remained buried there

for a fortnight before it was taken up. The temperature was, from

the 22nd of February to the 4th of March, 28° 3/ centigrade, equal

to 82°9 Fahrenheit. The temperature thus observed accords,

within one degree, with the temperature of the earth at about 60

feet below the surface, ascertained at Benares in April 1855. The

temperature at one metre below the surface at Agra was only 25

degrees centigrade, as the upper strata had been cooled by the

influence of the past cold season.

The temperature of the wells at Agra was always a little lower

than that of the ground, thus directly ascertained. As an average

of several welis from which a large quantity of water was constantly

drawn for domestic purposes and irrigation, I obtained 27° 6' to

27° 8’ centigrade.

60 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1.

The temperature of water in wells, which are but little used, is

considerably cooler than that of wells from which water is con-

stantly drawn, as the cold air which sinks down during the night

into the wells cools stagnant water much more than it can do the

water of wells which is constantly removed.

Asa curious phenomenon connected with Physical Geography,

I finally beg to mention the way in which the jungles are distributed

in Central India.

The base and slope of the hills, and the valleys between them,

are generally covered with very dense and extensive jungles, but

the summit of the flat hills and small plateaux which occur in many

localities, are nearly always quite bare and destitute of trees and

jungly vegetation. 1 had been informed by my brothers, that this

very curious phenomenon occurs all along the Southern parts of the

Khasia and Jynteah Hills, and on the plateau of the Neilgher-

ries.

This phenomenon seems to be due, in part, to the very strong

winds which sweep over those isolated plateaux and which evident-

ly must be very injurious to jungle vegetation. . Another impor-

tant. cause is, the want of moisture in these isolated plateaux.

The geological results obtained in the journey from Agra to

Saugor will be contained in the Report which my brother Adolphe

will have the honour to submit to Government; I shall therefore

content myself by mentioning some geological results to which the

investigation of the country visited by me alone seems to lead.

In the valley of the Nerbudda some interesting deposits of fossil

remains occur. The larger deposits are found from Bermhan up

to Mundlah, the bones are found in a brown alluvial clay, and

belong to species of elephants, rhinoceros, hippopotami, buffaloes,

&c. I also found with the bones well preserved fossil shells of

Unio, Melania, and other fresh-water species. A comparison of

these fossil shells with those now living in the Nerbudda, and in

various tanks of Central India, of which I collected a large number,

will assist in determining the geological age of the fossiliferous

deposits of the Nerbudda valley.

From Jubbulpore to Umerkuntuk the prevailing rock is black

trap, identical with the trap of the Deccan.

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 61

I found in several localities the thin lacustrine deposit, which

reposes on trap, and is again overlaied by other layers of trap.

In some places it was full of fossil fresh-water shells of Physa,

Unio, Melania, &e.

The principal fossiliferous localities which I visited were Phool

Saugor, about 9 miles west of Mundlah, Bellasur, and Bonder.

The plateau of Umerkuntuk is one of the culminating points

of Central India and this place, and the hills in its neighbourhood,

form the important water-shed of Central India, between the

Rivers Nerbudda, Soane, Tohilla, and Mahanuddy. The plateau of

Umerkuntuk is not very large—it is nearly circular, and surround-

ed by hills, which are only 50 to 60 English feet higher. The

slopes are very steep to the East and South, whilst they are much

more gentle to the West and North. The hills run from Umer-

kuntuk first in a Northerly direction, and then turn to the North-

West. They are generally known by the inhabitants under the

name of Mokul. The highest point of this range is probably

Rajmeergurh, near Umerkuntuk, which it exceeds by about 500

English feet—the latter place itself is about 3,290 to 3,830 English

feet.

The Nerbudda alone rises on the plateau of Umerkuntuk. It

has its origin in a tank or pool, surrounded in the most irregular

way, with solid masonry and fine temples :—one of the oldest of

them seems to me to be a Jain (Buddhist) temple. The tank is fed

by subterranean springs, and the origin of the Nerbudda is thus

precisely similar to that of the Kistna, on the plateau of Maha-

baleshwur in the Deccan.

I determined the quantity of water at the spot where the Ner-

budda flows out of the tank, and found it to be, on the 23rd of

January, only two French litres per second. But very soon this

little rivulet is met by the waters of two other springs, and only

a few miles from its source it is joined by the waters of two more

springs, and forms a beautiful cataract of about 70 English feet.

The Soane has not its rise at Umerkuntuk, but to the East of

the hill, and about 1,200 feet lower than the Nerbudda in an open

partially cultivated spot, from a tank called Sone Budder, 8 miles

62 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 1.

Kast of Paindra, and forms a swampy marshy place over a consider-

able extent.

The Tohilla rises about 5 miles North of the Nerbudda, at a

place called Tohaletsur, nearly on a level with the Nerbudda,

The Yrap, a small river, which flows to the South, and joins the

Mahanuddy, has its origin near Paindra, from several large tanks,

forming at first a swampy ground. Its source is situated about

5 or 6 miles from that of the Soane, and its water-shed is not

formed by a distinct ridge, but only by a slight rising of the ground.

On the journey from Sohagpore through Rewah to Allahabad,

I took the opportunity of carrying a barometric and geological

section over the plateau of Bundelkund.

The plateau, or rather the succession of plateaux, consists of

a reddish and white sandstone, in large banks, which are generally

horizontal—it reposes upon limestone and shales of blue and grey

colours, which very often are a little more inclined than the sand-

stone, and the shalesare quite identical with similar rocks which

I observed in the Gwalior Territory. The plateau of Bundelkund

terminates abruptly about 40 miles South of Allahabad, where the

sandy deposits of the plain of Hindustan begin.

Simlah, 27th May, 1856.

1857]

Mean temperature and fall of rain in Darjiling. 63

Mean temperature and fall of rain in Darjiling, Sikhim Himalayah,

1848 ¢o 1855.—By J. R. Wirnecomss, MW. D. Civil Surgeon.

Months.

September,

October, ...

Peeeoe

eeeneer

eee eee

Julla Pahar

7500 feet above

the sea.

Average.

pe 58.53 60.49] 59.51) 59.14

.| 61.42) 62.12] 61.77) 63.59

.| 63.23] 62.87] 63.05) 63.69

63.28] 61.81] 62.54) 63.26

60.13) 62.78) 61.45) 62.32

55.81| 55.93) 55.87| 61.85

48.49] 48.38) 48.43 | 54.48

Civil Station Hospital

6902 feet above the sea.

Mean Temperature.

1850-51.

1851-52

43.08) 41.96] 42.52) 55.89] 44.86

40.04) 42.24] 41.14) 40.96] 42.25

40.77| 41.93) 41.33} 41.79] 47.17

50.13) 48.38) 49.26) 51.91) 47.23

59.53] 56.77] 58.65] 55.71] 54.43

Se se SS |

53.79] 53.80] 53.79) 55.38] 55.57

1852-53

1853-54.

Average.

—————S eee Eee ee

61.60) 59.40} 61.35) 60.37

62.57| 62.15) 64.34) 63.16

63.80) 63.07; 65.26] 63.96

64..41| 63.80] 64.13) 63.90

63.23] 62.09] 62.02] 62.42

58.89) 56.40) 56.71] 58.46

50.41] 48.05] 49.28] 50.56

42.75) 45,29} 44.70

36.79) 45.85] 41.46

47.23) 42.01] 45.55

52.83| 51.47| 50.86

57.74 53.83] 55.43

—S— S| | —_

54.36] 55.13} 54.99

Observatory

7168 feet

above the

sea.

1854-55.

59.90

61.66

62.70

62.59

60.89

57.86

51.09

47.30

39.42

41.93

49.36

52.58

53.94:

64 Mean temperature and fall of rain in Davjiling.

Rain 1n INCHES.

1850-51. | 1851-52. | 1852-53. | 1853-54. | 1854-55.

en | RS |S

May, - as a | 6.75

June,, . os ...| 30.55 31.00

Sully, 9 Rh wee| 32.02 27.15

August, ... ...| 40.02 | 16.70

September, eee| 20.00 19.60

October, ... Ke .00 9.35

November, oi -00 1.50

December, ae 00 .05

January, v. stall eno 3.45

February, Lal) pee 2.40

March, ... «| 4.40 4.00

Artie ors ne 5D 4.55

Total fall of rain,,..| 135.08 | 126.50

17.40

2.70

114.50

1.00

118.18

a |

147.43

[Nord

Average

for 5 years.

5.28

29.26

28.52

28.85

20.60

3.64

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For January, 1857.

LPO LPO DLO VPALDIIAA

At the annual general meeting of the Society, held on the 7th

January, 1857,

Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt. President, in the Chair.

The Secretary read the following

REPORT.

The Council of the Asiatic Society have the satisfaction of sub-

mitting their annual report exhibiting the Society’s transactions,

and the state of its affairs during the past year.

The number of ordinary members resident in India at the close

Ordinary. Paying. Absent. of every year since 1851 has re-

124 6

1851.. 130 . .

1852. 139 122 7 Be. nearly praeeonanyE rang-

1853... 146 123 23 ing between 122 in 1852, and

1854.. 155 129 26 Sd cadth t Dari

1855. = 162 128 34. RE eee eee ZanS

1856.. 167 131 36 the last twelve months there has

been an accession of 19 new members. The loss has been alto-

gether 14, of which 7 have been removed by death, 6 by retirement,

and one (Dwarika Nath Basu) under bye law 13 of the Society’s

rules,

It will thus be seen that during the past year, there has been an

addition of only 5 to the number of members. The entire list con-

tains 167 names, inclusive of those absent.in Europe.

66 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

The obituary includes the names of Major General Sir W. H.

Sleeman, K.C.B., Dr. Montgomerie, Lieut. Chancey, Raja Sattya-

charan Ghosal, Raja Sriesh Chandra Raya, and Messrs. Houstoun

and R. W. G. Frith.

Dr. Montgomerie was a zealous and disinterested promoter of

the objects of the Society, and as the discoverer of Gutta Percha

had received the gold medal of the Society of Arts of London.

Mr. Frith was distinguished for his devotion to the science of

Entomology.

By the death of the Rev. Dr. Buckland, the Society ee lost one

of its most distinguished honorary members.

The names of Professor Langlois and Mons. Marcel have also

to be removed from the list, and the Society has to deplore the loss

which the cause of Oriental literature must suffer from the demise

of these two distinguished savans, the intelligence of whose death

only reached India a few months ago.

Seven corresponding members have been elected during the last

twelve months, some of whom are Oriental scholars, or are other-

wise distinguished for their literary or scientific attainments.

Finance.—The abstract statement No. 1 annexed to the report

shews the receipts of 1856 to have been Rs. 18,204-7-1, which add-

ed to the balance of the preceding year (Rs. 6,251-18-8) make the

total of Rs. 24,456-4-9.

The disbursements amount to Rs. 17,321-6-5, inclusive of the

sum of Rs. 2,500 advanced to the Oriental Publication Fund as a

temporary loan, and which must be considered a part of the balance.

The total liabilities amount to Rs. 3,605-9-4, while the cash ba-

lance in hand is Rs. 6,664-14-1, to which is to be added the sum of

Rs. 2,500, advanced to the Oriental Fund, making a total of Rs.

9,164-14-1. In addition to this, there are outstanding assets to the

extent of Rs. 8,908-3-8.

Of the outstanding sums due to the Society, shown in the report

of 1855, Rs. 485-4 have been written off to Profit and Loss as un-

realizable subscriptions due from deceased members, and although

there are still several items of a similar nature, yet the Council are

not without hopes that opportunities may occur for recovering a

considerable portion of them.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 67

The marginal estimate of the probable income and expenditure of

ak ee ree the next year will be found to fall

Contributions, .. _.. 8,0000 short of that of previous years, sim-

Government Grant at 300 .. 3,600 0

Sale of Books, .. .. 1,0000 ply because the amount of the

Journal, .. as -- 8009 Government Grant for the Museum

Interest, .. oe « 2200

Miscellaneous, .. -- 100 of Economic Geology has ceased to

13.5309 be borne in the accounts, in conse-

: ’

——— quence of the removal of that es-

Monthly average .. seal 278

tablishment, and the cessation of

Expenditure, he allowance from September last.

Zoological Museum, -- 4,200 0 adil ’ Pr

Library—Estabt. 936 0 0 The subject of reducing the rate

Eee eaing, (200.0 0 of subscription to the Society from

Purchase of

; books, .. 65000 Rs. 16 to 10 per quarter was

ti 1 114 00 : x

ree aie 2,000 0 brought forward for final discussion

Estabt. General, -- 1,800 0 and decision in September last.

Journal, os) 22,1000 slice :

Miscellaneous, including The proposition was orginally

Building, -- 12000 moved by Major Thuillier in Noy,

Deposit, oe 72 0

1855. The Council after careful

deliberation reported against the

Monthly average, .. 997108 expediency of the proposed change,

| and the question having been refer-

11,972 0

red to the Society at large, and the votes of absent members solicited

under bye-law 45, the motion was negatived at a special meeting,

held in September last, the number of suffrages obtained in favour

of the motion being 25, whilst 23 were given against it.

Library. Considerable improvement has been effected in the

preservation and arrangement of the books. Much, however, yet re-

mains to be done in the way of enriching the contents of the Library.

Nearly 250 vols. have been added during the year, a considerable

portion of which are donations from authors and learned societies.

The leading Scientific periodicals of Europe, obtained either by pur-

chase or exchange, are from time to time laid on the table of the new

reading-room for perusal.

A. new catalogue of the Library has been published, copies of which

may be had by members free of charge by application to the

Librarian. The price to non-subscribers has ben fixed at 3 Rupees

a copy.

K 2

68 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No.1

The Coin Cabinet of the Society has received an addition of 17

gold coins from the Government of the N. W. Provinces, and a few

silver coins of historic importance have been contributed by several

gentlemen.

The Government of India having resolved upon establishing a

separate Geological Museum in connection with the Geological

Survey, has directed the transfer to the proposed institution of its

Museum of Economic Geology which has been in charge of the So-

ciety since 1841. :

By this arrangement the Society has lost the valuable services of

Mr. Piddington, who, besides taking charge of the Government

Museum of Economic Geology, has hitherto had the care of the

Society’s own collections of minerals and rocks.

The accession of new specimens in this department has been re-

corded by the Curators. They include amongst others a superb

meteorite from Sougoule presented by Mr. Grote ; a valuable collec-

tion of fossils from Kohat by Lieut. Trotter ; a fine specimen of the

scarce mineral Condrodite from Nagpore, by the Rev. 8. Hislop; a

box of minerals and specimens illustrating the different stages of

‘metallurgical processes, particularly of the manufacture of iron

from Col. Tremenhere; and a valuable series of Casts of Sewalik

fossils from the Museum of the India House, presented by the

Hon’ble Court of Directors.

The Museum continues to be a source of considerable attraction

Nov. 18th to 29th being 12 days open to the public, and that it is duly

Natives, Europeans. appreciated is best shewn by the

Male Female Male Female Total. ;

9889 81 65 19 3054 numbers who daily resort to the

December 26 days open.

rooms. ery few persons having

Sea 205 588 118 eg Ooms Wery: P 8

hitherto recorded their names in

9303 the visitors’ book, the Jemadar was

directed in the middle of November last to note carefully the name

and sex of every visitor who expressed either an inability or a reluc-

tance to write. The average thus obtained appears to have exceed-

ed 240 persons a day, as shewn in the margin.

Journal.—Six Nos. of the Journal have already been issued, and

another, which will be the last of the year, is in the press, and

nearly ready for publication. Of these No. VII contains a complete

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society, 69

and efficient Index to the last two volumes of the Researches, and

the first 23 vols. of the Journal.

It is hoped that this publication will supply a desideratum which

has been long felt by all who have occasion to consult the pages of

the Society’s transactions, and render the varied and valuable matter

contained in the volumes accessible, not merely to our own members,

but to the public at large.

Officers. Babu Gour Doss Bysack was appointed in March last

Assistant Secretary and Librarian in place of Babu Rajendralal

Mittra resigned, whose valuable services have received the public

acknowledgment of the Society, as recorded in the proceedings of

February last. His successor has been very regular and assiduous

in the discharge of his duties.

Oriental Fund. It has been found that from the rapid issue of

the Nos. of the Bibliotheca Indica during the last three years, the

demands upon the Oriental Fund have far exceeded its resources.

The activity of the several editors had pushed the publication of the

series beyond the limits warranted by the Government allowance,

and the consequence has been, the accumulation of heavy liabilities

which have been the subject of remark both by the local and home

Government.

It has therefore been resolved that the publication should be

suspended until provision is made for the liquidation of the debts.

The principles on which the Bibliotheca Indica has lately been

conducted were likewise made the subject of animadversion by Pro-

fessor Horace Hayman Wilson, and the Hon’ble Court of Directors.

They drew the attention of the Society to the disproportion of the

Arabic to the Sanscrit publications, which they considered in-

consistent with the comparative claims of the two departments of

literature, and dwelt on the importance of confining the appropria-

tion of the grant to the encouragement of the Sanscrit language,

except in the case of works illustrative of the history or social con-

dition of India.

The Society without concurring in the wisdom of restricting the

Bibliotheca Indica to Sanscrit works, or to works relating exclusively

to India, have expressed every disposition to be guided by the views

advanced by the learned Professor and the Hon’ble Court.

70 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

The Council are glad to add that the liabilities of the Oriental

Fund have been considerably reduced within the last year.

During the last twelve months only 8 Nos. of the Bibliotheca

Indica have been issued, of which 5 are Sanscrit and 3 Arabic.

The names of the works are :—

1.—The Taittiriya Saihité of the Black Yajur Veda, edited by

Dr. E. Roer, Nos. 188, 184 and 187.

2.—The Brihad Aranyaka Upanishad, edited by Dr. Roer, No.

135.

3.—A Biographical Dictionary of Persons who knew Mahommed,

edited by Moulavies Mahamed Wayzeh Abdul Hagqgq and Golam

Kadir, and Dr. Sprenger, Nos. 186 and 138.

4.—Waquidy’s History of Mahamed’s Campaign, edited by A.

Von Kremer, No. 139. .

5.—The Markandeya Purana, edited by the Rev. K. M. Banerjea,

No. 140.

It will be observed that these numbers are in continuation of

works already undertaken. No new work has been commenced nor

will be, until the unfinished editions are completed, which will be a

work of time in consequence of the extent to which the resources of

the Fund have been anticipated.

With the conclusion of the works in hand, the present series of

the Bibliotheca Indica will be brought to a close, and it is the opinion

of the Council that a new series should not be commenced without a

careful revision of the rules under which the publication has been

conducted. .

The report was adopted.

The meeting then proceeded to ballot for the Council and Officers

for the ensuing year. Captain Sherwill and Mr. Gordon Young,

were appointed Scrutineers, and at the close of the ballot, the Chair-

man announced the following result :—

Hon’sie Str J. W. Cotvine, Kr. President.

Bisu Rameorat GuHosse,

Dr. G. G. SprnsBuRy, j YienPresidente

A. Grorr, Esq.

Dr. H. Waker.

C. Brapon, Esa.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. fu

Dr. T. THomson.

Dr. T. Boycort.

Capt. C. B. Youna.

BAsu RamAprasaDd Roy.

E. A. Samuvetts, Esq.

T. OLtpHAM, Esq.

Masor STRacHeEY.

W.S. Arxryson, Esq.

Joint Se es.

Bdzu RAsenpRavAL Mirra. i oint Secretaries

The question of transferring the Society’s Geological collections

to the new Government Museum, as proposed in the letter (dated

11th July last) from the Government of India, laid before the So-

ciety at the August Meeting, was taken into consideration. The

Secretary announced that 8 non-resident members out of 55 had

replied to the Circular which was addressed to them, requesting

their votes on the subject of the transfer, two voted in favour of, and

6 against the transfer. Such of the letters as contained remarks

were then read, and several members having addressed the meeting

the question was put to the vote, and negatived by a majority of one.

For. Against.

PNOMTORICENLSY \'a.. suis to es ce. 2 6

epienteee. sao. nthe. so. 2 9

14 15

The meeting then separated.

72 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

STATEMENT

Abstract of the Cash Account of the Asiatic

RECEIPTS.

1855. 1856.

CONTRIBUTIONS, 7,166 0 0

Received from Members, ... A oe e 8,096 0 0

ADMISssIon FEE, 512 0 O

Received from new Members, me ue ae 448 0 0

JOURNAL, 784 8 O

Sale Proceeds of, and Subscription to |

the Journal of the Asiatic Society, .. = és 768 10 0

LIBRARY, - 631 14 O

Sale Proceeds of Books, .. - neon -, 1,628 13. 9

- ss of Bookshelves, 00 0 38 4 O

1,662 1 9

MusrEvum oF ZooLoey, 3,662 10 6

Reeeived from the General Treasury

at 300 Rs. per month, .. oe <s -- 3,600 0 0

Museum oF Eco. Grotoay, 3,768 0 0

Received from the General Treasury

at 314 Rs. per month up to

September, 1856, a ee : -- £2,826 00

SECRETARY'S OFFICE, SGT 8

Discount on Postage Stamps, ae Bs 2 Bie

Fine, ie % i * 1.0.6

Refund of Postage, a ate ale 2-7 NG

fee 5.8 3

Carried over, 17,405 15 0

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 73

No.1.

Society for 1856.

DISBURSEMENTS.

1855. 1856.

JOURNAL, ae ... 2,631 14 0

Freight, ie ae be 7210 0

Printing Charges, shia sles ... 2,483 12 9

Engraving, wes he ate sce 28 0 0

Colouring, as afr bec oles 45 0 0

Lithographing, ... Soe = stg DOS.) 4. O

Purchase of Journal, ¥e wi 10, 8 0

Commission on sale of Books, Aes Ae TO: 14y 5

Petty Charges, .... ae 35 2 6

Correcting and Checking Index for J ournal, 2 hatte o8 9! 0

La Or Cag 9 919049 Sg

LIBRARY, ene . 2,335 9 1

Salary of the Librarian, 12 mths. at 7 OY pr mth) 7.2.) -S40, 0,0

Establishment, ditto, at 8 a month, | }.. ae 96° 0.0

Purchase of Books, oa be a) Ere

Freight, - cae a sae 62 4 O

Book-binding, ... sca aa 30k 10 “6

Commission on sale of Books, Nits no PLB a Giant

New Book cases, a aes ww 460 0 0

Petty Charges, ... seh us sits 33 1 0

Stationery, 3st aed a 32 LSP O

Postage, : Lae ose wae 4 8 0

Bill of Lading, ... Use sate bt 0 2 0

Labelling Shelves, ade sen an 510 0

Copying Charges, ge ae boc 1 0.0

Repairing Plaster Figures, ... ee a tay 0° 0

ele Dee ana t |

MuUsEvUM oF ZooLoey. we e008. 4c 0

Salary of the Curator E. Blyth, Esq. at 250 pr.m.12 ms. 3,000 O 0

House-rent, at 40 per month, 12 do... wwe) SOO OKO

Establishment, at 35 per month, 12 do. ste hry 420) 40y 0

Contingent Charges, ae newts LOCK) 25.0

Landing Charges, sae eh ane )

Postage, sa en Hid Sie ae

Stoppered Bottles, bss rah he ayo 0

ees 4fao) 13) 6

Museum or Economic Gronoey, 3,711 5 6

Salary of the Curator H. Piddington, opt

up to September, at 250 per month, eer oO: y Ove

Establishment, ae ae Colbne@ JO

Contingent Charges, a = ee ela 12"

nee 2,779 12 6

SECRETARY'S OFFICE, 1,968 5 9

General Establishment ie a. THO LRTO

Secretary’s Office Establishment, at 54, . i, 648 ¢. O

Freight, oe a 4 @ 0

Detogrephing bills, circular, "ke. ots 1 Zi is

Carried over, 1,448 14 312,043 6 1

74 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

[ No. 1.

Brought forward, Co.’s Rs. 17,405 15 0

VersteD Funp. ZO 8

Interest on Company’s Paper from the Govern-

ment Agent,

Interest on 2,500 Rs. Sinaieee to the ©. Pp. Fund

from 16th Jan. to 31st Dec. 1856, at 4 per

cent. uae wae

GENERAL ESTABLISHMENT,

Fine,

Deposit Account.

On Account Spilsbury sana ae ane

F. E. Hall, Esq. : sok ee

ESP. Riddell, Esq. a he ote

Major J. C. Hannyngton,

C. Gubbins, Esq. a

W. T. Blanford, Esq.

R. Spankie, Esq.

Rey. 8S. Hislop,

Raja Apurva Krishna Deb,

Stacy Corn CoLLEcrion.

Received from Major General Hon’ble J. Low his

subscription to the Fund,

WILLIAMS AND NorGATE.

Received from Raja Aptrva Krishna by transfer

from Deposit Account,

, from Raja Radhacaunt Deb,

», from Rajendralal Mittra,

Lieut. R. STEWART.

Refund of Postage, a bes “0

W. Morr, Esq.

Refund of Postage,

Rev. 8. Hiszor.

Refund of Postage, aii baa

29 14

95 13

ooooooooeo

125 12 1

216 11 O

402 0 0

010 0

Carried over, 18,204 7 1

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 75

Brought forward, Co,’s Rs. 1,443 14 312,048 6 1

Printing Charges, ate Aa an pC |

Stationery, ne ave a $2 70

Petty Charges, ... a ae 38 4 9

Postage, “5 sae 120

Copying Charges, 5 0 0

Tin boxes for Cash, and Secretary, Ba 11 4 0

——_—_—_——_ 1,720 15 10

Deposit ACCOUNT, ... aw OFS OAL! 'O

Rev. 8. Hislop on account, 5 0 0

Babu Dwarka Nath Chatterjee, 66 8 O

F, E. Hall, Esq. on account Contribution and Postage wy 82 ed

C. Gubbins, Esq. . 48 0 0

Major M. it Loftie, 16 0 0

Hon'ble Capt. Byng, 48 0 0

Major Hannyngton, 64 0 0

Raja Aptrva Krishna Deb "by transfer to Messrs.

Williams and Norgate, a LOO O70

R. Spankie, Esq. = 16 0 O

395 9 0

MISCELLANEOUS, ... we 2a@ Ll 8

Petty Charges on account of Meetings, ... 181 14 0

Advertising Meetings, fas 31 0 0

Repairing a Clock, : ua ane 10 0 O

Varnish to different pictures, das we NO... 2ew.'Q,

— 233 0 0

WIttiaMs AND NorGATE, ou ee OF.0

Purchase of Books on their account, 17 4 0

Freight, ai ae 5 0 0

—_—— 22 4 0

BUILDING, AK a 272 1a. O

Assessment, ae sa a) ese 2

Sundry Repairs, ane Se 1610 O

Laying Khoa on the Compound, MS ess 59 10 6

404 6 6

OrrentTaL PusiicaTion Funp.

Paid a Loan, ... ose see v9, oa) 2,000 0:0

Lievr. R, Stewart.

Postage Stamps paid on his account, ... - ae 0.12 0

W. Moir, Esa.

Postage Stamps paid on his account, .. ove QO oF G

J. Nicorson, Esq.

Postage Stamps paid on his account, ,,, 0 8 0

Carried over, 17,321 6 5

L 2

76 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1.

BALANCE OF 1855.

Bank of Bengal,

Cash in hand,

Inefficient Balance, —

The 31st Dec., 1856.

Gour Doss BysAcx.

Asst. Sec.

Brought forward, Co.’s Rs. 18,204 7 1

.. 5,820 13 7

62 107

——-'' 5,883 8°12

B68 5 Me

aos Sie ee) 2G BEI 19-8

24,456 4 9

LI ET LIS PES BES IS

1857.]

BALANCE.

Bank of Bengal,

Cash in hand,

Inefficient Balance,

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 77

Brought forward, Co.’s Rs. 17,321 6 5

...6,574 14 10

15 3

6,664.14 1

470 0 3 7,18414 4

24,456 4 9

W.S. ATKINSON,

Secretary.

78 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 1.

STATEMENT

Abstract of the Oriental

1855. 1856.

Balance of 1855 in the Bank of si 1,064 0 8

Cash in hand... x 19 9 10. 1,083: 10

Inefficient Balance, cai tan Me 929 8 0

2,018 2 6

SALE oF ORIENTAL PUBLICATIONS. 1,012 15 3

Received by Sale of Bib. Indica, i ste woeeeee £2. 0

GOVERNMENT ALLOWANCE. 6,000 0 0

Received from General Treasury, at 500 per month,,.., soge 000 0,40

Asiatic Socrery.

Received a Loan,.,. ane ane Forte 0 0 0 2,500 0 0

VESTED FUND. 361 1 0

Interest on Company’s Paper from Government Agent, ee 209 7 6

Carried over, 12,046 6 O

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 79

No. 2.

Fund for the year 1856. ;

1855. 1856.

SALE OF ORIENTAL PuBLiIcaTIONS. 166 10 4

Freight, ar ce wee its 13 18° 0

Commission, ... ia on a 66 0 9

— 79 11 9

BIBLIOTHECA INDICA. 134.13 6

Freight, vee és wa 56 5 0

Printing Charges, si “Se bat duie eeeee sd OW. \O

— 280 5 0

Custopy oF ORIENTAL Works. 715 12 6

Salary of Librarian, at 30 per month, 12mo. eat OO tn Oe, O

Establishment, at 12 per month, do. ... ae) dA ONO

Petty Charges, one ae see di Q

Stationery, pe bas BA oe 0) 0

Book-binding, ... wide as see EOF 48

Extra Duftry, ... ae ae ae 34 10 6

_ Postage, 8 tay ha sie 10 O O

———- 705 1 6

BI0oGRAPHICAL Dictionary. 753 8 O

Editing Charges, ot Bee ant 40 0 0

Printing Charges, ie By we. BOAO» O

—— 544 0 O

MARKANDEYA PURANA.

Printing Charges, Pe sas ee a 465 0 0

W aAqivy. 45 6 O

Printing Charges, aa se ioe BT2. “OO 10

Petty Charges, ... : 3 tan 69,

—— 675 8 0

‘V ASAVADATTA, 3 2)'.0

Printing Charges, 2h ee aes ee 228 6 0

NAISHADHA.

Printing Charges, eat wid see pee) OAS) 12 O

BrRinaADARANYA UPANISHAD.

Printing Charges, Was ate ioe ee 166 0 0

Copyina oF MSS. CFiehiad

Copying charges, af Sana vs af 13 os

DIcTIONARY OF TECHNICAL TERMS. 2,296 8 O

Editing Charges, re 42 0 0

Printing Charges, 500 Copies of Fase. ‘8, 9, 10 and

11, at 424 each, ces iui ie leue, C0

1,738 0 0

Carried over, 6,003 5 6

80 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [Neal

Brought forward, Co.’s Rs. 12,046 6 0

Deposit Account.

Dasan Santgram Sewak Ram, a4 ocve “EOOL OD

Dwarka Nauth Chaterjee, ... oe sie 0.8.0

—_— 100 8 0

——— eceeeeer

12,146 14 0

eee EE

The 81st Dec., 1856,

Govur Doss Bysdck,

Asst. Secy:

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Brought forward, Co.’s Rs. 6,00 5

Uttara NAISHAD CHARITRA.

Printing Charges, cas 1 «1 448 O O 4399 2

Waitt Yasur VEDA.

Subscription for 20 copies, ... ae ae 600 0

ITQAN.

Printing Charges,... oP i ass das 672 0

SANKHYA PRAVACHANA BHASHYA.

Printing Charges, aot si ay a0 24:

Surya SIDDHANTA.,

Printing Charges, es oe .. 246 4 0 224 0

Is’ABA.

Printing Charges, SF “a uae aon 981 0

Buack YAYUR VEDA.

228 6

Printing Charges, cs 680 12

Deposit Account.

Dasan Santgrém Sewakram, ae Be ee 58 3

IntEREST ACCOUNT.

Paid to the Asiatic Society on the Loan received, ... eee 95 13

BaLance.

Bank of Bengal, ee 283 13 6

Cash in hand, FA 114 0

285 11 6

Inefficient Balance, eda aa we 2,092 14 8

a 287e10 2

12,146 14 0

E. E.

. W.S. ATKINSON,

Secretary.

[No. 1.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

*fhyaloagy "HOVSAg ‘Cd “O

‘NOSNINLY ‘S “MA *OSST “99 PTE 94D

*syOOd LOF "Ni puB

"M ‘SISSOAT 07 ONP Sutoq wins osavy e ‘TeuTUTOU ATWO sI UMs SIT], »

——————

a € 806° 8 OT grE6

20 0 0 0 el CP vee een arenes Oe eee Cee ee ee ‘soTIpUung

Wi-ebwe 0 ai ug) eco goome ene

$0 SLSST'T O BE OSOT 03 woRdrosqng ‘jeumop

50 F 626 0 0 GAR tt Ssxoog Jo opeg ‘Aawaqry

0 0 96 eee eece FeSO SS Oat FOG a: MOISsTUIp Wy

r 6 2098 a BL Oe & Os Od en eee suo ng aOD

—— ‘ONIGNVISLAO

cee keneeeeseereceenesaesesncrserees DDONIOSO ODO OOUDD W000 O80 ‘sortpung |

a cf Bsn eee Sts nescence Fomisnip to gan mumnaane nas ‘syrsodocy | 6 9 ZOLOLT & 6692,

Cree ee ‘x00, OU} Saraed soy onp FuMoUTY § 8 seg re yfoqwSo NT pue SUTRTTT AA

0.0 Booonn ‘puny mOLyeoTTqug [ey UelIO, oy uBvory

ZL SOL ne ‘TRUMO jo 4unov08 UO [esuog jo pipedehe §

00S > 0-0 008 See sresesereee Godeg s Auedutog

ey meee a. oe ‘kes ‘Kavaquy oy JO onsoyeyeg

4) 6) Gel See eeeeeseresoeresees oecereereers ‘Kes ‘SuryUIId, SNOIULTOISTIL

S- O26. ae

oO10 © ©

j=)

Cao. 08h ‘kes ‘xoput 10 “TTA ‘ON G QOS Tire rersre ster eseer see eeeanas Soot cA OIOnOUT

Cee0ec ee ee As AMON Se fg CL 68 OL 29 cap see occupensipas snhiinen seis ime ial TUCO TSG)

0 OL “eg A puw AT SON TeuMoL § OF ET FyG‘9 eT OZ8'G ‘Sypris Tesuag Jo pug

» L SIP eee ove cee ere ceeeesercerseneresorernss + “bea ‘Aerprey “AA ‘f ‘OG8T 2 eceT

0 8 Tes “SMT STO STEATOO “AA “£ tig “olqenouoy § ‘HSVO

“s9U4ygov Ty ‘sjassp

‘S$ ON INHNALVLS

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 83

LIST OF ORDINARY MEMBERS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

The * distinguishes non-subscribing Members.

1856.

PAI IINALRIIV

ALD PALLELS IS

Abbott, Lieut.-Col. J. Bengal Artillery, Ishapur.

Allen, C. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

*Anderson Lieut.-Col. W. Bengal Artillery, England.

Atkinson, W. 8. Esq. Calcutta.

Avdall, Johannes Esq. Do.

Baker, Lieut.-Col. W. E., Bengal Engineers, Calcutta.

Banerjee, Rev. K. M. Bishop’s College, Sibpur.

*Barlow, Sir R. Bart. B. C. 8. England.

*Batten, J. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Ditto.

Beadon, C. Esq. B. C. 8S. Calcutta.

Beaufort, F. L. Esq. B. C. 8. Do.

*Beckwith, J. Esq. England.

*Benson, Lieut.-Col. Rk. Do.

Birch, Col. R. J. H.,.C. B. Calcutta.

Bivar, Captain H. 8S. 18th Regt. B. N. I. Northern Cachar.

Blagrave, Captain T. C. 26th Regt. B. N. I. Trans-sutledge Provinces.

Blundell, E. A. Esq. Singapore.

Bogle, Lieut.-Col. Sir A. Kt. Tennasserim Provinces.

Boycott, Dr. T., Bombay M.S. Calcutta.

*Brodie, Captain T. 5th Regt. B. N. I. Europe.

Burgess, Lieut. F. J. 17th Regt. B. N. I. Pilibheet.

Bushby, G. A. Esq. B. C. 8S. Hyderabad, since dead.

Busheerooddeen Sultan Mohammed Saheb, Calcutta.

Byng, Hon’ble Captain kh. B. P. 62nd Reet. B. N. I. Cherrapunji,

Khasia Hills.

*Campbell, Dr. A., B. M.S. Europe.

Chapman, C. Esq. B. C. 8, Bhagulpore.

Chapman, R. B. Esq. B. C. S, Calcutta.

Christison, A. Esq. M. D. Gwalior.

84 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

Colvile, Hon’ble Sir J. W. Kt. Do.

Colvin, B. J. Esq. B. C. S. Calcutta.

*Colvin, J. H. B. Esq. B. C. 8S. Europe.

Colvin, Hon’ble J. R. B. C. S. Naineé Tal.

Cunliffe, C. W. Esq. B. C. S. Lucknow.

Curtis, J. F’. Esq. Calcutta.

*Cust, R. N. Esq. B. C. S. Europe.

Dalton, Captain E. 8. 9th Regt. B. N. I. Chota Nagpore.

De-Bourbel, Lieut. Raoul, Bengal Eners. Calcutta.

Dickens, Captain C. H. Calcutta.

Drummond, Hon’ble E., B. C. 8. Do.

*Edeworth, M. P. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe.

Elliott, Hon’ble W., M. C. S. Madras.

Ellis, Major R. R. 23d Regt. B. N. I. Bundlekund.

Elphinstone, Lieut. N. W. 4th Regt. B. N. I. Peshawur.

Erskine, Major W. C. Commr. of Saugur, Nurbudda Territories,

Jubulpore.

*Falconer, Dr. H., F. R.8., B. M.S. Europe.

Fayrer, Dr. J.. B. M.S. Lucknow.

Forbes, Lieut. H.8., Artillery, Benares.

Freeling, G. H. Esq. B. C. S. Bundelkund.

Fytche, Major A. 70th Regt. B. N. I. Bassein.

*Gladstone, W. Esq. Europe.

Govindchundra Sena, Baboo, Calcutta.

Grant, D. sq. B. C. S. Agra.

Grapel, W. Esq. Calcutta.

Gray, J. J. Esq. Maldah.

Grote, A. Esq. B. C. 8S. Calcutta.

Gubbins, C. Esq. B. C. 8. Allighur.

Hall, F. E. Esq. M. A. Saugur.

Halsy, W. S. Esq. B. C. S. Gurruckpore.

Hamilton, R. Esq. Calcutta.

Hamilton, Sir R. N. E. Bart, B. C. S. Indore.

Hannyngton, Lieut.-Col. J. C. 24th Regt. B. N. I. Chota Nagpore.

Haughton, Captain, J. C. Maulmein.

Hayes, Captain F, C. C. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Lucknow.

Hearsay, Major-Genl. J. B. 10th Lt. Cavalry, Barrackpore.

Heatley, S. G. T. Esq. Delhi.

1857.| Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Herschel, W. J. Esq. B. C.S. Rajshaye.

*Hichens, Lieut. W. Bengal Engineers, Europe.

Hodgson, B. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Darjiling.

Hossein Ally Mohamed, His Highness Ex-Ameer of Scinde, Calcutta,

Ishureepersaud, Rajah, Benares.

Jackson, L. 8. Esq. Mauritius.

*Jackson, W. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe.

Jadava Krishna Singh, Baboo, Caleutta.

James, Captain H. C. 32nd Reet, B. N. I. Darjiling.

Jenkins, Lieut.-Col. F. Assam.

Jerdon, IT. C. Esq. M. M. S. Saugor.

*Johnstone, J. Esq. Europe.

Kabeeroodeen Ahmed Shah, Bahadoor, Sassaram.

Kay, Rev. W. D.D. Bishop’s College.

*Laidlay, J. W. Esq. Europe. ,

Lawrence, Col. Sir H., K. C. B. Aboo.

Layard, Captain F. P. 19th Regt. B. N. I. Berhampore.

*Lees, Lieut. W. N. 42 Reet. B. N. 1. Europe.

Legeyt, P. W. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

Liebig, Dr. G., Von, Bom. M. 8. Calcutta.

Loch, G. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

Loch, T. C. Esq. B. C. S. Europe.

Loftie, Lieut.-Col. M. E. Almorah.

Low, Major Genl. Hon’ble J. Calcutta.

Lushington, F. A. Esq. B. C. 8. Do.

Maclagan, Captain R. Roorkee.

Macleod, D. F. Esq. B. C. S. Lahore.

Macrae, Dr. A. C., B. M.S. Caleutta.

Manickjee Rostumjee, Esq. Do.

*Marshman, J. C. Esq. Europe.

Martin, Dr. W, M. M.S. Calcutta.

* Middleton, J. Esq. Europe.

Medlicott, J. G. Esq. Geol. Survey office.

*Mills, A. J. M. Esq. B. C. S. Europe.

Money, D. I. Esq. B. C. S. Calcutta.

Money, J. W. B. Esq. Do.

Morris, G. G. Esq. B. C. 8. Berhampore.

Morton, D. T. Esq. M. D. Maulmein.

86 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

Mouat, Dr. F. J., M. D., F. RB. C. S. Caleutta.

*Muir, J. Esq. Europe.

Muir, W. Esq. B. C. S. Nainee Tal.

*Nicholls, Captain W. T. 24th Regt. M. N. I. Europe.

Nicholson, D. G. Esq. Maulmein.

Nogendranauth Tagore, Baboo, Calcutta.

Oldham, Prof. T., F. R. S. Caleutta.

Ommanney, M. C. Esq. B. C. S. Lucknow.

*O’Shaughnessy, Sir, W. B. Knt, Europe.

Ouseley, Major W. R. Calcutta.

Phayre Major A. P. Pegu.

Pratab Chundra Singh, Rajah, Pakparah, Calcutta.

Pratt, The Venerable Archdeacon, J. H. Do.

*Prinsep, C. R. Esq. Europe.

Prosono Coomar Tagore, Baboo, Calcutta.

Radha Nauth Sikdar, Baboo, Do.

Rajendra Dutt, Baboo, Do.

Rajendra Lal Mittra, Baboo, Do.

Ramdanauth Banerjee, Baboo, Do.

Ramanauth Tagore, Baboo, Do.

Ramapersaud Roy, Baboo, Do.

Ramehund Singh, Rajah, Do.

Ramgopaul Ghose, Baboo, Do.

*Riddel, H. P. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe.

Roberts, A. Esq. B. C.S. Jubulpore.

*Roer, Dr. HE. Europe.

*Rogers, Captain T. E. Europe.

Row, Dr. J., B. M. S. Meerut.

Royle, Dr. J., F. RB. S. Europe.

Russel, R. H. Esq. B. C. 8. Chittagong.

Samuells, E. A. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

Saxton, Captain G. H. 38th M. N. I. Cuttack.

Schiller, F. Esq. Calcutta.

*SetonKarr W. Esq. Europe, since returned.

Sherer, J. W. Esq. B. C.S. Allighur.

Sherwill, Captain W. S. 66th Regt. B. N. I. Calcutta.

*Smith, Col. J. S. Europe:

smith, Rev. W. O. Calcutta.

[ No. 1.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

*Spankie, R. Esq. B. C. 8. Saharunpore.

Spilsbury, Dr. G. G., B. M.S. Calcutta.

*Sprenger, Dr. A., B. M. 8. Europe.

*Stephen, Major J. G. 8th N. I. Europe.

Stewart, Lieut. R. 22nd Regt. N. I. Cachar.

Strachey, Major R. Bengal Engrs. Calcutta.

*Strachey, J. E. Esq. B. C. S. Europe.

Strong, F, P. Esq. B. M. 8. Calcutta.

Suttyasharan Ghosal, Rajah, Calcutta.

*Thomas, H. Esq. B. C. 8. Europe.

Thomson, Dr. T., M. D., F. R. S. Calcutta.

Thornhill, C. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Nainee-Tal.

Thuillier, Major H. L. Artillery Calcutta.

*Thurnburn, Captain I. H. V. 14th Regt. B. N. Ll. Europe.

Trevor, C. B. Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

Walker, H. Esq. B. M.S. Do.

Ward, J. J. Esq. B. C. 8. Cuttack.

Watson, J. Esq. B. C. 8S. Berhampore.

Waugh, Col. A. S. Bengal Engrs. Mussoorie.

Willis, J. Esq. Calcutta.

Wilson, The Right Rev. D. Lord Bishop, Do.

Woodrow, H. Esq. Do.

Young, A. R. Esq. B. C. 8. Do.

Young, Captain C. B. Bengal Engrs. Do.

Young, W. G. Esq. B. C. 8. Do.

*Yule, Captain H. Bengal Engrs. Kurope.

ELECTED IN 1856.

J. W. B. Money, Esq. Calcutta.

Col. J. T. Smith, Europe.

Dr. G. von Liebig, B. M. S. Calcutta.

R. H. Russel, Esq. B, C. 8. Chittagong.

Baboo Rajendralal Mittra, Calcutta.

Major R. R. W. Ellis, 23d Regt. B. N. I. Bundelkund.

J. F. Curtis, Esq. Calcutta.

Dr. F. J. Mouat, B. M. 8. Do.

Lieut. R. De-Bourbel, Bengal Engrs. Do.

Captain H. Yule, Bengal Engrs. Europe.

88 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

A. R. Young, Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

Sultan Mahomed Busheerooden Saheb, Do.

R. B. Chapman, Hsq. B. C. 8S. Do.

Lieut. H. 8. Forbes, Artillery, Benares.

A. Roberts, Esq. B. C. S. Jubbulpore.

Rajah Suttyasharan Ghosal, Calcutta.

Major W. C. Erskine, Jubbulpore.

Lieut. Chancey, Agra.

Rajah Sreish Chundra Raya Bahadur, Krishnagur.

Loss or Members Durine THE YEAR 1855.

Withdrawn.

H. V. Bayley, Esq. Calcutta.

K. Colebrooke, Esq. Do.

C. Huffnagle, Esq. Do.

Captain H. Hopkinson, Arracan.

G. I’. Edmonstone, Esq. B. C. 8. Calcutta.

G. Plowden, Esq. Nagpur.

By Death.

R. Houstoun, Esq. Calcutta.

Rajah Suttyacharan Ghosal, Bahadur, Do.

Dr, W. Montgomerie, Barrackpore.

Lieut. Chancey, Agra.

Rajah Sriésh Chundra Raya, care Krishnagur.

R. W. G. Frith, Esq. Jessore.

Major Gen. W. H. Sleeman, Europe.

Honorary Members.

Prof. A. Langlois, Paris.

Mons. J. J. Marcel, Do.

Rey. Dr. Buckland, London.

List oF Honorary MEempBeERs.

Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, Aulic Counsellor, Vienna.

M. Garcin de Tassy, Membre de I’ Instit, Paris.

Sir John Phillippart, London.

Count De Noe, Paris.

Prof. Francis Bopp, Memb. de |’Academie de Berlin.

[ No. 1,

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 89

Sir J. F. W. Herschel, F. R. 8. London.

Col. W..H, Sykes, F. R. 8. do.

General Count Ventura, Europe.

Prof. Lea, Philadelphia.

Prof. H. H. Wilson, F. R. S., London.

Prof. C. Lassen, Bonn.

Sir G. T. Staunton, Bart., F. R. 8., London.

M. Reinaud, Memb. de l’ Instit. Prof. de l’ Arabe, Paris.

Dr. Ewald, Gottingen.

His Highness Hekekyan Bey, Egypt.

Right Hon’ble Sir Edward Ryan, Kt. London.

Prof. Jules Mohl, Memb. de l’Instit. Paris.

Capt. W. Munro, London.

His Highness the Nawab Nazim of Bengal, Murshidabad.

Dr. J. D. Hooker, R. N., F. R. S. London.

Prof. Henry, Princeton, United States.

Lt. Col. C. H. Rawlinson, Persia.

Lit. Col. Sir Proby T. Cautley, K. C. B. London.

Raja Radhakanta Deva Bahadur, Calcutta.

CoRRESPONDING MEMBERS.

Kremer, Mons. A. von, Alexandria.

Porter, Rev. J. Damascus.

Schlagintweit, Mons. H.

Schlagintweit, Mons. A.

Smith, Dr. E. Beyrout.

Tailor, J. Esq. Bussorah.

Wilson, Dr. Bombay.

Associate MEmBens.

Blyth, H. Esq. Calcutta.

Kéramt Ali, Syud, Hooghly.

Long, Rev. J. Calcutta.

MacGowan, Rev. J. Ningpo.

Piddington, H. Esq. Calcutta.

Stephenson, J. Esq. Europe.

Tregear, V. Esq. Bareilly.

90 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

For Frsrvuary, 1857.

At a monthly general meeting of the Asiatic Society, held on the

4th instant.

The Venerable Archdeacon J. H. Pratt, Senior Member present,

in the Chair.

The proceedings of the December meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From the Government of Bombay, copies of “Selections from

the Records of the Government.”

The Secretary stated that these publications had been sent in

compliance with a request made by the Council, who were glad to

announce that the Government of Bombay had ordered that the

Society should be supplied with all the Selections that may here-

after be published.

2. From the Imperial Academy of Sciences, Vienna, the latest

publications of the Academy.

3. From the Government of the N. W. Provinces, through

Captain Maclagan, Officiating Principal Thomason College of Civil

Engineering, Roorkee, a copy of the Report on the Prisons of the

N. W. Provinces, for the year 1855.

From Baron Von Hammer-Purgstall, a copy of his edition of

Wasaf’s celebrated history in Persian, with a German translation,

vol. 1st.

Letters from Mr. Plowden, Lieut. Stewart, Dr. Martin, and Rev.

K. M. Banerjee, announcing their wish to withdraw from the Socie-

ty, were recorded.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot at the next meet-

ing :—

Mr. H, F. Blanford, of the Geological Survey, proposed by Dr.

Thomson, and seconded by Major Strachey, and

Mr. E. B. Cowell, Professor of History in the Presidency College,

proposed by Mr. Atkinson, and seconded by A. Grote, Esq.

The Council submitted reports—

1. Recommending that Mr. John Nietner, of Ceylon, be elected

a corresponding member of the Society.

N 2

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 91

2. Announcing that they have appointed the following Sub-

Committees—

Finance.—C. Beadon, Esq. and Dr. T. Boycott.

Philology.—A. Grote, Esq., H. A. Samuells, Esq., Rev. J. Long,

and EF, E. Hall, Esq.

Library.— Dr. H. Walker, E. A. Samuells, Esq., W. Grapel, Esq.,

Babu Ramapersad Roy, and Major Strachey.

Natural History—Dr. G. G. Spilsbury, T. Oldham, Esq., Dr.

H. Walker, Dr. T. Thomson, Dr. T. Boycott, Mr. EH. A. Samuells,

Captain C. B. Young, and Major Strachey.

Communications were received—

1. From Babu Radhanath Sikdar, forwarding abstracts of the

Meteorological Register kept at the Office of the Surveyor-General,

Calcutta, for the months of October and November last.

2. From Mr. Asst. Secy. Oldfield, enclosing copy of a Meteoro-

logical Register kept at the Office of the Secretary to the Govern-

ment of the N. W. Provinces, Agra, for the month of November

last.

3. From the Government of India, through Col. Birch, Secretary

in the Military Department, forwarding a copy of the report by Mr.

A. Schlagintweit on the proceedings of the Magnetic Survey in the

Himalaya Mountain and in Western Thibet, from May to November,

1856, and that of Messrs. H. and R. Schlagintweit, on the same

subject, from July to September, 1856.

4, rom the Governor-General in Council, through Mr. Edmon-

stone, Secretary to the Government of India, a copy of an account of

the mountain district forming the western boundary of the Lower

Derajat, commonly called Roh, with notices of the tribes inhabiting

it, by Lieut. H. G. Raverty, 3rd Regt. B. N. I,

5. From Capt. R. J. Leigh, Senior Assistant Commissioner to

the Commander of Chota Nagpore, Notes on Jumeera Pat in

Sirgooja, Chota Nagpore.

6. From Dr. Anderson, Oude Contingent, on the Indian species

of the genus Lycium.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly reports for December

and January last.

Dr. Thomson read two reports from the Messrs. Schlagintweit of

92 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 1.

their journey in Northern Thibet, and across the Koenluen, with

explanatory remarks.

On the motion of the Chairman, the thanks of the meeting were

voted to Dr. Thomson for his remarks upon these interesting reports.

LIBRARY.

The library has received the following accessions during the month8 of

December and January last.

Presentations.

Geschichte Wassaf’s. Persisch Herausgegeben und deutsch tibersetzt

von Hammer-Purgstall, 1 Band, Wien, 1856, 4to.—By rum Baron Von

HamMER-PURGSTALL.

Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Philos.

Histor. Classe, Band, XVII. heft 3, Band XVIII. heft 1 and 2, Band

XIX. heft 1 and 2 and Band XX. heft 1, 8vo.—By THE ACADEMY.

———- Mathe. Natur. Hist. Classe, Band XVIII. heft 1 and 2,

Band XIX. heft 1—2 and Band XX. heft 1, 8vo.— By THE Same.

Denkschriften der ditto ditto. mathematisch naturwissenschaftliche

Classe, Band X. and XJ.—By THE Same.

Archiv fur kunde dsterreichischer Geschictsquellen. Band XV. heft 2

and Band XVI. heft 1, 8vo.—By THR Same.

Fontes Rerum Austriacarum ditto ditto. Band XII. abtheilung 2, 8vo.

—By THE SAME.

Jahrbiicher der K. K. Central—Anstalt fiir Meteorologie und erdmag-

netismus Von Karl Kriel. Band IV.—By rue Sams,

Almanach for 1856, 12mo.—By THE Samez.

Notizenblatt, Nos. 1—14, 1856.—By tHe Same.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesellschaft. Band X.

heft 4, Svo. Liepzig.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Die Lieder des Hafis. Persisch met dem commentare des Sadi, heraus-

gegeben von Hermann Brockhaus. LErsten Bandes, Drittes heft 4to.

Liepzig, 1856.—By tHe Epiror.

Memoirs of the Royal Astronomical Society, Vol. XXIV.—By tux

SociErTy.

Notices of the Meetings of the Members of the Royal Institution

of Great Britain, Part VI.—By tue Royat InstitTurion.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XII. No. 47.—

By THE Socterty.

Monthly Notices of the Royal Astronomical Society from November,

1854 to June, 1855, Vol. XV.—By tue Socirry.

Journal of the Proceedings of the Linnean Society, Vol. I. Nos. 1 and

2.—Ly THE SOCTETY.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 93

Address of T. Bell, Esq. President, read at the Anniversary of the above

Society, May 24th, 1856.—By tur Samer.

Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indié. Deel XII. Derde

Serie, Deel II. afl. 1—3, 8vo.—By tHE Naturat History SociEty oF

NeETHERLAND’S INDIA.

The Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, Vol. IX. Nos.

10 to 12, new series, Vol. I. No. 1, 2 copies. —By tur Hpiror.

Ethnology of the Indo-Pacific Islands, by J. R. Logan, Esq. 2 copies.

—By THE AUTHOR.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government in the Police

Branch of the Judicial Department, Nos. 1 and 2, (the last is an incom-

plete copy.)—By tor Bompay GOVERNMENT.

No. XX XV. new series, being a report on the Hilly re-

gion forming the Western part of the Collectorate of Kurrachee.—By

THE SAME.

from the Records of the Government of the N. W.

Provinces, Parts XX VII. and XXVIII. the 1st chiefly on Public Works

and the 2nd connected with the Revenue.—By THE GovERNMENT OF

THE N. W. P.

——-——_—— from the ditto of the Government of India, (Home Depart-

ment,) No. XVII. Report on the Survey of the Mineral Deposits in

Kumaon and on the Iron Smelting Operations experimentally conducted

at Dechouree.—By tur GoverNMENT oF Inp1A.

—. (Foreign Department) No. XVIII.—General Report on

the Administration of the Punjaub Territories from 1854-55 to 1855-56

inclusive.—By THE SAME.

(Public Works Department) No. XIX.—Reports on the

Communication between Calcutta and Dacca. 2nd. On the Progress

of the Dacca and Arracan Road. 3rd. On the Creek Navigation from

Akyab to Toungoop. 4th. On the Toungoop Mountain Road.—By Tux

SAME.

Report of the Inspector General of Prisons, North Western Provinces

for 1855.—By Captain Mactacan, Orre. Principat of THE THomA-

SON ENGINEERING CoLLEGE aT RoorKeEE.

Half-yearly Report of the Committee of the Bengal Chamber of Com-

merce.—By THE CHAMBER OF COMMERCE.

Journal Asiatique for July and August, 1856, Nos. 28, 29 and 30.—By

THE Socrn re’ ASIATIQUE.

Report of Dispensary Cases of the Medical College Hospital.—By Dr.

CHUCKERBUTTY.

Essai sur la Littérature Indienne et études Sanscrites par P. Soupé,

12mo. Paris.—By THE AUTHOR.

Catalogo dei Coleopteri della Lombardia compilat dai Antono. E, G. B.

Villa. Paris.—By tHe AvrHor THROUGH Mr. PrppineTon.

94 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. }.

Catalogo dei Molluschi della Lombardia ditto, ditto. Paris—By tTuE

SAME THROUGH DITTO.

Dispositio Systematica Conchyliarum Terrestrium et Fluviatalium que

adservantur in collectione fratrum, ditto.—By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO.

Intorno alla Malattia delle vitirelazione di Antonio Villa. Paris.—By

THE SAME THROUGH DITTO. 7

Notizie intorno al genere melania memoria Malacologica dei ditto.

Paris.—ByY THE SAME THROUGH DITTO.

Osservazioni Entomologiche durante |’ eclisse del 9 Ottobre, 1847.

Paris.— By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO.

Intorno All’ Helix frigida (2 leaves).—By THE SAME THROUGH DITTO.

The Oriental Christian Spectator, for November and December, 1856.

—By tHe Epitor.

The Oriental Baptist, for December, 1856 and January, 1857.—By THe

Epitor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer, for ditto ditto.— By THE Epirors.

Upadeshak, for ditto ditto—By tur Eprror.

The Durbin Newspaper, for ditto ditto.— By tur Epiror.

The Pheenix ditto, ditto ditto.—By tur Epitor.

The Morning Chronicle ditto, ditto ditto.—By ru Epiror.

The Tattwabodhini Patrika, for December, 1856,—By tHe Tarrwa-

BODHINI’ SABHA’,

The Indian Annals of Medical Science, No. VII. October, 1856.—Bx

THE EpITorR.

Exchanged.

The Athenzum, for October, 1856.

The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and

Journal of Science, No. 80.

The Calcutta Review, No. 54, for December, 1856.

Purchased.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 12 to 15.

The Literary Gazette, Nos. 34 to 38.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, for November, 1856.

Revue des Deux Mondes, for October and November, 1856.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 9.

A complete Grammar of the Dravidian or South-Indian family of Lan-

guages, by the Rev. R. Caldwell, London, 1856, 8vo.

Revue Contemporaine et Atheneum Francais, Nos. 109 and 110, 15th:

and 31st October.

Journal des Savants, for September, 1856.

Matlai ul Saadeyn, or a History of Iran and Turan, MS.

Hajjat ul Mahafel Tajkirel Dad Intaki.

Tarikh Aasam e Qufi. MS.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 95

Kitab ul Safa bataarif ul Haqtq ul Mustafi. MS.

Minhaj ul Bayan. MS.

Milikat Qéji ul Quzzat MS.

Aalam ul Nubih. MS.

Kitab Zaholdawa Ibn Janzi. MS.

Atish Kadah Azo. MS.

Mohit, An Arabic Encyclopedia, 5 Vols. incomplete. MS.

Badra ul Taam. MS. 2 vols.

Kitab min I’d ul Khafa. MS.

Yusuf Zulekha. MS.

Rijal ibn Haj. MS.

Hadikat ul Sahadayn, History of Martyrs; Turkish.

PPI LLL ILDIPL LID LL LILI SILLS SLE LAI IOI LS

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

mAnnnnn IPS LI LIS ILL LLL LE LLL

No. IL. 1857.

srh~resyyryyv4

Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey, and of the Re-

searches connected with it, from November 1855 to April 1856.—

By ApoteHe SCHLAGINTWEIT.

OUTLINE OF THE Rovrt.

T left Mussoorie in company with my brother, Robert Schlagin-

tweit, on the 9th of November. After staying some days at Dehra,

we proceeded vid Roorkee to Agra, where we arrived on the 21st

of November.

We left Agra on the 29th of November, and proceeded wi

Gwalior and Tehri to Saugor (14th to 19th December.) I separ-

ated at Saugor from my brother Robert, and went vi¢ Dumoh to

Jubbulpore (28rd to 27th December,) and after examining the

interesting geological structure of the Nerbudda valley, I proceeded

to Nagpore across the elevated district of Seuni, which separates

the Nerbudda from Berar.

From Nagpore I travelled v4 Chandra and Badrachellum along

the Godavery valley to the sea-coast near Rajahmundry, where I

arrived on the Ist’ of February. The latter road was especially

selected for the purpose of tracing the sand-stone of the Nagpore

territory down the Godavery to the Eastern Ghauts, and of ex-

amining personally the fossiliferous localities of Kota on the

Pranteta and of Rajahmundry. I went through the Godavery

Delta to Cocanada, and thence by sea to Madras. (Arrived. at

Madras 19th February.) I left Madras on the 24th and proceeded

No. LXXXVI.—NeEw Srrins, Vou. XXVI, a)

98 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

to the districts of Pondicherry, South Arcot, and Trichinopoly, to

examine the interesting cretaceous strata, which yielded a consi-

derable number of fossil remains from different localities.

From Trichinopoly I went up by the Coonoor Ghaut to the Neil-

gherries, where I stayed from the 10th to the 17th of March.

I returned vid Mysore and Bangalore to Madras; I left Madras

for Calcutta by Steamer on the 1st of April, and I reached Simla

on the 26th of April.

I was accompanied during the operations of this cold season by

my draftsman, Eleazar Daniel, a guide in the Quarter Master

General’s Department, and I beg to bring to the notice of Govern-

ment the very useful services rendered to me by this man in the

prosecution of my researches, both during this season and previous-

ly in the Himalayas, and on the march from Bombay to Madras

in 1855.

The geological and paleontological collection made during this

season (eighteen boxes) have been forwarded to England through

the Government of Madras.

MAGNETIC OBSERVATIONS.

Complete magnetic observations have been made on the following

Stations :—

Agra.

Saugor.

-Dumoh.

Jubbulpore.

Nagri, South of Nagpore.

Bibberi, between Chandra and Badrachellum (Maenetic

dip only.)

Rajahmundry.

Cocanada (Declination only.)

Pondicherry (Dip only.)

Ootatoor, near Trichinopely.

Ootacamund on the Neilgherry Hills.

Bangalore (Dip only.)

At Madras, the magnetic force of my needles was compared

with the magnets of the Observatory ; my needles were the same

which had been compared with the Observatory needles in February

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 99

1855 ; and these comparisons will facilitate in a great measure the

determination of the absolute values of the magnetic force for the

different stations of observations.

All the magnetic instruments have remained in perfectly good

order throughout the season.

My brother and myself had wished to subjoin to this Report

a more elaborate resumé of the results of the magnetic observations

now extending over a pretty considerable part of India, together

with a map showing the magnetic curves; but we found such a

work, with any attempt at the necessary accuracy, would have

taken at least one or two months; so great an interruption of our

movements would have necessitated a complete alteration of the

plan of our operations during the ensuing season, and it would have

been probably quite impossible to extend our researches for the

present year into the most distant parts of the Western Himalayas.

Every one acquainted with the details connected with the final

reduction and calculation of scientific data, like magnetic and other

physical observations, will agree that it is quite useless to publish,

in a hurry, provisional figures and results, which would all have

to be cancelled and re-calculated for the final computation of the

work.

We expect, if no unforeseen accident interrupts our progress,

to be able to return to Europe in one year and a half, and we shall

then endeavour to reduce and publish the results of our magnetic

and other researches with the greatest regard to the accuracy

necessary for final results, which may perhaps not prove quite

unworthy of the patronage bestowed upon our scientific researches

by the Court of Directors.

As a general result of our magnetic observations, I mention the

fact, that the magnetic intensity increases in India from the South

towards the North much more rapidly than might be expected.

from a consideration of the geographical latitude only. If the

curves of the dip of the needle are laid down on a map, it is plainly

seen that the spaces between them are very narrow when compared

with other parts of the world.

Thus, in North West India, in a latitude of 30 and 314 degrees,

the dip of the needle is already as much as from 41 to 43 degrees.

0 2

100 Report on the Progress of the Magnetie Survey. [No. 2.

I subjoin a list of the dip for some of the more important of my

magnetic stations: several needles were used for the observations

at the principal stations : —

Names of Stations. Magnetic Dip.

Ussilla, on the Tonse River, in Gurhwal, in the

Himalayas, ...0:.. yids TAQRSOF Tl

Mana, in Gurhwal, in “al Binur aghiih sis ames opiQeio82

Milum, in Kumaon, (Himalayas,) ............ 41 4

Miu ssoGtie, 26 8S. § BERS OS .eeh ea redaehiaeilsie

SUMGG <2 WOOP RAO Sd a, JQ te Bae Gade

Nainee Palin Kumaony 02.3 se oi. os So oo 1B 138%

SaugereVs aig won, & panned. seb owas

Jubbulpore, ...... OY DNA RUG s eee pean as

Nagri, South of machina ihe AFORE CU,

Rajahmundry, «+... JUMBI deo lt oti ie

Madras, (1855 ey JN teehee 38

Ootacamund; Neilgherries; 000004 0.00 ec el Qedi Aees

Ootatoor, near 'Trichinopoly, in Sheet en Tada 2 35 30

The magnetic dips observed by my brother, Hermann Schlagin-

tweit, in the Hastern Himalayas and in Assam, agree very well with

' the results obtained by me in North-Western India, and they also

show a very great dip of the needle.

The magnetic declination in the Himalayas of Kumaon and

Gurhwal, visited in 1855, was every where Easterly varying from

3 to 4 degrees.

The declination continued constantly to be to the Eastward

along the route which I followed during the cold season from Agra

to Rajahmundry and from Madras to the Neilgherries. The line

which separates the Westerly declination of the Western Coast

of Bombay from the country with Easterly declination lay to the

West of the route followed. At the Neileherries the declination

was still Easterly, amounting to 53’ 30” East.

METEOROLOGICAL OBSERVATIONS.

The observations of the barometer and thermometer, &c., have

been carried on, as before, regularly every day, and the height of

all the important places on the march from Agra to Rajahmundry,

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 101

and from Madras vid Trichinopoly to the Neilgherries and back,

have been determined by repeated barometric and hypsometric

observations.

Particular attention was paid throughout this season to the tem-

perature of the ground at various depths below the surface.

We have been fortunate enough to obtain very regular and

careful observations of the temperature of the ground from the

surface down to a depth of two metres (6% feet) for the last twelve

months from Madras and Calcutta. They were made at Madras

under the superintendence of Major Worcester and of Major Jacob,

and at Calcutta under the superintendence of Major Thuillier :

the instruments used were brought out by us, were similar to those

used by ourselves, and had been all carefully compared.

This will enable us to correct our own observations, made at

various stations for the changes of temperature taking place from

one month to another, and to make them all strictly comparable by

reference to one common standard.

Our observations show that great confidence may be placed in

the temperature of the ground, ascertained thus directly by ther-

mometers buried at different depths below the surface, and the

results for the decrease of the temperature, with height calculated.

from different stations, agree remarkably well. It seems that the

temperature of springs is more liable to be effected by local causes

connected with their mode of origin, &c. than the temperature of

the dry ground, thus ascertained directly.

The following Table shows the temperature of the ground at

some of my stations, where observations have been conducted for

some time, in various localities :—

Temperature of the Ground at 2 metres (63 feet) below the surface

at some Stations between Agra and the Neilgherries.

Temperature,

centigrade.

Agra, 23rd February to 4th March, 1856, .................. 238° 5’

Jubbulpore, 22nd to 27th December, 1855, .................. 22 8

Sitabuldee, near Nagpore, 3rd to 9th January, 1856,...... 28 6

The temperature of the ground in the plains about Nag-

102 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No.2

pore, which are so remarkable for their excessive sum-

mer heat, is very high, when compared with the

stations in the more elevated districts of the Nerbudda

and of Bundelkund.

Chandra, South-East of Nagpore, 14th to 16th January, 29 0

Rajahmundry, at the head of the stg Delta, 2nd to

8th February, ......... thie baclda. Folddalmueniice oly NS

Cocanada, Kast of ae on bine Santé of Oak 29 6

The observations were made in three quite different locali-

ties, which gave 29° 5' C,, 29° 7’ C., and 29° 6' C.

The temperature of the ground is a little colder than

at Rajahmundry, though Cocanada is 40 E. F. lower

than the other place, on account of the great humidity

of the sandy deposits in the lower parts of the Goda-

very Delta.

Trichinopoly, South of Madras, March 7th to 8th,........ 29 9

Ootacamund, on the Neilgherry Hills, March 12thto17th, 18 8

A fine spring near the Ootacamund Church was, ......... 18 0

Madras, March 19th to: 24bb;i As. ci we Ra We eg

If the temperature at Ootacamund (7410 HE. F.—my place of

observations) is compared either with Trichinopoly or with Madras,

the decrease of the temperature of the ground for 1 degree C.

corresponds to an elevation of from 660 to 670 E. F, A fine spring

on the slopes of the Neilgherries, when compared with Trichino-

poly, indicates even a more rapid decrease of temperature, 1 degree

C. corresponding only to an elevation of 600 to 640 HE. F.; and it

seems quite certain that the decrease of the temperature of the

ground on the isolated Neilgherry Hills is more rapid than in

the Himalayas, where we formerly found an elevation of 720

E. F. to correspond to a decrease of the temperature of 1 de-

gree C,

The observations on the temperature, velocity and quantity of

water, &c., of various rivers, have been continued throughout the

journey, and we think that these observations, when properly com-

pared and worked out, may be not without some interest, both in

reference to Meteorology and to Geology.

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 103

The temperature and quantity of water of springs has also been

ascertained as often as opportunities would present themselves.

I had the opportunity of visiting an interesting hot spring on the

Godavery, near Badrachellum, in the Hastern Ghauts, to the West

of Rajahmundry.

lt is situated in the sandy bed of the Godavery, about 3 miles

from Badrachellum.

The water does not come to the surface, but is concealed under

the alluvial sand which fills up the dry bed of the Godavery River.

I met it after having dug a well of 7 feet depth. The highest tem-

perature observed was 49 degrees C., but of course the temperature

is much affected by the cold water of the Godavery constantly

percolating through the sand. The presence of the hot springs is

said to be visible during the rainy season, when the Godavery fills

up its whole bed by some vapour of water rising just over the spot

where the hot spring is situated. During the dry season the pre-

sence of the hot water under the sand is clearly indicated by the

high temperature of the sands above it, which, at a depth of from

15 to 20 centimetres from the surface, had a temperature of from

36° to 38° centigrade. The heating influence of the spring upon

the surface sands extends over as much as 200 to 240 square

metres.

Its origin is certainly due to one of the great fissures of disloca-

tion or faults which have accompanied the upheavement of the

Hastern Ghauts, though in the immediate neighbourhood no pecu-

liar alteration in the general features of the country is visible.

GEOLOGY.

The great surface of the country which I was able to traverse

during this cold season offered a very favourable opportunity for

geological observations.

J shall endeavour, in a few paragraphs, to mention some of the

conclusions to which I think my observations will lead, but I must

reserve it for some later period to illustrate these statements with

the necessary detailed sections and notes.

1. The sandy deposits of the plains of Hindustan, which are

bordered by the Himalayas and by the mountains of Bundelkund,

104 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

are not a deposit by rivers, but a deposit in a large basin of water,

which very probably was fresh water; they are in no way to be

considered as fluviatile deposits by the Ganges or Jumna; the

material for their formation has been brought down from the Hima-

layas as well as from the ranges of Bundelkund, and I am quite

convinced that the very extensive denudation and excavation of

the sand-stone ranges of Bundelkund, Gwalior, &¢., has contri-

buted in a very considerable degree to the formation of the deposits

in the plains of Hindustan.

The formation of kunker is evidently generally due to a process

of segregation of the whole deposit, but besides this concretionary

hunker, there occurs in some places a different formation of black

kunker, which extends horizontally sometimes to very great dis-

tances; it occurs not very far below the surface and is generally

merely covered by drifted sands ; its origin has been connected with

the drying up of old lakes (jheels) similar to those found at present

in some parts of Hindustan.

2. To the Southward of Agra, in Bundelkund and Gwalior,

occurs a formation of sand-stone with shales absolutely identical

with similar rocks, which cover a great extent of surface in India.

I shall venture to offer a few general remarks upon these rocks.

The formation occurs in Bundelkund, in various parts of the

environs of the Nerbudda valley, in many places of the Nagpore

territory, and in the Eastern Ghauts throughout their extent: it

is there apparent in parts in extensive masses as in the Cuddapah,

Bangapilly, and Kurnool districts. In other places only occasional

masses or strips of sand-stone shales are met with, and the forma-

tion has been broken up and destroyed to a great extent by the

granitic outbreak of the Ghauts. The formation can be traced,

though often interrupted by the granitic masses in the Eastern

Ghauts, to the south of Madras.

I met sand-stones and marls undoubtedly identical with the

Nagpore rocks and containing faint vegetable remains as Streper-

matoor, 30 miles west of Madras, on the Bangalore road, where

they crop out in some places around the tank.

Another interesting locality which I had the opportunity of visiting

was at Trivacery or Teruvacery, a village 18 miles west of Pondi-

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetie Survey. 105

cherry. The sand-stone of Trivacery is absolutely identical in all

petrographical characters with many specimens from the Nagpore

territory ; it also contained many fossil trees, which I am convinced

will prove the same as those found in some places of the Nagpore

territory, as well as near Raneegunge to the west of Burdwan and

Calcutta.

IT think that the coal-bearing strata of Raneegunge, in the hills

west of Calcutta, belong to the same formation with the rest of

the above quoted localities.

Whether the lime-stone and shales of Kulladghee, which TI had

occasion to investigate in the cold season of 1854-55, constitute a

formation different from the above or not, I am unable to say at

present, from want of my journals and specimens, which have been

all sent away.

The character of this extensive formation of sand-stones and

shales varies considerably; generally the sand-stones can be well

distinguished from the underlying shales.

In some localities the distinct stratification is clearly visible, and

the sand-stones, more or less horizontal, repose contrary to the

ordinary laws of conformity, upon the out-crop of the inclined

shales underneath: this is the case in the Gwalior territory, in

Bangapilly, Cuddapah, &e.

In other districts, for instance at Nagpore, near Chanda, and

on the Pranheeta, the marly slates and sandstone seem to lie

conformably, and have both been subject apparently to the same

bendings and foldings.

But though the characters of the rock are very variable, it is

nearly always possible to trace the one variety into the other;

occasionally the mere lithological resemblance, even between very

distant points of the formation, is very striking.

Fossil remains have been found in several places; the best

known locality is at present the Nagpore territory, where the per-

Severing researches of the Reverend R. Hislop have brought to

light a rich collection of fossil plants and several very interesting

animal remains.

I haye much pleasure in acknowledging my obligations to-Mr.

106 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. (No. 2.

Hislop, who was kind enough to give me every assistance and

information during my stay at Nagpore.

I met fossil wood and some fragments of fossil bones in several

places along the Godavery. Near the junction of the latter river

with the Pranheeta, at Kota, near Shironcha, are found very curious

remains of fossil fishes and reptiles connected with a thin bed of

coal. These fossils were first discovered by the late Drs. Bell and

Walker, and I trust that the collection which I was enabled to

make in this locality may not prove without some interest even

after the very fine specimens sent to England by the two above-

mentioned gentlemen.

Vegetable remains can be traced in many places in the sand-

stones and marls, though the appearance is often very much

changed. Leaves, together with fossil wood, were met with in

the Eastern Ghauts on the Godavery and at Trivacery, 18 miles

west of Pondicherry.

It seems that the formation has been deposited throughout in

fresh-water lakes, but it would be premature to express at present

positive opinion on the geological age of the formation. It appears

from some fossil remains that it may be oolitic; but only a close

enumeration and comparison of all the fossils hitherto collected and

brought to Europe will be able to decide this question.

With reference to the difficult question of the age of the sand-

stone formation, it is worth mentioning that I have seen the sand-

stone, with fossil trees, clearly overlaid by the cretaceous strata

in the Pondicherry district, so that it cannot be younger than

Jurassic.

The existence of coal in this formation is connected with the

vegetable remains, which as I have mentioned can be traced in

many places. The coal-seams are generally not of great thickness,

and the coal is in most places impure, but larger seams have been

found in some localities, in Burdwan, the Palamow Hills, the

Nerbudda Valley, &c., some of which are worked pretty extensively.

3. The great trap formation of the Deccan has been visited

during this season on its Eastern borders. I have been able to

examine the fresh-water strata interposed between the trap layers

in many localities, and I have traced the continuation of this thin

1857.) eport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 107

fresh-water stratum containing only fresh water-shells (Physa,

Melania, Unio, &c.) down the Godavery to Rajahmundry. Near

this place occurs a very curious mixture of the unmistakeable fresh-

water Physa Prinsepii, with numerous true marine species.

The lime-stone stratum, with these marine shells, lies like the

fresh-water lime-stone of the Deccan between a mass of trap

(Dolerite) ; it reposes upon a celiular trap, and is covered by up-

wards of 50 feet of nodular trap. It is found at Cateroo, 3 miles

from Rajahmundry, and at the Pangadi Hills, 10 miles from the

latter place, and is from 2 to 23 feet thick. In some places the

rock is quite full of marine shells, which belong to Arca, Car-

dium, Venus, Cerithium, Turbinella, &c. I also found a large

well-preserved nautilus at Pangadi, which will serve to throw

some light upon the age of the intertrapian lacustrine and marine

formation of India.

The connection between these strata of Rajahmundry and the

merely fresh-water deposits of the Deccan is quite clear; it seems

to have been a deposit probably in a series of great lakes growing

brackish to the Eastward. The fresh-water Physa Prinsepii, not

to be distinguished from the Deccan specimens, lies side by side

with Cerithium, Arca, and other marine shells.

The fresh-water intertrapian stratum of the Deccan is from 2

to 4 feet thick; it consists in part of variously coloured marls, in

part of impure lime-stone.

In the parts where I had the opportunity of examining it, near

Saugor, near Lenni, Nagpore, &c.,it generally is covered by globular

black trap of from 40 to 70 feet thick only, which seems to have been

the most recent of the trap effusions in this part of the country.

It rests upon a cellular Amygdaloid or Wacke, into which it some-

times graduates, so as to make it impossible to draw any distinct

line of separation between the two rocks. I also observed fre-

quently quite isolated patches of a very soft cellular Wacke

between the fresh-water strata themselves. It seems to me that

the fresh-water strata have been deposited at the bottom of lakes

covered with volcanic ashes, and it is quite probable that occasional

showers of ashes still fell occasionally during the period of the

Pp 2

108 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

formation of the calcareous and marly deposit at the bottom of

the lakes.*

Another interesting phenomenon connected with the intertrapian

formation is the very regular and horizontal outline shown by the

thin line of the sedimentary stratum on the exposed sides of the

hills; and the fact, that though no bending or contortion of the

stratum is visible, it may be found at a much higher or lower

level on one of the next hills. From a careful examination of

the localities, I think that this fact can only be due to the ex-

istence of extensive faults and to phenomena of subsidence and

elevation of whole mountains en masse caused by them. Of the

existence of such faults, evident proofs can be found in many

localities. |

I finally wish to mention, that the intertrapian lacustrine forma-

tion is not confined to the borders of the grand trap mass, but

that it can be traced, though often altered and scarcely recogniza-

ble, to a great distance to the Westward inthe interior of the

trap mass.

4. On the road from Madras to Trichinopoly I had an opportu-

nity of examining the cretaceous formation, which seems to be en-

tirely limited to this part of India.

The cretaceous strata cover in these districts an extensive sur-

face of country, and the fossil remains are found scattered through-

out the formation in many localities. Assisted by my draftsman,

Eleazar, and some other of my men, who have now been instructed

in collecting similar objects, I have been able to obtain a pretty

fine and extensive collection of the cretaceous fossils from very

various localities. The whole of the strata from the Pondicherry

district down to the most South-Western localities in the Trichi-

nopoly district (circumference 120 miles) belong to the same form-

ation; the rocks are quite the same and the fossil remains are

nearly identical.

* T mentioned in the first Report for the cold season of 1854-55, that the

effusion of the trap in the Deccan had taken place under heavy pressure, probably

of sea-water. I now beg to say that it is much more probable that the effusion

has taken place at the bottom of extensive fresh-water lakes than at the bottom

of the ocean,

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 109

There exist local accumulations of bivalve shells, constituting

neally the whole mass of the rock, for instance at Garudamgalum,

near Ootatoor (Trichinopoly district) where the rock is quarried,

polished, and sold as “ Trichinopoly Marble.”

These accumulations may~ perhaps have been old sea beaches,

but they do not constitute a separate or more recent formation

than the strata with the ammonites. Close to the accumulations of

bivalve shells occur strata containing large ammonites, some of 14

feet in diameter; and I even saw ammonites in the rock full of

the bivalve shells.

The cretaceous strata seem to have been generally quite undis-

turbed; they repose horizontally upon the oolitic sand-stones at

Trivacery and upon the crystalline schists in other loealities.

The cretaceous strata are covered by a deposit of rolled pebbles,

with red lateritic earth, which is evidently more modern and brought

down at a former period by violent currents of water from the

astern Ghauts.

The deposition of the cretaceous strata took place after the

principal upheavement of the Hastern Ghauts, since these strata

are nowhere seen to penetrate into the interior of the Ghauts

or to the Mysore and Deccan plateaux, and since they have not

been affected by the upheaving and disturbing agency, which must

have accompanied the formation of the Ghaut Range.

5. During my visit to the Neilgherries and the Mysore, I was

especially anxious to extend my observations in reference to the

direction of faults and planes of foliation in the crystalline rocks of

Southern India. My observations in various parts of India have

convinced me, that the lines of faults and joints and of the direction

of the planes of foliation and cleavage, when laid down upon maps,

show many very striking coincidences with the main direction of

mountain chains and rivers.

The following are the most important directions of fault and

cleavage planes occurring ia the Neilgherries and the Mysore

plateau :-—

1. From N.N. H. to 8S. 8. W., which coincides with the mean

direction of the Hastern Ghauts, where the cleavage planes run

generally in this direction.

110 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

2. From 8.8. W.to N. N. E., which is the line of the Western

Ghauts. On the Neilgherries these two directions of disturbance

actually meet. The former one is clearly represented by the

direction of Eastern border of the Neilgherry plateau and by the

Dodabetta range, the latter one by the fine mountain range of the

Koondahs, which rise to the South and South-West of Ootacamund.

3. lines of extensive faults are clearly traceable on the Mysore

plateau, running from West to Hast. The direction of some of

the principal rivers, as the Mayar, the Cavery, &c., is connected

with them. Along the valley of the Mayar the fault is very clearly

visible.

4, <A fourth line of disturbance runs from North to South

through the Mysore country. It is less marked by the direction

of the planes of cleavage or foliation than by extensive dykes of

greenstone and of a fine large-grained granite, which run in this

direction often for many miles.

An Account of a Journey across the Chains of the Kuenluen, from

Ladak to Khotan.— By Hermann and Roperr ScHLAGINTWEIT,

Ess.

Proceeding from Ladak through Nubra to the Pass of Karakorum,

we were able to pass the frontier of Ladak and to extend our obser-

vations over very nearly the whole breadth of the Kuenluen moun-

tains. We estimate (not having yet reduced our astronomical

observations of latitudes and longitudes) that the distance we tra-

velled in Turkistan before returning again into the Thibetan terri-

tory 1s very nearly 300 English miles,

We left Ladak July 24th, and went by the Laoche Pass

(17,600 feet*) to the valley of the Shayok and to Nubra. From

Nubra we crossed the Sassar Pass, about 17,500 feet. We stayed

two days in the Pass itself to make Magnetic observations, and to

enable us to reach the summit of the Sassarla, (Sassar mountain

20,000 feet) from which we had, as we anticipated, a very extensive

and interesting view of the large groups of glaciers surrounding the

Pass, one of the largest accumulation of glaciers in the Kuenluen.

* The heights given in this Report are only approximations. Very good corre-

sponding observations were taken at Ladak, but we have not yet been able to

calculate them in detail.

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. iia

From the Sassar Pass, our route brought us to the large plateau

to the south of Karakoram, the mean elevation of which reaches 17,100

feet. On the 9th of August, we crossed without any difficulty the

frontier of Turkistan. We were accompanied by Mani, the Putwaree

of Milum, by Makshoot, a former servantof Moorcroft’s, and by Maho-

med Amin, an aged Turkistani, whom we found particularly useful on

account of his general knowledge of the country. We had besides

six horses for ourselves and servants, (the three men above mention-

ed,) thirteen horses for baggage, five Yarkandis, and some fifteen

sheep and goats. The Yarkandis with horses and provisions we

sent secretly on ahead, and we only met them, as by chance, in

Nubra. Our servants from India accompanied us as far as Sassar,

from whence we travelled dressed as Yarkandis. The day before

we passed Karakorum, (18,800 feet) we met a large caravan of

merchants from Yarkand, to whom we gave out that we intended

to march on along the Yarkand road ; but as soon as we had passed

Karakorum, we left this road and went to the east, to Kissilkorum,

(17,400 feet) the high water-shed between the Yarkand and the

Karakash rivers. We crossed in one day four Passes, more than

17,000 feet above the level of the sea, but only slightly elevated

above the surrounding plateaux.

We followed from Kissilkorum the direction of the principal

chain of the Kuenluen, now turning to the south south-east, till we

reached a lake, Kitik-kiul, (#@ like 00 in wood; w like w in but)

slightly salt, situated at the northern foot of the Changchenmo.

Up to this point our route had chiefly led us over extensive plateaux,

16,000 to 17,000 feet above the level of the sea, of a much greater

extent than those to the south of Karakorum; but from this lake

we followed the valley of the Karakash river, to the right of which

there are no plateaux, while to the left they extend as far as Suget.

The sterility of the plateau to the north of Karakorum, as well as

of the Karakash valley, is quite surprising: without the frequent,

though not very abundant, precipitation of snow, chiefly caused by

the great elevation of the ridges, these plateaux would be complete

deserts. Inamarch of eighteen miles, we only met with four

species of plants; for many days grass was exceedingly scarce, while

for several days we had absolutely none, the grass round the

112 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

Kitk-kiul lake being the only exception. We had taken with us

a small supply of gram, anticipating in some degree the sterility

we met with, which saved our horses from absolute’ starvation.

Nevertheless, they suffered dreadfully, the more so as the great

searcity of grass compelled us to make long marches of twenty

to twenty-four miles a day. Close to the Kiik-kiul we met with

avery interesting group of more than fifty hot springs, chiefly con-

taining muriate of soda (common salt), and a great quantity of

carbonic acid. The temperature varied from 25° to 49° C. = 77° to

120° Fahrenheit.

We had already met in the valley of the Nubra with two other

groups, the one near Panamick, (hottest spring, 78.1°—172.6°

Fahrenheit) ; the other near Changlung, (74.1° C. = 165.4° Fahren-

heit). After a march of seventy miles in four days, we came to

Stimgal, where a route branches off to the valley of Bushia, and to

Elchi the capital of Khotan.

Before reaching Stimgal we had nearly lost our road. Mahomed

Amin, who generally accompanied us, had gone in front, whilst we

were engaged in measuring the breadth of the river and the depth

of its erosion. We saw him distinctly with our telescope on the

other side of it, and followed his and his horse’s foot-prints until

six P. M., when they again crossed the water. But our people being

behind us, we turned back to meet them; but no trace of them

was found, as they had evidently also lost their way and had kept

on the wrong bank of the river: we again tried, it being now eight

o’clock P. M., to cross the river, which is here divided into many

branches, but were overtaken in the middle by nightfall, and were

obliged to stop on alow mud bank. Our first care was to secure

our two horses, fastening their legs with the straps of our sextant

and our prismatic compass. We now observed, on a little Myri-

caria stem close to our resting-place, that the water was gradually

rising from the melting of a late fall of snow. Fortunately the

great breadth of the river secured our bank from being overflowed,

though the moisture of the ground was rapidly increasing.

The next day, August the 20th, we found our people in the after-

noon, and Amin at Sumgal in the evening ; our horses had suffered

so much from fatigue as well as from scarcity of food, that on the

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 113

way from Kissilkorum to Stiimgal we lost seven out of nineteen.

From Simegal a road branches off, as mentioned above, to Bushia

and Elchi, and as there was some hope of procuring at these places

fresh horses, or YAks, as well as food, our men were easily persuad-

ed to proceed in this direction.

We started August 22nd, with only two laden horses; we had to

cross a glacier Pass, 17,000 feet. At ten a. M. we were overtaken

by a violent snow-storm, lasting till six p.m. The road was ex-

tremely difficult for the horses, on account of a number of fissures

in the glacier. When we had gone some Jittle distance farther, our

people finding it impossible to follow with the laden horses left

every thing behind—tent, blankets, and a small trunk containing

merchandise, money,* and instruments, (the most necessary ones

we happily carried ourselves on the ice,) taking only a little food

with them ; but even then they followed so slowly, that they were

unable to cross the last terminal moraine of the glacier before

nightfall. We were compelled in consequence to be in the snow

all night in our wet clothes. The snow had ceased falling, but the

cold was still so very great, (11.4° C. = 11.5° Fahrenheit) that

two of our horses died from it during the night ; one on the glacier

with our people, and the other at our feet.

In Bushia, which we reached two days later, on the 25th of August,

we met with a very cordial reception from the inhabitants, and got

horses, yaks, sheep, provisions, &c., promising to pay for them in

Stimgal. These people, half-nomadic Tartars, seemed very honest,

and the prices they asked were very moderate. They inhabit caves

fitted up like houses in the cold season, and tents during the rest

of the year.

The height of Bushia is 9,200 feet. We dressed like the inhabi-

tants, and had also learned the necesgary forms of salutation. The

people here are far from being savages, but on the contrary very

ceremonious. They took us, never having seen any Europeans,

for what we represented ourselves to be—merchants from Delhi.

Elchi, the capital of Khotan, was only distant two days’ journey ;

but we found the people very reluctant to accompany us there, for

* We used very little money, but chiefly goods, rich Indian cloth, for barter,

114 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

they feared the Chinese soldiers stationed not far from Bushia; be-

sides the time was far advanced for our intended researches in

Cashmere. The distance from the Northern foot of the Kuenluen

was one and a half day’s journey; already at Bushia the Alpine

character of the Central Kuenluen had disappeared, the height of

the summits in the environs of Bushia not exceeding 11,000 feet.

We left Sumgal August the 29th, and followed for three marches

the valley of the Karakash, which flows from Simgal to Suget ina

westerly direction, then takes a sharp turn to the north, and from

thence flows for the most part in an east north-easterly direction.

We met on this road with very large quarries and mines, from

which is dug the Yashem stone (the Fahde), and which are resort-

ed to by people living at great distances. We were enabled to pro-

cure for future analysis a good supply of the different varieties of

this stone, which is much valued throughout Central Asia. Suget,

a halting-place on the winter road to Yarkand, is six ordinary

marches distant from Karakorum. From Suget to Karakash,

another town of Khotan, is six marches. We started after due

deliberation on the 1st of September with Mahomed Amin and only

two laden horses, leaving our fresh horses and every thing else we

could do without, including our little tent. Some instruments,

blankets, furs and provisions were all our baggage. We succeeded

in making in twelve days about 220 English miles across the cen-

tral parts of the Kuenluen, (twenty-five marches of the Russian

itinerary route from Yarkand to Leh). We reached Leh in the

evening of the 12th September. This river, as well as the other

streams descending from the northern slope of the Kuenluen, dis-

appears entirely after a short course in the sandy plains surrounding

lake Lop,

The country between Suget and the Karakorum was new to us.

We had here a very good opportunity of examining and determining

the mean elevation of the plateau above mentioned. We also had,

before we reached the Pass, a very extensive view of the highest

central peaks, which we tried to draw in the scale of one

degree = one centimetre in length,

From this point we wished to follow the Shayok river, as this

route would have taken us through a country new to us. We also

1857.) Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 115

met amongst many others a caravan with fourteen camels (the

Camelus Bactrianus) with two humps, frequently used for carrying

loads on the Yarkand road; these stout animals constantly cross

the elevated crests on the Yarkand road up to 18,000 feet, and

seem apparently little affected by the cold of these heights, the

native climate of wild Yaks and Kiangs.

We succeeded in procuring two of them, remarkably tame animals,

expecting to find them particularly useful in crossing the frequent

rapids met with in the Shayok river. But notwithstanding the

height and power of these animals, we found it impossible to 20

down the Shayok Valley. The river had much subsided, compared

with its height when we crossed it near Kardong, in the beginning

of August; but it was still far from passable, (which it is from the

end of October to the end of March). We were obliged therefore

to leave the road down the Shayok Valley at Stiltan Chuskil, to go

up the Valley to Sassar, and follow from thence our old route. We

had to cross in one day, not without difficulty, the Shayok river five

times before we reached Sassar.

During our absence from Leh, our Native Doctor Hurkishen had

made meteorological observations, and what was especially valuable

to us, detailed Barometric and Magnetic observations. He had com-

pleted a plan of Leh, the chief points of which had been laid down

before our departure, and collectors had been sent to different

parts of Ladak to complete Geological and Botanical collections,

particularly with reference to geographical distribution: we found

all our orders had been very carefully executed.

Our horses and luggage left behind at Suget, not arriving for

thirteen days after us, (September 25th,) we had time, besides finish-

ing our plans and drawings, to take numerous casts in plaster of

Paris* of the different tribes, as we had already done in other parts

of India and the Himalayas. The variety of tribes which is to be

found in Leh is particularly great, on account of its extended trade

with the different parts of Central Asia.

* We are obliged to E. H. Longden, Esq., Superintendent of the Secundra

Press at Agra, for a very valuable supply of plaster of Paris, when our own stock

was nearly exhausted,

116 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

GENERAL REMARKS ON THE OBSERVATIONS MADE DURING THE

JOURNEY, FRoM Lapak To KnHortan.

Magnetic OBSERVATIONS.

In Leh, two complete series of Magnetic observations had been

made before our departure, and two Magnetic apparatus had been

put up during our absence, one for the observation of the daily

variation of the declination, another for the daily variation of the

horizontal intensity. Observations were taken six times a day by

our Native Doctor Hurkishen the whole time we were absent.

During our journey to Turkistan we had with us a Declinometer,

a Vibration Apparatus, and a Dipcircle. We took observations on

the Sassar Pass, on Karakorum, in Sumgal, and in Suget. The

mean of the declination at Leh was, from July to September, very

near 2° 44’ Hast, ‘The declination decreased on the points above

mentioned, and was in Suget 2° 12’ Hast.

The mean for the inclination was—

Bab ela AND fe sath n4 BR en ate tS Bones coh 46° 50° 20°

On Sassar Passes oi. ee 48 11 75

On Karakorum: Pass, 7 aes. Agia ae 49-648. 0

TnsSiumpalj ows 3 ete tae Bi ce: a ace

In Suget, SO Aa hy

GEOGRAPHICAL REMARKS.

Extensive plateaux are to be found on both sides of Karako-

rum, being most extensive to the north and west of the Pass.

Eastward the plateaux terminate completely in the longitude of

Changchenmo, where we met again with valleys and ridges, both

well defined. A similar succession of ridges and valleys is also

the principal character of Ladak, where plateaux are generally

not met with. The mean height of the plateau to the north and

west of Karakorum is from 16,800 to 17,000 feet. The point where

the plateaux reach the greatest mean elevation, probably the loftiest

plateau in the world, is a little to the north of the sources of the

Shayok. To the south of this region between Karakorum and the

Nubra Valley, a second region of a great general elevation was

found, in which some single peaks seem to attain the greatest

absolute height. We had an opportunity of measuring some peaks

one of which was 24,000 feet.

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 117

The mean direction of the principal crest of the Kuenluen which

forms the water-shed between Ladak and Turkistan, runs north-

west to south-east from the sources of the Yarkand river to Rudok.

Another more northern chain independent of this, and of a com-

paratively smaller elevation, runs from west to east; this is the

chain over which Passes lead from Bushia and Elchi to Yurunkash,

Keria, &c. . The fall of the upper portion of the rivers Yarkand

Deriao and Karakash Deriao is not great. But the rivers descend-

ing from the other ridge, which runs from west to east, have a much

more rapid descent, particularly the rivers on the northern side of

this ridge.

We succeeded in procuring, besides our own routes, itineraries of

the commercial routes to Badakshan, Yarkand, Kashgar, Kokand and

to Aksu, from the different caravans we met with. The information

thus obtained from independent sources was very consistent as re-

garded the number and succession of the halting-places and their

distances from each other. It is scarcely necessary to add that we

found Baron Humboldt’s “ Map of the Mountain Systems and

the Volcanoes of Central Asia” of the greatest assistance in making

our own observations and in prosecuting enquiries for routes.

GEOLOGY.

To the north of the Nubra Valley much lime (chiefly carbonate,

combined with large masses of sulphate of lime) is met with; but

alternating in such a manner with crystalline rocks, that it can

scarcely be thought to be sedimentary ; it also appears nowhere to

contain fossil remains. On the northern margin of the Kuenluen,

crystalline rocks appear to extend to the foot of the mountains, and

if a margin of sedimentary rocks exists, it can only be very narrow.

We very often met with a hard crystalline rock, not unlike

pudding stone, which contained enclosures of spherical and angular

forms. We also came to quarries, where the Yashem stone is dug ;

they are at Gulbagashen in the valley of Karakash. We took a

good quantity of the best specimens with us for future analysis.

Two systems of cleavage predominate, which are particularly re-

gular in the central parts of the Kuenluen: the steeper one dips

North 30° to 50° East, the other South 20 to 40° West.

118 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

The erosion is very deep in the valleys on the northern margin

of the Kuenluen. In the inner parts of the Kuenluen, the valleys

present for the most part a Thibetan character, displaying a broad

basis slightly inclined, over which the water spreads itself in many

channels, and afterwards evaporates completely.

Extensive glaciers are chiefly met with in the range to the north

of Karakorum, (¢. e. in the ridge above mentioned in a direction

from west to east,) and another group, apparently the largest accu-

mulation of glaciers in the Kuenluen, was found in the environs of

Sassar, but both much smaller than the groups near the Diamer,

to the north-west, investigated by our brother Adolphe.

Two fine groups of hot springs of analogous character, (both

depositing great quantities of lime, and smelling slightly of hydro-

sulphuric gas) were found in Nubra. The temperature of the hottest

springs of the group near Panamick was 78° C. = 172.6° Fahr. ; of

the other group near Changlung, 74.1° C.==165.4° Fahr. <A spring

of ordinary water at the same height as Changlung had a tem-

perature of 10.1° C. = 50.2° Fahr. There is another group of hot

springs mentioned above, situated a little below the lake Kidk-kiul,

(14,800 feet). Their deposits. are nearly pure muriate of soda.

These springs, more than fifty in number, are partly situated in

the very bed of the river Karakash, and surrounded closely by

its cold waters. The temperature of these springs is from 25° to

49° C. =77° to 120° Fahrenheit.

In these neighbourhoods, and also lower down in the Karakash

Valley, are found several groups of salt pools, conical depressions

of the ground filled with solid salt and a concentrated solution of

salt. The salt was nearly pure table salt; but some pools were

not yet so far advanced in the progress of concentration that solid

salt had deposited itself.

The high temperature of these salt pools was very remarkable.

The salt deposit forms a stratum over the excavation containing

the salt-water and a nearly complete cover on its surface. The

creat diathermaneity of salt (a stratum of salt allows 92 out of 100

thermic rays to pass through it, while an equal thickness of glass

only allows 39,) is the principal cause of the excess of temperature

In consequence of this physical property of the salt, the tempera-

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 119

ture of the water below the cover is considerably raised by insola-

tion during the day, whilst it loses little heat by nocturnal radiation,

(a phenomenon of accumulated heat analogous to that of Saussure’s

and Sir John Herschel’s Heliothermometers). In the salt pools the

loss of heat by noctural radiation is still more lessened by a circum-

stance peculiar to perfectly concentrated saline solutions, namely,

that all the little openings in the superficial salt cover which exist

during the day, are closed by a deposit of solid salt as soon as the

temperature begins to fall in the evening. In the lower strata of

the water contained in those conical reservoirs the temperature

decreases very rapidly, a phenomenon which seems perfectly to

agree with the explanation given above, but to exclude the supposi-

tion that the temperature is raised by heat having its origin in

the lower strata of the ground, as is the case in hot springs.

Besides, artificial salt pools were constructed immediately after

our return to Leh, and we used the materials, (salt and clay)

which we had brought for this purpose from the salt pools in

the Karakash Valley. The variation of temperature in these

artificial salé pools was observed from hour to hour, and these

observations equally showed that the excess of temperature only

begins after the formation of a solid stratum of salt, which more

or less closes up the surface of the pools.

METEOROLOGY.

The snow line (the highest summer limit of perpetual snow), was

found to attain the greatest height in the environs of Karakorum,

its height exceeding 18,600 feet. The snow line sinks very little

towards Leh, but considerably on the northern slopes of the

mountains towards Khotan. Near Oitash, above Bushia, we found

its height not exceeding 16,000 feet.

Bas-Nevés completely hidden under detritus, a sort of subterra-

nean glaciers, but generally speaking of limited extent, which we

had seen first on the slopes descending from the Parang Pass, oc-

curredagain in the Kuenluen on the northern slopes of the Sassar

mountains. In this group, which we crossed twice, we had an

opportunity of determining the variation of the snow line, In the

middle of September it had already sensibly descended, whilst the

120 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

isolated low snow beds in protected places and the subterranean

Bas-Névés above mentioned had, comparatively speaking, very much

diminished by the melting which still continued in the lower parts

of the slopes and valleys.

The dryness of the atmosphere appears to be greatest in the

environs of Karakorum, but it rapidly decreases in the direction of

Khotan. From various and apparently very consistent data, which

we obtained from the inhabitants we estimate ......... inches.

The direction of the wind is chiefly northerly. The south winds

which predominate in Central Ladak and in Kunawer are perfectly

unknown on the northern side of the Kuenluen.

The phenomenon of the second illumination of snow-clad moun-

tains after sunset (analogous to the glowing of the Alpine snows)

was seen several times on those nights when there was no moon.

We saw it particularly well near Chibra to the north of Karako-

rum. Judging of it as we saw it there, we think it to be quite

independent of a spontaneous development of light from snow. It

was evidently caused by an illumination of the snow-fields from

the west north-western parts of the sky. This illumination is only

visible sometime after the sun has set, namely, when the projec-

tion of the earth’s shade has reached an angular height exceeding

that of the mountains, and when the atmospheric light has de-

creased so much that the atmosphere behind the mountains reflects

less light than the snow-clad slopes of the mountains exposed to

the west north-west.

At heights above 17,000 feet we found in the Kuenluen, the

transparency of the atmosphere so great, that the small and the

large circles in Saussure’s diaphanometer (as we had used it also

formerly in the Alps of Europe, and described in our “ Re-

searches’’) disappeared under the same angles, and therefore the

transparency above 17,000 feet was so great that a stratum of air,

3,000 to 3,500 feet thick, absorbed the light in so small a degree,

that the absorption to our eyes became unappreciable. It was

then determined by another method, by which a stratum of much

greater thickness could be examined.

The transparency of the atmosphere is often very much affected

by a peculiar haze not affecting the psychrometer; we found this

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 121

dry haze particularly frequent when we were on the plateau to the

north of Karakorum.

The height of the clouds is generally very great. Even during the

rain, which fell from the 25th to the 28th July, it exceeded 17,000

feet. Fogs in the valley of the Indus at 11,800 feet were observed

only once on the 28rd September, on which day the rain began

at 1-10 a.m. Its temperature was, when it first fell, 4.6° C. —8°.3

Fahr. below the temperature of the air, (air, 7.9° rain 3.3° C.) ; it

only reached the temperature of the air at 9 a. mM. when the

psychrometer had also become equal to the temperature of the air.

The daily variations of the barometer, also at heights of 17,500

feet bar. 385 millimeters, had still the same form as at lesser

elevations, showing particularly a decided minimum near 4 P. M.

The difference between the daily extremes reached then only 2.5°

millimeters. Also at lower elevations, such as 11,000 to 12,000 feet,

we found the variation of the barometer very small: at Leh, the

difference between the two greatest oes observed in three

months, was only five millimeters.

VEGETATION, ANIMALS.

The number of species of plants, as well as the number of indi-

viduals, is exceedingly limited on the higher parts of the Kuenluen.

Lichens are completely wanting in the dry angular gravel covering

the high plateau and slopes of the mountains in their neighbour-

hood; they are only to be found among the moraines, which are

generally moister. More surprising still is the abundance of vegeta-

tion, particularly of grass on the most northern slopes descending

to the valley of the Yarkand and its northern tributaries. But

even there, the number of species is smaller than at first sight we

were led to expect. The increase of vegetation seems to coincide

with the increase of rain mentioned above.

Birds, even birds of prey, are exceedingly scarce in the central

parts. Quadrupeds are much more numerous. We found wild

yaks, the existence of which in the wild state has been doubted,

Kiangs, five or six species of wild sheep and goats, hares and mice,

as high as 16,000 to 17,000 feet. Their number as well as the

variety of species is remarkably great when compared with the great

searcity of vegetation.

122 dteport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey of India, and the

Researches connected with it, from Jay to November, 1856.—By

M. ADOLPHE SCHLAGINTWEIT.

Route. |

I left Simla on the 28th of May, proceeding through Kulu and

Lahoul to Zanskar in Thibet (arrived 26th June). I was chiefly oc-

cupied with the examination of the western parts of Thibet, and of

a considerable part of the Kuenluen range to the northward of

Thibet.

Larrived at Khabbulu on the 21st July, and penetrated by a

transverse valley from Khabbulu and Shigar up to the water-shed

of the Kuenluen range. The most northern point reached was the

Mustak Pass (20th Aucust, 18,800 Eng. feet). The predatory habits

of the wild Mahomedan tribes of Hunze, which infest the country

on the other side of the Mustak, prevented my proceeding further

on in this direction in the Kuenluen range. I had the opportu-

nity of reaching, on the 29th of July, on the Chorkonda peak, an

elevation of nearly 19,500 Eng. feet (calculated approximately from

Ladakh) and made a series of physical experiments during the

ascent.

T arrived at Iscardo on the 1st of September, after an examination

of the elevated mountain groups near the point where the great

southern bend of the Indus takes place. I arrived at Kashmeer on

the 9th of October, and left on the 2nd of November for Murree and

Rawul Pindee, (arrived 17th November). According to the plan of

our operations sanctioned by Government, during the present cold

season a part of the Punjab and of Scinde will be examined.

To obtain geological and meteorological observations for a part

of the Himalaya, which we could not visit ourselves, my draftsman,

Eleazar Daniel, and Mr, Monteiro, attached to my brother Her-

manu’s establishment, with some geological and plant collectors,

were sent through the outer ranges of the Himalaya from Simla, vid

Kangra and Noorpoor to Kashmeer,

Their barometric and meteorological observations carried on re,

gularly at Kangra, Noorpoor, Jummoo and Kashmeer, will be of

much value for the calculation of our own barometric observations,

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 123

Magnetic OBSERVATIONS.

Magnetic Observations were made by me at the following sta-

tions :—

Simla.

Sultanpore.

Kardong in Lahoul.

Zanskar.

Dah.

Huche, 2

Camp on the upper part of Chorkonda

glacier 15,800,

These stations are

situated on the north-

pern side of the In-

oe dus in the Kuenluen

S ;

Camp at the foot of the Mustak Pass,

range.

Iscardo, J

Astor,

Guryhs,

Kashmeer, where a continuous and regular series of hourly obser-

vations were taken.

Murree,

Rawul Pindee continued hourly observations.

I also subjoin a list of the magnetic Stations made during the

same period by my brothers, Hermann Schlagintweit and Robert

Schlagintweit :—

Simla,

Rtampoor in Bissahir,

Mood in Spiti,

Korzok on the Tso Moriri Lake,

Pangkong Lake,

Ladakh, (Leh) regular series of hourly observations for two

months (See Report of Hermann Schlagintweit and Robert Schla-

gintweit, p. 116.)

Sassar Pass,

Karakorum Pass,

Sumgal, in Turkistan,

Suget, in ditto,

Kargyl,

Dyas,

124 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey.

Kashmeer,

Murree,

Mozufferabad,

Rawul Pindee.

[No. 2.

The following gives the magnetic. dip ascertained at some of the

more important stations,

Camp at the foot of the Mustak,........ 50°

ChorkondaClaeien,..) 25. ui. saleieras 0 sane, ee

PB Re cca. Coie a: o ei cla baile fel aa ames a

Were oo: cee a deswia: ste: paccdlnenckt B Shaya deen cs cee nee

RRUEE VOB pcos cena, Ata lo a ails: beg eee es Glbyn ela Sips stale NRE

TGA GIUNO COTE: cre nu bitid eitete tate ans fa catia Greene: een

IMEUTRCG se we beied ofan ein ra aye A es aes

1 EC TET Ra ea ae GPR ee ee CTR eR RMR

Suan pOOR; ee ss bine ate ce 43

4.0

545

Some of the principal Sinton Dade a ‘Mr. aie Schlagin-

tweit and Mr. Robert Schlagintweit, are subjoined for compa-

rison :—

Sugeb tin: Var is Gai ips as suleca. 5 ce xpelseue st euletors «yn MOE

Sumgal in: do.piocdeyyaaeus ils megiahegeserr ae

Karakorum, Passi 2: sdocwenzs sot Syedelt yao

DANSar HeASSs. (ac anmeideies hye ble « wienrelnccls Grae

Soacatichs (CUiehia 2. eters a) e's 98 lee Coser anu AER

1 EN fod ae Se S20 SIR, aE No

TTR cin) u. te cle ua ek, Meta Gait eet cig Abs Shey ee pitts poe eee

Momuitera bad, \cipaerdsc ie o's cic aphie maak unico tt ween

These observations, as well as ihe mer eer given in our for-

mer reports, show that the increase of the dip or inclination of the

magnetic needle compared to the latitude, is very rapid in India

and in the mountain system of High Asia.

The declination of the magnetic needle is constantly to the east-

ward in the whole of the western Himalayas, Thibet and the Kuen-

luen mountains.

The easterly declination is every where pretty considerable, being

for instance—

2° 44/ to the east in Leh.

eM aliais, cc, n «04 PUSEE:

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 125

and still very nearly 2° to the east in Astor, which place was the

most westerly of our stations.

It seems to be quite evident that the lines of the magnetic decli-

nation undergo a sensible irregularity in the mountain systems of

High Asia (comprising the Himalaya, Thibet and the Kuenluen)

that is to say, the declination in these mountains in the same longi-

tude is more to the eastward, than it is in the same longitude in the

Indian Peninsula. .

METEOROLOGY.

The barometrical and meteorological observations have been daily

earried on regularly as before. 1 may be permitted to mention a few

of the results.

1. The barometric observations made at several elevated and iso-

lated stations (between 16,000 and 18,000 Eng. feet) hourly for

one or several days, have shown that the diurnal barometric varia-

tion at great heights in the Himalayas, is similar to that in the

plains ; the minimum pressure takes place between 3 and 5 Pp. M.

The difference between the maximum and minimum, however, is

constantly very small and considerably less than it is in places of

less elevation above the sea.

2. The diurnal variation of the barometer in the mountain sys-

tems of High Asia is therefore different from the barometric varia-

tion at elevated peaks of the Alps of Europe where the maximum

pressure takes place in the early hours of the afternoon.

The summer heat in the valleys of Balti, elevated only from 7,000

to 8,000 Eng. feet, is very considerable. I observed from the 1st to

the 20th July, in the valleys of the Indus and Shyok, very general-

ly, the following maxima and minima of temperature; maximum of

the day 32° centigrade, minimum of the night 15° to 16° centi-

grade ; average of the day 28° to 24° centigrade.

The decrease of temperature from these heated rocky valleys to

the higher peaks is very considerable.

3. The direction of the winds in western Thibet is: very much

affected by the great local heat produced in the deep rocky valleys;

regular morning and evening winds, sometimes very violent, pre-

vail during the summer months in the valleys of the Indus and

126 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. (No. 2.

Shyok and in the valleys of their larger tributaries, but at greater

heights southerly winds prevail as a general rule up to the water-

shed of the Kuenluen.

These southerly winds are compensated by northerly winds which

have been observed in Turkistan by my brothers, at the same time

that I constantly experienced southerly winds on the east of the

KCuenluen mountains.

4. The quantity of rain and snow that falls in the western parts

of the Kuenluen, in the environs of the Mustak Pass, &c., is con-

siderably more than in the eastern parts of the chain about Karako-

rum ; in consequence the snow line near Mustak (17,900 ft.) is much

lower than on the Karakorum mountains (18,600 ft.) determined by

my brothers; in consequence also, a great number of large glaciers

occur in the western Kuenluen, whilst in the very rainless Kara-

korum group glaciers of a similar size do not exist.

The greater amount of rain and snow which falls in the western

Kuenluen seems especially to be due to the wide opening which

exists along the southern parts of the valley of the Indus.

Through this opening the moist winds from the plains of India

can penetrate more freely to the high ranges of Mustak than to the

Karakorum mountains, where they have to cross the high Himala-

yan ranges.

The total amount of rain and snow on the western Kuenluen

ranges, may be estimated to be about 10 inches a-year; by far the

greater part of which is snow-fall in winter. There is very little

rain in summer. The total amount of rain and snow in the valleys

of the Indus and Shyok is less than in the Kuenluen.

5. Owing especially to the absence of summer rains, and to the

dryness of the heated atmosphere produced by the insolated rocky

slopes of the valleys, no natural forest of any kind exists in the

valleys of western Thibet, though they are only elevated 7,000 to

8,000 Eng. feet above the sea.

At an elevation of 12,000 to 15,000 Eng. feet a rich shrub vegeta-

tion of a large species of juniper, of willows and birches is general-

ly met with; below 12,000 feet this shrub vegetation becomes much

thinner and disappears almost entirely, owing to the greater heat

and dryness. )

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 127

6. The heat and dryness of summer in Balti, which is so much

opposed to the growth of Conifer and other forest trees, exercises

a very different influence upon the growth of artificially planted

fruit trees which are very abundant.

The fruit trees reach in Balti to a much greater elevation than in

the Himalaya; the upper limits (of the walnut for instance) in

Balti and the Kuenluen is 11,000 feet, whilst in the Himalaya, it

is only 9,000: the apricots (a characteristic tree for the Balti val-

leys,) which are nearly unknown in the Himalaya, reach 10,000 to

10,500 ft. Apples and grapes show a difference still greater than in

the case of the walnuts. The cause of it is, that in the Himalaya

the summer rains tend to lower the summer temperature in the

higher valleys owing especially to the cloudy state of the atmosphere,

In the upper Himalayan valleys, the summer rains just set in at a

time when these fruit trees are still in flower or beginning to form

the fruit.

7. The observations of the temperature of the ground at various

depths mentioned in our former Reports were carried on at many

stations, both by my brothers, and by myself.

The following are the temperatures of the ground observed at one

meter, (3 feet 3 inches) below the surface at some of the principal

places.

The thermometers were buried in a level open ground which was

freely exposed to the rays of the sun.

Temperature at 1 me-

STATIONS, &e. ter (3 feet 3 tnches)

below the surface.

Sultanpore, 5th to 7th June,.. .... 2.2.00... 24,59

Kohsar, 8th to 9th June, (12,000) ...... .. 9.41

Kardong, 10th to 14th June, (12,000) ...... 9.6

Padum, 24th to 27th June, (12,000) ........ 9.7

Wah, Sih and 6th July, (9;700)...06 2.0.0. e188

Chorkonda, 21st and 22nd July, (12,000) .... 14.2

Shigar, 4th and 5th August, (8,200) ........ 18.7

Chutron, 8th, 9th and 10th August, ........ 20.0

Isoha, Camp near Mustak glaciers, 19th and 20th

Pee Usb CLP, O0W) Maiti: tl ik elas ee ot. Ue

128. Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No.2

Camp near Mustak glacier, 24th, 25th and 26th

August, (16,000).. a Po ALOE I

Astor Fort, 10th and Lith Spi (1 600) .. 16-0

Pattere Brock, 13th and 14th, (10,800) .. 12-3

Ladakh, 11,700 Eng. feet ascertained yi ae

brothers.

ie Average for*duly 5 SON eee

‘ m4 Asus, COU See

i a September, 0. [02.7 See

Kashmeer average, for October, for 1 meter,.. 18-5

The numbers in the above table show the very considerable tem-

perature of the ground at 1 meter below the surface in the valleys

of the Kuenluen during summer. It is considerably higher than

the temperature at equal heights and equal depths below the surface

in the Himalaya mountains.

This fact is especially due to the rains in the Himalayas which

tend to cool the ground.

In the Kuenluen on the contrary the ground is very- dry, and

considerably heated by a nearly uninterrupted insolation.

8. The following are the results obtained for the temperature of

the ground at great depths below the surface, where the tempera-

ture may be assumed to be very nearly stationary. Small wells

were dug for the purpose, and the insensible thermometers inserted

in the bottom; the hole was filled up entirely and only re-opened

after a considerable time.

Ladakh. Ascertained by my brothers 433 feet

below the surface, July, ..:........:.0.. Us4e-Cent

Iscardo,—temperature of several springs at the

foot of small hills and at the foot of high banks

of alluvial clay, ..... ts aeeeee 14.4 to 146

Kashmeer, 386 Eng. feet, Gutater evel ie ae

The following were the temperatures observed in the same locali-

ty at Kashmeer at different depths below the surface.

At 382 Eng. feet below the surface, ........ 17°.2

At 213 do. doy 51". 2 eatele secate lhe: AOnAIeR

At 63 feet average for Oiltbers dete that a

Rawul Pindee, at 47 feet, 9 inches, wovaiait 20,05

1857. | Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 129

GroLoay.

9. The Kuenluen on the fone side and; the Himalaya on the

other, form evidently only parts of one great system of elevation ;

Thibet is situated between them; it is an undulating country, with

many high mountain ranges which are generally considerably lower

than the chains containing the culminating peaks of either the

Himalaya or the Kuenluen. Only in some parts, for instance in

the lacustrine basin of the Sutlej, Thibet assumes the form of an

elevated plain properly so called.

10. The geological structure of the two above mentioned moun-

tain chains is closely allied, even the exterior features of the moun-

tains, in some parts of the Kuenluen about Mustak, are much

more similar to those of the Himalayas than might be expected.

11. To the westward, the Himalaya and Kuenluen are sepa-

rated only by a very narrow belt of mountainous country, 30 to 50

miles broad ; it is composed of hornblendic rocks and of a very nar-

row stripe of fossiliferous paleozoic rocks which are clearly inter-

posed between the elevated felspathic masses, which border them

to the north and to the south.

The western termination of the Himalaya may be considered to be

at the great southern bend of the Indus.

On the western side of the Indus the Himalaya and Kuenluen

cannot be traced as separate chains ; they form one mountain mass,

the elevation of which decreases very rapidly to the westward.

I had the opportunity of examining a very considerable part of

these mountainous ranges from some elevated points in Astor, and

obtained much information about the topography of the countries of

Gilgit, Jassin, Chitroul and Mustak.

Already in Jassin and Chitroul the mountains have lost, to a great

extent, their Alpine character ; there no longer exist any Jarge gla-

ciers, and the Passes are all lower and many are even passable

during winter.

Both in the Himalaya and Kuenluen, the central groups are

composed of felspathic erystalline rocks. Mauy of them show very

distinctly the fan-like arrangement of cleavage, which was first

observed in the Alps.

io 7]

130 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 2.

In the western Kuenluen, the fan-like structure is exceedingly

well developed, the Mustak Pass lies in just about the position,

where the cleavage lines run vertically ; to the westward of Mustak,

the dip is easterly ; to the eastward the dip of the cleavage is quite

in the opposite direction.

13. In the Kuenluen, no /fossiliferous strata have been met

with; the crystalline limestone and gypsum strata which occur in

many places form part of the metamorphic micaceous shists, be-

tween which they are interposed.

Associated with the gypsum are found in many places hot miner-

al springs, mostly sulphureous. The hot springs and the gypsum

ean be traced all along the southern part of the Kuenluen from

the origin of the Indus near the Mansarauer Lake to the western

Kuenluen around Mustak. We had the opportunity of examining

in this range hot springs in more than ten different localities. Some

of the springs have a temperature of 90° to 92° centigrade at eleva-

tions of 11,000 to 12,000 Eng. feet above the sea; they must be

reckoned amongst the hottest springs in the world.

14, The fossiliferous strata which have been described last year

in Gnari Khorsum near the origin of the Sutlej, form a pretty con-

tinuous band at the northern foot of the Himalaya all along through

Western Thibet.

In many places, for instance in Spiti, Zanskar and near Iscardo,

fossil remains have been found perfectly identical with the species,

collected last year in the more eastern parts of Thibet.

The strata contain fossils from the silurian up to the oolitic

group, but no eretaceous fossils, and no nummulites occur on the

northern side of the Himalayan water-shed. The fossiliferous strata

have been altered in many localities by intrusive greenstones, which

sometimes occur in very considerable masses.

15. Ou the southern side of the main range of the Himalaya,

fossiliferous sedimentary strata of great extent are met with.

Already last year, I had the opportunity of pointing out the fact,

that the true crystalline felspathic rocks, granite and gneiss, occupy

a comparatively small surface in these mountain systems. These

rocks form a number of groups of very different size, and in some

places, for instance to the northward of Kashmeer, the extent of the

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 131

central crystalline rocks is very limited indeed. Large tracts of

country in the Himalayas, south of the water-shed, are occupied by

sedimentary marine strata, which contain in several places fossil

remains. The slate and limestone mountains about Kashmeer

yielded a large number of oolitic fossils many identical with those

found in Thibet, the same were met with in Kulu and in the moun-

tains near Simla. To the eastward, where as yet no fossils have

been discovered, the alteration of the sedimentary strata by intrusive

felspathic rocks seems to have been more considerable than at the

western end of the chain. To the south of Kashmeer a zone of

nummulitic marls and of sandstones of 39 to 50 miles broad bor-

ders the Himalaya towards the plains of India.

16. From the observations now collected, it seems that the

ocean in the oolitic period extended from the southward across the

country where the Himalayas are now situated as far as Thibet.

The ocean of the nummulitic period on the contrary no longer ex-

tended so far to the northward. It covered a large part of western

Asia, of Scinde and the Punjaub, and had its border formed by

an elevated range of the then already existing Himalaya.

17. The excavation by the valleys of the eroding power of

streams has been carried on to a very great extent—the considerable

fall, which rivers like the Indus and Sutlej experience on their

course from Thibet down to the low plains of India, has increased

their excavating power in a surprising manner.

In the valley of the Indus near Iscardo, in the valley of Astor

near the place where the Indus enters the Himalaya, I on several

occasions observed gravel, and sand beds evidently deposited by

these rivers, and ancient marks produced by the large streams

on the rocks at elevations of 3,000 and 4,000 Eng. feet above the

present level of the rivers. We have many proofs independent of

each other to show the great depth to which all the valleys of the

rivers tributary to the Sutlej and Indus have been excavated.

18. In the western Kuenluen very large glaciers from 10 to

15 miles long exist in several valleys. We meutioned last year

that in the Himalayas nearly all glaciers show evident marks of

being somewhat smaller at present than they were at some former

S 2

132 Entomological Papers. [ Wont

period ; the same fact has been very generally ascertained in the

western Himalayas as well as in the Kuenluen.

The decrease of glaciers is comparatively small, but general ; no

traces of a very large ancient extension of glaciers, like the one sup-

posed by some geologists to have taken place in a general “ glacial

period’ in the Alps, could be found in the mountains of High

Asia.

The decrease of glaciers as observed by us must be due to some

general change in the climate of the surrounding country, and I

think that we have numerous observations to show that this change

of climate is due in a great measure to the great excavation of the

Thibetan and Himalayan valleys by the action of the rivers.

Many of the valleys of Western Thibet exhibit ancient water

marks at 8,000 and 4,000 feet above the present bed of the river.

The sides of these rocky valleys, thus gradually excavated, are now

heated under the influence of the sun to a much greater extent than

was the case formerly ; the warm air thus produced, ascends the

valleys and tends to melt the ice of the glaciers, near-the origin of

the valleys, to a greater extent than was the case before the ex-

cavation of the valleys had taken place.

ONIN en nn nnn

Entomological Papers,* by Joun Nierner, Colombo, Ceylon.

43 Cyclosomus dyticoides. N.

C. suborbicularis, depressus, obscure castaneus, elytris piceis

fasciis 2 testaceis ornatis, pedibus brunneo—testaceis, tarsis, anten-

nis oreque magis minusve brunneis. Long. Corp. 44—6 lin; lat.

23—3 lin.

Antenne art. 3-11 depressis. Thorax transversus antice profunde

semilunariter sinuatus ; basi quadratus, medio leviter subquadrate

emarginatus, elytris parum angustior, ante scutellum subtiliter stri-

gosus ; apicem versus sensim angustatus. LElytra basi subquadrata,

striata, fasciis 2 (una subhumerali, altera subapicali) transversali-

bus, interruptis, interstitia 2-8 occupantibus, testaceis ornata.

* Continued from No. VI.—1856, p. 554,

1857. | | Entomological Papers. 133

Pedes tibiis apice 2-calcaratis, calcaribus 2-serratis, tarsis maris

2 anterioribus art. 1-3 subtus leviter dupliciterque penicillatis, inter

mediis fortiter simpliciterque penicillatis. Prosternum subhastatum.

In proy. occid. arenis peraridis Amararum more victitat.

To judge from what Lacordaire says of this g. in his gen. des col.

(a work which, as I have said elsewhere, I look upon as containing

the essence of all former researches) it would appear that the pre-

sent species differs very materially from the three others hitherto

described, namely in the flatness of the antennal joints, in the ser-

rated edges of the tibial spurs, in the existence of the tarsal brushes

in the male and in the colour—to say nothing of some other minor

distinctions. The three first of these peculiarities (too important

not to have been noticed by Lacordaire or any other describer of

the g. had they been aware of them) add considerably to the charac-

teristics which already constitute this g. one of the most remarkable of

the extensive family of the Carabide, whilst through the colour of the

present species it becomes still more closely and more strikingly allied

to certain Dyticide (Hydaticus) than has hitherto been the case.

The prevailing colour of the insect is deep chestnut, lighter along

the sides of the thorax, the elytra darker. The latter are variegat-

ed with 2 transverse belts of irregular outline and interrupted in

the middle near the suture; one of these is subhumeral, the other

subapical ; they are of yellowish colour and reach from the first to the

eighth stria, a small discoloured spot being projected from the sub-

humeral belt on either side to the ninth stria and a discoloured pro-

longation of the other filling the apical angles, with the exception ofa

dark spot ; the margin is also of a more or less brownish colour. The

legs are dark yellowish with chestnut tarsi; the mouth and antenne

are brown, the latter light at the base. These colours vary alto-

gether from lighter to darker. The head is of the typical sculpture,

it has 2 impressions at the posterior margin of the clypeus and is

finely sulcated between the eyes. The antenne are strong, stiff and

short reaching hardly beyond the base of the thorax, joint 1 is of

middling size, 2 short, 3,4 are subequal 5 rather shorter, 6-11 still

shorter, subequal, joints 3-11 are strongly compressed and pubescent,

but only on the narrow side. The labrum is deeply subtriangularly

emarginated in front and increases in breadth towards its base. The

134 Entomological Papers. [ No. 2.

maxille are furnished with a thick brush at the apex much of the

rough appearance of a minute bundle of coir. The inner edge of

the lobes of the mentum is very broadly cut away. The ligula

appears, what I understand it to be from Lacordaire’s description,

coriaceous, of middling size, of the shape of an oblong square, de-

pressed in front and at the sides, set in its membranous and ample

paraglosse as in a broad frame; the whole obliquely truncated at

the anterior angles, and ciliated along the anterior margin. The

palpi can hardly be said to be truncated at the apex of the 4th joint,

finishing off rather like an acorn. The remaining parts of the mouth

and the head in general are of typical construction. The thorax

is strongly transverse, subquadratic at the base and firmly applied to

the elytra but not quite as large. The latter being also subquadra-

tic at the base, the place of the juncture of these two parts of the

body presents, upon close inspection, rather a peculiar appearance.

The thorax is gently narrowed towards the apex, the anterior part.

is deeply emarginated in the shape of a crescent, the posterior part

slightly so at the middle, the emargination being long, shallow and

nearly rectangular, its external corners fitting into two deep notches

in the base of the elytra. The anterior angles are rather acuminat-

ed. The back is elevated and divided by a longitudinal line, it tas

2 impressions at the base and is finely sulcated just in front of the

scutellum. The elytra are furrowed and irregularly impressed with

deep punctures along the 9th ridge, they are slightly dehiscent at the

apex. The legs of the male are of the following description: strong

coxe, trochanters and femora simple, the latter slightly setose, the

anterior tibiz strongly dilated towards the apex and costated, strone-

ly spinoso-dentate at the outer edge, with a strong, blunt spur at

the notch and another at the apex, the latter place, moreover, fur-

nished with spines. The intermediate and posterior tibia with 3

rows of spines along the outer and 2 rows of strong bristles at the

inner side—all inserted on ridges, strongly 2-calcarated at the apex,

the inner spur longer than the outer one. These apical spurs of

the tibice are in all the legs slightly compressed and serrated on the 2

narrow sides. he anterior tarsi have joints 1-4 slightly dilated, the

apex of the first and the 2nd and 3rd being at the same time furnished

each with 2 small white brushes below fenced in by spines. Joint 1 1s

1857.] Entomological Papers. 135

triangular with the external apical angle strongly prolonged, 2 and

8 are almost equal, transversely ovato—subcordiform, 2 slightly but

distinctly prolonged at the external apical angle, 3 less so, but still

prolonged, 4 small, cordiform, 5 long subcylindric, joints 1-4 with 2

spines at the apical angles, these spines removed in the 5th the one

to a subapical and the other to a position at the middle; in joints

1-3 these spines are shorter and thicker at the outer angle than at

the inner, in the 4th this difference is scarcely observable and in

the last it does not exist; the claws are strong and simple. The

intermediate tarsi are elongated, joint 1 triangular, 2 and 3 nearly

equal, quadrato—subcordiform, 4 of a similar form but much smaller

—all furnished with spines at the apical angles in the manner of the

anterior tarsi. Zhe inner side of the apical half of joint 1 and joints

2 and 3 with strong brushes of reddish colour bordered by rows of

spines, the entire lower surface forming one thick brush and not two

as in the first pair. The posterior tarsi are still more elongated,

joints 1-4 decreasing gradually in size, subcylindric, 5 quite so, all

armed like the preceding. Whe legs of the female are very similar to

those of the male, still there is some difference in the tarsi: the

brushes are wanting, the anterior pair has joints 1-3 fully as much

and 4 more dilated, joints 2-4 are subcordiform, 2-3 rather more

prolonged on the outer side than in the male. In the intermediate

pair the joints are more distinctly triangular. The prosternum is

elliptic, pointed at the apex, or of the shape of a spearhead with the

lateral angles rounded off, it is depressed at the sides, strongly

marginated (as is also the anterior part of the mesothorax) being

furnished with a few thin hairs within the margin, The size of

the individuals is no criterion as to their sex, sometimes the female

sometimes the male being the largest.

Regarding the habits of these insects one would feel inclined

to suspect them to be of a semiaquatic nature, that is the insects

to frequent the banks of rivers or other damp places—however,

the direct contrary is the case: they live in the driest, hottest and

sandiest places that can be found, where they burrow in the sand

exactly in the manner of the well known g. of the Amaras. In the

course of 6 years I have taken but 2 of these interesting insects,

both in the neighbourhood of Negombo, the one in the Cinnamon

136 Entomological Papers. [No. 2.

gardens there, the other flying on my table at night. Of late,

however, I have been more fortunate taking considerable numbers

of them in the Cinnamon gardens of Colombo in holes, made by

the rooting up of weeds, into which they had run and could not

escape, the loose sand giving way under them whenever they

attempted to do so. When wishing to find them I had to search

the corners of these holes, where some leaves had usually collected,

when I have sometimes dug up eight at a time, frequently rather

deep in the sand. They are quick of motion and being thus

pursued immediately bury themselves in the sand.

On reconsidering the peculiarities which so effectually distin-

guish this species from the 3 others known, and which I have

thought it not superfluous to set forth at such length, 1 am doubt-

ful whether there is not ample reason for forming it into a new g.

unless indeed the other species were very imperfectly known and

described, which latter I almost suspect with regard to the foot-

brushes of the male. If, however, otherwise the diagnosis as

given by Lacordaire requires at all events to be entirely recast

and the g. to be reméved from the tribe Cratoceridex, (one of the

characteristics of which is the want of foot-brushes in the male) in

which he has placed it; and, this being agreed to, I would, taking

all its peculiarities into consideration, propose to carry out Lacor-

daire’s idea and to form it into a new tribe “ Cyclosomide’’ to

which it appears as much entitled as the g. Omophron.

Trib. Bembidiidee.

Ochthephilus. n. g. NV.

Corpus oblongum, subparallelum, valde depressum. Caput mag-

num antice trigonum; oculis magnis, ovatis, prominulis; collo

forti. Mentum subquadrate emarginatum, lobis extus fortiter

rotundatis, apice abrupte acuminatis, dente parvo acuminato.

Ligula parva apice quadrate truncata, libera, paraglossis setifor-

mibus marginem anteriorem longe superantibus. Palpi robusti

art. 4° elongato, tenul, acuminato; maxillares art. 38° interne—,

2° externe incrassato; labiales art. 3° robusto externe incrassato,

2° parvo, cylindrico. Labrum parvum subtrigonum, antice emar-

ginatum. Mandibule, elongate, rect, trigone, apice arcuate,

1857. | Entomological Papers. 137

infra* medium pluries dentate. Antenne robuste corporis med.

fere attingentes, art. 1° et 11° mediocribus, subequalibus, 2-4 et

5-10 inter se subequalibus, illis subcylindricis, his ovatis. Tho-

rax subcordatus basi quadratus. Pedunculus brevis. Elytra, apice

rotundata. Pedes omnes simplices, subequales, anteriores tibiis

profunde excavatis, tarsis leviter contractis, art. 1-4 gradatim mino-

ribus, art. 1° subcylindrico, 2-4 subtrigonis, 5° sat magno, unguibus

simplicibus,

44. Ochthephilus Ceylanicus. N.

O. brunneo-testaceus, pedibus palpisque testaceis, tenuiter

pubescens; fronte. profunde 2-sulcata ; elytris obsolete striatis, in

striis punctatis ; long corp. 13 lin.

In fluminum ripis Bembidiorum more victitat.

This interesting little beetle might at first sight be mistaken for

a Lemophloeus, of which it has the size, depressed form and colour,

the prominent eyes, however, and cordate thorax—to say nothing

of its habitat—remind one very soon of its real connexions. I

do not think there can be any doubt that this insect forms a new

and interesting addition to the Bembidiide. In fact the question

whether it belongs to this tribe or not, depends, in my opinion,

mainly upon the inferences drawn from the structure of the ter-

minal joint of the palpi. It is true that this joint attains in

Ochthephilus a degree of development unequalled amongst the

Bembidiide ; as, however, this development is not confined to

the one particular joint alluded to, but affects the entire organ of

which it forms a part, it can hardly be said to bea variation of

much importance; and as, moreover, the general shape (indepen-

dently of the elongation) and mode of insertion are the same as

in the typical Bembidiide I have not hesitated to refer my un. g.

to this tribe.

The head is as broad as the thorax and altogether of about

the same size, it is strongly triangular from the eyes to the tip of

the mandibles, the forehead is impressed with 2 deep longitudinal

furrows, the eyes are large, rather oval and prominent, behind

them the head is abruptly contracted into a thick neck. The

antenne are long and thick reaching nearly to the middle of the

188 Entomological Papers. [No. 2.

body, joints 1 and 11, 2 4 5-10 are subequal amongst themselves,

5-11 oval, 1-4 subeylindric. The labrum is small, rather trian-

cular being narrowed at its base, it is emarginated in front with

a slight angle in the middle of the emargination. The mandibles

are long, straight, triangular, bent at the tip only, dentated

below the middle, the one more so than the other. The maxille

are thin and slender, gently bent outwards at the base and inwards

at the apex, the outer lobe corresponding with the inner one in

shape and strength. The palpi are robust, both the maxillary

and labial ones have joint 4 elongated, thin and acuminated, in

fact needle-shaped, firmly implanted in the preceding one, not loosely

hinged to it. The maxillary ones have joints 3 and 2 robust, the

former swollen on the inner, the latter on the outer side. In the

labial ones joint 8 is still plumper than in the others, but differs

in shape by being incrassated on the outer instead of the inner

side, the 2nd joint being at the same time quite small and cylin-

dric. The mentum is large and simple as above described. The

ligula is small, oblong, very slightly narrowed and transversely

eut away at the apex; the paraglosse separate from its sides a

little below the anterior corners ; they are setiform and reach much

beyond it. The whole organ is of membranaceous texture having,

however, a more substantial centre or back. The thorax and elytra

are simple and sufficiently described above. I may add that the

former is divided by a longitudinal furrow and that both are

furnished with a narrow margin at the sides. The scutellum is

very small and the abdomen furnished with a short peduncle. The

legs are weak, simple and nearly equal, the anterior tibise are

deeply notched, the lower margin of the fourth tarsal joint of the

same pair is furnished with a long thin spine the apex of which

fits in between the claws. I have been unable to discover any

footbrushes or other sexual distinctions in the specimens before

me, but it 1s not improbable that the tarsal spine just mentioned

occurs only in one sex.

The habits of the insect are those of the Bembidia, in whose

society it lives upon the banks of rivers, like them taking readily

to its wings. 1 have found it occasionally in considerable num-

bers upon the sandy banks of the Maha Oya in the neighbourhood

of Negombo, close to the edge of the water.

1857. ] Entomological Papers. 139

Trib. Lebiide vel Pericalide.

Creagris. n. g. N.

Corpus oblongum valde depressum. OCaput magnum robustum ;

oculis mediocribus, ovatis, sat prominulis; collo brevi. Mentum

forma ferri equini vel trifurcatum (hine n. g. Creagris) lobis angus-

tis, subparallelis, inter med. et apic. leviter dilatatis, apice oblique

truncatis, dente lobis parum breviore, tenui, acutissimo. Ligula

magna cornea, infra apicem leviter constricta, angulis anticis rotun-

datis paraglossis connatis, apicem non attingentibus. Palpi maxill-

art. 4° claviformi, apice fortiter truncato; labiales art. 4° subellip-

tico, truncato. Labrum maximum, suborbiculatum, convexum. Man-

dibule parve, basi obsolete unidentate, labro obtecte. Antenne

robust humeros attingentes, art. 1, 3 et 11 longitudine fere sub-

eequali, mediocribus, 2° parvo, rotundato, 4-10 subsequalibus, cum

11° ovatis. Thorax parvus capite sesqui minor, transversus longi-

tudine duplo fere latior, infra med. fortius angustatus, basi parum

prolongatus. Pedunculus brevis. Hlytra apicem versus leviter

dilatata, apice fortiter subquadrate truncata. Pedes robusti sim-

plices, subsquales, ant. tibiis profunde excavatis, omnes tarsis

brevibus art. 1° sequentium 2 fere lengitudine, subcylindrico, 2 3

gradatim minoribus, magis minusve triangularibus, 4° maguo, pro-

funde bilobo, 5° mediocri, unguibus simplicibus, art, 4° subtus

dense penicillato.

45. Creagris labrosa. WN.

C. picea, ore antennisque, coxis, trochanteribus femorum tibia-

rumque apice et tarsis brunneis; dense punctata obsoleteque

pubescens ; elytris striatis ; long. corp. 43 lin.

Specimen singulum prope Colombo nocte ad lumen cepi.

I consider this scarce and interesting insect to form a passage

between the Lebiide and Pericalide, but am doubtful to which of

these two tribes to refer it, as, although it partakes of the character-

istics of either, it is at the same time distinct from either. Dis-

tinguished in several respects, its most extraordinary character lies

in the curious shape of the mentum. This is, however, easily

described as large, of the shape of a horseshoe with a long, thin,

very pointed tooth in the middle, the apical half of the sides (lobes)

T 2

140 Entomological Papers. [No. 2.

being at the same time gently dilated, the apex itself being ob-

liquely cut away from the outer towards the inner side (the inner

angle being the most advanced) and slightly dentated at the edge

thus formed. Or it may also be described as a fork with the outer

teeth somewhat enlarged, truncated at the apex and so forth.

As far as I know, this variation from the usual form of the mentum

is repeated in no other Carabideous insect. The other parts of

the mouth have not much to distinguish them with the exception,

however, of the labrum, which attains a very extraordinary degree

of development, occupying rather more than one third of the whole

head, although the latter itself is large and heavy. It is of a sub-

orbicular shape, very slightly produced in front into an obtuse

angle, it is vaulted, covers the mandibles, has two longitudinal

impressions at the sides of the base and is highly polished. The

head has 2 impressions in front of the eyes, is densely punctured

and thinly pubescent, it is strongly but gradually contracted behind

the eyes and formed into a short neck. The antenne are strong

and reach to the shoulders, joints 1 3 and 11 are of about equal

length, middling, the former two subcylindric, joint 2 is small,

rounded, 4-10 subequal and with the 11th oval. The thorax is small

only half as large as the head, rather narrowed, strongly transverse,

twice as broad as long, slightly emarginated in front, the anterior

angles rounded, contracted below the middle, subquadratic and

prolonged at the base, posterior angles depressed, longitudinally

divided by a deep furrow. The elytra are striated and, like the

thorax, densely punctured and thinly pubescent. The legs are

strong, simple and subequal, the anterior tibie are deeply notched,

the first joint of the tarsi is as long as the two succeeding ones

together, subcylindric, the 2nd triangular, the 3rd of a similar but

more transverse form, smaller—all three have the apical angles

accuminated, the 4th is large and deeply bilobed, the 5th middling,

thin, the claws simple. The tarsi are altogether short and strong,

the first joint is furnished with longer, the 2nd and 8rd with short-

er stiff hair, whilst the 4th is strongly penicillated below. The

anterior tibiew are slightly spinose, the others more so.

I believe the only specimen of this insect which has hitherto

come iuto my possession, and which has served as a type for the

above description, to be a female.

1857. ] | Entomological Papers. 141

Trib. Galeritide.

Heteroglossa. n. g. NV.

Corpus oblongum, subparallelum, depressum tenuiter hirsutum.

Caput mediocre oculis semiglobosis, sat prominulis; collo brevi.

Mentum sat profunde subquadrate emarginatum, lobis magnis extus

fortiter rotundatis, apice abrupte acuminatis, dente magno excavato,

apice inflecto obtuso, magis minusve profunde sinuato. Ligula

subcornea apice libera, truncata, vel quadrata vel obconica vel

leviter bisinuata; paraglossis cylindricis, marginem anteriorem lon-

gissime superantibus, magis minusve arcuatis. Palpi hirsuti art.

ultimo sat elongato, subcylindrico, apice truncato vel subtrigono.

Labrum transversum antice emarginatum. Mandibule valide,

trigonz, apice arcuate basi pluries dentate. Antenne robust

eorporis med. attingentes, art. 1° incrassato sequentibus 2 longiore,

2° parvo, 3-11 subzqualibus. Thorax subcordatus, basi transver-

sim truncatus leviterque prolongatus. Peduneculis brevis. Elytra

apice fortiter subquadrate truncata, costata, costis 16 majoribus,

in interstitiis subtilissime bicostulata, in sulcis (sulco e tribus inter

costas binas majores medio excepto) tenuiter pilosa, in omnibus

transversim rugulosa. Pedes anteriores tibiis sat fortiter emargi-

natis, tarsis maris art. 1-3 leviter dilatatis, subtus squamularum

seriebus 2 munitis, art. 1° elongato-trigono, 2-3 rotundato-trigonis,

8° precedente parum minore, 4° parvo cordato 3° plus sesqui minore,

his omnibus angulis acuminatis, 5° magno, unguibus simplicibus.

This diagnosis may appear somewhat vague, still I have been

unable to express the characteristics of the insects from which it

is drawn in more precise terms, although they have features quite

peculiar to themselves by which they are easily recognised when

once seen.

The points on which the 3 spec. which form this g. more or less

disagree are the following: (1) the labrum: this is more transverse

in HH. elegans and less deeply emarginated in ZZ. ruficollis than in

the other 2 spec. respectively—still in all 3 it is emarginated and

has, moreover, the peculiarity of being furnished with bristles at the

2 anterior corners. (2) the mentum: this is subquadratically emargi-

nated, the lobes being strongly rounded on the outer side, and

abruptly acuminated at the apex, at the base of the emargination

142 Entomological Papers. [No. 2.

it is furnished with a broad, excavated tooth which is inflected and

obtuse at the apex—so far all three species agree—however, whilst

in H. elegans and rujficollis, this tooth is slightly emarginated at

the apex, it 1s sharply notched in A. bimaculata, in fact bilobed,

the lobes being large and rounded at the apex. I look upon this

notch, which is sharp but not deep, as a mere variation from the

emargination existing at the apex of the tooth of the former 2

species. (8) the palpi: these, the labial as well as maxillary, have

their terminal joint truncated at the apex—and so far again all

3 species agree—however, whilst this joint is of elliptic form in

the palpi of HZ. ruficollis, it is in HH. elegans only so in the labial

ones that of the maxillary ones being cylindric at the base. In

H. bimaculata finally this joint is rather club-shaped or subtriangular

and more strongly truncated than iu the former 2 species. (4) the

hegula: this organ is of subcoriaceous texture, middling size, the

shape of an oblong square, free and transversely truncated at the

apex—these characters are common to all 3 spec. and in H. ruficollis

I have nothing to add to it; however, the anterior margin, which

is straight in this species, is slightly bisinuated in H. elegans the

outer angles being acute and the central one obtuse. The ligula

of H. bimaculata differs from both the former io as far as it is

narrowed towards the apex and depressed towards the sides and

the front, the anterior margin is otherwise cut away straight, with-

out any sinuosities, but it is rather strongly armed with bristles.

The paraglosse agree in all 3 spec. in ag far as they are highly

developed, reach much beyond the anterior margin of the ligula and

are more or less bent inwards. Their greatest development they

assume in H. elegans in which they nearly touch each other in

front of the anterior margin, being cylindric and slender at the

same time. In HZ. ruficollis the paraglosse are somewhat shorter

and straighter and in H. bimaculata still more so.

On all other points the 3 spec. perfectly agree, in saying which

I lay particular weight upon the unusual sculpture of the elytra

and the rather peculiar hairy vesture of the insects, bearing also

in mind their general appearance, proportions, system of coloration,

inode of living, ete. As to the hairy vesture of certain parts of the

body and the sculpture of the elytra, it is true that these are not

1857. | Entomological Papers. 143

generally looked upon as of much importance ; however, they appear

to me so in this instance, as they present certain unusual varia-

tions repeated in all 8 species. The hairy vesture consists in thin

yellowish or reddish hairs thinly seminated over the back and still

more thinly over the whole of the lower surface of the insects,

being at the same time longer at the latter place. This vesture

acquires its greatest density on the legs, especially the tibize and

tarsi, whilst its uniform presence at the palpi forms almost a

generic character. The elytra are exquisitely sculptured into about

8 larger coste on either of them and into 2 smaller ones between

every 2 of these; the furrows thus formed are finely transversely

rugose and (with the exception of the central furrow between

every 2 larger costz) thinly pubescent.

It just strikes me that this sculpture of the elytra may occur in

other Galeritide. Ifso, the insufficiency of my means to ascertain

this fact to a certainty must plead my excuse for attaching undue

importance to it. However, I should in this event consider my

books of reference, none of which say anything to that effect,

greatly (and indeed more than myself) at fault for not alluding to

it, ay in my opinion it is sufficiently peculiar to be mentioned.

After this lengthy preamble I shall have but a few words to say

in finishing the description of the species.

46. Heteroglossa elegans. N.

HH. supra rufo-castanea, capite obscuriore, maculis 2 humeralibus

obsoletissimis ferrugineis; subtus dilutior, pedibus antennis oreque

subtestaceis, elytrisad angulos apical. extern. testaceis ; long. corp.

34 lin.

In lacus Colombensis ripis sub vegetab. putrescent. non infre-

quenter cepi.

An agile, pretty little insect of chocolate colour, and with its family

features about it. Head smooth, polished, above and below slight-

ly punctured, with 2 impressions in front of the eyes, anterior an-

gles of labrum rather accuminated. Thorax deeper and more densely

punctured than the head and with the elytra thinly hirsute, rather

strongly emarginated in front, less so behind ; sides, especially at the

basal angles, depressed, divided longitudinally by a deep furrow.

144 Entomological Papers. [No. 2.

Scutellum-like thorax punctured and hairy. Elytra with the inner

apical angle right angled and the outer rounded off, largely punctured

within the margin especially near the apex. Tibie with a row of

larger spines down the outer and a row of smaller ones down the

inner side, 4-calcarata at the apex, the 2 inner spurs larger.

47. Heteroglossa ruficollis. N.

H. colore preecedentis sed obscurior, thorace pectoreque rufo-

testaceis, antennis art. 3 primis nigrescentibus ; long. corp. 43 lin.

Cum precedente sed rarius et per occasionem nocte ad lumen

cepl. |

The shape of the body is quite that of the former but the insect

is larger. The head is less distinctly punctured than in the former

and there is an additional impression in the middle of the forehead

The thorax is also less deeply punctured, but the divisional furrow

is more so than in the preceding species. The anterior tibie

appear somewhat less deeply notched. There is nothing else to

add to the description that has not been pointed out already.

48. Heteroglossa bimaculata. N.

H. subcastanea, thorace capiteque rufo-testaceis, elytris medio

maculis 2 flavis pictis, pedibus abdominisque apice testaceis; long.

corp. 5% lin.

Ubi precedentes infrequentissime legi.

Head, with the exception of the forehead, deeply punctured,

with 2 impressions in front of the eyes, anterior angles of labrum

rounded. Thorax densely and deeply punctured, with elytra thinly

pubescent. The latter with a round yellow spot at the middle of

either.

Trib. Cratocerice.

Oosoma. n. g. NV.

Corpus ovatum subconvexum, glabrum. Caput transversim sub-

orbiculare, robustum; oculis magnis, ovatis, parum prominulis.

Mentum profunde emarginatum, lobis extus rotundatis, apice sub-

obtusis, dente minimo, obtuso. Ligula submembranacea minima,

aneustata, paraglossis maximis, connatis, ligulam totam amplec-

1857.] Entomological Papers. 145

tentibus, apice leviter sed abrupte et sat profunde emarginatis.

Palpi art. ult. ovato apice abruptius angustato leviterque truncato.

Clypeus subsemilunariter emarginatus. Labrum transversum pro-

fundius angulate emarginatum, angulis anter. rotundatis, lateribus

angulato-rotundatum. Mandibule parve, valide, edentate, inter

med. et apic. arcuate. Antenne robust, thoracis med. parum

superantibus, art. 1 et 11 subequalibus, 2-10 parum brevioribus,

subzxqualibus, 1-3 basi angustatis, reliquis ovatis, 5-11 leviter de-

pressis. Thorax transversus, capite parum latior, basi quadratus,

apicem versus leviter angustatus, antice vix emarginatus, postice

leviter bisinuatus, elytris fortiter applicatus. Hlytra basi quadrata,

thoracis latitudine, apice oblique subtruncata, striata. Pedes validi

fortiterque armati, subzquales; tibiis costatis, ant. sat profunde

emarginatis, apicem versus dilatatis, 4 post apice 4-calcaratis ;

tarsis art. 1-4 gradatim minoribus, ant. leviter dilatatis, art. 1° cy-

lindrico-trigono, 2-4 trigonis, post. art. 1-4 subtus longitudinaliter

biserratis.

Interesting insects apparently nearly allied to Wothopus, of an

appearance which easily distinguishes them from any other Cara-

bidz I have hitherto met with in this Island: the head is plump,

transversely orbicular, immersed: up to the eyes in the thorax.

The clypeus is narrow, transverse, rather deeply emarginated in

the form of a crescent, ant. angles acuminated. The labrum is of

thin, translucent texture, deeply angularly emarginated in front,

the ant. angles rounded, setose, sides angular, rounded. Mandibles

short and thick, curved from the middle to the tip, edentate.

Maxille simple. Antenne short, thick, reaching a little beyond

the middle of the thorax, joints 3-11 pubescent, 5-11 slightly com-

pressed, 1-3 narrowed at the base, 4-11 oval, 1 and 11, 2-10 of

about equal length respectively. Mentum with a straight, deep

emargination, lobes rounded externally, rather obtuse at the apex,

tooth very small, obtuse. ligula very small, narrow, slightly

dilated towards and rounded at the apex, paraglosse very large,

connate, enveloping the ligula on all sides, the whole slightly

truncated at the ant. angles and slightly, but sharply and pretty

deeply emarginated or notched at the centre of the ant. margin.

Palpi, both maxill. and labial ones, with the terminal joint oval,

146 Hintomologtcai Papers. [No. 2.

rather xbruptly narrowed and slightly truncated at the apex; these

characteristics more distinctly expressed in the labial ones. Ali

the lower part of the mouth is situated in or forms a cavity. Tho-

rax a little broader than the head nearly twice as broad as it is

long, quadratie at the base, slightly narrowed towards the apex,

ant. angles slightly produced, the ant. margin can hardly be called

emarginated, 2 slight simuosities at the base, firmly applied to the

elytra and as broad as these. Scutellum broad, triangular. The

elytra rather abruptly cut away at the apex, internal angles rather

obtuse, slightly dehiscent. Legs stout and strongly armed, very

much in the manner of my Cyciosomus Dyticoides, of whieh the

insect under consideration in various respects reminds me most

forcibly. The spines of the tibia are inserted on ridges, the ant..

ones being dilated. The tarsi are all concave on the inner side.

I have been unable to discover anything in them by which to dis-

tinguish the sexes, not even additional spines or bristles. How-

ever, the sexes appear well marked by the difference in size. The

ant. tarsi are dilated, the intermed. and post. ones more and more

elongated and the joints subcylindric ; jot 1 of the latter is longer

than the 3 following together, all 4 have the edges of their concave

inner side serrated—an extraordinary circumstance. The highly

developed prosternum reminds me again of Cyclosomus.

The habits of these insects are those of the Amaras; they live

in dry, sandy places under grass and leaves ; at certain times they

take freely to their wings. and O. arenaria may then be caught in

great numbers at night about the light. This species is very com-~

mon in all the dry and sandy parts of the neighbourhood of

Colombo; the pretty little O. Gersteckert, however, is scarce.

49. Oosoma avrenaria. IN.

©. supra brunneo-znea, subtus magis minusve brunnea, pedibus,

palpis antennarumque basi testaceis, tarsis, labro limboque angus-

tissimo obseurioribus; capite ad clypei marginem post. punctis 2-

impresso ; thorace ad basin obsoletissime 4-foveolato, linea longi-

tud. abbreviata, indistincta, diviso, basi anticeque obsoletissime

striguloso ; subtus tenuiter hirsuta; long. eorp. 23—8 lin., lat. 1j—

13 lin.

1857.| Entomological Papers. 147

50. Oosoma Gersteckeri. N.

O. supra brunneo-znea, szpius glaucescens, elytris dorso dilute

brunnescentibus maculis 4 longitud. irregularibus flavis pictis, sub-

tus magis minusve brunnea, pedibus, antennis labroque testaceo-

brunneis, palpis antennarumque basi testaceis; long. corp. 2} lin.

Jat. 14 lin.

Excepting in colour not essentially differing from the former.

However, the marks of the thorax are more distinct, and the 4

obsolete pits are replaced by 2 longitud. impressions, the whole

insect is, moreover, more graceful than the former. The macule

of the elytra may be said to commence at the basal angles of the

thorax which are of a similar, but less distinct, colour. The true

humeral maculz begin at the base of the elytra and stretch nearly

to the middle as a thick straight line of narrow parallelogram tlie

principal part of which occupies the 6th interstice a spot being

thrown out on either side. The apical macule commenee a little

below the middle and are essentially composed of small squares

heaped upon each other so as to form steps or an inverted pyramid.

As this design varies more or less in different individuals it can

be of no importance to describe it in a more detailed manner, suffice

it to say that apparently in no instance does any part of it reach

either the inner or outer margin, the field upon which it is displayed

being enclosed by the Ist and 7th stria. The brownish green

metallic upper surface of the insect in some individuals throws off

a fine blue reflex, very perceptible on head and thorax. The part

of the back enclosed by the maculz is washed out to a light brown

with the exception of the suture which remains dark.

In naming this pretty species after Dr. Gerstecker of the R.

Museum, Berlin, I wished to pay that gentleman the only trifling

compliment circumstances admit of in acknowledgment for various

useful hints he has kindly communicated to me.

51. Chlenius princeps. N.

C. aureo-viridis, scutello cupreo, elytris nigro-viridibus ad basin

et infra marginem viridibus, sutura nigra, subtus piceus, coxis

trochanteribusque 4 ant. dilutioribus, femoribus trochanteribusque

2 post. testaceis, tibiis tarsisque obscurioribus, ore antennisque

f u 2

148 Entomological Papers. [ No. 2.

brunneis, labro, mandibulis limboque castaneis; capite obsolete

ruguloso, punctulato; antennis art. 3° quarti prope longitudine ;

menti dente forti laciniis apice rotundatis ; thorace ovato-quadrato,

latitudine parum longiore, angulis ant. subrectis, post. rotundatis,

basi fortiter 2-impresso, punctato; scutello canaliculato; elytris

striatis, in striis punctatis, ad strias, presertim apicem versus,

tenuiter pilosis ; long. corp. 8 lin., lat. 3 lin.

Specimen singulum f. prope Colombo sub-lapidibus cepi.

A very handsome species, distinguished by its size and com-

paratively great breadth. The clypeus is impressed with 2 setigerous

pits near the ant. corners. The labrum is transverse, slightly

situated in front, narrowed at the base and has the ant. angles

strongly rounded off. The last joint of both the maxillary and

labial palpi is cylindric and truncated at the apex, in the maxill.

it is shorter than in the labial ones, in the latter somewhat narrow-

ed at the base and slightly mflated at the middle, both appear

slightly compressed at the apex. The elytra are strongly rounded

at the apex. The insect has a very strong smell, somewhat like

musk, about it.

52. Chlenius maleolens. N.

C. capite, thorace scutelloque obscure cupreo-viridi-glaucescen-

tibus, elytris obscurioribus, pubescentibus, maculis 2 subapicalibus

flavis ornatis, subtus piceus, pedibus testaceis, ore antennisque

brunneis, mandibulis limboque castaneis; capite ad clypei margi-

nem post. profundius 2 foveolato, punctulato, occipite leviter trans-

versim ruguloso; antennis art. 8° quarto subsquali vel paulo bre-

viore; menti dente apice leviter sinuato; thorace subquadrato,

lateribus leviter rotundatis, profundius punctulato atque levissime

transversim rugologo, ad basin 2-impresso, parce piloso; elytris

densius pubescentibus, striatis, in interstitiis 3-8 utrinque ante

apicem macula suborbiculari flava ornatis ; long. corp. 62 lin.

Specimen singulum m. prope Colombo cepi.

Also a handsome and rare species, smelling strongly and disa-

sreeably of creosote. Head, thorax and scutellum are of a dull

bluish green colour with a copper reflex from the back; the elytra

1857. | Entomological Papers. 149

are of a blackish green, pubescent and adorned with 2 yellow spots

between the middle and apex; this is of irregular, rounded outline

and stretches from the middle of the 8rd interstice across to the

8 stria. The 4th joint of the maxill. palpi is subcylindrie, that of

the labial ones larger, plump and rather triangular. Tooth of the

mentum not bifid but truncated and merely slightly sinuated at

the apex. The elytraare narrowed at the apex.

53. Chlenius Dohrnu. N.

C. elongatus, parallelus, capite thoraceque viridi-nitentibus, ely-

tris viridi-glaucescentibus maculis 2 apicalibus flavis pictis, subtus

dilute piceus, apicem versus brunneus, pedibus testaceis, ore anten-

nisque brunneis; capite sublevi nitidissimo ; antennis art. 2° parvo,

reliquis longitudine subeequali; palpis maxill. art. 4° cylindrico,

lab. eodem subtrigono; thorace ovato-quadrato, crebrius punctato,

basi 2-impresso; elytris striatis punctatis, pubescentibus, 2-macu-

latis, maculis subapicalibus, prolongatis, interstitia 2-8 et angulum

apicalem occupantibus, flavis; long. corp. 6 lin. lat. 2 lin.

Specimen singulum f. prope Colombo nocte ad lumen cepi.

The elongated and parallel shape of the body distinguish this

species at first sight ; it is very pretty and scarce, but has otherwise

nothing remarkable in its construction. However, I may add to

the above description that the mentum is large, the lobes obtuse

at the apex and the tooth but slightly sinuated at the tip. The

ligula is of the usual construction, the paraglosse obtuse and

ciliated at the apex. The 2 last joints of the labial palpi are

rather elongated, whilst in the maxillary ones they are the reverse ;

the former have the terminal joint triangular, the latter cylindric,

both are strongly truncated at thetip. The head is middling, with

2 impressions in front of the eyes; the mandibles are rather more

curved than usual; the labrum is emarginated in front; the an-

tenne are rather short and stout reaching only to the base of the

thorax. The latter is a little broader than the head and of an

ovato-quadratic form. The elytra and legs are simple.

Ihave named this species after the president of the Entomol.

Soc. of Stettin to whom I am indebted for much Entom. informa-

tion.

150 Eintomologicai Papers. [No. 2.

54. Harpalus (Ophonus) senilis. N.

H. oblongo-ovatus, subdepressus, punctato-rugosus, griseo-pu-

bescens, supra sneus, subtus piceus, ore pectoreque dilutioribus,

pedibus testaceis, antennis basi palpisque apice flavis; capite robus-

to antice rotundato, postice parum angustato, thorace vix angusti-

ore; antennis humeros attingentibus art. 2° parvo, reliquis longitu-

dine subequali; mandibulis obconicis, robustis, una unidentata,

altera incisa; labro vix emarginato; palpis art. 4° ovato, apice ab-

ruptius angustato, leviter truncato ; thorace transverso, longitudine

tertia parte latiore, elytris vix angustiore, lateribus rotundato, infra

med. leviter angustato, basi subquadrato, hic vix, antice leviter

emarginato, angulis apicalibus obtuse acuminatis, basalibus subrecte

rotundatis; elytris puncatto-striatis, apice fortius 2-sinuatis et an-

gustatis ; tarsis art..4° cordato ; long. corp. 43 lin. lat. 13 lin.

Prope Colombo sat copiosus.

This as well as the succeeding two species fly very commonly

into the rooms at night during the rainy weather. ‘The present

spec. is a fine, comparatively large, robust insect. I may add to the

above description that the emargination of the mentum is of mid-

dling size, its lobes rounded externally and its tooth just marked

in the shape of a slight obtuse rising at the bottom of the emargi-

nation. The ligula is very small and narrow, the paraglosse very

large, adhering to it and enveloping it fully and on all sides; the

whole is very slightly cut away at the apical angles and slightly,

but abruptly and rather deeply, notched at the centre of the ante-

rior margin. I may further notice that some of the individuals

before me have the apex of the maxill. palpi prolonged, cylindric

and slightly bent inwards; as this is not a sexual distinction and

as the insects thus distinguished differ in no other respect from

the rest, I look upon them as curious varieties.

55. Harpalus (Ophonus) rugosus. N.

H. precedenti simillimus sed sesqui minor, magis rugosus, an-

tennis robustioribus art. 5-11 ovatis leviter depressis, colore supra

parum obscuriore, subtus dilutiore, pedibus albidis, coxis tarsisque

brunneis, antennis totis castaneis ; long. corp. 34 lin.

The small size and, upon close inspection, the other peculiarities

1857. | Entomological Papers. 151

just pointed out readily distinguish this species from the former

in spite of their close affinity in other respects. They are both

equally common about Colombo.

56. Harpalus (Selenophorus) Colombensis. N.

H. statura precedentis sed gracilior, glaber, supra lete eneus,

subtus subcastaneus, pedibus albidis, coxis, tarsis, antennis palpis-

gue testaceis, ore brunneo; capite transversim ruguloso ; antennis

precedente tenuioribus, palpis gracilioribus apice magis angustatis ;

labro basin versus leviter dilatato ; mandibulis infra apicem abrup-

tius arcuate, una uni; altera bi-dentata; thorace lateribus prece-

dente minus rotundato, basi minus angustato, hic rugoso-punctato

antice leviter longitudinaliter strigoso; elytris striatis, parce punc-

tulatis, in interstitis 3°, 5° et 7° punctis majoribus impressis ; long.

corp. 3 lin.

Prope Colombo sat copiosus.

A pretty little insect, very distinct from the preceding two.

f may add that it also differs somewhat in the paraglosse the

anterior angles of which are distinct.

Trib. Harpalide ?

Lepithrix. n. g. N.

Corpus oblongum, robustum, subeconvexum. Caput ovatum,

mediocre ; oculis semiglobosis prominulis. Mentum leviter sub-

semilunariter emarginatum, lobis extus rotundatis, dente vel parvo,

obtuso vel nullo. ligula mediocris, cornea, oblonge quadrata,

apice transversin truncata, libera, paraglossis cylindricis apice

truncatis, sat robustis, marginem ant. parum superantibus. Palpt

articulo ultimo elliptico, truncato. Labrum apicem versus angus-

tatum, apice rotundatum. Mandibule valid, apice arcuate, una

uni; altera bi-dentata. Antenne filiformes humeros parum super

antibus, art. 2° parvo, reliquis longitudine subequali. Thorax

mediocris longitudine parum latior, antice vix, postice haud emar-

ginatus, lateribus leviter rotundatus, basi parum angustatus, angulis

omnibus rotundatis, margine elevato. Elytra ovata, infra med.

parum dilatata, apice leviter angustata et acuminata. Pedes sub-

squales, tibiis apiee bicalcaratis, calcaribus intus subtiliter serratis,

152 Entomological Papers. (No. 2.

ant. leviter emarginatis, tarsis 2 ant. art. 1-3 leviter dilatatis gradatim

minoribus, art. 1° cylindrico, 2° obcordato, 3° trigono, omnes art.

4° maris bilobo, femine bifido, art. 5° magno, unguibus validis, sim-

plicibus ; swbtus tarsis 2 ant. art. 1-4, intermed. art, 2°-4° squamu-

larum longepedunculatarum seriebus duabus munitis.

57. Lepithrix foliolosa. N.

L. glabra, supra obscure brunnea thoracis elytrorumque limbo

testaceo, subtus brunneo-testacea pedibus albidis, antennis art.

3 primis flavis reliquis nigrescentibus, palpis art. ultimo testaceo,

reliquis flavis; thorace ad angulos basales profundius foveolato;

elytris striatis; prosterno canaliculato; long. corp. 3-4 lin.

Specimina nonnulla mens. Octob. prope Colombo nocte ad lumen

cepi.

The internal vesture of the tarsi of these otherwise inconspicuous

insects constitutes their most important character and is altogether

of a very interesting nature. I proceed at once to describe it at

full length premising that Z believe I have both male and female

before me. The individual which I take to be the male is smaller

and of a darker colour than the other. The legs, with the exception

of the tarsi, are the same in both sexes. They are of middling

strength, the tibie are furnished with 2 spurs at the inner side

of the apex, which spurs are finely serrated along their inner edge,

the tarsi have joints 1-3 of the first pair slightly dilated, the pos-

terior pair is elongated, subcylindric and the intermediate one

forms a passage between the two. Joints 1-3 of the first pair are

gradually decreasing in size, joint 1 being at the same time sub-

cylindric, joint 2 rather cordiform and joint 3 rather triangular,

joint 4 in all 6 tarsi is bilobed in the male and bifid in the female,

this character being, however, less distinctly expressed in the 2

post. tarsi than in the 4 ant. ones; joint 5 is large and the claws

strong and simple, a membranaceous process of’ triangular form

covers the base of the latter above.

The internal vesture. of the 4 ant. tarsi of the male is of the

following description. The inner part of joints 1-4 of the 2 ant.

ones is furnished with 2 longitudinal series of peduncled squamule

which are of a broad, triangular form and lie like tiles upon each

1857.] Entomological Papers. 158

other covering the sole of the tarsus; they are flanked by bristles

which partake of the nature of scales, being dilated in the shape of

a lancet. These squamule are without any particular colour, they

are unconnected amongst themselves, their edges are entire and

they attain their highest development at the apex of the 4th joint;

in fact their development is gradual from the base of the 1st joint

to the apex ofthe 4th. The intermediate tarsi, although not dilated,

are similarly provided as the anter. ones, but only at the apex of

the 2nd and at the 3rd and 4th joint, the squamule being of rather

a square shape triangularly prolonged and peduncled at the base ;

the 1st joint is naked in this pair.

The tarsi of the female are very much the same as those of the

male, excepting the 4th joint which, as above mentioned, is bifid.

A further distinction exists, however, in the squamule. In the

2 ant. tarsi of the female these are present at the apex only of

the Ist and 2nd joint (hardly distinct at the former), however, they

are well developed in the 8rd and very highly in the 4th joint,

the squamulaceous bristles are less conspicuous but the peduncle

attains extraordinary length in the 4th joint; the squamule do

not cover each other like tiles, but stand more freely and loosely

and are curved inwards so as nearly to touch in the middle; their

shape is that of an elongated triangle, they are veined and their

apical edge is serrated. Being such and placed upon long, slender,

peduncles they forcibly remind me of the leaflets of certain ferns

(Adiantum) and hence the specific name foliolosa. The intermediate

tarsi are similarly provided, but, as in the male, the 1st joint is

naked and the 2nd furnished at the apex only. The lower edges

of the 2 posterior tarsi are very neatly fenced in with. small closely

set spines. ;

I feel doubtful as to the affinities of these insects, especially

if in reality I have described both sexes and if the vesture of the

intermediate tarsi is allowed to be of the same importance as that

of the anterior ones; however, I think they must find a place

amongst the Harpalide as restricted by Lacordaire. I must not

omit to mention that the tooth of the mentum appears to be vari-

able, one of my specimens (a male) being decidedly without it,

whilst another is furnished with a small, obtuse one.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

SAPP PDP AAI LLLP PIII ONIONS Ne

For Marcu, 1857.

At a Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society, held on

the 4th instant.

The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, President, in the chair.

Presentations were received—

1. From Mr. C. Gubbins, C.S., a collection of old bricks, chiefly

dug out of the oldest Hindu forts and cities of the Mohabharut

period, and in the vicinity of the residence of the Pandoo family.

The following is a list of the bricks, with the dates at which they

were procured ; to which are added several interesting notes upon

some of the localities mentioned.

No. 1.—“ Ruined Tank south of old Hindu town Coel, now

called Alygurh ; in the Meruth Division, 1856.

No. 2.—Buraire Tank, close to Bidjeegurh, 16 miles south of

Alygurh or Coel, 1856.

No. 3.—Lowest bricks of the fort Coel at Alygurh, found from

15 to 20 feet below the surface, 1856.

No. 4.—Middle bricks of the old fort Coel at Alygurh, found 10

feet below surface, 1856.

No. 5.—The upper bricks of the old Hindu fort Coel, Alygurh,

1856, found some 5 feet below the present level of the ground.

The old Hinpv fort of Coel is situated in the centre of the

present town of that name; Alygurh proper, is the Musunman

Fort, 2 miles north of the town, taken by storm under Lord Lake

in 1808. The whole site of the old fort is built over, and the

highest part is occupied by a mosque, and an imitation Kootoob

minar. There are no Hindu buildings of antiquity in the vicinity.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 155

No. 6.—Boolundshehur, otherwise Oonchagaon, 40 miles south

of Meruth, 1849. |

This is a very ancient and very high old Hindu fort. Its name

(Boolund in Persian and Ooncha in Oordoo signifying “ HI@H,’’)

marks that it is the highest spot in the vicinity, in the level Gange-

tic valley. It is now occupied by native buildings which crown its

summit, and cluster about its base.

No. 7.—A segment of circle used in the construction of wells

at Boolundshuhur, otherwise called Oonchagaon, 40 miles south of

Meruth, 1849.

No. 8.—Boolundshehur, 40 miles south of Meruth, a segment of

a circle used for wells.

No. 9.—Meruth fort, Meruth Division, 40 miles N. E. of Delhi,

1849.

The fort of Meruth is in the centre of the populous modern town

of that name, entirely occupied by native and European buildings.

The natives now attribute the name to one Meroo or Meran, an

attaché of the Mogul Court. But from the remains of the old

system of Hindu wet ditch, connected with a dam across the

river Hindun by a canal now called the Aboo nulla defence, similar

to Bhurtpoor, to Mooltan, to Rohtuc and Coel, I have no hesita-

tion in assigning to it a far more ancient date. When Timour

diverged in order to capture this fort, it bore its present name,

and the strata of gradual accumulation of soil alone shew, that its

period must be estimated by thousands, not by hundreds of years.

No. 10.—Two bricks of Hustinapoor fort, on the banks of the

river Ganges, North Hast of Meruth, 1849-50.

No. 11.—Acbar’s Mosque, on the site of fort Hustinapoor,

Meruth Division and district, 1848-49. |

Having observed in several works in India of considerable merit

and even of recent date a very mistaken notion of the locality of

the ancient Hustinapoor, which is declared to be ‘‘on the Jumua,”

or “near the modern Delhi,” I think it may be useful to correct

this error, regarding a place of such former fame, though seldom

visited by Europeans, because now devoid of any feature of interest.

This capital of the Pandoos was situated, not near the Jumna, but

on the Ganges, about 50 miles north-east of Indrapressta the early

x 2

156 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

name of the rival city known to Europeans as Delhi. The site is

now the centre of a large Dhak forest, as the debris and inequalities

of the broken ground render it less favorable for agriculture than

the surrounding country. So completely has all vestige of the old

town disappeared, that the Hindus ascribe it to a miracle of the

gods, who are said to have subverted the city, leaving the founda-

tions uppermost. The only old buildings in the vicinity are a few

Musulman tombs near, and the ruins of Acbar’s mosque, on the

mound of the oldfort. A large Parisnath temple, of recent erection,

occupies the northern base of the mound. The name of Hustina-

poor no doubt originated from the wild elephants, likely to have

frequented the neighbourhood in the days of which tradition speaks,

when the forest, still found fringing the hills to the eastward, ex-

tended unbroken beyond the Ganges into the Dooab; an epoch so

extremely remote as to render it no matter of wonder, that not a

relic remains of the former grandeur of this noted city: not a

building or a fragment of a building remains, merely extensive

mounds of rubbish interspersed with bricks of the larger size, dis-

tinctive of the early Hindu architecture. Even the extent of

these mounds is now hardly to be distinguished, as they mingle

with the raised broken ground that for many miles north and south

of this spot marks the western edge of the course taken by the

Ganges in former ages. The main river now rolls 15 miles farther

east, but this intermediate space is entirely low alluvial soil tra-

versed by numerous small water-courses, and lable to inundation

in heavy rains: and immediately under the steep bank on which

the fort of Hustinapoor is situated, creeps sluggishly a small branch

that quitting the principal stream a little below Hurdwar rejoins

about 40 miles lower at Gurmukhteesur, and still bears the name

of the Boori-Gunga or old Ganges. That this small stream has

intermediately been the main channel of the Ganges, is evident

from the fact that only one-half of the fort mound now remains,

the Eastern half having been entirely carried away by the river.

During the three years that 1 was Magistrate and Collector of Meruth,

1 made every research to discover vestiges of Hindu occupancy,

nutfailed to discover any thing antecedent to the Musulman era,

save these bricks. The fact that this old site includes one of the holiest

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 157

Parisnath shrines, would lead one to suppose that the ancient

struggle between Pandoos and Koroos may have been a part of the

religious contest which ended with the destruction of the Bhooddhist

shrines throughout India.

No. 12.—Burnawa Fort on the river Hindron, in the district of

Meruth, 1849. This is an extensive and very high mound occupy-

ing similarly to the fort at Allahabad the extreme tongue of land

at the confluence of two streams. ‘These are the chief tributaries

of the river Hindun, losing their own names at this confluence.

The new town of Burnawa is situated immediately to the north of

the old fort mound of which the whole summit is now occupied

by a Musulman shrine and cemetery. Copper coins of the early

Mahomedan rule similar to those found at Canoge are occasionally

turned up by the plough in the environs of the new town.

No. 18.—Ruins near Rohtuc, 40 miles west of Delhi.

No. 14.—Singpoora close by Rohtuc, 40 miles north of Delhi;

destroyed by the bursting of the old canal in ancient times.

No. 15.—Singpoora near Rohtuc, 40 miles west of Delhi.

No. 16.—A, The old Khairahs west of Rohtuc, 40 miles west of

Delhi. B, ruined site of Fort west of Rohtuc, 40 miles west of

Delhi.

No. 17.—Singpoora or Jehangeerpoor, near Rohtuc, 40 miles

west of Delhi.

The vicinity of Rohtue presents the most curious collection of

old sites and ancient mounds I have as yet had an opportunity of

- noting and examining in India.

The mounds immediately to the west of the present town are

supposed by the natives to be the most ancient: the square bricks

are dug out of those ancient vestiges. The ruins towards Sing-

poora to the north-west, are believed to be of much later date,

but in themselves they present evidence of two periods of oecupan-

cy ; the more ancient, affording bricks of the same pattern as those

of Paniput, Burnawa, Hustinapoor, Mohabalipooram near Madras,

and Sarnath near Benares. Only among these ancient remains,

and at Sarnath have I found specimens of beautifully carved brick.

I regret I have not been successful in obtaining for the society a

specimen of the carved brick of Singpoora, of which I possessed

158 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 2.

several in 1835, but an application to Mr. John Adam Loch, Magis-

trate of Rohtuc, through whose kindness I obtained the specimens

now submitted, would, I feel sure, meet with immediate attention,

if the Society should think it worth while. The specimen of the

Sarnauth carved brick will be presented to the Society as soon as

I receive it from Benares.

The site of Rohtuc is on the exact course of commerce and inva-

sion into Northern India across the desert. A line of wells pass-

ing from the fords of the Sutlege at Pacputtun through Bhatneer,

Sirsa, Hansie, Mehim, and. Rohtuc were to the invading Musul-

man what the Russians have just constructed for themselves further

north; the Hindus had sunk them for the convenience of com-

merce and social intercourse.* The second period of occupancy

is evidently of not more than 5, 6, or 700 years date, and it is this

town which is said by popular tradition to have been submerged

by the unskilful construction of the former western canals under

the Mussulman rule. Here houses were in 1832 standing with

walls entire, and the deserted city formed an extensive government

Grass preserve, tenanted at that period only by wolves and jackals, but

where tigers had been found and shot by Col. James Skinner and

Mr. William Fraser, when we first took possession of this territory.

No. 18.—Sonput Fort 20 miles north of Delhi: 1846.

The fort of Sonput is the centre of the populous town of that

name.

No. 19.—Paniput Fort, Delhi Territory,—miles, south of Tha-

naisur, 1846.

The fort of Paniput is extensively built over and extremely ele-

vated, forming part of the modern town of that name.

No. 20.—Thirwa Fort, 16 miles west of Kurnaul, Delhi Terri-

tory.

This place is entirely deserted, and situated in the midst of an

extensive jungle. The fort mound is not far from a water-vourse

supposed to have contained in former days flowing water through

the greater portion of the year, but now only full during the rains.

Mr. Gubbins writes.

“ Since forwarding this collection of ancient bricks, I have had an

* See Transactions, Royal Asiatic Society, Vol. I. p. 135.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 159

opportunity of visiting the ruins of Sarnath. I found that the

uncovered circular Souterrain, which is one of the most remarkable

of the remains, is constructed of very perfect bricks similar in size

and proportions to the long bricks of the Pandoo sites of the Moha-

bharut, and also to those at Mohabalipooram in Madras; as men-

tioned in the short account of the latter ruins published in the

Society’s Journal for 1853.

The bricks at Sarnath are not all precisely of the same size, but

vary from 15} to 163 inches in length, and from 123 to 134 in width,

and were found to be about three inches thick, ten of them 2m situ

measured 88 inches. I am inclined to ascribe all the buildings, in the

remains of which bricks of this type are found, to one nation, which

at some remote period, about or before the era of Asoka, held sway

from Mohabalipooram to Thanaisur certainly, and probably much

further. I think the original dimensions of the brick mould was

derived from the human cubit; that the outside of the mould was

of that length, viz. 18 inches, and I infer from the fact that modern

Parisnath or Suraogee (not Brahminical) temples are found on

two of the principal of these sites, namely, Hustinapoor and Sar-

nath, and that these sites are still reverenced by the Suraogees,

who perform pilgrimages to them from great distances, that this

people was of the Buddhist, and not the Brahminical persuasion.”

2. From the Government of Bombay through the Government

of India,—copies of selections in the Political department, together

with a Marine Chart.

8. From the Superintendent of the Geological Survey of India,

and of the Geological Museum in Calcutta, a copy of the Memoirs

of the Geological Survey of India, vol. 1. part 1.

Mr. Nietner of Ceylon, proposed and ,seconded at the last meet-

ing, was elected a corresponding member.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed and seconded at the last

meeting were ballotted for and elected ordinary members :—

Mr. H. F. Blanford and Mr. E. B. Cowell.

Baboo Joygopal Bysack, was proposed for ballot at the next meet-

ing by Mr. Atkinson, seconded by Baboo Rajendralal Mittra.

The Council submitted the following report upon the proposition

of Mr. Oldham, to reduce the subscription of non-resident members

from Rs. 64 to Rs. 32 per annum.

160 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

REPort.

“The Council having considered the proposals of Mr. Oldham

for the reduction of the subscription of non-resident members of

the Society from 64 to 382 rupees per annum, are unable to recom-

mend the suggested alteration.

“ However willing they might be to entertain the claim of members

not residing at Calcutta, to some reduction of their contribution in

consideration of the relative disadvantages under which they are

placed as compared to the resident members of the Society, the

financial position of the Society is not such as to authorise such a

hazardous experiment at the present time.

“ Tt will be evident, that if the subscriptions of non-resident mem-

bers are decreased by one-half, that their numbers must be éncreas-

ed in just the same proportion to maintain the subscription list, at

its present amount. Besides this too, the liabilities of the Society are

directly increased by an increase in the number of the subscribers,

for the journal has to be supplied to each of the new members

gratis. At present there are 60 non-resident members; to coun-

tervail the reduction of their subscriptions 60 additional members

must be got. ‘The supply of the Journal to 60 new members would

cause an additional charge of 60 x 7 =420 Rs. A further increase

of members would therefore be necessary to make up for this, and

about 17 more subscribers would be required in addition to the 60

first mentioned, or in all 77 new members, a number not to be

looked for within any definite period.

“The loss to the Society from the reduction of the subscription of

60 members from 64 to 32 Rupees, would be 1,920 Rs. per annum,

and taking into account the charge for the Journal as above, Rs.

2,464 additional income must be obtained from new members at the

reduced rate to keep the Society in its presert position as regards

available income.

“ Neither does it appear at all certain to the Council, that the cir-

cumstance of their being less favourably placed as regards the use of

the Society’s Museum or Library or the management of its affairs, is

really held to be an objection by a large proportion of the subscribers

who are non-resident. Their contributions are given not with the ex-

pectation of obtaining any distinct equivalent in return, but solely to

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 161

forward the general objects of the Society, and the votes on the

question of the reduction of the subscriptions of members geuerally

which was lately raised, tend to shew that this is a correct view of

the matter.

“In making this report to the Society, the Council think it but

right to add, that a minority of their body would advocate the

immediate reduction of the subscriptions as suggested by Mr.

Oldham. This minority of the Council do not deny the possibility

of some temporary falling off of the resources of the Society as a

consequence of such a step, but having in view the altered conditions

of Society in Calcutta during the last few years, and the extreme

importance of strengthening the Society with new members, and

enlarging its sphere of action to the utmost, they are convinced

that the true policy for the Society to adopt is to throw down, as

far as possible, all obstructions to its expansion, and to trust to

an increased love of learning and science to enlarge the number

of members and to make good any temporary falling off in the

contributions which such a reduction might cause.”

The President proposed, seconded by Baboo Ramgopal Ghose —

That the votes of the Mofussil members be taken on Mr. Old-

ham’s proposition, and that a special meeting be convened for the

final decision of the question, and be held after the ordinary general

meeting of the Society on the first Wednesday in June.

Agreed to.

The Council asked permission to expend a sum not exceeding

Rs. 1,200 in the purchase of additional cases for the Bird Room,

on the recommendation of the Committee of Natural History.

Sanctioned.

The Council also reported that, on the recommendation of the

same Committee, they had agreed to make the followiug additions

and changes in the establishment for the Museum of Natural His-

tory.

That the wages of the present Taxidermist Mr. Swaris, Senior,

be increased from Rs. 20 to Rs. 30, and of his Assistant, Swaris,

Junior, from Rs. 15 to 20 per mensem, on condition that the Cu-

rator reports favourably of their work, and on the understanding that

162 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

Rupee 1 and Rupee 3 respectively be deducted from their pay for

every day of absence.

- That an additional Taxidermist or Assistant be employed tem-

porarily at a monthly charge not exceeding 30 Rs. and that a Mistri

be employed regularly at wages not exceeding Rs. 10 per mensem.

Confirmed.

Communications were received—

1. From Mr. Assistant Oldfield sending copy ofa Meteorological

the N. W. Provinces Agra, for the month of December last.

2. From the Government of India through Colonel Birch, Se-

eretary in the Military Department, forwarding copies of reports

by Messrs. H. Schlagintweit on the proceedings of the Magnetic

Survey.

3. From Baboo Radhanath Sickdar, forwarding an abstract of the

Meteorological Observations taken at the Office of the Surveyor

General in the month of December last.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for the month

of February last.

Mr. R. Jones then exhibited a Wheatstone’s Gyroscope (a mo-

dification of Foucault’s Gyroscope.)

Mr. Jones explained the mechanism of the instrument and per-

formed some experiments by means of it.

On the motion of the President the thanks of the Meeting

were voted to Mr. Jones for his interesting exhibition.

LIBRARY.

The library received the following accessions during the month of

February.

Presented.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government.

No. I.—Report on the plan of Survey and Assessment for Khandesh.—

By THE GOVERNMENT OF LBomBay.

Ditto No. I1.—On ditto ditto for Rutnagherry.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. III.—On the Zillah of Barochee.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 1V.—On the Village Communities of Deccan.— By THE SAME.

Ditto No. V.—On the Badamee and Bagulkote Talooks, Belgaum Col-

lectorate.—By THE SAME.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 163

Ditto No. VI.—On the Kownaee Talooka, Nassick Collectorate.—

By THE SAME.

Ditto No. VII.—On the Management of Canals and Forests in Scinde.

—By THE Same.

Ditto No. VIII.—On the District of Sahitee.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. IX.—On aclaim to the village of Modugay, in Belgaum

Collectorate.—By THE SAME.

Ditto No. X.—On the Ahmedabad Collectorate and on the portions

of the Duskroee Purgunnah, Ahmedabad and Kuira Collectorates.—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. XI.—On certain Purgunnahs in Ahmedabad and Koraira

Collectorates.—By THE SaME.

Ditto No. XIJ.—On certain Talooks in the Dharwar Collectorate, and

on the History of the Chickodee District, Belgaum Collectorate.—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. XIII.—On the districts lately resumed from Meer Alli

Moorad, in Sindh.—By THE SAME.

Ditto No. XV.—Relative to the Resumption of certain villages and

lands, held by the late Anajee Nursew.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 1.—New Series.—On the Supply of Water to Bombay.—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. 2,—On the Southern Districts of the Surat Collectorate.-—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. 3.—On the Settlement of Farm lands in Bombay.—By THE

SaME.

Ditto No. 4.—On the Collectorate of Sholapore and Statistical Report

of Cambay.—By tHe Same.

Ditto No. 5.—On the ditto of Ahmedabad and a short account of the

Choota Tribe.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 7.—Statistical Report on the Colaba Agency.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 8.—Ditto on the Principality of Kolhapoor.—By THE Samz.

Ditto No. 10.—Memoir on the Sawant Warn State and Report on the

Portuguese Settlements in India.— By THE SaME.

Ditto No. 11.—Ditto on the Sanitary State and Requirements of Bom-

bay.— By THE Same.

Ditto No. 12.—Miscellaneous Information of the Mahee Kanta.—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. 13.—History of Sind, A. D. 710 to 1590, being a transla-

tion of Mahmood Masoom Namé, by Capt. G. Malet, 3rd Regt. Bombay

Light Cavalry.— By THE SAME,

y 2

164. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

Ditto No. 14.—Physical Character of the Nerbudda River and Mineral

Resources of the Nerbudda Valley.—By THE Samn.

Ditto No. 15.—Miscellaneous Information connected with Kutch.—By

THE SAME.

Ditto No. 16.—Tours for scientific and economical Research made in

Guzerat, Kattiawar, and the Cunkuns.—By roe Same.

Ditto No. 17.—Miscellaneous Information connected with the Pro-

vince of Sind, Part I. and Part II.—By tHe Same.

Ditto No. 18.—On the Revenue Settlement of ditto.—By THE Samu.

Ditto No. 20.—Memo. on the water of Nullasin Jungle Districts.—

By THE SAME.

Ditto No. 21.—Relating to the Assessment of the Omercote and Narra

districts, in Sind.—By THE SAME.

Ditto No. 22.—Second Report on the Supply of Water to Bombay.—

By THE SAME.

Ditto No. 23.—Miscellaneous Information connected with the petty

states in the Rewa Kanta, in Guzerat.

Ditto No. 24.—-Ditto connected with the Persian Gulf.—By THe Samer.

Ditto No. 25.—Ditto ditto native states under the control of the

Political Superintendent of Pahlunpoor.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 26.—Ditto ditto with the petty states of Junjeera, Jowar,

Sucheen, Dhurumpoor, Bunsda, Cambay, Penth, and the native states in

the Khandesh Collectorate, with a Map of each Estate —By tue Samp.

Ditto No. 27.—Memorandum on Municipal Conservancy in the dis-

tricts of the Bombay Presidency, Sind and Suttara.—By tHE Samu.

Ditto No. 28.—Correspondence illustrative of the practice of the Pesh-

war’s Government regardiag adoptions,and the circumstances under which

adopted sons could sueceed to property held for the State.—By tHE Samr.

Ditto No. 29.—Ditto regarding the concealment by the hereditary

officers and others of the Revenue Records of the former Government and

the Remedial Measures in progress.— By THE Same.

Ditto No. 30.—Ditto exhibiting the nature and use of the Poona

Duftur. A Selection of Paper on the origin of the Indian Commissariat.—

By THE Same.

Ditto No. 31.—Ditto, the results of the Scrutiny of the ditto.—By tur

SAME.

Ditto No. 32.—Correspondence relating to the Canal clearances in the

Hy drabad Collectorate in 1854-55. A Map accompanying.—By Tux Same,

Ditto No. 33.—Papers relating to a project for wet and dry docks

in the Harbour of Bombay.—By THE Samp.

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 165

Ditto No. 34.—Correspondence on the abolition of Statute or foreed

Labour in Sind.—By tue Same.

Ditto No. 35.—On the Hilly Region forming the Western part of the

Kurrachee Collectorate.—By THE SaME.

Ditto No, 36.—Correspondence regarding the Fordwah in the Shakar-

poor Collectorate, Sind.—By THE Samx.

Ditto No. 37.—Miscellaneous Information connected with the Pro-

vince of Kattywar in Guzerat, with 3 maps.—By THE SamE.

Ditto No. 38.—Province of Kaleewah.—By THE Same.

Ditto No. 39.—Reports on the Province of Kattywar and the ceded

districts in Guzerat, &c. Part I. On the Proceedings adopted for the

suppression of Infanticide in Kattywar, Part I1.—By tHE Samp.

Chart on Mercator’s Projection for the use of Ships making the Port of

Bombay, compiled from the Surveys of Lieuts. Cogan, Robinson, Ethersey,

Mountrio, and Selby, Indian Navy, by Lieut. Fergusson.—By rHe Same.

General Description and Sailing Directions for the Coast of Kattywar,

by A. M. Grieve, Lt. I. N. and Surveyor, Bombay, 1855,—By THE Same.

Report and Directions of Ports of the N. E. Coast of Arabia, Surveyed

in the years 1845 to 1849, by Lt. A. Grieve.—By THE Same.

Sailing Directions for the Gulf of Kutch, by Lieut. A. D. Taylor, I. N.

—By THE Same.

Selections from the Records of the Government of India No. XX.

Reports on the Province of Pegu, the district of Tounghoo, Journal of a

trip from Tounghoo to the Salween River, &c. &. &.—By THE Go-

VERNMENT OF INp1A, ForEIGN DEPARTMENT.

from the Records of Government, North Western Provinces,

Part XX1IX.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF THE N. W. P.

General Report on the Administration of the several Presidencies and

Provinces of British India during the year 1855-56, Parts I. and II. two

‘ copies. —By THE GovERNMENT oF INDIA.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Vol. I. Part I—By T.

O.pHAM, Esq. SUPERINTENDENT OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY OF INDIA.

Journal of the Photographic Society of Bengal, Nos. L. and II.—By

THE SOCIETY.

Journal Asiatique, Tome VIII. No. 31, Sept. and Oct. 1856.—By THE

_ Astatic Socrery oF Paris.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XIX. Part LV. Dec.

1856.—By THe Society.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XII. No. 48,

Noy. 1856.—By tue Society.

166 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

Catalogue of Mollusca in the Government Central Museum, Madras.—

By tHE CuraTOR OF THE Museum.

of the Shells for sale-—By THr Curator.

Bijdragen tot de Taal-Land-en Volkenkunde van Neerlandsch Indie,

Erste Deel. Nos. 3 and 4.—By tHE Royat Instirure or History,

GEOGRAPHY AND ETHNOLOGY oF NETHERLAND’s Inpra.

Report of the Calcutta Public Library for 1856.—By tHE Curators oF

THE Catcutta Pusriic LiBRary.

The Oriental Baptist for February, 1857.—By tHe Epitor.

The Christian Spectator for January, 1857.—-By tHE Epirors.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for February, 1857.—By tae Epitors.

The Upadeshak for ditto ditto.—By THe Epitor.

The Durbin Newspaper for ditto ditto.—By THe Epitor.

The Morning Chronicle for ditto ditto.—By Tar Epitor.

The Phenix for ditto ditto—By THE Epiror.

Exchanged.

The Athenzum for November, 1856.

Purchased.

Dissertations and Miscellaneous pieces relating to the History and

Antiquities, the Arts, Sciences, and Literature of Asia, in 3 vols. 8vo.

1786 ,London.*

A view of the English Interests in India, by W. Fullarton, 8vo. London.

History of the Revolt of Ali Beg against the Ottoman Porte, including

an account of the form of government of Egypt; together with a descrip-

tion of Grand Cairo, and of several celebrated places in Egypt, Palestine

and Syria, by 8. L. London, 1784, 8vo.

A Review of the Proceedings at Paris, by M. Fennell, 8vo.

Rambles and Recollections of an Indian Official, by Lt.-Col. W. H.

Sleeman, 2 vols. Royal 8vo. London, 1844.

Northern Mythology, comprising the principal popular Traditions and

Superstitions of Scandinavia, North Germany, and the N et oats by

Benjamin Thorpe, in 3 vols. 8vo. London, 1852.

Westwood’s Arcana Entomologica, 2 vols. 8vo.

Architectural Ornament of all Nations exemplified in a series of Ori-

ginal Designs displaying the characteristic features of every class of De-

corative Enrichment, 48 plates, by George Phillips.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 16 to 21.

The Literary Gazette, Nos. 39 to 42.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 108, for Dec. 1856.

* These papers are all from the volume of the Asiatic Researches.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 167

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th Nov. and lst Dec. 1856.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 10.

Revue Contemporaine et Atheneum Francais, 15th and 30th November

1856.

Annuare des Deux Mondes histoire Générale des divers etats, 1855-56,

Paris.

The American Journal of Science and Arts, No. 66, Nov. 1856.

Journal des Savants for October, 1856.

Analectes sur l’Histoire et la Littératur des Arabes d’Espagne par

Al-Makkari, Tome Premier, seconde Partie, Leyde, 1856, 4to.

Schéns Vocabulary of the Hanssa Language with Grammatical Elements,

London, 1843, Ato.

Gour Das Bysack.

Inbrarian and Assistant Secretary.

LLL LB LOLs

For Apri, 1857.

At a monthly general meeting of the Asiatic Society, held on

the 1st instant.

The Hon’ble Sir J. Colvile, Knight, President, in the chair.

Presentations were received—

1. From His Highness Meer Hossein Ali Khan, Ex-Ameer

of Scinde, through Major C. V. Bowie, Superintendent of the Ex-

Ameers, a number of skins and heads of tigers, &c. a list of which

is subjoined.

LSS Co oe

Sambur frontlets with aad

‘ 5

Axis ditto ditto, SAAS bs kay Gs a1. 7

Maniacs... vias.) os 22 Sins ed hee ay old

Four horned afiiclibe ditto aittol oe. cureetam costs ih ih

ee igtibroy dibtose 3 Jaquet.) sougdoay(l. siatsnoo: 1

ree Cee eter ghijars sett leno gedo Reha Thee age! LS

Stuffed Tiger, .... DV Bias. ate es eye 1

Ditto Bear (Ursus Lahinists oa: ee yaraiecet 1

7 Prom. Mr. | Wa: H. Hop piven or thie (Sinise ape tment,

through Major Thuillier, a small number of copper coins found in

Scinde near Hydrabad. The following is the note from the do-

nor :—

168 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

“The accompanying old coins were picked up by a party of my

Khalassees, when I was employed on the Scinde Survey in 1847.

They are from the ruins of an ancient city now known amongst

the Scindians as Bamrha-ke-Shool, or Brahminabad, some forty

or fifty miles north-east of Hyderabad. The ruins afford evident

traces of a walled city, about three quarter miles long, by half a

mile wide. The people about the place assert that a wide river

once flowed to the east of the city, of which the banks are still

discernible, but which I failed to discover, though an extensive

plain of sand lies on the North, East and South of the ruins. In

the ruins themselves one wall, about fifty feet high, was still

standing.”

3. From Mr. W. Clark, through the same gentleman, a silver

and copper coin dug up at Arrah in Behar.

4. From the Right Hon’ble the Governor in Council at Bombay,

through Lieut. HE. P. Fergusson, Superintendent, copies of the mag-

netical and meteorological observations made at the Bombay Ob-

servatory in 1854 and 1855.

5. From the Librarian to the Royal Bavarian Academy of

Sciences at Munich, the latest publications of the Academy.

6. From Mr. W. H. Carey, Roorkee, copies of his Almanac and

Annual Directory and Calendar of the Punjab, the N. W. Pro-

vinees and Oude,.for 1857.

7. From Colonel Sir A. Bogle, a copy of the Maulmain Almanac

for 1857.

Read letters—

1. From Mr. B. H. Hodgson, submitting for the information of

the Society, and the public in general, the following extract from a

letter from the Secretary to the Royal Asiatic Society in reference

to the mountain Deodhanga (“ Mount Everest’? of Col. Waugh.)

Your letter of the 27th October, together with your observations

on the incongruity of assigning a Huropean name to Indian locali-

ties, already provided with native appellations, was received and

read at our last meeting of the 17th instant, and I have the pleasure

to inform you that the members present unanimously expressed

their concurrence with your view of the case.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 169

A notice of the paper was communicated to the Atheneum and

Literary Gazette, and has appeared already in full in the latter

journal.

I have, &c.,

Howarp Norpgis,

Sec. Royal A. W.

To B. H. Hopeson, Esq.

2. From the Secretary to the Royal Asiatic Society, enclosing

a copy of a notification offering a prize of a sum of £300 presented

by a gentleman lately of the Civil Service, for the best history and

exposition either in German or French of the Vedanta system, both

as a system of Philosophy and of Religion.

3. From Major Thuillier, forwarding the following extract of

a letter from Lieut. Tennant, with a paper of calculations extracted

from the Roorkee Almanac, relating to the annular solar eclipse of

September 18th, 1857.

Camp Satgarra, Jan. 5th, 1856.

My pear Tuvurriier,—I have just received these from Roorkee

(slips from the Roorkee Almanac and Directory for the N. W. Pro-

vinces), and I send you a couple of copies.

If you take any interest in them, pray keep one for yourself.

The second I should be obliged if you would give to the Asia-

tic Society. I should be glad to have good observations, not

only of times (which are in my special line), but of the Hygrometer ;

if possible both. The latter alone would be of little use to me,

as I do not deal in those things; but Schlagintweit will be glad of

them, and also Photometric observations. Perhaps the Society

could call attention to the subject (if they have not done so) as the

time comes near.

Yours very sincerely,

H, TENNANT.

170 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 2.

ANNULAR SOLAR ECLIPSE.

SEPTEMBER 18rH, (Greenwich 17th,) 1857.

Calculated Positions of the Central and Limiting Lines for the

Annular Appearance within Indian Longitudes.

Southern Limit. . Central Line. Northern Limit.

Lat. N. Long. HE. §

Lat. N. Long. E.

J deg. min. | deg. min.

Lat. N. Long. E.

————

deg. min.| deg. min.

ideg. min./ deg. min.

136: 425 | 67: 343

34: 451 | 71: 98 |

35: 287 | 66: 594436: 5:4 | 67: 17-2

34: 102| 70: 500] 35: 203 | 71: 289

1 33: 576 | 74: 46:8

fs2: 357)| 77: 369

hol: 145 | 80: 61

32: 510/74: 47138: 2431/74: 258

31: 322! 76: B24) 32: 39)77: 147

80: 138 | 79: 1964 80: 441 | 79: 42:9

28: 55°7 | 81: 31:09 29: 245 | 81: 549 29: 536 | 82: 188

27: 381 | 83: 29:0) 28: 5:7:| 83: 53°6 } 28: 33°2 | 84: 181

26: 206 | 85: 163] 26: 470 | 85: 413] 27: 137] 86: 64

25: 34 | 86: 546] 25: 289 | 87: 200] 25: 544] 87: 45:4

23: 464 | 88: 255] 24: 111] 88: 510] 24: 355] 89: 170

993: 304189: 497122: 540| 90: 1561 23: 177] 90: 41°5

21: 142) 91: S49 21: 8712) 91: 845% 22: O00} 92: OF

19: 584! 92: 2264 20: 205| 92: 489] 20: 427] 93: 153

18: 42:8 | 93: 39:9 | 19: 43193: 593919: 25:9 | 94: 25°7

17: 275 | 94: 399117: 486] 95: 63918: 98) 95: 328

16: 123] 95: 441116: 33:0! 96: 1069 16: 535] 96: 372

14: 571196: 460915: 174 |97: 126915: 376] 97: 392

13: 428] 97: 466914: 25/98: 181914: 225] 98: 397

12: 274] 98: 454912: 474/99: 119]}18: 73] 99: 3885

11: 126 | 99: 43:2 | 11: 32° |100: O97 11: 52:3 |100: 366

N. B.—Observations with the true times and Geographical position of the

place will be very acceptable.

J. FE, Tennant, Lieut. Engineers,

lst Asst. Gt. Trig. Survey of India.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 171

PREDICTED PHASES OF ECLIPSE or Szpr. 171n, 1857.

Ctl | Mean Tinos | Angle of Posi- | oa.

‘9B ; tion from Bes

3 == Phases. a9 5,

Pe EWS Green | O’s Q’s & a0S

= es} row

4 | A wich. | EE N. pt. | vertex. | & oR

PUNJAB.

; hi.) an: ie | ais deg. deg. ;

3 = | Ist Contact,...... 14: 46-9} 19: 40°5 | 53 W.| 39 W. 5

S z Annulus forms,.| 16: O°7 | 21: 06 2s

5 si | Ditto breaks,....: p16: 10:3 | 21+ 3°9 Ss

= | 4 | Last Contact, ... | 17: 31:8] 22: 32-4|133F. | 154m. | 4

Bales, | det.Contact,...... 14: 487] 19: 411] 47 W.| 10H. | 8

3 = | Greatest eclipse, | 16: 9 | 21:' 4 eo

Ss a, | Last Contact, ... | 17: 42:3 | 22: 347/128 BH. | 159 BH. | ©.

& . | g_ | 1st Contact,...... 14: 48619: 469] 48 w.| 6Ww.| 84

2s] | Greatest eclipse, | 16: 14 | 21: 12: Lone

cs “| g& | Last Contact, ... | 17: 488 | 22: 471) 180 EF. |} 158 EH. |] 2, .-

| 2.41

Sa ee ae N. W. PROVINCES. |

Eee oh Iat Contig, ...... 14: 523/20: 45! 49W.| 5Ww.! &¢

we = Greatest eclipse, ; 16: 18°0 | 21: 30° Sia

3 | & | Last Contact, ...|17: 526] 23: 48| 133 HE. | Idi We |p Ss

i 2S A A

¢ | @ | IstOontact,......| 14: 547/20: 68] 43W.| 6H] 83

aa, (eee Greatest eclipse, | 16: 21° | 21: 33° OS

< a; | Last Contact,... | 17: 57°4| 23: 95|129 EK. | 1508 a Ze

4: | ZB | lst Contact,...... | 14: 58:2 | 20: 219] 43 W.| 12W.| 82

S - | 2 | Greatest eclipse, | 16: 27: | 22: 51: So

ia | a, | Last Contact,...] 18: 4:0} 23: 27-7 | 132 HB. | 139 E aby

é | a | 1st Contact,...... 15: 21) 20: 341] 43.w.| 17w.| 84

| = | Greatest eclipse, | 16: 33° | 22: 5° Sa

S a Last Contact, ... | 18: 11:0 | 23: 43°3 | 183 KH. | 142 BE. Ce

aa oi

i BENGAL.

es | 2 | Ist Contact,...... 15: 186|21: S1| 47 W.| 22W.| 4

a3 | 3 | Annulus forms,. | 16: 42°8 | 22: 37:3 =

28 | 8 | Ditto breaks, ...|16: 45°9 | 22: 40-4 | a

PFA} <4 | Last Contact, ... | 18: 23:1 | 24: 17°6 | 140 B. | 188 E. <q

$ | <3 | 1st Contact,...... 15: 122/21: 56| 42w.| ow.| 54

5 | Greatest eclipse, | 16: 47: | 22: 40° S5

3 g, | Last Contact,... | 18: 27-4 | 24: 20°3 | 137 H. | 131 E. | 2 si

* PEGU }

8 x | 1st Contact,...... 15: 35:1] 22: O11] 44W vig q

a ; & | Ditto breaks, ... | 17: 17:0 | 23: 42:0 4

RS < | Last Contact, ... | 18: 55°0 | 25: 200|137 EH. | 88 EB. <

Mrmoranpum.—tThe day is considered as commencing at Noon, and the hours

are measured continuously to 24th. September 17d, Oh. is therefore Noon on the

17th September.

19h. is 7 A. M. on the 18th.

24h. is Noon

25h, 1s LP. M.

do.

172 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 2.

Babu Joygopaul Bysack, duly proposed and seconded at the

last meeting, was balloted for and declared elected.

The following gentlemen were named for ballot at the next meet-

ing :—

Dr. W. C. B. Hatwell proposed by Dr. Thomson and seconded by

Dr. Boycott.

Rajah Prasinonath Rai Bahadur, of Degaputtee in Rajshahye,

proposed by Mr. Grote, and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

The council submitted a report announcing that they had elected

the Venerable Archdeacon Pratt a member of their body in the

place of Dr. Walker, who had proceeded to Europe, and that they

had added the names of Dr. Roer and Mr. Cowell to the Philological

Committee, and that of Mr. Blanford to the Committee of Natural

History.

Babu Rajendralal Mitra exhibited an Indo-Scythian gold coin

with a Greek legend of the type figured by Professor Wilson in the

Ariana Antiqua (Plate XIV. fig. 2) but differing in the figure on

the reverse having a javelin in the right hand and a sword in the

left instead of the sword alone. The legend is Muopo and not Mupo

as in Professor Wilson’s coin. The name of the king (Oorki) on

the obverse is perfectly distinct, and with the exception of the last

two letters of the title (Korano) the whole of the inscription is

legible. The coin was found in the village of Manickgunge (Dis-

trict Rajshahye) on the estate of Babu Ramanauth Tagore and for-

warded by that gentleman for exhibition to the meeting.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report.

Archdeacon Pratt, at the request of the President, explained

with the help of diagrams the physical cause of the motion of the

gyroscope, which was exhibited by Mr. Jones at the previous meet-

ing; and afterwards illustrated by it the phenomenon of the

precession of the Equinoxes, shewing its cause and the interest

attaching to it, historically and scientifically, and in its bearing on

Chronology. Under this last aspect Mr. Pratt showed, among

other examples—

How an approximation might be made to the dates

(1) of the formation of the “Lunar Mansions,” the earliest

division of the Zodiac.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Socrety. 173

(2) of the age of the Vedas.

(3) of the Argonautic expedition. And

(4) of the time of Thales.

The best thanks of the meeting were voted to the lecturer, on

the motion of the President, for his elucidation of these interesting

subjects.

Mr. H. Schlagintweit exhibited some panoramic drawings which

he had lately made in the neighbourhood of Kathmandu. These

illustrations were accurately drawn to scale, and faithfully repre-

sented the appearance of the Himalayan range as seen from the

valley of Nepaul.

The thanks of the meeting having been Poled to Mr. Schlagint-

weit, the proceedings terminated.

LiIprary.

The library received the following accessions during the month of March.

Presented.

Untersuchungen uber die Fauna Peruana yon J. J. von Tschudi. S¢.

Gallen, 1844-46, folio.— By THE AUTHOR.

Memorie della Reale Academia delle Scienze di Torino, Serie Seconda

Tomo XV. Torino, 1855 Bengal. 4to.—By THE ACADEMY.

- Geschichte Wassaf’s. Persisch Herausgegeben und deutsch iibersetzt

von Hammer-Purgstall 1 Band, 4to. Wien, 1856,—By THE AuTHOR.

Sanskrit— W orterbuch Herausgegeben von der Kaiserlichen Akademie

der Wissenschaften, bearbeitet von Otto Béhtlingk und Rudolph Roth.

Zweiter Theil, Bogen 1-10 and 11-20.—By THE AuTHORs.

Transactions of the Royal Irish Academy, Vol. X XIII. Part I. Science,

Royal 4to.—By tHe AcapEMyY.

Proceedings of the Royal Irish Academy for the year 1855-56, Vol.

VI. 8vo. Part III. 8vo.—By tux Same.

The Journal of the Royal Geographical Society with Maps and Illus-

trations, Vol. X XIII. 1853, 8vo.—By tHe Society.

General Index to the Second ten volumes of the Journal of ditto.—By

THE SAME.

Philosophical Transactions of the Royal Society of London for the year

1856, Vol. 146, Part I. Royal 4to., London.—By tue Society.

Proceedings of ditto, Vol. VIII. No. 22.—By tux Same.

Recueil des Actes de l’Académie imperiale des Sciences, Belles-Lettres

et Arts de Bourdeux, 1855, 1—4 Tremestre, 1855.—By THE ACADEMY.

174 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 2.

The Report of the British Association for the Advancement of Science,

1855, Glasgow.—By THe AssociaTIon.

Magnetical and Meteorological Observations, made at the Hon’ble

East India Company’s Observatory, Bombay, 1854 and 1855.—By THe

Govt. oF BomMBAy.

The Almanac and Companion for the North-Western Provinces and

the Punjaub for the year 1857.—By W. H. Carry, Esa., RoorKek.

Directory and Calendar for the N. W. P. and Punjaub and Oude for

1857.— By THE Same.

The Tenasserim and Martaban Almanac and Directory for 1857, corre-

sponding with the Burmese month and day for 1218-19.—By Sir A. Bocue.

The Oriental Baptist for March, 1857.—By THe Eprtor.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for February, 1856.—By tor Epitor.

The Caleutta Christian Observer for March, 1857.—By tHe Eptrors.

The Upadeshak for ditto.—By tHe Eprtor.

Report of the Association of Friends for the promotion of Social Im-

provements in Bengal.—Caleutta, 1857.— By Tur AssocraTIon.

Journal of the Royal Asiatic Society of Great Britain. Vol. XVI.

Part Il.—By Tue Society.

Abhandlungen der Mathemat-Physik classe der Koeniglich, Bayerischen

Akademie der Wissenschaften. Band VII. Abth. 3. Munchen, 1855.—

By THE ACADEMY.

Ditto der Historischen classe. Ditto Band VII. Abth.1. Band VIII.

Abth. 1.—By THe Samer.

Bulletin, 1853. Nos. 26 to 52.—By tur Same.

Ueber die Bewegung der Bevélterung, von Dr. von Hermann.—By THE

SAME.

Rede. von F. Thiersch.—By THE Same.

Weeweiser fiir die Besucher des K. Botanischen gartens in Munchen,

von Dr. C. Fr. Ph. v. Martius, 12mo. 1852, Munchen.— By THE SAME.

Hachanged.

The Athenzeum for December, 1856.

Purchased.

Conchologia Iconica: or illustrations on the Shells of Molluscous Ani-

mals, by Lovell Augustus Reeve. Vol. I1J.—Containing Monographs

of the Genera Haliotis, Mangelia, Purpura, Ricinula, Monoceros, Bullia,

and Buccinum.

Ditto Vol. [1V.—Containing Monographs of the Genera Chama, Chiton,

Chitonellus, Ficula, Pyrula, Turbinella, Fasciolaria, Fusus, Paludomus,

Turbo.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 175

Ditto Vol. V.—Ditto ditto, Bulimus, Achatina, Dolium, Cassis, Tur-

ritella, Mesalia and Eglisia, Cassidarea, Oniscia, Eburna.

Ditto Vol. VI.—Voluta, Fissurella, Partula, Achatinella, Artemi,

Lucina, Hemipecten, Oliva, Strombus, Pterocera, Rostellaria, Struthiolaria.

Ditto Vol. VII.—Ditto ditto, Helix.

Ditto Vol. VIII.—Ditto ditto, Pecten, Hinnites, Mactra, Lutraria,

Amphidesma, Mesodesma, Donax, Patella, Nassa.

Ditto Vol. IX.—Ditto ditto, Spondylus, Neritina, Natica, Navicella.

Siphonaria, Nerita, Latea.

Smith’s Illustrations of the Zoology of South Africa (the deficient Nos.

to complete the set of the Library, vide Catalogue, No. 777) Nos. 19

to 28.

Sowerby’s, G. B., Thesaurus Conchyliorum, or Figures and Descriptions

of recent Shells: (the deficient Nos. to complete the set, vide: No. 661

of Catalogue,) Parts 5 to 16, Vols. 1 and 2. Royal 8vo., London.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History from September, 1840

to February, 1841, (the deficient Nos.)

Ditto ditto, No. 109, January, 1857.

Rig Veda oder die heiligen lieder der Brahmanen. Herausgegeben

von Max Miiller, Erste Lieferung Hrster Thiel, Leipzig, 1856, Royal 4to.

Williams’s Sakoontala.

Yajur Veda, Vol. II. part 8, and Vol. III. part 1, 20 copies each.

The Book of Jonah in four Semitic versions, viz. Chaldee, Syriac, Aethio-

pic, and Arabic, with corresponding Glossaries, by W. Wright, 1857, 8vo.

Catalogue of Stars near the Hcliptic, observed at Markree during the

years 1854, 1855 and 1856, and whose places are supposed to be hitherto

unpublished, Vol. 1V. containing 14,951 stars, 1856.

Journal des Savants for November and December, 1856.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 43 and 44 of 1856, and Nos. 2085 and 2086 for

1857.

Revue et Magazin de Zoologi, No. 11.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, No. 4, 1856.

Revue des deux Mondes, lst January, 1857.

Contemporaiue, 15 and 31st December, 1856.

The Natural History Review, No. 1, 1857.

The Edinburgh Review, No. 213.

The Westminster Review, No. 21, for January, 1857.

The Quarterly Review, No. 201, Ditto.

Gour pas Bysack,

Librarian and Asst. Secy.

lst April, 1857.

sel

; .

fis

We ritvintle ntl

ios ; hat “s eLg ee:

’

“vs a vee

i) ko erp eee

‘ : ‘ : ‘

{ ] Vk J iy

Dts ee, oa . “a, poe AL! feos vi wo ka Lk Ma

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

PAPA PAABRALD LL VOLPI FG LVILPLIFILIVPV PL IIPS I

No. IIL. 1857.

An Account of the mountain district forming the western boundary of

the Lower Derdjat, commonly called Ron, with notices of the tribes

inhabiting 1¢.—By Lreut. H. G. Raverry, 3rd Regiment Bombay

N. I. Assistant Commissioner, Multan.

To any one who may ever have been stationed in the Derdajat, as

the important tract of level country extending from some miles

north of Deré Ismézil Khan, to the frontier of Upper Sindh, and

lying between the Indus, “The Father of Rivers,” and the lofty

mountains to the west, the name of Rou, will be as familiar as a

“ Household Word.’’ It may not, however, be so well known to

others who have never had occasion to serve so far west ; and as the

extent and general meaning of the term Roh is not well defined at

present and but little known, I will endeavour to throw some light

on the matter, from enquiries instituted with this view, and from

my own information on the subject, together with what I have

gathered from a few Beltch Chieftains with whom I became

acquainted during my residence in the Derajat.*

An Afghan author describes Roh as, “The name of an Afghan

country of which the eastern (N. E.) boundary extends to Kashmir,

and the western (S. W.) as faras the river Iflmand (Helmand) near

Herat, between which two countries is a distance of two anda half

* See my account of a visit to the Shrine of Sakhi-Sarwar in the Lower

Derajat, with a notice of the Mela or annual fair held there. Journal of Bengal

Asiatic Society, September, 1855.

No. LXXXVII.—New Szrins, Vout. XXVI. 2A

178 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [ No. 3.

months’ journey. The northern boundary of it is Kashkar,* and

the Southern Belichistén. It therefore les between Iran, Turan,y

and Hind; and the inhabitants of it are called Rohilahs.”’

So writes Mahabat Khan; but with regard to the eastand west

he appears to have confounded the south-west and north-east; and

with respect to the river Tilmand, or Helmand as it is erroneously

called, he is wholly in error. The Iilmand rises in the mountain of

Koh-i-Baba, some twenty or thirty miles west of Kabul, and from

thence takes a south-westerly course, flowing about seventy miles

west of Ghuzni to Ghiriskh in Long. 64° 20, and eighty or a

hundred miles to the west of Kandahar, from which taking a sweep

almost due west through Siestan, empties itself into the Zarrah lake

some five degrees south of Hirat.

With this exception, and what he calls the northern boundary,

the description will almost agree, both as regards extent and posi-

tion, with the Arachosia of the Greeks and other classical authors,

which was the most eastern satrapy of Persian India, and would have

comprised within it the whole of the country now known as Afghan-

istan, and a large portion of Beltchistén also. Professor Heeren

in his work on the “ Asiatic Nations,” remarks, that ‘The western

and northern boundaries of India were not then the same as at

present. To the west, it was not then bounded by the river Indus,

but by a chain of mountains, which under the name of Koh (whence

the Grecian appellation of Indian Caucasus) extended from Bac-

triana to Makran, or Gedrosia, enclosing the kingdoms of Kandahar

and Kabul, the modern kingdom of Eastern Persia or Afghanistan.”

IT am, for the above reasons, inclined to consider, that from the

word Koh, which in Persian signifies a mountain, the name Roh is

derived.

Some of the Afghan writers, who have described so graphically

and so well, the events which happened in India and Afghanistan

under the sway of the Moghals and the Afghans or Patdns, always

* K4shk4r or Chitral is a country of Hindi Khiish to the east of the Siah

Posh Kafirs, west of Panjkorah and north of Bajour, known as the country of

Shah Kutor.

+ Turdén—The ancient dominion of Afradsidb to the north and east of the

river Oxus.

1857. ] Account of the Lower Derdyat. 179

eall the mountainous tract of table-land lying between Kandahar,

Ghuzni, and Kabul on the west, and the Stilima4n mountains on the

east ; and from the range of Spin Ghar or Sufaid Koh on the north, to

the frontier of Upper Sindh (as at present constituted,) to the south,

by the name of Roh ; and its inhabitants, not including the Belich

tribes inhabiting the southern portion, were hence known as

Rohilahs. The whole of the Afghan tribes on this account have

often been, and are still sometimes called, even by themselves, but

erroneously so, by this name.

The present rough sketch, however, chiefly refers to that tract of

country which lies between the highest peak of the Suliman range,

ealled the Takht or throne of Silim4n (around which the Afghans

first settled on their immigration from the west) and the frontier

of Upper Sindh; and embracing within its limits the offshoots from

the Stiliman range, as far as the districts of Derah Ismdzil Khan,

and Dera Ghazi Khan, and the eastern portion of Siwistan west,

which, as I have already remarked, is for the most part, particularly

the southern half of it, peopled by Belichis who have given, and

may still give, great annoyance to the authorities. In fact, it has

ever been their bugbear, as being the Alsatia of the Derdjat and

the western districts of the Panjab.

To watch the passes leading out of these fastnesses, a line of Mi-

litary posts, consisting of both Infantry and Cavalry, with Artillery

here and there, have been established, and which are furnished from

the Punjab Irregular Force exclusively ; but although the different

patrols are constantly on the move from one station to another, yet

these fierce mountaineers, the Gael of the Panjab, manage to pass

the line of posts, which, to be effective, are too far apart, and

often succeed in carrying off the cattle and flocks of their more

peaceful brethren of the plain, as well as those of the Jatts and

Hindus, who, possessing the best lands in the district, have more to

attract the freebooters. These raids are constantly attended with

blood-shed and loss of life on both sides.

Before proceeding to describe this mountainous country, it will

perhaps be better to give a short sketch of the principal features of

the Derdjét, and more particularly of the Dera Ghazi Khan dis-

trict, with which I am best acquainted from having been once locat-

2A 2

180 Account of the Lower Derajdt. [No. 3.

ed there, and which also in a measure may be said to be more

closely connected with Roh and its people than the sister Dera

which may be considered almost a portion of Afghanistan itself,

Bunt and Murwat being included in it.

The district or zillah of Deré Ghazi Khan is about a hundred

and ninety miles in length with an average breadth of about thirty.

It is bounded east by the Indus and west by Roh. The land is

guite level and bespeaks its origin, which appears to have been

formed by two separate and distinct operations—the subsidence, or

rather deposit, of mud brought down by the river on one side, and

earthy matter combined with small pebbly stones washed from the

hills on the other, mixed here and there with patches of sand or

triturated sand-stone.

Thus there are two different descriptions of soil brought from

two different ranges, that from the Indus consisting of rich mud

levigated very fine from the distance it has been brought, and

capable of producing the more valuable crops, such as indigo,

cotton, sugarcane, etc; whilst the other having come but a short

distance is precisely similar in composition to the parent hills, and

consists of a succession of layers of sand and clay of a coarse grain,

the former predominating. In some places, this debris has become

so hard that it might easily be mistaken for stone. The produce

from this soil consists almost entirely of Bajra (Holcus spicatus),

and Juwar (Holcus Sorgum), two hardy species of grain that will

grow in almost any description of land.

The same causes of detrusion being in constant operation, these

two soils are supplied with water from the same sources as they

themselves proceed, the rich deposit of the Indus being well irri-

gated by means of canals from April to October, during which

months this river may almost be called a sea, and from a few Per-

sian wheels. The poorer soil is dependent on, and scantily supplied

by the small hill streams of which there are numbers, but only after

falls of rain which are uncertain; on all other occasions they are

with few exceptions, quite dry. The Sanghar pergunnah, the most

northern division is, however, more bountifully supplied than the

other parts of the district, having a small river of its own, which

coming from a greater distance, taking its rise on the eastern slope

1857. ] Account of the Lower Derajat. 181

of the Saliman range, has a greater volume of water, and flows for the

greater part of the year. Still the irrigation depends in a great mea-

sure on rain also, and therefore the produce is variable and its extent

uncertain ; the revenue sometimes having reached as high as 94, or

95,000 rupees, and even more under the Seikh Government, whilst

in some years again it has barely amounted to 50 or 55,000 rupees.

The soil not within the influence of these mountain streams is

perfectly barren ; thus from the village of Rajunpur, as far south as

Riijaén—a distance of upwards of forty miles—the cultivated portion

is entirely separated from the mountains by a narrow, bare, and sandy

belt of land, in some places from twenty to twenty-five miles in

breadth. This soil approaches the Indus more closely in the

vicinity of Derd Ismézil Khan, and also near Shah- Wali, some fifteen

or twenty miles south of Rijan, near the boundary of Upper Sindh.

The water from the few wells within ten or fifteen miles of the .

hills is invariably bad, generally of a black colour, foetid smell,

and brackish taste, and as might be imagined, exceedingly unwhole-

some. The villages in this direction are mainly supplied with this

element from tanks or ponds, which the people construct to contain

the water flowing from the hills; and sometimes during the hot

season, after great drought, the inhabitants are absolutely obliged

to desert their hamlets. This is particularly the case near Dajal,

close to the mountains, the people of which proceed to Jamptir—a

small town nearer to the Indus, where they remain until water be-

comes more plentiful.

The rich alluvial soil of the Indus on the other hand produces

very luxuriant jungle, and the cultivation, commencing from the

distance of about two miles inland, generally extends parallel to

the river’s bank for about eight or nine miles in breadth, which is

irrigated from several canals. During the inundation of the river

from April to October, these two miles of land above referred to

are entirely flooded to a greater or less extent, and therefore but

partially brought under cultivation during the remaining portion

of the year; but it is invaluable as grazing land, and the Govern-

ment do not fail to collect a tax termed Trini, from the people who

graze their cattle on it. Large quantities of grass too are collected

and stored for fodder.

182 Account of the Lower Deri at. . (ENG:

Some villages are remarkable for their date trees, which grow

most luxuriantly, particularly in the vicinity of Dera Ghazi Khan,

and which used to yield a revenue alone of 8 or 9,000 rupees yearly

to the Seikh Government.

The most fruitful portions of the land in the district are in the

hands of Hindts and Punjabi Musalmans, whilst the poorer allot-

ments are held by the simple and more hardy Belichis.

Some of the canals which I have already referred to, and of

which there are several in the district, are yearly cleared out by

the landholders themselves, as in other places of the Panjab gene-

rally, except at Dera Ghazi Khan itself, where Government

has gone to the expense of 15 and even 18,000 rupees yearly, to

clear them, and for which the Zamindars have to pay, over and

above the money settlement for their lands, and the percentage as

a road fund for keeping up and making new roads; but it is a

remarkable fact, or was so at least a short time since, that the

canals thus cleared out, were never in the same efficient state as

those cleared out by the people themselves.

The only places worthy of the name of towns in this dreary

district are, Deré Ghazi Khan and Mittunkot; Jampur, Dera Din

Pandh, and Mungrotah being merely good sized villages. The

other hamlets are mostly small and far apart, and generally of the

most squalid appearance, bespeaking the poverty and wretchedness

of the inhabitants. The general aspect of the district, with a few

exceptions in the vicinity of the river, where there are some fine

trees, is bare and dreary in the extreme; the only relief to the

landscape and to the eye being the lofty mountains to the west,

of which and of whose people, we will now attempt a description.

The hilly tract of country commences on the north from the

mountains which form the southern boundary of the river Zhobe,

and parallel to those eastern off-shoots or spurs from the Stliman

range, where the southern part of Daman in the Dera Ismazil

Khan district ends, and the most northern part of Dera Ghazi

Khan, viz. the Sanghar district commences; as far south as the

parallel of Mittunkot, where both ranges, the Koh-i-siah or

Black range, as the Stiliman mountains are now called, and the Koh-

i-Surukh or Red mountains, as the lower chain is termed, make a

1857.| Account of the Lower Deri dt. 183

sudden sweep to the west as far as Dadur at the entrance of the

Bolan Pass ; and from Mittunkot, south as far as Kusmore, the

most northern village and frontier post in upper Sindh.

The boundary from west to east occupies the space between the

68th degree of east longitude, the Siliman, and the lower and

parallel range to it, which forms the western boundary of the

Derajat.

Between this space and the 29th and 31st degrees of north lati-

tude, the country is also mountainous. To the extreme west also

is a chain of mountains which appears to be an off-shoot from the

Sufaid Koh, or Spin Ghar,* running almost parallel with the

Siliman range north and south, but with a more westerly incli-

nation. The highest peak of this range is called Kund, on the

eastern slope of which the river Zhobe rises, and which flowing

north-east joins the Gomiul just before it pierces the Siliman range

on its way to the Indus, which, however, it fails in reaching, the whole

of its water being expended for irrigation purposes. On the western

slope of the mountain above referred to, the river Lorah rises, which

flows south-west through the valley of Pishin, and the other streams

rising in its slopes also take a similar direction.

After passing the high range bounding the valley of the Zhobe

to the south, we come to the extensive plain of Bori, which ig

described to me as being exceedingly temperate, and in other re-

spects resembling in extent and appearance the plain of Peshawer ;

and is fertile, well watered, and carefully cultivated. The valleys

between it, the mountains south of the Zhobe, and the Stiliman

range, are held by the Musa Khel and Esott Kakarrs, who mostly

follow a shepherd’s life, and appear to be divided into a number of

small and distinct communities. The Bori plain or valley is in

the direct route from Multén to Kandahar through the Sanghar

Pass to Pishin.

Other ranges succeed further south, extending to the valley

of Zuwadrah, and the extensive table-land of Tall and Chotiali,

which is inhabited by the Afghan. tribe of Tor (black) and Spin

(white) Tarins. More south again are the mountains familiar to

* Spiin Ghar in Pus’hto means the white or Snowy mountain, which is also

the signification of the Persian word “ Sufaid Koh.”

184 Account of the Lower Derajdt. [ No. 3.

those who served on the frontier of Upper Sindh and Kachchi in

the years 1839 to 1843, as the Kahun Hills, but more strictly

speaking a portion of the Surukh Koh or Red Mountains which

form the northern boundary of Belichistan in this quarter.

The highest portion of the Stiliman range varies in breadth from

eight to fifteen miles or more, with a belt of about two or three

miles, consisting of tupahs or small portions of table-land, and

immense piles of rock, forming the highest peaks, and which, being

composed of a very hard black lime-stone, have been the origin of

the Persian name, Koh-i-siah, and the Sanskrit term Kala-Pahar,

both of which signify the Black Mountain. It is considerably less

in height towards the south of the Takht or throne of Suliman, than

that mountain itself, which Vigne calculated to be about 9,000

feet in altitude; and thus we may safely calculate the average

height to be from 7 to 8,000 feet. The whole range can be dis-

tinctly seen from the fort and camp at Multan about the time

the sun sets behind it, on a clear day, or after rain; and in

the winter the higher peaks are generally capped with snow. Its

sides and ravines are densely covered with pine forests which attain

a great height in many places. The other trees which flourish there

are the Zaittin or wild-olive, the Kahwur or Kahwar

the Kunar, (Ziziphus jujuba), the Arak (Salvadora Persica), the

Mughelan (a species of Mimosa or Acacia), the Ketmim or Kareh

the Pilah ———— the Shfsham (Dalbergia Sisu), the

Pis, a kind of reed used in making excellent mats, and several others.

Springs of the purest water flow on all sides, and in many places

form small cascades.

The principal wild animals found in this range are, tigers and

black bears in the higher parts, panthers, hyenas, wolves in great

numbers, jackals, foxes, deer, ibex, antelope, parra or hog-deer,

the gud or mountain sheep, the mdr-khor, or serpent-eater, and

other smaller animals. The birds are various classes of the

falcon tribe, and the more common birds of prey, partridges, pigeons,

doves, etc.

The second range is called the Surdkh Koh, or Red Mountains

from its being comprised of a red coloured stone as hard as the

blacker stone of the higher range.

1857.] Account of the Lower Derazat. 185

I shall now notice, in regular rotation from north to south, the

different Darrahs, as the valleys with a pass and stream running

through them are designated, together with the different tribes

who hold and cultivate lands within them, to a greater or less

extent. Many of the tribes are wholly in the hills and hold no

lands in the Derdjat itself, whilst on the other hand again, the

whole of those holding lands in the Derajat, with three exceptions,

also cultivate patches of land within the valleys.

Tue Srurisnis on Asturtinis.

The Stuiriani or Astiriani Afghans of the Lohani tribe hold the

southern portion of the Damdn or skirt, as it means in Persian, of

the range of Suliméan—the most southern portion of the Dera

Ismaezil Khan district, and bounding the Sanghar district to the

north— which they appear to have not very recently conquered from

the Beluchis. It consists partly of the low ridge of reddish gray

sand-stone running paralle] to the Sdliman range. Their chief village

is Oormuk, and the other principal villages are Mangul, containing

about one hundred families, situated in a plain three miles from the

hills; Samozai, with about an equal number of inhabitants, nine

miles from the hills; Key Baharah, containing six or eight hun-

dred families, six miles distant; and another village in the moun-

tains bearing the same name as the one just mentioned, and

peopled by some two hundred families... This portion of the

Sturidni tribe, who are considered quiet and inoffensive, consists of

about 1,200 adult maies including thirty or forty horsemen, under

a chief named Abd-tllah Khan. The remainder, numbering about

4,000 families, are located further to. the west. The division to

which I refer sold its flocks and herds some years since and took

to farming, on account of a feud with the Kakarrs, through whose

country they had to pass with their flocks,in the hot season, in

their migrations to the high-lands to the west to their Aishlauks or

summer stations.

Zmurnis, KAkargs, SairAnis.

The Zmurris occupy the hills to the west of the Sturiénis and

are distant from them some nine miles. They resemble the

186 Account of the Lower Derajat. [ No. 3.

Shiranis in their dress and customs, with the exception of being

exempt from the rapacious habits for which the latter are so notori-

ous. West of the Zmurris again are the Kakarrs, a numerous and

powerful, yet simple and inoffensive tribe, the braneh of which

nearest the Zmurris is known by the name of Esotts. They

occupy a tract of country forming a square of about one hundred

miles in extent, and follow agriculture and grazing. The Shiranis

who dwell about the peak of Siliman and bound the Kakarrs to the

north are a numerous tribe, and can muster at least 5,000 adult

males. They are about seven miles distant from the latter tribe.

KHETRANS.

South of the Sturiénis, and the most northern Beltich tribe of

the Sanghar district, are the Khetrans, a branch of those further

south, but at present quite distinct from them under a chief named

Muhammad Khén. They occupy the lands between the lower hills

and the Surukh range, and some lands in the plain at the foot of

the hills, and are quiet agriculturists. They have charge of the

three passes of Wah-wah, or Vahawah, H4j4, and Litarrah, but

being weak in point of numbers, and not able to muster above 300

men, they cannot look after them properly, though it may be

better now that a strong post of the Punjab Irregulars has been

stationed at Wah-wah, which is their chief village and lies close to

the hills. ‘ The other villages are Kohur, Kiatiani, and Litarrah. A

river called the Ganj, which takes its rise in the higher range, flows

through Wah-wah valley and town, and contains water all the year

round, and consequently the lands are pretty well provided for as

regards means of irrigation. The pass is practieable for loaded

exmels, and the road leads into that which proceeds to Kandahar

through the Sanghar pass further south. Between the skirt of the

lower range and that of Suliman, the country is very mountain-

ous, but patches of good land are to be met with here and there,

and which are generally cultivated. The Wah-wah valley is about

twenty-one miles from the banks of the Indus.

The Khetrans also hold the Liria valley and pass, which is four

or five miles south of that of Wah-wah. It is so called after a small

stream which flows through it. A few of the Khasrdni tribe, who

1857. ] Account of the Lower Derdjat. 187

adjoin the Khetrans on the south and west, cultivate some available

land within the influence of this stream, on the banks of which

there are several Kunar (Zizyphas jujuba), Leyah (tamarisk),

Lanah (Camel-thorn) trees, and a flower called the junglt-gul is

found in great numbers throughout the valley. There appears to

be no want of water inside, but out of the valley itis by no means so

plentiful ; and the extent of the cultivation depends on the quan-

tity of water collected in the various bunds or ponds, and from the

rains which are often copious in the spring and winter months.

There is a road through the Liria pass which leads into that from

Sanghar, but it is only passable for men on foot.

KWASRANIs.

The tribe to the south and west of the Khetrans are the Khas-

ranis who hold the Bhatti, Khanwa, and Kawrah passes. They are

great thieves, and have given a deal of trouble at different times,

so much so as to call for a severe chastisement, which they partially

received from a small force under Brigadier Hodgson at the com-

mencement of the hot season of 1853.

The Bhatti pass and valley is about six miles south of the valley

of Liria, and is inhabited by about 1,500 of the Khasrani tribe, of

whom Mitta Khan and Omar Khan are the chiefs. Their prin-

cipal village, called after the tribe, is situated about eighteen miles

up the valley, through which a small river meanders, and the banks

of which are shaded by Kundr, Lanah, and Leyah trees in several

places. Out of the valley water is excessively scarce.

The valley and pass of Kauwa is four miles and a half from the

preceding, and is close to the skirt of the hills. It also contains a

rivulet of pure water, but out of the valley none is procurable.

About five hundred families dwell in the hills in this vicinity, and

the remainder of the tribe, which altogether may be computed at

seven thousand souls, occupy the lands from Khas-rani-ki Busti to

Gamak in the Derajat.

The chiefs of this tribe receive a cash payment from the British

Government, besides certain fees or assignments on the lands

termed Kusuir and Bardt; and in former times when the route

through their country was frequented by the traders from Kabul

2B2

188 Account of the Lower Derajat. [No. 3.

and Ghuzni, they received a transit duty of about three shillings

for each loaded camel. At present they are very poor.

Between the different valleys already enumerated and the Black

Range, as I shall in future call the Suliman mountains, the

country is extremely broken, but occasional tupahs or plateaux

may be found which could be brought under cultivation with very

little trouble. A small number of Khasrduis, amounting to about

two hundred families, dwell between the most eastern valleys and

the Black Range, on the highest and western slopes of which they

graze their flocks, and where they also devote some attention to

agriculture. They are, however, notorious robbers, and are in the

habit of coming down the valleys which run parallel to the Black

Mountains on the east, which open out on the southern part of the

Dera Ismazil Khan district of Daman, and succeed in carrying off

cattle, often without being pursued, into their own fastnesses.

The lands of the Hsott Kakarrs commence about sixteen miles

from the Khasréni bounds, on the western slope of the Black

Range towards the north, which in this direction is about twenty

or twenty-two miles broad from east to west. The ‘sé Khel

Kakarrs, to the amount. of three thousand adult males, dwell to the

south-west of the Khasranis. They are both cultivators and

shepherds, and possess numerous flocks; and occasionally they

bring broad-tail sheep and goats into the Derajat for sale. They

are of the Luni tribe, and acknowledge Shikari Khan as their

Chief.. The Khasrdnfs are bounded on the south by the Bozdars,

with whom they are on amicable terms.

MurKAnis.

The Mutkaénis are wholly in the plains. They cultivate the

lands to the west of the Kkhasranis and Bozdars, about Sanghar

and Mungrotah, and are a very quiet community containing about

eight or nine hundred adult males. Their nominal chief is Asad

Khan, but Musi Khan appears to exercise the greatest power

over them.

Bozpars.

The next tribe to the south are the Bozdars, who are wholly in

the hills, which may account for their being arrant thieves and

1857. ] Account of the Lower Deriwat. 189

exceedingly troublesome and turbulent. They are powerful in

point of numbers, and can muster about 3,000 men if required.

The chief is named Dost Muhammad Khan, who is allowed a month-

ly sum by Government, which may be properly termed “ Black

mail.”? He also holds several Maaft or rent-free wells and lands

besides receiving Bardé fees already mentioned. The Bozdars hold

the passes of Sanghar and Mahoey. Another branch of the tribe

acknowledges one Nowrang Khau as their chief, and they go by

the name of Nowrang Bozdars.

The Sanghar pass and valley is so called from the small river

running through it, which takes its rise on’ the eastern slope of

the Black Range. It flows all the year round, and quantities of

wheat and juwar are produced within the influence of its fertilizing

stream. Other lands depending on rain and the water of the bunds

or ponds for irrigatiou, are also cultivated by the Bozdars, who

here amount to about two thousand souls.

_ Between this valley and the Black Range there is an immense

quantity of land fit for cultivation along the banks of the Sanghar

river, which is generally taken advantage of by the Bozdars of

the Sehdérrni and Stwarrui clans. The Gulamani branch occupy

the highest slopes of the Black Range both on the eastern and

also on the western side adjoining the Afghan country. The

higher range is, however, but thinly peopled, and is generally

uninhabited. The Zaitin or wild olive, and the Pulah or Philah

tree flourish on the banks of the Sanghar river towards its source,

and lower down the valley the Shishi and the Fig.

The road through the Sanghar pass is very good, and is practica-

ble for both man and beast, and also available for artillery. It is

in fact the high road to Kandahar by the plain of Bort and the

valley of Pishin; but the pass itself is completely in the hands of

the Bozdars until the Black Range is passed, and if they chose,

they might throw obstacles in the way, but soon to be surmounted

itis hoped, by a few staunch troops and the minié rifle. To us

probably they would only be too glad to render assistance, and in

the event of any necessity for the speedy arrival of troops at

Kandahar, which might be reached from Multan by this route in

twelve days, their services might be secured and our rear also, as

190 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [ No. 38.

well as the communication kept up, by a small body of troops

stationed on the western slope of the Black Range in the Bozdér

country, the temperature of which, even in the hottest months

of the year, is never disagreeably high. From their proximity to

us in the Derajat there would be no fear of treachery, as in case of

necessity a body of troops could, in a single night or in one day,

advance half way through the pass and along the road to support

this post, or aid in its withdrawal, which might thus be effected in

one forced march. In case of an advance to assist our ally, Dost

Muhammad Khan, and with a previous arrangement on his part,

immediately on clearing the Black Range, a force advancing from

Multan would enter a fruitful and temperate district where supplies

and forage of all kinds and descriptions might be obtained; and

this in itself would tend greatly to lighten the force, from there

being no necessity for burthening it with a quantity of Commis-

gariat stores, or even as much as usual.

Springs of good water are also numerous, and this aliment can be

procured in any quantity at the different stages along the line of

march. It occupies a caravan about three hours from the time

of entering the last pass which leads through the Black Range,

until the difficulties are overcome and the western slope gained.

After passing this range the mountains again begin to rise at a

distance of about twelve miles to the west, but they are compa-

ratively low, and the difficulties of the road are by no means so

great. The passage over the former range would be, however, a

difficult matter, should the Bozdars occupy and fortify the defiles

beforehand.

The next valley and pass to the south is that of Mahoey, which

contains some good land, and is held by the Bozdar tribe. A

small river flowing from east to west gives name to the valley, which

leads into that of Sanghar, distant from it seven miles. The road

is practicable for loaded camels and such like beasts of burden,

should the Bozdars throw no obstacles in the way. The Gulamani

branch of this tribe dwell about the Black Range, and to the west

of them again the Luni Kakarrs, who are by far the most numerous

tribe in this vicinity.

The Bozdars are bounded on the east by the Mutkanis, south by

1857. | Account of the Lower Deriat. 191

the Lunds in the Derdajat and by the Hudidni Lagharis in the hills.

They are on friendly terms with the Lini Afghans and the Khasrani

Bélichis, who bound them to the north-east and west, but they are

at enmity with Mir Hadji and his Khetrans who bound them to the

south-west. The Jaafir Afghans, a small community of about 1,500

souls, whose chief village is Ddlagh, adjoin them on the north.

They are chiefly agriculturists, though some are traders, and their

lands are extensive, well-watered and produce considerable quan-

tities of wheat and other grain.

LUNDs.

The Lund tribe like the Mutkanis are wholly in the plains, and

adjoin them to the south. They cultivate the lands from near the

foot of the hills at the Stirf pass to round about Pir Amdani, their

principal town, Kot Kundah, Shadun, Ramun, Guman, Kala, ete.

The lands towards the river Indus are generally held by either

Hinditis, Suyeds or Jatts. Those belonging to the Lunds depend

wholly on rain and the water of their ponds for irrigation, but they

always manage some how or other to keep their lands in cultivation.

From the Suri pass to near the Black Range, a distance of eighteen

or twenty miles, there is no land fit for agricultural purposes, and it

is therefore generally uninhabited. The Jélalani Bozdars dwell

about the high range on the western slope to the amount of about

three hundred families. They follow agriculture, and dwell in small

walled villages called Kotlahs. The cultivation is scanty and de-

pends on rain to bring the crops to perfection. A portion of the

Luni Afghans occupy two walled villages in Kotlahs a short dis-

tance to the west of the Boadars.

Inside the Suri pass there is a lake said to be four or five miles

in extent, containing hot water that is constantly running or in

motion, aud the peculiar phenomenon respecting which is, that the

mineral water rises in waves or eddies which again almost imme-

diately disappear. The pass belongs to the Lunds, and the valley

appears to be uninhabited.

The chief of the Lunds is Fazal Ali Khan; and the tribe, which

is quiet and easily managed, can muster about 1500 adult males.

They have the Mutkani tribe on the north, the Bozdars and

192 Account of the Lower Derazat. [No. 38.

Hudiani Lagharis on the west in the hills, the Khosahs to the

south, and Suyeds, Jatts, and Hindaés towards the Indus on the

east.

Knosaus.

South of the Lunds in the Derdjaét are the Khosahs, who are

acknowledged to be the bravest of the whole of the Beltchis.

They have the name of being great thieves, but they are really

no worse than their neighbours. I believe a deal of rascality carried

on by the Lagharis, has from time to time been unjustly laid at

the door of the Khosahs. They are a powerful tribe, when their

bravery is taken into account, being able to muster 1600 or 1800

men; but they are split into three divisions, of whom Kourah

Khan, Azim Khan, and Khan Muhammad respectively are the

chiefs. The former, the real and rightful head of the Khosah tribe,

is a fine old fellow, who rendered good service to the British

during the rebellion of the incorrigible Multanis, at the outset of

which, (and not when it was found that the enemy was the losing

side,) he joined the force of Lieutenant H. B. Edwards and the Seikh

Colonel Cortlandt, bringing with him about a thousand of his

clan. He enjoys, in comparison with some of the Multani Patans,

(who only deserted Mulraj at the last hour,) but a small pension for

his faithful services. His son, however, holds the rank of Ressal-

dar in the Derajat Mounted Police.

The Khosahs are with few exceptions, wholly in the plains. They

are at enmity with the Lagharis and Bozdar clans but are on

friendly terms with the Khetrans, whose chief Mir Hadji is

connected with the Khosah chief by marriage, having espoused,

I believe, a daughter of Kourah Khan’s. When the late Diwdn

Mulraj defeated the Khetraus in their own fastnesses, this chief

made influence for himself with the Diwan through Kourah Khan. |

The next valley or cluster of valleys, to the south of that of Suri

held by the Lunds just described, is known by the names of Matti

Kaleri, Sur, and Reh-karrn, from four small streams flowing through

them from north to south, and close to the skirt of the hills.

About one hundred and twenty of the Khosah tribe dwell in this

valley or valleys, which contain springs of salt and brackish water.

The Bozdars of the Mahoey, or Mohey-walé clan dwell in the

1857. | Account of the Lower Derajat. 193

higher ranges of the Black mountains parallel to these valleys,

and the Gulamani Bezdars round about it and lower down on the

western slope facing the Afghan country. Streams and rivulets

are numerous in this direction, and juwar, makai, and wheat are

produced in some quantities, together with a little cotton sufficient

for home consumption. The principal trees are the Zaittin or

wild olive and the Pulah.

There is a road through this valley to the Afghan country which

is practicable for camels, and water is procurable at each stage. It,

however, leads into the pass through the Black Range in the Bozdar

country already described ; and as the Bozdars hold the principal and

more difficult defiles of the passes leading into it, they are able to

throw obstacles in the way. Beyond the Black Range to the west,

in this direction, there is a level tract of country, or large open

valley, as it may be more properly termed, about ten miles in breadth

belonging to the Lini and Kakarr Afghans already referred to. Be-

yond this the hills again rise, but they are not nearly so lofty as

those to the east.

South of the valley and pass just described are the small Darrahs

of Ghazi, Sata’1, Beh-lab, Kéhbi, Sari, and Ghdman, so called from the

small streams flowing through them, which, at a short distance from

the hills, are wholly lost or expended in the irrigation of the lands.

Six hundred Khosahs cultivate those spots close up to the foot of

the hills, which are within the Yard Batil village bounds. From this

to the eastern slope of the Black Range distant about twenty-five

miles, the country is totally uninhabited, but the western slopes are

held by the Khetrans. There are no roads fit for beasts of burthen

through these small valleys, and, even for men on foot, the defiles

leading into the great route are difficult in the extreme.

- Next in succession south are the small valleys of Sufaidd,

Kari or Gari, Sdr and Réey, all of which are within the Yari

Batil boundary. The Khosahs in this direction acknowledge Khan

Muhammad and Khuda Baksh as their headmen. About six

hundred of the tribe cultivate the lands close to these Darrahs,

which are very small and distant one or two miles from each other.

There are springs of water in the valleys of Sufaidi, Stir, and

Kari, but in the latter is a mineral spring, the water of which is

2 0

194 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [No. 3.

extremely bitter. A few families of the Chandiah and Shahani

Bozdars dwell between these valleys and the Siah Koh, or Black

Range. The former live by plunder alone, but the latter have some

eattle, and they cultivate about a hundred acres of land, which is

irrigated from the streams rising in the mountains just mentioned.

Next in rotation are the small villages of Dalanah, Zai, and Sab-

ku-ah, the only one of which containing a pass of any consequence

is the former, held by the Khosahs under Azim Khan, six hundred

of whom dwell close to the skirt of the hills, and about forty fami-

lies within the valley itself. They keep goats and buffaloes. There

are a few date trees in this valley which are considered great

rarities by the Beluchis. From this madd, awl, or camp, within the

Darrah to the Black Range is about twenty-one miles, the whole of

whicl: space is covered with lofty and rugged mountains over which

there are no roads, and which men on foot can, with difficulty, pene-

trate. There area number of the Laghari tribe, who adjoin the

Khosahs on the south, settled near Dalanah village. Beyond the

Sf4h Koh parallel to these valleys are the Khetrans who occupy a

very large tract of country, and beyond these again the Afghans,

and further south the Murris.

The most important Darrahs within the Khosah bounds have now

been mentioned, but the Khosahs likewise hold all the country at

the foot of the hills from the Ghuzi pass north to Dalanah south.

These lands depend entirely on the quantity of water of the mountain

streams, with that collected in the different ponds, and from the

occasional rains, for irrigation; and in seasons of drought the

Khosahs are under’the necessity of deserting them for other lands

nearer to Dera Ghazi Khan. Some of the tribe are graziers and

have numerous flocks. They are bounded north by the Lunds,

aud south and west by the Lagharis. ‘Their chief villages are Yara

and Batil, besides several smaller hamlets.

LAGHARIs.

The Laghari tribe dwell partly in the Derajat, from the village of

Choti Pé’in to the foot of the hills, and partly in the mountains.

Pheir chief villages are Widor, Sukhi-Surwar, Choti Bala, and

Choti Pé’in. They are powerful in point of numbers and can mus-

1857. ] Account of the Lower Derijat. 195

ter to the amount of two thousand adult males, but they are not

held in much estimation for their bravery, and are notorious

thieves, but exceedingly sly ones for Belichis, indeed they may be

termed the foxes of Roh. Their chiefs Jell4él Khan and Jemal

Khan, who receive a pension from Government, or some money

allowance, which is just the same, not long since were all and every

thing with the Local authority, but lately their power appears to

have been on the decline. They were engaged in the Multan

rebellion, and like the Multéni Patans, who first fomented it and

made Diwan Mulraj their tool, were one of the mainstays of the

rebels, until they discovered that the Diwan’s was the losing side.

The Lagharis, however, although they at last left Mulraj, connot be

accused of treachery and falsehood, which appears exclusively an

accomplishment, or part of the nature I may say, of the Patans

of Multan, for the former did not desert to the enemy for the sake

of the loaves and fishes as the latter did.

The Laghari tribe hold the Darrahs and passes of Widor, Sukhi

Surwar, and Choti. The former is so called from the large village

of that name about sixteen miles west of Dera Ghazi Khan, and

eight or nine miles from the skirt of the first range of hills. It is

the principal village of the Laghari tribe, but the Widor pass itself

is within the bounds of the village of Beylah, of which Miran

Laghariis the headman. ‘Two hundred of the tribe cultivate lands

close to the entrance of this valley, which is itself held by the

Hudiaéni branch of the tribe, who, to the number of five hundred

families, are. dispersed in small hamlets or awls between this

valley and those on the eastern side of the Black Range. The

Hudianis are arrant robbers, extending their depredations both

to the property of the Afghans to the west of the mountains and

to the Derajat to the east; all is fish that falleth within their net.

The valley contains some springs of pure water, which is also

abundant from this to the Afghan country. At the hamlet or aw of

Hudiani further up the valley, there are numerous Shishum trees.

The road through the pass is practicable for beasts of burthen as far

asthe high range, but the defile leading over it is in the Khetran

country, and is so narrow that one person can scarcely pass.

South of Widor is the pass of Sukhi-Surwar, so called from the

2c 2

196 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [ No. 3.

town and shrine of a Muhammadan Pir or saint bearing that name.

The town and shrine are built on a spur from the lowest range of

hills, beneath which, to the north, is the stony bed of atorrent or

mountain stream, but it is always dry save after heavy falls of rain in

the mountains. The Majawirs or attendants at the shrine cultivate

a small quantity of laud, which is dependent on the same sources

of irrigation as other lands already described. The people are

supplied with water, black and foetid in smell, from the sandy

bed of the torrent above mentioned, at a place three miles up the

defile through which it findsits way, in which large holes called

wells are dug, and on this supply they wholly depend. The hasty

sketch which accompanies this paper shows the entrance to the

defile referred to, and will give some idea of the style of country

and scenery.

The country between this town and the Black Range is generally

mountainous in the extreme, but here and there patches of available

land are to be met with.

The Sukhi-Surwar pass is the direct route to Kandahar through

the district of Tall and the Pishin valley; and in Akbar’s time

couriers are said to have been in the habit of reaching Multan

from that city in six days. Water is plentiful along the whole

line of road, which is not only practicable for loaded camels, but

for artillery also, or at the worst could be made so very easily,

for there are.no great natural obstructions to prevent it. I have

already given an account of the town and shrine in an article which

appeared in a former number of the Journal of the Asiatic Society

of Bengal for September, 1855. ‘The town and pass both belong to

the Lagharis.

There are several smaller valleys to the south of Sukhi-Surwar,

viz., Ghazi-wdr, Kun-hi-war, Sufaid Ghari, Khatti, and the Kaha

or Harrand pass, including that of Choti, so called after the village

of Choti Bala, or Higher Choti, situated close up with the hills,

but they are all within a few miles of each other, and of little

consequence. ‘They are mostly uninhabited, and are very similar

to those already noticed.

I was informed by Jellal Laghari, who visited me whilst at Sukhi-

Surwar in April 1853, that at the distance of a day’s march inside

1857. | Account of the Lower Derajat. 197

the lower range of hills, through rather a difficult country, he

possesses a tract of table-land of some considerable extent, well

wooded and further adorned with a fine lake. He told me that

he usually retired to this place with his family in the hot season ;

and he spoke in high terms of its beauties, of its climate, and of

its fruits, some of the grapes from which I have often tasted. He

promised to take me to this pleasant spot, this Roh Felix, if I

could obtain leave of absence for that purpose, but I soon after left

the Derajat and lost the opportunity, of which I was most anxious

to avail myself. A locality of this kind, within reasonable distance,

and in the country of a friendly tribe, would be a highly desirable

place for a little recreation and cool air in the hot months, for

Europeans condemned to broil at Asuni and Dera Ghazi Khan.

The Lagharis are bounded on the south by the Gurchahis, and

west by the Khetrans, to give some account of whom and of whose

country, we must for a time leave the Derajat and proceed west,

before describing the valleys and passes further tothe south.

KHETRANS.

The Khetréns are a numerous and powerful tribe occupying a

tract of country east and west of the Suliman or Black Range,

about sixty miles in width and eighty in length from north to

south, and extending from the parallel of the Suri Darrah of the

Lund tribe to the boundary of the Murri country, the most

southern portion of the Highlands of Beldchistan on the north-east.

The chief of the Khetrans is Mir Hadji Khan, who can muster a

force of 3,000 fighting men including about 1,000 horsemen. They

reside generally in small forts or walled villages called Kotlahs.

Their country is well-watered and temperate, and they cultivate

a quantity of grain of which wheat,and makia (Indian corn) appear

to be the staple kinds, together with a small quantity of cotton

sufficient for home consumption. They also possess numerous herds of

camels and other cattle, and flocks of sheep and goats. On the

west they are neighbours to the Luniand Kakarr Afghans; on the

north to the Musa Khel Kakarrs and the Bozdars ; on the south to

the Murris; and on the east to the Lagharis and Gurchanis.

The Khetran country is distant about thirty-five or forty miles

198 Account of the Lower Derijat. [No. 3.

from the banks of the Indus, and about half that distance from

the first or lower chain of hills) The Black Range here aver-

ages about nine miles in width from east to west, with a belt in the

centre from one and ahalf to three miles in breadth, and from which

the highest peaks shoot up. ‘This is the most rugged portion of the

whole, and correctly speaking, forms the true boundary of Siwistan

on the east and south. There are many level spots capable of cul-

tivation watered by numerous small streams, which, after heavy

rains, increase considerably in volume. Those rising on the eastern

slope of the Suliman Range in some instances find their way into

the plains of the Derajat, and those on the western slope flow in

that direction, fertilizing the country in their track.

That part of the high range which is inhabited by the Khetraus

runs almost due north and south like the more northern portion ;

but a short distance to the south of the parallel of Dera Ghazi

Khan, in 30° of north latitude, it makes a bend towards the west

for about fifty miles, and then runs at nearly right angles from

east to west towards Dadur at the entrance of the Bolan Pass.

In this lengthy valley, formed by the southern slope of the Black

tiange just referred te, and the northern slope of the Surukh Range

which runs parallel to it to the south, lies the fort and town of

Kahun, so famous for its defence during the Afghan war; and in

the latter range the equally famous Nufdsk Pass, from which the

Jate Major Clibborn and his troops were forced to retire after severe

loss in attempting to relieve that post. The westerly bend of both

ranges is held by the Murri tribe and both are generally known as

the Kahun Hills.

The road from Multan to Kandahar by the Bolan, lies through the

Harrand pass to Kahun, which I shall have occasion to refer to

again in a future paragraph.

The Khetrans are on friendly terms with the Khosahs and the

Lagharis, but are at feud with the Luni Afghans, the Bozdars, and

the Murris.

So lately as July 1855, the Hamzahzai and Musa Khel clans of the

Liini and Kakarr Afehaus, made a raid on the lands of the Khetrans

and Hudiani Lagharis and carried off a number of their cattle after

killing seventeen of the latter. The assailants, however, were pur-

1857. | Account of the Lower Deréjat. 199

sued by the Khetrans, and Lagharis, who mustered to the number

of two thousand. They came up with them before they could

succeed in reaching their own strongholds, and rescued the cattle

after a severe skirmish, in which the Afghans are said to have lost

one hundred and sixty men killed and wounded.

GuRCHANIS.

The tribe to the south of the Lagharis are the Gurchanis, the

chief of whom Hyder Khan holds an appointment in the Derajat

mounted Police, and enjoys Kustér and Barat tees or assignments

on the lands. The tribe is divided into three septs—the Lasharis,

Durkanis, and Chachris, which are again subdivided into several smal-

ler clans, who altogether can muster at least two thousand adult

males. About one half the tribe are shepherds and graziers and

dwell in the hills, the remainder cultivate the lands in the vicinity

of the fort and town of Harrand, the former of which was built

to keep them in awe, as well as to defend the pass leading by Kahun,

Siri, Bagh, Dadur and the Bolan Pass, to Quettah or Shawl and

Kandahar. Their chief villages are Lal-gurh, Chutt, Thall Wuzar,

and Pitafi. They hold the different minor Darrahs from that of

Chott of the Lagharis, as far south as the valley and pass of Chachur,

which together with those of Khatti, Kaha or Harrand, and the

pass of Khalgerey, are the furthest to the south, and the most im-

portant of the whole.

The lands within the Kaha or Harrand pass are cultivated by

the Gurchanis. They are well-watered by a stream running

through the valley, which also supplies the ¢upah or plain on which

Harrand stands.

The Chachar valley contains a mineral spring and a little sweet

water, but it is totally uninhabited, and is chiefly remarkable on

account of the great road to Quettah or Shawl by Kahun and

Dadur which runs through it. It is practicable for beasts of

burthen, but I am informed that it is not so good a road as that

through the Suri valley further south. The different encamping

or halting grounds by this route are ;—I1st, To Mini, 12 miles;

water bad, and quite hot. 2nd, To Tobah, 12 miles; excellent

water. 3rd, To Gond, 12 miles; hot and brackish water. 4th, To

200 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [ No. 3.

Kattar Pahar, the boundary of the Gurchani country, 15 miles ;

water good. The next six stages lead through the Murri country,

atter which the territory of the Khan of Khelat is entered.

DRisHAKS.

The tribe next to the Gurchanis to the south, are the Drishaks,

who are very peaceably inclined, but much bullied by the Gurchanis.

They are pretty powerful in point of numbers, and can muster

2,000 adult males, or even more. The chief is named Bakshan

Khan who receives some Kusir fees, and their chief village is Asuni,

at which a strong detachment of the Punjab Irregular Force igs

stationed, consisting of halfa Light Field Battery of three guns;

a Regiment of Cavalry; and a wing of an Infantry Corps. The

other larger villages are Bagh, Rajunptr, and Fazilpir. The Dri-

shaks are bounded on the west by the Bughtis and Gurchanis in the

hills, and on the south by the Mazaris in the Derdjat.

As we proceed further south the dreariness of this inhos-

pitable region increases, and the country for many miles, both in

the Derajat and in the hills, is a howling wilderness. The first

Darrah or valley south of Chachur, the most southern in the Gur-

chant country, is that of Fujri, through which a road leads into

the great route to Afghanistan by Tall and Chotfali. The valley

is quite sandy, but on the southern side the dreariness is somewhat

relieved by a few trees. From this to the Gurchduf country, a

distance of about thirty miles, the whole space is without inhabi-

tants and without cultivation.

Four miles and a half south of the preceding is the valley of

Baghari with a pass, which also leads into the great route to the

Afghan country by Tall and Chotiali. Like the preceding it is

sandy and unfit for cultivation. It has a few trees, but is uninha-

bited. From the skirt of these hills towards the east, the nearest

inhabited spot within the British territory is the village of Futtih-

pur distant six miles, where a few of the Drig tribe are located.

The valley of Jehazigi or Jehazki is six miles further to the south.

A road winds through it leading into the great road from Harrand

but it is difficult and very heavy in many places from the sandy

nature of the soil. It is uninhabited, and there are no signs of

a eS

1857.] Account of the Lower Derijdt. 201

cultivation near it fora number of miles in the direction of the

Indus. The valley itself is thirty miles distant from the high

range, which in this direction is inhabited by the Gurchanis.

Next in rotation comes the Thok valley, distant four or five miles

from the preceding. The whole distance from this to the Black

Range is mountainous and sandy with a few stunted trees and

shrubs scattered here and there. Water is also very scarce, and

even when procurable it is exceedingly bitter. Abont twenty-five

miles to the west of this valley there is a village belonging to the

Gurchani tribe called Mani or Marri, inhabited by about three

hundred people, who are mostly shepherds. ‘There is no cultivation

in the British territory to the east nearer than the village of

Gamu, a distance of nineteen miles, containing five hundred in-

habitants chiefly of the Drig clan.

A few of the principal stages by the road through this valley to

the Afghan country by way of Tall and Chotiali, are: 1st, To Makari

12 miles, where there are a number of shady ‘trees, but the water

is bitter. From thence to Phora Phatt 17 miles, where there is

excellent water to be procured, and several shady trees. The next

stage is Phala Wagh, about the same distance as the last stage

and possessing similar advantages. The next journey brings the

traveller to Lassi 12 miles, which has no particular advantages

as a halting-ground; and from thence to Baki or Bari Khan in

the Khetran country, a distance of 19 miles, from whence a long

march of about 30 miles brings you to Kholo or Kaholo, where

the water is pure and abundant, and shady trees are available.

The Chak or Chag valley and pass is three miles from that of Thok,

and the country as far as the Black Range, a distance of nearly

40 miles or more, is uninhabited. The valley contains nothing

but sand and a few stunted shrubs, indeed sand and rocks appear

to be the principal,if not the only variations of the landscape

in this part of the Derdjat. From this Darrah a road leads to

the village of Kot Isl4m Khan, the head-quarters of the Bughti

tribe, which is parallel to the Siri Darrah further south. But the

whole country between is a perfect desert, without inhabitants or

sign of cultivation. The nearest inhabited spot in the direction

of the Indus, is the village of Kadirah belonging to the Mazari tribe,

“nd thirty miles distant. 2D

202 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [ No. 3.

As we proceed further south from Mittunkot, the breadth of the

belt of cultivation gradually decreases, until at the village of Rojan

it does not extend more than two or three miles from the western

bank of the Indus.

The valley of Chak and those valleys which follow, are parallel to

the lands cultivated by the Mazari tribe in the Derajat, and to the

Murri and Bughti country to the west, but, as already remarked, for

several miles in breadth the country at the foot of the lower

range of hills, and for a considerable distance inside, is totally

uninhabited and generally without water; and these obstacles

alone tend as much, if not more, to restrain the Murris and

Bughtis from making raids in large bands on our frontier in this

direction, than the few troops scattered along it at great distances

from each other, as the latter have, on more than one oceasion, found

to their cost. It is impossible for a large body of men, particularly

horsemen, which form the principal strength of the Belichis on such

occasions, to subsist within these hills or even in the valleys at

the skirt of them, which they would naturally do in all probability

to wait for a favourable opportunity to pounce upon their prey. Small

parties, however, do make their appearance occasionally in the

Mittunkot district, and I recollect that in the hot season of 1853,

they passed the line of frontier posts without being discovered

for some time, and although subsequently pursued, they succeed-

ed in carrying off some cattle and cutting up some of the pursuers.

MazAris.

The Mazéris who occupy this part of the Derajat are a numerous

tribe containing about 4000 adult males, of whom Dost Ali, and

Mahabat Khan are the chiefs. There are about eight hundred

(Soolais) located at Kusmore, the most northern village of Upper

Sindh. The remainder of the tribe is distributed from the village

of Bhdgré downwards, and are all in the plains. They receive half

the revenue imaam or rent free. They are bounded on the west

by the Bughtis, south by the Brahtis, and north by the Drishaks.

The next valley south of Chak is that of Gaéndrisi from which

it is distant about three miles. Like the others south of Cha-

chur, it is without inhabitants, but it contains several warm

1857. | Account of the Lower Derddt. 203

mineral springs, as also a little drinking water and a few trees.

The pass through it leads into the Khorasan route, but itis difficult.

It is about fifty miles from this to the Black Range, and to Hasan Shah

ke Kotlah, the nearest hamlet in the British territory, which is

peopled by a few Suyeds, is a distance of thirty miles. |

As we proceed further south the country becomes more broken,

and the lower range is not so well defined as hitherto, being in

many places much lower than that which we have passed on our

way south. The first valley south of Gandrdsi is called Tahani

from a small river flowing through it, which rises on the western

slope of mount Gendari (referred to in a subsequent paragraph)

and is distant from the last valley nine miles. It can scarcely

be called a valley, for the ground all round is very much broken,

and rises on all sides, in mounds and bluffs which are generally

of considerable height. There is a road through it along the

stony banks of the river when full, and along its bed when its

waters have somewhat subsided. It crosses the Harrand route,

and enters that leading into the Afghan country through Tall

and Chotiali, but it is difficult and tedious. The Black Range

is thirty miles distant from this Darrah and the nearest village to

the east is Badli belonging to the Mazaris, distant eighteen miles.

The Zangi Darrah, so-called from a river of this name rising

on the eastern slope of Mount Gendari, which forms the pivot, if

I may be allowed to use a military expression, on which the Surikh

Range turns directly west, and at right angles to its former di-

rection. It proceeds thus for about sixty or sixty-five miles,

and parallel to the Black Range on the north in its bend to the

west, the two forming a long and extensive valley which runs up

almost to Sarwod to the north of Lehriin Kutch Gandawah, and

in which, about half way up, ies Kuthun the chief town of the

Murris. The Pass of Nufisk is in the southern or Surtikh Range.

The Zingi valley, which is very stony and much broken, contains

but one small hamlet belonging to the Bughtis named Alf Khan,

and the only water procurable in the valley is bitter. The road

leading through it is steep and difficult for some distance, but im-

proves as the traveller proceeds westwards to Kahun, which is

eight stages distant from this valley. The different halting-places

2D 2

204 Account of the Lower Derdat. [No. 3.

are; Ist, Thak, a distance of ten miles, where water is abundant, and

several Zaitun or wild olive and Kahor trees afford shelter; 2nd,

to Nathal, about eleven miles ; water procurable, and a few trees ;

3rd, to Burbur, or Barbur distant twelve miles; trees and water ;

4th, to Thari or Tthari, twelve miles; trees and water as at last

halting-ground ; 5th, to Marti or Murti, twelve miles; water pro-

curable ; 6th, to Paétur (on the Jlassi river, of Walker’s map) on

the banks of the Siri river, a distance of thirteen miles, water and

trees; 7th, Kéla Pani, eleven miles; trees and good water; 8th,

to Kahun a distance of thirteen miles.

Four miles to the south of the Darrah just described, is that of

Jidri, which contains a few trees. Water is also procurable in

small quantities. It is exceedingly sandy and mountainous, and

is uninhabited. The road through it joins the Kéhun route, and

is steep and difficult in many places.

The next and last Darrah in the Dera Ghazi Khan district is.

that of Stiri, so called from the river of this name which rises in the

Dubb hills, a little to the west of Mount Gendari, and is about

twenty miles from Kot Islam Khan, the principal village of the

Bughtis, which is situated at the foot of the hills. There is a

spring of pure water in the valley, and several jal, si-dh, and mu-

ghel trees. Towards the east it is uninhabited, but further up the

valley there are a few small awis or hamlets belonging to the

Bughti tribe. The road winds along the banks of the river, and

sometimes through its bed, but like all similar routes it is tedious

and steep in many places. Itis quite practicable for camels and

horses, but not for wheeled carriages, though on the whole it is

the best road south of the pass of Sukhi Surwar. The village of

Shdhwalf containing about six hundred inhabitants of the Mazari

tribe, is nine miles from the entrance of this valley in the direction

of the Indus.

Murris.

The Murri tribe holds the mountainous country commencing from

a few miles to the west of the Surikh Koh or Red Range, which

with its Darrahs from Fujri south, have, with the exception of

those of Zangi and Suri, been mentioned as generally very sandy,

1857.] Account of the Lower Derijat. 205

stony in many places, and uninhabited as far as the southern slopes

of the Black Range, to the north of which the Murris are bounded

by the Kakarr and Luni Afghans ; and westward towards Dadur at

the entrance of the Bolan pass. They are bounded on the north

by the Khetrans, and Lagharis, and south by the Bughtis and

Brahtis. Their chief town is Kéhun already referred to.

The Murris are a powerful tribe, and their present chief Din

Muhammad Khan, can bring 3,000 of his clansmen into the field at

any time, about one-third of whom are well mounted on the hardy

horses of the country. They make occasional raids into the Mit-

tunkot district, but in very small numbers, although as I have

before remarked, merely restrained from undertaking greater ex-

peditions in the same direction by the inhospitable nature of

the country, where water is exceedingly scarce and only procu-

rable even in moderate quantities at certain places, and where food,

both for man and beast, has to be carried with them.

BueGutis.

The last tribe remaining to be noticed as appertaining to this

imperfect sketch of Roh and its people, are the Bughtis, robbers

more notorious even than their neighbours the Brahtis. They

acknowledge Islam Khan and Daria Khan as their chiefs, the latter,

however, has but little power. Although the Bughtis have been

much broken up by Sindh policy, and a large number to the amount

of about 12,000 have been settled in and around Larkhanah in that

province, yet they still can bring together, in case of necessity,

some 4,000 adult males. They pay little or no attention to hus-

bandry, and mainly depend on plunder for subsistence. Within

the last few years two hundred families of the tribe under Daria

Khan the partner in the chieftainship, have joined the Murris.

When Lieutenant R. Young of the Bengal Engineers, who was

employed in a civil capacity before the annexation of the Panjab,

went into the Lower Derajét in 1849, to settle the lands of the

Drishaks and other tribes, three hnndred of the Bughtis became

desirous of turning their swords into reaping-hooks, and waited on

that Officer along with Gourah, the brother of Daria Khan above

mentioned, and requested that a portion of land might be allotted

206 Account of the Lower Derdjat. [No. 8.

to them, but taeir reasonable request, from what cause does not ap-

pear, was not complied with.

It was whilst in this vicinity, that Lieutenant Young penetrated

into the hills as far as the mountain of Gendari, and made a rough

survey, the sketch of which I have embodied in the map accom-

panying* this paper, and for which, as well as other information

on the present subject, I am much indebted to him.

Before bringing this paper to a close 1 must not forget to offer a

few remarks regarding the former trade of the Derajat, which has

now greatly or almost wholly declined. During the energetic rule

Sawan Mall and Diwan Mulraj his son, to whose government of

Multan the present district of Dera Ghazi Khan was attached,

the Afghan merchants used to pass through the latter district by

way of Harrand, Sukhi Surwar, and Sanghar to Multan, because

the customs duties were much lower than in the sister Dera; for

their proper route, or that generally adopted, lay through Dera

Ismazil Khan and Leia to Multan, from whence a few passed down

to Sindh. They arrived in October and November, and returned

again in April, taking back indigo, chintzes, white cotton cloths,

shoes, and weapons, particularly shields from Derad Ghazi Khan,

which appear to have been held in considerable repute. The chief

imports were gur (a coarse kind of sugar), some intoxicating drugs;

and small quantities of barak, a cloth made from camels’ hair, and

the fine wool or pashm of Afghanistan, and small quantities of fruit,

chiefly dry. Other Caravans or Kafilahs which came from Kan-

dahér by Quettah or Shawl, and the Pishin valley by way of Har-

rand, used to bring down very fine oxen for the Seikh artillery and

for general sale, together with goats, a few sheep, horses, carpets,

and dates of a superior quality. These again used to take home with

them, quantities of silks, white and colored cotton cloths, shoes, steel

goods, and other articles, but they have, since the annexation of

the Panjdb, been stopped by the robber tribes of Roh, who used to

receive handsome presents from the Nazims of Multan as the price

of forbearance. The transit duties now are insignificant.

* This map has not been received.—ED.

1857. | On a new species of Lagomys. 207

On a new Lagomys and a new Mustela inhabiting the north region

of Sikim and the proximate parts of Tibet—By B. H. Honason,

Hisq., B. C. 8S.

T have just obtained from the northern region of the Sikim Hi-

malaya and the proximate part of Tibet some fine Mammal spe-

cimens, among which are two species which seem to me new, and the

rather in that I have several samples of each species in very fine

condition inclusive of the sculls. I subjoin a summary description

of both.

Mustela Témon, nob.

Témon of the Tibetans.

This species is 93 inches long from snout to vent and the tail is

63 more. . Its fur is short, soft and straight, being scarcely longer

on the tailthan onthe body. The colour is, above and laterally,

with the entire tail, brunnescent fawn; below, entirely pale pure

yellow save the head and margin of the upper lip, which, as well as

the limbs, are canescent ; the last, however, with more or less of a

brownish tint to the front or externally. The tailis 2 the length of

the animal. The fur is $ of an inch long and very fine. The di-

mensions are as follows:

Ser aMat UO WOU cae atau niclctolniateg own clef. ese) Oy Wer Se

MAMI OLS ak oleh sks ide play oe 0 2 0

oeame ait Pairs. cae sok een Jeu, Seo) er

Seem escrito eos RS Me ee ee Oe eS

Pear Sato. ses Md Sik Oh ONS

Penna Nate Wiles eet ioe ne ee bet

Pam arma Nasle!)) Seat ua eee ot On Do Se

Lagomys Curzoniz, nob.

Abra of the Tibetans.

My specimens were procured in the district of Chumbi. They

are three in number and in fine preservation and high state of fur,

They are quite alike in size and colour and demonstrably mature

from the state of the teeth. They measure 7} inches from snout

208 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. _[No. 3.

to vent and are of a murine fulvous colour, paling and canescent

below and on the extremities. The fur is exceedingly soft, full, and

smooth of two sorts, or woolly and hairy, but both of silken deli-

cacy, internally dark slaty blue, externally fawn colour, more or

less obscured and darkened by the internal colour. The dimensions

are as follows:

Snows Corveniye se PRS AS eS

ead, Woe. Haas Sin RRR Tee.

ara, Peet te 0. Dee Te ey ee lore ale

SHOUb WOCVE, cc se ec ee a erates ca tenes ae ee

aE UONEDL oy osc ina Ce RI eS gaan wea

60:66:55 2

FProOoOorFRN

Palmarand Waris, .'s 05's a. ce ss «ates See

Planta sat Niwity Bie Nae Ot

This beautiful little animal is heeds dedicated to the

Hon’ble Mrs. Curzon.

Darjiling, April, 1857,

BIH ole OD ax Alto Aloo tole

OPPO INP ILL I POL LLIN II NIN LA SEP LP PL

Report on the Proceedings of the Officers engaged in the Magnetic

Survey of India.—By Rosrert ScuuaGintweit, Hsq.

GENERAL OUTLINE OF THE ROUTE.

I left Rawul Pindi in the Punjab accompanied by Mr. Monteiro

and the draftsman, Eleazar Daniel, on the 18th December, 1856, and

travelled by Chukowal and across the Salt Range to Pind Dadan

Khan.

I passed through the Salt Range by slow marches, which enabled

me to examine its remarkable structure and I made a halt at

Keurah, one of the principal Salt Mines, which gave me the oppor-

tunity of visiting the Mines and taking a series of observations

in them.

Through the kind assistance of C. C. Smyth, Esq. Deputy Col-

lector, at Newrah, I succeeded in making in a short time a pretty

complete collection of the different kinds of Salts and Fossils.

From Pind Dadan Khan I continued my journey across the

different Doabs of the Punjab by Shapore and Jhung to Mooltan,

where I arrived on the 4th of Jaunary, 1857.

1857.| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 209

I remained there till the 12th January, chiefly occupied with

Magnetic and Meteorological observations. Excursions were made

to the old bed of the Ravi and to the Chenab, where I made de-

tailed hydrographical observations.

I proceeded from Mooltan across the Ghara or Sutlej to Bhawl-

pore and by Ahmedpore to Khanpore.

On this journey I had the opportunity of examining the borders

of the desert which advances close to the Sutlej and to the Indus.

Having made from Chanpore an excursion to Mithancote on the

right shore of the Indus, and returned to Khanpore, I marched by

Naushera and Subgilcote to Sukkur in Upper Sind.

There and in its environs, (at Shikarpore) I remained six days,

partly engaged in packing the collections made during my journey

in the Punjab, partly in taking a series of observations.

I left Shikarpore on the 17th February, 1857, and travelled by

Sarkhana to Sewan along the right side of the Indus.

After having visited and examined the Hills near Sehwan, the

hot springs at Sukki and the Manehar lake, I followed the Hill road

by Chorla and Dumach to Kurrachi, which I reached on the 22nd

February.

In Kurrachi all my collections (23 boxes) were carefully packed

and arrangements made for their being shipped to Bombay.

Departing from Kurrachi on the 1st March I went by Satta and

Mugribi across the delta of the Indus and across a portion of the

run to Subput in Kutch and on the 14th of March arrived by

Khora and Nukatranha at Bhooj, the capital of Kutch.

During my journeys I was accompanied by Mr. Monteiro and

the draftsman Eleazar Daniel, (guide in the Quarter Master Ge-

neral’s Department, Bombay,) formerly in my brother’s establish-

ment.

Mr. Monteiro was sent by me ina boat from Pind Dadan Khan

to Mooltan and then to Sukkur and Kurrachi.

Besides making collections of Natural History he took very good

hydrographical and meteorological observations with the instru-

ments I had entrusted to him.

Eleazar Daniel, the draftsman, travelling constantly with me, was

of great assistance in taking and completing observations, and

210 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 3.

I beg to bring to the notice of Government the many and important

services which Mr. Monteiro as well as Eleazar Daniel have rendered

to my brothers and myself during more than two successive years.

Throughout my journeys during the past cold season I was most

obligingly assisted by all the officers in the different stations, so

that I was able to carry on my operations without any delay and

to collect much valuable information and scattered observations.

I intend to leave Bhooj on the 17th March and to proceed by

Rajkote and through Kattewar to Surat and Bombay, which I shall

leave by the end of April so as to return to Europe in conformity

with communications made to Government when leaving Rawul

Pindi.

MaGnetic OBSERVATIONS.

I was provided during my journeys with an universal Mag-

netometer, by Barrow, with which, however, only the declination and

vibration could be ascertained with that accuracy and precision,

which these delicate observations require.

My Magnetometer had been carefully compared at Rawul Pindi

with the larger instruments of my brothers; but the absolute

values though easily ascertained by a repeated comparison and by

detailed calculations cannot be given at present with the full

details.

The declination and horizontal intensity have been observed at

the following localities :—

1. Shapore. 4, Sehwan.

2. Mooltan. 5. Kurrachi.

3. Shikarpore. 7 6. Bhooj.

Before my departure another set will be made at Bombay for

comparison with the Bombay Observatory.

METEOROLOGY.

Besides the daily registering of the temperature of the air, (dry

and wet bulb) and the pressure of the air, whilst on the march, and

a longer series of observations in all places where I halted for some

time, particular attention was paid to the following phenomena :—

1. Dew.—The quantity of dew which fell at night time was

directly and carefully measured in many localities by exposing and

1857.] Report on the Progress of the Magnetie Survey. 211

weighing paper boxes filled with grass, sand and wool as described

in a former Report. ‘The increase of dew the more I went to

the South was very considerable; repeated observations in the

same places enabled me to ascertain also the variations of the

quantity of dew.

There is very little variation in the daily fall of dew in the

Northern parts of the Punjab, but in localities close to the sea

the variations were very great and even remarkable without direct

weighing. The greatest variations of the fall of dew I observed near

Kurrachi, where in one night scarcely any dew fell, whilst in the

next the fall was excessive, although both nights were equally

clear and serene.

2.—Minimum temperature of the air.

I was particularly interested to see at what time the minimum

temperature of the air before sunrise takes place, and to enable

me to fix the time of the minimum temperature with certainty, a

thermometer was carefully put up and read from 5 to 5 in minutes,

the observations being begun long before sunrise.

In the Punjab and in Upper Sind, during December and January,

the minimum temperature took place generally 30 or 35 minutes

before sunrise and this temperature was exceedingly well-defined,

never lasting more than a few minutes (confer Table A.) In Lower

Sind and in Kutch, however, the time of minimum temperature is

not so well defined ;a uniform temperature lasts nearly from 20

minutes before sunrise up to sunrise, the very minimum being gene-

rally just a few minutes before sunrise.

A second depression of the minimum temperature after sunrise

was never observed. Table A shows observations on the minimum

temperature in the Punjaub, and Table B in Sind and Kutch.

TaBLE A.

Juune, lst January, 1857. Moorran, llth January, 1857.

Minutes before Sunrise. Temperature | Minutes before Sunrise. Temperature,

60 3°4° cent. 55 5'8° cent.

50 34 50 a4

2r 2

212 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 8.

Minutes before Sunrise. Temperature, | Minute before Sunrise. Temperature.

45 3°3 45 54

40 3°2 35 4:7

35 2°9 30 43

30 30 20 46

25 3°0 15 46

20 31 10 4°6

15 3°2 Sunrise, 46

10 3.2

5) 32

Sunrise, 3:2 |

Tapie B,

Susput In Kutcu, 11th March, 1857.

Minutes before Sunrise. Temperature.

3°5 11°8° cent.

30 11°8

25 11:7

20 11:6

15 11:2

10 10°6

D 9°8

3 10°4

Sunrise, 10°7

The minimum temperature of the air varies much in the same

places, and whilst for instance I once observed in Mooltan a tem-

perature of nearly 0° in the morning, the lowest temperature on the

next was 6° and even 7° centigrade. These variations are chiefly

produced by clouds, which modify the radiation.

During the months of December and January there were very

few days quite cloudless (only three in January).

The weather was very variable between the 20th January and 1st

February, during which time some heavy showers fell, which made

the temperature of the air throughout the whole day uniformly cool.

1857.1 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 213

During this rainy period the maximum temperature never reached

more than 20° centigrade and on one day it only rose to 16°5° cent.

a temperature which is considered very moderate even in Europe.

On the 12th February this cold and agreeable weather suddenly

ceased, and was followed by a surprising increase of temperature.

The maximum temperature generally reached 30°, even 34° cent.

strongly contrasting with the temperature experienced but a week

before.

The climate of the Punjab during the cold season, resembles

much more the climate of the North West Provinces than that

of any other part of India, but has nevertheless its strongly

marked peculiarities.

The following material differences are found when we com-

pare the cold season of the Punjab with that of the North West

Provinces.

1. During the cold season the mean daily temperature of the

Punjab is much lower than in the North West Provinces. The

maximum temperature of the Punjab, as well as the minimum

temperature is considerably lower; the extremes of temperature

are much greater in the North West Provinces than in the

‘Punjab.

2. In the Punjab we find a moderate and very gradual in-

erease of temperature from sunrise up to 12 and 2 o’clock, whilst

the increase of temperature in the North West Provinces from

sunrise up to 2 o’clock amounts sometimes to 28° C,.

3.*—Temperature of the ground; the observations on the tem-

perature of the ground from the surface down to a depth of

3 Meters and more were recularly continued with the instruments

described in our former Reports.

The following table shows the temperature of the ground in

different localities from the surface down to greater depths.

The temperature of the surface contained in this Table is the

maximum of the temperature observed on those days.

* This 3 is consecutive with 2 in page 211,

214 Leport on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No. 8.

: METERS.

Sure Meters Meters below surface.

Place of Observation.| Date. face. ee eee

ae 2 3 5

ace.

C. G. C. c. c. c.

Chubouval, ............] 20th Dec., | 27°6 | 12:0 | 17-4

Keiraby, ot:shcsusdacst gands 32:0 | 17:4 | 20:6 | 21°6

SHAPORE, “ausses seers ene SGU o, 35°2-| 13°5'| 20-a°| 242

PAE Sicsetnnvecte ees Ist Jan., | 36°0 | 15:4; 17-7 , 186

Me@oltan, 1... is <sa0s%e Atol2th,,| 36°0 | 145 | 19°4 | 23°4 28°2

BOBTPOFE, “ccstecss es: 22nd ,, 16:4 | 21:1

Naushera, ............| 24th Feb., | 20°0 | 14°5 | 189 | 22°2 | 25°5

SIGUE) eeies sana 25th ,, 37°0 | 183 | 21°6 | 21°6

Wexarraernis P79 Cree) 26th ,, 480 | 17°4 | 25°3 | 25°5

Mime oe es ois e-sint 8th Mar.,| 50°0 | 17°5 | 27:2

Goon in the Runn,,..| 10th _,, 52°0 | 27°5 | 26:5 | 26°8

Subput, ........ seceeee[ 12th 4, | 540 | 25°0 | 24-0 | 24-1

DR GO Tf as hee says bas sae 26th... 55°0 | 31:4 | 28°9 | 28:2

This Table evidently shows a great increase of the temperature

of the ground the more we advance to the South; the increase is

especially rapid between Upper and Lower Sind (Sukkur and

Kurrachi.)

There seem however to be great irregularities in the temperature

of the ground, the increase being not strictly proportional to lati-

tude or to isothermal curves of the air.

The irrregularities in the temperature of the ground are chiefly

produced by the variations in the quantity of water contained in the

ground, and places in which water is found close underneath the

surface have a colder temperature of the ground than localities

where water can be obtained only at a greater depth.

The depth of wells was therefore constantly registered, and obser-

vations were made. to ascertain the quantity of water contained in

the ground by weighing samples of earths of different depths as

soon as they were taken out. ‘These samples, after being carefully

dried, were weighed again and thus the amount of moisture could

be calculated.

Jungles also tend to cool the temperature of the ground, and I

think, that, when we have the opportunity of comparing the tem-

perature of the ground with depths of wells, with jungles, &c. many

striking facts will be found to prove that irregularities of the tem-

1857.]| Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. 215

perature of the ground are chiefly caused by jungles (in cooling it,)

or dry soils (in heating it.) The temperature of the surface of the

ground in the Punjab was never found to reach 40°it is therefore

considerably lower than in central India and the North-Western

Provinces, where I had often found 45° and even 50° Cent. as the

max. temperature of the surface.

Coinciding with the lower temperature of the ground is the fact

that in the Punjab a thermometer with blackened bulb rises (put

on black wool,) but very little when exposed to the sun’s rays, whilst

I saw it rising in Sind to 77°, in Leh in Ladak, elevation 11,800f.,

it rose on the 8th July to 96° Cent. 8 degrees more than the boiling

point of water at this height.

HYDROGRAPHICAL OBSERVATIONS.

Careful observations were made for ascertaining the discharge

of rivers, their temperature, the form and height of their banks,

etc. Observations of the breadth were made by long base lines

and triangulations.

In order to make accurate observations on the depth and velocity

an anchor was used, which I carried with me for the purpose.

The discharge was measured for the following rivers :-—

Jhelum at Pind Dadan Khan, Jhelum near Shapore, Chenab

near Jhuug, Ravi at Pasi Shah, Chenab at Mooltan, Sutlej or

Ghara at Bhawlpore, Indus at Sukkur, Indus at Tatta and the dif-

ferent branches between Tatta and Sukput.

In all these rivers a series of observations was made to ascertain

the mean velocity directly.

Large (bamboo) sticks, weighed at one extremity with a bag con-

taining sand or stones, whilst a bladder was fastened to the upper

end to prevent their sinking, were floated vertically.

The temperature of the Punjab rivers was surprisingly cold.

The banks of the Punjab rivers are exceedingly low, if compared

with those of the rivers in Hindostan proper, the Ganges, Jumna,

Nerbudda, Tonse, &c.

I was enabled to collect, whilst travelling along the shores of the

Indus, many interesting data on the inundations of the Indus

in 1856.

216 Report on the Progress of the Magnetic Survey. [No.3

GroLoey.

The greater part of the plains of the Punjab is filled with clay,

which generally abounds with shells, not only on its surface but

also at greater depths.

The thickness of the clay is very different in different localities,

it very often is found to be only 6 feet deep, and under it sand is

found resembling the sand of rivers. In other localities it is more

than 20 feet thick with a layer of sand only afew feet deep, under

which clay is met with again. ;

No shells are to be found in the sand, but as already mentioned,

they abound in the clay.

I especially endeavoured during my journeys in the Punjab to

collect shells from the surface and greater depths, samples of sand,

of sands of rivers, &c.

I had an opportunity of obtaining numerous and well preserved

specimens of fossil shells in Sukkur and Rori in Upper Sind, and

made, assisted by the draftsman, Eleazar, a large collection of

shells and petrified wood near Sehwan and in the hills on my route

down to Kurrachi.

i hope that these collections combined with the observations,

taken on the spot will render it possible to ascertain with accuracy

the age of the formation, but it would be premature to venture an

opinion before a decided examination has been made.

There are several hot springs in this range of hills, and I had the

opportunity of visiting those of Sukki near Sehwan and of Mugger

Pir near Kurrachi.

In both localities the quantity of water which issues, is pretty

considerable, and is extensively used by the natives for medical pur-

poses. |

The temperature of the springs at Sukki which take their origin

three miles west of Sukki is 41:2° Cent., that of Mugger Pir, close

to the“ Alligator Tank,’’ is exactly the same 41°2° Cent.

Bhooj, in Kutch, 16th March, 1857.

PL DAS PPL LLL LPI SII PLL PLL SNS PDD

1857.| Description of a new Indian Pigeon. 217

Description of a new Indian Pigeon, akin to the ‘ Stock Dove’ of

Europe ; with notices of other CouuMBINzZ.—By Epwarp Buiytu.

In no other group of birds is the difficulty of discriminating be-

tween species and permanent varieties, whatever latitude may be

allowed under either denomination, so great and so constantly recur-

ring as in sundry genera of Pigeons. And yet each race, however

slightly distinguished from certain other races, is remarkably true

to its particular distinctive characters, wheresoever it be found; and

it remains to shew that any gradations or transitions occur from one

to another, which might not be readily accounted for by intermix-

ture, where such cognate races meet. The numerous permanent

races (considered by the Prince of Canino and others as species)

affined to TurTUR RISORIUS, or to T’. avRitTuS, afford ample exem-

plification; and we are unaware that any of these have been known

to interbreed one with another. Moreover, so far as has been ob-

served, it would seem that the voice or coo differs appreciably in

each race, just as the notes of other proximate but distinct species

of birds do, in general, to a notable extent—as familiarly exempli-

fied by those of the British PayLLoscopus TRocHILUS and Pa-

RUFvS, and of many others that might be cited.

In Europe, three kinds of wild Pigeon are familiarly known, in

addition to the wild Turtle Dove (Columba turtur, L.) They are

the common ‘ Ring-dove,’ Cushat, or Ramier (C. palumbus, L.), the

€Stock-dove’ or Columbin (C. cenas, L.), and the ‘ Rock-dove,’

esters, habitually perching and roosting upon trees ; and the third is

ehiefly an inhabitant of sea-cliffs and never alights on a tree. The

first builds a platform nest which is supported by the lighter

branches of trees; the second builds in the holes of trees (old

pollard ‘stocks’ especially), and not unfrequently in Rabbit-bur-

rows; and the third resorts to the cavities and deep recesses of

precipitous rocks, and especially the caverns of sea-cliifs, where it

nidificates in large societies. Each is the type of a generic or sub-

generic group (7. e. a named division) according to the Prince of

Canino ; and each has its immediate representative or counterpart

in India.

218 Deseription of a new Indian Pigeon. [No. 3.

1. Patumsus. The ‘ Cushats.’ In the W. Himalaya, a bird of

this group is common, which differs so little from the European race

that the two would probably blend, were they to inhabit together.

The only distinctions consist in the neck-patch, which is large and

almost pure white in the European Cushat, being much contracted

and of a buff-colour in that of Asia; while the primaries also of

the latter are more narrowly margined externally with white. Upon

these slight distinctions, the Prince of Canino designates the orien-

tal race P. casiorTis, and notes it from Chinese Tartary. He also

remarks that the Cushats of Algeria have the white neck-patch

more extended than in the European race; and distinguishes an-

other and better-characterized race, from N. W. Africa, by the name

P. EXCELSUS.

The only other true Cushats known are from this country, vz. P.

PULCHRICOLLIS, (Hodgson), from the E. Himalava; and P. Enpsr-

STONEI, (Sykes), from the Nilgiris and Malabar Ghats,—of which

latter the P. Tornineronit (Carpophaga Torringtoniw, Kelaart,) can

scarcely be considered more than a variety,* and was first indicated

as such in J. A. S. XX, 178. Nevertheless, according to Mr. Edgar

L. Layard, the late H. E. Strickland “at once pronounced it to

be distinct” from P. Expuinstoner. All will agree in admitting P.

TORQUATUS, P. PULCHRICOLLIS, and P. ELPHINSTONEI as good ‘ spe-

cies ;’ probably also P. uxcunsus: but most systematists would

prefer retaining casiotis and Torringtoni as ‘ permanent races’ or

‘varieties’ of P. rorguatus and P. E:purnstoner respectively. It

will be observed that this is a mountain type as India; being wholly

unknown in the plains, save P. EnpHinsroner rarely on the elevat-

ed table-land of the Dukhun, and perhaps the casIorIs may prove

to be a winter visitant in the Punjab, occurring probably in large

flocks.

There are two other fine Indian Wood Pigeons of the same

Columbine type (as distinguished from the Carpophagine series of

Fruit Pigeons); each of them being recognised as the type of a

separate subdivision by the Prince of Canino. They are the Dmy-

prorreron Hopasoni, (Vigors), which is peculiar to the Hima-

layan forests,—and the Ausocomus puntceus, Tickell, of Orissa

* Comptes Rendus, tom. XLII, 837.

ee ee eS ee

1857.] Description of a new Indian Pigeon. 219

central India, and also Ceylon, though seemingly more common in

Arakan and especially the island of Ramri. These are mentioned

merely, that it might not appear that they had been overlooked.

2. PanumBmna, Bonap., founded on Col. @nas, L. (P. colum-

bella, Bonap.), the British ‘ Stock Dove;’ to which the Prince has

since added P. Hvrrsmanni, from western and central Asia: very

like P. mwas, but distinctly smaller, with black bill and yellow tip

(dertrum),—the colouring of the bill having doubtless changed in

drying, as will be shewn presently. This should be the Col. enas

apud Meyendorff, from Bokhara; deseribed to have the croup of a

very pale grey, with all the feathers white at base, in which it ac-

cords with our Indian species; and it is not unlikely to prove the

very same, migrating according to season. The true P. mas pro-

bably co-exists with it in W. Asia; and the European bird is known

to be extensively diffused over N. Africa.

P. Eversmanye (?), Bonap. (If new, P. enicapilla, nobis.)

Smaller than P. myas, with wings and tail each 1 in. shorter; the

difference in the length of tail being very conspicuous. Colouring

much the same; but the croup and fore-part of the wings under-

neath are of a whitish-grey (not pure white) in the Indian bird,

instead of being uniformly dark-coloured with the rest, as in the

Huropean ‘Stock Dove.’ The saine vinaceous tint (whence the

name @nas) prevails on the fore-neck and breast of both species ;

but in the Indian it appears also on the crown, which in the other

is pure dark ashy. ‘The wings are similarly marked, except that in

our presumed new species there is less black upon the winglet, and

the great alar feathers (including the tertiaries) are much less dark

in colour. Leneth of closed wing 83 in.; and of tail 4 in, only.

Among some descriptions of birds sent for identification about

ten years ago by the late Major Boys, of the Bengal Cavalry, we

find one of this Indian ‘ Stock Dove.’ He gives the length of a

fresh-killed male as 11} in., extent of wings 24 in., and weight 7 oz,

4dr. Mr. Selby states that P. myas “ measures about 14 inches.

and in extent of wing nearly 26 in.’ ‘The beak,” remarks Dr. D.

Scott of Hansi, who has favored us with the specimen here deserib-

ed, “is of a yellowish colour, and as if translucent; but this ap-

pearance is only visible in the fresh bird, as it had disappeared when

2EQ

220 Description of a new Indian Pigeon. [No. 8.

the specimen became dry.* The legs also had a distinctly yellowish

tinge, instead of the red of the common Blue Pigeon ; but this also

soon disappeared.’’ Major Boys describes the bill and cere as grey,

the skin round the eye yellow; iris buff; and legs flesh-pink,—those

of our common blue Pigeon being of a deep pinkish-red.

Of the habits of the race, Major Boys merely remarks, that—

“ These birds fly in flocks and affect trees!’ When at Cawnpore,

last year in May, I observed every evening a large flock of blue

Pigeons to collect and roost upon some high trees within canton-

ments, and therefore not to be fired at; and having never observed

the common Blue Pigeon of this country to roost upon trees, I was

led to suspect that the birds in question were of a race of ‘ Stock-

doves,’ probably different in species from the European ; a conjec-

ture which seemed to be verified by the discovery of the bird now

under consideration: but I am assured, upon good authority, that

the CoLuMBA INTERMEDIA, Strickland, dees commonly roost upon

trees, in which habit it would seem to differ remarkably from its

very near affine the C. n1vra of Hurope and N. Africa.

Of the Indian ‘ Stock Pigeon,’ Dr. Scott remarks—“ Though I

have been at Hansi nearly five years, I have never seen these

Pigeons before; but others have seen them, and have assured me of

their occurrence as a distinct race, different from our common Blue

Pigeon which breeds in wells. Early in March there were hundreds

of them about here; but they soon disappeared. ‘They feed in the

fields morning and evening, aad roost in the day (and I suppose the

night also) in trees, generally in the common Obdbul tree, called

here the keeker. The natives distinguish them by the name kwm-

mer kulla or kula; the last word being the name of a colour.f

To Europeans they are also here known as the ‘ Hill Pigeon ;’

* Tn the dry specimen, the bill is black with yellow dertrum, as in the Prince

-of Canino’s P. EvERSMANNI!

+ In the chapter devoted to the rearing of Pigeons in the Ayin Akbari, a num-

ber of breeds or races are enumerated, concluding with the Komeree and the

Gowlah (Gladwin’s translation.) These names refer to the tame Collared Turtle-

dove and to the common ‘ Blue Pigeon’ of the country (or C. INTERMEDIA) respec-

tively. he latter, indeed, is stated to be “a wild Pigeon, of which, if a few

are taken, they are speedily joined by a thousand others of thei kind.”

1857.) Description of a new Indian Pigeon. 221

though whether they came from the hills I cannot say.’”’ These

Pigeons have hitherto been observed only in the N. W. of India.

3. CoLtumsBa, L. (as restricted to the ‘ Rockier’ group of the

major continent). Of this type, the Prince of Canino recognises

several nearly affined races, some of which differ more or less in

habit, as well as in the details of colouring. rom certain of these

races, all the numerous varieties of domestic Pigeons have un-

doubtedly descended.

The most unlike the rest is the fine Snow Pigeon of the Himalaya

(C. teuconora, Vigors), which is confined to great elevations near

the snow, and assuredly does not appear to have given origin to any

domestic variety.

The European Rock Pigeon (C. tivra, Latham), according to the

Prince of Canino, is found identically the same in Europe, Heypt,

the whole Barbary coast, and thence on to Senegal and the Gold

coast.* It is said to abound in the islands of Madeira and Tene-

rifte. Northward, it is common in the Hebrides, and in the Orkney,

Shetland, and Faroe Isles; but in Scandinavia is altogether con-

fined to the island of Runneson, on the S. W. coast of Norway,

where it breeds in great numbers.f According to Temminck, Japa-

nese specimens do not differ in any respect. It also abounds along

the rocky shores of the Mediterranean and Atgean (Italy, Sicily,

Malta, Greece, &c.), and those of the Huxine and Caspian; evincing

everywhere a decided and remarkable predeliction for the crevices

and especially the deep caverns and recesses of sea-cliffs, even

where the entrance is close over the water at the height of the tide:

it penetrates further into such recesses than any sea-bird is known

to do. It also feeds more on the tops of plants than the domestic

races do habitually ;f and small Helvces are commonly found in its

craw. Though rarely, if ever, inhabiting inland, unless somewhat

domesticated, sundry old-established dove-cots have been stocked

with it in various parts of Britain, where the race is maintained

* Comptes Rendus, tom. XXXIX, 1107.

+ Nilsson, as quoted by Major Lloyd, ‘ Scandinavian Adventures,’ II, 336.

~ The British Cushat is a great devourer of turnip-tops, as remarked by Gil-

bert White.

222 Description of a new Indian Pigeon. [No. 3.

pure ; and, as thus observed, it shews no disposition to associate with

the domestic breeds in neighbouring dove-cots, although considered

to be the parent race from which the latter are mainly derived.

Even when eggs taken from the inland colonies referred to have

been hatched, and the young brought up by domestic Pigeons, these

Rockiers have been known to quit their foster-parents, as soon as

they could fly strongly, to rejoin their immediate relatives and pro-

genitors. Another characteristic of the race is, that they like to

breed in extensive societies ; so that the large colonies of them soon

absorb any stray birds even from a great distance.

In England, there is likewise a race of wild or semi-wild blue

Pigeons, which maintains itself distinct, and (though numerous in

individuals) continues as true to its distinctive colouring and all

other characters as does the genuine Rockier, of which it is regarded

as avariety. These birds frequent inland cliffs and large buildings ;

being also extensively reared in dove-cots to meet the demand for

Pigeon-matches. They have invariably a speckled wing, each covert

being marked with a black spot on each of its webs, in addition to

the black bars of typical urvia. The scapularies also are thus

marked ; and the back indistinctly. The croup is pure white, as in

ordinary Livia: and the race is chiefly remarkable for the permanency

of its particular markings, and for commonly inhabiting much more

inland than the true Biset.*

Another such'race in Italy (a degree, perhaps, more different,)

is indicated by the Prince of Canino by the name C. TURRICOLA,

and it has also been received from Persia. The croup being of “a

* The same spotting of the wing is common among the Indian domestic

Pigeons derived immediately from C. INTERMEDIA, and otherwise not differing

from the pure wild race of the latter: but I know of no analogous wild or

semi-wild race in this country, which presents this particular colouring as a con-

stant distinction. Individuals or pairs so marked are here common among the

tame flocks; with other varieties of colouring, as black, buff, pure white, pied,

&c., and without variation in other characters or tendency to assume the pecu-

liarities of the various ‘fancy breeds.’ These last manifest no tendency ever to

return to wildness; their domestication being too complete: but tame Pigeons of

some kind are said to have gone wild in N. America, a few pairs of them breeding

along the highlands of the Hudson; and whether these ‘feral’ birds tend to

assume an uniform and typical coloration, we have not learned.

1857.] Description of a new Indian Pigeon. 223

pale blue-grey,’’—whitish-grey (?), as in the Indian ‘ Stock-dove,’—

“never pure white.”

- Another, again, is termed by him C. ruprsrris, from the moun-

tainous and rocky parts of Songaria and Dauria (or Daburia),—

adopted from Pallas, but the particular distinguishing characters

not specified.

©. ScoimMPERrt, also, “ which covers with its imnumerable flocks

the more desert plains of Abyssinia. It is stouter and more albes-

cent than the common C, Livia.”

Likewise C. @ymnocycius, Gray, from Senegal. “ Obseurior:

orbitis nudis: rostro valdé rebustiore.”’

Lastly, C. ivperMeEDIA, Strickland, of India.* The common ‘ Blue

Pigeon’ of this country, which only differs from C. nivra by having

the croup uniformly coloured with the back, as in the European

‘Stock-dove,’ and by a somewhat deeper and more uniform shade

of ash-colour. Yet the purely wild birds continue true to this

colouring, and no variation will be seen in the largest flocks of them,

where unmixed with domestic Pigeons; but they most readily

mingle with the latter, and scarcely require encouragement to fall

into domestic habits. In the vicinity of Calcutta, the pure wild

race can hardly be obtained, though domestic Pigeons in every ordi-

nary flock (not of “fancy birds’’) which are undistinguishable from

the wild, in company with others varying more or less in colouring

from the type: but even at Bendres, we remarked a great assemblage

of these birds, nestling in the innumerable nooks about the famous

mosque of Aurungzebe, and sought in vain for any variation of

colouring among them, and especially for the white croup of true

©. trivia. Col. Sykes refers this bird to C. mnas, and remarks that

it is “the most common bird in the Dukhun, congregating in flocks

of scores, and a constant inhabitant of every old dilapidated build-

ing.’ He saw “the same species on board ship on the voyage to

England, brought from China:” and the Rev. J. Mason notes the

occurrence of what he considers to be the same bird, wild in Burma.

In Ceylon, according to Mr. Edgar L. Layard, “this species is

extremely local, being confined to two places, ‘Pigeon Island’ off

* Comptes Rendus, tom, XLITII, 838,

224 Description of a new Indian Pigeon. [No. 3.

Trincomali, and a rock of the Southern coast near Barberrya.*

From these it makes incursions into the interior, and I have heard,”’

he adds, “ of specimens being shot on the great central road, about

fifty miles from Trincomali.”’ Dr. Jerdon remarks that “it abounds

all over India, and is occasionally found in the more open spaces of

jungles, especially in rocky districts, and in the neighbourhood of

water-falls,—but more generally in the open country, inhabiting

walls of villages, pagodas, wells, and any large buildings, and breed-

ing chiefly in old walls.’? Major Tickell, again, notices it as “ exceed-

ingly common in Chota Nagpur, breeding in all the steep lofty rocks

of that country.” Lastly, Capt. Hutton states that “it is found in

Afghanistan, where, as in many’ parts of India, it builds in wells

and ruined buildings; the Kazeezes, or Artesian wells of Afghan-

istan, are sometimes crowded with them. They occur also in the

Deyra Doon, and are known as the common Blue Pigeon. At

Masuri, I have seen them only in the cultivated fields, low down on

the sides of hills, in warm situations.’’ Length 13 in. by 28 in. in

breadth ; and C. trivia is described as measuring 13% in. by 22 in.:

though it is doubtful if there be any real difference.

Upon other authority, we have been assured that the common

Blue Pigeon of Afghanistén has the white rump of the European

tivia. It is probably identical with the Kemaon bird next to be

described; and both with the C. nupzstTnis of the Prince of Canino,.

The late Major Boys, a most experienced collector of Indian

birds, whose description of the Indian ‘Stock Pigeon’ we have just

verified, also distinguished a “Blue Rock Pigeon’? which he pro-

cured at Hawulbégh in Kemaon. “This Pigeon,’”’ he remarks,

“differs considerably from the common Blue Pigeon; particularly

in its weight and size. It is in every respect much lighter in

plumage. Length of a male 123 in., by 25 in.; weight 7 oz. 8 dr.

Bill black, the cere grey; iris red; legs pink. ‘Top of head, chin,

and sides of face, ashy-grey. Back of neck and upper part of

breast glazed metallic green. Bottom of neck metallic purple

blending into ashy light grey on the belly. Flanks and vent light

grey: wing-coverts and upper part of the back of the same colour.

Middle of back white. Upper tail-coverts dark ashy-grey. Quills

* Resorting thus, it would seem, to sea-cliffs wherever the latter are available.

1857. ] Description of a new Indian Pigeon. 225

grey,—the shafts black,—darker near their tips. Second quill longest:

outer webs darker than the inner. Some of the larger wing-coverts,

those covering the tectrices [tertiaries ?], together with the 6 or7 last

tertiary feathers, bear a patch of greyish-black, which when the wing

is extended forms two indistinct and somewhat curved bands. Tail

dark grey at base, broadly tipped with black, and having between

these two colours a broad stripe of white (wanting in the common

C. intermepia.) Inferior coverts white, blending with grey towards

the anterior margin of the wing. Length of tail 5 in. The quills

(when the wings are closed) reaching to its tip. The exterior tail-

feathers are pure white from their bases on the external web,

finished off at tip with black ; the inner webs being grey at base,

as obtaining in the intermediary feathers.”

Any collector who has the opportunity should endeavour to verify

this particular race, the habitat of which would seem to be inter-

mediate to that of the ‘Snow Pigeon’ (C. tevconora) and that of

the ‘Common Blue’ of the plains of India: the white rump alone

would readily distinguish it from the latter.

Note on the Green Pigeons of Ceylon. The Columba pompadoura,

Gmelin, founded on pls. XIX and XX of Brown’s ‘ Illustrations of

Zoology’ (1776), has long been sought to be verified ; and at length,

it would appear, successfully by the Prince of Canino, in a small

species, as originally described, of the size of C. olaw, Temminck.*

Consequently, the TrRuRoN MALABARICA var. pompadoura of Mr.

Layard’s catalogue is a distinct bird, which may bear the specific

hame FLAVOGULARIS, nobis. It is very like TR. MALABARICA,

Jerdon, being of the same size as that species, with an equal deve-

lopment of the maronne colour upon the mantle of the male; but

is readily distinguished by its yellowish-green forehead, pure yellow

throat, and by having no buff patch on the breast of the male; it is

also further remarkable, that whilst the male of TR. MaALABARICA

has the usual deep cinnamon-coloured lower tail-coverts, that of Tr.

FLAVOGULARIS has them green with broad whitish tips as in the

female, and as in both sexes of T'R. cHtOROPTERA of the Nicobars.

TR. pompapoura is a much smaller species, with the quantity of

maronne colour on the mantle of the male greatly reduced, and

* Comptes Rendus, tom. 6.9. b.@ 875.

‘226 Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja. [No. 3.

cinnamon-coloured lower tail-coverts, as usual in the males of this

genus. Following the Prince of Canino’s classification, the follow-

ing species of TRERONIN# inhabit the island.

1. Crocorus CHLORIGASTER (Blyth).

2. OSMOTRERON BicincTA, (Jerdon),

3. - FLAVOGULARIS, Blyth.

4. Ms POMPADOURA, (Gmelin).

The first and second being common to Ceylon and the mainland

of India; and the third and fourth peculiar to the island, so far as

known at present.—E. B.

PAAAAAARAAAAAEAADRAAAARALAAI

Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja.— By Capt. R. T. Luten, Senior

Assistant to the Commissioner of Chota Nagpore.

Jumeera Pat is situated in Sirgooja, about nine miles within the

boundary line of that province and the district of Chota Nagpore.

It is about 100 miles nearly due west from the station of Chota

Nagpore, and lies between 23° 15’ and 23° 40’ N. Lat. and 4° and

4° 30’ W. Long. from Calcutta. Sherghatty is situated about 100

miles to the N. E., and Mirzapore about 160 miles to the N. W.

To the north is Palamow, and to the south Oodeypoor.

Jumeera is the name of a small village and the word “ pat’? means

a “ plain,” or, “ table-land.”

The road from Chota Nagpore is good as far as Joormoo, which

is about eleven miles from Jumeera Pat. In some few places it is

rather difficult for wheeled-conveyances, the banks of some of the

nullahs being very steep. Such parts might be made quite practica-

ble for carts, in the dry season, when the quantity of water in the

nullahs is very small. In the rainy season. these streams‘rise con-

siderably and are not passable by carts. About a mile beyond

Joormoo the first ghaut occurs, the ascent of which for a short

distance (rather less than quarter of a mile perhaps) is very steep,

and quite impracticable for wheeled-carriages. After reaching the

top of this ghaut, the road is more or less hilly until within a short

distance of the village of Korndah. A large tree on the left hand

1857.] Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja. 227:

side of the road, ascending the Joormoo ghaut, marks the boundary

of Sirgooja and Chota Nagpore. Korndah is situated at the entrance

of a beautiful and well-cultivated valley, and at the foot of hills.

This is a very pretty spot, and the view of the Koosmee valley

from the hills above is very fine. A stream of good, clear water flows

close by the village, which is about seven miles from Jumeera. The

road from Korndah to Jumeera winds through hills, the ascents and

descents of which are not very steep, although not practicable for

carts. There is a good deal of tree and bush jungle on the road

from Joormoo to Jumeera, and the country appears to be cultivated

only in occasional small patches. With the exception of Korndah,

there are only two or three small hamlets on the road from

Joormoo.

A person can travel in a palkee from Joormoo to Jumeera, and

by reversing the palkee when ascending the very steep parts of the

road, little trouble or inconvenience is experienced.

On reaching the village of Jumeera, the bungalow which has been

built for the Junior Assistant Commissioner in charge of the Korn-

dah Sub-division, is seen on high ground about one mile and a half

in advance. A slight ascent brings us to the house, and we now have

evidently reached the apex, no higher point of land being visible in

any direction. Here is a fine and extensive table-land, free from

jungle, with the exception of some low scrubs on the more sheltered

slopes. With the exception of two topes of “ Saikwa”’ -trees, and a

few mangoe and peepul which grow near the village of Serandag

(about half mile from the bungalow) the “ pat’ is remarkably bare

of trees of any kind.

This spot is 3,200 feet above the level of the sea. I am unable

to speak as to the extent of the table-land, but I may safely say,

from what I have seen, that it must stretch to many miles. About

300 yards to the south of the bungalow we come to the brow of the

hill, from which a beautiful view of the Koosmee valley is obtained,

beyond which are the hills of. Kooreea and Sirgooja. On the north

of the bungalows a spur of the hill runs out to the extent of about

one and half miles in length and quarter of a mile (or rather less

perhaps) in breadth, sloping down on three sides by a slight descent

to a fertile and extensive valley, ‘This spur appeared to me to be

2a 2

928 Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja. [ No. 3.

the most eligible site for the sepoys’ lines and amlahs’ houses, which

were accordingly built there.

The soil on the spot on which the bungalow is situated, to the

depth of about two or three feet, is a rich black mould, below which is

red gravel. In endeavouring to sink a well, which we tried in three

places, this gravel appeared to increase in hardness and become more

difficult to dig the lower the well was sunk, the colour of the gravel

also became of a deeper red. After digging to the depth of about

thirty-five or forty feet we came to rock which obliged us to discon-

tinue the work, as the men employed did not understand blasting ;

no water was obtained. The soil generally, except where the bun-

galow is situated, is a red, light earth. From the appearance of

the slopes of the hill, which are very rocky, as also from the result

of our endeavours to sink a well, I should say that the hill on which

the house is situated must be one mass of rock beneath.

For water we were dependent on springs, which issue from the

sides and at the foot of the hill, it is of good quality, and the

springs did not fail during the hot weather, the only drawback

being the distance which the people were obliged to go to fetch it,

the nearest spring being about half mile from the house. In the

rainy season the flow of water from these springs was of course

considerably increased, and fresh ones also burst forth. A “ bund’

had been constructed in the gorge between two hills during the

time my predecessor (Mr. A. R. Thompson, C. 8.) was in charge of

the sub-division, but it had been partially destroyed in the rainy

season of 1855, the rush of water from the hills in the rains being

at times great, I doubt if a “bund” would stand; unless strongly

and scientifically constructed, which would be an expensive work.

The greatest convenience, if feasible, would be a couple of wells, one

near the house, and the other near the lines.

With regard to climate, I annex a register of the thermometer,

the accuracy of which may be depended on, as I noted it daily. In

the hot season, as soon as the sun set, the air became cool and

pleasant, and the nights were always cool—natives sleeping in the

verandah of the house, at night, used warm coverings, even in the

hot season. IJ had neither punkahs nor tatties during the time I

was there, and I found that by keeping the doors shut and the

1857. ] Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja. 229

room a little darkened the heat during the day was not very

oppressive. The thermometer in the house did not, I think, range

higher than 84° or 85°. A strong N. W. and W. wind prevails

during the hot season. The rains set in at the end of May,

with thunder-storms from the N. W. after which the prevailing

wind was from the 8. and 8. W. It very seldom blows from the

E. After the rains had set in there was very little variation in

the thermometer from that noted in the beginning of June; and

until I left, in the middle of August, I never experienced that

“ mugginess’’ which is usual in the plains at times during the rainy

season. Not having had a rain-guage, I am unable to speak as to

the quantity of water which fell, but I think that, although the rain

was at times very heavy, yet it was not so heavy or continuous as at

some of the stations in the Himalayas. Perhaps the few trees on

the “ pat’? may account for many of the clouds passing over with-

out discharging their contents. At times there was a good deal of

mist.

I enjoyed good health during the time I was there, and the sepoys

and office people, who had been with me from the commencement of

our residence there, were generally speaking healthy. Some cases

of fever occurred, but as the sepoys’ lines and the amlahs’ houses

were only barely finished when the rains commenced, they were of

course damp, and to this may be attributed some of the cases of fever.

Had the houses been dry, and had the people been able to obtain a

regular supply of good food, I think that there would have been

less sickness. It was, however, very difficult to procure supplies of

good rice, doll, ghee, &c., as the Buniahs, who live in the villages

below, have a great dislike to coming up to the “ pat’? during the

rains, and my efforts to establish a bazaar failed. The natives of the

adjacent villages appear to be a very poor race, occupied in cultivat-

ing their land, from which they raise a coarse kind of rice (“ go-

rah dhan’’) and ‘‘ goondlee’’ (millet), &c. It was with difficulty that

they were induced to come and labour in building the lines.

From the experience I have had during a residence of five months

(from the end of March until the middle of August 1856) at

Jumeera Pat, I should be inclined to pronounce favourably of the

climate. There is almost always a fine breeze blowing there, and in

230 Notes on Jumeera Pat, in Sirgooja. [No. 3.

the cold and hot weather a very high wind from the N. W. and W.

The route by which I marched from Chota Nagpore is about 116

miles, there isanother.and more direct road vid Lohardugga and

Kotam (about 100 miles); but there is a very steep ghaut near

Kotam, and the road isin many places very hilly, and passes

through a good deal of jungle. |

The face of the hill to the south of the bungalows, is covered

with bush jungle, there are few trees of any size. The valley at the

foot of this hill appears to be quite free from jungle, partially cul-

tivated, and containing a few topes of mangoe trees. Having had

occasion to go three or four marches into Sirgooja, ina 8. W. direc-

tion, I observed that we descended two or three ghauts, but made

no ascents. The country is very beautiful, from the intermixture of

extensive and fertile valleys and well wooded hills. Game of all

descriptions, large and small, abounds.

Chota Nagpore, 13th Oct. 1856.

rs ‘ured AAvoTT , FL ( 99, TE

N ‘0g 68 | PLZ | OF ‘uUlvey| FL | OL | 0&

VS | PL | 6% | Trey pus urey| 9/7 | OL | 62

v8 | GL | 836 08 | 89 | 8b

‘0d 68 | OL | Lo ‘0d G8 | OL ' LZ | |

‘0g G8 | OL | 94 Uley 98 | 84 | 92

84 | 04 | GZ 66 | 94 | 6

Urey G8 | OL | PZ v6 | 94 | VG |

OS | GL | &Z 66 | 94 | &@

; ‘0d 98 | 94 | G 16 | PL | 6

3 0g, 68 | PZ | IZ 06 | 94 | Tz@

> WIeY \ | 06 | 94 | 02 6 | 94 | 02

SS 88 | ¢ 61 66 | 94 | 6T

ot 98 | TZ + 16 | FL | ST

me 98 | SZ I 88 | TZ | ZT

= *IOPTOO 9 v2 oumvoog yt ‘Sutyy Aue pes ey | BE re) Th Ot

cS PT Wad as ary} Aue 26 | 08 | SL 98 | OL | SL

~~ jt {Juout sTuy jo SUTUUTSOq ety utr 6 SJ FL 98 69 PL

Ry POYIVUL JY} WOLF MOTPLIALA 9794] 61 92 | ST OG Cay. cet

= SVM otoyy (SHON WYIST) oy [ OWT} 6 | 08 | BI 261-41 ST

S ey} 03 dn yng ‘tojomomseyy oy] z6 | og | IT 06 | F4 | TT

= CHOU OK PI OFS SIG) AOTny 66 | 84 | OT 6 | 84 | OT

Ls 06 | 84 | 6 16 | 44 | 6

S °d G4i1Z4|8 06 | 92 |)8 68 | 74 | 8

= <¢ 84) cL | 24 : So 172 | 2 18 \ 74h \ 2

& od 64 | 14) 9 od 88 | FL | 9 78 | 01/9 68 | cZ | TS

SS : 64 |¢4|& Ured 98 | G4 |g 68 | G4 | g 68 | 04 | O€

OS bk | TEs) ¥ 18 | €L | 98 | 94 | % G8 | 89 | 62

od 6h i OLE § Ce 06 | 2/8 £8 \-eh & 64 | 69 | 8G

é 64 | 04 | @ 98 | 64 |G 98 | 74) @ 08 | 29 | Le

urley SZ 9 Oee| 1 LSsO2 | eS lowes b GL | 29 | 96

b> |me a > late > |e & > | 2a

ae - oe ‘ ri [ee | H)eR| & ie ee “s

i 5 . 5 ® = @ 2 9

Se ON ees | oe SE he Ro ~ | oes eee ee ; f

"YPMOAT 247 03 Yopunsaa uado uv ur paomd ‘MWq vloaune yo ‘saqauwowsayy, fo wagsrbaar

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

SRP IPP PPP LVF PLDI IV IF LISI III

For May, 1857.

Ata Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society held on

the 6th instant,

The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Kt., President, in the Chair.

Presentations were received—

1. From J. Robbins, Master of the Suwmroo, a piece of limestone

from Fort Alexandria, Sebastopol, being the material of which the

original Malakhoff, Constantine, Alexandria and other Forts were

constructed. Also a Russian bar shot anda shell weighing 118

lbs. from the same place.

2. From Mr. H. Tucker, Commissioner of Benares, a copy of

the map of the village in which the ruins of Sarnath are situated.

The following gentlemen, duly proposed and seconded at the

last meeting, were balloted for and declared elected: Dr. W. C. B.

Eatwell, Rajah Prasunonauth Rai Bahadur, of Degaputtie, Rajshye.

The election of the Venerable Archdeacon Pratt as a member

of the Council in the place of Dr. Walker, was confirmed.

The Council submitted a report by the Committee of Natural

History on the state of the Museum, together with the minutes

of the Council in reference to it. The Council recommended that

the suggestions contained in the report be adopted, and proposed

the following resolution.

‘‘That the Council be empowered to enter into a communica-

tion with the Government on the subject of the foundation at

Caleutta of an Imperial Museum, to which the whole of the

Society’s collections may be transferred, provided the locality,

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asvatie Society. 233

the general arrangement, and management be declared on a reference

to the Society at large to be perfectly satisfactory to its members.”

This resolution having been put to the meeting by the Chairman,

considerable discussion ensued, in the course of which Major

Thuillier suggested that the words “ except the Library” should

be inserted after the word “ collections.” This suggestion was

adopted. Subsequently Captain C. B. Young moved as an amend-

ment, seconded by Baboo Rajendra Lal Mittra—

‘‘ That the consideration of the resolution be adjourned to the

next meeting.”

This amendment was put to the vote and lost, and the resolution,

as amended by Major Thuillier, was then carried.

The Council announced that they had reconstituted a Committee

of Meteorology and Physical Science, consisting of the following

members :—

Major R. Strachey, the Venerable Archdeacon Pratt, Major

H. L. Thuillier, Baboo Radhanauth Sikdar, Dr. Von Liebig, and

H. Piddineton, Esq.

Recorded.

With reference to the Stacy collection of coins, the Council

reported that the subscriptions promised amounted to Rs. 2,880,

of which Rs. 1,735 had already been realized, and that Captain

Wroughton having agreed to reduce the price of the collection

from Rs. 5,000 to Rs. 4,000; an additional sum of Rs. 1,120 only

was required to complete the purchase. They therefore requested

authority to advance for this purpose a sum not exceeding Ks.

1,200, so soon as all the promised subscriptions have been realized.

Granted.

Communications were received—

1. From Mr. Secretary Young, forwarding with reference to

the correspondence which took place in 1853 and 1854 between

the Government of Bengal and the Society regarding the preserva-

tion of the ruins at Gour and Purrooah from further decay and

destruction, copy of a letter on the subject from the Board of

Revenue, from which it appears that the Government of Bengal

had made an offer to purchase such of the ruins as were really

worth preserving, but that the terms demanded by the zemindars

234 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 3.

were so unreasonable that the Lieutenant-Governor was precluded

from acceding to them.

2. From Mr. B. H. Hodgson, enclosing a paper for the Journal,

being descriptions of two new species of mammalia, viz., a Lagomys

and a Mustela.

3. From Mr. Freeling, submitting a note on the collection of

coins in the Society’s Cabinet.

The note was read by the Secretary as follows :— .

‘‘The coins in the Society’s Cabinet were in a state of some

disorder.

“ My first effort was to class them, throwing all of one series

together, and then to separate the worthless from the good. This

I have done, and although the space in the drawers forbad any

precise arrangement even had the generality of the coins merited

such trouble, they are now in trays (which are to be converted

- into boxes), roughly classed, and the name of the series to which

they belong legibly written on them. I have also when discover-

able, added the names of the donor on the wrapper of the coins

themselves.

“In the wooden trays are displayed the Guptas, the gold and

silver Roman, and the silver Greek, Bactrian and Arsacidan. There

are also two trays of copper Roman arranged previously, with which

I did not meddle. There is also a separate drawer with a few

gems, seals, curiosities, &c., with some presentation medals which

scarcely hold a place among the coins themselves.

“With the contents of the cabinet I was much disappointed,

though this may be, and probably is, owing to the loss sustained,

when all the more intrinsically valuable specimens were stolen

in 1844. I was also surprised to find how various the series are,

the Roman and the Norwegian being far the largest and most per-

fect of any. There are several batches of Indian copper and lead,

which would be interesting were the locality known; but at pre-

sent being entirely unidentified and most illegible, they are utterly

worthless. This point should especially be borne in mind in laying

by all future presentations: when a collection is sent, such memo.

of the collector’s residence is of little importance, but when a

whole trove, or a single coin is forwarded, information of where it

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 235

was found, may render very valuable what is otherwise mere old

copper.

“ Of Indian coins the Bactrians should have the first place, but

for such an extensive and interesting series it is the worst repre-

sented of any; in silver there is only a drachma of Demetrius.

a hemidrachma of Zoilus, 2 of Hormeeus, 1 of Dionysius and 5 of

Menander. None of them are in particularly good preservation,

though the Dionysius is I fancy very rare.* The copper are as

poor as the silver, most being of the commonest types, and in poor

preservation. The aid of friends in the Punjab, or possessing any

duplicates in their collection is much needed to render the series

at least what the Asiatic Society ought to possess.

“‘ Of Indo-Scythie gold there is but one, of Overkias A. A. XIV.

2, and not by any means a fine specimen; the copper too are

inferior, and a good set of these would be a great addition to the

collection.

“ Of Arsacidan there is one large silver and 11 of the ordinary

smaller size. It would be very desirable to get these named and

assigned by any one conversant with the series.

« There are 5 Greek tetradrachms, 4 of Ptolemy and one of some

other monarch ; there are also 2 silver of Alexander the Great, but

Mr. Thomas doubts their being genuine, apparently with too good

reason.

“Itis in Roman coins the Society is peculiarly rich, and a re-

ference to the earliest numbers of the Journal would probably

enable any numismatist easily to re-arrange and identify the speci-

mens there described. I had no time to do it myself, so have

' merely put all these together. Some appear very fine specimens, and

there are 13 silver besides 8 beautiful gold, these last presented

by General Cullen from Travancore.

** Of the Hindoo coins, the Guptas claim the first attention, and

here again though the number is considerable, the types are few

and, of the real Gupta series, possessing little interest. There are

a few good and interesting copper ones presented by Captain Hayes

* Not having Cunningham’s plates by me just now, and being pushed for

fime, I am unable to refer to the figures as I could have wished.

2H 2

236 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 3.

of Lucknow, and in gold there are 5, one of Chandra II, as in Ar.

Antiq. XVIII. figure 4, by Captain Hayes, one of Samudra fig. 6,

one uncertain, another apparently the 4th variety of Kumara at

page 501 of Thomas’s paper in the Journal, Vol. 24, and one of

Kumara A. A. fig. 12. This last, however, is of most doubtful appear-

ance, and I should say it was a forgery. There are also 3 later

imitations. Besides these there is a batch presented by the Govern-

ment, N. W. P.in February, 1856, from Goordaspore, consisting

of 2 specimens of Kumara with the common, Mahendra device,

and 11 of Chandra Il. as in Captain Hayes’ coin. Of these none

are very fine, and the type of Chandra is so very common, that I

should strongly recommend 7 of the 11 being sold to natives, who

purchase these Guptas eagerly, and about 100 Rs. would, probably

be realized ; so many specimens of one sort are of no value, in an

antiquarian point of view, and being so common, I doubt an exchange

of these with other collectors being practicable, I have therefore

left this lot in a separate paper, with the four I would keep

divided off from those of inferior value.

“ There are, however, several others allied to this set, and of much

interest, being those presented by Mr. F. L. Beaufort, and found

in Jessore. They were figured in plate XII. of Vol. 23 of the

Journal. Of fig. 10 there are 4 and one somewhat different, of fig. 11

but one, and 15 of fig. 12, of these last some might most advantageous-

ly be exchanged for other coins needed by the Society, and as they are

not a common type, Major Abbott’s cabinet being the only place

elsewhere that I have seen them, I donbt not many collectors would

be glad to do so.”’

Of Boodhist coins there are several, some of much interest, Captain

Hayes having contributed many of the cock and bull series named

and classed, also some of the cast square, elephant, and tulsi type,

of which there is also another batch. ‘The most interesting of the

Boodhist, however, are the silver punched coins, of which, common

as they are (the collection itself boasting 4 different lots), there are

some very good, with new symbols and devices on them, and in fine

order. Many of these might furnish fresh illustrations for a paper

on Boodhist emblems, and although from absence of any trace of

their local the number might advantageously be reduced, great

gare should be taken in discriminating those to be rejected,

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 237

There are two papers of the coins figured plate XX. of Vol. XI.

of the Journal as Ceylon coins, in very fine order, and I doubt not a

good set might be made out of them, on their legends being care-

fully read ; these were given by Mr. C. B. Skinner, in June, 1851.

In a separate lot are a quantity of coins having a close apparent

affinity to these, which I should also have considered as Cingalese,

but for a small second paper-full which are said to have been found

near Madras.

Mr. T. Oldiam, in February, 1856, presented a quantity of large

and small Arracan coins, very curious and quite unlike any other

Indian coinage. Several strings contain the currency of China,

Japan, &ec., some of the latter being exceedingly grotesque.

The Mahometan pieces may be divided into those of the Pathans

of Delhi, the Pathans of Bengal, the Moguls, and the coins of

Ghuzni, Khwarism, &e.

Of these last mentioned, there are a fair number, including two

gold of Alaeddin Mohamed Shah; they have chiefly been classed

by Mr. Thomas, who has not only named them, but in many in-

stances written the legend on the wrapper. I would urge that these

be carefully transcribed into a book, as the character being a difficult

one, if any of these papers be lost, it may be long ere they are

replaced, whereas many might be able to assign the right coin to

the right legend, though not sufficiently versed in the series to

themselves decipher the whole of the somewhat indistinct margins.

The same remark applies to the coins of the Sassanian dynasty and

Arab Governors of which the Society has several, and which are

even more caviare to the general multitude than the early cufic

abovementioned.

In Delhi Pathans there is little to be proud of, though two broad

pieces of Mahomed ben Sam, a new type of Mahomed Shah and a

silver Rizia are all valuable, especially the last. Of this series I have

made a concise catalogue with reference to “ Thomas’s Pathan

Sovereigns,” which will help any one anxious to increase the Society’s

possessions in this line.

In Bengal Pathans the cabinet is rich, but as I hope to furnish

the journal with a separate paper on this topic, I forbear saying

more of these at present.

238 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 3.

The Moguls are very poor indeed, there being nothing of any

value, save 3 Noorjehans, one certainly very fine and perfect. The

rest are either Akhbars, Jehungirs or Shah Jehans, all of most com-

mon type, and, strange to say, without even a single square Rupee

among them. Most of these came from Benares, from Mr. Gubbins,

in February, 1853.

It is very curious how large a collection there is of Foreign con-

tinental coins, mostly N orwegian, some of very old date and probably

of much interest to those valuing that series. There is a shilling

also of Elizabeth of England, dated 1591, and a crown of Charles

I. Mr. Speirs has besides given several old broad pieces and dollars,

very curious and doubtless of value; one of James the Sixth of

Scotland, in very fine order, dated 1582, and two others of 1570

and 1602, respectively ; the others are of Maria Theresa, 1773,

Frederick Duke of Brunswick, 1627, Hilary Third of Spain and

India, 1637, Charles II. of do. 1668, Maximilian reigning Duke

“ Bulloniensis,’’ 1677, Frederick of Prussia, 1785, Albert and Eliza-

beth reigning Duke and Duchess of Brabant, 1619, Sigismund III.

of Poland, 1628, and Ferdinand II. of Hamburg. I have been thus

particular, in enumerating these because it is strange to find such

a collection of heavy medieval pieces in Calcutta, where they could

hardly have been looked for.

In conclusion, I would urge that all friends to the Society, among

whom must of course be specially included all who themselves feel

any interest in Indian numismatics, should be requested to aid in

every mode in their power, so that the coin collection may be placed

in that rank which would so well befit a society whose Journal is

the depository of the life long labours of ‘‘ James Priusep.”

4. From Baboo Radhanauth Sikdar, an abstract of the Mete-

orological Register kept at the Office of the Surveyor General for

the months of January and February last.

5. From Lieutenant H. Raverty, a paper on the Seeposh Kaffirs.

The Librarian and the Zoological Curator submitted their reports.

Report of Curator, Zoological Department.

The following specimens have been presented to the Society since my

last Report.

1857.| Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 239

1. Dr. D. Scott, Hansi. The following specimens.

VuLPES LEUCoPUS, nobis, J. A. §. XXIII, 729. Skin of a fine male,

which literally verifies the statement of Mountstuart Elphinstone, quoted

loc. cit.; appearing “as if it had been wading up to the belly in ink:”

the name leucopus, therefore, is unfortunate, as being applicable (it would

seem) to one sex only. The skin now sent is perfect; and though want-

ing the skull and limb-bones, has been set up as a stuffed specimen. Dr.

Scott remarks of this species, in epistold, that ‘‘ they differ extremely in

colouring ; some look all over of a sandy-red colour, while others have

black bellies and are very light above. The skin sent is an excellent spe-

cimen, one reason for this being, that it was from an inhabitant of the

open fields. Those that live among sand-hills get so full of burrs (or

thorny seeds) that they look miserable, and scratch off a good deal of

their fur.” For further information concerning this little Desert Fox,

vide Vol. XXV, 443.

Fe.is opnata, Gray, vide J. A. S. XXV, 441. A fine skin, but want-

ing that of the lower jaw and tail-tip, and therefore unfit for setting up :

also two skins of domestic Cats, sent as supposed hybrids of this species,

but which are characteristic representatives of the streaked Indian type of

domestic Cat, described in the note to Vol. XXV, p. 442. Having since

communicated on this subject with Dr. Scott, he subsequently wrote word,

that—“ With regard to hybrid Cats, I can offer no proof; but I know

that a year or two ago a common domestic Cat had kittens under my

haystack, and one of them was precisely like the F. ornata, and without

any white,—whilst my gardener had a tom which might easily have passed

for an oRNATA, only that he had a white collar and belly, and from living

less in the sun was less rusty in colour. There are plenty of tame Cats

here with spots like those of the ornata ; and I will try to procure and

send some skins of them.”

PTEROCLES ARENARIUS; a skeleton, kindly sent at my request.

PALUMBENA GNICAPILLA, nobis, n. s. Indian ‘Stock Pigeon;’ a skin

described in a separate paper.*

* Dr. Scott has likewise favored me with a description of two living Ghor-khurs

from the Bikdnir desert ; the male of which is most remarkable for having a well

developed cross-stripe over the withers, besides faint stripes on the limbs,—not

a trace of either being visible in the female. 'They are believed, he says, to be

between eighteen months and two years old.

“The male stands, as near as I could measure, 45 inches high (114 hands)

at the shoulder; and the female about 2 in. less (but she was not measured).

240 Proceedings of the Asiatic Soctety. [No. 3.

2. Lt Brownlow, Engineers, Lahore. Skull of Ursus IsaBELuinus,

from Kashmir; and a few bird-skins, also from Kashmir, including

Muropes apiasTeR and NuctrraGa MULTIMACULATA. Likewise some spe-

cimens of a reversed pupiform Butimus new to the museum, and distinct

from B. KuNAWaRENsIs of Hutton.

3. Capt. Robert Tytler, 38th N. I., Delhi. Five skins of birds, includ-

ing the Hirunpo concotor, Sykes, Small Crested Lark—Ga.zripa

Boysi1, and Sytvia Jerponi (if correctly distinguished from the Euro-

pean S. ORPHEA).

“The upper part of the body is of a buff-fawn colour, with white belly and

legs, and a white streak from the flanks up the side.

“Both have a dark stripe along the back, looking like a contimuation of the

mane, except that the hair of it is short and smooth: the colour of this stripe is

dark brown or nearly black, and it extends all along the back and down part of

the tail. The male has a most distinctly marked stripe of the same colour across

the withers; but the female has not. The male also has distinctly marked fawn

stripes on both fore and hind legs; but I could not discern a trace of them in

the female. The black tuft at the end of the tail reaches to about the hocks.

The cross-stripe over the withers of the male was about an inch broad, and

extended about a foot down the shoulders on each side. Moreover there was a

female Ghor-khur here some years ago, and she was said to have the cross-stripé

on withers. This I have been told by more than one person who saw her.”

Of several Ghor-khurs which I have seen and minutely observed in Europe,

one only (in the late Surrey Zoological Gardens) had an incipient cross-stripe,

extending only about an inch on one side (as near as I can remember), and less

than half an inch on the other; and I have sought in vain for traces of the

cross-stripes on the limbs: these occur in some domestic Donkeys, even adults,

but not in all, however young; and are particularly distinct in some of the small

Asses of this country, being of a black colour (not fawn), moderately broad

and placed somewhat distantly apart.

Tt would seem that the deserts of Southern Arabia, the Thebaid, Nubia,and Abys-

sinia (both on the plains and mountains), are the true indigenous home of Equus

asinus (the “ Wild Ass” of Chesney) ; that the more northern parts of Arabia,

with Syria and Mesopotamia, are tenanted by the recently described E. HuMIPPUS

(or * Wild Horse” of Chesney) ; while the deserts of W. India, 8. Afghanistan,

Persia, and thence onward to the Aral and beyond, are inhabited by the Ghor-

khur, the distinctions of which (if any) from the E. HeMronus of middle Asia re-

main to be positively determined.

“From what I have heard,” remarks Dr. Scott, “the Ghor-khur is still plenti-

ful enough in the Bikhanor desert ; but they are wild and difficult of approach.

ea ee a

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 241

4, Babu Rajendra Mallika. Body of a Civet (VIVERRA ZIBETHA) now

preparing as a skeleton. Ditto of a male Hog Deer in its seasonal spotted

eoat,—sent as a hybrid between C. axis and C. porcrnus. Ditto of a fine

adult male of an African Monkey, the CercopirHecus cyNosuRuS; and

ditto of a Cassowary, which has been prepared as a skeleton.

5. C. Darwin, Esq. F. R. 8. &c. &c. Pair of Red Deer horns (C. ELA-

pHus),—frontlet with horns, and three odd horns, of C. Dama,—and pair

of horns of C. vizcinranus; with specimens of various British Crus-

tacea.

6. Major Tickell, late of Moulmein. Also some specimens of Crabs

from that vicinity.

7. Dr. J.R. Withecombe. A beautiful 8S. African Snake, the Enars

HyGzI, forwarded from Cape town.

May \st, 1857. EK. Biyra.

A year or two ago the Buhawulpur Nawab in a month’s shooting only got seven.

Their flesh is eaten as venison.”

Since the foregoing observations were transcribed, the following notice has

appeared in a contemporary Journal, the ‘ India Sporting Review,’ x. s. No. VIII.

no doubt elicited by some articles contributed to that periodical with the express

design of educing such information from competent authorities.

It appears that Ghor-khwrs are still tolerably numerous in the Pat or desert

between Asni and the hills, west of the Indus, above Mithur-kote. ‘They are

to be found wandering about this desert pretty well throughout the year; but in

the early summer, when the grass and the water in the pools have dried up from

the hot winds (which are here terrific), the greater number, if not all, of the

Ghor-khwrs migrate to the hills for grass and water. Some are probably to be

found in the hills throughout the year, for among them are sandy plains of greater

or less extent. ‘The foaling season is in June, July, and August ; when the Belu-

chis ride down and catch numbers of foals, finding a ready sale in the canton-

ments for them, as they are taken down on speculation to Hindustan. They also

shoot great numbers of full grown ones for food, the ground in places in the

desert being very favorable for a ‘ drive,’ or stalking.”

The author performed the

difficult feat, on an Arab horse, of riding down and spearing one of these animals,

a female; and he remarks that—“ They stand about 12 hands high, are of a fawn

(Isabelle) colour, with white on the belly, chest, and neck. They have a dark

chesnut mane, [and black] dorsal stripe, tuft to the tail, and tips to the ears.

Some are very beautifully striped on the legs; many are mottled. I have seen

one or two of a very dark colour. They have not generally the stripe on the

shoulder, though I think I have seen some with if slightly marked. ‘Their head

very large ; ears very long: the eye handsome; and coat very fine.” This vari-

ation in colouring and especially the stripes on the logs do not appear to haye

been observed in the Kyangs of Tibet.

242 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 3.

Liprary.

The library has received the following accessions during the month of

April last.

Presented. ’

An introduction to the use of the Mouth-Blowpipe, by Dr. Theodore

Scheerer. Translated and compiled by H. F. Blanford, 1856, 12mo.—By

Mr. BLANForD.

Selections fromthe Records of the Government of India, No. X XI.

containing Revenue Reports of the Ganges Canal, for the year 1855-56.

Irrigation in Egypt.—By tor Govt. or Inpta.

Memoirs of the Geological Survey of India, Vol. I. Part I.—By tue

Govt. oF BENGAL.

Selections from the Records of the Bengal Government, No. XXV.

Reports on the Bengal Teak Plantations, Productive capacities of the

Shan countries, Reports on Serajgunge, on Vaccination, on the Tea Plant

in Sylhet, on the Botanical Gardens, Calcutta, and on the Patna Opium

Agency, 2 copies.— By THE Same.

Ditto from the Records of Government, N. W. Provinces, Part XXV.

1857.—By roe AcRra Govt.

Ditto from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. XX XVIII.

Correspondence relating to the tenure of the possessions in the Deccan

held by His Highness Jyajee Rao Sindia under the Treaty of Surie

Aujungaum.—By tHE Govt. or BomBay.

Ditto from ditto, No. XL. Papers regarding the Revenue Settlement

effected in the districts of Omerkote and Thun: and on the Condition and

System of arrangement of Thurr and Pankur districts —By THE SaME.

Annual Report (34th) of the Parental Academic Institution and Doveton

College, 1857.—By Mr. Smirn.

The Annals of Indian Administration, edited by M. Townsend, Part

I. and I1.—Serampore, 1857.—By tur Govt. oF Inpia.

Sjair kén Tamboehan, door Dr. J. J. de Hollander, Lieden, 1856,

pamphlet.—By THE AUTHOR.

Mémoirs de la Société Impéreale des Sciences Naturelles de Cherbourg,

3 vols. 8vo. Paris, 1855.—By THE SociEry.

Zeitschrift der Deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Band XI.

Heft I. Liepzig, 1857, 2 copies. —By THE GerMAN OrniEnrTaL Soctery.

Indische Alterthumskunde. 8vo. von C. Lassen. Dritten Bandes,

Helft. I. Liepzig, 1857.— By tut Autuor.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XX. Part I, March.

1857,—By THE SociEry.

1857. Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 24:3

First Report of the Committee on Beneficient Institutions, 1857.—By

THE SAME.

Journal Asiatique, Nos. 32 and 33, November and December, 1856, and

January, 1857.—By tue Astatic Society or Paris.

Proceedings of the Royal Geographical Society of London, Nos. 6 and

7.—By THe Soctrgry.

Jcurnal of the Agricultural and Horticultural Society of India, Vol.

IX. Part III. Caleutta.—By Tue Society.

Discours de M. Garcin de Tassy, pamphlet.—By rue Aurnor.

Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. 8, Nos. 23 and 24.—By THE

SocrEry.

Journal of the American Oriental Society, No. 2.—By tHe Kpitor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for April, 1857.—By tHe Epiror.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for March, 1857.—By tae Epirors.

The Oriental Baptist for April, 1857.—By tae Eprror.

The Upadeshak for April —By tue Epirtor.

Exchanged.

The Atheneum for January and February, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Journal

of Science, Nos. 84 and 85.

Purchased.

Astronomical Observations made at the Royal Observatory at Green-

wich in the years of 1817 to i825. 8 vols. folio.

Observations Astronomiques faites a l’Observatoire Royal de Paris,

Tome I. 1825, Paris.

Histoire des Insectes, Lépidoptéres. Tome I. V. VI. VII. and VIII.

8vo. Paris, with Planches.

Visit to Remarkable Places: by William Howitt, Svo.

Die Lieder des Hafis. Persisch mit dem commentare des Sudi heraus-

gegeben von Hermann Brockhaus, Band, I Viertes Heft, Liepzig, 1857.

The Literary Gazette, Nos. 2087 to 2095.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 1 to 7, 1857.

Journal des Savants for January and February, 1857.

Index to ditto for 1856.

Revue et Magazin de Zoologie, No. 12 for 1856 and No. 1 for 1857.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, No. 5. 1857.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 110 and 111, for

1857.

244 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. SN ORS.

The Quarterly Review, No. 201, January, 1857.

Revue des deux Mondes, (bi-monthly) January 15th to 1st March, 1857.

The American Journal of Sciences and Arts, No. 67.

Gour Das Bysa’cx.

LInbravian §& Assistant Secretary.

Ast May, 1857.

JOURNAL

OF THE

ASIATIC SOCIETY.

PARADARAA DAPI PLP SIP LI PP LVI IV LI IS LILI INI ISPRIININL AS IND Et

No. IV. 1857.

—eeyyyyyv—

PLLA

Notes on the distribution of some of the land and freshwater shells of

India: Part I—By W. THEOBALD, JUNR.

BIRMAH AND THE TENASSERIM PROVINCES.

In the present paper it is my intention to give a sketch of the

distribution of the land and fluviatile shells of certain portions of

India, as far as they have been observed, in the hope that my notes

may prove a not uninteresting addition to our previous knowledge

of the subject, and shew by the great addition now made to the list

of known species, how much yet remains to be done in this depart-

ment of Natural History.

The names used are with scarcely an exception those furnished by

Mr. Benson, who has described many of the new species in the

Annals and Magazine of Natural History for last year, though

many still possess merely MSS. names, which, together with the

new species described from specimens furnished by me, I have indi-

cated in the following list, by asterisks (*).

On my first communicating with Mr. Benson, he informed me

that but twenty-three species of land shells were authentically

known from the Tenasserim Provinces. Of these, four species, which

escaped my notice, may here be mentioned to complete the list up

to the present time, viz.

Vitrina Birmanica, Philippi.

Bulimus moniliferus, Gould.

Cyclophorus perdix, Sav.

Leptopoma Birmanum, Pfr.

No. LXXXVIII.—NeEw Szrizs, Vout. XXVI. 2K

246 The land and freshwater shells of India. [No. 4.

CYCLOSTOMID#.

Pterocyclos. Benson.

1.* P. pullatus, B.—Akowtong (on the Irrawaddi R.) Not un-

common.

2.* P. cetra, B.—-Maulmein and Phaiethan (on the Tenasserim

R.) Not common.

Cyclophorus. Montfort.

3. C. aurantiacus, Schum.—Tenasserim valley, not common.

4,* C. Theobaldianus, B.—Tenasserim valley, Maulmein, Thaiet-

mio. This shell is no where common. In the Tenasserim valley

it equals C. aurantiacus in size, but is easily distinguished by its

more depressed form, colourless peristome, and flexuous striation.

It has the greatest range of any Cyclostomatous shell of the provinces.

5.* C. Haughtoni, mihi.—n. s. Testa, simili C. aurantiaco solida

nitidiuscula; carinaté, superne saturate castaned; in decorticatis

speciminibus, spira lineis albidis ziczae variegataé. Carina, catenata,

alternate albidé et castanea. Periomphalo albido, fasciis nonnullis

castaneis spiralibus lineato. Peristomate vix pallidissime ochraceo,

ore interiori cerulescente—Maulmein.

Size ie naa

1.35 Minor

pleasure in naming after Capt. Haughton, to whom I am indebted

for some fine shells. It occurs abundantly at the “farm caves,” and

is at once distinguished from all other Tenasserim Cyclophori, by

its parti-coloured funiculate keel, which is not the result of abrasion,

but is best seen in specimens covered by the epidermis.

* diameter in inches. This shell I have much

6. C. expansus, Pfr.—Tenasserim valley. Not rare. This

shell varies much in size, from at to =

7.* C. affinis, mibi.—n. 8. Testa, subgloboso-turbinata, umbili-

cata, solidiuscula, castaneo-marmorata, haud nitida, vix carinata ;

peristomate reflexo, forti, expansiusculo-distorto, pallidissime flaves-

1.60 1.40

cente, intus cerulescente 136 to iw.

This shell has no very marked character, unless a distortion in

the peristome, one-third from its sutural margin, should prove con-

Maulmein.

1857. ] The land and freshwater shells of India. 247

stant. But two specimens were obtained, of which the measurements

are given above.

8. CC. fulguratus, Pfr—Thaiet-mio, Rangoon, very common.

This fine shell is not rare at Rangoon and becomes very abundant

near Thaietmio. It varies much in size and colour, some specimens

1.80 1.03

are almost colourless, —— to ——

1.30 0.85.

9.* ©. eryptomphalus, B.—Ava. Procured by Mr. Oldham,

does not seem to be a plentiful species.

10.* C. scurra, B.—Pegu (province).

11.* C. balteatus, B.—Pegu (province).

12.* C. scissimargo, B.—Phaiethan. Not common.

13.* C. calyx, B.—Akowtong, on the Irrawaddee, not common.

14. ©. cornu-venatorium, Sav.—Ava. Procured by Mr. Oldham.

15. C. perdix, Sav, (Not obtained by me.)

Leptopoma. Pfeiffer.

16.* L. aspirans, B.—Tenasserim valley, very common.

17. L. Birmanum, Pfr.—(Not noticed by me).

Alyceus. Gray.

18.* A. pyramidalis, B.—Therabuin hill, near the Tenasserim

river. This pretty little shell appears confined to Therabuin hill,

where it is not very common. It is of a delicate pink tint.

19.* A. amphora, B. Maulmein and Tenasserim valley. Rare.

20.* A. umbonalis, B.—Akowtong. Not rare,

21.* A. sculptilis, B.—Thaiet-mio. Rare.

22.* A, armillatus, B.—Thaiet-mio. Rare.

Megalomastoma. Guilding.

23.* M. gravidum, B.—Maulmein. Very common.

24. M. sectilabre, Gould.—Yanglaw, on the Tenasserim. Very

rare,

Rhaphaulus. Pfeiffer.

25. WR. chrysalis, Pfr.—Maulmein. Very rare.

Pupina. Vignard.

26.* P. arula, B.—Yanglaw, very rare. Among dead leaves.

27.* P. artata, B.—Maulmein. Not uncommon, among dead

2K 2

248 The land and freshwater shells of India. [ No. 4.

leaves and rubbish at,the foot of rocks. By the habitat “ Maulmein’’

the “ Farm caves’’ in limestone hills a few miles distant are intended.

Otopoma. Gray.

28.* O. blennus, B.—Maulmein. Rare.

HHydrocena. Parreyss.

29.* H. illex, B.—Phaiethan. Not rare. On the bare face of

limestone rocks.

30.* H. pyxis, B.—Thaiet-mio. Not rare, under stones.

31.* H. frustrillum, B.—Ava. Procured abundantly by Mr.

Oldham.

Tabular view of the distribution of : i d = z me

the Cyclostomide, in Birmah and 2 = 5 i 2 2

the Tenasserim Provinces. rs oe 3 5 |S s

‘S in | rd S Ee a

< = < 64 Ss |x

Cyclophorus cornu venatorium Sav. i

* a cryptomphalus, B. ...| *

a fulguratus, Pfr. mac ubtts = “ 8

* a calyx, B. ile wes Ley. laws dae ‘a

* = Theobaldianus, B. ...| ... * ane ad ns *

* - Hanghtoni, mihi, ...| ... a We +), 46

* Ms affinis, mihi, ... Ble ceo th ee Ae =

* e BCU A AEs. Wists Bee Saas ites ae z

* is balteatus, P. ... alin ea ome ve ?

9 aurantiacus, Schurr, ,.. ' a

5 expansus, Pfr..., ag

* iy scissimargo, B. Bie kes ade i

* Alycceus sculptilis, B.*... Bil aye chs *

* 5 armillatus, B.... Sidi daoh *

* umbonalis, B.... an mi “

# bs amphora, B. ... al. Wee nab ax ales Ea =

* pyramidalis, B. as) AE fide ase st =

* Hydrocena ar wie B. Bae Ts

*% _ pyxis, B. Pee seal ions rm

* " illex, B. e: omen aise sie cre Sc ae *

Rhaphaulus chrysalis, Par), se ae fe: an ane °f

* Megalomastoma eravidum, Bey | ceases ous es ne =

‘5 sectilabre,Gould, ...| ... Bei ta ee “Oe ik

* Pupina artata, B. Pie A Lt ae Se ay *

* arula, B. wis 0% =

* Pterocyclos pullatus, B. ... 3

* bs cetra, B. eee Brailes bebo “ “ 4

* Leptopoma aspirans, B. ... Rl we — sa aa se!

* Otopoma blennus, B. Ste REN cel se .

Hehz. . £.

1.* H. Oldhami, B.—Ava. Procured by Mr. Oldham.

2.* H. scalpturita, B.W—Ava. What appears to be a small

1857.| The land and freshwater sheils of India. 249

variety of the same shell occurs at Thaiet-mio, and nearly approaches

H. similaris, Fer. in aspect, though larger.

3.* H. bolus, B.—Thaiet-mio. Very abundant at Thaiet-mio,

Prome, Henzada, &c.

4.* H. pauxillula, B.—Thaiet-mio, where this minute helix is

rare.

5.* H. mensula, B.—Thaiet-mio. Rare.

6.* H. hariola, B.—Thaiet-mio. Rather rare. Inhabits Acacia

trees in jungle.

7.* H. petila, B—Thaiet-mio. Rare.

8. H. refuga, Gould.—Thaiet-mio and Akowtong. Not very

rare.

9.* H. pausa, B.—Akowtong. Not common. Found in gardens

on Areca Palms, &e.

10. H. rotatoria, V. de Busch.—Akowtong. Very common, found

in company with the last. This shell is rarely distinguishable from

the Sylhet H. tapeiria, B. By the aid of a lens however the sculp-

ture is found to be more ornate and flexuous, whilst in the latter

it is simply striate.

11.* H. textrina, B—Henzada. Common in jungle. The adult

shell has a very handsome pellucid appearance. In the rains the

foot is too large for immediate retraction.

12.* H. molecula, B.—Rangoon. This little species abounds

on the Great Pagoda.

13. 4H. achatina, Gray.—Maulmein. Very abundant.

14.* H. bombax, B.—Maulmein. Rather rare.

15. H.honesta, Gould——Maulmein. Tenasserim valley. Rather

common.

16. H. Merguiensis, Philippii—Maulmein. Tenasserim valley.

Common. Seems a var. of the next species.

17. H. Gabata, Gould.—Maulmein. Mergui. Common.

18.* H. capessens, B.—Maulmein. Not very rare.

19.* H. infrendens, B.—Maulmein. Not very rare.

20.* H. Pylaica, B.—Maulmein. Not uncommon. This curious

little shell resembles the American H. hirsuta.

21.* H. catinus, B.—Maulmein. Very rare.

22.* H. cassidula, B—Maulmein. Rare.

250 The land and freshwater shells of India. [ No. 4.

23. H. delibrata, B. (H. procumbens, Gould)—Maulmein. Te-

nasserim valley. No where common. This species has a very wide

range, being also found near Cherra.

24. H. refuga var. dextrorsa.—Phaiethan. This dextral var.

was only met with at one spot in the Tenasserim valley, where it

was not rare; it is curious that H. refuga does not occur in the

valley, but was first seen at Akowtong. :

25. H. castra, B.—Pija. Rare. A single specimen of this Dar-

jiling shell was found at Pija between Tavoy and Mergui.

26.* H. attegia, B.—Phaiethan. Not common.

27.* H. arx, B.—Therabuin Hill. Rare. This hill has afforded

many singular forms, no where else met with.

28.* H. convallata, B.—Therabuin Hill. Rare. Another sin-

gular shell also met with near Piya on the coast between Mergui

and Tavoy.

29.* H. biforcata, B.—Therabuin Hill. A most singular shell,

of which but one adult specimen was procured.

30.* H. ceryx, B.—Phaiethan Hill. Rare.

31.* H. artificiosa, B.—Phaiethan. Not rare, but nowhere else

found.

32.* H. causia, B.—Phaiethan. Rare.

33.* H. forabilis, B.—Phaiethan. Very rare.

34.* H. perpaula, B.—Phaiethan. Very rare.

35.* H. levicula, B.—Phaiethan. Rare.

36.* H. petasus, B.—Phaiethan. Not rare.

37.* H. precaria, B.—Phaiethan. Very rare.

38. H. Saturnia, Gould.—Tenasserim valley. are.

39, H. anceps, Gould.—Tenasserim valley. Common.

40. H. retrorsa, Gould.—Tenasserim valley. Common.

41.* H. acerra, B.—Mergui. Common.

42. HH. resplendens, Philippi.i—Tenasserim valley.

43. H. Theodori, Philippi-Yanglaw. Very rare.

1857. | The land and freshwater shells of India. 251

Tenasserim Valley.

Tabular view of the distribution of : : :

Helices in Birmah and the

Tenasserim Provinces.

Hill.

Akowtong

Rangoon.

Maulmein

Therabuin

Phaiethan

Yanglaw.

ee | eee | ey | ee | ee ee ee ee |

* Helix Oldhami, B. “th P| seis

3, scalpturita, B. ... eae

ne beles, Be :.... Bai cea on

» pauxillula, B. oh 62 Mee

» mensula, B. eet tal

» hariola, B. us sail ae

* * * KK K

» petila, B. a

Pap efuga Gould, ... Rctilage

» pausa, B. :

5 rotatoria, V. de Busch,

3 textrina, B.

* *

eh molecula, B. wll

» achatina, Gray, ...

* | %

eee *

eee eso *

eee eee eee *

Ze 4, bombax, B, veer se We

* 4, capessens,B. ... Sei scion ert Nel

* ., infrendens, B. .. aac Wiseg hia lasetaliadeel oe

fete viaica, b. yi: site Sees llvacala hi

7.) ‘eatinus, .B: At Rat Ree te et PASI Ae

* ., cassidula, B. Ate ee etewss A tae alice: feces eres

», delibrata, B. SPA REE (Sane NOE EH ic ca | a | i

» — Merguiensis, Philippi, BIS LoN coer scalie cece Kas ee ley me

» Gabata, Gould, .., Ry lk cen | Sata EMER cet ea” iy

Mets Gold, 2 IT ol) Fe) eT ef

Pe | castra, B. sch ft adele lite oaieede Re -

» vrefuga var. dextrors, pcllinconm [When | feretocealll can Rohe tect)

5, Saturnia, Gould, Eee ee eet 2 fe il

» retrorsa, Gould, a evasion Was dciecamolia men Ngee ae

* ,, acerra, B. is SS Re A eo

5 resplendens, Philippi, PP SEE sce as a Ae atte etter nome

5, anceps, Gould, ... cienihl avs dee’ lee [ves Beles tell. 5

ears, 6... 2 ei Babb caicies hiectocak fla seul [bs saholaes a

* , convallata, Bea ci. he RPE Oe a

* ., biforcata, B. Bes * Waco AMS «We *

=, attegia, B. ras Pua eses Wh ieee aeet i wt *

Miss ceryx, B, sis a aesl mise LER ed Crete aS. CHESS =

ims aftificiosa, Bb. ... My sae eens eae dl ees oe le»

=. causia, B. hes See ee Y ee ab oe : *

= 5 forabilis, B, “a saainese ley cae-obeee eaaet Maes “i

* ., perpaula, B. Ga AE Ree ara a | I | eh ae “f

* ., levicula, B. ny? Baie [edie Pee tae Teck *

* » petasus, B. a SRE T'S ee ae *

= .,° precaria, B. Paige A) beet) Sate RAID : is

» TLheodori, Philippi, eee caealts.2 jl) ule. aes : =

Hypsclostoma. Benson.

44.* HH. tubiferum, B.—'Thaiet-mio. his singular little anos-

252 The land and freshwater shells of India. [ No. 4.

tomatous shell was only met with at one spot on limestone rocks,

near the Coal mines, where it did not seem very rare.

Streptaxis. Gray.

45. §. Petiti, Gould—Maulmein. Tenasserim valley. Common.

Vitrina. Draparnaud.

46. V. Birmanica, Philippi, was not met with by me.

Cryptosoma. Mihi, n. q.

Testa vitrine simile, sed robustiore. Peristomate obtuso haud

tenue. Animale, penitus intra testam retractile, et in estivationis

tempore, solido epiphragmate obtecto.

47. C. prestans, (Vitrina prestans) Gould.—Maulmein. Mar-

taban. Tenasserim valley.—I have separated this shell from Vitrina,

as the animal is perfectly retractile, and the peristome is thicker

than in Vitrina proper, and not membranous. It is common in

holes in laterite at Martaban and not rare throughout the Tenas-

serim Valley. Its colour is a bay olive Cajiput green.

Succinea. Draparnaud.

48. §. semiserica, Gould.—Tavoy. Tenasserim Valley. Not

rare.

49, §. (ined.).—Rangoon. A small species, rather rare.

Bulimus. WScopoli.

50. J. perversus, var. atricallosus, Gould.—Tenasserim Valley.

Common. Dextral and sinistral shells occur in equal numbers.

51. B. Janus, Pfr.—Procured alive from dealers in Mergui, and

said to come from the neighbourhood. Dexiral and sinistral shells

equally common.

52.* B. Theobaldianus, B.—Yanglaw. Very rare.

53.* B. putus, B.—Akowtong. Mather rare.

54. 3B. insularis, Ehr—Below Ava. Procured abundantly by

Mr, Oldham.

55. B. gracilis, H.—A little shell which seems to be this species

is common from Thaiet-mio to Tavoy.

56. B. moniliferus, Gould.—Not met with by me.

1857. | The land and freshwater shells of India. 253

Achatina. Lamarck.

57. A. tenuispira, B.—Thaiet-mio. Akowtong. A slender var.

of this Darjiling species is not uncommon at the roots of Bamboo

clumps near Akowtong.

Pupa. Lamarck.

58. P. bicolor, Hutton. (P. mellita, Gould).—Thaiet-mio,

Tavoy. This little species is widely spread, but nowhere abundant.

Té is usually found in moist earth in company with Bulimus gracilis.

Clausilia. Draparnaud.

59. C. insignis, Gould——Maulmein. Very rare. Tenasserim

Valley. Not common.

60. C. Philippiana, Pfr—Maulmein. Tenasserim Valley. Very

common.

Auricula. Lamarck.

61. <A. dactylus, Pfr—Mergui. Not common. In Mangrove

swamps.

62. A. glans, B.—Ambherst. At the mouth of the Salween or

Maulmein river. Rare.

Pythia.

63. P. plicata, Fer. Ava (teste Oldham.) Maulmein. Common.

eben Were. |e

ees eS ls a

Tabular view of the distribution of various 2 Et eae. lee =|

Burmese Helicide. Salk OC = al ae

> | SG | a ©

4/8/34 /8!4 ia

* Hypsclostoma tubiferum, B. ... Sp eee i

Streptaxis Petiti, Gould, ae Salo %

Cryptosoma prestans, Gould, ... ea

Succinea semiserica, Gould, a See tartines wae te

ie (ined.), oi sg Poe es Gee eres

Bulimus atricallosus, Gould, ... me - Ed seecanl Masta (arse NReOR | eae is

ay Janus, Pfr. ade ihe Piel escent h Gea l te ave *?

* a Theobaldianus, B. ... a a RE RAE A I ER

ee putas, B. Afi a, Aa Mee ~

wi insularis, Ehr. “i aeich| OF :|

gracilis, H. ae eae se 4 I ga A

Achatina tenuispira, B. So Set ee

Pupa bicolor, H. (mellita, Gould), ati Suttiects Sha Fabetoy oP opie

Clausilia insignis, Gould, : oat Pe scauk age) Ieee Vices ut aaah oe

» Philippiana, Gould, ba ae Bs ARATE OMe eee

254 Practical Notes on Burdwan Coal. [No. 4.

Total Cyclostomide, Genera, ... ae So ae 9

33 33 Species, ece see ece ece 31

9 * a sie ee des Be we!

dy Helicidee Genera, .... “5 pee en 10

39 93 Species, eee eoe eoe eea 60

9 opin, 99 39 60

» Auriculide. Genera, he ats ste

bP] 33 Species, ece eee eo eee 3

Grand Total, ... nee sot 94

June 8th, 1857.

PLP LPP PDLADLP PLA LP LLIVPVPVPFLLILAPLALII SI SII

Practical Notes on the best mode of obtaining the highest duty

Srom Burdwan Coal as compared with English Coal. By HENRY

PIDDINGTON.

1. J assume in this paper that the coal supplied is the average

good Burdwan Coal ; for there can be no doubt that a great deal of

inferior, shaly, stuff has been from time to time sold as Burdwan

Coal, and hence, and from the cause which I shall subsequently

indicate, arises its bad reputation amongst engineers. I assume also

that the boiler furnace is one with “ joggle bars.”

2. Perfectly pure coal should contain no earthy matter whatso-

ever, but this is rarely, perhaps never, met with. Good English Pit

Coal contains from 8.00 to 0.8 per cent. of earthy matter; the aver-

age of such as has been examined here being 2.8 per cent. and the

Welsh Steam Coal 2.0 per cent. An average of several analyses of

good Burdwan Coal gives from 12 to 15 per cent. as the proportion

of earthy matters; so that we have

English Pit-Coal. Best Welsh Steam Coal. Burdwan Coal.

2.8 pr. ct. 2.0 pr. ct. 135 pr. ct.

3. Ido not refer here to the iron and sulphur, of which most

coal contains varying proportions; because I am not so much writ-

ing a chemical as a practical paper, and while the iron on the one

hand is usually included in the earthy matters, the Burdwan Coal

on the other does not contain much sulphur.

1857. | Practical Notes on Burdwan Coal. 255

4, Again: every engineer knows that some coal contains too

Jarge a proportion of gaseous matter and too little carbon (coke) ; so

that though it will light and flame up easily, and thereby raise the

steam quickly, yet it does not leave a good bed of glowing coke to

keep it up steadily for a long time, and is thus both a wasteful and

so to say an wnceertain coal; wasteful because it burns away too

fast, and uncertain as giving at one time too much steam and ano-

ther too little. And moreover an improper coal for sea-going Steam-

ers as they can only carry a given quantity.

5. The opposite kind, where there is too little gas and too much

carbon, raises steam slowly and is apt to coke and clinker and the

fire to get slack, for it then approaches to a coke or anthracite fire

in a coal furnace. And thus the steam is apt to get low.

6. Again as to the earthy matter. Up toa small per centage,

say perhaps 5 per cent.it does not do harm when burnt in coal,

though it tells heavily in the coke, and it perhaps keeps the coal toge-

ther while burning ; but being incombustible itself, if this proportion

is exceeded, the burning of the coal is to a certain extent impeded,

and the coal clinkers very much, so as to require constant, and to

the firemen, fatiguing attention. And there is much waste in the

clinker which, when examined, will be usually found to contam a

considerable proportion of coke in the cinder.

7. The gaseous contents of coal and its carbon are also to be

considered, and here we have from the same authority as before.

Gaseous. Carbon.

Pasian Pit: Coalyew veo. Jo. ele 9 81200 ve!) GRE

MVelsh Coals eo PU BSB os.) KOBE

Burdwan Coales 04 POSE OS BID bs eo BORD

We have therefore in the Burdwan Coal an excess of gaseous

matter and a deficiency of about 18 per cent. of carbon (coke) of

which 133 per cent. is made up by earthy matter and the remainder

by water, of which it usually contains from 4 to 8 per cent.

8. We build Steamers, such as they are, in India; but their

machinery is sent out from England, where the engineers and

boiler-makers have no idea of these peculiarities in our Indian Coal,

and of course construct their furnaces for burning English Coal,

and as our officers and engineers know little or nothing also of

2L 2

256 Practical Notes on Burdwan Coal. [No. 4.

Indian Coal, except that it is a troublesome coal—that it clinkers

excessively ; and sometimes, where they get a large proportion of

inferior kinds in their lot,—that the steam cannot be kept up with

the Burdwan Coal—they are clamorous for English Coal,—and get it.

We are thus in very many cases trying TO BURN INDIAN CoaL on

ENGLISH GRATES! and are always complaining that we do not succeed.

9. I have succeeded, and on a large scale, when boiling sugar in

open pans, in obtaining, not the duty of English Coal from Burdwan

Coal, but something much higher than could be looked for—say

within ten or fifteen per cent. of English Coal, and without muck

more trouble, except in a little more work with the picker, which

the men carefully attended to because the furnaces being con-

structed to burn their own smoke, which they did very completely,

the men, who were well paid, were liable to a fine, if the smoke-

flag was seen for any lengti of time at the top of the chimney.

10. And I managed this by the following simple expedient.

Whenever I had Burdwan Coal to burn, I took out one of the bars

and steadied the others by bits of scrap iron put in between their

shoulders. This increased the air-way and the Burdwan Coal then

burnt freely, but of course gave a larger quantity of its white ash.

11. The reason of this is simple enough. If we suppose a given

quantity of English, or Welsh, Coal to perform its highest duty as a

steam coal, in any given time, with, say a certain number of cubic

feet of air, which we will call 1000, we have first a coal containing

say 23 per cent. of earthy matter requiring this amount of air in a

given time.

12. But it is clear that a coal containing 12 or 15 per cent. will

require a much larger amount of air in the same time. We do not

know how much, or what is the proportion in which the earthy

matter obstructs the combustion of the coalin which it is contained ;

but we do certainly know that every question of combustion from

Cannel Coal to Anthracite is a question of draft, and of air-way; of

the rapidity of the passage of the air, which is the draft, and of the

size of the spaces through which this draft passes, which is the air-way.

13. Now as we can only alter our funnels by reducing them,

which we do not want to do, the draft is a constant quantity, and

hence the resource is that which I have spoken of above—to increase

1857. | Kokén and other places in Central Asia. 257

the air-way. I have spoken there of taking out one fire bar, but

I am not sure that where the shoulders of the bars are narrow or

the furnace large, this would be enough; yet to take out two would

perhaps leave the spaces so wide, that the small coal would fall

through before it was burnt P and it should not be forgotten that

these questions, though without very accurate experiments and mea-

surements we can only estimate them roughly, are really questions

of nice adjustment.

LVI LVI DAPI

Notes on Kokéin, Kashghér, Yarkand, and other places im Central

Asia.— By Lieut. H. G. Raverty, 3rd Regt. Bombay, N. L,

Assistant Commissioner, Multan.

About six years since, the Right Hon’ble B. Disraeli, M. P., at

the prayer of the sisters of the unfortunate Lieutenant Wyburd of

the Indian Navy, at that time supposed to be in slavery at Kokdn,

the capital of one of the petty states of Central Asia, had, by a

motion in the House of Commons, endeavoured to rouse the British

Government to effect his release.

This officer had been despatched from Persia to Bokhdra for the

purpose of making enquiry into the fate of Stoddard and Conolly,

and had never returned. He appears to have been sold into slavery

by the ruler of Bokhara.

Some months previous to the motion of Mr. Disraeli, an agent,

said to have been despatched by the reigning chief of Kokan, had

arrived at Peshawar, with information, that a European calling

himself Wypart, was then in confinement in that city under the

suspicion of being a spy of the Russians (with whom the Kokdn

chief was at enmity); but that he protested he was an Englishman

and had escaped from slavery at Bokhara. The agent in question,

I was informed, had stated the readiness of the Chief to release

the unfortunate man, if any British officer were sent for that pur-

pose, and would satisfy him as to his being a British subject.

As soon as 1 became aware of these circumstances, I tendered

my humble services, both to the Government of Bombay, and the

258 Kokdn and other places in Central Asia. [No. 4.

Supreme Government, and offered to proceed through Kashmir and

endeavour to effect the release of the officer in question.

Quite by accident I met with a Jew at Bombay, who had accom-

panied Dr. Hoff on his journey to Bokhara, and who readily offered

to accompany me; and two respectable natives of Kokdn itself,

who were returning to their native land from the pilgrimage to

Mekkah, were ready to attach themselves to me, and answer for my

safety, if necessary.

I was therefore sanguine of success, but, I am sorry to say, my

services were not accepted; and it appears that a native was

despatched on the mission, who, as might naturally have been

expected, failed. He has lately returned, and from the exceedingly

meagre account of his journey, published in the Journal of the

Society, No. LV. of 1856, he appears to have gone to very little

trouble in the matter, and to have confined himself to asking ques-

tions in bazars, and in despatching natives of the country to the

adjacent districts for the same purpose. Whether he was duly

accredited to the Chief of Kokan or otherwise, does not appear.

There is very little chance of the unfortunate officer, or European

whoever he may have been, being still in the land of the living;

the unfulfilment of that hope, so long deferred, which maketh the

heart sick, must long since have brought to a termination the

earthly troubles of the wretched captive.

For a number of years, I have made it a rule to collect every

item of information respecting the geography, inhabitants, and

resources of the little known parts of Central Asia. What I had

already gleaned, at the time I offered to proceed to Kokan, and

information furnished by the two Kokanies, I have referred to, I

now submit, as giving a better and more minute, although still

very meagre, account of this important and little known country,

than that furnished by the unsuccessful agent, Khwdja Ahmad,

Nakshbandi.

+f * * % %

Kokan, originally called Kokand, Koran, and Khoka, the capital

of Audijan or Ferghanah, the native country of the Emperor Baber,

is a large, populous, and well built city, surrounded by numerous

1857. ] Kokan and other places im Central Asia. 259

gardens, for which it is celebrated throughout Turkestan. The

city has considerably increased under the rule of the present Khan,

Muhammad Omar,* son of Muhammad Ali Khan, during whose

reign the city of Khojend became depopulated.

The houses of the city are generally built of wood, of several

stories in height, with a foundation of burnt bricks, There are

several large and well supplied bazars, many of which, according to

the general fashion in oriental cities, are covered in. It has one

college, and several large Kaérawanserais for merchants.

The Arg or citadel, in which the Khan resides, a small city in .

itself, is situated west of the city, being divided by a large rivulet,

a feeder of the Sirr, Jihtin or Jaxartes river, which divides the two

from north to south. The city is therefore amply supplied with

water, which is considered to be one of the principal causes of its

prosperity, its present population being at present computed to be

about 100,000, half of whom dwell in houses, the remainder are

nomades who dwell in tents.

The ruler, Muhammad Omar Khan is very popular. He hears

all the complaints of his subjects, and administers justice to them

in person every day, and settles their disputes.

This city is remarkable for the number of its public women, called

in the Kattai (Northern China) language, Aghchha. They amount

to about 4,000; and may be seen driving about the city, in carriages

drawn by horses, at all times of the day.

Great quantities of opium, choirs, an intoxicating drug made from

hemp flowers, and a decoction made from poppy-heads (different

from opium), are made here. In every bazar numbers of people

may be seen in all states and degrees of intoxication, and no one

interferes with them; indeed people may do just as they choose

here, with the exception of acting tyrannically, such are the Khan’s

commands. Tyranny and oppression in this city will not answer.

The ruler is on friendly terms with the Khan-of Kbwarazm, but

no intercourse takes place with the Russians, Bokharaiains, or

Chinese. He has a standing army of about 55,000 men, with thirty

* Said to have been dethroned since the above was written. His son Khuda

Yar, is the present ruler,

260 Kokan and other places in Central Asia. [No. 4.

guns, the whole of which, however, are not mounted. The private

soldier’s pay amounts to about ten tillahs, each tillah being worth

about fourteen shillings English.

The country is small in extent, and surrounded by mountains on

all sides, with the exception of the south-west, in which direction

the city of Khojend is situated. Round about the city the country

is densely populated, and well cultivated and fruitful. All kinds of

grain, fruits, and other necessaries are plentiful and exceedingly

cheap. Flocks and herds are also numerous.

The principal taxes levied from the agriculturists are ten per

cent. on grain; on the value of sheep, goats, and cattle five per

cent.; on the sale of a camel three tangas; on a horse two; on a

sheep one. Merchandize is subject to a duty of two anda half per

eent., and as the trade is very extensive, it yields a large revenue to

the Khan. The inhabitants have to pay a yearly tax of one tillah

on each house.

The chief towns of the Khanat of Kokan are; Murghelandasht,

distant about thirty-six miles ; Karsandasht, thirty-five miles ; Muan-

gdndasht, about the same distance ; Takht-Suliman-dasht or Ush,

thirty-four miles; Karghar-kohistan, sixty miles, and other places

of less size.

The road les through a desert tract of country, and no signs of

habitation or cultivation are seen except in the vicinity of the differ-

ent manzils or stages. ‘The range of mountains, called the Takht

or throne of Suliman, lies to the west of the city of Kokan, distant

about one hundred miles. It has two peaks.

On the arrival of a Karawan at the Ourtang or Custom-house,

the chief revenue officer who is stationed there, personally inspects

the merchandize, and makes out two lists of the contents. One

copy he transmits to Azim Khan, the Kattai chief, and retains the

other himself. After due examination of the goods he grants a

pass to the merchants, and they can then proceed on to Kashghar.

On approaching any Ourtang or Custom-house, on a journey, it

is necessary for the Kafilah Bashi, or leader of the Kérawan, to

proceed there on foot, and show his pass; as it is considered

insulting to approach a government establishment on horseback

or mounted.

1857. | Kokén and other places in Central Asia. 261

In cases where any doubt may arise respecting the goods being

more or less than specified in the pass, the trouble these revenue

authorities give is most vexatious; nevertheless, should any article

mentioned in a pass be lost or stolen on the road they are prompt

in recovering it. On such a circumstance occurring the conductor

of the Karawan must report it at the nearest Custom-house, giving

a description of the goods whatever they may be. The authorities

have a stated time for the decision of such matters, and in case the

articles are not recovered within the prescribed period, some com-

pensation is allowed, but in kind, not in money.

On a Kérawan or Kafilah reaching the city, or any other place in

the Khan’s dominions, where duties are leviable, the conductor

must report his arrival at the chief Custom-house, stating all parti-

eulars, from whence he has come, together with the value, and

description of goods he may have brought. On this an officer

proceeds to inspect the merchandize, and on goods of superior

quality five per cent. on the value is levied, and on commoner

descriptions half the above rate. ;

The city of Tashkend is subject to Kokan, and lies ten stages or

manzils to the north-west. It was once a very large and rich city,

but is now gone to decay. The numerous ruins of mosques and

other buildings shows what its former extent must have been.

The city of Kashghar lies south-east from Kokan, and is distant

from it ten manzils for Karawan camels. It belongs to Chinese

Tartary, is populous, and contains about 50,000 inhabitants. It is

surrounded by a fortified wall, which is very strong and lofty,

and said to be very ancient. The citadel, which is within

the enceinte, occupies an area of about two miles, and is gar-

risoned by 2,500 soldiers, with several pieces of artillery. An

army of Chinese troops is also stationed here as being a fron-

tier city. It formerly amounted to 10 or 12,000 men, but

lately the force has been considerably augmented, and at present

is computed at 30,000 men. The chief cause of this increase,

however, appears to be for the purpose of overawing the Muham-

madans, who constitute the majority of the inhabitants. Some

time previously they created a serious disturbance, in which a great

number of Chinese were killed and an immense amount of property

262 Kokdn and other places in Central Asia. [No. 4.

plundered. A strong body of celestial troops was sent to quell this

revolt, and the faithful were severely punished.

The residence of the governor, who is styled Umban, is called the

Gul Bagh, distant about two miles from the city, between which a

portion of the troops are encamped.

The city gates are closed from sunset to sunrise, as is the custom

throughout Northern China. Lach soldier of the city police, which ~

is a well organized body of men, is provided with two pieces of

wood called a chang, and at the termination of each watch of about

three hours, he produces a sound by striking them together in a

peculiar manner, and afterwards calls out the hour of the night or

day. These soldiers go by the general name of Hallatts.

The country is very productive, and the city, the houses of which

are regularly laid out, is surrounded by numerous gardens. There

are six gates which are defended by cannon, and a number of

mosques. The chief fiscal authority is vested in a Muhammadan

who bears the title of Hakim Beg.

The people are a lively comely race, and the women are remark-

ably handsome. Merchants may take temporary wives, as in Persia,

by entering into a contract for a specific sum during the period of

their sojourn in the country. The Kashgharis are also great wine-

bibbers, and are very old women in their fondness for a “dish

of tea,”

The lands depend in a great measure on rain for irrigation, but

artificial irrigation is also extensively adopted, and this, from the

number of streams running through the country, is by no means

difficult. Snow lies on the ground in winter to the depth of two,

and sometimes three feet, but never for more than a few days

together.

The distance from Kashghar to Yarkand is three manzils, of about

seventeen miles each. As the country all along the line of route

is highly cultivated and exceedingly populous, the different stages

are not prescribed to certain places, as between Kashghar and

Kokén. The Yarkiang river, also called the Hergo-u, flows past the

city to the north.

Yarkand, which is the largest city of Moghalistan, has two

citadels within its walls, one in. which the Muhammadan gov

1857. | Kokén and other places in Central Asia. 263

vernor dwells, and the other, on the southern side, where the

Chinese chief, who commands the army quartered here, resides.

This force, which is intended to overawe the Yarkandis

amounts to about 40,000 men with several guns. This is the

largest force the Chinese have in this direction of their empire,

and the best and most efficient, being picked men. They are

relieved yearly. Of this force, 10,000 are quartered within the city,

the remainder in the vicinity.

The police arrangements are similar to those of Kashghar, with

this exception, that an equal number of Chinese soldiers are asso-

ciated with the police in their duties ; and one celestial accompanies

each of the chang nawdzdn (ringers or strikers of the chdng) as the

watchmen already described are called, in his rounds.

Russian Kaérawans come here, and bring all sorts of European

manufactures, consisting of hardware in a greater proportion. They

take back with them teas, silk, and other articles of Chinese manu-

facture, but they are not allowed to proceed further east.

From Yarkand, distant fifteen manzils or stages to the north-east,

is Aksti (dk, white, su, river), a city whose wealth and population

increase steadily every year. All descriptions of food are excessively

cheap, and even when prices are at their maximum, a maund anda

half of grain, Kabul measure, (about one hundred and twenty pounds

English) may be obtained for two shillings. The governor of this

city is appointed by the Chinese, but the people are chiefly fol-

lowers of Islam.

From Aksti to Yilih or [leh is ten days journey to the north-east.

The road is difficult on account of the traveller having to cross the

glaciers of the Tianchan or snowy mountains. <A body of fifty men

are maintained here by the authorities for the express purpose of

assisting travellers over the mountains, and for making roads for

their passage through the ice. When a party of travellers reach

the foot of the mountains, they proceed in front, and make a road

over the ice as they advance, the travellers following close at their

heels; and it generally occupies a whole day in crossing the range.

So quickly does this track become impassable, that the pioneers,

who return on the following day, have generally to clear a new path

for themselves. This place is called by the people of the countrys,

2M 2

264 Kokin and other places in Central Asia. [No. 4.

Makén-i-Sarwar jddigar, or the “ dwelling of Sarwar the magician.”

Showers of rain, and snow storms are of daily occurrence in this

vicinity.

Yilih or eh contains about 8,000 houses and 40,000 inhabitants,

consisting of Chinese and Muhammadans in about equal numbers,

whose quarters are quite separated from each other.

The chief authority of the province is styled the Jén Jang or

Governor-General, who resides at Kowrah or Kowreh, one stage

from Yilih. It contains upwards of 60,000 inhabitants, and a

Chinese army of about 40,000 men are located there. The authority

above named, is the supreme head of the Muhammadans of Mogha-

listan, to the west; eastward is the country of Khattai, or Chinese

Tartary.

From this latter city to the Russian frontier town of Semi Pulad

Oska (Semipolatinsk) the most southerly town of any consequence

in Southern Siberia, is twenty-five days’ journey through a difficult

country almost uninhabited. This mountainous district is rich in

silver mines which are profitably worked by the Chinese. They

also produce a metal known here by the name of yambu. Some

years since the Russians demanded a share in the profits from these

mines on account of their being situated mid-way between the two

countries. The Khattais, as the Chinese are called, refused, however,

to accede to the demand, giving answer (I here use the very words

of my informant) “If you Ords have six laks of soldiers alto_

gether, we have six laks in one place alone, then what occasion is

there for us to let you have a share in the mines ?”’

The town of Semi Puldd Oské contains a population of between

7 and 8,000. It is situated on the right bank of the river Irtisch,

which forms the boundary between the two countries, and at the

foot of the Altai or golden mountains.

From the frontier city of Kowreh, or Kura, distant fifteen stages,

is Kardn-sher or Kara-shehr, beyond which, there is a most stringent

order not to permit Yawahs (barbarians), as the Chinese term all

foreigners, to pass into the interior. This is a large and populous

city with a numerous garrison, or army rather for its protection.

Muliyadn is distant from the above place five stages, Kutan or

Kotan fifteen, and Tufan twenty. To reach Ma-chin, from whence

1857.] Kokdén and other places in Central Asia. 265

the tea is chiefly brought, it occupies two months and half with a

Kérawan; and to reach Jandn, where the China-ware is manufac-

tured, it takes another three months. Beyond the last mentioned

place is the ocean.

The Chinese are much given to pleasure, and once a year, in the

first month, they hold a grand festival which lasts for ten days,

during which time they give themselves up to all sorts of pleasure.

The festival is called Chaghan.

Cottrell in his “ Recollections of Siberia,” refers to this style of

commencing the new year in the following terms: “They (the

Chinese merchants at Mai-mé-chin, the small hamlet where they

and the Russians meet to trade, and in which merchants are allowed

to reside) have, however, learned from their Russian neighbours to

appreciate the merits of champaigne, which is drunk in torrents in

the white month. This white month is the beginning of the Chinese

aaa Ye * The scene of carousing and gaiety

during this month is described as most amusing, and would be

doubtless the best opportunity of seeing the Chinese under the

most favourable colours.”

The dress of the men of Chinese Tartary is of various colours,

one suit over the other; and their caps they ornament with a tassel

like the girls of Orgunge, to which according to their means, they

attach jewels. Their shoes are of silk with soles of cotton. The

women dress much in the same style as those of Kashmir, and their

head-dress consists of a cap or turban, which they ornament with

flowers made of coloured silks. All the people use chairs, in fact

they cannot sit comfortably otherwise.

They are of two tribes, the Akh Khattai, and Karah Kattai,

which signifies in the Turki language, the White and the Black

Chinese. ‘The former shave all round the head, but leave a tuft in

the centre, the hair of which when sufficiently long they twist and

allow to hang down like a cow’s tail. They also shave off the beard

but retain the moustache. The latter, on the contrary never shave.

There are two routes from Kashmir to Yarkand and Kokan. The

most direct one is by way of Iskardoh and along the banks of the

Shighin river, and over the Mustaék range of mountains by the

Hanzi pass. The other, a more round about road, is by way of

266 Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat. [No. 4.

Leh or Ladakh, through the valley of the Shai Yak, as the northern

branch of the Indus is named, and over the Karah Korrum moun-

tains, which appears to have been the route followed by the Sayed.

There is another route from Leh to the Karah Korrum range, fur-

ther to the west by way of Nibra, but it is only used when the

Shai Yak is too deep to be crossed. The route by Iskardoh is less

than the other by ten stages, but it is only open from the middle

of April to the end of October, whilst the Leh route is practicable,

though difficult, for the greater part of the year.

Multén, 10th April, 1857.

PRARADRS SSDS DDL LISI IV DIP IPI III PARLE PPR APD

Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat and other Snowy Mountains of

the Himalaya Range adjacent to Kashmir.—By T. G. Monteo-

MERIE, Lt. Engineers, lst Asst. Gt. Trig. Survey of India, m

charge Kashmir Serves.

Colonel Waugh having given me permission to publish the approx-

imate heights and positions of the Nanga Parbat and other snowy

mountains fixed by the Kashmir series, I have the pleasure to

put at the disposal of the Asiatic Society a memorandum of the

same with tables, &c. shewing how the height of the Nanga Parbat

has been obtained.

The mean height of 26,629 feet for the Nanga Parbat is approxi-

mate, but is not likely to alter materially when all the refinements

of computation have been applied.

The height of the stations of the Kashmir series depend upon

the N. W. Himalaya series, and as yet the N. W. H. series

depends upon the height of the Bauog observatory, which Colonel

Waugh has already tested by trigonometrical levelling from sea to

sea* over 2,127 miles of hill and plain—a test that has never before

been applied or at any rate successfully carried out on such a

gigantic scale.

The N. W. H. series thus starting with a verified height has not

as yet been tested by a process similar to the above. Before long,

however, Colonel Waugh’s great geodetical quadrilateral that

* From Calcutta to Bombay and Kurrachee.

SKELETON CHART

of hu

SNOWY PEAKS ADJACENT TO :

N42, Wanyw Suri)

es KA S BM 0

Seale B2 Mees = such

oigits

y a + 6 a 0 on

Tia tak NWA Sieg Pod ert? 10 a Nop agp

W877 Snowy Fak

21 Sony Puck:

IE. Montgomisic Ts Ena”?

[i deste 6D. Surveyor lnudia.

In Charge ef the Kastner Sertes.

(59

Spry Peake Ne 22 x01

° of

Peak:

(We

Qee stawy Peak

sas

2 ore Suqivy PE

(efor - s N997%Q NOU Siw

tet ras Suse = /2 Sow EX

z tess if yi062. © NTSALT N21E Si Prick Mer |

We adnewey Leak Ser

Ourdu Sinuutartim

7aco |

WES Sreowy PE

Mester) -

myFO ONES Sry PH

oe izes

oN "2 Snemy P&

13206 |

Os Snowy Pk

1662

33"|

oe + — +

o Yidusn| terple ee |

Pek 3 enh plans

NOTE sis os = |

| i

ap Thrill Hair Oreo taker at 80" 72 |

Heaghte ‘Per rib to Bariag Osservatery taken wt 7464 Pew | |

ealhiote!

6 white Strate. 0 Tepes

——

On transfer paper by Abdos) Haleem bath ry HM. Smith Surveyer Generallé Office Calcutta Sept i867

geo re eet ager I, met epee wih

inal

NE edamame a ia Ree

ante . -r ere ee

en. eT ee ee eee

a ed 2 ree Pe emrtoatoe =| ao ner hen

: caaieeeaiai shadactendiaall NTA NE BERTI RTO

» "

1857. ] Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat. 267

embraces the Punjab and Sind will afford the verification desired by

completing the circuit from the mean sea level at Kurrachee, round

the Punjab and back to the same point.

Though the internal checks on the heights of any G. T. Survey

series are in themselves complete, still slight errors may creep in

which can only be detected on the completion of the levelling from

sea to sea. Hence a small correction may hereafter be applied to

the heights of the Kashmir series, though as I before said, it is not

likely to affect materially the values that 1 now send you.

Hitherto the Nanga Parbat, which is also called Dayarmur, has

been put down as 19,000 feet above the sea, being nearly a mile and

a half below its actual elevation. Rather a bad shot for conjectural

geography.

Though by no means equal to mount Everest,* still the Nanga

Parbat is as much the king of the northern Himalayas as mount

Everest is tae king of the southern Himalayas.

My series has already added to the G. T. Survey all the peaks to

the south of the Indus, and now the G. T. Survey may be said to

have fixed all the peaks in the Himalayas with the exception of a

few about the sources of the river Indus.

During my three days’ residence on the snowy mountain Hara-

mook, at upwards of 16,000 feet above the sea, I had several fine

views of the Karakooram range and of the ranges to the north of

the Indus. Amongst others two very fine peaks were visible

beyond the general outline of the Mustagh and Karakooram ranges.

These two peaks promise to be high. They were well but faintly

defined against the sky being probably about 150 miles from me.

I hope to have the pleasure of sending you their heights at the

beginning of next year. |

The memorandum iucludes several well known mountains such as

“Ser” and “ Mer,’ Haramook, Baltal, &c. The heights now given

do not agree with those that have hitherto been taken for granted

by former explorers.

I trust the accompanying heights and positions may prove a

useful and interesting contribution to accurate geograghy.

Dhera Dhoon, 27th January, 1857.

* Déo-dhiinga.—Ep.

268 Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat. [No. 4.

The geographical co-ordinates of the Himalayan peaks enume-

rated in the accompanying list have been derived from the geodetical

operations of the Kashmir meridional series of the G. T. Survey of

India.

This series commenced by order of Colonel Waugh in 1855,

emanates froma side of the north-west longitudinal series in the

low ranges north of Sealkote.

The triangulation of the series has been carried across the snowy

ridge of Chattardhar, over the Pir Panjal and the great range to the

north of Kashmir, by means of symmetrical quadrilaterals and

polygons.

Luminous signals* have been used throughout, and the rigorous

system of the G. T. Survey of India has nowhere been abated, not-

withstanding the physical difficulties presented by the snowy

ranges, and the severe climate on their summits, so trying to the

natives of India employed as lampmen and heliotropers.

The Nanga Parbat or Dayarmur is a snowy mountain to the

north of Kashmir, midway between that valley and the river Indus.

The splendid mass of snow presented by this peak and its subordi-

nate pinnacles can be seen to the best advantage from the western

side of Kashmir, when it is viewed across the great Walpar lake.

The upper portion of the mountain for 5,000 feet is precipitous, and

the neighbouring ranges never attain an altitude of more than

17,000 feet, consequently this magnificent peak, rising to an eleva-

tion of 26,629 feet above the sea, naturally forms a noble object in

whatever aspect it is viewed.

Among the remaining mountains there are many fine peaks, the

most remarkable being “‘ Ser’ and “ Mer,” twin giants, the former

white and the latter dark, because it is too precipitous to retain

much snow on the Kashmir side. Ser and Mer are also called

Nana Khana, as well as Dum Huy and Pajah Huy, besides other

appellations. These peaks and all from No. 1 to No. 12 are well

known to those sportsmen who shoot ibex in the Wardwan valley.

* Heliotropes and lamps.

+ For a beautiful and characteristic sketch of this mountain, vide page 44, of

Major (now Lt.-Colonel) Cunningham’s work on Ladak.

1857. | Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat. 269

Baltal, Haramook, the highest points of the Pir Panjal and Nos.

16 to 27 inclusive are visible from various parts of Kashmir.

The position and heights of these mountains have been deter-

mined by observations taken at the principal stations of the Kashmir

series. For instance the Nanga Parbat has been determined by

observations with a 14 inch* theodolite from eleven principal sta-

tions at distances varying from 43 to 133 miles and at heights

ranging from 7,700 to 16,000 and odd feet.

Four or more independent computations have been made for each

point, the accompanying abstract of the results of the computations

of the Nanga Parbat may be taken as a fair specimen. In this

instance, the latitude and longitude have been derived from seven

independent deductions, the heights from eleven, and the distances

from the same number of triangles. The extreme difference from

the mean is only one-tenth of a second in latitude and longitude,

and only 25 feet in height, being as accordant as could be expected,

considering that it is an unmarked peak, that the attraction of the

mountains is very great, and that no doubt, between observations,

variations did occur caused by falls of snow at one time, and by the

melting of the same at another.

The refraction used for completing the height of the Nanga

Parbat as well as of the other peaks has throughout been deter-

mined practically from my own reciprocal observations between

principal stations, that is to say from observations to and from

those elevated points of the Himalayan range, which were actually

occupied for the purpose of observation while extending the series

of great triangles across the Pir Panjal and the great snowy barrier

to the north of the valley.

The skeleton chart shows the geographical position of the Nanga

Parbat and the other peaks in the accompanying list. The position

of Murree, Jhelum, Sealkote, Srinagar, and other places being added

for the sake of illustration.

* Troughton and Simms, No. 5, G. T. S.

+ The term unmarked in the G. T. S. means a peak in which no signal mark

has been erected.

270 Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat. [No. 4.

Abstract of the position of the Nanga Parbat.

Deduced Sta-

s Fixed Stations. tions. Latitude. Longitude.

Remarks.

fo} ’ “ lo , w”

1 From Safapoor, H. 8... | Nanga Parbat. |835—14—21.4: |74—37—52.5

PA ee Nag, HES. s. | Serer On awes 21.5 52.4

3| {5 langanwar, H.S:| .... do. «2%. 21.6 52.6

44.3): pl aribnas. TLS. ca lhie's c'e Ol otne 21.6 52.5

5| |,, Ismailde dori, H.8.| .... do..... 21.5 52.5

‘ ay RLAYAMOOK SEL. Sie. | we oe dus Re ae 21.5 52.4

Mites, SLANG, VEL Ss aeusiaren:| ae ce GOs tem as 21.6 52.5

a ee J ee

Means, eeeeseoe eeceee eevee ee ce 62 a0 35—14—21.5 7F4—37—52.5

Compared by W. G. Beverley, and T. J. M.

271

Kashmir Series.

‘Astronomical Date. Geodotic Distance. Object and Hyo Corrections. | Terrestrial Refrac- Given Elemonts. Bloments Deduced,

Observed £

S : 5 9 P ants 4 Heights. a Apparent | Subtended

| Eye Stations. Object Stations. pyextical F = Decimals) Vertical Arcs. | Angle. Heights Compara- | Heights

2 Angles. | Tos. Feet. | Milos 3 of Stati b Stations, tive: above Seal -£eam

1856. 3 pt ere a d E Angle,contained| Seconds, mesons Loe A Heights. | Level, | Heights.

z 3 | |) oa fete ea. eights. | Lovel.

5 8 | a | 4 ja

hm. po o +.000]Seconds.| fect. | feot. | feet. |” oF aloo w feot. fect. feet. || feet.

June Ist, ......) 1 11) Safspoor H.S. Nanga Parbat S. P.| ©. 214 9,31 D. 2 14 12.35

eee eal |e eee 5,5444063| 66.339 | 2142 | 3457.13 193.60 2 89 47.32) Safapoor H. S. 10309.2 | Nanga Parbat S. P.| + 16307.6| 2616.8

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Safapoor H. S. . 3 6 22.98

cere | ahha } Poshikar H.S. | Nanga Parbat §. P.| B. 1 50 56.41 (2) TD, 1 50 68.82

Sept. 2ith,... { aca 5.6412714| 9.491 | 1733 | 4350.98 0.066 | 287.16 2 22 27.15] Poshkar Hi S. 8337.0 | Nongu Parbat S. P. | 4+-18293.8 | 26630.8

‘Nanga Parbat S. P.| Poshkar H. S. p D. 2 53 55.48

5 = | =

June Lith... { Bee } Raj NagH.S. | Nanga Parbat S. P.| F. 1 39 59.88 40.00) +5.18] +5.13| +2.72] (2) B.140 2.60

zy otis] 8238 | ee here 5.5892670] 73.559 | 2520 | 3893.34 0.061 | 233.83 2 8 5.44] Roj Nog H.S. 12124,6 | Nonga Parbat 8. P.| 4+14492.2 | 2616.8

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Raj Nag H. S. D.2 36 8.28 :

Tune 28rd,..,.../19 13] Manganwar H.S. |Nanga Parbat S.P.| 1B. 3 4 7.35 iat 0.00) 5.14] 45.14] 43.55] (2) B.8 4 10.90

te S aeieal Le aa 5.4747617| 66,510 | 1814 | 2941.88 0.061 | 179.64 3 25 43.70) Manganwar H.S. | 8728.4.| Nanga Parbat S. P. | 4+17892.4| 26621.2

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Manganwar H. S. . 3 47 16.50

Tune 28th,..,...18 53| Marinag 1. S, Nanga Parbat 8. P.| DB. 3 9 48.41 5 0,00) $5.16] 5.16] +185] (2) B.3 9 52.76

=: 5.3886051] 46.342 | 2458 | 2414.94 0.061 | 147.31 3 27 32,92) Marinag H. S. 11827.5 | Nanga Parbat S. P.| +-14804.2 | 26631,7

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Marinog H. 8. D. 8 45 18.08 i ‘

. B. eH. s. . 3 45 13.05

Tuly 4th, 8| Ismail de dori H. 8. | Nanga Parbat 8. P. |B. 1 68 12.50] i $0.00) $5.17] 5.17] 43.16] (2) BH, 1 68.15.75

N. Parbat'S. P. | Temail de dori H-S 5,5274885| 63.805 | 2628 | 3325.01 0.061 202.83 2 22 35.43) Ismail de dori H. S| 12643.2 | Nanga Parbat 8. P. +4-13995.1 | 26638,3 | 26629.1

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Ismail de dori H. S, D. 2 46 65.10

Sept. 10th,...... 5 50|Haramook H.S. |'Nanga Parbat S.P.| HB. 133 40.07) -+0.00) 45.06) 45.06] +3.33]/ (2) TD. 1 83 43.40

Nanga Parbat 8. P. | Hi: HLS 5.4955028 | 59.275 | 3328 | 3038.93 0.061 | 188.42 1 566 19.45) Huramook H.S. | 16014.8 | Nanga Parbat S. P. | 4+-10605.2 | 26620.0

| Nanga Parbat 8. P. | Haramook H. 8. D. 2 18 55.49 3

Sept, 15th,......]19 34) Hant H. S. Nanga Parbat S.P.| TE) 3 12628) +£0.00 +173) (2) B. 8 18101

Spam Tews Gia7, | memes 6 6,8577864| 43.167 | 2804 | 2249.51 0.061 | 187,22 3 17 58.55) Hant H.S. 13492.8 | Nanga Porbat S. P. | -13153.1 | 26645.9

Nanga Parbat S. P. | Hant H, 8. D. 3 34 26.08

May 28th,1855,| 21 24| Ahertatopa H.S. | Nonga Parbat S. P.| E. 0 14 10.62 =| +£0.00 TD, O14 12.14

Nanga Parbst 8. P, | Ahertatopa H. S 5,8489099 | 133.745 | 2725 | 6970.12 0,054 | 376.39 1 6 0,81) Ahertatopa H. S$. | 18042.5 | Nanga Parbat 8. P. | +-13576.8 | 26619.3

. P. | Ahertatopa H. S. D. 1 57 49.48

July 6th,1855,| 6 40 Pas = é

May outhaase| 2 5 4} Gozipatri H.S. | Nanga Parbot 8. P.| 1, 1 32 43.35 40.00] 45.20) 45,20] 42.14] (a) Teeaeug

Z 5.7006088| 95.055 | 1629 | 4953.68 , 2, 2 . ipatri H. S. 765.7 | Nonga Parbat $. P, | --18859.4 | 2662.1

Nanga Parbst 8. P. | Gogipatri I. S. pe . coord lbeue "tp araspides Menai eer eS ee eeeer arena (omen :

Augt.31st,1855.|19 8) (Paliargurh HS. | /Nanga Parbat 8. P.| 1B. 0 87 52.85 = 0.00] 46.20] $5.20] F171] a) B. 0 87 54.56

eee a raced nee 5.7972697 | 118,761 | 2378 | 6188.66 0.056 | 316.57 1 28 42.32) Pabargurh H.S. | 11369,3 | Nanga Parbat 8. P. | +15285.5 | 26654.8

‘anga Parbat 8. P. | Pahargurh H. 8. D.2 9 30.08

Note.—H. 8. denotes Hill Station.

S.P, Snowy Peak. ©. elevation and D, depression.

(1) Determined by reciprocal observations before the rains.

during ditto.

(2)

Ditto

ditto

a wee

oa eae

eee

a oe a speein yamimcote asia

et ic eek Bi ee

soma eee i

, hee Ae, PAR. @

J » Pid US e gue

ante a ew '

74 Sass (uae tt 2, ;

rf ; « ue a A

(at apr! ‘ ;

i m is Pat

»s

ee eae

a 7 4 7 ¥ ey | Mu ne ; ba 7

’ , ( Te “ou Pe < Oy AG iy Wy 1

‘

vw .

fae Rin

a ‘. tails .

; 4

fi ; }

' : , .

] f :

' ie

¥ r

\ i ‘ |

; i

of . — . 5 ‘

ep Fes i

’ i

i an Sh

—_

‘

, wt

hy e e

‘

| . 7

» u ‘ 18

; $9. i ; e

f ‘. “ r

1857.]

Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat.

273

Memorandum of Heights and Positions of the Nanga Parbat and

other Mountains.

Names of Mountains,

Nanga Parbat Snowy

Ee iain sic as > 0 = >.>

PCIE y cco sc cs os ce

lee GiitO, sc 00s. ce ns

raibal Gitto, .: «ees

Haramook ditto,.. ..

Kashmir Series, Snowy

Peak, No. 1,

Ditto,

Ditto, Cie

Ditto, (Poormandal ke

Sir,) No. 12,

Kashmir Series, ‘Sno

2eaevee

eae ee ee

5) eseecece

9 ee eeee

3 se ee ee

> eeesese ae

ev eee

> eeeoesn oe

> efe8 oe

Peak, 0.16, .... 2.

meee 19. Ok oe we

ee ON es.

Ditto, 22,

Ditto, (Peer ke dheri),

Bij ke- Sir),

Ditto, (Neel) ‘No. 25,

Kashmir Series, Snowy

Peak, No. 26, ......

Ditto, ,, 27, Ba cons

Ditto, Gi) SS oe

Ditto, A) 5 caret ae

Ditto, C0) ee

Ditto, CO), <emaswa

Ditto, Ch Fae

Ditto, 2) Pee

Mean

Height.

feet.

26,629.1

23,406.9

23,264..4

17,839.4

.. | 16,902.9

16,662.0

19,906.0

21,288.6

20,054.2

21,059.3

21,584.8

18,739.3

20,988.0

19,841.3

19,597.0

. | 17,051.9

17,014.5

20,740.3

14,874.5

16,486.6

15,584.5

16,227.8

18,052.4

17,320.7

17,903.7

17,642.7

17,369.3

19,376.7

Mean

Latitude.

Mean

Longitude. Si eae

14 21.5] 74

58 56.1/76

0 47.7|76

37 52.5) Or Dayamur.

2 ay ; Or Nana, Khana, &c.

34:

34,

34:

24:

34:

44,

55.4) 75

5.6] 74:

18.8) 76

18.1) 76

18.9) 76

22.5) 76

15.4) 76

26.6] 76

53.1| 76

1.6] 76

22.4) 75

14.9] 75

37.3| 75

7.A| 74

30.6} 74:

55.7| 74

41.7|'74

49.4) 73

30.9} 73

18.6} 73

59.1] 73

45.7) 74

26.8} 74

15.475

34.4] 75

43.9| 75

50.3) 75

34.4) '75

22 10.3

57 3.1

5 35.3

20 22.7

11 50.9

7 23.8

5 30.6

10 25.8

1 39.0

9 28.8

52 58.3

45 42.1

30 49.1

43.1

59.9

42.2

54.3

51.1

46 0.2

44.4:

43.4:

13 22.4

34 6.6

29 29.7

32 4.5

37 40.3

38 30.4:

44 27.6

17 23.6|75 49 59.2

Or Gwashbrari.

A Snowy Cone.

A fine Snowy Cone.

[Kashmir & Wardwan.

East of a pass between

Above Khagan.

Ditto.

Above the Ambernath

caves. [ Glacier.

Above the Matchahoy

In the Hembaps Range.

Ditto, ditto.

About 8 miles 8. W.

of Dras fort.

274

Memorandum of Heights, &c.,

Mean

Names of Mountains. Height,

feet.

Pir Panjal Snow Pk.

Bara Sangah, ......

Ditto aititoid, «es 55 <:

Ditto ditto Bt, ......

Witto ditto Bs, <<...

Ditto ditto B®, .sreac

Ditto ditto Ahertatopa,

Ditto ditto Kol Narwa,

Ditto ditto Didyum, .

Ditto ditto Barma Sa-

Rel sem ieeteieine! setaints

14,580.6

14,545.6

14,187.0

13,042.5

12,746.4

14,952.2

15,482.7

Ditto ditto Tikhidr, ..| 15,304.6

Ditto ditto Tatta kuti,

Ditto ditto (y),...-

Northern Panjal Hant,

15,523.7

15,132.7

13,492.8

11,827.5

12,643.2

.. | 44,338.1

14,038.8

14,437.8

5,209.4

5,186.6

6,266.0

5,896.4

7,048.9

Ditto Marinag, ......

Ditto Ismail de fans si

Ditto Peak, No. 2,.

Ditto Satkolé,. 4

Ditto Kaj Nag, No. 1,

Isle of Chinars, ......

Lanka Island,.. NPIS

Takht-i-Sulaiman, ....

Islamabad Hill, ......

Shapiyon Hill, ......

Sopoor Fort, .....

Memorandum on the Nanga Parbat.

[No. 4.

(continued).

Mean Mean R k

Latitude. | Longitude. a

ra) s La fo} / “

33 57 54.475 26 18.3] In the range between

Kashmir and Ward-

wan.

33 48 54.3)75 29 51.9} Ditto.

33 36 31.5/75 34 33.8] Ditto.

338 26 5.9/75 31 31.6} Ditto.

33 31 59.7|75 32 10.4} Ditto.

33 23 56.8|75 22 21.5} G. T. Station.

33 30 21.8/75 8 24,5} Ditto. !

33 24 49.5|75 3 15.6) Ditto seen from Sial-

kote.

33 28 55.7|74 52 44.2| Three peaks above the

Kosa Nag, called also

Koserin Kutur seen

from Sialkote.

33 29 52.0) 74 39 42.2 ... seen from Sial-

kote.

33 44 54.9|74 30 30.6

33 54 28.6) 74 28 19,1

34 36 48.0) 74 39 16.2| G.T. Station above the

road from Bundipoor

to Gurys.

34 38 47.2'74 14 46.2) G. T. Station.

34 29 44.5|73 57 44.3] Ditto.

34 21 20.83/73 59 17.6

34 20 41.874 O 23.9) G. T. Station.

34 13 48.7|74 4 12.6) Highest Peak.

34 8 0.9/74 53 40.9) In city lake of Kashmir.

(8422 9.1)74 39 48.0) In Great Walar Lake.

34 4 46.38/74 53 8.0] Base of kalis of temple.

33 43 46.3)75 12 6.9] G. T. Station on top.

33 42 43.9)74 53 48.5] Ditto.

34.17 1.4\74 30 47.6} East Bastion.

Farther Observations taken at Kanuri Nar H. 8. by Lieut. Brownlow, Engrs.

to the two peaks observed at Haramook H. S. by Lieut. Montgomerie, Engrs. in

September, 1856, give the following results.

Karakoram No.

Karakoram No. 2 1

rocks in feet.

1 Lhe Haramook H. 8. 25,393.7

Kanuri Nar,

Mean,,..

from Haramook H. S,

Kanitri Nar,

. 27,914.4

Mean,...

Distance in miles.

116.7

25,438.5

25,416.1

136.5

27,942.2

2'7,928.3

The most northerly of the above viz, No. 2 is nearly in Lat, 36°.

PROCEEDINGS

OF THE

ASTATIC SOCIETY OF BENGAL,

For Jung, 1857.

SOL LIPO

At a monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society, held on the

8rd instant, Babu Ramgopaul Ghose, Vice-President, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1.—From Mr. C. Gubbins, C. S., a fragment of a carved brick,

found among the Sarnath ruins, near Benares.

2.—From the Bavarian Royal Anateny of Sciences, the latest

publications of the Academy.

3.—From Professor E. B. Cowell, on behalf of the translator,

Mr. Fitzgerald, a copy of a translation of Salaman Absal of Jami.

4.—From Major H. L. Thuillier, a sketch of the country between

Agra and Umballah with a sketch of Delhi.

Dr. William Crozier, B. M. S8., was named for ballot at the next

meeting, proposed by Dr. Spilsbury and seconded by Mr. Atkinson.

The Council announced, that in consequence of ill-health, Dr.

Spilsbury had sent in his resignation of the office of Vice-President.

On the motion of Major Strachey, seconded by Mr. Samuells,

the following resolution was passed :—

“ That the Society have heard with great regret that the state of

Dr. Spilsbury’s health has rendered it necessary that he should

withdraw from further active participation in the management of

the Society, of which he is one of the oldest and most valued mem-

bers, and that this resolution be communicated to him by the

Secretary.”

276 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

The Council applied for a vote for a sum not exceeding 500 Rs.,

for the printing of Dr. Falconer’s Catalogue of the tertiary fossils

in the Society’s Museum.

Some conversation ensued in reference to the amount of the esti-

mate given by the printer, and the generally high rate charged by

the Baptist Mission Press for the printing of the Society’s publica-

tions. Eventually Dr. Mouat offered to enquire in communication

with the Secretary into the comparative charges of other printers

in Calcutta, and to report, if authorized to do so, to the Society.

Dr. Mouat’s offer was accepted with thanks, and the proposed

vote was postponed until his report should have been presented.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report.

Major R. Strachey read a paper, being part of a narrative of a

“* Journey into the Tibetan province of Gugé, on the frontier of

Kumaon, and to the sacred lakes of Manasarowar and Raksa Tal.’’

On the motion of the Chairman, a vote of thanks was given to

Major Strachey for his valuable and interesting paper.

The ordinary business being concluded, the meeting was made

special for the consideration of Mr. Oldham’s proposition, to reduce

the rate of the subscriptions of non-resident members.

The Secretary stated that, owing to a mistake which had occur-

red in the office, non-residents had been allowed to send in their

votes up to the 10th instant. He therefore proposed, on the part

of the Council, that the special meeting should be continued by

adjournment to the first Wednesday in July, to be then held after

the business of the ordinary monthly meeting has been disposed of.

Agreed to.

The meeting then separated.

LIBRARY.

The Library has received the followiug accessions during the month of

May last.

Presented.

Sitzungsberichte der Kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften. Phi-

los-Histor. Classe. Band XX. heft 2 and 3, Band XXI. heft 1 and 2,

8vo.—By THE ACADEMY.

Mathe-Natur Classe, Band XX. heft 2 and 3, Band

XXI. heft 1; 8vo.—By THE SAME.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 277

20) der Philos-histor. Classe, der aka &c.—By THE SAME.

ditto ditto Mathe-Natur.—By THE sAME.

Denkschriften der ditto ditto, Philos-Histor. Band VII. 4to.—By THE

SAME.

Archiv fur kunde Osterreichischer Geschicts-quellen. Band XVI.

heft 2, 8vo.—By THE SAME.

Fontes Rerum Austriacarum. Ditto ditto Histor. commission. Band

XI. abth 2 8vo.

Notizenblatt, Nos. 15 to 24, 1856.—By THE sAME.

Selections from the Records of the Madras Government, No. XX XIX.

—Report upon the Government Central Museums and the Local Museums

in the provinces for 1855-56.—By toe Benecat GovERNMENT.

ditto of the Government of India (Public Works Depart-

ment) No. XXII. on Lightning Conductors & Powder Magazine.—By

THE GOVERNMENT OF INDIA.

) ditto North-Western Provinces Vol. II. on Irrigation, 2

Roads, 3 Bridges, 4 Miscellaneous Works.—By THE GoVERNMENT OF

AGRA.

ditto of the Bombay Government No. XII. Sattara Territory.

—By THE GOVERNMENT oF BomBay.

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, Vol. I. Nos. 1 and 2, New

series.

Vogel’s Disorders of the Blood, Translated and edited by Babu Chun-

der Coomar Dey, 8vo.—By THz Basu.

Report on the Elliot Marbles in the Madras Museum, Pamphlet.—By

THE CURATOR OF THE MusEvM.

Reports of the Juries of the Madras Exhibition of 1855.—By THE

Mapras GovERNMENT.

Report (corrected) of proceedings of a Public Meeting at the Town

Hall, Calcutta, in favor of the extension of the jurisdiction of the Mofus-

sil Criminal Courts.—By THE COMMITTEE APPOINTED BY THE MEETING.

Saléman and Absal, an allegory translated from the Persian of Jami,

by E. Fitzgerald.—By Prorrssor HE. Cownr.t.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for May, 1857.—By tue Epirors.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for April, 1857.—By tux Epiror.

The Oriental Baptist for May, 1857.—By tur Epiror.

The Upadeshak for May.—By THe Epiror.

A Map of the country between Agra and Umballa with a Sketch of

Delhi —By Masog H. L, THUILiIEr.

278 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Purchased.

Brande’s Manual of Chemistry, 2 Vols. Royal 8vo.

Dictionary of Science, Literature, and Art: comprising the

history, description, and scientific principles of every branch of human

knowledge; with the derivation and definition of all the terms in general

use, 8vo. London, 1853.

Tomlinson’s Cyclopedia of Arts and Science, 2 Vols., Royal 8vo.

A lecture on Modern Investigations on Ancient India, delivered in

Berlin, March 4, 1854. By Professor A. Weber. Translated from the

German by F. Metcalfe, pamphlet, 25* copies.

Gour Da’s Bysa’cx,

1st June, 1857. Librarian and Asstt. Secy.

LIBRARY.

The Library has received the following accessions during the month

of June, 1857.

Presentations.

Indische Skizzen. Vier bisher in Zeitschriften zerstreute Vortrige

und Abhandlungen. Von A. Weber, Berlin, 1857, 8vo.—By THz AvTHoR.

A lecture on Modern Investigations on Ancient India, delivered in

Berlin, March 4, 1854. By Professor A. Weber. Translated into Eng-

lish by F. Metcalfe.—By Prorrssor A. WEBER.

Bijdragen tot de Taal-land-en Volkenkunde von Neérlandsch Indié.

Vierde Deel, Nos. 1, 2, 3 and 4.—By True Roya. Institute oF

Neervanpscu InviE.

Hinladung zur Akademischen feier des Geburtsfestes Seiner Majestat

des konigs Wilhelm von Wiirttemberg. Abhandlung tiber den Athar-

va Veda von Dr. Rudolf Roth. Pamphlet.—By tHE AUTHOR.

Documents and Facts illustrating the origin of the Mission to Japan,

authorized by Government of the United States. May 10, 1851, Wash-

ington 1857, a pamphlet.

A Catalogue of the Bibliotheca Orientalis Sprengeriana, Giessen 1851,

pamphlet.—By Dr. A. SPRENGER.

Sanskrit-Worterbuch herausgegeben von der Kaiserlichen Akademie

der Wissenschaften. Bearbeitet von Otto Béhtlingk und Rudolph Roth.

4weiter Theil, Bogen 21-30.

* 24 copies for sale, at 1 R. per copy.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 279

Monatsbericht der Koniglichen Preuss Akademie der Wissenschaften

zu Berlin. November and December, 1856. Berlin, 1857.—By THE

ACADEMY.

The Indian Annals of Medical Science, No, VIII. April 1857.—By THe

Epiror.

The Physical Geography of Western Tibet, by Capt. H. Strachey.

Pamphlet.—By Masor R. StracHey.

Report of the Director of Public Instruction in the Lower Provinces

for the 2d quarter of 1856-57, i. e. from August to October, 1856.—By

THE DIRECTOR.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. XLII.

Report on Capt. W. L. Merewether with other papers relating to the

enlargement of Bigaree Canal in Upper Sind.—By Tur Bompay Govt.

Journal Asiatique, No. 34.—-By tu Asiatic Society oF Paris.

Proceedings of the Royal Society No. 25, Vol. VIII.—By tHE

Society.

Report of the Results of the Administration of Salt Department during

1855-56.—By THE BENGAL Govt.

Half yearly Report of the Committee of the Bengal Chamber of

Commerce, 30th April, 1857.—By THz CHAMBER OF COMMERCE.

The Oriental Baptist for June, 1857.—By tue Eprror.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for June, 1857.—By tHE Epirors.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for May, 1857.—By tux Eprror.

The Vividhartha Safigraha, Nos. 37 and 38.—By Basu RAJENDRALAL

Mittra.

Exchanged.

The Atheneum, for March and April, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine and Jour-

nal of Science, Vols. 86 and 87, April and May, 1857.

The Calcutta Review, No. 55 for March, 1857.

Purchased.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2096 to 2104.

Revue des Deux Mondes, for 15th March and Ist April, 1857.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 8 to 17; also Nos. 17 to 19 of 1856.

Mécanique Industrielle, Memoire sur, &c. &c. par M. Seguin Ainé.

Paris, pamphlet, 1857.

Journal des Savants for March and April, 1857.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 112 and 113,

April and May, 1857.

280 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, No. 6, Tome V. and No. 1, Tome VI.

Mémoires sur les Contrées Occidentales, traduits du Sanscrit en Chi-

nois, en l’an 648 par Hiouen-Thsang, et du Chinois en Franeais par M.

Stanislas Julien. Tome I. Paris, 1857.

Codices Orientales Bibliothece Regie Hafniensis, jussu et auspiciis

Regiis enumerati et descripti. Paris Tertia, Codices Persicos, Turcicos,

Hindustanicos, &c. continens. Hafnie, pamphlet, 1857.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, Nos. 2 and 3 of 1857.

Revue des Deux Mondes, Ist and 15th April, and 1st May, 1857.

The American Journal of Science and Arts, No. 68, March 1857.

The Natural History, Review No. II., April 1857.

The Edinburgh Review, No. 214, April 1857.

The Quarterly Review, No. 202, Ditto.

The Westminster Review, No. 22, April 1857.

Gour Da’s Bysa’cx,

Librarian and Asst. Secy.

PAPILLA YI PL ADAALDADAALAABLRARAAL ADL

For Juty, 1857.

At a Monthly General Meeting of the Asiatic Society held on the

Ist instant,

Major R. Strachey, Senior Member present, in the chair.

The proceedings of the last meeting were read and confirmed.

Dr. William Crozier, B. M.8., duly proposed and seconded at

the last meeting, was balloted for, and declared elected.

The Council announced that they had appointed Major Strachey

a Vice-President in the place of Dr. Spilsbury resigned, subject to

the confirmation of the Society.

The report of Dr. Mouat on the comparative charges of the

printing Presses in Calcutta was taken into consideration ; and, after

some discussion, a vote was agreed to for a sum not exceeding 500

Rs., as proposed by the Council at the last meeting, for the printing

of Dr. Falconer’s catalogue of tertiary fossils in the Society’s

Museum, subject to the condition that the lowest eligible tender

be accepted.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 281

Communications were received—

1st.— From Babu Radhanath Sikda4r, an abstract of the Meteorolo-

gical Register kept in the Office of the Surveyor General for the

month of March last.

2nd.—From Mr. Theobald, Jr., a paper entitled “ Notes on the

distribution of some of the land and fresh water-shells of India.”

3rd.—From Lt. Raverty, notes on Kokan, Kashgar, Yarkund and

other places in Central Asia.

The Librarian and the Zoological Curator submitted their usual

monthly reports.

Special Meeting.

The ordinary business being concluded, the special meeting, con-

tinued by adjournment from 3rd June last, was resumed. A sufli-

cient number of members not being present to decide a question

involving an alteration of the rules, a conversation arose as to the

proper course to be pursued.

After considerable discussion Major Thuillier moved, seconded by

Babu Rajendralal Mittra—

“ That this meeting not consisting of the number of members

required by rule 45, the proposal of Mr. Oldham for reducing the

subscription of non-resident members cannot be considered, and

that the motion be therefore dropped.”

Agreed to.

The proceedings then terminated.

LIBRARY.

The following accessions have been made to the library during the

months of July and August last.

Presented.

Sitzungsberichte der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Philos-

Histor Classe, Band X XI. heft 3, Band XXII. 1-2.—By tHe Prussian

AcapEMy oF ScrENCES AT WIEN.

oo Math-Natur Classe Band XXII. heft 1-3, and Band

XXIII. heft 1.—By tHe Same.

Denkscriften der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, Mathe-

matisch. Natur. Classe Band XII.—By THE Samer.

Archiv fir kunde 6sterr Geschichtsquellen, Band XVII. heft 1-2,

Band XVIII. heft 1.—By tHe Same.

202

282 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 4.

Fontes Rerum Austriacarum, Band X, Abth. 2, and Band XIII. Abth.

2.—By THE SAME.

Monumenta Habursgica, 2 Abth.—By THE Same.

-—— Conciliorum Generalium Seculi Decimi Quinti, Tome.I.

Royal 4to.—By THE Same. :

Almanach der kaiserlichen Akademie der Wissenschaften, 1857.—By

THE SAME.

Las Historias Del Origen de los Indios de esta Provincia de Guate-

mala, Traducidas de la lengua quiche al castellano para mas comodidad

de los ministros del s evangelio Por E. R. P. EF. F. Ximenez, Por E. Dr.

C. Scherzer, 8vo. Vienna, 1857.—By THE ACADEMY.

The Indian Annals of Medical Sciences or Half-yearly Journal of

Practical Medicine and Surgery, No. VIII. April, 1857.—By tux Epitor.

Selections from the Records of the Bombay Government, No. XLII.

—By tHe BomBay GOVERNMENT.

Report on the Survey Operations of the Lower Provinces from Ist

Oct. 1855 to 30th Sept. 1856.—By Tue Beneau Govt.

Maps of the Administration Report for the year 1855-56, Part I1I.—By

THE SAME.

The Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. VIII. No. 28.—By THE

Roya. Society or LONDON.

The Infant Treatment in Vernacular, 12mo. Calcutta, 1857.—By Base

Suis Cuunpra Dzs.

Mr. David Smith’s Report of the Sigrowlee and Kurhurbaree Coal

Fields, pamphlet.—By THE GOVERNMENT oF INDIA, PuBLic Works

DEPARTMENT.

The Oriental Baptist for July and August, 1857.—By tue Epirtor.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for July and August, 1857.—By THE

Epitors.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for June and July, 1857.—By THE

EDITOR.

The Vividharta Safigraha, Nos. 37, 38 and 39.—By Basu Ra’ JENDRA-

La’'L MiTTRA.

A letter to the Members of the Photographic Society in Defence of

Babu Rajendralal Mittra—By a MrumsBer.

Natuurkundig Tijdschrift voor Nederlandsch Indié, Deel XII. Derde

Serie Deel II. afl. 4, 5 and 6, and Deel. III. afl. 1 to 4.—By THe Bara-

VIAN SOCIETY.

Zeitschrift der deutschen morgenlandischen Gesellschaft, Elfter Band,

heft 2.—By THE GERMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 283

Die Lieder Des Hafis, Persisch mit dem commentare des Sudi Heraus-

gegeben von Hermann Brockhaus, Band I. heft 3 and 4.—By THE

Epiror.

Deutsches Worterbuch von Jacob Grimm und Wilhelm Grimm, 2 Band

Lieferung 5, Der—Doch. Liepzig.—By tur AuTHoRs.

Monographie des Guépes Sociales, ou de la Tribu des Vespiens,

ouvrage faisant suite ala Monographie des Guépes Solitaires, par Henri

de Saussure, Cahier 2nd and 3rd, pamphlet, and 1 vol. of plates —By THE

AUTHOR.

Mélanges Hyménoptérologiques par Henri de Saussure, 1 Fasc. pam-

phlet, 1854.—By tHE AUTHOR.

Nouvelles Considérations sur la nidification des Guépes par H. de

Saussure.—By THE AUTHOR.

Castréns (M. Alexander) Versuch einer Burjatischen Sprachlehre nebst

Kurzem Worterverzeichniss, Im auftrage der kaiserlichen Akademie der

Wissenschaften herausgegeben von Anton Schiefner, S¢. Petersburgh,

1857.—By THE ACADEMY.

The Journal of the Indian Archipelago and Eastern Asia, edited by

J. R. Logan, New Series. Vol. I. No. 11, Vol. II. No. 1, 2 copies.—By

THE Epiror.

Vocabulary of Dialects of Aboriginal Tribes of Tasmania, by Joseph

Milligan, No. 7, sheets —By Tur Royat Socrrty or TASMANIA.

Meteorological Tables kept at the Observatory of Hobart Town,

Tasmania, January to May, 1857.—By Tux Samz.

Bhuddhism and Buddist Pilgrims. Areview of M. Stanislas Julien’s

“Voyages des Pelerins Bouddhistes” together with a letter on the origi-

nal meaning of Nirvana’’ by M. Muller.—By tHe RevirweEr.*

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie. Herausgegeben von F. Wohler,

Justus Liebeg und Hermann Kopp, from J anuary, to April, 1857.—By tHE

Cuemicay Society at Linpzie.

Catalogue of the Geological Museum in connexion with the Geological

Survey of India, Calcutta, Part I. Minerals, 1857.—By tue Director

OF THE GEOLOGICAL SURVEY IN INDIA.

Selections from the Records of the Government of India (Home De-

partment) No. XXIII. Report upon the present condition and future

prospects of Tea Cultivation in the North Western Provinces and in the

Punjaub.—By tHe Govt. oF Inp1a.

* Twenty copies for sale at 1 Rupee each.—Apply to the Librarian, Asiatic

Society.

284 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Exchanged.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine of Science

for May and June, 1857, Nos. 87 and 88.

The Atheneum, for April and May, 1857.

Purchased.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 11 to 21.

Journal des Savants for April and May, 1857.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, Nos. 2, 3 and 4 of 1857.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th April, 15th May and 1st June, 1857.

The Natural History Review, No. II. for April, 1857.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, Nos. 113 and 114 for

May and June, 1857.

The American Journal of Science and Arts, Nos. 68 and 69.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome V. No. 6 and Tome VI. No. 1.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2105 to 2108.

Gour Da’s Bysa’cx,

Inbrarian and Asst. Secy.

1st September, 1857.

Report of Curator, Zoological Department, July Meeting, 1857.

Sir,—But few donations have been received since my last Report.

1. From T. C. Jerdon, Esq. Nagpore. A small spiny-tailed Swift, the

AcANTHYLIS syLvaTica, Tickell, J. A. 8S. XV, 284, obtained by Major

S. R. Tickell in Central India, and subsequently in greater abundance

near Darjiling. It is well distinguished from the small Pinang species, Ac.

LEUCOPYGIALIS, nobis, J. A. S. XVIII, 809, and structurally by having

amore compressed bill, and by having the tail formed as in the large

Ac. NupIPEs of the Himalaya; whereas the other has the more Wood-

pecker-like tail of Ac. GiGANTEA, with the medial spines much more

developed. Both are rare species in collections, if indeed a specimen of

either occurs elsewhere than in our own museum.

2.—W. T. Blanford, Esq. A fine specimen of the Ruizomys BADIUS,

Hodgson, or ‘ Bambu Rat’ of the Nipal and Sikhim tard? ; also an example

of Suya aTroguLaRis, Moore, P. Z. 8.1854, p. 77 (a species new to the

Society’s museum), and a few other bird-skins from the vicinity of

Darjiling.

Subsequently, Mr. Blanford has favored us with the following speci:

mens, also from Darjiling.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 285

Of mammalia, RHINoLoPHUS TRAGATUS, Hodgson (very dark-coloured),

CorsirA caupaTa, (Hodgson,—distinct from C. aLpina—Sorex alpinus,

Schinz),* SoricuLus NicgRESCcENS, Tapa MicrouRA, Hodgson (since set

up as a skeleton), specimens in spirit of SctuRus LokrorpeEs and Sc.

McC etianpit, and a skeleton (imperfect) of SctuROPTERA ALBONIGRA.

Of reptiles, Canorss (?) TRICARINATUS, MocoA SIKIMENSIS, CALAMARIA

Fusca, nobis (several, the largest of them 16 in. long), pipsas (?) coLu-

BRINA, 2. s., TRIGONOCEPHALUS ————— (?), TR. DIPsAs, var. (anterior

half greenish-grey, with black-bordered scales), TRIGONOCEPHALUS NIL-

GIRIENSIS, PoLYPEDATES MARMORATA (J. A. S. XXIV, 188, of which

Hyla obtusa, nobis, J. A. S. XII, 931, proves to be the young).

3.—From myself. Carcass of a fine male Sta-gosh (FELIS CARACAL),

which has been prepared as a stuffed specimen.

Lastly, may be noticed a purchased skin, from the neighbourhood of

Darjiling, of the remarkably handsome and curiously coloured Bat, Nyc-

TICEJUS ORNATUS, nobis, J. A. S. XX, 159, 517, where described from the

Khasya hills. The present beautiful specimen had less of the pale colour

on the membranes than that originally described; it being confined chief-

ly to the interfemoral, and to the margin of the fore-arms. Fur of the

upper-parts pale fulvous with bright ruddy tips, darker laterally and

posteriorly : an interrupted pale median line from the occiput, composed

in part of pure white tufts, one at the occiput, another between the

shoulders, and a third on the middle of the back; corresponding to these

are three white lateral tufts on each side, the first being upon the shoul-

der: lower-parts subdued white, with a broad dark brown collar or

gorget, continued downward as a wide median streak upon the belly;

from the shoulders, the white is continued round as a second gorget, in-

terrupted in the middle, but prolonged down each side of the pectoral

region, and approximating posteriorly; being bordered outwardly with

dark brown at the base of the volar membrane. The pencil, however,

is required to aid the pen to convey a vivid idea of the markings of this

singularly handsome species, which may well bear the popular designa-

tion of ‘ Harlequin Bat,’ a name that should conduce to its facile recog-

nition.

EK. BuyrTH.

* Contrary to the opinion of Mr. R. F. Tomes, J. A. S. XXIV, 362. W. B.

The small Shrew noticed in J. A. S. XXIV, 188, as having been found in a cellar

in Madras, I find, from a memorandum, was returned to the Hon’ble W-. Elliot,

Madras C. 8,

286 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

For Sreprember, 1857.

The Monthly General Meeting for September was held on the 2nd

instant.

Major H. L. Thuillier, Senior member present, in the Chair.

The proceedings of the July meeting were read and confirmed.

The August meeting separated without proceeding to business, in

consequence of there not being a sufficient number of members

present to form a quorum.

Presentations were received—

From the Austrian Academy of Sciences at Vienna, the latest

publications of the Academy.

Two coins found at Bali, and purchased for the Society’s Cabinet,

were exhibited. They were, one of Hossein Shah of Bengal, 917 H.

and the other of Nuserat Shah, son of Hossein Shah, 930 H.

Robert Schlagintweit, Esq. was proposed as a corresponding

member of the Society by the President, seconded by Mr. At-

kinson.

Notes from the following gentlemen, announcing their wish to

withdraw from the Society, were recorded.

P. W. LeGeyt, Esq., C. S., D. G. Nicholson, Esq. J. F. Curtis,

Esq., A. R. Young, Esq., C. S., and W. G. Young, Esq., C. 8.

The nomination, which the Council announced in July last, of

Lieut.-Col. R. Strachey, as a Vice-President of the Society, in place

of Dr. Spilsbury deceased, was confirmed.

Communications were received—

1. From Babu Rada Nauth Sikdar, an abstract of the Meteorolo-

gical Register kept in the Office of the Surveyor General for the —

months of April, May and June last.

2. From Mr. Piddington, ‘‘ Notes for Ships and Steamers lying |

in the stream, or at moorings at Calcutta, or near it, and for River

boats, on the approach of a Cyclone.

3. From Ditto “ Practical notes on the best mode of obtaining |

the highest duty from Burdwan Coal as compared with English |

Coal.”

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 287

4, From Mr. H. L. Inman, C. E., forwarding an account and

diagram of the different deposits passed through in proceeding from

the right bank of the Indus to the Coal deposits in the Sehware

district of Kurrachee.

5. From Major Thuillier, forwarding a paper by Lieut. Montgo-

merie, Engineers, on the heights of certain snowy peaks of the

Himalayah in the neighbourhood of Kashmir.

6. From the Royal Society of Tasmania, the Meteorological

tables kept in the Observatory of Hobart Town during the months

of January to June last.

7. From the Government of India through Mr. Under Secy.

Chapman, copies of papers relative to two Meteoric stones which

fell near the Village Parnallee, in the Madura district, Madras :—

From R. J. Suuiivan, Esq.,

To H. A. Murray, £sq.,

My pear Mr. Murray,—I forward herewith a letter from the

Revd. J. Taylor, an American Missionary.

Perhaps Lord Harris might wish some steps to be taken about

one or both the Aérolite stones mentioned in the letter, the larger

one appears a phenomenon in point of size.

Should His Lordship require any one or any portion for the

Museum, I can procure it.

(Signed) R. J. SULLIVAN.

Madura, 28th March, 1857.

From H. 8. Taytor, £sq.,

To RK. J. Suttivan, Esq.,

Drar Sr1r,—Near the village of Parnallee in this talook two

meteoric stones have fallen. J have been on to the ground, and

seen the places where they fell and the exact impression made in

the earth where they lay. As no rain has fallen since, I was able

to see that there was no mistake about it. The noise made as they

came through the air made a deep impression on the minds of the

people in that region, and was heard, I find from reports, from along

the sea shore up to Teruchooly. They fell about three miles

apart from each other. The smaller one weighs about 387 pounds,

and sunk in the earth, where it fell, two feet and eight inches. The

288 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

larger one is from three to four times as large, and sunk in the

earth two feet and four inches. It struck the earth flatwise. The

smaller one fell about perpendicularly. The larger fell (coming

from the north a little to the west) making an angle with a per-

pendicular line, of about fifteen degrees. Persons were standing

near each place where they fell. Many worshipped them. The

villagers gave them up to me, on condition that I should inform

you, and save them from trouble being made, or rather, which they

feared some officials might make. Ido not make this statement

officially, but am ready, if you desire it, to make an official statement

on the subject. In writing this, I have fulfilled my promise to the

people there.

Yours affectionately,

(Signed) H. 8S. Taytor.

Mandahasolie, March 28th, 1857.

From H. A. Murray, Hsq., -'

To Rh. J. SuLttivan, Hsq.,

My pear Sutitvay,—I write to acknowledge the receipt of your

letter of the 28th ultimo, with enclosure from the Rev. Mr. Taylor

(herewith returned), and to thank you for the information which

you afford.

Lord Harris desires me to say that he thinks one of the meteoric

stones, the larger one, should certainly be sent to the Museum here,

and that Mr. Taylor might keep the other one for himself, as he

might perhaps like to do so; and to request at the same time also,

that you would ask Mr. Taylor to be good enough to furnish you

with a statement of all the particulars and circumstances connected

with the occurrence, the state of the atmosphere at the time, &c.

(Signed) HH. A. Murray.

Guendy, 1st April, 1857.

From H. S. Taytor, £sq.,

To R. J. SuLuivan, Hsq., Collector of Mudura,

Dear Srr,—Your note of 9th of April reached me at Rumnad

on the 22nd, algo the note of Mr. Murray to yourself, which I here-

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 289

with return. I agree with Lord Harris that “one of the meteoric

stones’ should be sent to the Museum at Madras, and I consent

that it should be the largest, as they fell within this Presidency. I

also thank His Lordship for kindly suggesting to you that “ Mr.

Taylor might keep the other one for himself as he might perhaps

like to do so.” Simply for myself I do not desire it, but while I

honor the English, and am glad to have one at Madras for that

reason, I love also my own country, which is but a branch of the

English stock, and wish to send the other there. You are at

liberty, however, to keep it at Madura till after the Exhibition in

June.

In respect to Mr. Murray’s request through you, I would state

that I gave a somewhat winute account of their fall, &c. to Dr.

Colebrook, with liberty to publish, should he think best, in the

Atheneum. If he has done so, this may not be needed; I will,

however, give a few particulars,

1. They fell on the 28th of February, Saturday, at about noon, a

little south east of the village of Parnallee, Latitude north, accord-

ing to the Government Map 9° 14! Longitude 78° 21’ east.

2. The largest one fell a few seconds before the smaller one, and

from two to three miles north of it. As was manifest from the hole

it made in the ground when it fell, it came from a direction some

ten degrees west of north, making an angle of about 15 or 20

degrees with a line perpendicular to the earth’s surface. It struck

the earth (or at least lay in the bottom of the hole made by it)

flatwise, on the side that 1s most convex. The most round or

convex side of the smaller stone also was downward, this being the

position they would naturally assume as they passed with great velo-

city through the resisting atmosphere, an idea which did not occur to

me tillnow. I had before simply noted the fact. The larger stone

sunk into the earth when it fell, two feet and five inches, in a per-

pendicular direction. The smaller one two feet and eight inches.

The smaller one fell also about perpendicularly. The smaller does

not appear in any respect like a fragment of the larger one. The

specific gravity of the smaller one, when it fell was about 3-3, water

being the standard of unity. I observed that the specific gravity

was increased after exposure to a shower, or that of the smaller

2P2

290 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

one was. I did not try that of the larger. The crack on the convex

side of the larger one I did not perceive at all till it had been wet,

and then at first it was just perceptible. Afterwards it gradually

opened, I suppose, owing to the oxidation of the native iron it

contains, perhaps, however, to other causes. The stones had not

been wet till they came into my hands April 21st. They, each of

them, fell in cultivated fields, one of which had been harvested. The

crop in the other was still standing.

3. The noise seems to have been terrific to the Natives, causing

those near to crouch from fear. It came like two claps of thunder,

as they fell one after the other, continuing for some time, but

gradually growing less loud. As they fell through the whole depth

of our atmosphere, this would naturally be the case. The noise

appears to have been heard at Tuticorin, forty miles distant. At

this place, sixteen miles north, it excited considerable interest

among those abroad at the time. The noise must have been great,

occasioned by their great velocity. Taking their specific gravity

into the account, say 3-3, their size being about that of large cannon

balls, some allowance also being made for their irregular shape,

from the depth they penetrated the soil; which was of common

hardness, those who have observed the power of projectiles in

such cases, will be able to calculate approximately what that

velocity was.

4. Of the excitement among the natives, I suppose, I need not

speak. I visited the place, because of the rumours that were flying

abroad, making it evident to my mind that something peculiar had

there transpired. First, I saw the holes from which, in the culti-

vated fields they had been freshly taken, no rain having subsequent-

ly fallen, and saw at the bottom the hardly compressed and exact

impression left by them as they were taken up, and then as I saw

the stones, I knew instantly that they were the identical ones which

had been taken from those places. As I was more or less known in

that region, and there is no gentleman whatever anywhere near, the

rural people, utterly ignorant of the cause, came in great numbers

to state the facts, and ask some explanation. Some of them sup-

posed they were gods that had fallen; some that they had been

shot from cannon in ships at Tuticorin; and some, that a Brahman

1857.| Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 291

had brought them from the sea by his muntrunes: some rejected

all these theories ; but no one could tell or feel satisfied as to how

these things could be. By simply striking my staff through the

air, I could explain to them the noise; and by tying a stone to a

string, and swinging it I could make them understand the centri-

fugal and centripetal forces, and how that from some disturbance in

these forces, stones moving about some centre, like the moon about

the earth, might fall. The explanations gave them relief. They put

confidence in me, and gave me the stones at my request, that I

might save them from the trouble of any official investigation, and

put them into some Museum, or Scientific Institution.

P.S.—I forgot to say that there was nothing peculiar in the

state of the atmosphere. It was aclear day. When the stone is

sent on to Madras, if any scientific gentleman makes an analysis of

it for the Museum, please be so good as to ask a copy of it for me.

Yours very truly,

(Signed) H. S. Tayzor.

Manduhasolie, April 25th, 1857.

8. From Mr. HE. Lushington, Officiating Assistant Secretary to

the Government of Bengal, inclosing copy of a despatch, dated 3rd

June last, from the Hon’ble Court of Directors, and enclosure on

the subject of the Geological Map of India prepared by the late

Mr. Greenough :—

From R. B. Cuapman, Lsq.,

Offg. Under-Secy. to the Govt. of India,

To A. R. Youne, Esq.,

Secy. to the Govt. of Bengal.

Dated the 27th July, 1857, Home Department.

Srr,— With reference to the special Narrative of the Government

Rigas Dept. of sib Sab No. 25, dated the —— August, 1856, re-

specting Mr. Greenough’s Geological Map of India,

Tam directed to transmit for the information of the Hon’ble the

Lieut.-Governor, and for communication to the Asiatic Society, the

292 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

accompanying copy of a despatch, No. 76 of 1857, dated the 8rd

June, from the Hon’ble the Court of Directors and enclosure.

A copy of the despatch has this day been communicated to the

Superintendent of the Geological Survey for information, and for

such remarks as he may be disposed to offer thereon.

I have, &e.,

(Signed) R. B. CoarmMan,

Offg. Under-Secy. to the Govt. of India.

Publie Department.

Our Governor-General of India in Council.

Para. 1.—We observe that all the Officers, to whom the Map

was communicated, expressed a high

Letter dated 4th Sept. (No. : es

117) 1856, forwarding Bengal puke of ae value, as a record of exiaens

special narrative relating tothe information as to the Geology of India.

Geol. Map of India, prepared . .

By tho eke reeronat aud ou it appears to bp-comsiaened by a Com-

sent out by the Court forexam- mittee of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

ination, and remarks by the of-

ficers of Government in India. tat from various circumstances the map

should remain unaltered, as a memorial

of the state of our Geological knowledge at the time of its publica-

tion, and that any Geological Map of India, intended to shew the

results of more recent and more extended investigations, should be

commenced de novo, when sufficient data shall have been obtained

from the researchés now in progress.

2. We transmitted the correspondence on the subject to the

Council of the Geological Society of London, with a request that we

might be furnished with the opinion of the Council en the best

mode of proceeding, with a view to the framing of an accurate

Geological Map of India.

3. We now forward to you in the packet a copy of the letter

in which the views of the Council are stated, from which you will

observe that the Council concurs generally in the conclusions of the

Committee of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

4. The various suggestions of the Council seem worthy of adop-

tion, and we do not doubt that, in communication with Mr. Oldham,

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 293

you will be able to frame a scheme, by which the object in view will,

in proportion as a correct knowledge of the Geology of India is ob-

tained, be effectively carried out.

We are, &e.,

(Signed) Ross D. Mawatss,

u » . Currin,

And other Directors,

London, 3rd June, 1857. Dover, 7th March.

To Siz J. C. Metvitt, K. C. B.,

Secretary to the Hon ble Hast India Company.

Stzr,—The Council of the Geological Society having carefully

examined the documents submitted for their consideration by the

Court of Directors of the East India Company, in reference to the

Geological Map of India, compiled by the late Mr. Greenough, have

requested me to convey to the Court of Directors their opinion on

the subject as requested by your letter of the 5th January.

It appears from the reports of the Indian authorities to whom

the Map has been forwarded, that in respect to topography it is

extremely defective, and on that ground alone the Council would

consider it an unfit basis for accurate Geological investigations,

such as those now carrying on under the sanction of the Hast India

Company.

It is surmised in one of the reports that the inferiority of the

Map in this point of view may be partly ascribed to the long period

of labour (20 years) bestowed;upon it, the topographical Map having

perhaps been selected at the remoter epoch of this long period of

time, but knowing the extraordinary zeal with which Mr. Greenough

pursued Geographical enquiry, sparing neither time, labour, nor

expense, the Council cannot imagine that he neglected any means

within his reach to give perfection to his Map, and are there-

fore more disposed to the conclusion that the materials for a

good Map of India are more abundant and accessible in India

than in England. The fact, however, is the same, and the Council

cannot therefore recommend any further extension of the Map by

294: Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

the issue of a new edition, thinking it best that the existing and

unappropriated copies of the Map should be so distributed in India

as to facilitate the comparison of its results with those of recent

observation, the Map containing therefore a record only of the infor-

mation accumulated by Mr. Greenough.

The necessity of adopting this course is further confirmed by the

very strong opinions expressed by the Director of the India Geolo-

gical Survey and by the Curator of the Museum of Economic Geo-

logy in India, of the many inaccuracies in the Geological informa-

tion of the Map, inaccuracies not confined to errors in determining

the limiting boundary between two contiguous formations, but in-

volving the most serious mistakes as to the true nature and position

of the formations themselves. These mistakes it was scarcely possi-

ble that Mr. Greenough as the compiler of the information, obtained

by others, of whose ability and accuracy he could not always be a

competent judge, should entirely avoid; but it would be very

unwise to hamper the able Geological Surveyors of India by requir-

ing them to adjust their information to so imperfect a Map. The

opinion of the Council is therefore that the first step should be,

to lay down from all the information possessed in India, an ap-

proximatively correct topographical Map, which it is believed could

be effectively done by the East India Survey Department, and that

on this Map should be recorded all the information of a Geological

character in possession of the Directors, whether in India or at

home, the act of recording being, however, confided to the Geolo-

gical Department in India, as best able to estimate the fidelity and

value of the information not actually resulting from their own

enquiries.

The Council would also suggest that copies of this improved Map

should, as soon as possible, be forwarded to the learned Societies,

especially Geological, at home, in order that the attention of scien-

tific men should be at the first moment directed to it, as one of

the best means of insuring its ultimate perfection.

I have, &c.,

(Signed) J. G. Porrtocr, President.

The Librarian submitted his usual monthly report for the months

of July and August last.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 295

LIBRARY.

The Library received the following accessions during September last.

Presented.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie for May, 1857.—By tHe Eprror.

Journal Asiatique, No. 35.—By tHe Astatic Soctgery or Paris.

Journal of the Statistical Society of London, Vol. XX. Part II. June,

1857.—By THE Socriery.

(Quarterly) of the Geological Society, No. 50, Vol. XIII. Part.

2, May, 1857.—By Tue Society.

Weber’s (Dr. A.) Indische Studien, Band IV. Heft 1.—By tur AutHor.

Introduction a L’ Etude de la Langue Japonaise, par L. Léon De Rosny.

—By M. Curz Bensamin Doprat.

Journal of the Academy of Natural Sciences of Philadelphia, New

Series, Vol. III. Part I. Philadelphia, Royal 4to.—By tur Acapemy.

Geological Papers on Western India, including Cutch, Sinde, and the

South-east Coast of Arabia; to which is appended a Summary of the

Geology of India generally edited for the Government by H. J. Carter,

Royal 8vo. ; with an Atlas of Maps and Plates, folio— By Tur Govt. oF

BomBay.

Smithsonian Contributions to Knowledge, Vols. VI. and VII. Royai

4to. Washington.— By THE SMITHSONIAN INSTITUTION.

Reports 8th and 9th (Annual) and the Proceedings of the

Board of Regents of the Institution, up to Feby. 4th, 1855.—By tur

SAME.

Proceedings of the Academy of Natural Ssiences of Philadelphia. Vol.

VII. Nos. 2 to 7 (sheets)—By tHe ACADEMY.

of the New Orleans Academy of Sciences, Vol. I. No. I.—

By THe ACADEMY.

Constitution and By-laws of the ditto —By THE Same

Madras Journal of Literature and Science, April to June, 1857, Vol.

II. and No. 3.—By tHe Epiror.

Selections from the Records of the Government of Bengal. No. XX VI.

Reports on the Suppression of Dacoity in Bengal for 1855-56, 2 copies.—

By THe BenGat Govt.

Vikramorvas’i of Kalidasa translated into Bengali by Kaliprasana

Sing, pamphlet, Calcutta, 1857.—By THE TRANSLATOR.

Bistvadistak, by Bharut Chunder Seeromonee, pamphlet, Calcutta,

1268.—By Basu Gour Da’s Bysacx.

The Vividhartha Safgraha, No. 40.—By Basu Rasyenprata’t Mirrra.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for August, 1857 —By rue Epiror,

i umthememeescss oe

296 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

The Oriental Baptist for September, 1857.—By tue Eprror.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for ditto.—By THe Epitors.

Eaxchanged.

The Athenzeum, for June, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, Nos. 89

and 90, for July, 1857.

Purchased.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome 6, Nos. 3 and 4.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 115, for July, 1857.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 22 and 23.

Tables des Comptes Rendus des Sciences de l’Academie des Sciences;

Tome quarante-Troisiem, July to December, 1856, Tome X LILI.

Literary Gazette, Nos. 2109 to 2112.

The Natural History Review, No. 3, for July, 1857.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th June and Ist July, 1857.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 5, 1857.

Edinburgh Review, No. 215, for July, 1857.

Westminster Review, No. XXIII. July, 1857.

Weber’s (Dr. A.) Indische Studien 4th, Band X. Heft 1.

Traces de Buddhisme en Norvége avant l’introduction du Christianisme,

par M. C. A. Holmboe, 1857, pamphlet.

K’tudes sur la Grammaire Védique. Praticakhya du Rig-Véda par

M. A. D. Regnier, 8vo. Paris, 1857.

Gour Da’s Bysa’cx.

Inbrarian and Asst. Secy.

lst October, 1857.

DALAL

For OctopeEr, 1857.

The Monthly General Meeting for October was held on the 7th

Instant.

The Hon’ble Sir James Colvile, Knight, President, in the Chair.

The proceedings of the last Meeting were read and confirmed.

Presentations were received—

1. From C. G, F. Lloyd, Esq., New Norfolk, Tasmania, a box

containing animals and birds as described in Mr. Blyth’s report.

2. From the Smithsonian Institution, Washington, the latest

publications of the Institution,

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 297

_ 3. From the Government of Bombay, 2 copies of the Geological

papers on Western India, &c., with Atlas.

4, From Babu Kali Prasana Sing, a copy of his translation of

Kalidass’s Vikramarvasi, a pamphlet.

The election of Mr. Robert Schlagintweit as a corresponding

member of the Society was postponed under rule 6 of the Society’s

byelaws.

The following gentlemen have signified their wish to withdraw

from the Society. Their notes were recorded.

Lieut. H. T. Forsss,

Dr. F. J. Movar.

The Council announced that they had elected, as members of

their body, subject to the confirmation of the Society, Captain C. H.

Dickens, and Mr. Cowell in the place of Dr. Spilsbury deceased and

Archdeacon Pratt resigned.

Communications received.

1. From Mr. H. Piddington a description of the “ Balsa’’ or raft

of the Phillipine Island, with directions for making it.

2. From Lieut.-Colonel Waugh, Surveyor General of India, through

Major Thuillier, the following papers on the identity of Mount

Everest with Deodangha.

SurRvVEYOR GENERAL’S Finenp OFFicer,

Deyra Dhoon, 5th August, 1857.

My pear Tuouitriier,—In my letter No. 29 of 1st March, 1856,

communicating the results of our calculations for the position and

height of No. XV in my list of Himalayan peaks, I stated my

reasons for deciding to call this peak “ Mount Everest.”

At the August meeting, last year, of the Asiatic Society of Bengal,

you were good enough to communicate the results regarding “ Mount

Everest’’ in an interesting address delivered by yourself. The facts

having been thus promulgated, Mr. Hodgson endeavoured in the

Journal of the Asiatic Society to establish the identity of Mount

Everest with Deodangha, &c. The arguments adduced for this pur-

pose were so palpably conjectural, resting on hearsay evidence alone,

that I thought it needless to refute them, as their fallacious cha-

racter must be apparent to any person competent to understand

2 Oa

298 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

the subject. The true Geographical Latitude and Longitude of

Deodangha are unknown to Mr. Hodgson, or even its true bearing

and distance from any locality which can be recognised as a fixed

point of departure. Its height also is unknown. All these data

are elements necessary to the identification of that mountain. The

physiognomical contour of a mountain is a very uncertain test, be-

cause it changes with every mutation of aspect; but even this test

is wanting in Mr. Hodgson’s case, as he has never seen Deodangha.

In April last, my attention was drawn to another communication

made by Mr. Hodgson to the Asiatic Society, from which it appears

that he has taken steps to put the subject, in what appears to me, a

very unfair light, before the Royal Asiatic Society, as well as to have

his conclusions on a point of great ambiguity, promulgated as cer-

tainties in Journals of extensive circulation. Under these circum-

stances, I considered that it would be satisfactory to scientific men,

that the grounds on which the supposed indentity of Deodangha

was made to rest, should be examined and discussed. In my judg-

ment the only proper way of doing this, was to lay the whole of the

documentary materials before a Geographical Committee composed

of Geometricians of experience and capacity, competent to deal with

such investigations. With this view I issued departmental orders

annexed.

Of the five officers to whom this duty was assigned, four have now

delivered their reports. The fifth Lieut. Montgomerie of Engineers

is at present difficult to communicate with, being absent in Thibet,

conducting the G. T. Survey operations beyond Kashmir. That

officer’s opinions will be very valuable, and D. V. shall be transmit-

ted hereafter. In the meantime, encompassed as we are by the con-

fusion and embarrassments attending a military rebellion of unpre-

cedented magnitude, ] am unwilling to delay the transmission of

the four reports hereto annexed. These are so ably argued, and

place the subject in so luminous a point of view, that it is unneces:

sary for me to add more than a few words in this place.

Mr. Hodgson labours under a strong conviction, that Mount

Everest is identical with Deodangha; and the enthusiasm and in-

genuity with which he advocates his view of the question seem to

have carried the same conviction to the minds of others not conver-

}

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 299

sant with the facts. It is easy to see how, this fallacy originated in

his mind. The sketch map published by him in the Journal of the

Asiatic Society, December 1848, gives his idea of the configuration

of that part of the Himalayas. A more erroneous impression of the

formation of the country was never formed. He represents a solitary

mountain occupying a vast tract. If this unity really existed, the

identity of Mount Everest and Deodangha would indeed be indis-

putable, as it would rest on the fact of there being only one

mountain within a given space. This single mountain, however, is

entirely imaginary. The range presents the appearance of a sierra

with innumerable peaks and groups of peaks. Among these, nine

have been fixed by the G. T. Survey of India, and are marked XII

to XXI in the chart accompanying Mr. Scott’s report. Besides

these nine, several others are more or less partially visible, which

we were unable to identify, and those who have any experience in

conducting Geodetical operations in the Himalaya, can harbour no

doubt that many other peaks do exist, which have been concealed

from our view by intermediate ranges. It is well known to Surveyors,

that among a number of peaks having various altitudes and dis-

tances, the highest point in appearance is not always the highest in

reality ; the occular deception being caused by the increment in the

earth’s curvature and decrement in the subtended angle caused by

distance.

The erroneous idea Mr. Hodgson has formed of the configuration

of this mountain range is sufficiently proved by his sketch map

already referred to. If further proof was necessary it may be de-

rived from the statement Mr. Hodgson has given of the opinion he

communicated to me when I returned from the expedition I made

into Sikim in 1847. Having mentioned to him, that I had seen

from the confines of that province an enormous snow mass lying in

a north-westerly direction from Tonglo, he immediately pronounced

it to be “Deodangha.” Now the mountain I then saw was not

Mount Everest, but No. XIII which Major Sherwill has so well

described in the Asiatic Journal. Thus Mr. H. has attributed the

same name to No. XIII and to No. XV without any exact know-

ledge of the height or position of either. He has fallen into this

mistake from adopting the erroneous conception that there is only

a single mountain in all this wide space.

300 Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [ No. 4.

Mr. Hodgson proves no more than that there is according to

native report, a mountain called Deodangha somewhere between our

Nos. XI and XXI (vide chart.) That mountain may be one of the

peaks fixed by us, or it may be one that we failed to fix, or it may

not have been visible to us at all.

If Deodangha is to be taken as the highest peak, that allegation

only rests on the hearsay evidence of natives unable to determine

the actual height of a mountain, and if it be a true guess on their

part, it by no means establishes the identity of Deodangha, because

we do not know for certain that Mount Everest is the highest

culminating point. All we do know is, that it is the highest point

we have measured.

The only satisfactory way, in which the position of Deodangha

can be determined, is by carrying a series of triangles towards it,

until it can be seen and identified. Operations of this kind are im-

practicable at present for political reasons. In the meantime the

position and height of Deodangha constitute a Geographical problem

remaining to be solved. If it is not identical with Mount Everest, a

very grave blunder would be committed by assigning its name to

another peak. If it is identical, no harm will have been done by

the adoption of another cognomen, pending the doubt now existing.

Great stress has been laid in some quarters on the fact, that the

position of Deodangha is given in German maps. Now this proves

no more than that some German Geographers are rash enough to

lay down any thing upon hearsay, for we know beyond all question,

that no competent European, with adequate means, has ever been

in the vicinity of Deodangha, so as to be able to fix it. Deodangha

does not appear in English maps, because it would be inconsistent

with the rigorous notions which prevail among English scientific

men in general, to pretend to give the position of a point on the

earth’s surface on hearsay evidence. It would violate every prin-

ciple of accuracy and precision laid down by my predecessor for the

conduct of the Trigonometrical Survey of India to jump at conclu-

sions, in this reckless manner.

As the principle of adopting an European name has been much

commented upon, I will kere add without further remark, paras. 6

and 7 of my letter to your address, cited at the commencement of

his letter.

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 301

“TI was taught by my respected chief and predecessor Colonel G.

Everest, to assign to every Geographical object its true local or

native appellation, and I have always scrupulously adhered to this

rule, as I have, in fact, to all other principles laid down by that

eminent Geodist.

“ But here is a mountain, most probably the highest in the world,

without any local name that we can discover, whose native appella-

tion, if it has any, will not very likely be ascertained until we are

allowed to penetrate into Nepal.”

In conclusion, as the Asiatic Society has inserted in its Journal

papers tending to mislead in regard to the identity of Deodangha

and Mount Everest, I trust that they will give prominence to this

discussion, which proves that the identity is not only doubtful, but

far from probable, if the particulars supplied by Mr. Hodgson are

correct so far as they go. Considering it a matter of importance,

that Geographers should be enabled to form their own opinion on

the subject, I request you will communicate this correspondence

with its annexures to the Asiatic Society retaining a copy for record.

I remain, Xe.

(Signed) A. S. Wavau.

P.S.—You will perceive the gist of the question is not whether

the mountain should be called Mount Everest, or by its true native

name (which is a principle not disputed by any one), but whether

it can be called Deodangha without risk of error, in the absence of

satisfactory proof that this is really its native name.

Department Order.

Surveyor General's Field Office,

Dhera Dhoon, 22d April, 1857.

The attention of the Surveyor General of India having been drawn

to the proceedings of the Asiatic

From Mr, Hodgson submitting for Society, as marginally cited, it

the information of the Society, and the ; ;

public in general, the following extract @ppears to him desirable that

of a letter from the Secretary to the th 1 i hicl :

Royal Asiatic Society in reference to ‘ 2 ais aa or Depa

the mountain Deodangha (“Mount raised as respects the identity

Kyverest” of Waugh.) 7a eee alate Clues! '

Your letter of the 27th October, to- of Mount Everest “with Deo-

gether with your observation, on the dangha,” should be examined by

302

incongruity of assigning a European

name to Indian localities, already pro-

vided with native appellations, was

received and read at our last meeting of

the 17th inst., and I have the pleasure

to inform you, that the members present

unanimously expressed their concur-

rence with your view of the case.

A notice of the paper was communi-

cated to the Atheneum and Literary

Gazette, and has appeared already in

full in the latter journal.

Proceedings of the Asiatic Society.

[ No. 4.

a competent Geographical Com-

mittee, in order to set that point

at rest.

2. The Surveyor General has

carefully examined all that Mr.

B. H. Hodgson has advanced in

support of the identity of Mount

Everest with Deodangha, and

I have, &c.,

(Signed) E. Norris,

Secy. R. A. Society.

To B. H. Hopeason, Esq.

has formed his own opinion on

the subject; but he thinks it

will be desirable that the ques-

tion should also be formally investigated by a Committee, and the

opinion thereof placed on record for general satisfaction.

3. The Committee will be composed as follows :—

Lieutenant Tennant, Eng., Ist Assistant G. T.5., in charge of

Jogi Tila Series.

W. Scott, Esq., Chief Draftsman in the Field Surveyor General’s

Office.

J. W. Armstrong, Esq., Civil Assistant G. T. Survey.

Lieutenant Montgomerie, Eng., lst Assistant G. T. Survey, in

charge of Kashmir Series.

J. Hennessy, Esq., 2d Assistant in charge of Geodetic Computa-

tions at Trigl. Survey Head Quarters.

4, The papers connected with Mount Everest, and Mr. Hodgson’s

alleged identification thereof with Deodangha, are at present under

charge of Mr. W. Scott who has spent a quarter of a century in

unravelling more intricate geographical problems than this. Mr.

Scott will form his own independent opinion, and submit the same

to the Surveyor General, after which he will forward the papers to ~

Mr. Hennessy.

5. Mr. Hennessy has been engaged on all the computations for

determining the positions and heights of the principal peaks of the —

Himalaya Range, including Mount Everest, and is well acquainted

with investigations of this kind. He also saw Mount Everest when ~

he was engaged in the North Hast Longitudinal Series. After —

submitting his independent opinion to the Surveyor General, he —

will forward the papers to Mr. J. W. Armstrong.

i, ee

ne ler the Madras

% is upplicable to re

al Astrenemical Searty,

atiece (0 the result ef Taylor's Observations up & B45.

| Note. The Lenaitiedes are rwfcrible to the

Tz 27 i whrok 2 curren

bby the Mdmirally

———Hrsht brought up tren Se Level at the Mouth of the Heogly by = -- = - =

| Trigerametrimt Levelling, and veriivat by opantions extonting & the

| Nex af Bonbay and Manic

| The Tiaks marked 48) C Ve: inutteate Ol! Crusfort’s points and

| are x2 characterized by hmm

SY WH, Soeth

4 (hit Drattsman, Bell Office Sale 32 Miles to ian lich

, Seay At: y, |

guedl) AS Wraright Le |

SawyeMeneral op Indea |

/ pat

fof iff) aati ore pase sag S|

Hy || pan cen

iia j J sxx ines } |

J \ \\N\ | j if | if |

le Z\_|N\ / f | : = — 4

| | | } ] *. ik i cries idan annee nae pul er| Paw hoonrie 25,186 |

| \ | | ) XML) 21799 / |

He Pier (eomalarr

: | 204

| pe of < Detaled prea Manchinyingw 26356 |

frraneyt Yt de if VAN ca |

FSS Meet axa y pW er Hs Rack |

7 Ness f OVI or Narnung V4 6 |

f pat ec ChsyruranKe * |

| < f if 1]

y iy Al ie bipmocks 1

l f {71

| |

| | |

| Rampur GOA | rhatearre

| mee

(pea Nanda par fon

thesaath OE sting)

— e ye } Nie

S = aetna Uiaslwipa 727 Es. |

Durning ry) toe rNesurbarte |

Shyam 2

wn ys Fehingara ec

Bisons Nine

aki Le 3

4 APurieah 3

ah = me een 387

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. 303

6. Mr. Armstrong is one of the gentlemen by whom Mount

Everest was observed. He will forward his opinion to the Surveyor

General, and the papers to Lieutenant Tennant, by whom they will

be independently reviewed ; thus giving the investigation the benefit

of his eminent abilities in matters of difficult research.

7. From Lieutenant Tennant, the papers will proceed to Lieute-

nant Montgomerie in Kashmir, whose recent experience in details

of Himalayan Geography will enable him to pronounce this ques-

tion, a valuable independent opinion, which he will transmit with

all the papers to the Surveyor General.

(Signed) A. 8. Wavau,

Surveyor General of India.

Seem

Memo. by Mr. W. H. Scott, Draftsman in the Field Surveyor

General's Office.

With reference to Department Orders No. 10267, dated 22nd

April, 1857, in which Iam ealled upon to state my independent

opinion on the identity of Mount Everest with Deodangha or

Bhairavathan, I beg leave to report for the information of the Sur-

veyor General of India as follows :—

After a very careful examination of the papers specified in the

margin, 1 am humbly of opinion

1st. Mr. Hodgson’s letter on the

that there is no evidence to es-

Native Name of Mount Everest, J. A.

S. No. 5, 1856,

The papers referred to in that com-

munication and published in J. A. S,

No. 6, 1856 are,—

ist. Routes of two Nepaulese Km-

bassies to Pekin, with remarks on the

Watershed and Plateau of Tibet.

2nd. Systematic summary of the

route from Katmandu to Pekin, Kaji

Dalbhanjan Pande, 1822-23.

3rd. Abstract of Diary from Kat-

mandu to Pekin by Chountra Push-

kersah, 1817.

4th. Memo. on the Seven Cosis with

Sketch Map, J. A. S. December 1848.

tablish satisfactorily the identity

of Mount Everest with Deo-

dangha or Bhairavathan.

The routes of thetwo Nepaulese

Katmandu to

Pekin no doubt coutain much

Embassies from

interesting details, but unfortu-

nately they do not assist us in

the present investigation, be-

cause, the Azimuths or Bearings,

it will be seen, are not given,

and consequently we can bring them to no account. It is essentially

necessary that the position of Kutighat or Bhairava Langur should

be known with some degree of certainty, but this we are unable to do

304: Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [ No. 4.

by the aid of the papers in question, as will be apparent to all familiar

with the subject. All the maps I have consulted only tend, in my

humble opinion, to confuse and mislead; for instance, the direct

distance of Kuti from Katmandu, according to Kirkpatrick’s Map,

is only 48 miles N. 88° E.; Walker’s engraved Map gives 63.6 miles

N. 60° H.; Parbury and Allen’s 60 miles N. 55° E.; according to

Crawford, 75 miles N. 75° E.; Arrowsmith’s Map 56.6 miles N. 78°

EH. ; according to the Preliminary Sketch Map compiled at the Sur-

veyor General’s Office, Calcutta, 72.6 miles N. 53° H.; according to

the route of Kaji Dalbhanjan Pande, the distance is 101.5 miles.

The Chountra omits Kuti altogether.

Amidst these conflicting values it is of course impossible to arrive

at any satisfactory conclusion. The following extract from a letter

from Major Ramsay, Resident at Nepal, to Major Thuillier, regarding

the compilation Map of that country, dated 11th June, 1855, will

serve to convey an idea of the conjectural materials and discordant

elements we have to deal with. “ You are doubtless aware that no

Kuropean has ever travelled in the interior of this country, and that

all the information we possess of it, is derived from the reports of

persons who are totally devoid of scientific knowledge, and accustomed

in their comparisons of distances to trust to vague estimates formed

by parties who have travelled through the different districts.”

With respect to the sketch map it will be seen, that Mr. Hodgson

gives only one isolated peak segregated from all the rest; whereas

nothing can be more contrary to the fact as regards the Himalayas.

Besides the configuration of the ground must be very different to

that represented by Mr. Hodgson, being in fact difficult in the

extreme. There is, however, no evidence to shew that Mount Everest

and Deodangha are identical. Mr. Hodgson says, “The Bhootia

Cosi has its source at Deodangha, a vast Himalayan peak situated

some sixty or seventy miles east of Gosainthan, and a little north

and east of the Kuti Pass, being probably the nameless Peak,* which

Colonel Waugh conjectures may rival Kanchanjinga in height. The

river flows from the base of Deodangha past the town of Kuti, and

* The words underlined by me are omitted in Mr. Hodgson’s communication

on the native name of Mount Everest. J. A. S, No. V. 1856.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 305

has a S. W. direction from Kuti to Dallalghat.’? Vide Memo. on the

seven Cosis.

Now, on comparing Mr. Hodgson’s sketch with the accompanying

chart which exhibits all our peaks laid down between Katmandu

and Darjiling, it will be seen that it ig not likely the Bhootia

Cosi could have its sources at our Mount Everest, because it

appears to me, as far as I can judge, that the Dud Cosi,

which rises “amid the perpetual snows,’’ and also the Arun Cosi,

would be to the left and right of Mount Everest respectively, so

that it does not seem clear how the Bhootia Cosi, can originate

from our Mount Everest.

Again Mr. Hodgson says, “This great mass is visible alike from

the confines of Nepal Proper, (the valley,) and from those of

Sikkim, and all the more unmistakeably, because it has no com-

petitor for notice in the whole intervening space. It is precisely

half way between Gosainthan which overlooks Nepal Proper, and

Kanchang which overlooks Sikkim.” Now a slight computation

will serve to shew that Mount Everest is invisible from the valley,

being depressed nearly one minute and thirty seconds below XVIII.

The most conspicuous mass visible from Katmandu or the valley

would be our Peaks XIX. and XX. Nor is Mount Everest visible

from the confines of Sikkim, as Major Sherwill did not see it any-

where on his route from Singelelah to Kanglanamo, the height of

the latter place, Major Sherwill estimates to be 13,000 feet. He

says, “One Mountain in the Nepal range is a most remarkable

object, both for its curious shape and for its immense height, its

name none of my party knew, nor have I yet succeeded in obtaining

the name. The Peak is a hollow crater-like mountain, probably

27,000 feet in height with a long table mountain attached to it,

both covered with glaciers. To the west of this great mountain are

five distinct Peaks separating the large mountain from a hollow

shell-like and perpendicular mountain about 26,000 feet in height.”

(Notes upon a tour*in the Sikkim Himalaya mountains. J. A.S.,

No. VIII. 1853.) The mountain here alluded tois our XIII., the

height of which is 27,779 feet, Mount Everest being depressed

nearly 14 minutes below XIII.

From the foregoing I am led to infer, that Mr. Hodgson has

2B 2

306 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

probably mistaken one peak for another, more especially since

the country is said to be very polyglottic; in fact, Mr. Hodgson

himself throws some doubt on the identity of Mount Everest with

Deodangha, or Bhairavathan, or Bhairava Langur, or Gnalham

thangla, as his own expression “being probably the nameless

peak which Colonel Waugh conjectures may rival Kanechanjinga

in height,” evidently shews. The following extract from an inter-

resting account of the ascent of the mountain Sumeru Purbat by

Captain Robertson, given in the Report of the British Association

for the advancement of science for 1855, will serve to shew how

liable we are to fall into mistakes in identifying a group of peaks

even when in their immediate neighbourhood. “On the right of

the Glacier rose the three Great Jumnotri Peaks, designated in

sheet 65 of the Trigonometrical Survey of India, Black E., Great E.,

and Little E., the altitudes of which, as given in the map, are 21,155,

20,916, and 20,122 feet. The peaks designated in the Trigonome-

trical Survey, Great E. and Little E. are the two summits of a

mountain which the natives call Bunderpanch. On the left the

Glacier was bounded by a wall of precipices terminating in the lofty

snow-covered Peak of Sumeru Purbat. The height of this peak is

not given in the Survey Map, but from its appearance, as compared

with that of the measured peaks, and also from the height it rises

above the limits of perpetual snow, I should estimate its altitude at

about 18,000 feet. The altitude of Bunderpanch-ke-ghattee, I esti-

mate at about 16,000 feet.

“In making my agreement with the Brahmin, I was under the

impression that Sumeru Purbat was one of the measured peaks, and

it was not until I reached Bunderpanch-ke-ghatta that I discovered

my mistake.”’

(Signed) W. H. Scorn,

Draftsman, S. G. Field Office.

Memorandum by J. Hennessy, Esq., 2nd Assistant in charge of the

Geodetic computation at Trigonometrical Survey Head Quarters.

I have carefully perused Mr. B. H. Hodgson’s paper, attempting

to identify Mount Everest with some hill variously called ‘‘ Deva-

dangha, vel Bhairavathan, vel Bhairava-langur,vel Gnalham thangla.”

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 307

I am of opinion that Mr. Hodgson has advanced no evidence

whatever to prove this identity.

The arguments stated, if indicating any one peak more than

another, point to Peak XVIIT., as the one called Devadhangha, &c.

Thus Mr. Hodgson speaking of Devadhangha says—

It is a “ great mass.”’

It is visible “ from the confines of Nepal (proper.’’)

Now the straight line passing through Mount Everest and

XVIII., and extended towards Nepal Proper passes nearly through

the centre of that valley, nor is there any point in the latter at

which the angle Mount Everest and X VIII. exceeds 3° . Taking

any point on the straight line Monnt Everest, XVIII., and valley,

and within the valley, the latter peak shuts out the former, as can

be demonstrated by calculation. It is also exceedingly improbable

that the same does not occur from any point whatever in the valley.

But be this as it may, it is impossible, under the circumstances,

that XVIII. would admit of a “great mass’ of Mount fverest

being seen.

“And yet that Devadangha, &e., is seen from the ‘ confines’ of

the valley, and that it is a ‘ great mass, we have Mr. Hodgson’s

evidence to shew. That gentleman has therefore demonstrated, at

least, that Mount Everest and Devadangha are not identical.

“T have seen Mount Everest, certainly from near Titalia in

Purneah, very probably from other districts along the Terai. It

never struck me as a great mass.

*¢ (Signed) J. B. N. Henvessy,

“2nd Asst. G. TL. Survey of India.’

Memo. by J. W. Armstrong, Esq.,

Cwil Asst. G. T. Survey of India.

In compliance with Department Orders No. 10267 by the Sur-

veyor General of India, under date the 22nd April, 1857, I beg

leave to submit the following remarks on the question which has

been mooted regarding the identity of Mount Everest with Deo-

dangha vel Bhairavathan.

This lofty pinnacle of the Himalayas was observed by me in 1846,

from a distance of above 200 miles, and by Col. Waugh and Messrs.

308 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Lane and Nicholson from different stations of the North East

Longitudinal Series, and characterized by each according to the

nomenclature which each had adopted. When the observations

were all collected, and the snow points discussed and arranged in

order from east to west, this lofty peak was characterized by the

numeral XV. There were no means of ascertaining either the name

of this mountain, or the names of the others which were observed ;

and when its stupendous height was finally determined, a name was

sought for to stamp its greatness, and none presented itself, in the

absence of its own local appellation, more fitting than that of our

renowned ex-Surveyor General.

This nomination has been impugned by Mr. Hodgson on the

strength of certain data advanced by him in the Journal of the

Asiatic Society of Bengal, data which cannot be received as conclu-

sive, because they are purely conjectural.

“The first datum is a conjectural bearing and distance from posi-

tions never visited.

“The other data are the itineraries of two Nepaulese Embassies

to Pekin, the distances of whose routes are equally conjectural.

Mountainous as these routes must have been, and tortuous from the

nature of the country, the distances noted as traversed must have

been calculated not so much by linear measure, as by the difficulties

encountered and the delays entailed.

“Tndependent of these objections, this lofty snow peak is neither

visible from the valley of Nepaul on account of an intervening

though lower snow mount, nor even from the confines of Sikkim,

for a similar reason. And great as Mr. Hodgson’s knowledge of

the mountainous fegion of Nepaul may be, his authority on the

question at issue can be received only with diffidence, because it is

enunciated without personal observation, and based upon the vague

information of untrained travellers.

“ (Signed) J. W. AnMsTRONG,

“ Owil Asst. G. LT. Survey,”

Memo. by Lieut. J. F. Tennant, Engrs., 1st Asst. G. LT. Survey

in charge of Jogi Tila Merl. Series.

During the identification of Col. Crawford’s Peaks, and the dis-

1857.] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 309

cussion of the identity of Mount Everest with Deodangha, I have

paid a good deal of attention to the question.

There are no means of knowing the position of Deodangha beyond

what are given by Mr. Hodgson. These consist 1st of an Itinerary

by the two Nepaulese Embassies to Pekin, and 2nd of a paper on the

seven Kosis, 3rd, several assertions for which no evidence is produc-

ed in a letter to the Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

As regards the first, or the itineraries, I believe no person who

has had any surveying experience cau doubt their being absolutely

useless as evidence of any thing but the existence of a Pass called

Bhairava Langur. Mr. Hodgson supplies the information that it is

identical in name with the adjacent mountain, which is, I conclude,

derived from information. It is absolutely necessary for using a

Route Survey that both bearings and linear distances should be

given. The former in these routes are totally deficient. The latter

are given along the road, which in mountainous countries would

only be useful, had nature so formed the passes that they should all

lie in a straight line and be reached one from another by a nearly

level straight line. The document in question bears evidence that

this is not the case, for by the route distance (117 miles) Mount

Everest is far within Bhairava Langur, and this assumes the iden-

tity of their directions. Ifthe itinerary is competent to determine

the position of Bhairava Langur, it is equally so to determine that

of Pekin, and Mr. Hodgson would do Geometers a service by explain-

ing the process.

In a note to page 478 of No. VI. of the Journal of the Asiatic

Society of Bengal, Mr. Hodgson says that Bhairava Langur is

visible from the confines of Nepaul Proper as a great mass. Now it

is demonstrable that the summit of Mount Everest is not visible

from Katmandu or any part of the valley of Nepaul as a conspicuous

or recognizable prominence, if indeed it at all tops the intervening

snowy range. Mr. Hodgson also asserts that it is visible from the

frontiers of Sikkim. It certainly is not visible from Kanglanamo,

13,000 feet high, being shut out by the shoulder of our peak XIII,

and it is evident that the same result will be true all along the

Singalilah range as far as Tonglo. I know that Mr. Hodgson

asserts that it has no competitor for notice, but sound Geometry

310 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

contradicts Mr. Hodgson, and I for one prefer the evidence it gives

to any that may be derived from the fallible rendering of fallible

informants.

Mr. Hodgson further undertakes to find the name of any object

whose bearing and distance he has. It may be possible in some

cases, and possibly Dwalaghiri is one. I can only say, having sur-

veyed myself among hills, that nothing is more fallacious than

names given from a distance, even when an object is conspicuously

visible. I myself believe that there is an identity between the

mountains to which Capt. Webb and the G. T. Surveyors have

assigned the name of Dwalaghiri, but far be it from me to assert

that that is its veritable name.

Mr. Hodgson is not probably less fallible than his predecessors,

and yet Col. Crawford places Dhayabang east of the meridian of

Katmandu, nearly in the position of our peak XX V., whereas an-

other authority (Kirkpatrick) places it far west of that meridian ;

and here, it is quite evident, that the same name would not be

assigned to the same peak. That Mr. Hodgson can get a name

to any peak, I believe, but that it will be the true name, I do

not believe as a general rule.

2nd. Mr. Hodgson gives a memo. on the seven Kosis with a

sketch.

The sketch has no scale, and is confessedly a roughly drawn

document, not founded on Survey. It can therefore hardly be ad-

mitted as evidence of any thing, but I shall show reason to doubt

its being in Mr. Hodgson’s favor.

Mr. Hodgson in the paper asserts, 1st.—That there is a mountain

called Bhairava Langur or Deodangha.

2nd.—That that mountain is the source of the Bhootia Kosi.

3rd.—That it is the same as Mount Everest of Col. Waug!i.

4th.—That Mount Everest is in the place of the source of the

Bhootia Kosi.

I have said there is presumptive evidence of the first assertion.

The second assertion rests solely on information which is not

very reliable (as far as the experience of accurate Surveyors goes)

at the best, and is peculiarly liable to error in this case, as the

Bhootia Kosi is only ove of several confluent streams, and has

———

—— ee

= - ——— ee

1857. | Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 311

never been seen, as far as I learn, in its separate fori by any Kuro-

pean. Consequently its course must be liable to great error.

Mount Everest is stated to be identical with the source of the

River as the occupant of the same position; but if this position be

untrustworthy, there is an end of this, and consequently the pro-

position, that both being sources of the same river are the same,

falls to the ground.

The real result from this paper is that,

1st.—There is a mountain called, Deodangha, the source of a river

2nd.—That a stream caljled the Bhootia Kosi comes from a snowy

mountain.

3rd.—That the coincidence of these two mountains is to say the

best, subject to doubt, and

4th.—That there is no evidence to show the Latitude, Longitude

and height of Deodangha and Mount Everest to be identical at all.

If the sketch map be a true representation of the course of the

streams given, I believe Mr. Hodgson will be puzzled to find room for

his other Kosis, giving each the feeding area necessary for its size.

If the mountain Deodangha be a little north and east of the

Kuti pass, unless that has been grossly misplaced by all the Geo-

eraphers who have exercised their talents on it, Deodangha zs not

Mount Everest.

I am aware that Mr. Hodgson says, he has explained the identity

to the Society ; but I see no evidence to satisfy a Geographer, and

were any evidence wanting to show a pre-judgment of the case, we

have his own letter, from which I quote as follows :—

“A few words more may be given to the last point, as being the

matter which chiefly forced my attention as a Political Officer in

Nepal, on the site of Mount Everest, and enabled me in after

years, when I heard surmises (from, I think, Col. Waugh himself,

or from some of his subordinates) of the great height of a peak in

that direction to fix on Deodangha vel Bhairavathan (both names

are used) as being the enormous snow mass in question, and I have

often of late repeated this here very recently to Mr. Blanford.”’

All which demonstrates that before Mount Everest was named, or

its definite position fixed, Mr. Hodgson had committed himself by

repeated assertions of the identity of the forthcoming highest peak

312 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. Nowe.

and Bhairavathan, an admission in itself sufficient to render all his

evidence valueless.

Having got this fixed idea, Mr. Hodgson next collected data for

Bhairavathan or Deodangha indefinite in themselves, and which

might apply to any mountain peak within a considerable range,

including Mount Hverest of course. On only one of these or rather

on a class of them, I think further comment necessary.

The position of Mount Everest is connected with that of Gosain-

than as a known point; but I have shown that name is not an

evidence of identity. Further, the position of Gosainthan given in

the Physical Geography of the Himalayas is not that generally

given even as regards Kathmandu. Thirdly, that the longitude of

Kathmandu itself is uncertain to a small extent, and was so to a

great amount, till the identification of Col. Crawford’s pesks with

ours, reduced the limit, all which tells on the position of Deodangha.

On the whole, we have no evidence that Mr. Hodgson ever saw

Mount Everest, or that any one else ever recognised its pre-

eminent height, for contrary to Mr. Hodgson’s repeated assump-

tions, it is demonstrably not a very conspicuous mass from a dis-

tance. There is a wide difference between tlie manner in which

the known names have been given and that in which it is proposed

to force this on us. All the points to which names have been given

are laid down by competent Surveyors under those names, in most

cases by some of the men who have fixed the final position. Deo-

dangha has never been so defined, and even on Mr. Hodgson’s

showing the names may be those of passes or mountain masses, or

particular prominences.

Mount Everest is the assigned name of a protuberance of no very

large extent, and it would be most unadvisable in my opinion to aban-

don this definite name, which will soon be familiar to every English

or European child, for one of the—to Europeans,—unpronounceable

names given by Mr. Hodgson, whose application is, to say the

least, extremely doubtful, and whose misapplication would cause

endless confusion.

(Signed) J. Ff. Tennant, Lieut., Hugrs.

[st Asst. G. T. Survey.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 313

The Librarian and the Zoological Curator submitted their usual

monthly reports.

LiIsBRary.

The Library has received the following accessions during October last.

Presented. si

Proceedings of the Royal Society, Vol. VIII. No. 26.—By Tue

Socigry.

Ditto of the Royal Geographical Society of London, No. IX. for April

and May, 1857.— By tHe Socrzry.

Mantic uttair ov le langage des Oiseaux, Poéme de Philosophie Reli-

gieuse, Par Farid-Uddin Attar, Publié en Persan Par M. Garcin de Tassy,

Paris, 1857.—By THE AUTHOR.

The Quarterly Journal of the Geological Society, Vol. XIII. No. 5},

Part 3, August, 1857.—By Tue Sociery.

Vendidad Sadé, Craduit en Langue Huzvaresch du Pehlewie. Texte

Autographie d’ apres les Manuscrits Zend Pehlewis de la Bibliotheque

Impériale de Paris, Paris, 1 and 2 Livraison. Sheets 1855, 2 copies.—By

THE IMPERIAL LIBRARY.

Aba’l-Mahasin *Ibn Tagri Bardii Annales, quibus titulus est

¥ Pg pro WS gh0 us? 1 By Plt Sul

e Codd. MSS. nunc primum Arabice editi. Tomi Ili. Partem priorem,

edidit T. G. J. Juynboll. Lugduni Batavorum, 1857. 1 Copy.—By

THE ACADEMY.

Zietschrift der deutschen Morgenlandischen Gesselschaft, Band II.

heft 3.—By THe GrrMAN ORIENTAL SOCIETY.

Vividharta Safigraha, No. 41.—By Basu Ra’senprata’t Mirrra.

The Calcutta Christian Observer for Oct. 1857.—By tur Epirtors.

The Oriental Baptist for Oct. 1857.—By THE Eprror.

The Oriental Christian Spectator for Sept. 1857.—By tue Eprror.

Proceedings of the Trevandrum Museum Society, 23rd Dec. to 21st

Feby. 1856.—By tux Soctgry. . )

Report on the Observatories of His Highness the Maha Raja of Travan-

core, at Trevandrum, and on the Agustier Peak of the Western Ghats, by

J. A. Broun, pamphlet, 1857.—By tHe Mapras Govv.

Recueil des Actes de l’Académie Impériale des Sciences, Belles lettres

et Arts de Bordeaux, 2nd Trimestre, 1856.—By roe AcapEmMy,

28 2

314 Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. [No. 4.

Eixchanged.

The Atheneum for July, 1857.

The London, Edinburgh and Dublin Philosophical Magazine, and

Journal of Science, No. 91, August, 1857.

The Calcutta Review, No. 57, Sept. 1857.

Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie, June, 1857.

Purchased.

Annales des Sciences Naturelles, Tome VI. No. 5.

Comptes Rendus, Nos. 24 to 26 and Nos. 1 to 4, July 1857.

Litérary Gazette, Nos. 2113 to 2116, and a duplicate copy No. 2088.

The American Journal of Science and Arts, No. 70, July, 1857.

The Annals and Magazine of Natural History, No. 116, Aug. 1857 and

an old No. 102 to supply the file.

Revue des Deux Mondes, 15th July and Ist Aug. 1857.

Revue et Magasin de Zoologie, No. 6, 1857.

Journal des Savants, June and July, 1857.

The Quarterly Review, No. 203, July 1857.

On the Variation of Species with special reference to the Insects ;

followed by an enquiry into the nature of Genera, by T. V. Wollaston,

London, 1856, 12mo.

The Kingdom and People of Siam; with a narrative of the Mission to

that country in 1855. By Sir John Bowring. London 8vo. 2 vols.

Bratérka—a Sanskrit printed Seetee, on the subject of the religious

vows of Hindus, sheets, edited by Jaleelwauld Pundit.

Abt’l-Mahasin “Ibn Tagri Bardii Annales, quibus titulus est

HyPlA lq yatavo S gb is : K poly JI roma

e Codd. MSS. nune primum Arabice editi. Tomi Ili. Partem priorem,

edidit T. G. J. Juynboll. Lugduni Batavorum, 1857. 1 Copy.

Symbole ad rem numariam Muhammedanorum. LEdidit Carolus

Johannes Tornberg, III. Upsailie, 1856, pamphlet.

Report of Curator, Zoological Department.

From C. G. T. Lloyd, Esq. of Bryn Estyn, New Norfolk, Tasmania, .

the following collection, of which the species new to our museum are

distinguished by an asterisk.

1857. ] Proceedings of the Asiatic Society. 315

Mammalia.

HypDRoMYS CHRYSOGASTER, Geoffroy. Far more brightly coloured than

specimens from Pt. Philip in our collection, presented in 1846 by Mr.

Benson. WV. B.—Mr. Gould, if we mistake not, figures about five races

of Hypromys as distinct species.

DasyURUS VIVERRINUS, (Shaw). Two brown specimens. WV. B.—Both

this and a distinct species with spotted tail (D. macuxarus) inhabit Tas-

mania, and we have both in the museum.

PHALANGISTA VULPINA, (Shaw). Three fine specimens; two of the

ordinary colouring, similar to examples from Pt. Philip and N.S. Wales;

the third melanoid, and illustrating the Ph. fuliginosa, Ogilby.

*PHASCALOMYS WOMBAT, Peron and Lesueur. A very fine skin of this

extraordinary rodent marsupial.

ORNITHORHYNCHUS ANATINUS, Shaw.

Aves.

EuPHEMA CHRyYsostoma, Wagler. Two specimens.

LaTHAMUS DiscoLoRr, (Shaw). Ditto.

GLosSOPTILA AUSTRALIS, (Lath.). Ditto.

IERACIDEA BERIGORA, (Vigors and Horsfield).

Cucutus 1norNatus, Vigors and Horsfield. Ditto.

*Poparcus Cuvier, Gould.

—*OREOCINCLA LUNULATA, (Latham).*

Perroica PH@NIcEA, Gould. Two specimens.

*CALAMANTHUS FULIGINOSUS, Gould.

CincLosoma PuNcTaATUM, (Lath.) Two specimens.

* This difficult group of Thrushes has been elucidated by the Prince of Ca-

nino, in the ‘ Revue et Magasin de Zoologie,’ No. 5 for 1857: but His Highness

had not examined the O, NILGIRIENSIS, nobis, which is a particularly well cha-

racterized species. It most nearly resembles O. LuNULATA; but the colouring

of the upper-parts is much more ruddy ; the tail (of 12 feathers) is 1 in. shorter,

and instead of being slightly cuneiform, tends rather to be subfurcate, but with

its outermost feathers a trifle shorter than the rest; the bill, as long as in O,

LUNULATA, is very much more slender, and the tip of the upper mandible is more

prolonged ; the tarse also is conspicuously shorter ; and the small first primary

is more developed. Length of wing 5 in.; of tail 3} in.; bill to gape 13 in.;

tarse 1 in. ; and short first primary 1 in. Lower mandible of a pale colour, In

three mottle-backed species under examination, viz. O. pAuMA (from the Hin-

dustani word ddma, ‘a Thrush’), O. tuNULATA, and O. NILGIRIENSIS, the dis-

tinctions are exceedingly well marked.

316. Proceedings of the Asiatie Society. [No. 4.

ARTAMUS soRDIDUS, (Lath.)

ANTHOCHERA INAURIS, Gould. Two specimens.

Prinotis FLAVIGULA, (Gmelin.) Ditto.

Metiornis nova Hotianpia, (Latham.)

MANORHINA GARRULA, (Latham).

*SCOLOPAX AUSTRALIS, Gould.

Triponyx Morrieri, Dubus.

Reptilia.

CycLopus eicas, Boddaért.

From the Hon’ble W. Elliot, C. 8., Madras. The skin of a Marten,

forwarded on loan through Mr. Grote, habitat not stated. It represents

a fourth race of the Marres FLAVIGULA type; equivalent to those of the

Squirrels which are brought together by Prof. Temminck under the

general name of SciuREUS GIGANTEUs, but which most systematists

recognise under different names. These races are as follow:

1. Marres rravieuna of the Himalaya and mountains of Arakan.

Blackish-brown face, cheeks, and nape, abruptly demarcated; chin and

throat white: breast and fore-part of the body pale yellowish-brown,

mostly darker along the middle of the back, and passing to blackish-

brown on the croup, fore-limbs, hind-quarters, and tail.

2. M. Gwarxinsir, A. Smith, of the Nilgiris. Entire upper-parts

blackish-brown, with the white throat and yellowish breast of the last.

In other respects similar.

3. M. FLavicguLaA apud Cantor, from the Malayan peninsula. Similar

to No. 1, but the fur much shorter, and tail consequently less bushy ;

the blackish cap merely indicated by pale-brown, but with a perephyral

dark line passing from behind each ear. Of this race I have seen numer-

ous specimens, all true to the particular colouring.

4. M. Elliot’s animal. Upper-parts nearly uniform brown, paler on

the sides, chin, throat, and breast, as on the others; the lower-parts

dark, with some irregular blackish spots between the fore-limbs: pere-

phyral blackish mark behind the ear, continued less distinctly forward ;

the brown of the crown and nape less dark than in No. 1, and continued

uniformly on the shoulders and croup, scarcely paling along the middle

of the back: tail much browner than in the others, and the limbs searcely

so dark. Possibly a variety of No. 2.

JOURNAL

OF THE

PSLATIC SOCIETY.

PRALRAL ALI LIV LIV

Noe We 1357:

POPDAVPL DLP L PP PLP LP LPS LLP PPP LISP PS SPSL LI PLING IIL

PIII III II DPD

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of

Népil. By B. H. Hopason, Esq., B. C. 8.

Darjiling, October Ath, 1857.

The Secretary of the Asiatic Society of Bengal.

SIR,

I have the honour to transmit to you herewith four series of

Vocabularies of Himalayan tongues, comprising, (in two parts), 1st,

the languages of the broken tribes of the Central Himalaya; and,

2nd, (also in two parts), the several dialects of the Kiranti lan-

guage, which likewise is proper to the same part of the chain, or, to

be more specific, to Eastern Népal. The languages included in the

two parts of these two papers are—

Broken Tribes.

Dahi or Darhi.

Dénwar.

Pahi or Pahari.

Chépang.

Bhramu.

Vayu or Hayu.

ao GOS 2 le

. Kuswar.

No. LXXXIX.—New Serius, Vou. XX VI. 27

318 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5.

8. Kusunda.

9. Pakhya, unbroken.

10. Thaksya, unbroken.

cn ite

Tribes of the Kirdnts people.

Chamling or Roddong.

2. Ringchhénbing. Bontawa.

3. Chhingténg. Bontawa.

4. Nachhereng.

5. Waling. Bontawa.

6. Yakha.

7. Chourasya.

8. Kulung.

9. Thulung.

10. Bahing.

11. Lohorong.

12. Lambichhong. Waling.

13. Balali.

14. Sangpang

15. Dumi.

16. Khaling.

17. Dungmiali.

The arrangement and nomenclature of these, made some time

back, are not quite correct. But they will serve the present end

and can be corrected when we come to particulars. At present it

will suffice to say that 9 and 10 of the “ broken tribes’? cannot well

be classed under that head, the Pakhya and Thaksya being still

unbroken.

Of the Kiranti tribes, the value of the subdivisional names is not

always equal. I have indicated this on the right hand. Thus, 2, 3,

5, as to language, &c., could be unitised under the common name

of Bontéwa; and 5-5 both classed first as Waling, and then as

Bontdwa, the larger aggregate. These minuter affinities are pretty

1857. ] of the broken Tribes of Népal. 319

well indicated by the dialects. I was obliged to begin in the dark

as to what varieties of the language would be fittest for selection as

dialects, and those I hit on were not always of equal value.

As samples of the broken tribes‘and of the great Kiranti people

I have lately selected for special study the Vayu of the one and

the Baking of the other. I shall forthwith submit these ample

essays and then may find time to advert to some general considera-

tions. If not, they will be found in the new essay on the Physical

Geography of Himalaya now issuing from the Calcutta press.

I am,

Sir,

Your obedt. servt.,

b. H. Hopasony.

27 2

[ No. 5.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

320

TI-Ng

vd-vy

Wer

11-83-eYD

193-Byg

40%)

ul-ey

1WsV

qreqea

1qQyUVy

THe H

equid

TI3PIN

uey

OIA

ta-1q

W-Se

ey)

ojeirg

Bsuleyg

upeA

Bs-UNnG

Hey

hed)

IVS

Way

suieg

“LDNSNY

50g

TYUYo-ng

309

SUS

ete)

yale

Suney)

DEON

eul-1N,

uls-85)

yoleg

Burd

qateg

bate

es-ung

Ls cake 2)

van {n Fy

‘nina wo ‘nhnry

vs-3rq yvdg "ekg

ed-vyy Suol-OL-BI,

yg) Vd-y-ny 9-9ny

wets LED IN

vA-Y9-TTAL : ite

muon ee ee

yizeu fy ey

Tea-Y om ‘od

esu-BN vSN ‘BAN

Len 1A 9 IN

Ieq-eg ngq-eq

HN WN MN

yoley 1}-e Ay

WOH) W-nyT “any-e A

BS-BN ¥S

Bu-vy ON ‘9N

vAy-Vy my ‘wy

vu-id BN MN

Sury-suvy ey sey

vas BAS-9 IK

Azur yy [ear

Bs-Ieyg "EAS “IN

30 A\ s-nyy

eo-ung B3-ong

TA-1q9) PA “FOAM

sur-ed BOI “BAN

BI-eg ey

deu-y B-TOL

Is-V NI-v IN

"MUD LY ST “bupdoyo

Hebe

vl-usyy

ate)

nind-enqN

ny ‘nl-ny

OT SUS TANI

94-9

¥S-P IN

its)

¥S-9IN

vont

e5-U0q

BU Sea eu |

CAA esha

ae as)

BZ- SII

Bsn

Wd 12a puyod

ms-ng

9P-VIN

aPH

1eq

I-e5-eqg

1es-evy9

P9D

mud

sqyo ey

eqed

Byyay

7eH

equigd

IDY-NY|

W-1g

BMOy

1eyy

Tu-te fy

isureqgq

es-ung ‘esung

a Bi

IUB

19-N9s- J,

yoney9

svivg

upnuacgr

Ja-ng

PRIN

38H

1e5-ey)

-Seq9

POD

eqyo-vN

Zoot

oqng

WAU

epuy

new

uv yy

INDY

Puvy

esuleyg

yey

os-unqg ‘osung

wsvy

Wey

cia

B4-U-nNdS- J,

eyunouy

Sete

‘2yvq jaa iypavg

queyda oy

S5qy

Yj leg

s0q

keq

MOID

MOD

ojeyng

eu0g

qeog

Pool:

pag

AOIIY

Ser

‘ysybusy

of the broken Tribes of Népdl.

1857.]

ued

1yseq

fens

eyed

I-eay

dures

Su-B.i-ve

be Ake)

eal

BIOS]

TAL

THY

noN

"es-dig

aye

Wu-y

1s-UNYg

une

jourg

1PM-BID

¥yo-H0r)

u-Byor ‘ueyor

BI¥d

BIvYY)

BOUL)

4o-Sulg

Ls |

Aine

SB eal

nyd-unq

Jo1eg

nq-OH

q0.1e9

OYo-103

ego

a |

oquig ‘surx

BSs-TY

1”

eee AC

SUIT,

{ (eh0-4481N)

your-v S44

NYO-yNIA

au-eM “nf-ehyy

gua 1)

oT-949

eI-Old

oyo-uoryT

SU0}-SUIg

suep-sueg

ae |

Suyo x-ey

Joie)

su-ny

yileg "eng

ouvul-ng

Tu-/)

vq-Suny

49189

ns-Teq

yo.1Keg

ya.leg

Budd

Bul- wi ()

a a 9)

gAs-SuQy

Bs-V

HEP Le)

ulw-V

weu-Vy

rpued

Teu-¥

U-BM-"]-KYD

1UBA-B8 [ey

nde

We ea

gored

nog

Weed

weN

yoleg

nh-un ‘ehu- 9

PAS

ery Bl-oy-VLr

wei

Supg

AI-BS]

B-B1-8

jailed

we Ary

oro “HAY

QS-1eIAL “18S-9T IN

OJ-VT “998s

suodjq

yang

5U04-OJN

Poy

Oy-e7]

AON

Is-Ng

ey-suy

oys-uy'ow-es

ae |

wake ch

wmiky ‘wy,

suvl-ag

Su-OY

oW-eT

{

und

af-eng

ou-s-Su-oy]

os-Su0yy

1Us-SUNN

13-Su-0N

8-81-85

vi-sny)

Pe Le)

oy-ueyO

gga)

SU-0N

Gamal

INN

BUL-OL

eq-T0N

v8-NN

ayo-uryl

By-ee

vite |

01-88

fund yA

jueq

yu-vs)

oyy-wog

WI-BL

dus

S-B1-Bg

BBD

unN

awd

nvy

BID

Ssuney

n-UN

puns-nyy

wny-DIN

BUY

Ivq-wy

unis

Jepueg

snu-v yy

qel-9

witd

weedd

Ivy

BIgdD

Sul

queqd

svg

vu-By)

weyy-ed

vay

vAI-IT,

dweg

S-B1-8S

P]-e40

unN

eh-urg

2[-OUM

B19

wv i-v yy

ef-u9y-u9 y

uny-0

epued

vh-)

ey-u-ee

vyu-ee j

Jeyueg

SnU-B yl

sunf--

weed

ley

o10yy)

Souls

I ,

qi00L

JOSLT,

ung

9u0jsS

1B4S

ayeug

AIS

ulyg

peoy

IIAIY

ulejuLl

ISIN

oueN

OYOSN IAT

ino W

ulejUno fT

19430 FAT

uOoOosAT

Asyuoyy

uvy,

Etta f

Jeary

uolyT

esnoyy

98.10 FT

uloyy

[No. 5.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

322

WBqO Jered)

youeg 4o1e)

eyo Suta-1g

ULL, sunk-nyg

val Sunk-en

La pale p.|

Nw-vjeyy-Iu

“OY “nu-eeyy Vy

NUW-BILYY-T I]

BlVOON | }eul-1U-U A) “1U-0

eley- Suey

NW-1y-SuUYy

BIVUL FY { yest

4 Sxugng | nu-y ‘o-1yy

B1eY-O[-NFT|-e Ay “SuOU-1P

dt ‘xqjnug

eu-ey-ey, nui-suyQ 10 Sug

wit ‘xgjng

eu-ey-v yy } nuw-suy Jo Suy

Su-eH jgui-y ‘eml-o¥

WV OH) eye qy-NIA

1m-0 7 ByBYL-9U0y)

sees | Eh are)

Srv “OVA T V¥ MBM BIA

ene L uo

1 ae il 9)

ws-ehyq “H-9)} id-oqg ‘Id-ey

Tue IL

uovy HER Ge)

yoqes) sunyd-suis

"MDNSNY ‘nhoyg 40 ‘nhpy

39189 {

vsu-eg {

1q|04-2-1-0[g “OY2-101d

wo Ms] o4-z-uing ‘oyz-uNg

IN|OA-Z-1GNT ‘OUZ-IUN

oq OA-z-eR *oyZ-UR

ee nS-Su-nyy 10 nay

oA-z-eu-ng Sgte

ouz-wui-ng i ns-S3u-03N 10 O8N

n3-Su-tg 10 1g

ns-sung 10 Sung

NS-SU-INT 10 IN

na-4G) 40 14D

ny-uy ny-teu-Qjns-eksy ‘ns-ei-sy

ny-sunN NY-SUIN; ns-eqq9

-IN nY-15N ns-vf

NS-Suea- Fy

lay a ny) n3 -Suopy

nyesueNn ny-suvny ns-Sunyyy

ny-¥SN nY-BSN| ns-ve nS-SunN

np-nH \eU-O/ Is-OF] “18-9

SunN wan[-SUIN Ip-PqT

IN wWn-I5N Ip-er

AL fia O ‘9H

Suv SuvN} yy “Sanqyg

BON BON Bf yg SuNN

4-PA 1-95 13-¥g

Ba-V IL nyy-vT

sunp-surv jj young Uy

BU-MIg] Yey-Surg “Su-1g Bu-IS

"NUDLy | “bupdey ‘WY0q 100 puyog

haf)

youvg

ayy

ULL,

raq

1/0

O¥-T@ AN

yore)

Tel-We A

421-30 AA

vl-O]

B1-OJM]

ou“

oy-O],

yuue

uvd-o4D

ndy

UOVX)

yoy

‘upnuage

yourd

qey

uly,

Inq

1H)

ole y-1

Ol-vyey,

O1- we

194-0

O1-a,,

O1-9]A]

ulu-

eu-eL

you-v

rey,

NaN

nyv-urd

-ed

woBr)

“140 128 1ypLDG

OAL

nog

oI, L

OAT,

eye)

ra!

In0X

INO

sy] ‘S19 ‘SIFT

AUL

ATN

AJL

“IUS ‘oH

nous

TOPO MA

OSETIA

ool 7

‘ysybug

329

of the broken Tribes of Népial.

1857.]

suof-se gy

arn

Ieyigg

aed

Tylue yy

19H

vied)

vu-1yo-e yy

eo al

eu-14oV

req-[? 1

ely

UsYY-ey

ents 4

MoU i

‘voRy

vue yy

ors

“oujeg

“BN

nos

seated

db ae (@)

s1d

seq

cd "FOL

MPa

BIBY

BM-9YS](

wel OH

WG "Suan

yoy, ‘ewmsuoy

9y}-ny

OU-B AN

OU" TIN

‘au-]

Suol-1y,

Lb Fey It

Atay

71°F

o11-F IN

aq-w yy)

OMG Accel

SU0N

qored

qoirg

Joleg

Jo.ed

gored

VER @)

qyoied

ote NN

ou3-]

TA “OW

qya.reg

4yo.eg

qoreg

yvhu-ey

YOU-ey

"ed,

nq-wy

[es-¥

leud-n FT

reyy-0H

leu-ny¥y

Ip-NH

1p-TH

eAT-1IN

123-0 A\

BA-1I,

Sule

9UT-PM

IY VEL

S79)

1yo-EUL

noyg

"suv f

49.189

yaled

yaredg

4a1Vg

yolrg

Sue

i=]

suyp

03-07]

03-sueiq

qyoreg

qoled

qJoirg

4o1Kg

qaleg

qaie)

qoieg

qoreg

AYP,

sueis

U-AL

qoieg

yore

qaieg

qared

suvH

7 |

Joe)

qoieg

qoleg

yale

yareg

ok-z-q-1h9

oyz-q-1hn j

OA-2-nye J,

of-z-eu-eyg

oqz yee

oy-1eAT NT

gj-ed-ey,

CONeG

eieued

ped

Bq}-NS oy

vyj-ns-o4g

aS)

ey}-su0 Fy

Byy-nonyy

gAZ-1IN|

eel

Bl-BUT,

re)

eql9 MA

BORLV

qoleg

Ae hs 3)

Suen

suy

Levee

nsex “BA

2-25N,

I Id

Ung

N3-Su-1y) 10 19

} ns-duny) 10 uny

} ns-su-edy9 10 vhyg

Ns-3u-94N 10 9UN

ch ba gl

1Yo- wD K

Tey-18 7,

1eylyg

Ge gq

uog ley

ueqj-9

1esex1y

1q9-¥ 3

-OM

W-9R

NT-ey

“1U[-"

yIS-eN wan

oOyARy, leq

1vzTg Ua MA

TYPE |OPIsgNO “Ino A

reyleyy usa BIg

197 shed Nod I

vied) aa0qgy

| woe

1q9- a9,

La ae | steal!

ney Aep.saqsa Xx

ney AMOJIOW-O J,

nly Aep-oL

ha ued My

sv oM ust,

eure AON

g1ed uody ‘uo

WH WX [Ogi

mS TM

SUN WOly

afl! OL

ox JO

nog peoipunyy

sByord AQT

stre4qo A105

SLL AVY,

sig AjuaM T,

seq uay,

D ON ours

wy LC

38S uaAdg

[No. 5.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

524

iil aaa reqy-ed'y| --yoreg eYp-Py-T eH eit ro

ofjns-eN w-14-0 “WUIy-0S os-vAy O[- WIN n3-ny]-eg 01-05J ghs-1hs INOg

of\n4) ow-1f-u1y9 vks-oAyy 0}-UIIN ns-seyd ofan) ein) JOOMS

OF-ed Oul-UlT SULOU-Lyf qo1e9 ns-ng| qoreg oy-%d adnyy

oyo-"y ow-e[eyg uod 4oley BUY -n3-14Z-e yy yoleg oyo-e yy Mey

03-81, By-9f mnp- o03-vqd BWY-NS-EM ¥ Oj-BL 03-81 yO

Os e924 SI O8y4) 03-594 bc ey ta Ost) OBO) PIPD

efeyyeN | Seen Op-®IN O[-Ig| euay-ns-suryq-e JK eyles-u0g ey}- 00g peg

ow-ey YON | 4 : ngs

eeu { owey,-WONI 2 19) oyig| BUY -NS-SarY eqfes OXIN poor

ny-9¥ eu-ns Sung yale sunung ny[-O} und-oy|oy fpoqamos

ny-9y syo-SIIN, suey yaleg epeyo NYYO-1y of-ny-viy Suiypjawog

oy ng rH jaivg| omy-ng “n5-n9 AON ow-gylton |, Sou

3100 op-TIN 03-9H yore) ns-vAyy10 A a y-as7Q| uod YrMAL

or op-ns n3-9H jareg ns -vAqyty I y-e8y) or “MOAN

UN iy 2a Jae) a Pee aN cues hL 10

nig a SUDAN yore) eM Bug “YS ung “ey puy

BUl-Bi\ Bul uel 4o1ed 21-1 no-nye une you 0G

@N| wou-en “By| WIV “MUP eBELTO | eal ut-Aog 9u-1OH oN

uy ‘UY| WON ‘B8S-HId HIT ‘ON yard nAyyy OL OH sok

uny-uhy ed -siqy 4oieg 4a1eg qo.ley 4o1eg 4oueg ¢ AU AN

osos-vy! eou-suny nj-2H ya.leg O1-14) ayu-ey 1es-B yj 2 MOF

9998-] vu-y| vSIVUM “9H yored 91-9% oyu-a 1es-9 1 snuy

o50s-BH BU-9 IN Eyal qol¥y 91-97 qqu-eL, 18S-9 A\ oS

odaser eSu-Ssueyy une yore) 91-99] oyqu-ve 1es-Be SV

yey ey-@H VM-1Y qored 11-04) ey: ey BY- Jey] yonw MOP]

190d { eS } ey-png our suoy-oy 9194 (] reioyq| Aur “Yoni

$ yesu-Suryg 7 $ 94-940 249 en?

e-OUL sueq-1] 1q-U95 4218)! Wyo-ed ed-39-30D Tq-9NO aw

“MDNSNY ‘nina wo ‘nivy NUplYy J ‘hundeyg "2YDq 10% 24YDT ‘upmuad. “2yD Ja YDAOE -ysmbury

tii Cee

of the broken Tribes of Népdl. 325

1857.]

NO-Jse Py

pean OYo-SX ‘oyo-8]

2 : A a

noma nomalf ayo. st

no-jng ayo-,Wy

£ ‘e ‘Oy-Sun

Puy eee

s °O ‘oy-ere

ci mM { ‘u ‘ayo-ee

AOUd eS

BUstEL BSaeeDenL

yoIeg qor

o[eAsusy y D}- Max)

010 ¥4-u0rTT

efjedavyy yore

yqurg $093-3ua],

<7 be Cl EPS

wad laos LOE ES)

RING B]-SUO Fy

Ole-0 1 Pe OU,

Os1V By-5U0¢

01049 By-UlYyd-me [KV

eae be clad ava

OyeIpse yy T= SUNIL

"Ed | fa-suryo-Sueq

tep-uvd (ut -suBarg

Spe] lu-suryo- yey

osurg} ow-Surj-oy-o¥

oyfos|ow-Sugyo-suay9

efeqyen Suig-we py

vpwurg sug

eA-NNT[eS-IN 9-8-1

BM-OS/es-yokT, sayo-yody,

"ayo: Wy

vsu-eksies-uny, ayo-uny,

BM-UN

baste)

augysued -)

sueydemy

aq oy

eqyo=v IN

OGNOA=ES

eAqedaryg

So [Sn ge ON

ba (4

yu-y

MEN EY)

yeduy

TOUR

yeds-uy

Oat

eheud

oq-V

Sury-149

o5-ueg

qoreg

up ds-v Iq

ugAs-n yy

CULV.

GS-W9

es-JUf

yor

301e9

yorrg

yaleg

yale)

joey

yoley

yore!

OA-VJ. *O}-1e TW

0}-u01g

yaurg

qyoieg

qourg

qoieg

oud

es GE

0}-weyg

07-18

03-Su0g

0}-wIYG

Ol-ld

0}-suriq

“ONO ey,

NU-|B5N

T-TdN

nu-ayy “ey

vy-ehg

SUETON]

BuUy-Is-sues)

omy-suoyy

Ns-vy-sunyog

ns-usky-efyoiayg

n3-vu-ON

nS-eYyp-1s1Y)

n3-el- Tq

NS-vyp -nsuompyy

os-OUY

OS-BULy,

ns-ey-1ng

ns-ey vy

BYP-U9s-U9 AA

nS-eyp-Is)

eury-ns-nin sy

euYy-ns-ny-v py

BUY -n5-Os-eIey gy

evuy-ns-sundd-1 7,

BUYy-ns-ejeMeg

BwUy-ns-vpsueg

‘su kuy

wus

YI-eyy

se-1Y

PULL

vpedpe ry

o1q-nq

0701

yo.ieg

03-daq9

o1ung

94-3049

ay-3eg |

eyooy|

O51

o7e4y

ourery

OLR

O.1-8}-eY

0105

ep-vy

ox-ueg

ALT-OS

qairg

yaled

yN-sur zy

“88-9091 ‘803940

yn-INS

nig

noyy

BIPiay ta

stig

SY tk

PGE

O39

ehuoy-aey)

03-day)

OTl?d

tueN

teh |

BURN

esuayq

ak)

phe

oAle Fy

O1-83-yey

0104)

orei-luy

0.18 y4-u0M yy

oylos

o1mvi-alu y

ole yy

aoSun py

SALE,

SSOULIVI AY

auenbs

VLA

punoy

asiey

yoUS

LUMA A

HONS

Suory

U29155

ped

921

peyooig

WS1v13g

4j3Q

ouospurzy

ue {

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

326

“Joya UL TONS se pastuSooa1un ySnoy} ‘nSnjay, puy KAMEN UY se ‘USIS BATIOR 10 JATyISURIY 9YI SI NULIG puUR ‘SuedayD “iyqrg yo eA 9 se

“pua 947 48 "SG “q 99g ‘SUTINTOD 10430 oy} Ul Se]dmMES 19410 [VIIA BIE B19YT, “IDA JeyHEU puL ealzitaiad 343 Jo ojdues e st iyg f

“WILY PIO} [ 10 9 ploy T “9! Jo wy T pjo} ‘we-yI-cal-eueys — "ev ‘ue-yluleueys pue: d ‘im-u ‘ns-no-ueyxy *1033n ‘yveds | ‘u ‘iw-ne-uvys

‘yeads 03 j0od ‘ueys woig 3 9 ‘gaissed JOUIOJ OY} SOYLUL NS poppe pue 9atjoe ay} SI YI Se ‘aaljeuAos BALXIYOI 10 sasynou 9y} SINO +

*aqvoldxa Ayavayo ssay] ore Loy) ‘salja01U aSayy Suisoy aie yoy sonsu0y

qaqjo ay} UL “Aaqjoue Yow} éoq-ysis :jjaskyy ove, = uavoy fayd-stg ‘wry 03 9A1d ‘03}-eT jjashyy 07 Ald ‘fayd-S-eFy : au0 aWOS 03 fUIY 04

yeods ‘oj-Yst * 93R[NOIVIe ‘yjashqy 03 yeads ‘ayo-ysi ‘snyy : atqvoydde eae suSis y30q asuas Jo yuiod ut ‘sysaSsnS O1Njead SW °0}-,0q puv 0}-eY 604-YSI

]2A OJ-1 1OJ SUOI}ORIZUOD a1B 30q PUL JOY “1 $ aarjisueay ay} ‘od [aA ‘OY 60} : USIS OAIXoPad OY} SI XPYNs eyo uUNOD NAVE oy} JnoysnoyT, »

yr-reuryy|o}- You °03- Ns] of-9s-1q9 ayo-S- ON ughy BYA-BS qny-ey) cmepdxg “TaD

noylng OF-9S nip-zng qeqey aL ying oiey-ylng pueysz9pu fy

nouns |Oyx-Byy, °OF-uU0H of-0s-V Teg nin, ung alvy-ung 162 fT

¥l-9UL, OF-BL qode ) qoep| o8-u-Ty, ‘ous-1], A284 yn-yey UMOP Ing

3-of-

le 31 V fete { eet 72189) O3-U-ng ‘ous-ng ABT V yn-yog dn VT

OS-u-e «

WIY-PN IAC “OFAPT ) gus-Surx Jo1eD wos-e|-Ng “woseing All-e597] qT Aes oye,

yeuy 03-Ystd Tey qadeg ef-ng UU qicuy Sung

a ie co | 4aleg I[-8 L-1B IV I-18 1

yl-e x 03}-YsIS oyidy OIBS I[-¥d Plt Ten YHey WS

yl-eyyy-eUT, od- Yo]. 03-9IN yale woqyo-eq AU ARIA I-ByI-VU TL, OAS

A!-9N oF-9d of-vq], LT vi-vy A 3T qq-9aT areD

1-20 07-8H nid §r-ng woyyo-tg eli AMG aay

05-Su-03

noyd eyo-Suny wh-gMs-9x) VI EY 03-ul-9 weSnq qyn-1es-nq any

ous-susy

UON eyo-94 eaor "OsS} es-BU A “PUAN 9) 1940 y0-P!H AIP AA

noseg ayo-so TN BA-DIN| wS-NA “eyo-snyW woyo-suntny seq yn-seg UMOP 41S

no-WI) eyo-d9,X oS Bs- Sulyg woyo-Sureq Wa yn-w dn yay)

uly-8N “YN ¥l- yy yjes-uaK “vsu-oR yored uos-v'] By yn-ve on

oqVv +d eke jade ex uy 40-V aul 9

npn 08 -uod-Sunfixy i

SEN ae dg ano] weenie ss) Ye ‘od-B Iq yaarg woyo-uvUNs vyt-esun | yn-vioquy sr WUOLS OF

200 -BUl¥y yo] Wea

- yoqg ‘40 .

ate eer ae BA-V]-PYYT PS-OUN, *2Y9-S-OUN] vy] BI-Bg yn-v10g yredg

no-1 vy-eqd 5 ‘ - oe ie 7 K

eet eyo 10) vd -v yy /es-B-1qy] “9YO-Se-TYY 9aty uy yu-oy doa AA

: - hi | ‘ : 5 Op z ED sysrh

JDNSNY nhoa 10 nhory NUDAT Bundey) YD LO 2LYDI upmnur(y 1y Ploy Ysougd

1857.]

of the broken Tribes of Népdl.

327

Continuation of the Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken

English.

Air

Amaranth,

grain)

Ant

Arm

Arrow

Barley

Bird kind

Ditto male

Ditto female

Bitch

Blood

Boat

Boar

Boiled rice

Bone

Boy

Buffalo kind

Ditto male

Ditto female

Bull

Cat kind

Ditto male

Ditto female

Calf male

Calf female

Child kind

Child male

| Cow

~— Cock

Daughter

| Day

Dog kind

- Dog male

| Ear

_ Earth

| Egg

| Elephant

Ditto female

| Ewe

| Eye

| Face

_ Father

Fire

| Fish

| Flower

' Fowl kind

| Foot

| Fruit

(the

Kustnda.

Kai

Bhartu

Pyai ki

Taii bi

Muyu

Kotau

Gya kotau

Gimi kotau

Agaigimi

Uyu

Wai. Wou

Yasagya. Higya

Kaddi

Gou

Tala sai

Mahi

Mahi-gya

Mahigimi

Nogmwa gya

Biralo

Biralo gya

Biralo-gimi [gya

Noégmwachvachi-

Nogmwachyachi

gimi

Gitasé. Chyachi

Gitasé

Nokmwa gimi

Tab’gya

Katwa H.

Taksé

Dina

Agai

Agai gy’a

Chyaii

Doma

Goda. Gwa

Hatti gya

Hatti gimi

Ghalogimi

Chining

Hangna

Pai

Gnasa

Gipodén

Tap

Chan

Yegiyan

Bhalya chada K.

P6éthi chada K.

Kyatai chhowri

Ragat H. K,

Diaga K,

Baigan harra

Bhat H.

Had H.

Kéta K.

Bhainsa H. K.

Bhainsarango K,

Mau bhainsa

Ballasadh H.

Billo H.

Dago biralo

Chbauri biralo

Bachho H. K.

Bad

Chhora ehhori

Kétakéli K.

Keta. Chh6é ra K.

Nanu balakha H.

Gai H.

BhalyakukuddoK,

Kag H.

Chhéri K,

Ditso K.

Kyatai

Kyatai dango

Kan H

Mato H.

Phul K.

Hatti H.

Makuna H.

Caret

Ankha H.

Mudha H.

Babai

Avo H. K.

Macbha H.

Phul H.

Kukura K.

LP)

Phala H.

Nom’ya dhé

Now ‘ya iso

Nagamoma

I’saba

Tili

Bhat H.

Nati

Kala chaja

Mai

Mai rago

Mai moma

Hméyese

Nobar

Nobar kho

Nobar hmo

‘Hméchaja

Hme chajasimo

Alépicham

Kalachaja

Hmémama

Caret

Ghabrang

Chame

sar

Naga. Nak’yu

Nak/yughyutya

Hna. Nha

Chhyarkyapham

Lam/’bochhé

Lam’bochhemhyo

Ghyimama

Xbo

Hmé

Trang gna

Malethin male

Phum

woz

Bayar

Ramdana

Doka

Hat

Khandha

Jau

Chirai

Pilli

Lohu

vau

Suwar

Bhat

Had

Keta

Bhaisa

Caret

Sadha

Birdla

Birala

Bachha

Bachhi

Tribes of Népal.

Pakh'ya. Thak'sya.

Bay4lo Nammar

Bethyang Bhendo

Krimula Nato

Hat H. K. Ya

Kadha H. K. Tumé

Jou H. Chika

Chada H. K. Nom‘ya

Ladikabala

Ladika

Gaye

Mur’ga

Katwa

Beti

Dina

Kutta

Kan

Mati

An‘da

Hathi

Bheti

Ankh

Muhu

Baba

Agi

Machheri

Phul

%»

Pango géda

Phar

Thak'sya.

Mrin

Caret

Ramo

Ramogya

Ramoma

Chham

Yayathin

Caret

Tili

Ghim

Mrinthin

Phré

Lha

Bhale. Bhalethin

Muthnangmu

328 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

English. Kusinda, PakW'ya.

Girl Taksé Keti (K.)

Grain Kadiyun Caret

Goat kind Mijha Boko K,

Goat male Mijha gya Boko K.

Goat female Mijha gimi Bakhro K,

Hair Gyai-i Rawa

Hand Gipan Hatkela

Head Chipi Manto [(K.)

Hen Tap gimi Kukhurako pothi

Hog kind Hi. Yasa Har’ra

Horn [ping jing Sing H. K.

House Bahi Ghar H. K.

Husband Diwoi Lég nya (K.)

Tron Phalam Khadar

Leaf Hak Pat

Leg Nawaégichan Goda

Light Jina ikya Urt batti

Maize Makai Ghéga

Man kind Mih’yak Manchha

Ditto male Mih’ya dawai Log nya (K.)

Mare Caret Caret

Millet or Kongani

Millet or Kodo

Monkey male

Ditto female

Moon Jun

Mother Mai

Mountain Parbat

Mouth

Musquito Caret

Name Giji

Night Ing gai

Oil |Jing

Old man Caret

Old woman Jigel

Ox kind [husk| Nwagwa.

Paddy or rice injChhusum

Plantain Mocha

Ram Bhantak.

Cleaned rice Kadiyun

River Gimmekona&

Road Won

Salt Huk vi

Sheep kind Gholo

Skin Gitan

Sky Laga i

Snake Tou

Son Tala sai

Star Ing gai

Stallion Caret

Sow

Sun Ing

Tiger Daja kaili

Tooth Tobo

Tree ir

Vegetable Mal ghyak

Kwa chho

Madyi. Mazyi

Ugu

Ugu gimi

Caret

Kodo

Badar H. K.

Badarni H.

Chan‘dramabel’ H.

Ama

Pahar H. K.

Birgyad. Birgyang|Makha H.

Pokha

Nau K,.

Rati K,

Tel K,

Caret

[ Nogmwa|!Caret

Nogo |Caret

Dhan H. K.

[gya|Kela H. K.

Gholo-|Caret

Caret

Khola K.

Bato (K.)

Nan H. K.

Caret

Chhala H.

Sarga

Sapa H. K,

Chhora K.

Tara H. K,

Caret

Higimi, Yasagimi) Baigani harra

Ghama H. K.

Bagha H. K.

Data H. K.

Rukha K,

Sag H.

Pangdarsya

Lati gna

Xma

Yedadhyu

Sung

Polorinaba

Min

Mun

Chhigu

Khéba

Khagyu

Mekinba

Mlasam

Tatung ro

Ghyu kidaba

Mla

Umdakyu

Ghyam

Chacha

Ghyu

Dhi

Pudhi

Jha

Sar

Tili moma [ni

Ghan gni. Saughi-

Gyo

Ghyung

Dhap

[No. 5. |

Tharu.

Ladiki

Anaj

Chhegadi

Baghiya

Bar

Tar hatti

Mudi

Murgi

Suwar

Sing

Ghar

Caret

Loha

Pata

God

Anjoriyo

Makaya

Manhai

Caret

Ghodi

Tagnuno

Madiwa

Banar

Badari

Chand’ramajiin

Mahatari

Par’bat

Mikha

Mas

Nau. Ji

Rati

Tela

Budha

Budhiya

Jadhan

Kera

Baiganbhata

Cha ur

Khola

Rasta

Nan

Cham

Caret

Sapa

Tarang gan

”

Sugarni

Ra uda

Bagha

Data

Gachh

Sag patta

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népdl.

English. Kusitnda. Pakh' ya. Thak' sya.

Village Lahang GauH.K. Hal

Water Tang \Pani H. K, Kya

Woman Ning dai Baigini Vrin

Wheat Gahun Gahun H. Karu

Wife Ningdaimyahoa | Baig’ani Mri{uhmi{

Yam Byalougolandan |Caret timau dau

I - {Chi Ma Ghyang

Thou ~ |Nu [Gida|Ta Gna

He. She. It {I si. It’: Tok’pya?|Ukya Chana. H’mi

Wetwo. Dual |Tok’jhig’na Caret Ghyangsi

Ye t vo Nok '‘jhig’na Caret Gnisi

They two Gidajhig’na Caret H mi si

We all. Plural (Chobaki [ki]Caret Ghyang cha

Ye all Nokibaki Togara-|Caret Gna cha

They all Gidabaki Caret Hmicha

Mine. My Chiyi Mero K. Ghyang ge

Thine. ‘Thy Niyi Tero K, Gna ye

His Hers. Its |Gidayf Usai ko K, mi ye

Ours. Dual Tokjhignayi Caret Ghyang si ye

Yours. Dual Nokjhignayi Caret Gni si ye

Theirs. Dual Gidajhignayi Caret Hmi si ye

Ours. Plural = |Takibakimida Caret Ghyang cha ye

Chobakiyida

Yours. Plural |Nokibakiyida Caret Gna cha ye [ye ke

Theirs. Plural |Gidabakiyida Caret Hmi cha ye. Hmi

One Goi sang Yek ). Bp )

Two Ghigna Dai = |Gni a

Three Daha Tin | = |Som | es

Four Pinjang Char = |Bla a

Five Pagnangjang Pach o {Gana | =

Six Caret Chha Le Oru 2

Seven Caret Sat * & |Gnes a

Eight Caret Ath | =+|Bhre | =

Nine Caret Nau = |Ku o

Ten Caret Das | & |Chyu | =

Twenty Caret Bis pilose iGniya pe

Thirty Caret Tis Hy Sombu

Forty Caret Chalis H. Blibyu

Fifty Caret Pachas Gnasyu

Hundred Caret Saya H, Bhra

Of Nata igin Ko K, Chaye

To. Dat. & Acc.|La i (K.) La T. Dhyari

From Jang jai Bato K. Kyache

By. Instrumental] i Le K. iKKau

With. Cum, Tangche Saga Gnayero

Without. Sine. /Kauthai Bholi Arobhoja

In Tai Beli Hisono

Now Ipwaji Yeso Ghyangchye

Then Nhu Caret Kheghangehye

When ? Asahi Caret Tigni

To-day Itwaji. Ipwaji [Aja (K.) Nama

To-morrow Gorak Bhdéli (K.) Tila

Yesterday jinaga Hijo (K.) Kemichuri

Here ‘Tau wa \Yé:a (K.) Kesichosi

There Isaga ‘Uta (K.) Khataikhacti

Where ? Idnaks ‘Kota (K.) "Tomi

Thiru.

Ga won

Pani

Meraru

Gohun

Jani

Kanmual

Hang

Tong

Utu

Hangdu

Tongdu

Unudu

Hang log

Tusal

Usal

Caret

Hamarnu hye

Caret

Uduwonko

Hamlogkau

Taharasabake

Unakara

Yek

Dai

Tin

Char

Pache

Chha

Sat

Ath

Nau

Das

Bis

Tis

Chalis

Pachas

Keha

Kerake

Paidadekhalbat

Saga

Nahiho i

Bakinahi

Amai. Abhai

Nabhai. Tabhai

Kabahu

Aju

Kalhi

Byahan

Yelhara

Uhara

Kanha

330 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5, °

English. Kustnda. Pakh'ya. Thak'sya. Tharu.

Above Drasu ok Hapra Caret Upara

Below Tumai Tala (K.) Masi Tare

Between Gijhagda Majha (K.) Kung ri Biche

Without. Outside] Bangjo Bahira (K ) Phelori Bahera

Within Waha Bhitra (K.) Nhari Bhitra

Far Tsinha Tahi Chari Uba

Near Ista Nesai Nyese Ihya

Little Dyoro Yokai. Thokai |Chipri Thoro

Much Mang gni Mauti Dhan ha Bahut

How much ? Asina Kati (K.) Kang nya Ketana

As Natiya Caret Khajiba Jaisan

So Napawai Caret KKhapribé khaju |Wunaisan

How? Natuwan Caret Khajulaba Caret

Thus Tantan Caret \Ho alaba Han

Yes Ayabakiho Hoého K. Hin Nahiba

No Ayewa Asin Ai Nahi

Not. Prohibitive |Hya NaH. K. Kino Rahare

And Caret Ra Bikigang Ka

Or Caret Caret Howochuchhyang (Lhe

This Mas « Ca Yehi.., Yo Hi: Pa 4ng kyungpa | ,,

That Issi. It Wohi. U. H. |Cha. Khapami |U

boas y

tg } Jon etn be hak, xe) Jimanchha Khanangpémhi =|Kunmanai

= he Sar

eg \ on ae haet Jaunamancbha K. |Khajupémhi Umanai

pe aN ; Kon |Natat Kaunamanchha K.|Ta Kaunmanai

What ? Natang Kya H. Khajupero Ka

Any thing Nataum’ya hagit |Kehi bastu H. Khajang pemhi |Kunbastu

Any body Nataim’ya hak vel] Kohimanchha H. |Sabadhyangpa Konamanai

hyak. |

Good Waiyaki Bahiya. Niko(K )|Asba Niman. Badhai

Bad Ka ingbarai Ghatiyaé. Behor |Na 4asba Tniman

Cold Khang go. Chiso (K.) Sim Thanda

Hot Bhrok Tato (K.) Lhap Chuhan

Raw Ben Kacho (K.) Ateheba Kacha

Ripe Pakog Pako (K.) l'yahejiba Pakal

Sweet Ahal Guliyo (K.) Koghiba Mitha

Acrid, pungent (as|Bya Piro (K.) Swoba Tin

red pepper, &c.)

Bitter Katuk Tito (K.) Kamba rin

Sour Dam tan Amilo (K.) Kimba [hepa'Khatta

Handsome Waiyaimya hak |Ramro (K.) Bastu. Mhikya-|/Besmanai

Ugly Aingbarai Caret Mhi akyahopa Bauramani

Straight Caret Tersai (K.) Tananphirphai Sojh

Crooked Wang kang Bang go (K.) Yeba Tat

Black Pang sing Kalo (K.) Malang Kariya

White Asai Séto (K.) Tarpa Ujar I

Red Ban uba. Rato (K.) Wala Lal

Green Hariyo K. Hariyo (K.) Phin Hariyer

Long Hwang gai Lamo (K.) Hrimba Lamba |

Short Poktok Chhoto (K.) Rimba Chhot

Yall Phiyong Xgo (K.) Bauchhenba Uchcha

Short } man. Poktok Hocho (K.) Putulu Nicha

Small Hungkoi Sanu (K ) Chyangba Chhot

Great W ogonrai Thilo (K.) Théba Mot

1857.]

English.

Round

Square

Round

Flat

Fat

Thin

Weariness

Thirst

Hunger

Eat

Drink

Sleep

Wake

Do not

Laugh

Weep

Be silent

Speak

Do not speak

Come

Remain standing

Stand up, get up

Sit down

Walk or move

Run

Give

Take

Strike

of the broken Tribes of Népdl.

Kusinda.

Mang gni

Charapate K,

Dallo K,

Chyangkang

Biji

Gharau

Balangba

Tap yau

Idang

Tang gonong

Iptu (? Causal)

Bleugwoto

Au 6.

Anibil

Nakyaba

Jhama 6

Abaganebin

Pwaktoba

Anoktabin

Agga

Loengwéto

Bhingwoto

Aban

Gorgowédto

Pungbégo

Kill, by cutting,|Puwago

eut down

Kill, any how, i. e |Wagdago

destroy

Kill, with stone or| Yuphwago

other missile

Bring

Take away

Lift up

| Put down

Hear

_ Understand

_ Tell or relate

I beat

| We two beat. Dual

| We all beat. Pl.

_ Thou beatest

Yulinggwajo

Gyag’mo

Mang’vo

Caret

Wongdago

tanhai

Nupomatawa

Au wo

Ki-pomatanha-u

Tokjhignai poma- |Hamidwi kut’.

Pak’hyd.

—— |

Batulo (K.)

Charapalo

Dallo (K.)

Patalo (K.)

Moto (K.)

Hariyako

Galelagyo

Pamitis H. K.

Bhok lagyo K.

Gau. Khawa H.K.

Piu H. K,.

Saira H.

Utha H.

Harihal

Janahara

Has H.

Sanchha

Chochira

Caret

Janabol

Aija K.

Baija

Pakhanataba

Utha (K.)

Basa (K.)

Hat H.

Phalala

Deu (K.)

La (K.)

Kur (K.)

Kat (K.)

Maridea (K.)

Han (K.)

Lyalya (K.)

Lalja (K.)

Bok (ix.)

Bisa

Suna (K.)

Bujha

Kaha (K.)

Man kut’chhu*

chau

Tokkhagyai poma-|Hamibaru kut’-

chaun

Ta kut’chhas

Thak' sya.

Ghighirba

Bhilirchbéwa

Bhumriba

Pabapilhe

Dhum/’wa

Jyaina

Bhalapji

Kejuphiji

Phothanji

Lhila

Bivw

Nhuko

Réto

Lhat.

Thalat

Gnéto

Tako

Lhemthalo

l'yato

Tha tyato

Khau

Hero

Pranhogatu

Gnajurpa

Tapa

Hero

Gninahero.

Pino

Bhakau

Tau. Thopati

Thagothapati

Lau

Prino

Bhakau

Bhoro

Thithonko

Thano

Nagnino

Ghau

Bhigho

Gnajai toba

Gnigui tobaka

Gnignichaitobomu

Chyang chaitoba

33 1

Tharu.

Gola

Charakunabate

Dhela

Panarabangpanang

Mot

Dabar

Thakali

Pipas

Bhok

Khai

Piyal. Pilayaba

Sutali

Uthali.

Kara

Nakara

Kahasal

Karo ol

Chupraho

Bolai

Nabol

Awa.

Jaja

Khadarahawai

Khadahé

Baith

Chal

Dhaba

Dada

Lala

Mar.

Jagal

Yanha

Marau

Mar

Kat

Lyare. Léare

Léjare

Utha o.

Rakhare

Suna

Bujhare

Kahare

Hama marilé

Lad

.|Hamadunu marila

Raura marila

* The rest of this column is pure Khas or Parbatya, as also all the other words having

| the * K’”’ subjoined.

The corrupt Urdu or Hindi of Tharu is too palpable and incessant

_toneed amark. The Tharu tongue like the Kocch and so many others of the Tarai, from

_ Hardwar to Assam, is fast merging in the proximate Arian tongues; and so also the Hill

| . . rT

dialects into Khas.

}

332 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

ee a ar

English. Kustinda. Pak‘hy4. Thak' sya.

Ye two beat. Dual|Nokjhegna poma- Timidwi kut’ch- |Namagni tobamu

tawa [wa] hau [hau |

Ye all beat. Pl. |Nokkhag pomata- Timiharu kut’ch-|Namacha tobamu

He, she, it beats |Gida pomatawa U kut’chha The tobamu

They two beat. Dl. Gidajhigna poma- Undwi kuchha |Thamagni tobamu

tawa [wa

They all beat, P).\Gidbki pomata-| Unharu kut/chhan Hmichaka tobamu

I am beaten Tangda pungmata-| Malai kut‘chha |Gnazir tobamu

[Dual] bahini [ba [chha

We two are beaten.|Tokjhigai pomata- Hamidwilai kutv’- |Gnigni tobamu

We all are beaten.|Tokhkadai poma- HAmiharulai kut’- |Gniri tobamu

Piural tabai chha

He, &c. is beaten. |Gidodanigidai. Uslai kuttachha |Caret

pungmataba

They two are beat- Gidajhignaigi- Unaidwilai kutta- |Caret

en. Dual pungmataba chha

They areall beaten.|Gidakhaigi pung-" Unharulai kut’- |Caret

Plural mataba chha

sR LILLE

[No. 5.

Tharu.

Rauradunu marila |

[ marila

Raurapangchan-

|U marala

Udunu marila

Unaloga marala

Hamake marila

[rila

Hamdunuké ma-

Haémalogake ma-_

rila

Woke marila

Woduke marila

Wologanake ma-

rila

épal,

of the broken Tribes of J

1857.]

aMqOoMyO

-oM qo SOM vy oxryyore

Jeseg |W day snide]

oP et

Bs ,Sunq oy og

oq rdq Bua)

ESS ae

eq aT] wey eqoy su

“eyo weurg| rA-oyyour 4

‘ndyeyo

dedq lo nd

AYQ-nd, youn} ea oygode,

ndyryg eeouye

n of nop Iypsuoyyy “Nd |

9d 9eN| T9q ‘lee

Buy n WOH

WIT ey yy Wel Bey y

vdny Suny edny Sunq

ed 3H

"vhh bunny | ‘oh Gungny

{

sae

eyo id vyd

“SUI “RID

eqoqgoyon| -td eqdsuay] evyyoes nq

aM Soyy Suag

DsNy jus YOu Sugg je tvg BM ing

Bdory BUIBD A)

seyy Bo sung vs ,sung

suoyy

ed ody} yyyd eygordy|-ody -‘eydag

Pay 0 Uhyimia = Gnd 62 8 | SH ‘IA

yeypomog jva] evoimnyo BM

V “RULUITeY|- BAY eYYO vUny|-NYavay eory

Buq 1qoe BM

“Aeyo Owogy] -OuR|Ys euy|-suoyyO evwy

THOR A

-oury(o eq) (eB ssuoyyo ody

TYORA

vag Yeyo|-eo AT pur enyy

mq yvqo ody

VM SUNY

vi sog] euvys-ry9]) Sugyyo Suggs,

PL tgs

Og) Id “AISI a1g ‘9g

ey LT ynyyO

‘TO WONT M J Wag]

eu sunin og] -ayy “yapoyy] — SuydyryyO

INBIBSOL) THe Se IX euugyqy)

BMS {INET

wing) yeqd ea Sy eR ‘eur,

*vhispunoy)

*DYYVA “buyym

“WO BYYOYIE MW

esevy eu /eanyooy eur

eM OYYO Bul yf) BseM ems)

va onyo ved esea eds

BM OTD BSE

eyy suoyyD, ear ‘eure

y us

Pe edd sd | ad

nyu ‘NAA

ndjeduryyyg) yosreyySugg

wed edi

TH BU , WF]

‘buasayyoony |\'vhibunpbuyyg

‘SO

eu SP

nt dnq, ‘nad ng, BA YNIVG|-n_ ‘equi vg)

vloyey ee HOM, “OOM “HOY

us SUNG ed Su0g BABS

eqed

ooqed yn} =x eydedy ing ‘vq-edO

TH PH Win. 9H

AM 1

Budo n

beh Ky

Ryoum nq)

Qu0g S.Moo

‘emnd Ig ‘BM

PMNYIOY VULC

TAL

Suoyyo vuro

-Suoyyo edo

rasuoyyg

Suoyyosuoy,

2 Sa

‘ost

“oy

Eee)

subkyiyd

SAV EYOES

eu ueyd

"euUayy )

MPH 90H

“Bung

-uayyobunyy

g “bsg Nospaoy "HH -

vqyyo

“EY TMO108 | hog

ean

Ug “BAL, ARS} 110t] aas “aUOg

WO y | 10 201d poplog

ruen ey | yeog

ed tuypy ‘ed

-npt ‘oq edo AVOg

WH. tH poojd

LU Wud

BuO BSBAA| apeWay pag

edo vse Ay a]RUI pag

BEE M pary- pug

‘mup eMAT Aajieg

mype Ar |

aug MOLLY

nyyO puey sas fury

vdaieyIyg uy

ew sun] TURIBWY

niy nV

‘buyupyg 49)

Buopoar ys bug

q tq ‘qup.uy

way, salfo paunu st aouaoud yoyn ‘unup soars ayg fo usng ay, so yndayr fo wopbury ayz fo conde JSOU-ULOZSO

247 burhdnos0 mou ‘sizupury pazyva azdoad paguagajzaa ayz fo (sj0a2n0p) sahynbuvy powaaes ay) fo hunynquoo4 aarmimadMoy —_

Buffalo male

Buffalo female

Bull

Um/’pa maisi

Umma maisi

Pi umpa

O/pa sang’wa

O’ma Saéng’wa

O’pa pit

Upa sangwa

Umma Sanewa

Upapit

Pitchha. Pih’chhajPitchil

P{ impa Gmchha |O’pa pitchha

Pi (mma amchha |O’ma pitchha

Sur’ma. Minima |Ptsi

Calf-kind Pi umcbha

Calf male

Calf female

Cat-kind Bé ra

Cat male Bé rapa

Cat female Bé rama

Child Chhachi.

chha

Cow Pyu pa. Pi

Cock Wapa

Crow Ouwa

Daughter Marchha chha.

Chhachha ma

Day Kholé

Dog-kind Khli.

Dog male Khlipa

Ear [ whole|Napro

Earth, little. Earth,| Békha

Egg Dai. Dai

Elephant-kind Hatti

Elephant male

Elephant temale

Ewe

Eye

Face

Father

Fire

Fish

Fiower

Fowi-kind

Foot

Fruit

Girl

Grain

Goat-kind

Goat male

Goat female

Hair

Hand, see arm

|Umpa hatti

Umma hatti

Umma vhéda

Michak

Ugnalang

Gnasa

Bingna

Phila

Bada. Yoda

Chhamarchha

Cha

Chhong gara

Umpa chhong ga-

ra [ra

O/pa minima

O’ma minima

chha

Paton Bik’

Upa pitchilé

Umma pitchilé

Upa past

“ 7 ia

Umma past

Yaya-|Chha chi. Mana-|/Chh’a che

Pit

Wapa. O’pa wapa|Rang gaba

Ka ga.

Gah’ wa

Méch’chha chha-

chha. U mech’.

chha chha chha

Ukholén

Ko6chiwa

O’pa kochiwa

Naha

Bakha.

U ding.

Hati

O’pa hati

O’ma hati

O’ma bhéda

Kah’ wa./Ghak wa

Méch’chha chha

Nam

Kochawa

Upa kochiwa

[ma|Narék

Henkha-|Kham

Wa din|U thin

Hati

Upa hati

Um/’ma hati

Um’ma bhéda

Mak, Maadk Mak

Gualang Gnalung

Ku pa. Pa. Wa-|Upa

pa. O’pa

Mi Mi

Gna Gnasa

Bingwai Phang

Wa Wa

Langtemma, Wu-/|Lang

khuro. U khuro

O siwa [echha|Siwa

Mechchhachha- |Machchhachha

Chama Kwak. Kok

Chhéng gara Méndiba

O’pa chhén gara

‘Umma chhong ga- O’ma chéng gara

Mus’ya.

(Ta = head)

Chhaku phéma,

arm flat

Twong. Maa

Chhikhu phéma,

aim flat

Upa méndiba

Umma méndiba

Tang’ phikwa.

(Tang = head)

Muk

334 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5.

English. ass ae Riingchhénbiing. | Chhingtdngya. | Néchheréng.

Buffalo-kind Bahira. Maisi |Sangwa Sangwa Méisé. Meis

Um'pa méisa

Um/’ma méisa

Wachchha piya,

Um’pa péva

Pimi Gmebha

Pimi Gmpachha

Pimi Gmmachha

Manima

Umpa manima

Umma manima

Chhamt wa

apa

Gégok pa

Mimchha chba

Mlépa

Haga

Haa ga

Naba |

Baha ;

Di i |

Hathi

Umpa hathi

Uw/ma Lathi

Um’ma lisa

Mik’sa

La. Léphéma

Sasa

Mim chha chha

Chama

Chhangara

Umpa chhangara

Umma chhangara |

Taa sam. (Tia =

head)

Hua

1857.]

Waling.

Sang wa

/ Va

Apa sang wa

Ama sang wa

Caret

Csret

Ma nima

Apa minima

Ama minima

Chhachi

Gai

Wapa

Géwa

Machha

Wo kholé.

Apa kochuwa

Naphak

Pakha

Dim

Hathi

Apa hathi

Ama hathi

Ama bhéda

Mak

Gna lang

Apa. Papa

Langkutém

Sangsf wa

Machha

Cha

Bakara

Apa bakara

Ama bakara

Tang mawa. (Tang|Tangphang’ wa.

* Gaika borrowed.

[diy

Nam-

Kotima. Kochuwa

_| Pikaichwe ima-

a eee

of the broken Tribes of Népdl.

Vakha. Chouras’ya.

$$$.

San wa Bé i so

[pa chha san wa |Apo bei so

Ima chha san wa |Abomé be i so

Ypachha pik Apo biya

Pikaichwe Biya nunu

PikaichwefpachhajApo biya nunu

[chha

Pastima Bir’mo

Ypachha pisima |Apo bir’mo

Tmachha pastima |Abém6 bir’mo

Pichha Béba

[bia

Bia. Biya. Awo-|Pi im’ma. Umma-|Gai

Ymachha pik

Tpachha wa Bé gnapa

Al’ gwa. A g walGag boé

Chiyaé méch chha |Tabe

Leh’ ni

Kochama

Duk’so

Chali

Tpachha kochumajChali gnapo. Apo-|Um’pa kheba,

Bist)

Kuling’ya. Thulung’gy4.

Mési Mési

Mési mipa Um/’-|Upap mési

pamési [simima

Uin’ma mési. Mé-/Umam mési

Umpapi. Pimpa |Bénwa

Pim’chha *Gaikam uchwe

Umpa pim’chha |Gaikam tipap-

uchwe [uchwe

Abomo biya nunu/Um’ma pim’chha |Géikam imam-

Birali Bir’ma. Ubirma

Umpa birdli Upap bir’ma

Um’ ma birali Umam bir’ma

Nukcha. Chha-|Chwé chwé,

chhama man-

chhama. Cha s-

cha [pi

Ma-

lochém chwé-

chwé, human

young

Wépa

Grdékpupé

Gagah’ pd

Gapwa. Ga po

Mimcechhachha Mas chwé chwé.

Mis’ che chwé-

chwé

Lépa Némphu

fchali|Khé b [Khémi paj/Khiéba

Upap khléba

Naphak D6éba Nobwa, N6 bo |Nokphla

Kham Kanksi Boho Kwa

In. Wain. (Wa|Babang’gya. (BajUmdi. Wadi. Di|Di i

[= fowl) [= fowl) (Wa = fowl)

Hatti Hatti Hatti Hati

Tpachha hatti Xpo hatti Hattimpa Upap hati

Tmachha hatti Abémo hatti Hattim’ma Umam hati

Fmachha buénda |Abém6t bhéd& |Bhédim’ ma Umam bheda

Mik Bisi -|Muk’sift Mik’si

Nachik Kali Gnébwa, Gné bo}Kal

Tpa. Pa Apo Pa. Um’pa Pap. U pap

Mi Mi Mi Ma

Guasa Gndso Gna Gud. Sa. Swe

Phang Phari Bung Biang’ma

Wa Bo Wa Pd

Lang tapi Lésu Long Phémkhél

Icha Ching’chi Sisi Sisi

Méchchha pichha |Bicho béba Mimchhachha Musche chwé

Chabak Jama Chasim Ma

Méngthibak Sangara Chhang gara Chhwanra

Fpachha méngthi-|Apo sangara Chhang garampa |Upap chhwanra

bak [bak

Tmachha méngthi-|Abomd sdngara |Chhdng garamma |Umam chhwanra

Sém Mii. Tésim. (To\Sém. Swém

(Tang = head)

Muktapi La

Definitive ’m annexed.

= head)

(Hah’phama Lwablém

; + Abo-mo adds the female to the male designation. The 2 are in Tibetan, bo-mo or ba-ma;

in Lepeba, a-ben, a-mot,

~ Myek-chi, Myet-si, Burmese.

336 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5

bd Rodong, or Chdain- P mye BAe ‘ 3

English. : ling Ringchhénbiing. | Chhingtangya. Ndachheréng.

Head Taklo. Tak lo Tang. Eu tang /Tang Tak lo

Hen Wama O’ma wama [wild|/Uma wa Wama

Hog-kind Bo [tong|Ba, Yangba, the|Phak Bo 6

Horn Rang. Tong. Um-|Usang’ga Sing’ ga Taa

Horse-kind Ghdda Ghdda Ghdéda Ghéda

House Khim Khim Khim Khim

Husband Atami. Tami = [Caret Papho. Atimi |Umtdpo

Tron Phalam Phalam Banchhiwa Phalam

Kid-kind Chhong gara Chhén garachha Méndibachha Chhangaraumehha |

Kid male Chhong gara um-|Chhén gara dpa- Upa méndibachha|Chhangara umpa- |

pachha chha chha |

Kid female Chhong gara um-|Chhéng gara 6ma- Uma méndibachha|Chhangara umma-

machha cbha chha

Lamb-kind

Lamb male

Lamb female

Leaf

Leg

Light

Maize

Man-kind

Man, the male

Mare

Millet, (Kangani)

Millet, (K6d6)

Monkey-kind

Monkey, the male,

Monkey, the fe-|

male

Moon

Mother

Mountain

Mouth

Musquito

Name

Night

Oil

Old man

Old woman |

Ox-kind

Paddy

Plantain

Ram

Rice or Choul

Bhédi umchha

Bhédi umpachha

Bhedi ummachha

Labo

Phila

Namehha. Kha wi-

Makai

Mina

Soronchha. Soron-

chha mina

Umaghdda

Phéro

Char’ma

Tong bia. Noi

Umpa tong bha

Umma tong bha

Ladipa

Ma. Uma

Danda

'Dyo

Tangkama

Nang

Khosai

Béli

Pachha. Pacbha.

kéwa [koma

Machha. Machha-

Rdéng

Gnosi*

Umpa bhéda

Charang

Bhéda umchha

Bhéda opa chha

Bhéda oma chha

Ubawa euchha

Lang

Ulawachhami,s

Makai

Mana. Maana

Da wachba. Mech-,

chha-chha,

mau chha homo

O’ma ghéda

Phésa

Sam picha

Hélawa

O’pa hélawa

O’ma hélawa

Ladima Lathiba Lanima

Ma. O’ma Ma. Uma Ma. U m-ma

Bhar Bour Danda —

D6 Tharum Gnocho

Lamkhttya Twang gy6mma_ |Supyal

Nang Nang Na

Ukbakhwai. Ukha-| Ukha khait. Ukha-| Umsyapa

ko khuit

Al’wa Kiya Tél

Badha khékpa Badhapa Passou

Bhidé khékma [Badhima Massou

Pit Pik Péh’ ya

Cha Chaya Ka a

Gnak’si Gnaklasi Li gnaksi

O’pa bhéda

Chayong

Bhédichha

Bhédi upa chha

Bhédi uma chha

Laphowa

Lang

am, Khalamtha

Makai

M4pmi, Mah’mi

Woe

Umma ghdéda

Phésa

Sambok

Hélawa

Upa hélawa

Umma hélawa

Upa bhéda

Cha srak

* In all the words si vel chi vel cha is the generic sign for all fruits.

== all

grains, in the words for barley and rice: main Thul.

Lisa umchha

Lisa umpa chha

Ldasa umma chha

Sam. Saa ma

L6 6

W ajyald

Bapst sa

Mina. Min

Wachechha

Umma ghdda

Pisa

Chércha

Popa

Umpa popa

Umma popa

Umpa itisa

Sira

So also cha vel ja,

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népil. B37

Waling. Yakha. Chouras'ya. Kuling’ya. Thulungg'ya.

Tang Vukh rik. Tukbu-|Pbuitiri Tong Bui

rak. Ta kbraik [P6. Umam po

Wima Tmachha wa Xhbomé bo Wama Pwa. Uimam pwa

Bok. Pha. Khong|Phak Pa B6 o Bwa. Bo

Khu ting tang. A-|Itang’ Rodso Umpitta, Pitta |Rang. Um rang

tam’mi khak

Ghdda O’n Ghoda Ghdéda Ghoda

Khim Pang Kada Khim Ném

Apa sang’ Wémpha O’ ché, W6 cho |Umtaippo. Tuppo|Kha

Phalam Chek chi Phalam Sél Sél [we

Bakarachhachi Menthabaichchya | *4ngar ninu Chhangarachha |Chhwarakam uch-

Apa baékarachha |Ipachha mentha- |Sangar tawa Chhangarachha- |Chhwarakam, uch-

baichchya umpa we tpah

Ama bakarachha |Imachha menthd- |Sangar tabe Chhangarachha- |Chhwaérakam uch-

baichchya imma we imam

Bhédachhachi Bhedaich we Bhéda nanu Bhedamchha Bhédachwé*

Apo bhedachhachi|Ipachha bhedai- |Bheda taw& Bhedumpachha |Bhedupapchwé

chwe [chwe

Amo bherachhachijImachha bhedai- |Bheda tabe Bhedummachha |Bhedumamchwé

Sung’phak. Ba {Sam phak sapha, Moli Siba. La. Um boa/Sé blam

Lang Lang Losu Long Khel

Wajyalé. Khadai| Wop’na Dwam somo. U-|Kodata. Nam-|Hwah’waya, sam,

jyalo chhowa. Miwal’ma

Makai Makai Groboma Makai Makai

Mana. Mina Yap’mi Mayo Mis Michyu

Adi wa. Dawa |Wengpha O’cho Wachchha Waschwe

Ama ghoda Imachha won Abomo ghoda Ghodam ma Umam ghoda

Phésa Péya Ja Pési Sar

Sampicha Pang gya Charja Lisi Lisér

Héiawa Pubang Poka Papwa Nak’syu

Apa hélawa Ipachha pubang |Apo poka Papwampa Nak’syu upap

- Ama hélawa Imachha pubéng |Abomo poki Papwamma Nak’syu umain

: Ladima La Twasyal. To syal'La Khlyé, Khlé

| Aina Ima. Ma Amo Ma. Umma Mam. Umam

| Danda Kwangu Kwdma Tam’ him Bro

Two. Do Malaphu Dali Gno Si

'Supyal. Tokli. |Thokthoki lang |Gang’gayamo Kwongtholi Mas

| Nang Ning Di Ning Nang

- Untkhakhti. Akha-|Séh’ ni Domsa. Dwang-|Sépa Dum’ma. Dungma

khwi prime, Dompai-

| me

Ah’ wa Kiwa Tilyam Khilaém ‘Tel

| Pasang Thap’ pa Gné wa Mancham wachha Gua a

{chha

_ Masang Thap’ ma Gné bé Mancham mim- Gnami

Caret Pik Biya Pi Caret

| Kaya Cham Garja |Ra gnoksi/Résépma, grain

| Guaksi Chémokla Bal chi Li gnoksi. Li- [Lég noksi

Apa bhéda I pachhabhéda Apo bhéda Bhédampa, (forj/Upap. Bhéda

Bheda ampa)

_ Chayang Yaméchchhu Séva Séri Soar’. So ar’

_ ™ In Kid we have the full form with genitive sign and definitive prefix.

both dropt.

Here we have

With them the terms would run bheda-kam-uch (tor um) cbwe or bhera-kar-u-

chwe. But genitive ka is borrowed, and kam is = ka-um.,

338 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5. |

English. gaa ess Gear: Ringchhénbing. | Chhingtdngya. Ndachheréng.

River Wa hwai Hongka Wahoh’ ma Hang kwama,

(Hung kéma

Road Lam Lam Lambo Lam

Salt Rim Yim Yum Ram

Sheep-kind Bhéda Bhéda Bhéda Lisa

Skin Hulépa *Hokwae Uho-|Sahok’ wa Sa hok

k’wa. Sa hok wa

Sky vam Namchok Namchhuru Nam chho

Snake Pachho Pichham Pachha Pua

Soil Bol’kha Aéngkhama Thang’pu Thampu

Son ‘Sorénchha chha |Dawachhachha |Chhai [Chok choi)Wach’chha chha

Star Pitipya. Pitappa |Sang gén Chok chong i, Sangger’wa

Stallion ‘Umpa ghoda O’pa gbhoda Upa ghoda Umpa ghoda

Stone ‘Ling’to Ling’ta Linggwak’ wa La a

Sow ‘O’ma bd O'ma ba Umma phak Umma bod

Sun. Sunshine Namliyas Nam |Nam Nan Nam

Tiger Chabha Kiwa Kibha Dhing’tra

Tooth ‘King Kang Kéng Kaa

Tree Song piwa Sane’tang [kham] Sang’ Sa a

Vegetables Sag Limkham chok- {Saga Sankhai lankhai

Village Tuang’ma Téng Téa Tyal

Water wa Chawa Chia wa Ka awa

Wife Mai. U mai Mechchhachha Méchchha Yul’ ar

Wheat Chhong. Nambo '!Nuah’chhong Jawa Docher

Wood Sang Sang Sang Sou

Woman Marchha Méchchhachha Maché Mim’chha

Yam S6ki Saki [chha Khi si wa Khi yok’sa

Young man Walalichha Phanta. Phanta-|Wanchabang Solo

Young woman Klamaichha [ka Kaméchha Kaméchchha Solome

I Kagna, Ka. Ing) Ungka. Anka. Ang!/Aka Kagna. Ka

Thou Khana Khana Hana Ana

He, She, it. Dual/Kha. Tyako. Hy--Oko. Moko. Eu-|Mogo.

ako yako. Euyauko| Yoko, Mogo

We. Plural in-|Kai. Kai Ungkan K4nana. Kanga na|Ka i

clusive [clusive

We. Plural ex-/Kai. Ka )Ungkanka ae Kai ka

Ye. Plural Khaini. Khanai|Kbananin. Kha-!'HAndanina Annimo, A nai |

na na \

They. Plural Hay i. Khu chu.|Mokot Yo go. Yogwana./Yak mowa, Ya-|

Khu-i Tya i Mo go na koi. Makai |

Mine, disjunct. |Ang’ ma Ang’ko Akwa. A koo Angmi |

My, conjunct. A. Ang Ang A (kwa cd

Thine Khamo §Xmko Hana. Hanéyak-|An mi, Ammi

Thy Ka Am sd Am |

His, Her’s, Its, |Khimo Moso. Yauso |Mogwasékkwa |Yakmi, Mankami)

disjunct [conj. .

His, Her, Its, U. O’. Um, UnglO. Eu U {U. Um

* Yu-a or sa-ytia, bone; sa or u-sa, flesh; hokwa or sa-hokwa, skin; heu or sa-heu |

blood, and also u-heu; hokwa, skin ; sa-hokwa, skin; sing-hokwa, tree-skin or bark. :

+ Yi is wife in Lepcha and in Vamil. U, ind. art. = ‘a’ prefix in those tongues, a-yu, and L

ta-yu, tayu = u-yu or ya-t.

t 3rd pronoun like nouns, transfers sign to adjective or verb.

§ Dual ungka-cheua, exclusive ungka-chi, inclusive Khana-chi, Moko-chi, Oko-chi, Euyakochi. |

Mogwa./Manka. Yako

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népal. 339

Waling. Yakha. Chouras ya, Kuling'ya. | Thulungg’ya.

Hong’ ma Hong’ma Galo Yo wa (Karka

Lam Lam’ bu Lam Lam Lam

Yim Yum Yok’si Gam Yo

Bheda Bheda Bhéda Bhéda Pheda

Sahok Saho warik Kwak’ te. Kok’ te\Soko wari Kwok’st. Kok’si.*

[Neto| Kok’te

Sag’ra [chham/Tang khyang Dwam , |Chhaburi. Netwa,| Dwamu

Puchhap. PG-|Pachak Bisa Pu Pha chyti

Bakha Kbambema Kak’si Tham’pu Kwa [chhwe chwe

Chba. Dawachha/Chya. Chwe Tawa Wachha chha Chye., Chwe, Was-

Sang gen ma Chokchigi Soru Sangver Swar

Apa ghoda Ipachha won Apo ghoda Gio dam’pa Upapghoda

Liing-tak [ma|Langkhok’ wa Ling Ling [ma} Ling fam bod

Amopha. Khong-|[machha phak Abomo pa Bwam ma. Bo o-|Umam bwa, Um-

Namebho wa. Sun|Nam Dwam Nam Nepstng,. Nem,

shine sun shine

Dhi na ra. Dhinra|K’iba Gipso Nari Gupsya

Kang Ha. Hachi [thap'Gim’so Kang Lyt

Sang u Ing thap. Sing gai- Sing Thonam Dhak’sa

Saga Phiyakhya Silim Khaiyu Sag

Teng Ten Del Tel Del

Cha wa Mang chiwa Ka-ka Kat Ku

Amasang’ Mechchha Bicho Yul’ uf {Kha

Chayong’ chhong !Chicha ma Caret Docher Jepser

Sang Caret Sing Sing Sang

Aduma Mecchha yapmi |Bichomtyo Mim/‘chha Wo-chya

Sakhi. Yak Khe. Stchigwa |Rang’jabi Khe Balak’pu

Phang’ ta Wengcha Sala cho Solo Swalachwé

: Kamechha Kime Salame Solome Swalame

~Ineka. Angka Ka Unggt Kogna Go

Hané. Khana |Ing’khi. ’Nkhi Gnome. Unu [Ana Gana

| Aya. Hayako.|Khena. Yona. I’-- Time. Yome. Ya-|Nako. Mako. Ne- Hana

_ Moko khi. Yona. Mo-| me tako

na. Tona

‘ka. Uka. Ing kai.| Kani Ung giticha Kekaa, Koi. Ko- Goku

| Ingka ni ni

| Kong kaika Kani. Ka # it Goi

- Hanani Inkhini. Ning-|Gnometicha. Unu/Ani. Ana i Gaui

khi. ’Nkhi mi

| Haya ni. Hayak |Ichi khi. 1’khi ni,] Tometicha Nakoni Hanommim, Ha-

— Mokoni Yona ni nom nu

| Angpik Aga Aleme aa Ama

‘K 3 x e x

_Ampik I’n ga lleme Ammi Yema

Am z hg Me 1’ [kam

| Hayek pik [’ga. Yona ga, &c.|Gnemeleme Nakwami O’kam. Huanom-

ee i. ar Wa U

| = si — sa; kok, hok = crude; swé su-e = flesh.

¥ Yd is wife in Lepcha and in Tamil. U, ind. art. = ‘ a’ prefix in those tonzues, a-yu and

‘ta-vu, tayu = u-yu or ya-a.

| $ Kha = husband or wife.

Husband and wife = Khabang’.

340 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [ No. si

| : CR

English. Rodony,.or Cham- Riingchhénbing. | Chhingtdngya. Nachheréng.

ling.

Our’s Imo. Ximo g Ainkwa Kauuguaikkwa Wokimi.

Our 2 Woki

Wega Khaimo = |Armno Haniyakkwa Amnimowa

Your [Khuimo w&

Their’s Khimo. = |Myatcho Hiingcheikkwa |Yakmomi

Their 5

One* Aira. Itto ~ |Eukhha. Eukpop. !Thitta [’bhou

| yEukta, un-

= changed

Two Hakara © |Heuwang. Heu sa.) Hichche | Nisbhou

<c Heu wa pop}

Three Sam’ra s |Sum ya. Sum. |}Samche Sak’bhou

= pang. Sum ka-

Four Lyra ay a |Laya, Lawang. Lik’bhou

| | La wa pop

Five Gnara 3 1 Gnaya. Gnawang. Gnak’bhou

= Gna ka pop

Six Tak’kara ss | Tak-ya. Tuk wang.

5 Tuk ka pop

Seven Rafkara ~ |Bhangya. Bhang-

| wang. Bhang-

S ka pop

Eight Bhok’kara _ |Reya. Re wang.

a Reka pop

Nine Cipura S Phang yawang pop

Ten Lipura 7 Kipu. Kip. Dhe-

, uk pang. Dhe-

a ukka pop

Twenty 2 |Caret

Thirty : es es ee ee

Forty se ee ee ee

Fifty oe ee =a oa

Hundred te rs x ne

Of Mi. Mo, pronoun.|No sign, genitive/Caret. O, pronoun) Mi, pronoun

Mo’, noun first of 2 nouns

To, Dat. & Conj.§ /Caret Caret Lagi ae

From, cut of Daka. Dano Daugka Gua Am

Towards A Yatni. Yatnung. adhe ee

Yatnung on le-

vel: see

By, inst. wa Me.) A Gna XK

By,closetosion |Chak = side Chakda e abe

* Crude sign. + Eukta = eu-k-ta or ek-go-ta-chha homo; euk-chha mana == one man,

Chha bumans, euk chha duwa-chha one woman, eukchha mechchha chha, one child, eukehha

chha wang for chha after one: pop for animals and things, major and minor, eukta, eukpop thos |

pi == one cap.

+ Bang pang for humans and pap pop for things and beasts is Mikir, Yais added when |

numerals are used alone or substuntively in Bontawa.

§ To, tir taraf, to, near ; cheun, to, as far as, usque ad.

* Chi, D., Mim. Pl.

—1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népdl. 341

Waling. Yakha. Chouras'ya. Kuling’ya. Thulung'gya.

Angkapik Aenga Ikileme Wokhimi Akima, Ikimé

Hayekkapik Ning ga Miayemleme Amnimi Inima

[kwachimi

Kayankapik Ichiga Gono matichaleme|Kwachimi. Na |Hanommikam

Aktai. Akta 1k’ ko Kolo Ubim Kwong. Kong, hu-

mans, Kole, ani-

. mals

Ni. Hasa. Hasak|Kichchi* Nik’si Nih’chi* Nichi. Ni. Nale,

animals

Syum’ ya k Sum‘chi Sam’makha Sup’chi Syam, humans,

Sule, animals

La yak Lichi Phibakha Lichi Bli. Bleule

Gna yak Gna ‘hi AP Gnachi Gno. Gnolo

Tak yak Tuk’chi ba Tuak’chi Ro. Ru. Rule

ss Nachi a Nachi Seren, Ser. Serle

: oe Phang’chi be Rechi Yen. Yet. Yetle

| ee Yecchi mA Bong/chi Ga. Gale

) aie Tbong. 1k’ bong is Uk’bong Kong’dyim.

Kwong dyum

) a Hi bong a Caret Kong usang,

Kwongusang

ee Sim’bong i Kwongus-ang Ko-

dyum

| aa Ligit “i ES Naasang

) oe Gnagip’ 56 Naasang ko dyum

) ee Maknaibong Ae | Sc Gnosang

\0 Y. Ga, pronoun |Caret. Lema, pro- Mi, pronoun Kam

) noun

Caret A oe Caret Caret

bsg Bwang Logno Gna. A. Pika |Dang. Kang

Dang ka An ‘ i Honthyo

AX Gna Kho AX Ka

| ee ee ee se Phar’da

342 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5. ]

English. gas Os Ringchhénbin. | Chhingtdngya. Nachheréng.

By, posses- Sa 5 Da ce af

sion. Bes

With, cum. #° |Pida It? nan Ning Gnang. Mang

SathinHin- © 3

di& Urdi 5

By, at,near 2" ae Chakda ee ae

Without, A ay Madang Madang. Man-/Mangchi Mangdi

sine. Bina & y dang

in Hindi ==.

In so £|Da Da Be. Pe Pi

On, upon 7 ho == top Chokdo. Dungda

This, Conj. Hic hee hoc. Hya-|O’. Oko* ie Una. Angna

kké. Tyo \Okochi, Duald [O76 Bago. Nago :

This, Disj.* Ditto. Okonin, PI.

That, Conj. Dés6. Tyako Hyaoko, Euhyao-|Khdékhé. Mogo. [Khan koG. Yak- |

That, Dis}. ko.t¥ Moko. gna

Khokhot

Now, ab [tab|Wodsara. Wospa |Hangde. Hande.|Bagari Ha

When, jab. Then,'Khonglo. Tespa |[Khdémld6. Khollo.|Uilhe Khontalo

When ? kab, rela-|Délo Démkhé Anam Adem

lative and inter.

To-day Ai. Ale Aya. Ai Payam Ase

To-morrow Sén la. Sen lam |M4ngkolén Warangda Sala

Yesterday Ase Akbomang Asinda Aspa

Here Wada Oda Baye. Bayetni |Ik. Yéksa

There Takhe. Tuku (Euhyana. Eudha-|Yotni Méksa. Miyaya

ko. Médda. Mi-

yanung [nung

Where ? Khoda Khada. Khada-|Hdket Happa, Hapbale

In top (ch6).|Dhala. Dhalo [Euchokda. Uténbe Itwa ta. Itd ta

Above Madbani i far

Udhaai —

Euchongda. Eu-

[Below (Yu) khukda

In bottom (Khu)/Hila. Hwilo Mtptni. Uyuni |Moba U yuyu

Between Mra. Maru Limda. Radoa. |Urhabe Umlam

[ya. Huviya

Without, outside |Bang ya Ubungya. Udung-| Bahari Pakha

Within, inside Kung ya Ukonghud’ya. U-|Ukambe. Khim’-|Khimgwa. Khim-!

kOng ya. Kong-| bayu go :

da.§ Euhun’ya

Far Mokha. Mise.|Mangsa. Mang-|Mangnwa. Mang-/Chhiburu

Mose khiyada. Mang] no

Near Gnan’. Gnan’ ge.|Nek-ta. Nekkhi-|Tanghe. Tangne |Caret

Nen ge da. Neék

Little Pichhe Chi chi Mih’mo ‘Chichha

* Genders.

+ Hyako = Eu yako.

O’ M6, conj. Oko Moko, disj. all genders.

{ Khokho, not present person, sort of relative.

§ Da the midst, kong, the within, subs. hud, a hole.

1857. | of the broken Tribes of Népdl. 343

Waling. Viakha. Chouras’ya. Kuling'ya. Thulung'gya.

es ee ee es Da

Pi. Eda. Inan |Nung Bilo Gampi. Lo Nung

Mochhi Ménniing. Met-|Sokho Mandi Manthi

ning

Inan. Da. Ida \Be. Songbe Lo Pa. Pi. Gopa. Pi-/Na. Da. Di. De-

ta. Themta uda

O' gna. O’k6.|Khena. Na, Na- Ingkéng. Inkopi W6. Woram

Ipigna. ma, Ame Wochi. DI.

Wo mim. Pi.

Khogna. Khdko./Yéna. Yénama. Mangkong. Na-|My6. Myéram,

Haya ya Ime kong. Nakopi ; Hanam

[kemmo [ Hogna

Isgharing Akku Bokkémse. Bo-|Wadolo. Wolld jA tha

Hilong Ikhodning Ingyéld Khodolo Mehémlo

Dem’‘kha. Khinam|Hétning. Heh’-|Aseld Hadolo. Hadé-|Ham syika

; ning miye

Ailo. Ayo [kolen|Hoh’yen Tianso Yése Anep

Hamaye. Mang-|WaAng‘di Dis’na Désa ah’ Dika

Ase. Akomang |Achhén Saiso Is’pa Basta

Tyak. Wada. Waya|Khé. Nakhé Alo. Amna. Alvi/Yéksa. Ingkwapi|Ano. Asi. Asinda

Muyak. Modo.JY6na. Y6okhy4 |Bhanala. Bhdna,|Méksa. Nakwdpa./Hano. Hanopna,

Moya Gnona Naya

Khini. Khdda. |Héh’na. HénnéhélThalo Hapise. Hakwade/Bate. Bante

Ita. Adhdni. An-|T6 Bhata. Imtéla |Umdtptu. Mé-|Deuda

gyani twaka. Metyoka

[ka ah

Ita. Akhikyu. |Mé Bhaya. Bhayola Umdhdékpu, Nak-|Goyu

Umrape. Aradha.|Ilim Khachi. Khachilo| Umrapi Théte

Adhung’ya [Gota [ Hachhdépa

Hibu. Bungkhaya|Caret Bhana. Twala, Hochho. — Potél.|Chépnda

Khim‘ko, Akun. |Caret Kudukwaya. Ko-|Gdpa Gouna. Ugwa ana

| ya ya

‘Mang’khaya Mangdina Bhana Chhigri Chhyubat

Mamikgna, Neh’-'Ning’dang Amna Nén’‘kha Gnépa

_. yang

Achichi, Achi Misyaha Chig’ndpu 'Chichha. Gfchha|Kichwe

344 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages [No. 5. |

English. bas Cham Ringchhénbiny. | Chhingtdngya. Nachheréng.

Much Kébha Bad dho Dhéra. Badhe {Antkhdépa

[nang*

Up, Down, adv. Dhutnang. Yut-

How much? Dim no Dém ye Asuk Dél

As, rel. Jaisa H. |Daskwa. Dasokwa| Khainsa Hokhyakkha Dakht6é

So, corr. Taisa H.|Kyaskwa. Kyaso- Khdinsa Hin’gkhyakkha |Khangtokgna

kwa

Thus, pos. Aisa H. Tyaskwa ngo Wdinsa [inse| Bakhyakkha Antok gna

How, Kaisa H. |Daskwa. Dasékwa|Khainsaki. Kha-}H6khyakkha Dakhté

Why? Dema Déna. Dene Méchchha Uma

Yes Ou. Ai Ang gna Nerves Lé. Ho

No, negative Ai na Ma ang [infixt)Maha Ma. Maa

Not, privitive Y, suffix and infix. Eu, prefix,and Nin,|I, infix I s-a, infix

Not, prohibitive Mi, Mai. Da |Man Ma. Tha N6

Also, And Caret. Pini. Piti.|Caret. Ning. Yé. Nang. YAng}Sa. L6é

Gno Chhang

Or Wo Hé Yang Lé

Which | rel. Tyds6 Sang Hokkogo As

Who jon

Which ] corr. Tyakwa. Chi Khoégna Hoén Khan

Who ton

Which ? kon, chhu|S6 Khawa Sang-yé |Hokkogo Asnale

What? kya, chhu |Daké Diyé Thém Ulé

Who? kon, su Sa Sang Hokkogo. Salo |As

Any thing, gugu|/Dé-i. Dyeu. Nyt Dichhang Them- yang Usa

kucch [kdi

Any body, guhma|Isama. Soi SAngchhang Salo’-yang Asa

Eat Cho Cho. D. chacheu.|Ché-ha. Ché-a |Cha-u

Chachi Pl. cha-

num

Drink Disnd. Dignu |Dagnd, Dugna-|/Thi-wa. Thi-a |Ddango

chu, D. Dugna-

num, P

S| Dual Im’sa. Imsana Im’sa. Imsachi,|Ip’ sa Tmsa

pied { Plural D. Imsanin, PI.

Wake Pikalénda.Khrup-|Pawalonta, —_D1.| Pogak Poka

sa chi. Pl. nin

Laugh Riya. Rya ya. Ysa, (so shit|Réta Rhésa

ese Piss chesa)

chi, D. nin, P.

Weep Khapa Kh4é-wa, chi—nin|Ha-ba Khapa :

Be silent Maichépda. Chy6d-| Waiwaiya-gna. Wayeb Wahe

ma Manchehada,chi i

—nin if

Speak Chéwa. Pul’sa |Chéwa. Khang-|Ché-wa Nina

mélta,{ chi—nin

Come Bana Bana, chi—nin |Thaba Tawa i

Go Ata. Pung’sa Khara, chi—nin |Kha-da Khata |

* Up, Udhatnang above Uyatnang one side laterally, on all 4 sides, on level. Down, [

Uyutnang, below, from own place, as water flows. |

+ To verb and noun ; omko, white, eu, om, ninko, not white. |

+ Khangmettu = show. |

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népdl. 345

Wialing. Yakha. Chourdsya. Kuling’ya. Thulung'gya.

Dhérang. Badhe |Pyag ha Yétikhdlse Waddétwa. Wa-/Dhékéng

| detto

[ko

Tem. Dem Ingkhég ha Askwalo Déiye. Déi Hala. Hayu. Ham-

Hagné kagna Trok ba Asijokcho Datukwa Heka. Hékgnam

| Miugnék Ikhék ha Imsimégna Khintikwa Mehomka. Mibdép-

| [mé} ma. O’hépma

| Magnek Naktog ha. Na |Amsi mé Wantwa, Wadém-|Ohom [Hé

Hagnékagna Nahok Asi chokcho Udaim. Daim |Hésaka. Heka

Deba na Irdk h4. Irédk |A se. Ama Dai. Datakwa Hagna. Hamta

Hanan. O’. A Ikhi Time Yé Misi. Bu

Main. Maéang’ |Manna. Iminna |Atti Ma [ fix) Méé

T, suffix Ni. Nin, infix /|A, prefix Y, infix. Ma, pre-|/Ma, prefix

Mayé. Mai An, prefix A. N6 Na Mé

~Chha Yo. Ang Yé So Nung. Bo

‘He E Ké Yo Dé

Khai Isa Thamé A sa Uhém

| Khdégna Ikhi Emé Kho Myo

Khaa I sé Thamé. Achaia |As. Asdatukwa |Syt

~Tikwa fr. E A ma Uso. Ui Ham

Dei Hétnama. Hét najA cha Asé Sya. Uhém

‘Ti ikebha Icha Ama yé Uso Hambwa

A sakchha TsAcha A cht yé Aso. As Syubwa

Cho Cho Jakata Cho Pé

Digno Ugni Takata Daing’gnu Dugna

‘Im’ sa Ip’sa Glomta Im’sa Awm’sa

Thing’ ta Chéng’ da Bukata. Saista |Poka Baka

Tya Yuttuchaya Renda résta Gésa Risa

Kha wa Haba Khrapta Khapa Khrapda

Wayep Swak waya Liha Wait waya Liba

Chéwa Chékta Baksta Néna Jésa

Bana Xba Pikaia ; |Bana Bika

Khara Khya Levasta Khata \Dak’sa

346

Neen eee ee EES na enn i

Rodony. or Cham- |

English.

Stand up

Sit down

Move, Walk

Run

*Give 140 oe

*Take

Strike

Kill, dyu? zyu?

Bring

Take away

Lift up, raise

Put down

Hear

Understand

Tell, relate

Goodt

Bad

Cold

Hot

Raw

Ripe

Sweet

Sour

Bitter

Handsome

Ugly

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

ling.

Pikalénda. Ré ta|/Pawalénta, chi—|Yéba

Riingchhénbung.

nin

Yugna. Higna |Ydyna, chi—nin

Pong sa. Lamtya)Lam dama. Biya-

chi—nin

Wona Lwaya. Loya,

chi—nin

Ydong. Ydu Puiang. Chang, D.

Nang, P. Pa,

chi—nin

Chai zya. Chai dytMo u.

Setya

Baizyu. Baidyu

from me|Né. Pakji. PudyuyfNé. Battu. Chu-

from any

num [Moa num

Moa chu,

Séru. Sera chu.

Sera num [—nin

Battuki bana, chi

Pugzyu. Pagdyu,|Kbattuki khara,

take and go

Pauku. Sandyu

Gnasyu

Yénya

take and go, chi

—nin

Thénta. Thenta-

chu. Thenta num

Yung su. Sa chu,

D. Sa num, P.

Yénu. E’nu, Ena-

chu. Ena num

Kamm. Midi dyu|Mittu, chu. num

Rag’na

Nyo. Krégnet

Yse. Yseko

Chiso

Yen mettu. Khang-

misa? Khang-

mettu

Chhingtdngya.

Yuba

Phana

Ping’da

Paang. Pa

Khétta

Téna

Séra

Thap ta

Khattu khara,

Khattu lonta.

take get up

Khaira. Thedak

Yung’ su

Khém sa

Pitta

Chépta

§Nawo. Nuwochi, Nano

D. Manuwo, P.

Euwo. Antninko.

Euko. Euttko

Kéngko. Keng-

mangwa

Kurek’wa. Kiareko|Kako. Ku mangwa

Mo. Ummo

Womang. U mang

Tupsako. Mattako/Tumawo

[Wa

[D. Ma lem, P

It’no

Rem no

Ki no

U mang

Uthtbai

Lam’chho. Walye,|Lémko. Lem chi,|Lém’ no

Sure

Khi ke

Khan nya.

nya

Khaise, to look at/Khan euttko,

bad

* Gender and number.

+ D. Ne khanachi,

{ Hma gu, D. suffix, P. of

nu nu chi, ma nu, sub.

§ Gen. signs stick to numeral can’t att

Sang-|Khang niwo,

Sian chakwa

Kha kwa,

look at good

look at bad.

Khangeuwo

P, Ne khananin, Bontawa.

Adj. chha hma ohing hma mana, N. eukchha nuwo mana,

Santa

Khako] Khak’ no

to] Uchuntino

to|Uchih’ no. Uchu-|Khdéisada, to look |

i no

ach to Adj. nuwa mana euk chha nuwa chupi euk pop, |

chha pop, 1, wang pop, 2, wang ka pop, 3, yu longs, bop rounds.

[No. 5. |

Nachheréng.

Répa

Tytiwa

Lamdima

Bal’sa

Pi a wa. Piyo

*Né. Beh yi

Yop’st

Situ

Béh’ yu

Khé yu

Théttu

Yak’ su

Yéna

Chi yu

Pau

Nada.

kit

Is’da

Nat.

Chhik’ da

Sémi wa

Mape

Da wak

Lém da

Chocharpa

Khik’ da |

Khan nada, to look |

at good

at bad

Be |

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népdl. 347

Waling Vakha. Chouras’ya. Kulingy’a. Thulung’gya.

Yé wa Paga Yamsta Thoérépa Yép’da

Yigna Yugna Baksta Tuwa Gainsa

Biya Lama Halta Lamdima Lamdiya

Léra Luk’ta Prékata Bilsa Wanda

Piang. Pa Kapydng. Piang |Gaka. Gékta Piya. Piya Gwa ang. Gwaka

Né, Battu Kwé. Aktu. Kettu/Né. Paista Né. Khada. Khayu)Né. Briya

Mé6-u Mok’tu Tapta Kéru Yalsa

Se’ru Chénu. Sisu Syatta Sétu. Khodksyu /|Séda

Battu Ap’tu Phitta Bah’ yu Phida

Khattu Khéttu, Yang-\ Létta Khayu Dau da

khéttu

The’ntu Kha. Théndu |Rétta Poka Phoka. Kwaksa

Yang’ su Yuk’su Chépta Yaksu Jila

Yénu Khép’su ‘fndkata Yénu Thydsa

Mittu Mittu. Mettu? |Bimsta Min’nu Mim’da

Khouj su Yok’méttu Sokata Pda Sing’da

Na. Khupuni.)Niha Daché Nod. Noi. Noyu Nydpa

Amwa. I |

Notidhdi. Aitpa |N& nin ha Adiché Man‘néi. Mannd Minydpa

Waché yang Chiha Chisé Chhike. Chia |Chhakpa

Kayang Ka ha Tato Hoke Glydglém

Umpawa. Aa-|Nusamha. Inggrik Krabo Mamtumkhapa.. |Uchakhli

mang, Mamdtpa. Mdpé

Stim’sa. Tup’sa.|Ustha. Tapsdha|Thichd Tumkbapa. Dupa/Thik’ta. Thékta

Bhang’sa,

Lém. Lemya Limha Jijilichd Léma Jijin

Santa Sua, Stha Jarchd Jujur Jyarpa

Khak Khika. Khigha |Khacho Khike KKhépa

Khang’ ni Ichchtntna Rancho Gnali nupa Jyépa

Khan i Ichchignana Aranché Gnali ipa Mijyopa

[No. 5.

348 Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages

English. ioe + One Ringchhénbiing. | Chhingtdngya.

Straight* Sdjho Sdjhot Chang no

Crooked Bang go. Koko-|Yék tu.t Uku-|Byangkruk

dy pa dak dak

Black Makchima Mak chakma Makkachikma

White Payon ma. Um-|Omko. Wom-|Bathrama

payonyon. yang. Wopi-

yangma

Red Hipakima Halala mang. Ha-)Halachékma

la chakma

Green Hariyo Hariyo Chak’ la

Long Kile Aki bang. Amyet-|Keméh’ no

pang. Metta,

Short Inang kile. Pé-|Adang-pang. Baun no

kile Dang-ta

Tall Kile. Run‘de. Kiyang Kong-|Kéno

Short \ man Inang kile. Pa kile| yang. Kwangta|Unno

Simta. Simyang

Small Inangko Uchak pang Mikha

Great Ko. Mahipma|Utok pang. Utwa-|Thékha

Mahippa pang

Spherical, Round |Baplingma Boptitiwo. Bopi-|Kalabok’bo

riri. Hitriri

Circular, Square |Plangpachima La 4kaina, 4 corner|Charaupatya

Flat, depressed,|Phiémpa Phemdag wa. Pheb-|Phémpédépma

compressed da’ wa. Pheb-

dapma

Level, as a plain |!'ém ma Asémtontu. A-|Usémténdokto

Unlevel, uneven temma

Fat Lété {Léyangko. Tok-|Usamtand

pang. Chha-

yangko. Chhuwo

Thin Palété. Simamyd] Yomyangko. Rop-|Rénug si

yangko

Weariness Ho sa Hottang U hottang

Thirst Waima Wait ma, Wamit-|Waik ma

Hunger Saka S44, Sang sa walSangsawa

* Gender and number and crude.

+ After noun or before.

¢~ Utokpang or tokpang, former.

Néachheréng,.

Séjhé

Bang-go

Mokchibpa

Umlok’pa

Halalapa

Hariyo

Baipa. Répa

Yétebaipa. Chi- |

chhabaipa

Bhai pa. Repa |

Yétérépa. Yete- |

bhaipa

Amsikholché .

Um dheppa. Yé- |

tikholchd |

Umkoldu. Papil- |

Phéphé ya

Phrémphrem ya

Uimtélma

Umdhép pa Lidda |

Ram da

Haya

Wami ma

Saka 4

1857.] of the broken Tribes of Népél. 349

Waling. Yakha. Chouras'ya. Kuling’ya. Thulungg'ya.

Séjho Sdjho. Sojho Twaipa Jongpa

_ Banggo Yégékna, Yek-/Ulgimcho Mantwaipa Mijon’gpa

| yang

| Makchima. Mak-|Makhrina Khichyaémo Gagripa Kekéma

| chakchak

- Bothrama, Wom-/Phina Buibjéma Wouldpa Babam

pichichi

| Harchhdkma, Ha-/Phéna Lakachima Halaldpa Laldm

| lachakchak

Chak’la Phina Sisijokcho. Sisi-/Gigipa Gigim

) Paik

joma

| Badhemet. Rhinbo|Kéna Hik’bo. Yotihicho|Wadbhdipa Dhyiipa

| Achimét Laklak na Ahikbé. Amsihi-|Chibhai ipa Dokhéndhydpa

cho

-Kiyang Kéna Rob6. Rocho. {Wadréppa Yépa

Daiyéug Laklikna Aréché. Aro bo |Chireppa Doékhén-yé pa

Achékpa Mih’ na Yokka Chisma Kichem

Atok’pa Makna Khol bo Dhéppa Dokpu

| PP

Kalabékbok Kakliktikara. Pik-/Khitiriri. Dolo Jamjimpa. Pél-|Pipilma

pukna pulpa

bas khaktang = |Lichina yasiik Charkuné Lib khéngla Khikér-ma

Phim pichichi Phékphékna Plém plim mé Phemphémpa Plém plem ma

Témtéi Idém ma. Koyogna Tél ma Dhép dé

Ichitpo. Badhépo|Yémnuiba Khél bé Léipa Sénipa

~‘Léd yang

| f e 2? ® 7 , 2 ° va La

jong yang. Achit-|Hachigékna Yokka Gamsipa Jerpa

J hottang Yaksyangné Bal mé Giims Gritim da

‘ aik ma Waitmang Dak khé Wamma Koda

aang sa wa Sak Krémk\d Saka Krtiim

oe AK KremktsSKRA

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kiranti Language. [No. 5.

350

eu-Sueg s2IN co] 18911 (ea-SUBS ea\-Suyg emis) =» BSDTT| PULY-OTeYNg

nqnyosue'y esed | eMyy e-stem ;

amyorq - ser] ofyqooq pls uvy equoedyeny edueypeA, jea-ey “eyoeq

eqyoeyyo ALIN gmyo-omgol-seyT ‘mep-iq) BuyoeqyouoeM PAN “PAUP” Ad eyyoeq-max| esededdeyje|-9q vsiva By hog

BM-TU-BS nanqgwny Bg ni-d BM-¥-NY

eM-108 ojos} OT OS “BTS ‘dna-ng wan 7-04-89 ‘nadnyeg§ BA- NY) Ysa emoyeis| os iy 9sTyjusoy aes ‘au0g

qRoy “ALAY ee ve ede oy wey yueyd weg) BIBMO A |AO OIA papod

v5 ang mByxOT|ON “Bdqoyvg woyyed ys-sung e8- und e3- und esunqgieqd vod,

eyq ed, v1 yeq edgQ yeyd eduy| yeq edniduy

yed vyquin, PLIUL “OAL teyq req] (ayes) eyong| —-yeydo eduy seq edu) od-ody v0 g

tH tH TH TH|-PH “e4-n19H Ne beep | 10H poold

eUl eq qetqy eJoy eum, = ie | BUNA)

“Oy BULL)! -9Iq yy weU) mekty nu) ese-ey EMU AjeMMMOOY eU,WO) NqPAP voy; Ba. yNG BU) BqI[qy OULV oud

BM-suoyyy ndyes eMON LU | S BUNAUU Ls) 10

emulyy| odjeg we) mekuyy nw |ea-uoOYyyo eurm/) BM-SUOYO BUA WO BUT MON |VM-SUOG VU) eq AIYO OW. VY) “opemay PG

em-suoyyo ndyes vaou ed wy ednidwy) 10

eyquy| odjeg ‘ded deddg nd plea-upygo edu pjem-,suoqyo eLO edu VMON| Basugg edt) Bq qiqo od vy ayeu pag

Jea-suoyyo od-]xg od-[vg Ba-udyyD wa SUOqYD eMON BM-SUOS eq. TINO pay: pug

T]suszieyd [[etas Oya IY

nqdeg oydeg] -yeg “eyd, yes nydeq| asiey weed ooqmegd

sugqdd nyqdoqd Byy-suoqyy Bumeyoryy xB UB ONS Zora wl- e49 Ao]iwg

OM Ol Ud 999N

9d. QMJSS/ON ‘R-naYN TQ98 BMyLyeqd eM) «= PRIYA “9d ats I MOLLY

aqqgd “AMO JBy yg sy 40 ANY yf WH “MH OH AOA MIA "HWA Lae, WAY

nq | noj-edmeyg yo1oyy suo, edaayysue x

Suph-s14) pmyvip| ndor-vyiyg) meqduyyyo edayy eA) BDI -.RA] —-AYAPYA-Buog/owmYo wdzH juy

deuvdiq9 VZSUe]

euuoyqyy edny Sunq) edny-Suny] weuediy) IBS-3uv yl efnqeisueyy| vlog eres Suey 1UBIBSOx) Wueiewy

n- ny em-BaMn yy yeyd

wun yy “Ne Suny ys’ N- OH) Ne “yU- wT edeanyy BUI WF) “BAST ¥q “BAH mp AY

“pUbunee buyyyy “ung bupd buys “VIP ‘Guoyyorqupy | “bugsvoyoT | phbbuyre | ‘ysy bug

See te ae ee ee ee a ee Se ae

‘0 'O'€ “bs

‘sospaoy ‘Hg fg ‘abunbun; aajupsry ay) f0 sp09]m1p [vsanas aYF fo havjnqvoog aarznundwuog ayz fo worjzonurjzuo

aol

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kiranti Language.

1857]

vkeyeuipy ‘urjid ur sparjered ssojpua sey xyoid 4 oy,

"snijst snipy ‘s,au0 Aue ‘sity vy eB

‘kyy 84°

1 ‘fur ey ew “us ror ey ‘oq em wy, ‘priya = vy

*U1OY pUe 9U0g Vas ‘USIS DI19UaT BYIag Ig Bg §

*g[ BU [od —= 1WeT

‘eyong

*Sunivhsy pure

“Su iewsSueg pue ryejegq ‘Suor1oyory 949 pur y Suryeq on} = Ayasioaid st xyjus y pure

2 JOO1 BS 9} SLY pAlG == Y-098S-3 OSOUIYD *]MOJ OLSATOP s[qenTeAUl oY} ‘spsiqg JO pAlq 9) 0} pausisse A]UOWWIOD MOU SI OUOTe pasn UIYM W419} Bt}

var- Bq qu

yd youu)

ayoeqqg

Buu

“usu Bou)

Bul

“uy BYqUIA

pULUy IA

gideyqovmuyy

~eyyou quire

Une Va Nel

qideqyo wm

qid eyquiy

sgaeounerath

-suos evuwmsy

-duos vyquiy

nyd-nd

depyoy dnjyoy

wy) tq ‘whip

ofyooky)

aha, Buu dq

weAu

our tq waytn /)

vag defd

eu 11g ded y|-q ‘unm ndq

ODL ORIN, “YUM

deXdno

esayqon |-Ayonodieiiy

~tvwmnodivy| numnyonodrg jyqyo-yord yor)

wefunokyo

esayo

-nodiesxy

ede

¢ @

id vm 9 |eu.O

Byma aqyo-eqyD

6 . ¢

Sd ‘Td 34°

TUN], VU) BuUueU eM) BIIUIM BOW O|emnuNnmMO-eMMT]- Ap

varoem edo

vunlUL HY

edu

“ Uld

Byyo-eg

pare af

voruim ed QO) vumunwo-edwy

YUL-1U Jay

eyyord

~ qld vorw,C

-ndednodiey| ndnnyonodig leyyo-yord edu |eqyoud- qd ed O|eyyor-j1do vd wy

oAyon-odrekx)

wspqonuyyley

nyonodig

leqqodioyaniiqudy ‘eug

sou we

sou mvmy)|-AuQ ‘nu

89 UU

som dedq|deddg ‘ndp

Bqyo-qorg

yo 1g

aid edu

eyqoud= yig

yor

md edo

ISPU BUI )| BM-Sues BUIUT,C

isgu edu

va-dues vd O

"UIlBIS 998

ed Ul BAK vm ed

@M- vduy/-nidugq ‘ede

Uid-o-ewuy | ad eunimwg

id eee as ald

ener

ryqovqtD (‘Ia 19)

SUE Sed eT OMeal

BI) “et no

‘eumnidu yy

vu nod,

ednidw

BUNUN JA) eur nosjy

eseul 1g

eyyor jesedid eu

-yido ew, my Bun ww

esed ig

esedid edu

ednid u 4

BqYor Nd esudag

sueply 13 19

qid ed wy id ednidwq

Aido edu]

BM-SuBS BVUUWT

eu-Sues edu

id dur)

"g BoINIUUT A

peas? Sen

‘g ednidug

putes edury|.

‘pig —= pue ‘ed ]aA eq Jad Ba Jo SawAuoUs AT[ROI 9.18 (149 pue Suoyo ‘uoyo ‘suos aduayM) BYO [PA BS pee ‘nodn osaulyg = oN +

‘uSis ollaues BYO [aA UF y

BM LIOG

BQBM-110G

eq ody 4909

suiq owy MOD

BIVIMILIW Ku 83 eA

weYydI Vg sit] e1-¥

eyorqog |teinjd yeng

eaves) «|| pury-PITD

BU IIg OMW a[RULI} 4VO

vur,liq ody a[RuU 4eD

er | ati Sb

1Ue4

Sug ‘1a

-eyvome Surg) seule; j[eD

BM By

suiq ‘ea

-ejyode ‘surg Q]VU J[RO

ByyiuEyes

“ulg “eyesulg pury-J1eD

¥I AOT

sug

Suiq ody Ing

gsoW OW V|a[eUmajao[eyNg

tal

gsqul kad aces aojepng

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

dup, “eg dedy,

Sunjedn ydey

SN Ystin

epayq But) |eOIpIp wayUT/)

ipey yu)

ipey ¥qquy A

Ipeq wears)

ipey dedy

Ine 1pey

sury, “suiuy) pei

sequyed Ged

BUN BAA

yeyden oyoaN

“My ByqmQ) go.qy ded q

BU -1N yy q214M

0ju9[U0 -)

yojugiur)

yous] “oyuary joku

ByyoIo TN!) 94qo-Bauls]a TA]

¥BM- BH) odyesen

jaa els

‘ypubung | ‘buypyy

ndq

defdy -deddgq ed wg

Busy DI} equuy

TSA SPIN) PN IPL

eueq nyo

usdoyd nuq |-deNn ewaq

-tayq wekuy| -nyodeu eww py

ip] aeq

week ‘nu

ded ‘ndq

Tejuog emWUy

Tejtog eda

eq] | 3" uel-tog

WL Bw Id

nyy-ug “Ad Byrd

vue

oyooN eqeN

gatyy | es-og edwgq

dekdy endy| ese-ey edu

“I-1US “O91UM] P50 “ese-E Hy

nq]

NON ‘okay edgar edgy

wanyd TIA eyyoeuiyy

ofyooqseTT] §— Byyoeyoruntyy

yeseg ‘ode BMV

‘Ung ‘bundbung

1 iN

ed wq ‘ed wy

do vd ‘eduy) ed suQ ‘eg

Tayovuy yeqden guy “yysyoruy

qo]

‘d pue -q

UA “NW GHA UNAM YA CIA

vpoyq Bum

Bpeqq emmy; epeqq 9 emmy eydnidury)

ey Bot)

19381] Buu 13384 O emul] Bun.

yey edn 9e4 oO edwy|-my vedniday

1°H eH inaeq ed) yey

+UIpe AA TIMI “VIG T “9A “TIP: U9 MA

voreyy qeg/uiyy-B AA] weqy|uip| By y-va

By .qeg) -suezsuvquey y Buy eg

eqen eq] O10N) BqeN “AeqQeN

BA ny

ednidug

eunyooy ed,O nyooy vdwyl = em ny edu

BUNYIOY nyooy va OE

&99977|(xYoud 1) equiai]) ‘uaTy ‘eyuaT

vsed puumuu

-usyy “esed wn

“TTY = “pyyo

BYO-BqyoRulyy| Byyo-evyyoysayy| uso ‘esed Suy|

BM- 04)

BM CLY Ba WU BA-VIY

“VIDE ‘BuoyyaiquoTy | “buo.oyoT

Ba on

sty od-e ‘£uy .

od-t (Sumo

ed-e) ‘od-y

Og wep pue

peg od of, Joey

aD eovd

d &p qo

ars OES

WA “HOTT oy

epauq ng oA

vy-omy) =F queydaygy

178y Ody ajew jueydalq

eH puLyp-jueydar gy

[MOJ Ip-Bq Iq) aC |

aga] ideyyy aay @ Squared

ONT ON ‘YALA

noku-euivs aqo[S] Iv

Buoy ody) = aye Sog

Buon yy PULy-soq

9,WeN Avg

“Tus

eyoeqaq eyo jAct rue, eA

“WIP, ‘Tue y, layyourey

eqyBS-v4 MOTD

vhbuyog ‘ys hug

aA)

99)

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

fe!

"} YJOS p se ‘xaos gy + wd-eS-vyz, Sed-v5

“ed-ey, = 1-3-2) “11-28 “T1-ey, ‘uru ‘1ayyey 10} (qooy pue opog Ul 1-8) nSnjoy, Ul -p-u-ey, pue vyoder ut 1-3-3 OAR OM JOO! INT

Ot Wody os ysnf ‘asouing Ul Y-noX pur ssauiyy ur u-ndé ‘uew 10j 3oo1 nA ayy wos Seyoday pue pimeyz, ut oyim Jo Jaqjou ev ‘nk-Vy yaa nf-ey

"nA-8 Woy 9AlqRUsage sj1 Si se eyodary aind st 1ayjou1 = uleSe ni vy asoymM [ime JO 1oyjej = ‘u-ed-e3 ey, pur visseyy jo aut-ey ad-ey =

out-ey ‘od-ey stui0y snowuouds ay} sey uieSe yorqa sunaedry Jo ou-om ‘od-om = A[qesysuowap oav san$u0y 98a} JO vut-G ‘ed-G¢ Joa Seu-q

‘ed-qQ snyy ‘uoyouny pur UISI10 03 se 30g ‘uorsanb ut saporsed.ayy Jo ssauauo [BIyUasse ot) 4SULESe ayeIIIIM JOU Op sasn JeIoads asa) qeuyy

S19 MASTS UMOJS aq [[I4 J] ‘OMY 99 OLY = osuas aaljtqaed vB Use) oALY ‘pazi[eiaues slay masa ‘| pue vy oI) KISseyYy UT OF *9[91}Ae 1V9Y8 B

OUUL Paezi[e.iauas useq OU sey ‘asuas [RUOT}Y[AI JO 4.4108 & Sulavy M pue ‘punoy fypaey ove ‘auaymasja UOWWUOD Os ‘saxya.d v3 pue ey 94) sensu0y

Ue 943 UT “sunsesyy ul uowwmoo ssaq Ayoo1vos pur Bisse y Ul ojqeiedasul ysomye oie ey pue ey sjusteammba sq1 pue ‘xyoid siyy, ‘aatjom

pue Joyiey == vul-~) ‘ed-q ur se ‘xyoad arjnonae Aavuipao ay 4nq ‘ames ayy you st xyoud a) 14 eya Yemsung pure ing up ‘yarpy

Ww pue pig 38 SoyON dog *]MOJ 10J psOM OY} WO1 paallop USIS d11ouss AreUIO\sNO 943 SI ITBjeEq pue SUOIOYOT JO BM JOA BM YG eg

*sansuoj NO YIM ATaAIQUa sa0.18e 9SOUlYD sjosdsar asayy

Te Uy ‘euay eyyo nueyy ‘10 ‘nuew euy eynO Aes om Hema ur se Ajestoaid uew e = oy yeh unk go ‘unk oy yi og ‘Sundyy ueyg aousym

‘omuu ssdoid e ‘Sundy_ ‘uiequnow — beUS SUL “TetomNu 94} YI papus[q eq 10 oUOTe purys 41 JoyjaYyM si1] pue ‘pexyyns 10 paxyaid aq

ABU USIS o119Uag oy) joey UL puke Sjuesvoyd — rey-uryg jo yey) UI se eOURISUL SIY} Ul WSIS OLlauas Be YONUE sv yor] UI aq ley Ysnoyy ‘ased jo yarw

oY} SNUIME 4sIY Sa0S oaljiuss 943 ‘83a s |Moy ano ex] punodwod wv se payvaiy Suleq ‘spi0m om} 94} 194 Je} VAJOSqO puew : UN[-iey [OA UB-1ey

soueym ‘83a Joy saweu oyioads ayy 04 Poppe ST [MOJ — Tey 19UURTA OHI] UT “ourA ¥ ‘nys reynog pure ‘aldepy e& ‘nys Sung sousym (xyoid arqnop

84} Ssof ‘pioM 1mMq amo) 9a13 = NYS Os[e O§ “quesvoyd v ‘1ey-ueYg aouaya ‘[M0j—=1ey OsTe og “MOI —= yOoS}-ve puke pAlq == yoas sny yz,

‘oueu Suedsueg ay} yy Teorquapt st (ee) oweu oyloeds ay) a9A0010 Ula1aqA “osoulyD Ul se Ayostoaid 41 sapavead moso soy auieu oyieds any

Pue Spilq ][@ 10J USS Sse[o 944 SI Og JOA 7d PA BAN “J9TNIA PxOm 04} 3B aJ0U Baq ‘USIS d119U08 943 Jo a[dwes JoyJOUR say BaRYy 9A

eo, ~SCGRLA SES See S Se e >" e eee

Ing Ipusw—nyiIy ayeul jo ‘usis

ieSeyyg népory] -ueyQ "40.9 Bies- ,uByyO eqiyarya| (cats | TpuUg TV ase] Bq) equal Bled Su0g pury jeoH

vu ey ¢ nky -sed w1e0f ew)

Byouyyy) aa nhq¢ ‘ee vip eueqd euyyO; eng vemvyg) = efng ‘eq Bue ulead

nyo Turyy

“TIN 9-SI AT eqyo BSR. | vyoeqaquyo

Bayoeyooyy) afyouasyo yy ‘oAWoqsaIN) vayoRyqormryy “PU ORBY YOU) Bqyovyyoyoo yy] vsedeurmmuuipy “SUL “1WEL mp

*du09

calc emg ems

BMISUIS)|seg ‘ses-woqg sesdog Iseyg ISBYOWO) eSI Sug ‘es zi-rYQ ‘Iseqo SUG IyoIs ying

vuyoyd suey jsyey— marq

suvry TAs} = nx ‘qua vuvyd tery) = euyoyd yey Suyjecme J, Sa] = Suey) wq-10"0y 3004

PM Ud Y idieg Oe eM BM eM UMN ; Pu pUuly THOT

sung eumsung BUN va-tng ea-Sung ‘Sung sunyg sung sung JMOL

vig) as) ¥S| WSIS ‘ued vg 94 ysl

Bug oun our eur Buy yseuy BS BUD ee

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

354

eyyoins

-ueyo vu s)|-uvtn odj0.14)

eqyoies

afyon

ekyon

-ueyo evyquy| -dednod yo15

eqyoreseqyy

yoleg

way

Bpouy

‘Suvjnmyng y

ed “ANd

BM-BULUT ()

Suyymy) ‘Suey,

AUTO

ies

Bsa

-fyonod 4o1y

4o1eQ)

Tu @] OM

By nqung

“nqunpy

jOO1 8} — eq

wey

v10qy

su01ys

wvydy

Suoyp-

leyy mol yd

wesnuesoc(y

“WesIBW LE)

-eygo emu |nAposs mem

1e3

“vyqo eqquiq| wXpors ded

“ypubung

“huyoyy

of£yonod-j019 eyyouses eqnodn eyo = j-equyiwut eu 1weye VI

vsed :

ofqonod-j013 eyqoules eryyodn eqyo |-eqnyyiU “ ed BMLIL-BI

dekdy ndg|-sueqyo edug}-rmeqiyym edp| -rpuamo edmy|-up ‘ednadmg '-esuos (ody) g[eu ply

eyooedweq

eyqo |-yAE “eq feyeluE

ofyonod-yorp| -eaed-Sueqyo] -dn-rreqiqytyy VYOI-1pusyy| esedeqnyiti]| -8j¥-e1esu0g puly-pry

IPs 4g "198 mpd ryo yedyo ryo- yedq TeAs Wag

Ee ae as

“By OCU. beste RAN AY

‘oqunupy|-mMQ = ‘1uIqeyuqd 1u,dep wo equa, ota cas edny eyo-uUe AA puegsn yy

yool e&} — eq

mh, ee eB TST ULB | TH mune gsnoEr

BUINIMU LE) owe

epoysy| edmok ingg ‘¥g ung ‘Ua epoyy|‘edniduwy ‘u,qjody ‘epoyy| puLy-es1oyy

uss Suey, ‘suey Suoly)

O19 ‘“su0ID| Tey ‘aey Lsuejeg|usd eg = *esUIG}usty U10Y S.199q SU-O1-4|9u0q 998 WIOFT

OM ‘Od vad ued Wd) Seq Wed “ka Og| = pul" SoH

nydnay ‘nw Bue BURA “BM CUT VUIR AA

“yg ‘mysyg|-eMMA ‘eMEM|eUIO-BA “vUIBA|-MT ‘eM eM! ‘em dnimE A) BqoUY “vq ded 5

Bun

YO] -W) ‘eM Sur}

“WV ‘suoug ODYAAL Or qARL Suv y|-Suin * Youyyey ehtg pee

yey swe yey suie

aeqy} euvqd-yny) = eat joydnyy| = Yu-emmey)! = emyoyd- yn «u091qN) pueH

(peoy = = | Aa ye}

prey |(peoy—e}) wes Sunjq |Suv}) emynyd jpueyje pesyyo | qe peey jo

WOSH *‘Wnsog|-nuey “eM-ny| Tey ‘vusey)|-suey, “SUNY | ULI ‘eusepisung ‘weyd dey

4ous B1RS BUN

wekwy) ‘nup|-sueyyo vmuy aie VUIUL| IpusMO VUL,W]|‘eqny]A eUU | eIRssUOS OMY] sTRWEZ YvOF)

ede yn

4013 vies | 9X1] USIS ysey] B vednidw yy

dekdg ‘ndp/-sueyyo edug}eq ‘equyyrm ed) rpuguio vd,wy} evqnyyyut edu) ereSSuos ody a]eul yRoyy

"wang bundiuny 10)0G *Huoyyorqun'y *huoLoyoT “phbhbuyvg ‘ysybug

355

—o

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

1857.]

‘elute ‘emsun ‘siq ou-e ‘fq) ou-1 ‘Au vm-e nde jeuog pue edn nhepy — seq

"SIT PUTCUN

code ‘ed v os soyjom Aue oxy Sraqjou Am ep x

"SUSIS O110UaS OATJOadsaI OY} SUIoq JINIjJ — Is pue ‘;MoJ = em S1otJOUR JOM , UTEJULeTd ,, pom ayy pue

aidurs 19yj0ue sqjuasoid ..$%9,, pIOM UJ,

(jequesso pure [euioUu Ajyenba sisyqj0 ysow oyIT) UOWWIOD si YOseds JO SopoOM VIILIART, JO DAsliojoVIBYO [BJUaTUBpUNJ siqy Jey} ‘[lejop ul ‘Umoys

oq Ajjuaserd [IM 3]

OMI, WOM yy

yo1e) wep

eu)

Bor. BINED) “we

BAS yy

euadtp ]

eseu BUlu /) snu We fy)

vseu vyqmy) snu ded

vsen sun

Byorquies elney

peseug o-ng

epoys euUy)) vioys Meus)

Sd BUOATT Bq, Seq

Bull Use

1eyP IA sesdeq

suv] 1eAg

weg ‘noyuy wmeyeyy

veyd-ung)-eg “suedeg

sunud |

yoieg Ayaon -omipig

W-Oy ‘mom y

qa.1eg

-AuiQ, ‘medi

“nymeduny

nT]

snu we kor

snu dedd

NSyxNN “sSQNy

elnry

ny-ng ‘o-ng

epoys wvAu ys)

aq, Se]

sey

TRACT

Puy

“ed = ‘ardeg

oyd] ofyo

“nod iptieqg,

visdeyg|-emeq nyo deyy

our) ek

rnyq nyd-yex

emu) "eI eUl-(—) “BIN

ey ey

uedod emmy) suvqnd emus

tedod eda y sueqnd edq

tedog suvqug

Byo-suery BMvy

Bsidd Bsoud

epoys emmy und

‘euwmad Tnyg emg ‘uak EMO

eddey3

eyyoyoe A, “PM “BdyeqiE A

‘ld

BUTT OU “C 1qd eur

deq-Sunny ve?

wey] suv]

Bussey y BM YO-WIRNT

equeg Wa =“ yvqsuig§

eqyo | eyqodn ipayg

‘eyyqord epoyg

‘Spuv]s! oy} pue vuUlyQ-opuy ‘edelemipy Sjaqiy, Jo sasensury SuLmMoqgysiau ayy [[e YIIM VsauIyD 03

"SUIvAS [[@ JOJ USIS D1taUeS oY} SI SP1OM JO Salias yxou ayy Jo vf [9A BYD ayy SB [[O4\ SB ‘Sol1as SIT} jo [Ruy vs oY], |,

*J001 BYOVS ‘TU-eYO-B[RMS PUL BYO-SU-IM SIOMSUB RS-1E AA ||

"poom as ‘yxARU d119UIs Sug §

oem ul poyeodar eye = ode ‘puly pry 10 Spry Ino = y10q “Way 1mB\e SHU ey YW Tf

*ysoy sos ‘HAvU OLiauad VG 4

‘sfemye jou xujns eu pue pojqnop pe se ‘yoyd pus meq x

Is-B

ns-Sueg

STN “eUr}

eq-Ipe'y

sueqny o vumuay

suvqny o edwy

suvquy

oqmes

vhog

Bpoys-o-vmMmWy

TOUR ad

Wyo oH

Ae TN, SN

rey eT]

suey

nk avy y

yeqdey

BYYoL epayg

BX, nakg| qIno TW

nySuOy ‘“wegnySuoy ‘ay199 UlezUNO IAL

“W) “FL VI] OW 4 OW JOO JA

vT eT uo0oW

suvqnd eum

“BOON.AUO UA) 910M OW VW *y AayUOy

suevqnd ed

ag ‘edniduy siow ody| seu Aayuoyy

Sueqng of100y *a10py| pury-Aayuo yy

ayuvg plreyo|(Opoy) seTltN

whl Blvseg|-Uey) J] [TAL

RUIN ITU) (1uBs ]

‘usvpoys emu} epoyH omy a1eyl

edsueyy

“VM ‘eddeqjeleep] — |lesivay ev UB

‘aapRe ania TAN

"qd wormdex |is eep rnp

‘udex ‘eurAeuq = "NN) = Puly-uePAL

Teyeypy| owom afar EVAUH INE

suv] 1O"M Sa]

Spm

‘950M- WBN CNY a 957

Arq *,eqsuig| eyd ys oydog jvor]

9044

BY BIUT

vsedepayg -vje = Bpayg que

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

356

RMyOY

eg ‘euyoy

“Ul [YC On Maik Favs $PM~ YOURS

qo.1eQ oulpig epteqg ‘oqnyodeny

nyo, den |

may TRY Una wna

way] Ue ad | DOP Tay mae]

vULOF

VU-SUOFT) VM-BYy “OL Ny |-suoFy *emoyHoTy

"yeuseyg Jas-ag| aefg ‘104g BIIg

Biseyy | euaq-nyo

-deu eduq

321¥%)| owipip ded yn \eptiayq deid gq “edaqnyowre xT

x18 VUH Isyvusay] Isvusory Ise] yur

BABY ou vhy BuO

Vd reqq td 1d

eu sun

-Asey = “Sun

vu-dyy, eqqovN Bquyovy/-Aseyy “Sueseyy

sun

vddvy, vyyoudg vqyovd)-Aseg — “Sueseg

Ban UY | ee eet Bae MUL

le ol

“nyyBy yw sy weuas /) wefuesy), edeswpq ‘edag

Suen Suen suen TeN

euney

ewms,u0y Suoy edeg jedeg -eq = ‘Wey-1,y07,

‘ypubung | “hupyy ‘TUN "bupdbuys

soa ee

JJAOD

ysep +.youes

Y4eq == ULys 901) nfs

OURS] Yop BM-,HoqNS OY Sulg|-YOy ‘1s, YOY

epaug vpayg epeya vpeqd

eASUNpP — 1Ue AT Req

wnt wnAlRaes] = “ca “ISAO

wer] oquipyinyd- wey ‘wey wipe]

wesy

eusuoyIg ‘em jjo Suoqiq

eul-, Su0F] VfeM|- SuoyT ‘ea nA) e-oyy—ojny

vig yeseqo BIg 119g

ed epoyg epayq eduy

“epouq ed O/-epayq 9 edmy) epayq edmg) epayq ody

ou 10 poppe

Isel yeu NQ-VBUH iis — .yeu-suvyo| = Tyonuery

‘Sue eweyg yek-eyg wmryg Bing

Md Wd “Ud Id sug

yul-deyy, ONY BT vu,deyy yur-BUy)

SUaIS

XIS _ SOSJOA

-o1 eS-BUl

es-ed = pue

pojvod BS-1eM =pue

-O1 X9S 4001 is tu 8} SBM

ed-deqd |npy “eqnyeg ed deyy|e} os ‘em-eur

Bey eily BM] em-Bio

eyodary dvues | yo eS,unq,

B1198) equog "pqmasy aiedtwod = fuag| — *1qovusndy

Suen SUIN SUIN 3UIN

I iL | ahd

“Bu yNSeY S| ~=em-Su08-Suoy ‘YJ vunsnyg)-1g *jaddnag

“YPIVA "buoyyoiquy'y *Au0Loy oT vhbburypg

UIyS

pury-daays

MOpeyYs Sapeys

Hes

peoy

IOAIY

[neyo 10 s01y

Wey

uleyuel

Appeg

puly-xO

ueWOM PIO

uett DIO

Wy SINN

OUBNT

oynbsnyy

‘ysy bug

357

y of the Kirdnti Languages.

e Vocabular:

Comparat

1857. ]

PMVY

wnpPy

BM-YeqQ

uety

-yoyoury quiy

nd-%,urg

sury

euqrol

xPtiq Ays em

3 NOYYO we NT

yed euro)

vpoys vyquisy

vuuss-dueg

BYOVTOAT

BUSH AN

dvyyond

wen

‘cunde ryoig fuindy Sunyg ‘unde Surg ‘Suryeq wndy

‘O}NIP AOMO_ ySueqt Sunygd ueyd Surpyord poo ipsuryt Surg

jo04 oywjod iy ededs ‘saojejod = vdefg ‘s}004 yy ‘s}IM4J TG ‘89013 Og ‘TS-1RM paas Sj] ‘Od-1¥M = JO

“1034 5nep —= Tul vy ‘uos = emMy} pur BI,

‘Teg IWeMON = salt 31 se [10s st qsaigq §

‘raded raqyo 998 ‘Ysa — es Syxaeq yoy Surs ‘u1ys you $ ysopy ves Susis o11ouas eg 4

*poqeredas 97311] B@ puovag

Aen) PA “Pun UX

ny Diy ieee

I?d 12d OL

? Bin yy

WBAROTIS) Svs nA. yey yy

4 od-wy9

vsye dud nysdoy ‘suvs-dny,

nyeuD| OLsuy ‘ory avy

aosN IOAN edry

WRN Ute Ny] edtiory

eyq ew

wont mony

Suny Suny eduias] suny

-unyg ‘eduad

eioys dedgq| vpoys de{d yg tunyd edag

Ie3-Suo0g 193-Su0g tino3-surg

akyorduiey, ofyoogsey) vyyouqyoqor

qoirg WOT Jarrg

Bud ud Md

aN.

OU GS TRON

beak Ae p> Ue NL }QOQ TUG UL.

yun

VM-suny

Udy,

Jole)|

ust AIT |

*[ej959A = epuag,

epuiay Ug

S09 y

Bqnoy

WweN

ewo Lut

“WUY) *wUN-Hoyy)- 1G “eq LUO

eM OF NY]

uak vd oO

vmUld-Sung

yyoudyeypie aa

“eyyodeqae A

be Ga =

wyN

"TIRMONT BUT-IeIpD “em-eag ‘eut-1g

‘UL LIVMON £ BITRJaSIA — 115ue} Sued ojejod — od-w-iyy vdeds pHuUpuny

‘OIP UNay Saez est ‘ssess 1 surjz

‘UBMON BU = vITejosea = suey, +

‘yas uns wAT) weu fasod UNS BJO] WR NT

"e] @ ‘uos siq § ey n Suos Aq { 3 eA Suos APY ||

*<ys pue aaoqe ony Ff

"FIMIF—= IS %

ByYyoyoe BUL-DN]| Sur Ost AN

WA "Ba-nYyO BA -OL|-BUG “NY-Barg 1294 AN

Uday, va Uey)jad] 1e4q OSeT ILA

1yy WweN qaie9 $}00%

ovnd 099.15 |

-suny o vyd sug usy yy qoirg, ‘sap qrjyasaq

ALipsaey, epsury wndy quel

"11]5,Ue3-SUIg yeu wig

"1Sue-S urg| "yvp-suyyz SF uiciisyvAqq ‘surg dal],

991} pooas

Susy Suoy najyy Woo,

eqly eqlyl vsdng 19BLL,

wen We wen |ourysung ‘ung

RUM yeug |yxeq eunimmy jodomy ‘po

‘seyd-o vuwy ‘suq vu Q|uaqa “1MOq yy MOG

BM YO-5un'T VMBYSULT

‘OsunTy «= “SunT| 'BAM-Suoy Suny suny 9u0j}g

vpoys o eday) = ‘ua ednadug vpoys ody uoly[eIS

vues

15-FuoyoyoyD|-suvg *a5uRg NI-9G IvIg

esed vddeyie ay

‘esed ed deme y

plryo ayeu

ByyoVqua x va-vz| ||/pliqo = uog

wreysy eq vyy ideyy

“WysuUByURYYs eq ‘eMmBqy qeg “OWPITBM [10s

Nq| euasng ‘as-ng vsng ayRug

‘myN = foyzy] BUSUNAQWEN! = UOT Bag ANS

[No. 5.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Languages.

care

“BIN “BUA DIN BAVy Oy

ulueue uaz

e3-ueyuy 1,0

ueyuy “OyyCy| AT

1yo-@3{

“OX = ‘849

“Buy “MIN bey 6

ayoeuep/Iyouy “10a A

eseyoey uyjingouy “eYyaO

xyjns ayo

ayoryeyouy) your Iq]

weyeek

Osnyy| Wey, wey,

vy] vue uy

- SUT ‘Y- Suy Su)

SueqeyyooyN aMELES

Byyosue | afyou|es

LYARS 801-S¥S

SuRs Surg

ait edsoyq

Suoyyg 410400q

‘ypubung | ‘buyoyy

Ve,

wg SN me SIP ee rex Tyo

WEY WEYPA-OJIAT “MOY IW Yo, “WoOTM|eyyoy “eyyOO|-eqAL “vueyrY| eepwarepy) —eanyd Aon,

Py TEP Py yey le Na edi tial! OD Jeantd aX

eu-suryy | @Atsn|d

nysuy ‘3u8,O| eydey “yuRyy PAI vus-1uey) By-Suury nyx0H| xa yenqd apy

@Aisn|d

muy yy] = okey Mey uly J vy jue y Fop|-ur peanjd 3

Bye Ge

Be ada

ve NS Peal

“nO ‘1yyo eu 1y008

aw | Suoddiyiyooy [sueddiq-1yoow |-og, “iyo eu |-opy “TyoRye yA

s-wieyeAl-op “HOOHO| Suyddiy ryooyys -opy “WqyO BuOA)ryoopY "ryoesy| Is vvputoweyy) — ep AOU,

vulgouezy “Lyo

1yooK Tpeuy TYOBUY Tyyoeuvyy|-eup ryovuryy 1svxy| yenp ‘ax

BBLYO SAIsn]o

ny9,0 ByIpoey|-ey ‘ey yoR yy vustqyouey BYIYOV yy nynsoy -xo [enp ‘Ay

: SaIsnjo

MoT Laos pane Poul gh sl 10g -UI ee a

9-01 esoyy “OTN n-O Pa

, sA0ge SmOTaq

IULOTA, “Wey ewog, “vUOT O50] |

“BR WRIA] OPT “OHOTA ony OA, euoA ‘OVW OW UA “Mu-oyy|-oS] ‘wasp 3] “ogg “ey

| Jey eau |

| 0771p aRaung eure] BN. ao

nuy ‘uy Buy Buy, vueyy wuy ‘euey By) nous,

nus-suy “3u() vusey) vy Busey] «=e RUSE) 6PM BUSEOL a9) I

au BLVG oul-te|-aeg gUl-RUsUey ow- TUNE yf gui-Suery TMRT-BMS TRUIOM SUNOX

ofyoules Te]aKeg BYYo- Yan) suvqryosur Byous A vyorjeasg, uRul Suno0x

yy dy ny y 1qysuenyeng “ayyweyn joag "2q9° we

Burs Burs Bulg, Suisjaaqiyy | Suig|yyoH] Suty poo ay

ri i Be eT TN Byyoumeyy; PIN ‘FIN Bore Pee clN mero

13\00q layo-og BuBYyoIy) i suoyyg ‘2 vloyg quot AA

“mung ‘bupdbupy ‘YDIPT ‘Bugyyorqupy | ‘bug.oyoT | “phbbusyng ‘ys bug

359

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Languages.

1857.]

1qea-Suy

BO-SUy

1q-UV

Bs-Uy

Iq-eyoRyAN

Byo-eyoRyy

“ny “unsny

-eyouey “wy

1q]

eyomy

1q-e3

-eyouy ‘suy

eSeyouy ‘suy

Iqeyouy ‘suy

eyo

nNyOsuy

Iq-wWod

"Iquivsy

wos

"was J

“UV

“OTN

“OW

1q-Suy

suy

‘eyy nf nu Suey Suis Su-vyyey f eyy uru ynknu Fuji Suis HW “pooF st 9023 fw ‘poos you st 9913 sizy tf

ce JOINT 95 98 930U 99g

WeA1O

ody]

odesmy

‘odns-wivyv x

esuUYy

"ns-u)

odiyooX

vel

odnyso

8,0

odryoy

odweyy x

7 eee

oduy

ody.

}

od-49

‘odnysuy

10m aay

odiyy ‘odiquy

Piles ie

odiuwi

‘oddiumoyy

"ns weyex

"1UWLO I]

‘odns weyex

“uy ‘odiyoox

odiqa |

Oars

odiya

-iy ‘odnyo-Q

ay’

Iya ZY “nYd-O

od-1yo-]

Wyo J

odwmoyyx

"WOT,

oddy

odo

ne)

"SUIBAZ ]]B JO OWLU 94) WO padliap ‘uSts oluauas 94) s

"wey pue peg so} Apuo y 4

1 S@H9S Sq} Jo gyo Jaa ‘eyo joa VE xygug y

DAISNIOX

IWBYSUY TW- Wey y J eqyeusiuey MUAY UUe yy ayyeM|(eanjd ‘sing

5 1usugQ SAISNIO

vy suy WEA] vusiuey “WB yULUL yy OA ABA |-XO TBanyd ‘ang

@AIsupouUt

Tmo ei LA | ak ayyyifeinyd ‘sing

ax SuLy | luvy} lug ‘uuey ayy] urpesnyd ‘ang

1 WIYD OU eyy 3A18N]9 |

Tusuvd jim-sueddiqiyo |-eusiyyorqyny TUATTOW

“diyryooay, |-OF “TuraniyoryAy SD qe Oa: TUN Oe de ony, = enp stg

wiqo Suvddiy Iqqoul-B yy

Tayo §=|-1YoOyy = *wiys “Busy youyy ye 9xISOp

~Suvddiyoyayy | HAL “UIYO-OUY|-NY “yoo )-w AQ ‘unYoRyeyy sme: SV [eup sexy,

POUT UY Tu-uyoguy) Fayqypoeurqy|-wy “muyuryouy ST) — hp seno 4,

tmryo] = waeu

-1qouy *ouryo

nyo wy Or CAD I{qo eusy yy) yuy “poUry ae | (enp Aue i

Toyo Sap @AISNyo

TwNYD Dy, M-wWYs YyoRy) eqY-vusiqqoury “POA IYOR OWISE AA |-X9 TEP “S.iNGC

1yd Sug DAISNIO

nyo uy WES vusiyyoury ABHOR IsvAy|-xa Tenp “ino

yo @AISNO

juungo LN Buqouy yu “eu yoR y OHS] /-ULTeNp *s.InQ

DAISNIO

nya) w1yory IyWouvy|iqo ug ‘wipoey Isy}-Ur yenp ‘ang **

vyyeusoyy 1woS;, *1ur oy | oanRoipeaid <4

IWOYa| MOY “LwWopA ‘gyyeusyuo x |-wadapy “Twos -waepy ‘axy|‘siT $.19F] ‘SIFT op

dy "FO eh dAINiA}4e

Un Ya “UYQ| ‘woyy ‘wow;}| wy fan-oyy Wy eeymMaiepy “yi‘syy ‘4zopy ‘spy

Tay ay Byer ee fetal he B | eulgL

wy| dy ‘wy ‘yi uy ‘wy ‘y wy i AuL

07 PAL

TuIRt Y usuv y Bye Twyusey ey, "exv A oul

uy mq ‘sugiag *suy ‘suy SuNIeM ‘OM + V fig

[ No. 5.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

360

TYO-, OL

Tyo, WANG

* NOI

Sueq Sued =

od ‘w od ¥

1q-Bq "A

uyo

-wn-Bq eM

‘BS WNSDIAL

1q-u2>l

eSuly

‘ypubung

suoug

eaets|

odyng

odyes

mery Uy,

esouang ey

OM-VT, “NEY,

oduyye x

nay

odug x

“Auyvy yy

Sued epry

es dle ea mm 2 (ar be aS

sued eley y

ya PN: © OSB EN CoN

‘mi suod Sued-ey[ vy

= Suom By; ng “‘OqeyyL TY, ADL

suoMyg Sued ey] ey

‘sucnyg]|-euy = ‘oqeyvuy ifeuyy

dued ey vy

wAqg)eq — oqeyyey ery

Sued vy ey

nd yns|-ung iyo wns ayo- sung

Sued e]

nd yes jest “149,98 ayo, 11H

gsouing B)

VM-By, “Ney, Sued pe

odwuyywe jy |-epyng

odwmeyueyy,

way ure

odiuuy

‘un

fu ey] /-Sueqoun 4ny,4]

TOAUILYOOY Y

TWIT YO -OF9 TA *Lui- WYO fh

wi1yo

WLYO-OF-9A) “OY “wUIYOT

LUNUUy 1U- Wy

nawy WUTULUy me ULORID ve

‘bupd- burg ‘PDE

“yeu 0G nz7eq

-W0-1 “y G6 03 (Sued-ax ‘1yo-9X

-JPq-WWO pa sny Sues

-u0d QT pue 6 \UN "19-0N

qyjoq uy = “sued sued

mo jo Jajneu -dny ‘iyo-yny

nyjed = pue 1y sueq

mo = tuorisod |-euyy ‘TYOBUy

-WOo Wt 2 =. sueq-vyT

“avy ngyeddi Og} 1yory "LYOrrT

“§ pue

Sueq |‘ ‘suedwng

ung "Iya wWNg ‘u ‘1yo-wuNnS

sued |*y pue tu ‘surd

“apy. yo, qorA]-duyy *u “qo, qor ry

Sjrpuiue

‘Ajuo vata Surq = |pue ssuigy ‘oy

WL.

TuNYoes]

TULUA LIOR YR Py

“"uR- UHR TAT

BYABYIOV *puUryour fF)

WUYORsy *wUTYO

BqyoV|-eqAL ‘yo wy)

: myULUe yy

vyylueuuey y “1 -WeUUe Fy

weulue py

lueUuLe ly WBUUG FL “UW Y

‘Huoyyarquoy | ‘buo1oyoT

U gl |oeoq oy SoNYaA|SuOMY *suoy

eh Wysigg

iu ueyD WaAdg

| XIS

ou) DAL

97] Inoy

Wes SEPAth §

ISIN OAT,

[Je pasuvyoun |‘g ‘q ‘sg susis

d1u3uas UG

suo uo

-Su0 NY “AY

-BUIB SY UE

-q-O N0-UG

o7q| (end ‘satay,

My.

‘ayeepmaieyy| peanid “urayy

"org “11

te | "u0og "T

at paxiw ‘|g

OBE IGT ON

sylUy 0731Q} feanqd sano x

lu] yeanyd Sano x

—_

‘phbh-buypog ‘ys bug

361

nit Language.

cird

Comparative Vocabulary of the A

1857.]

Surdeyesiy ‘uemm auo vulw Suedeyyng “speurue [[# Jo os pur sauoo ¢ id-tpeyues ‘soo Z 1d-tpesiq ‘Moo T 1d- ine ‘gsmoo g ‘moo [| Surd3ueg ft

‘orm Sour | ‘uoul Suvq : sjetaiue pur ssuiyy Lyo f90Y aay oY pesuvyoun ny +

‘JoynauU oie sjewtue ‘A;UO UAT A0J Surg : AaNeU St “4Sat 1OJ IYO ‘UO AOJ IT x

9.18 Ar) |

SA ld 1a) la Px Iq) ugyideyg ‘Id 7d Iq ‘eq| ‘e1og Iq) IgA, ‘UT

IY} ssouling

IPuryAl ‘N jou SLue-eyy |: sr you

your); = Byy-Sueyy ‘oulyjueyy| = UBL“ pueyyl SuIppetn Iyosur yy 5,UIPP tn Tyy-UBIA| UIs “MONI A

-efxy Sup urepy

sunt] st you

Suen "1d tq] CIM = “!49d eM ‘Td 1d sun] a SuDN Sonn} wo ‘yay

V VY) 89 ‘V Vv Buy vu ok “a ty) sasar Ag

og SUIP oy [euosiad ‘uo0AT

Burg] ‘sueg bites ele BNld Iq ‘sueg Suoyeg, ‘suvg ‘savg Suig| eoo] ‘worg

ois ee oes ee oe ee ee ee oO

(Apjounl :

‘ -sIp — pasu

vy Buy usya ydeoxa

wy ‘Ig Od od TIN WW WML eu TT) (099!) HN P89IMO) “9M jo

*998 12

saoyq [eYy

wary pney

-odyys = yey

odyes [eq yf,

ney |

-jeyyueypey,’

req

“neyL, “(eT

“ney- Teqs |

weype

'Z, 9a8 "US [Te

Suod,dj| jy ‘u ‘wu Suoddy

y (4) weq q-1=

Z ino Sued d-t

9100S

Suod 8,uodd]|¢ — Suse ouy

wnip

Suod- a vuy| joy-1yord IN

suod .1y

yoked iNT

wnkp 103

Suog wine|-suiswe suo

S t |

Suoqd IN| Suise,SuoMy

doy ‘dey

‘oy ‘suod,d]

Sued

Sug iy OL Naed-n} |-Susg “1yo-Suvg

mnfp joy

nao

aatjoo(pe st

sunou Z JO IST

poipunyyT

Aylog

AQUI L

Aja J,

Udy

aun

eee

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

362

vé-ngny 118d

1qva

“wa eau} = tqiyddit.o

ow-yoyqysuy vyny

aa s| BAT,

vAlq

ob: CLAD. | 1qeuy

yecy

“DI “phodvy Iqueye x

WA igyeusiquy “1qey

98-V a SIU

sungd-vuyy B-psiq

I-V oyehuy

weUlY 01949H

weysQ oTqe

Leys] vuseuy

Bfyoug

"dyoug iL

‘ypubung | ‘buynyy

ofoyy

"1eqouy odaoqmy nf eqyed

rqeq te idvimmy! yoy “iqeyfe

BIPADA 1und-nyy mod YM py

BeANL 1UBIIN nN

qe id-vyy|suedey “iqudey

iqmeyex| BAdow ciuayy| Dhol “1q0qK

Iqaz} !don ‘vidon; nsoy ‘Iqoy

1yseuy vdoqi-V BU-9 X

vi sig VUELOS BUUlaS

jokuy 989 X UIST]

OPH oll’ A opma per

O19 /lOUM *opoJ0y NT o1VoPUN

OCTOYT] C[FOM *O[00 ousoyy

ofay,

"MAT, "ny-049 idoyyo nyyideyg

“2un ‘bupdbuns "NPIDE

nyd-Su9

pqrun yy |ideany

ager ia

PIN-9 9" ADGA

¥[- 07 V|aptsyno]

‘gno §ynouylLAA

*9q7-SU0G} 400 $31

‘aquiny|ep-najy ‘of; Vv

UL U10}30q sj

‘ouamynyy|andy tnkey

OWL “NI ip akidy

OL ‘“Npmayy) WA “naydSuo0g "n4,4e A

‘ip nfal ¥

aujop|odue py ‘oqsue yy eyes

ul 4eyy ‘ndTyeyy | aeET "oy

ORO = “NAL PIN *82PHAN

sy “Ary 249K

WN “OqQUN| “MAIST ‘aqoSy|"ex, “aeye

UL SIU

afs-y|fep yeyy

Uasy| ‘Wasy ‘ras-y 1] UIeURG

WYsu yeyy zas-e|¢ AVp yysra

SUE AA Bp-Bua A TAL

2 WOOT 4eY3

1° H niy Bay

Bulqmey;|weuery *meuy euvin

J euoy

AO “you

vuopuy|-RPA “BuO; yoy Buoy yew»

weuy BuBuy

[ouooy *aw1}

-YOlOST ‘you jeuoyy siyy

AHO , you, Sopziad ‘vuoyyor

nuryidsuo py eu

‘nmamynyy|-ug ‘epndepy

aqsurry ‘aqyog

npmay|idsuog ‘nyjaA\| eaney, *210],

‘BuoyyorquyyT | ‘buosoyoy | ‘vhbbuyng

ee ee

useMjoq

a[ppiu uo

‘MOOT

mojj0q uo]

aaoqgy

do uo |

g 104

S19,

a10 ff

Aepiaysa x

MOJIIOU-0 7,

Aep-og,

¢ UOT AN

qry ‘ust y,

qef ‘uay Ay

MON

qyeou

-3q ‘lapuy

uodn ‘ug

‘ysybug

y of the Kirdnti Language.

wwe Vocabular:

Comparat

1857. |

‘Ny []@ siOo1 yeqiaa forsaqaIg ‘ey-eay ‘eyW-1g © ‘ayey for-ig Z ‘Wey ‘-Ig

aM0d 0} OYD-NX ‘du su0d 03 oYs-ny

amog

Bijeus ‘yxoeq oF ‘uo OK ‘0M Id ‘jaAaT UO BMD

Suryyo oA-Suny

Sueyyo) Sunn ‘On

0}: WeyA| xu | OIN

-ald eq yog

xyyns ‘J ‘xyoid vy

MOS “of “URN te-e IK

vq SsuBsyowy

‘9D “Ue-Tey) PaLUy “9D

ous-om (Omid) oaeas-wak ul amoy

Buel IQ? IN

EEN § twoydwa yy

03-au3] woyduey

way, 9qoH

9108 9QoUL,T,

BUl-WeUINY

TyoIYoV aysiu

Suvry9N “9N wvydan

“huey “Suvyy| = Bdn-Ayy

vh-eqy |

vh-3u0y-01y) eh-089

OX UBS

VA ae |

TIN eN

xygns ‘is

xyoid ‘eiy = “*xyead ‘ueyy

9-OTN puvn

Busuy

vuty|sunyyouy "aX

ounde yy 1d Tex

tusydweay oye}-UB

woydmay, 21,0

9q°H a1qed

eqouL! OAK °091,0

ofyoiqu eqqo- ns,

vusiqa| Imqnk ‘WeN

ndyyo snquo

su0in tejdoyy

‘ey-ny ¢ fay-ny Z ‘-ny aud [

‘om-n& umop ewog ‘om-nfk dn swog

‘em nf ‘umop smog

"sueX ON

‘omid BRB “NO aUI0L)

-em ny ‘dn smog

‘aully == youoT L

suosard Seyy-1g ‘ok-ey ‘atig 3 ‘eus-ey 4a0 eus-ig

ny ¢ fak-ny Z feuS-ny ‘dn awoo 7

‘om-id ‘je Jase, UO BWOD *OM-VI ‘aMI0D

‘omid oleMs wy Sul auog

‘omer ni-jepy Sdn oxy

‘Ig ‘ey ‘NK

‘umop

‘ous-njs (oad) vpoye wah ‘no

‘suiyegq §

‘OMB] BYIOU SOMET

‘ome! nd-vp Sumop ox

‘oW1y == BUDO] »

oq “OIG

La Ge a 8 |

(pioM 33

Joqyye Uu $9.10j

BN |-9q Sue) u—suy

xyut ‘IN xygns ‘uiyy

eueus-9H} av “BUvIN

eusoy ax

oF LA Buy y,

ody Bqy-apusy

uRU ®

y ns eatqoalpe

SU0S ‘BS OX! Os[y

Suog OX) puy

sAlitq

/a RIN; = -tyoud Won

xyoad Suey

xugns “in lepy =‘ oyyaq| earqtumad ‘on

Ja.1B.) B- YB; aaljesou ‘ony

9A ORT BOA

Suogyue py BYy1 Ie IN

*ISNUU-SUBULT "OYD AR ¢ ATM

af 30UE moyyeg) = ANT IVT A

yoyury oyyey ¢ MOL

yeuy

pue oyy ey jaatqztsod pure

vdyopoy, Byy ‘eyy-231"N| YOp-opT ‘HOpy|AvmsiqqgoyyaR]| *ja1100 ‘snqy,

*3}30N youy-ope yy, OUI ‘[91109 ‘0G

10IUK TN] oyy4ey "Jaa sy

opyoidy qoirg BA-YO oystg| ¢ youu MOP]

owdoyy yonw os

"eM UY yonw se

o1ynd AEQoupeg Ad “As-aqq oyrA you

ANqyoo OAT OW SI IY TYo-B aT

asrq j001

sur} Iqung

BION YO] you-Suvy |-Surn "UaN ‘uqy-5uaN IvaN

OWley, yorsury os “OM |4RE “RQRig Ie yy

Sey easy

“Ipeasy opis

ninksyoH aq Yo] nfissuopHlay episuy s9y |-ur “ur Sarat

[No. 5)

nti. Language.

Comparative Vocabulary of the wi

364

as-nig

as Wy]

ausny,

ayooul

aA yn

18,10 ¥

oX-,Sunky,

akoyg Any ‘“od-nde¢

Suvyyoseg

Ssueqyoiy,

Osi],

05]

‘rpmbuneg

of-Ing

of surly

BS Suey,

wey

BusumO J,

9A!

bunpuy

eyo" TUrYyo- BsIqy)

[eantq *IN)

yeuq = "tyo)

eSnyq) “Ur mpo-waqigy

“[Rany |

‘wu esdy ‘jeug

Iswy| “iyo esdy ‘esdy

gles

‘unu veuondg

‘jeEnq nyo nu

e e pe

aucUly] -onG§g nuotG

‘q Sulu vyon

‘q@ ‘yo eyony

eUODA

‘q ‘uly enog

"@ {y9 Bod

[Od |-e80g

‘gq ‘uru eyody

‘q ‘iseqody

‘vul-y "eyo dy

‘q ‘uu vusng

‘q ‘1yo vused

‘OUSNG( |suseqT, “vUSNyL

‘d “a esiy

Ta ‘tuts

‘g ‘142 esiy

ay tq ‘eyo

auRyoT

-ayp]

royo

aieyoy]

"ESIYakOyOT “avyorA|-shy “ods osty)

*q ‘tu es0g °9}}9 050g |

aoe ‘ojua[sog =| aulyeq

‘u80g| ‘a8og ‘ouayO|'asyog ‘ox0g

*q ‘iu es suv

wy *q ‘iyo |-my ‘oyoosdy] "Tq Soudy

“BSW ‘BSW oyjomMy ‘amy|'q ‘asdy ‘od dy

auusun(d

‘ayoosun(y

‘q ‘wnueu |a-sunq 9} ‘Iq Souny,

-Snuyy, ‘q ‘nyo |-jaut yoyo ey ‘d ‘asuy|

. =! . Qe a

ajjem Sung o-Sun} ousny,

{

"iq fwunu vyg ‘qd ‘wnu es ou 1eYO "Iq ‘ou ee

‘Teng ‘nyo oyg ‘q ‘um eyg [-eqg ‘q ‘nyo ‘ayo ley. «| eng ‘es e¢

nit ougta igo RYO “O4D, Kesey "Youp ‘oh-oyg ‘eeyD] ‘omer ‘omeg

9339 Ul

ofnks Suvs vsy ouBsy BYUSIC|[RsNVD Suvs-vSV afnks

OA-SUB fA] sus UU suvy-1 Byyoly Suvs-suvuly oABie pl

BUSWI A)! ud Buy vAIU Suvwy Ble IN

nig ‘osnks) qyvsy ‘eBsy BSVY ‘OleSV BU0-99 vSV nag “nag

wo iy eusoyy SOUS, “ysoUy yopuy, joieg| yeqy = wayy

BAIVRSO1IO}

nig, usy ojesy ‘es Su0-ag qairg|-ur ‘neg “nds

euswey

“tk “Wey vu OV Wale A

“BK "IWOJ “SOHOPT = “ONOTK O-OJN| POVVUO K “BuO X OW Way ‘wes

. WE yu

‘eusMay “Wap -sOYON “OYON 9-0 YOlVN “@N OST] wax

9A 7a NV OCS EG fast et

ung) bupdbuys YvIvgr ‘huoyyoiqun'yT| ‘buosoyoT ‘phhbuyng

| SU ee ee SS ee

one AL

daaj\g

quid

sO §

Kpoq Auy

Ssuiyy Auy

é HUM

‘QAI{RSO.A19}UL

EYOIT[A.10 OTT AL,

"19.1109

Soya 10 OY AL

BAI}BIII

‘qyoryas 10 OU AK

WH,

mr Te ead ‘SL

l Oo

“ys bug

365

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

1857.)

pooS jou ‘tu-nu ‘ pood st siqy ‘nu-oS1 { poo’ st 4vq3 ‘nu-oyy

ofl

‘oA-Suvdtg

Ata

ownywyy

299U

sae |

LAD

afeydoqour jy

oq-30

aheusig

aunt

oAnyywyry

ayovuy

oA-doy

ayo-ou yy

BPE

ey0uy

oan

We ees Mf

Iq) “yu-yo—‘uvrg

*huoLoyoy

‘phbburyvg ‘poos jou sijeyy ‘nou ew wom {poosd st sty} “nou WAR y

d nu ‘gq nyo

"qd Suu Seatg

emmy) u-tye—‘esnyqg'

1uU-1qo—

opyymyy tg = “eunpuey

¢ -

PIN) «= aeIyo— gan yo

eydry) — ru-1yo—edry

ayyoouy) u-1y9—"ywY

Nd) yu-1yo—"eueg

Mag Coed

BAN}-TBAW 1B AA

eyouy) ru-1yo—‘edeqy

ny ‘“eusigig suryo “suvarg

‘d “uu euryg

°q ‘iyo TuU-1y9—

“eu “Buyyd) §=¢ [esneo ep ul

‘q ‘uu vung

‘q ‘1yo vung Tu-1yo—

‘oq ‘ewng)| eumory ‘eueyg

‘q‘ulu esnfog | *g ‘iu vusny

‘q ‘iyo esnd "q ‘iyo

‘esnk- yoqieusnx “Buonx

ral ‘Ulu

eyodax ‘q

‘igo ey od aX

‘eqak “oda x |-oX

ju-1qo-eq

*Bpuo] xog

‘d ‘uiuep | ‘gq “a epeqyy

1D) Me @ Me tC “a ‘iyo

“epoyy epeqyyepeyy *peqy

‘qd ‘ulu eq "qd ‘ju vq

“eq ‘ag ‘yo |-equg “a ‘yo

eqeq "equd\equyy, ‘equal,

‘d

‘ulu esnyyng | ‘g ‘iu e8 ang

*q ‘Tyo Bsn] "gq ‘iyo

“IN —“SNYN|es oyQ *esayp

*q ‘uluusjoM “7 “aU

Pate) Oe een a

‘YooJaMNYOIYD | *1t]9 UeU.sON,,

*JoM-RYOIYO “UvU- ayo UT

‘q Sulu veqeay ‘d ‘u eqey

"@ ‘iy9 eqeyuyT | ‘q ‘yo equ

"eqryy > *BqEH

SURE "qd ‘auly)

ayo— "g ‘esI9

‘ayq ‘austq| “oaory

au e—|‘*g fou URAL |

ayoa— *q ‘ays

auIg]-URAA “OUR A\|

au v ‘qd ‘auryemyy |

eyo ——— ‘q ‘ays |

“SUN PUL] |-eM 5) ‘OYBMH| 2001 10 HBA

oue—| ‘gq ‘oulsiN[

ayo— *q ‘949

‘augg|-SIN ‘OAS

*q fourdey

ou e— *q ‘ays

eyo—|- dey °0s

kue 0}

IS) OW 03

} asp

uny

UMOP HIS

dn purys

amo,

‘asod-aK ‘aqax|-suoyq ‘odvy

‘door

ou e— "gq ‘eseT

ayI—/aaoqe aas

“opeyy) ‘om-vry ‘OvrT

sue—| ‘|g ‘au lg

asyo—| ‘q ‘aS Ig

SUP ela ee

‘Id ‘ouryeag

ou e—— *q ‘as

ayo—— |-yraMgq ‘oy

‘asNud-wne J |-emg “oy-,yog|1aqgn ‘u ‘yRodg

ou ea ou 1YeMQT

ayo ‘aS YRaqyT

O83 n-SUO ‘(aus aq}

‘aja N-SuoK | |g pue ‘q)

‘ad-nyoigg} — foyaaqeqr]

‘Id ‘eury

ouvgeyyT j-ouy ‘gq fas

‘ayo—|-youy, ‘OF

*OqRA|-WPAN ‘oyOUN

UsTIs og

daa my

au weso doyy,

: *g ‘ek manu *q ‘okeus

F epmoq, “o pw, ‘a “ato “q ‘ou 4) yoy

3 ‘fapoaepueyy, |felyo spuety, *9}U2[- OU, ‘q ‘as 4

'g ‘epucyy} “g “epueqy, epueyy nye nqj}9y,L| e}0[doy += "eqoy ‘asodayy | YoY *04-YOY dn vy

*q ‘of wnu ns *q ‘oAtu

-sunk ‘qd jipuvag “dd

- ‘arqois,SunX |‘eryo epueny “q ‘ou te

a ‘s ‘es Sung| © ‘g ‘apuguy nA “ny, ns-nX nSs-y0 Bs-Sun Xk aS-HNA |g ‘es if ‘ope uAMOp nT

Ss SSUIQ] oWeqy = f'9U WRZQaYYyeT

S ‘d ‘eAsutu "q ‘okvus a "ayo oyyoqy ‘qcaayy

=e SPU a — Put ‘d MOGI fel “aqgeqyey [ey ‘fas

| ‘alyo opeyy =| ‘atyo 039eN "sSutag (993943 ‘oS pue |g eq oloy

eS ‘g ‘ak-eyy| © ‘g"enedy 2}043] n&- (ey yy 0999UTE AYO “eqVG | «= ONeZ Fonaqey| ey fr okjey heme oyuy,

< au

= *medepey

ke “q ‘aku “ayo — ‘q ‘ou yy

na “nu Sel, “a ‘d ‘okeus caddepuy id "a ‘as 14

SS ‘oryoom Bey, |-Tg ‘q ‘erya nddep ‘gmoo pue jig 407g

> ‘g‘em-5UTiq "§ ‘epld opld nd-yygi-Suex ‘nddeg ey-deqy| 23%) eee ‘owy = *OANEY Sug

“eqaey

> ‘ou Wed 3

~ ‘gud a1ag —*ag

nS "gq ‘eXuanu | 1g ‘efeus 9g “jou pas [esneo |g ‘au 17 Bg

S Jag *q ‘alyo |jeng ‘1y9 eg Si] *aip ‘arts | ‘q ‘ays

I apag *g ‘apag] “Surg ‘apag apag NyIg DES BIBG] JO [SMO “epeg 13 vg OES TM

2 eu WRU OF

ae ‘gq ‘eAuinu ASL ORESOF

‘= JON ‘[eng ‘uguisqjyeio Aq jg fauid 17

s Satyo JON ns-,doX ‘aqng ‘emoyT | *q ays diz,

= ‘Bug ‘a1-ON af eX op,uayy| “Ray ‘soz nwo7y euay, ‘ayjem-mo'y ‘odi yz, -od-nd yz, ONLI

= OM-¥Ig Aue

‘od-ep woly

eqdory, ‘O1eTT “aT qe =a OAR

okey “ON gory} eieyyy ON] «= ABU ON] «= B39U BN] ‘poSueyoun oy) = equy ‘oduNy -ynmmy = 9N] mod

youbung “Huyoyy "UNG bundiungy °10]0 "HugyyorquyT *bu040”oT | ‘phbbuypg ‘ysybug

366

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kiranti Language. 367

1857.)

OS Se ee ee

"gq {suey

“VIN ‘d

‘ayo Suay

"§ ‘Sugy

‘d

‘Ten a

‘aryoy = *g ST

‘d

‘nu ueUIn Ny

"q ‘ergo

“ON *S ‘UN

‘d

‘ofuunu-n'T

‘q ‘eryo

“NT ‘s ‘ek-n]

*q ‘a4, uiau

-ok- IN

‘aryoad UNL

"S ‘e4- QL

‘d

‘ak wunueUa

‘a ‘ayo uaz

"§ ‘ou-9%

*q ‘ak um

Te leat a ILS

"q ‘ayo vq

“DLS: “eG

‘d

‘of mun

"a ‘ero

"s “PA-DTT DIN ‘8 “eAD IN

ed ,yeqyg

vdnAueyy

edniny

‘qd ‘eus

eed

‘1y9-9998| gq

"§ 09°,

“eT “q 935%1¢

*g ‘ofeu wey

‘q ‘odrun ry

"S “op, wey

‘qd ‘oktu en

‘a ‘QAI

"IN “§ SedIN

0731G

d ‘odtu-n yy

‘a ‘QAL

yqyo

edniu

“NY ‘ediunyy

edniny

93,4-9'T q

‘93,3919

ISO],

033!

DIN

au WIA

nu X

0331d

“heme oyez 0} 2418 *nkq oyuodt ‘yesneo § Leave aye}

‘yok ayuak fyesnvo ‘ayuoM £08 ‘uy ‘1IBMON © “Keme oye} 03 osned (odjed oyvy) fokjedey £08 03 asnvo va “1 ‘Lume oyv3 ‘oAje] $05 ‘omery 4

"aum0d 0} asneo fofjed oAytd $ au0d 03 ‘1d jo Tesneg y

"d ‘vep vd

‘eS: soa Erte) ‘a ‘ts

‘yeh |-ynuox ‘ed jeep edyiqyg

eunfiquody)y nd ‘eyyndiyo}-mwax es dox} — “eq- 11449

iq ‘eep eqndAu

“oT eee

auTUNNy eyyadk seu vita ou = eep equiuepy

des] ‘ouvsy) ‘eyyuu-yndnn|-woyg ‘eryo-wsy, = *eq-nduepy

“nu ust

‘eyou YNN

poos jou - |g ‘eepeqniny

"elyd YUN |*q ‘ts veep eqn

‘duyy “8u-nN eqy-ndny rak-nyr AN teq-DAN

au west |Aue 03 fopog

‘ayo— +s a 03 SIpORg

ns] esn[uny "as]T) “4999 fousOS

ou wey— =*g ‘aut WI_y

‘eyo— = |'q “as any]

OATIA Seo aN “ONIN Oya

ou urem— | *g ‘au UINT

syo— ‘q ‘aysiu

nua q eswmoyy "oW9T] S]|-IN ‘OU-IN

omed vy

“OQnDp A

‘23U01, “d ‘gq ‘ou eg

‘oumy ‘q ‘aq ‘g ‘ayo

OIG) ‘asu0y, ‘oqnqd|-sey~T ‘omeg

"xIgns lu 3 xy

-aid 9 [vquoa ou-esn {Ay ‘q ‘ou-vqy

‘ALIG pues eur ‘ayo— ‘a ‘ays eg

‘doig ‘epwunyy ‘a}jeT + ‘“esnyy‘oMeg *O-¥g

PI°D

Peg

poo)

O}eII 10 []9T,

puvysiopug

Iva

jou oye

i A 1

(No. 5

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

368

“ues "-q “enya 4UON

farqo nuuey yf BUY SAY gat i0 Ih

‘g ‘nuU-UByyT ed, Sueygq| = eds ueyg TuUvy yy Sunu-usyy| eyy-ndi-nunyo¢ afnu- wry

"ey

"elyo ayy"

“[BQA0A

by tay Bus 13 WLU yy

sarsese ie { ‘eus YLT

‘ayo CUM dny n ayy Tay

"s “Uy edvqy edoyy tats ‘dnyq-n-Aqy} eqy-nd- I yy eT

‘q ‘uns ef a

*q ‘eryo jou

ung *g ‘ung ed rey anf Ln) n4,118 By MA-ng) ro wry *e7,UIS

. *JO9MS We

J ‘ou yy wT

‘eus yn wry

"gq ‘may eI PU UNE [See

“q ‘arya nkiwary |sou} ‘juny

wary “g ‘wary eduwiary war] yur] my) *eyy-nd-cayy|“u-wayy ved wry

5 : “(qaza) *g ‘03

oy vf yrd wn], Z ‘eu ¥v}

“7 ‘es =O} eM nj OF wun gy, *[ *9usd 14

nie . -eMN ‘OPA wn, *2} wHy,

ee eae “nq “OeUT ed nf-nqy, ‘ed wow ny,

“og ‘ys, un | vd meyq ays OL «‘Woyujeg/-w-ng==deung) ceqyed néngy) — ‘ed-,wowng

Riu

“7 ‘ousuem oyeunque yy é BIYO

‘q ‘aryo ‘Tyovujosur fy "ed win} uel

Suey) ‘oyeMnpueyy ‘ed- meye yl

‘ ‘Suey Bins) eqns) "Np, UIA Inge] BL ANeSaN] = ted oan} vay

‘asNy

"A OPIN “eUTIAL

“q ‘arya But euiyos| net

ny O'S “OY BUIO[SOT WH AN Md “PH ny ‘ouny|-niny “3se-uog i: ie

‘ynubung | “Suypys TL "bupdbups "PIPL ‘Buoyyaiquogy | “bup.oyoT

ee eed

= cong

"q ‘Is veg

"eq- WY

on nthe

smMOspur fy

“7 ‘eed

"Seed

ma ‘eed

*q@ ‘Is erg

*eq-anks

rag

inog

*g ‘veg

‘C ‘Is veg

“aurti qO0Mg

7 ‘erq

‘d ‘is erg

fyi CU te

MOTTA, “Se

*By-, SULT odiy

"q “erp 1

oqoy "qd ‘Is

Rep TPiSgoy

"Iyyeyoy, (a90I8) avy

‘qd ‘erp ways

Bs 9 aad lng

Beep Wasa]

*Wa[s-9]5

107

“phhuyvg "ysybug

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 369

1857.]

*{ ‘aryoos

T"N °C

‘o5-eYd 13

*g ‘ostyT DI

"a fatqooy

~JEyRU 993]

odyenm "d

‘Tyo By-VYeY

-od ye “§

foyay od 121

gq Satya

By AeyRu

oyyo,doyo

“eA ‘d

*1yoRy oyyo

- doyoie yy

"g foyyo

- doyyoiry

*q ‘oyors uo

oa (hie @ Ne

“ug ‘gg ‘WO

oad:

‘aftyo yeyo

yeyoye yy

‘g ‘Tyo ed

PlBYOXe PAL

"S “eqovyoye

ed- Su0s

myyye A

mng-ng

IYO, WeIyoryO| eusuns-suny

suvyo edreayq

I-rUy

‘S ‘nd

eds, ueqqr Tl

Fh AB: lke |

"est = I8-vud ¢ peq ‘ynk is-vud £ pood ‘y-ndnu f uryo-vy ‘Suryeq ur ey !xyoid ‘k3 wey y

ed-Suog edie vdoy

ny ea ed-rydiqg

eee yy edyyeley ed-e] ey

wanqng| edtoj-teq wo ed-asog

ed-y1Y9

ndayo,AeA|-eq2A OF ed-o1gy ye]

epeyy yuou- OL) asnd-yoyy Joys

ey urd ou- Yor, NY-dun'y]

Sunu tu wayyy

ed Sueqq-n PY is!eqy

“nyo

-nfseus-nyoq |.

‘syd- qayy aru yndnu nyo)

eyy-,ynd

oy *y-nk-oy

VQUM-BIP

yni-g

"eyy-,nd- WO

qud-yeqy

"ey nA-v yy

vd Ylty Surg

*ed- 31,0

BYYNOG “110g

eyynd iseus

"ey

aqry ‘okey

eytul

By) ‘Balle

adr

‘ey-Ig = “Burd

“ey IU BITS)

“oATe

"oh Le

of 40.0

‘ou y-ouy

eyLyo—

*aA-suayO

oAny- Suny]

BSTI-W-TIR Sy

“USI EY »

pee ho LY

Ste

Vee cee | ee ee

wivky-ei yy

oul

suns Suny

"eq- Wodpeyy

vq wokg

Bq- WAY IY

Su0T

usa

peat

Sut MA

yor

peyooig

WYSIVIVG

AIS

[No. 5. |

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language.

370

"g funy, Aly) oysndyoyeqg

"d ‘eAto

-dodwy

"a ‘49

-1ydod-wy

‘g ‘dod-wq eu jedeg

¥ bit ll

"a “1y9

AUTGPPI “Cd

‘yo-luqd “9

‘Wd = ‘os1yq

"qd ‘ayory

“AMV “d

“1qo-ayoynyD

"S “NYO s0

Sued, ynyow sp

"Id ‘aktyoos

Ppa cist | ie UI

‘osvyo,uny, ed

*s ‘osuny) -Suosteyyoq

‘d ‘tYo

-ey-amMau

a 25 aly

‘osvyoour

i | in i

‘osaumayprg

*d ‘arya

“05 unjr IK

‘d “ery

- UNL, "Ss rd

‘osuny, ‘uny) - Suosteyyog

edyeyy

oy ye A

"meqoIqh,

ed-,3u0s

‘ypubung “buynyy

nundng

eu JOUAOUY]

edroyp

wmoAyoIquy,

moAYoIqyL

ed Suog

we kqorqry,

edimq

eyedexyy

ox,jndng

“ox,nydnyg

Oma

vd dayp-mqQ

eddayyon;,

‘oytdri-syyon33 9,

ox1d11-0339

*eding

‘hundbung

ANAT Ng] CAAT WTLALH.

dem-Suv ynk-Suo0y,

‘ed Suvmour Aa) ‘BYyy-,ynk-suoy,

And nays,

ed-aqq "eyy- yudnoyy,

Pry Tjeus ynd-1yoryay

"Byyo-eda | “BUY- yak 1yo TW

y-nd-tn A

sAis-YB pL} “BUY yA-cn AA

eqy- nd

dokq-yPeM = “Ando

eyy- [nd On AA

dis-49, “yond GA

‘PIPL “HuoyyoiquyT

‘ak YNS ANY afeyedary

ofuund wmng

‘sumuind wing

‘a{ny-Suoy,

“BuSUaASUa A,

ep—

equ eIyo— "IS eep—

‘eyoq ‘e-9ug ojouxyy

eyyad-usiqyy

‘ud- y ns I

‘ed- das, | wa-1d

eu nu As IQ|-P 3 uyoey

Ree ORAL

“nu, wi = jeqe, oqyed

‘q1oys ‘adsyey) “eqeloyyesq

112} ‘efoy

‘ange ‘oT Bq-¥T

nsyvhy, jeqroyfouxag

‘ok, SHV) VqrogfoyyeAg

“huowoyoT ‘whbuyog

axenbg

yeo

om- ndng|-11ayds ‘punoy

IPT

SULIIGYIY yy) -nos19 Spunoy

eal

Teag

(a0]) 1049

(4514) [1®L

Woyg

‘ys bug

=~.

Comparative Vocabulary of the Kirdnti Language. 371

1857.]

oF! ynyg ed rok e

ea ud ednuag

pus ayy, vs¥s oS

junu

* NUN]

Bu-TAyy)

eT Oe | USI

Out

*q ‘oAryo

“05927

‘ose, Ol

"IY O59]

*g feum9}

“wy = “9297

“a ‘ayo

-03 qeyeur

ut. SPE

1yo day gq

"a *sq08y

“BP, 18P 19

Mong *s§ “ep oe

-yepigodeyg|-moyd woyg

edroyg

vuvuny

Bu- wns |

Ou teP a

-a{qd wajyq) oy-wayd wey)

PIPL POP PDLII LP PDAL IID PA LRALI ILA APIA

OFlU0y vyo-edoyy =| eyynsyar usyoy

oygry|ed-gyq nu,wy_) eyyour rey Wes]

Ly bots Baus yeg

PUL, We AA SUITE AA BU Te AY

tes of) APA *CYAPA ens

ey ,w04

-Suvluay, “yng

BU-, Way, J2d@)|}-su0}7 = Suejuag,

ed-yoyd yoqg eyuerany

ws]-UY A

anu- “WR |

poos ‘sqns 4vy

ol’s

BU Ie AA

SuyiyA

vu -W9T,

eu- ii Se jad

eq wey

*unilor yy

‘o[our) poos

Ysey evqnoues

njyAVAp nyRAg

®P,19PV

"eq-, wok |

(aea]) uly

Jasunyy

IST,

SSOULIvA AY

urd

se ‘jaaary

possaidap

‘our «=/jO passaid

"mal )"Woo Senr

372

English.

Air (wind)

Affection, love

Abuse

Abode

Agriculture

Agriculturist

Amaranth (grain)

Aqueduct

Ancle

Arm—all

Arm—fore

Aunt, Pat.

Aunt, Mat.

Ant

Anus

Arrow

Alder tree

Bag. Basket

Barley

Bamboo

Bark of tree

Back

Back bone

Belly

Beast, quadruped

Box, chest

Bat kind

Bird kind

Bird, male

Bird, female

Bird, young

Beer

Bread

Bitch

Birch tree

Bed

Bed chamber

Bed time

Bee

Blacksmith

Blood

Buttocks

Battle, fight

Boat

Bear»

Beard

* The h thus marked h’ denotes the abrupt tone which is of very frequent occurrenc)

The h is often omitted as Cho’mi, little; To’po, strike ; Cho’no, the nose, &c. ‘ i]

+ The repeated final vowel marks the pausing tone which is as common as the abrupt ton}

+ a is the crude, = Sontal and Uraon Da, and wo, mi, are the suffixes of gender. ;

§ Kh, uttered like kw, deep in the throat.

Vayu Vocabulary.

Viy'u Vocabulary.—By B. H. Hovesoy, Lsq.

Nouns Substantive.

Vay'u.

Hojum

Chhansa

Jesi

Mailing

No word

Kédduvi.

No word

Dunri. Tilém

Léthulung

Got

Nini

Yeng-yeng

Chikibula

P6-ching

Blo

Khoyong

Licbhing

Guh’mi*

Saka

Pholo

Sing kokchho

Sénti

Gatachu

Muli (organ). Bimli

(whole) .

No name

No word

Pdkchein

Chinchi

Loncho chinchi

Mescho chinchi

Bengali chinchi

Soe. Swe

Pipra

Mescho tri

Toura

Blem’chum’

Imlung

Imsing

Singwo

Got thutvi.

chingtuvi

Petuna

Pat

Dunga

No word

Vikpovi

Khak-

English.

Boar

Body

Burden, load

Bone

Breast

Breast, nipple

Bow

Bowman

Bottom, lowest part

Boy

Buffalo kind

Buffalo, male

Buffalo, female

Buffalo young

Bull

Breath

Branch, bough

Brother

Brethren, uterine

Calf

Calf, male

Calf, female

Can, cup

Cart

Cat kind

Cat, male

Cat, female

Cat, young

Carpenter

Cheek

Chesnut tree

Chin

Child kind

Child, male

Child, female

Clay

Cloth

Cloth, cotton

Cloth, woollen

Clothes, raiment

Cloud

Cold (frigor)

Colour

Cane (calamus)

Cock

Cousin, Pat.

Cousin, Mat.

_ a Ta

[No. 5.)

Vay'u.

Loncho pok

Chho

Ripcha

Chuschu

Liwo

Liwo-wo

Hutti

Loncho, choo.

Mechho

Loncho mechho

Mescho mechho

Mechho choh’mi or |

cho’mi mechho

Loncho gai (see ox)

Hemchi

Rama

Bolo, elder.

younger

Bolungcho

Gai cho’ mi

Léncho gai cho’ mi

Mescho gai cho’ mi

Boguna

No name

Dana

Loncho dana

Mes’cho dana

Cho’mi dana

Sing chuk’vi

Gwong-gwong

Se’lu

Kumching

Choo. Tamtawo

Tawo 2 +

Tami bt

Nakchyongk6

Jéwa

Rowa jéwa

Belisong jéwa

Jéwa

Kowal

Jungsa

No word

Di H

Loncho khocho§ || —

Bolu. Balu

{ (see brother)

Tawo |

Balu,

1857.]

English.

Cow

Cough

Copper

Cowherd

Cotton

Crow

Daughter

-Daughter-in-law

‘Dance

‘Day

Dust

Darkness

Death

‘Desire, wish

Deer

Dispute

Dog

Dog, male

Dog, female

Dog, young

Dog, wild

Dream

Drink

‘Earth, the

Earth, a little

Ear

Egg

Elephant

Elephant, male

Elephant, female

Ewe

Eye

Eye brow

Elbow

Exorcist

Earthquake

Face

Feather

‘Feast, festival

Father

_Pather-in-law

: My father

Thy father

His father

Aer father

‘ts father

—Tever

fair, market

Tear

| erry

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Gai

Khwen khwen

No name

Gai ttinvi

Rowa

Gagin

Tami

Choyongmi

Holi

Nima,

Pinko

Kwung-kwung

No word

Daksa

Kéchho

Phwé

Uri

Loncho tri

Mes’cho tri

Uri cho’mi

Gharimu uri.

Amiung

Tuntaang

Nok’-chun’g

Chalung

Hati

Loncho hati

Méscho hati

Méscho béli

Mék’ (abrupt tone)

Mék’ kwiyu

Koko-chus’-chu

Balung

Dukku

Gnaru

Chinchi swam (= bird

hair)

No word

Chakhi

Ang tipi

Ung api

A apa. Wathim tpia.

Ynung ipa. Minung

apa

The same

Jun’gsa

Inglungthamlung (buy-

ing and selling place)

Ramsa. Ram

Theklung. Lit. cross-

ing-place

Némo.

Béne tri

English.

Fire

Fire-place

Field, arable

Finger

Finger, nail

Fellow-countryman

Fellow tribeman

Fish

Fist

Flavour, taste

Flesh

Flint

Flour

Flea

Flower

Ford

Fly

Food

Fog

Fowl kind

Fowl, wild

Fowl, male

Fowl, female

Fowl’s egg

Foreigner, m. and f.

Forehead

Filth, dirt

Foot

Form

Forest

Fruit

Frog

Garlic

Girl

Glue, cement

Grandfather

Grandmother

God

Gold

Goat kind .

Goat, male

Goat, female

Goat herd

Grain

Groin

Hammer

Hammerer

Hand

373

Vayu.

Mé

Phulung

Wik. Vik

Blemen

Demen, got demen

Angki mulung-wo-mi.

Angki namsang-wo-mi

Angki thoko-wo-mi

Kwan. Kon

Bo-chha lumphu

Madi

Ri’ michhing

Pung’mi

Theklung

Jama

Jatang

Kow-al

Khocho, or Khwocho

Rikkho

Loncho khocho

Mescho khocho

Chalung. Kho-cha-

lung

Gyetinam’sang-wo-mi

Tanglang

Sé. Si

Boyukwong.

cho is toad)

No name

Tami. Méschochoo.*

Cho’-mi

No word

Kiki

Pipi

Caret (Bhim Sen is the

usual object of ador-

ation

Heldungmi,

the yellow)

Che’li

Loncho cheli

Mescho cheli

Cheli tunvi

Jomsit

Chhlagaliing

Topchyang

To’vi

Got

(Khwo-

(Lit.

in eee a ae Se ee ee PE Se ee ee a

_ * Choo is probably cho-wa, a male child, and cho’mi, a girl, answering to ta-wo and ta-mi.

Sut cho’mi is now chiefly used for a little one and rather adjectively than substantively.

8 ¢

374

English,

Handle

Spade handle

Hair

Hair of head

Hair of body

Véyu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Luéichyang (English

Chukha lu¢dchyang

(English th)

Swom

Puchhi swom

Dukhu swom

Herdsman Gai. Mechho-tunvi

Head Pichhi

Heart Thum

Heel Konteng

Hail Bopum

Hemp Lapchhyo

Hen Mescho khochi

Hip Gangpangra

Hope No word

Hoof, cloven, solid Khokhek

Hog kind Pok’

Hog, male Loncho pok’

Hog, female Mescho pok’

Hole Hom (like kh).

Homlung

Hoe, spade Chokha

Husk Ingsu

Hook, peg Khondu

Horn Ring

Goat’s horn Che’li rang

Honey Singwo khudu

Horse kind No name (Goda used)

House Kém

Home, dwelling-placeMudung

Hunger Suk’sa

Husband Rocho

My husband Ang rocho

Thy husband Ung rocho

Her husband Ynung rocho, Minung

rocho, Wathim ro-

cho. A rocho

Instrument, Imple- Pochydng

ment

Intestines Chyot

Iron Khakchhingmi (Lit. the

black)

Jaw Ra

Joint Thulung

Juice Bulung

Knife Yukchyang

Knee Khokali

Knot No name

Kitchen Khoklung

King Pogu

Lamp, torch Tuphi

Language, speech Dabo. Davo

Lip Kumching

Leaf Lé

English.

Tree’s leaf

Leather

Leg—all

Leg—true

Light, lux.

Lightning

Life

Liver

Louse

Lungs

Loom

Load

Maize

Master

Mark

Market

Mason

Mankind

Man, male

Man, female

Man adult,

Maker, doer

Madder

Mare

Mill—hand

Mill—water

Millet (kangni)

Millet (kodo)

Millet (juwar)

Millet (sama)

Milk

Mist

Manner, mode, way

Monkey. Macacus

Monkey. Semnopi-

thecus

Measure

Medicine

Mind

Moon

Month

Music

Mother

My mother

Thy mother

His, her mother

Mountain

Mountaineer

Mouth

Moustache

Moschito

* Buying and selling place.

+ Mukchhu swom = mouth hair,

[| No.

Vayu.

Sing 16

Kokchho

Lé

Poktélo

Dang-dang

Dangdang bikup

Héwmchi (breath)

Ding

Be’ mere

Tot’

Punc’hyang

Kholi. Khiéli

Makai

No name

Inglung thamlung*

Kem povi

Singtong

Loncho

Mes-cho

Bangcho, male,

mi, female

Povi

Laru

Mes-cho goda

Rechyang

The same

Levi

Dusi

Densom

Nawéali

Dudu

Kokcho (cloud)

Phoka

Pokchyang

No name

Thum

Cholo

Dumku

Umu

Ang timu

Ung amu

Tnung imt. Mynu

amu. Wathim tno

A amu.

Chaju

Chhajuwo.

mut’ vi

Mukehu

Mukchhu swomt

Kaénanang

Chhaju

1857.)

‘Mouse

Nose

Nostril

Navel

Oor

Oil

Oak tree

Odour, smell

Onion

Ox kind

Ordure

Pain

Palm of hand

‘Penis

Place

| Plant

Pleasure

Plough

-Ploughman

Plain

A native of the plains

Plate,.dish. Platter

: Parent

Plantain

Pine (tree)

Pepper

| Potter

| Peach

Priest

Rains—the

Rice in husk

Rice unhusked

Rice, boiled

River

[islet

Root

English.

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Chuyu

Chaschu

Sangma

Chhidi

Ming

EKksa, Yeksa

No name

Pichyang. Chuschung |

Cho’no

Cho’no humlung*

Sélipun’g

Yo’king

Chyakphen

Namsang

No word

No word.

used

Epi. Yepi

Yansa

Penteng

Tholu

Liang (in composition

with verbs only)

Levi

Bong

Rukchyang

Rukvi.

mif

Tengteng

Tengteng-wo-mi. Teng-

tengbe mutvi

Talung

Phokvi.

Risa

Thong chhing

No name

Ko-chonvi

Powanset

None (Pater familias

performs the part)

Loncho-beli

Chuyu

Nanum

Nannum tokvinima§

Boja

Chhan’ga

Ham

Bingmu

Gang

Ro-chhing

Kee

No word

Gai is now

Rukcho-wo-

Bok’ pingvi

) * Place where nose is perforated.

Tt Wo is masculine suffix: mi, feminine == hal-wala-wali

| ¢ Sé= fruit, generic sign, as Phum is for trees,

| §

English.

Road

Rope

Roof

Rhododendron

Salt

Silence

Spade. Spud. Hoe

Spear

Shape, form

Sheep kind

Spirits (distilled)

Spindle

Spinner

Skin

Scull, P.

Shoe, sandal

Sole of foot

Seed

Seive

Sleep

Sail of boat

Sand

Spittle

Silver

Sport, play

Sisterkood—the

Sister

Sitting chamber

Spider

Smith

Snake

Sky

Son-in-law

Son

My son

Thy son

His, her son

Shoulder

Shepherd

Side

Star

Summit, top

Snow

Summer

Storm

Steam

Smoke

Literally, rain-pelting days, or rainy season.

375

Lom

Damla

No name

Than-kapu li

Chia, culinary. Jikhom,

other

Giwon

Chokha

No word

Narung

Beli (Bhenglung is the

Barwal)

Buke’ha

Chingchyang

Chingvi

Kokchho

Puchhi ra

Khokhek

Lé pengteng

Ru (bone)

Yayang

[mpi

No name

No word

Cheku

Dawangmi. Lit. the

shining, the white

No word

Nunung-cho

Nunu, elder.

younger

Mialung

No name

Khakching tovi

Hobu

Nomo (sun)

Janwai

Tawo

Aung tawo

Ung tawo

AX tawo. Wathim tawo.

TYnung tawo. Minung

tawo

Phaka

Beli tunvi

Yakaju.

Khwamen

Wani

Livi

Jekhom nima

Kungjum

Hilili

Kulu

Diyu,

Khuk

376

English.

Strength

Song

Sow

Sun

Sunshine

Sunrise

Sunset

Still

Stone

Stomach

Shade, shadow

Straw

Sword

Tail

Testicle

Tiger

Thigh

Thirst

Tooth

Turmeric

Toe

Toe nail

Tongue

Time

Thread

Thunder

Thief

Theft

Tree

Tree bark

Uncle, Pat.

Uncle, Mat.

Urine

Man’s urine

Goat’s urine

Vein

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Choli

Kwom

Mescho pok’

Nomo, Numa

Lo-gang

Nomo-loksing

Nomo-thipsing

Bukcha pochyang

Lunphu

Muli (the organ)

Veli

Khisti

No name

Mun

Chalung (egg)

Bilu

Phekteng

Tidaksa

Lia

Sinphi

Lé blemen

Lé demen

No name. Sing in com-

position with verbs)

No word

Nomo Sangma

Khitumtn

Khutu

Singphum* (Phum in

composition)

Sing kokchho (= tree

leather)*

Pongpong

Kuku

Chipi. Chepi

Singtong chipi

Che’li chépi

Vichho lom

Vegetable, wild herbs Chokphi setung

and roots

Vetch, pea

Village

Victuals

Vice, sin

Voice

Valley

Vulva

Wall

Water

* See tree’s leaf where sing is only used. So also in branch of tree, root of tree, flower or

With the entire tree of all sorts phum

fruit of tree,

No word

No word (Mulung =

dwelling-place is used)

Jatang

No word

Sangma

No word

Juju

Khoksu

Newari is the same si hau =

sing lo,

English.

Water spring

Drinking water

Cooking water

Washerman

Washing water

Weight (instrument)

Weight, heaviness

Wife

My wife

Thy wife

His wife

Our wife

is)

= Your wife

Their wife

Our wife f

Our wife

= ) Your wife

Their wife

Wax

W heat

Winter

Wizard

Witchcraft

Witch

Wealth

Weaver

Weed, g:ass

Woman

Wood

Wool

Work

Wound

Wrist

Year

Pronouns.

I, ego

Thou

He, She, It

We two

incl. excl.

is suffixed, as risa phum, plantain tree = kela ma Newari.

+ The possessive m, mu is repeated or not and given either with the pronoun or with the

numeral thus : ‘of them the two the child’ is Wathim nakpom cho’mi or Minung nakpo cho’mi.

{ Wife or wives is the same, ‘he plural sign khata is seldgm or never added to the ngun

when the pronoun conveys the sense.

Vayu.

Ti vok lung

Dakmune ti

Khoschyang tf

Up’vi

Upchyang ti

Poke’ hyang

No word

Romi

Ang romi

Ung romi

Wathim romi. A romi.)

Minung romi. Tnung)

roml .

Angchi romi, excl.

Ungchi romi, incl.

Ungchi romi

Achi-romit

A ae romi |

Angki romi, excl.

Ungki romi, incl.

Unni romi

A khata-romi.

khata-romi.

khata-romi or Mie«

nung khata-romi

Dikphi

No name

Jungsa nomo

Jochhang pdévi

Jochhang

Jeva pungvi

Buma

Jochbang povi |

Penku. Gosta |

Moksa

Mescho

Sing

Beli swom |

No word. Kam _ is)

used ee

Got thulung

Thong

]

Gon

Wa'thi. Mi. T. A

Gonakpo

— Se

)

1857.]

English. Vayu.

Ye two Gonchhe*

They two Y nakpo. A nakpo.

7 Wathi nakpo.* Mi-

nakpo

We all Gokhata

incl. excl.

Ye all Gone. Génekhata

They all Mikhata, Wathikhata.

Tkhata, Akhata

This I, all three genders

That A, Wathi, Mi, ditto, (a,

' is rather possessive)

These, dual

nayung: n.

Y khata: m. f. n.

Wathinakpo, A nakpo.

Minakpo, m. f. Wa-

thi nayung, &c. n.f

Wathikhata 1

These, plural

Those, dual

Those, plural

Mikhata a ue =

A khata

Self, selves None

Mvself, Thyself. None

Himself

Own, my, thy, his own None

Any, some (koi) per- Su ;

Suna, D. Su

nakpo, Pl. Sukhata

or Susu; m, and f,

subs. and adj.

son

Any, some (kucch) Mische: n, subs, only.

thing Mische nayung, D.

Mische khata or Mis-

che Miscke, Pl.

' Many, much Chhinggnak (m. f, n.

Few, little Yanggnak subs.and

How much, many Hatha adj. and

adv.

So much, many Mitha

| all No word

| The whole Khiri, Khulup in num-

bering

‘Half Phak: com, gen. subs.

and adj. Ba, adj. only

Vayu Vocabulary.

I nakpo: m. andf. T

377

English. Vayu.

Which, What, Who, Hanung, subs. and adj.

Relative, of allgen- Hanung nakpo, m-.f. :

ders, subs. or ad- Hanung nayung, n.:

jectival, and Dual.

Which? What? Hanung hanung= or

Interrogative, rela- Hanung khata, Pl.:

tive, Which of se- m. f. n.: inter, and

veralexhibited per- _relativet

sons or things:

subs. adj. m. f. n.

Who? Su. Suna, m. f. Suna

nakpo, Dual. Susu,

Suna suna or sukhata,

P]. m.and f,: subs.

and adj.

Whoever Sunado

What ? Mische, n.: subs. Mis-

che nayung, Dual.

Mische khata. Mis-

che mische, Pl.

Whatever Mischeda

Either Y ki wathi. Y ki mi

Both Nakpo, m. f. Nang-

mi, f.[ Nayung, n.

Several No word

My Ang ]

Thy Ung

His, her, its A cen three

Wathim f genders

Ynung |

Minung J

{ Our Angchi. excl.

Ungchi incl.

= | Your Unchi

=< Their Tnakpum.§ Minak-

= pum. Wathim nak-

| pum. A nakpum or

Achi

ae Angki, excl. Ungki, incl.

rg | Your Unni

= 4 Their A khata. Wathim kha-

a ta. Minung khata.

g Tnung khata

* Chhe the dual sign of 2nd pronoun is not used with Ist and 3rd. The numeral two

_ (nakpo) is substituted.

Hanung gothoto’pungmi mii nomi, the hand with which I struck pains me.

Literally, what hand with I struck that pains.

re. 2.

However much the Tartar tongues eschew

relative pronouns, they still can and do use them in this way, and Newari which is one of the

simpler Himalayan tongues herein agrees with Vayu which belongs to the complex class. So

also you can say for ‘*call the wan who has come” Hanungdo dongmi mii khamto, or, more

usually, Phista khamto.

ft See numerals.

Nakpo, m.; Nangmi, f.; Nayung neuter, is no doubt the proper form,

But these signs are passing out of use and Nakpo is now often used for all persons, male

or female,

§ Inak pum or Inung nakpo or Inung nakpum. The possessive nung is peculiar to the

demonstratives which it distinguishes from the adverbs of time and place. Inungmu or

minungmu, of him,

Inhemu Minhemu, of here, of there.

Ithemu Mithemu, of now, of then.

378 Viyu Vocabulary. [No. 5. !

English. Vayu. English. Vayu.

Mine Ang mu ( Our’s Angchimu. excl.

Thine Ung mn ~ | Ungchimu. incl,

His, her’s, its A mu. Wathim mu.| 3 1 Your’s Unnimu

Minung mu. Tnung| ~~ (Their’s Wathim khatamu. Mi |

mu - khaétamu. IY khiata- |

( Our’s Angchimu. — excl, mu.* A khatamu. |

Ungchimu. — inel. Potius.

ty | Your’s Ungchimu Minung khata mu. |

= + Their’s Achimu, Wathim nak Inung khata mu |

a | pomu. Minung nak

pomu. ITnung nak

le pomu.

* T or inung, that is, the genitive sign is repeated at pleasure. Nung and ni, as well as |

m and mu (and also mi) are genitival and inflexional. Inung of this person: Ini of this place, |

1857.]

Good

Bad

Cunning

Deceitful

Candid

Truthful

Malicious

Benevolent

Industrious

Idle

True

False

Passionate, hasty

Placid, patient

Cowardly

Brave

Constant minded

Unchangeable ;

Inconstant

Changeable \

Wasteful, profuse

Niggardly

Kind, gentle

Unkind, harsh

Obedient

Disobedient

Mad, idiotic

Licit

Thlicit

Bodily, physical

Mental

Hungry

Thirsty

Naked

Libidinous, man

Libidinous, woman

Viyu Vocabulary. 379

Vayu Adjectives.— Vocabulary.

Crude. Affixes.

mas. fem. neuter.

Noh’ka wo mi mu.

Mang noh’ka wo mi mu.

Chek pangsing wo mi mu.

, bas is m, f.

Mang pingvi f ie fie.

Diksa hotvi | agate

Noh’kathum gotvi Ae affix. | Participal, like all

Yangsa havi i . of the same form

Bae. 2 ditto

6ng havi that follow.

Kam povi |

Hanvi Mutvi pute

{ Kam mang povi

Diksa wo mi mu,

1 Diksa hotvi no affix. ‘

Mang diksa wo mi mu.

4 Diksa mang hotvi no affix.

Risi bukvi m, f.

/ Risi not’vi no affix.

Risi wo mi.

Mang risi bukvi notvi m, f. no affix.

1 Mae risi ——_ ~=owo mi,

Ranvi | m. f,

Gam not’vi

Mang ranvi fa affix.

Ramma not’ vi

Wonvi

ditto.

Mang wonvi

Hokcho wo mi.

Ho’vi: m. f.: no affix.

Khali wo mi: no neuter.

Yansa manghavi no affix.

Yansahavi: no affix.

Honvi m. f.: no affix.

Manghonvi no affix.

Thumnasidumta ;: no affix.

Patang: n. no affix.

Mang patang ditto

Chhomu “?

hacia \ genitival, n.

Suksa wo mi mu.*

Saks metvi m. f.

Suksa meta no affix.

Tidaksa wo mi mu.*

Tidaksa metvi Wa. f:

meta no affix,

Gunangsenti wo mi mu.

Luphta m. f. 0. : no affix.

Mescho daksa metvi m.: no affix.

Loncho daksa metvi f.: no affix,

* Wo and mi for rationals: mu for other beings.

380

Gluttonous

Drunkard, drunken*

Foul mouthed

Vayu Vocabulary.

Chhing gnakjovi

Chhing gnaktunvi

Jit’ vi

Abusive Jisi

: Kenki

Alive \ Gotvi

Dying Met’ vi

Dead Me’ta

Sick Met’kenvi

Sickening Mang phat’ vi

Sick, sickened Met kinta

Healthy, healthful Phatvi

Sleepy, asleep Invi. Impi yot’vi

Healthful Imta. Impi yos’ta

Wakeful, waking Sivi. Bok’vi

Awake, intr. Sipta. Bokta

Awakened, tr. and Sipta. Sip pingta

causal Pokta. Pok pingta

Young Cho’mi

Youthful Tthijila (== small)

Mature, in prime of life | ea

Old, aged Chokta

Strong Bey

Choti notvi-khotvi

Mang choti

Weak Mang choti khotvi

Confined Thikta

Free, Freed Teshta

Bing-cho

Handsome Bing-mi

Bingmu

Ugly Mang bing-cho

Tall, high

Short, low

Great, big

Small, little

Fat, fattened

Thin, thinned

Tired, weary

Fresh, not tired

Lame,

Lamed

Blind, blinded

Deaf

Dumb

Alone, solitary

Companioned

Wise

Foolish

Learned

Ignorant

Jongta

Mang jongta

Honta

Cho’mi

Ithijila

Lonta

Gerta

Jyopta

Mang jyopta

Khokhappovi

Mang khokvi

Mang yenvi

Mang thatvi

Mang hot’vi

Chhaling

Kacho gotvi

Juk’vi. Set’vi

Mang jukvi. Setvi

Lista

Mang lista

[ No. 5.

m. f.: no affix.

ditto.

m. and f.: ditto,

wo, mi. m. f.

wot mi mu,

m.f. No sign.

m. and f,

m. and f. | Participal. No affix

ft of gender,

m. f.

m. f. :

Ditto.

m. f. n: no affix.

m. f.n: no affix.

wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. &c.

m. Tf. 7.

wo mi

no affix,

m. f.n.: no affix.

m. f. n.: no affix.

mu.

a } rationals.

n. and c.: bestials,

mi mu.

m. f.n.:

ditto,

ditto.

no affix,

{ ditto.

ditto.

m. f. n.:

ditto.

m. f, n.

no affix,

m. f. n.

no affix.

m. f.n.i. e. rationals and beasts.

m. f. n.

cho, m,: mi, f.: mu, n. &c.

m. f.: no sign.

ditto,

m. f.: no sign.

ditto.

* Drunken = drunk cannot be applied to a being, any more than heard, though

The inherence of the passive sense in the past participle

beaten, seen, &c. can. ho a8 : ae

generally is the reason why the present participle of transitives is aoristic.

is he who drinks or drank. Tunta is what is drunk.

+ Wo, vo, and mi for mas, and fem. of rationals: mu for irrationals but often

used for all, as a sign of common gender,

Tunvi

1857.]

Rich

Poor

Noisy, talkative

Silent

Dirty

Clean

Cleansed

Married

Not married, single

Taxed

Exempt

Old

New

Ready, prepared

(clothes, food &c.

Unready, not ready

Ready

Unready

Common, abundantly

procurable

Scarce, rarely procur-

able

Public, assert, revealed,

patent

Private, secret, con-

cealed, latent

Successful

Prosperous

Unprosperous

Unsuccessful

Saleable

Viyu Vocabulary. 381

Got’ vi

Penkhu

| Mang gotvi

m, f.: no sign,

wo, m. mi, f, no, neuter.

wo mi,

m. f. partie.

Mang penkhu

Penkhu mang gotvi

Davo povi*

jis m. f.: no sign.

Botvi

Giwon ponvi* m. f.: no sign.

Penki wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. &c.

Penki notvi.

Wota m. f. n.: no sign.

Penki mang notvi.

Ro-choy m.

Ro-mi f

Ro-cho-gotvi, f.; Romi gotvi, m.

Bia pota m. f,

Mang rocho m.

Mang romi f.

Bia mang pota c.

Ro-cho-romi mang gotvi.

Phengvi

Mang ree

Yukhang

Mithong

Nyesi

Chusta

Minta

Mang chusta.

3 Mans minta.

Tering

Mang tering

ane:

Chhing gnak lingtang.

m. f.n. Participal.

bwo, m. mi, f. mu, n, and c.

wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. and c.

} n.; no sign.

wo mi

mu,

mu.

$Yang guak lingtang.

Khunta

m. f. n.

No sign,

Khista

Hokvift

Hokta

Hoktang

{Msn hokvi.

fm f. n. of all 3 times.

Mang hokta.

Mang hoktang.

Thamtang m. f. n.

* From pako and ponche respectively.

+ Rocho and Romi are so generally used substantivally for man and wife that

there is some hesitation about the adjectival use of them, though ‘‘ cho and mi”

as suffixes are demonstrably equivalent to wo, vo and mi.

Still as they are some-

what obsolete the latter are often now superadded, bing-cho-wo = pulcher, bing-cho-

mi = pulchra.

also used in the same

chomi,

Other words of the same form, as Bangcho, adult or an adult, are

two ways, viz.: Bancho, bangmi and Bangchowo, bang-

Compare Lon-cho, a man and Mes-cho, a woman among the substautives.

Bo-chho = the white-bodied, a white man, is quite a different affair.

$~ Hok’, a neuter verb, is the source.

382

Sold

Purchaseable

Purchased

Similar

Dissimilar

The same

Different

Another

Easy

Difficult

Changeful

Changeable

Changed

Changeless

Unchangeable

Unchanged

Orderly, set in order

Disorderly, disordered

Having possessed of

tenens

Dispossessed

Ousted

Not having

Ornamented

Plain

Useful

Useless

) Mang tota

Vayu Vocabulary.

Thamta m. f.n

Ingtang m. f. n

Ingta m. f. n.

Totvi m. f. n.

Mang tot’ vi.

> us aie

5 ri genitival, all genders.

fo}

Gyetti. Gyeti

Mang chamta m. f. n.

Chamta m. f. n. \ past participles.

Jyapvi ( Participles pr. and f.: m.f. n.z

Jyaptang* No sign.

Jyapta PrPart.

Mang jyapvi

Mang jyaptang }pr, and fut. participles.

Mang Jyapta

Tophta (Tosta)

Khalim khulim pota

m. f.n.: participial.

m. f. n.: participial.

Got’vi. Tovi

Mang gotvi

Mang gota

m, f.: participial.

Thosta

Bing chopota

Mang bing chopota

Kamu, genitival

Mang kammu.

kam mang povi.

kam mang pachyang.

Plakvi

Quick moving, active m, f.: no neuter.

Slow moving, lazy, inert Gatvi m. f.: no neuter.

Wholesome, eatable Jatang n

Unwholesome, uneatable Mang jatang n.

Manufactured wrought, Pota n.

Unwrought Mang pota.

Sharp Ye’vi n. (verb yep’.)

Sharpened Yepta. Yeppingta,

Blunt Gnumvi n. (verb Gnun.)}

Blunted Gnuta. Gnut’pingta

Grinded Reta }

Woven Pungta |

Spun Chingta |. Past participles.

Platted Pungta

Spacious, wide, ample Byengta J)

Contracted, narrow Mang by-engta

Moving, capable of

motion Duk’ vi m. f. n.

Moveable, capable of

being moved Thuktang mi: £. m2

Motionless, n. Mang dukvi m. f. n.

Moved, a. Thukta m. f. n,

Moved, n. Dukta m. f. n.

[No. 5.

Kampachyang,n.: participial.

* These agree as being derived from intransitive verb jyapehe.

what changes; Jyaptang who or what is wont or liable to change.

Jyapvi, who or

pels

14857. ]

Immoveable

Figured

Figureless

Figureable

Unfigureable

Luminous

Shining

Illumined

Alluminated

Illuminable

Dark, obscure

Darkened

Flaming

Burning-self

Kindled-self

Kindled

Lighted other

Inflamed

Burnt, consumed by fire

Burning, in process of

destruction by fire

Extinguishing self,

going out, dying

(flame)

Extinguished self, gone

out

Extinguished by other,

put out,

The upper, superior

‘The lower, inferior

Vayu Vocabulary. 383

Mang thuktang.

Narung

5 Natung notvi.

Narung ma notvi.

Mang narung wo mi

¢Narung patang.

@Narung hatang.

Narung mang patang.

eee mang hatang.

{ Dang dang mu.

Dang dang dumta,

Dang dang notvi.

Dang dang pota.

Dang dang thumta.

Dang dang ma patang.

ba kung mu.

Kung kung no’ta.

yKung kung pota.

Kung kung thumta.

Navi, candle,

Jotv’i, fire.

Nata josta.

wo, m. mi, f. mu, n. and c.

mu.

Nata. Josta.*

Nat’ pingta.

Jot’ pingta. Dupta.

Yemta, general.

Umta, a corpse.

Yemvi.

Met’ vi,

Me’ta.

Met’pingta. Sishta.

Lonkha

Yonkha

cho mi mu.

cho ml mu.

* One great defect of this language (largely participated by the cognate tongues

and even by English) is rendered peculiarly observable in its adjectives, owing to

their being so very commonly the same with its participles.

The defect is this,

that all sorts of verbs (neuter, reflex and transitive) and even the various forms of

the same verbal root, are confounded in the participles ; that is they take identical

forms as participles, though the senses be often very different. Thus Nache, kindle

thyself or be kindled, and nako, kindle it, and nato, kindle it for him, all alike

give navi and nata; and, as there is no separate form of the agent, navi is also

the kindler. Pains are taken by the multiplication of roots to keep the several

sorts of action distinct; but the further distinctions of active, intransitive and

transitive action are lost in the participles by defects of structure in the language.

Thus sishta is self-killed and killed by another, and nata is self-kindled or kindled

by another, though natpingta, the causal, may be used to express the latter sense.

The defects of English aggravate those of Vayu. Thus a lamp that has been

lighted, while it burns, is a burning lamp or lighted lamp, though the last word

seems to infer what is past. In Vayu you can similarly say navi or nata tuphi,

though navi (trans.) be also the lighter, not the lighted. In English you cannot say

the lighting lamp for the lamp that is kindled and burning. In Vayu you cannet

ase the word burning which is appropriated to destruction by fire.

o84.

Right

Left

Central

Eastern

Western

Northern

Southern

Passable

Accessible

Impassable

Cultivated (soil)

Uncultivated

Cultivable

Uncultivable

Fruitful, rich (soil)

Barren, poor sterile

Sandy

Clayey

Calcarious

Saline

Muddy

Dusty

Brackish (water)

Fresh

Flowing

Still

Deep

Shallow

Mie } weather

tormy

Fine, fair

Cold

Hot

Cloudy

Sunshiny

Rainy, wet

Dry, fair

Moist, full of vapour

Moist, sappy

Green (wood)

Juicy (fruit)

Juiceless, dry

Wooden

Leathern

Stony, made of stone

Stony, stone bearing

Wet (clothes)

Dry

Wooded (land)

Open, naked

Vayu Vocabulary.

Jaja-mu

Khanja-mu

Madum-mu

Nomo loklung mu

Nomo thiplung-mu

Liriphum-mu

Lonkha-mu

Yonkha-mu

Khoktang.

Khokmung.

Mang khoktang,

Mang khokmung.

Rukta. Dota.

Mang rukta. Mang dota.

Ruktang. Dotang.

Mang ruktang. Mang dotang.

Hokvi.

Mang hokvi.

No name.

Chotang.

Chunmu.

Jikbommu

Pes-chyongmu.

Pinkumu.

Jikhommu.

Daktang (desirable.)

Chhumta (sweet.)

Gik’vi

Mang gikvi.

Kho (s) ta.

Mang kho (s) ta

Hojumpovi.

Nob’kamu,

Jungsamu.

Jeta. Jekhommu,

Kokchhomu, Kokchho-not’vi.

Logangmu Genitival,

Logang katvi Participal.

Nanummu

Nanum tok’vi

Nanummang tok’vi

Kowal not’ vi

Genitival.

case sign.

ditto.

Chha’langmu Genitival,

Genitival.

Participal,

Bulummu

Bulum notvi

Bulum ma notvi.

Sosomu.

Mang bulummu.

Singmu.

Kokchhomu.

Lumphumu.

Lumphu notvi,

Nata.

Dungta. Bo’ta,

Thimthimmu

Lakalakamu

Sunta.

} Genitival.

[ No. 5.

Mu is the genitive

1857.]

Coloured

Colourless

Colourable

Fit to be coloured

Red

White (thing)

White (man)

Black

Blue

Green

Yellow

Sweet

Sour

Bitter

Ripe, ripened

Ripening

Raw

Rotten

Sound, fresh

Coarse

Fine

Rough

Smooth {

Polished

Unpolished

Straight

Crooked

to touch

to eye »

Full, filled

Empty

Self-emptied

Emptied by another

Causal of the last

Solid

Hollow

Heavy

Light (levis)

Great

Small

Long

Short

Wide

Narrow

High

Low

Angular

Round

Spherical

Pointed

Edged

Broken

Burst

Broken, long things

\ round things

Vayu Vocabulary.

Chikta. Blekta

Mang chikta

Mang blekta

Chiktang.

Blektang.

Langchhing

Dawang

Bochho

Khakchhing

No name,

Girung

Heldung

Chhingjimu.

‘ Participal.

wo mi mu,

Juta (from Juto, make sour.)

Khata (from Khato, make bitter.)

Minta, Jishta.

Minvi. Jitvi.

Chhalang

Ri (s) ta, Wonta,

wo mi mu.

Mang ri (s) ta. Mang wonta.

Hokhro

Napi

Hokhro

Liku

Likyep

Likyep pota.

Likyep ma pota.

Cheng-cheng

Kojulang

Kwonghhet

Phul

Damta

Polang

Polang no’ta, dumta,

Polang pota.

Polang papingta.

Phul

Polang

wo mi mu.

no sign, m. f. n,

wo mi mu.

Lista (Li, root ; Lita trans.)

Oksang

Honta (size or rank.)

Cho’mi (size and rank.)

Ithijila (young)

Phinta

Mang phinta

Byengta

Mang byengta.

Jongta

Mang jongta

Tesre

No word.

Teltel

Kulkul

Kyerkyer

Ye’vi. Yepta

Reta (self)

Kheta (by other).

wo mi mu.

n.: no sign.

ditto.

all genders: no sign,

ditto.

wo mi mu,

Jekta (self.) Chikta (by other.)

385

886 Vayu Vocabulary. No. 5.

Torn Jekta (self.) Jita (by other.)

Split Chita.*

Intire By negative prefix to all or any of the above 7 words.

Porous Jot’ vi.

Imporous Mang jot’ vi.

Opening Hovi.

Open Hota.

Shutting Thikvi.

Shut Thikta.

Spread Chhya (s) ta.

Folded Kho (s) ta.

Expanded, blown (flower) Bo’ta.

Expanding (ditto) Bot’ vi.

Closed, shut = not ex- , ’

panded (ditto) Bs

Unblown, not blowing Mang bot’vi.

Tight Khwasta.

Slack Woso. Wosomu.

Loose, unsteady

Shaking | ok Hoktang. F

Shakeable

Fixed, firm Do (s) ta.

Unsbakeable Dot’ pingta.

Unshaking Mang hoktang. Mang hokvi.

Cooked Khosta.

Boiled Tibe khosta.

Roasted Sonta

Grillea Chota \ Melee khosta.

Hen Swom gotvi Participal.

y Swom mu Genitival.

Hairless Swom ma got’vi. Mang swommu.

Feathered Chinchi swommu. Chinachi swom notvi.

Falling (on ground) Rukvi m. f.

Falling (from aloft) Dukvi m. f. n.

Fallen Rukta. Dukta.

About to fall

Ready to fall } Ruktang. Duktang.

Falling (tree) Likvi.

Fallen (tree) Likta.

Felling (man) Photvi.

Felled (tree) Phosta.

About to be felled Phostang.

Rising. Standing Tvi, Buk’vi.

Erect. Risen Ipta. Bukta.t

Raised. Made erect Ippingta. Bukpingta. Pukta.

Lifted up, aloft Re’ta. Guta.

Pat down Tota

Sitting Mutvi.

Seated self Musta (Muphta.)

Seated by other Mut’pingta.

Lying down. Recumbent Likvi m. f. n.

Laid down. Reclined Likta (self)

Prostrated. Laid down Likpingta (by other.)

Wakened

Aeehe n. and a. Sipta.

* These six are nearly equal to ‘Urdu and Hindi tuta, tora; phuta phora

phata, phara. + Ipta if previously seated: Bukta if lying down,

1857. | Viyu Vocabulary. — 387

Awakened, causal Sippingta.

Waking Sipvi. mi

Wakening Sippingvi.

Sleeping Imvi.

Asleep Imta.

Sleepy Impi yot’vi.

Put to sleep Iwpingta.

Foreign Gyeti namsang wo-mi-mu.*

Home-bred, ofone’s own { Angki namsang wo-mi-mu.

race Angki thoko wo-mi-mu.

Written Blekta.

Read Lista.

Desirous Yotvi, dakvi.

Desired Yosta, dakta.

: Yostang, yot’mun

ele Daltans : Daeene!

Baten Jotat

Drank Tungta,

Loving Chhanvi.

Loved Chhanta.

Amiable, fit to be loved Chhantang,

Payable Phengtang. Phengmung

Paid Phengta

Well odoured Noh’ka namsang WwOemi-mu,

Stinking Mang noh’ka namsang wo-mi-mu.

Tibetan Chhugong wo-mi-mu.

Nepalese Hengong wo-mi-mu.

Of the plains of India Gagin wo-mi-mu,.

Woollen, made of wool Beliswommu n.

Woolly, wool-bearing —Beliswom notvi m, f.

Wooden, made of wood Singmu n.

Timber-bearing, woody Singnot’vi. n.

Golden Heldung-mi, f. ?

Tron, adj. made of iron Khakchhing-mi, f. ?

Silver, adj. made ofsilver{ Dawang-mi, f.

Hairy, made of hair Swommu n.

Hairy, bearing hair Swom not’vi m. f.

* Literally of another smell, smelling differently from one’s own folk.

+ The English senses of the participles eating and drinking must be variously

expressed by the participles, infinitive and gerunds, thus, Don’t hinder the eating

man, Jovi or jovi singtong tha thikto. By dint of eating or by excess of eating

he will get ili, Jahe jahe nomi (no to be illand to be). Hating is better than drink-

ing, Tungmungkhen jamung noh’ka. By drinking to excess he got intoxicated

Chhinggnak tungtungha vimi.

{ These last three words mean literally the yellow, the black and the shining or

white. Very much as in English, they are of the same form as substantives and

adjectives. They appear to be regarded as feminines because they have the

feminine suffix formative, or mi.

388

As great as he

Greater than he

Greatest of all

As small as she

Smaller than she

Smallest of all

Vayu Vocabulary.

Comparison of Adjectives.

Wathim bdéhamu honta.

Wathim khen honta.

. _*

treated: i khen honta, or Sabim khen-honta.

Wathim-

Minung-

( Wathim- ghand

2 Wiwene- \ khen cho’mi,

Inung khata-

Minung khata-

\ bahamu cho’mi,

} khen cho’mi, or Sabim khen-cho’mi.

[No. 5.

Very great Chhing gnak honta.

Very small Chhing gnak cho’mi.

Very cold Chhing gnak khimta.

Very hot Chhing gnak jeta, or jikhommu.

Cold Khimta.

Colder { “a : Lichen khimta.

ini-

Coldest ae \ ichata khen khimta, or Sabim khen khimta.

Hot Jeta, Jekhommu.

Hotter cae. i Khen jeta, or jekhommu.

¢( Ini- Khata khen jeta or jekhommu, or Sabim khen

Hottest ¢ Mini- jeta.

Vayu Numerals.

Separate. Masculine. Feminine. Neuter and common.

Kom-pu Kwomi

7 Kola Kwong-pu Kwongmi biol

2, Na-yung Na-k-po Nang-mi Nayung

3. Chhu-yung Chhu-k-po Chhung-mi Chhu-yung

4. Bli-ning Bli-k-pu Bli-ng-mi Bli-ning

5. U-ning Ung-pu? Um-mi? U-ning

6, Chhu-ning Caret Caret Chhu-ning

Viyu Adverbs.

Adverbs of time.

To-day Tiri.

To-morrow Nukun.

Yesterday Tenchong.

Day after to-morrow Niha.

Day before yesterday Nithibuk.

This year Tin thong. YIthong.

Last year Ninganung.

Year before last Chhukthongnung.

Year before that Blikthong.

Coming year Ningahe.

Year after that Chhukthonghe.

Year after that Blikthonghe.

* Yand Mithe demonstratives make ini inung, mini minung for casus con-

structus; but as khata the plural sign seldom admits of inflexion, the sign of the

genitive which is required by the preposition, is attached to the pronoun in sin-

gular, sometimes to both, inung khatam. Newari agrees so far that in all the

construct cases it rejects the plural sign. Thus Ji-ping, we, wo-ping they, make

Ji-mi, wo-mi our’s their’s,

1857]

Now

Then

When? When

Since when ?

By and by

Instantly

At once

Before, priorly

After in composition

Afterwards

Since

Till, until

Till now

Hitherto

Till then

Till when ?

From. when ?

Formerly, long ago

At present

Now-a-days

Whilst

Henceforth

Hereafter

Thenceforth

Thereafter

Ever

Never

Often

Sometimes

Harly (shortly)

Soon (quickly)

Late (slowly)

At night, in the night

in the day

All day

Daily

At sun rise

At cock crow

At dawn

At sunset

At dusk

At night fall

From night till morn

Noon

Midnight

Till noon

At noon

To-morrow morning,

to-morrow at dawn

Yesterday-night

Yesterday at night

In 2 or three days

In 1 or 2 days

In 3 or 4 days

-How long ?

At once, at one time,

Once

Twice

Thrice

Four times

How often

Vayu Vocabulary. 389

Abo. Ythe. Umbe] ithi-he — in this, and mithi-he

Mithe \ = in that (time).

Hakhe. Hakhaning. Interrogative and relative.

Hakhanengkhen.

Omop’he, Later. Omhe.

Waliga.

Kophe (Kophi he.)

Hubong, Honko

Khen,

Nungna.

Hakhanungkhen.

Bong.

pes bong. [tham bong. Abobong. Abonung bong.

Mithanung bong.

Hakhe bong, UHakhanung bong,

Hakhekhen. Hakbanungkhen.

Mithong. Honko.

Tiri nukin.

Not’he (in the being).

Ithekhen. Umbekhen.

khen.

Mithekhen. Mithongkhen. Mithongnunkhen.

No word.

Hakhele.

Giri giri.

Kophi nak’ phi

Mithong bong. Mithe bong.

Abokhen. Tirikhen. Ithong-

i Plak’plak’ha.

Gat’ gat’tha.

Eksahe. Eksa nung. Yeksa-nung-he.

Numa nung, Numa he.

Numa khiri.

Hatha numa,

Nomo loksinghe.

Khochho oksinghe.

Dangdang dumsinghe.

Nomo thipsinghé.

Kungkung dumsinghé.

Eksa dumkhen.

Eksakhen nomolok bong.

_ Khangse numa.

Khangse yeksa.

Khangse numa bong.

Khangse numa he.

Nukun dang-dang dum he.

Tenchong eksa.

Tenchong eksa dum he.

Nak buk’chhuk buk’he.

Kwong buk’nak buk’he,

Chhukbuk blik buk’he.

Hakbuk’.

Kophe ‘| Ko-phi &c. are regarded as compound sub-

Kophi | stantives in the nominative case. In the

Nakphi l locative, Kophe &c. best agree with

Cbhhukphi f our idea of adverbs. But they are used

Blikphi |. in either case, All are regularly declin-

Hakphi J) able.

3 E

390 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 5.

Again Gessa.

Adverbs of place.

Here and there Ttha dokha.

Hereward Inirek. Inungrek. I tha.

Thereward Minirek. Dokha. Minungrek. Wathimrek.

Here Inhe.

There Wathe. Minhe.*

Where 2 ae ae also relatively and minhe correlatively.

i o also the interrogative of time.

Hence Tnikhen. 4

Thence Minikhen. Wathimkhen. Minungkhen.

Whence ? Hanikhen. Hanungkhen.

Which way?

By what way?

Hanung lom.

Hanung jom khen.

By that way Wathim lom khen.

By this way I lom khen.

This far Inibong. Inungbong.

That far Minibong. -Minungbong. Wathimbong.

How far Hanibong. Hanungbong.

By that way TMi. Wathi lom khen.

Near Khe’wa.

In the near Khe’ wabe.

From the near Khewakhen.

Far Kho’lam.

In the far Kho’lam be

From the far

To, up to, the far

How far ?

Thus far

How near ?

This near

That near

Kho’lamkhen.

Kholam bong.

Hatha kholam.

Inhe bong.

Hatha khewa.

Ytha khewa.

Mitha khewa.

Nearer Inikhen-khewa. Minikhen-khewa.

Nearest Minung khata khen khewa.

Very near Chhing gnak khewa.

Rather near Yang gnak khewa.

Further Inikhen-kholam. Minikhen-kholam.

Furthest Inung khatakhen-kholam. Minung khatakhen-kholam.

Rather far Yang gnak kholam.

Very far Chhing gnak kholam.

Down Yonkha.

Up Lonkha.

Above Wanhe (wani-he, in the top).

Below Huthe (buti-he, in the bottom).

Form above Wanikhen.

From below Hutikhen.

From top to bottom Wanikhen hutim bong.

* ¢¢Tn,” the locative, has 2 forms, bé and é or hé. Wathé = wathi-he and

minhe — mini-he, in that. So wanhe = wani-he in the top. Again, in the hand,

eye, head, fire, is bé; gotbe, mekbe, puchhibe, mebe. In the house is kemé and

in the tree singphum-é. The present gerund has hé, phit-he, Also nung, phit-

nung. The words for place and time or ‘‘ lung” and ‘‘ sing’’ cannot be used with

pronouns, only with verbs (mu-lung = place of sitting ; lok-sing = time of rising) ;

and hence now and then, here and there, are but in this or that. There is no real

difference between the two. The inflective signs ni and nung are equally applicable

to both.

+ Mini or Minung lomkhen and Wathim lomkhen are the inflected phases of the

term. They are as usual and more correct.

1857.]

Under, by under way

Over, by the top

Towards

Upwards, towards the top

Downwards, towards

the bottom

Between, in the midst

From between

By the middle

By the midway

On the right

On the left

From the right

From the left

Towards the right

Towards the left

Out

Through

Across

On this side

On that side

On both sides

From this to that side

Round

Before

Behind

Aside, at, or on the flank

To the side

By the side

Face to face

Opposite

Abreast

Straight

Onwards

Forwards, on

Backwards, back

Adverbs

How?

Thus, in this way

Thus, in that way

Why?

How much?

How many ?

As much

So much

As many

How often ?

How great ?

How small ?

Well, rightly

Ill, badly

Neither well nor ill

Wisely

Foolishly

Hungrily

Thirstily

Angrily

Vayu Vocabulary.

Hutikben. Kudi kha.

Wanikhen. Kha khakha.

Rek.

Wanim rek,

Hutim rek.

Madumbe. Madumna.

Madum khen.

Madum na.

Madum lom.

Jaja be.

Khanja be.

Jaja khen.

Khanja khen.

Jaja rek.

Khanja rek.

Tong ma.

Bhitari,

Thekthekha (crossing).

Kudikha (undering).

Madumna (midways).

Khak khakha (overtoping.)

Imba.,

Hémba.

Imba homba.

Imba khen homba bong.

Vinvinha,

Honko.,

Nungna.

Khukbe.

Khukrek.

Khukkhen.

} Kakphang.

Chelchelha, Kwongha.

Kakphang.

Chyeng chyeng ha.

Honko.

Nongna.

of manner, cause, quality, quantity, &e.

Hagna. Hagnaha. Hanung baha.

Ymha, Inung baha.,

Mimha, Minung baha.

Mischepa.

Hatha. Hayung, n.

Hakpu, m., f.

Hatha. Hayung.

Mitha.

Hakpu, m. f.

Hathaphi. Hakphi.

Hatha honta.

Hatha. Cho’mi ithijila.

Bingchoha. Bincho baha.

Mang bingchoha. Mang bingcho baha,

Bing chole ma. Mang bing chole ma.

Sit’sitha Juk’juk’ha.

Mang sitsitha. Mang jukjukha.

Suksa met’met’ha.

Tidaksa met’ha or met-met’ha.

Risiha. Risi not’ha. Risibukbukha,.

391

392

Gladly

Joyfully

Willingly

Unwillingly

Strongly

Weakly

Gently

Noisily

Silently

With blows

Evenly, straightly

Unevenly, crookedly

Much, a great deal

A little

Neither more nor less

Most, very much

Less

Least, very little

Again (afresh)

Back (the same)

Thoroughly

Completely

Partially

By halves

Heavily

Lightly

Tightly

Slackly

Greatly

Increasingly

Trivially

Decreasingly

In cowardly way

Boldly

Modesty |

Impudently

Secretly

Openly

Hastily

Stowly

Jestingly

Seriously

Mortally

Skin deep

Together

Separately

Singly

One by one

Solitarily

A foot

On horse back or

mounted

Truly

Falsely

Vayu Vocabulary.

Bongbongha.

Bongnibong.

Yot’yotha. Yot’ni yot’.

pee yot’yotha. Mang thumha.

Mang thumsengha.

Chotiha.

Mang chotiha.

Pomha. Pomhana.

Tamtamha. Tamnitam.

Giwonha.

Topnitop.

Chyengchyengha,

Kwonchyangving chyangha.

Chhing gnak.

Yang gnak.

Chhing gnak le ma yanggnak le ma.

Khapkhapha.

Chhinggnak khapkhapha.

Yang yang ha.

Chhing gnak yang yang ha.

Gessa.

Liplipha.

Chhingenak.

Khulupha.

Tthi.

Phakha.

Lid’lid’ha,

Oksangha.

Khwat’khwat’ha.

Woso-woso-ha. Woso baha-

\ Chhinggnakha.

} Yénggndkcha.

Ramram ha.

Mang ramram ha.

Khot’khot’ba.

‘ Mang khot’khot’ha.

Khita baha. Khit’khit’ha.

Khunta baha. Khun-khunha,

Plak plakha. Waliga.

Gat’gatha. Pomhana.

Wasong papaha. Wasong panipa.

Diksa papaha.

- Met’bong.

Kokchho bong.

Kolube.* Ko’na.

Gege gege.

Kwongpu kwongpu, m.

Kolu kolu, n.

Chhale chhale,

Khokkhokha,

Changchangha.

Diksa papaha.

Mang diksa papdha.

humha.

| No. 5.

Thumsengha.

Mang yot ni yot.

a |

* Kolube, literally in one, means in one place.

used only with verbs.

Lung, the affix of place can be

1857. | Viyu Vocabulary. 393

Similarly Tot’tot’ha. Kolu baha.

Differently Mang tot’tot’ha. Mang kolu baha,

Look upwards, up Lonkha chusto.

Look downwards, down Yonkha chusto.

Look forwards Kakphang chusto. Honko chusto.

Look backwards Nongma chusto.

Look here and there Ytha dokha chusto.

Collectives.

5. Kolu got’ khulup, = one hand intire, or 5 fingers.

10. Nayung got’ khulup, = two hands intire, or 10 fingers.

15. Nayung got’ khulupha kolu got’ khulup = two hands, plus one hand. Na-

yung got’ khulupha ba khulup, = two and half (ba) of the whole hands.

20. Le got’ khulup = hands and feet or fingers and toes complete.

20. Choldk —a score, also kolu cholok.

40. Nayung cholok = two score.

60. Chbuyung cholok = three score.

80. Blining cholok = four score. :

100. Uning cholok = five score or, Kolu got’ cholok = one hand of scores.

Ordinal Numbers.

There are none such. No first, second, third, &c.

Adverbial Numbers.

No firstly, secondly, thirdly, &c.

Once K6phi. ) And so on to 100 by adding * phi,’’ _

Twice Nakphi. | a turn or bout, tv the numerals,—

Thrice Chhikphi, The interrogative particle ‘‘ ha’ can

Four times Blikphi. { be similarly used. How many

Five times Kolugot khulup-phi. r times ? Ha-k-phi. Phi is the crude

Ten times Nayung got khulup phi. | of the verb to come, thus K6-phi

Twenty times Le got khulup phi or cho- = one coming, &c.

lop phi. 3)

Numeration of weights, Numeration of days.

1. Koti. 1. Ko buk’.

2. Nakti. 2. Na buk’.

3. Chhukti, 3. Chhu buk’.

4, Blik ti. 4. Bli buk.’

5. Ukti or Kolu got khulup ti. 5. Ubuk, or Kolu got khulup buk.’

Remark.—The last are declinable like the others and may be regarded as com:

pound substantives, which should therefore in strictness be put in the locative case,

thus kophe phine, come ye all at once. But this nicety is little regarded and

kophinakphi la’lam is = he went once or twice. So Newari has as the equivalents

of the above chha ko lang wa and chhako niko wana. In general the adverbs,

when not gerundial, are subject to declension like the nouns,

Declensional signs.

G. Mu, ni, nung, Ni and nung to pronouns only. If two substantives come

together, the sign is usually omitted.

D. None.

Ac. None.

Abl. Khen, with inflexion if pronoun,

Inst. Ha, without inflexion in any case.

Loc. Bé, He, é. Both commonly used with ; the latter, always if the governed

word be pronoun,

Up to. as far as, Bong. With usually ; always if pronoun.

— Towards, Rek ditto ditto.

— On, upon, Wanhe

—_— Off, under, Huthe } ditto lh

294 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 5,

Viyu Prepositions.

At this time the (itha-hé)

At that time Mithe (Mitha-he ) Wathe (wathi-he.)

At this place Inhe (ini-he.) tha.

At that place Min-he (Mini-he), Dokha.*

In this year Tthong-he.

In a little time, shortly Omop, he.

By and by, after a little

more delay Omhe.

During, pending this year [thong not’he.

Pending his coming Wathimang phitbong.

At home Kém-é.

At our house Angki keme.

In the house Kémé,

In the wilderness Ghari-bé.

In my hand Ang got be.

In, at Darjiling Darjiling-é.

Go into the house Keme la’la or kem bhitar bekla.

In me, thee, him Angbe, Ungbe, Minungbe.

Come into the house Kem, bhitari bek’.

Go into the house Kemmu bhitari bekla.

Go into the water Tibe bekla.

Come out of the water Ti khen lok’.

Inside the house Kemmu bhitari. Kem bhitari.

Outside the house Kemmu tongma,

Out of the house Kem tongma.

Come from the outside of

the house Kemmu tongma khen bek’.

Come out from the house Kem khen tongma lok.

Come out from inside or

within the house Kem bhitari khen lok’.

Go with me Ang nung la’la.

Sit by me Ang be musche.

Come near me Ang khewa phi.

Sit beside me Ang khuk be musche.

Sit on my knee Ang bimli be musche.

Sleep in his bosom A bimli be imche.

Put on my shoulder Ang phaka be cho’ko.

Put in or on the fire Me be tako.

Put on (above) the fire Me wamnhe tako.

Take from off the fire Me wanikhen thosto.

Put on, upon, the table Mech wanhe tako.

Take from off the table Mech wanikhen thosto.

Get on the horse ,

Megane Mode | Ghorabe cbyanche.

Get off the horse ‘ :

Dismount from the horse \ Ghora khen lische.

Put on the horse (goods) Ghoramu wanhe (or senti be) tako.

Take from off the horse Ghora wani (07 senti) khen loko.

On the head Puchhibe. Puchhi wanhe.

Under the feet Le huthe.

Put cap on head Puchhi be topi chupche. Puchhi wanhe topi chupche.

Put straw under thy feet Ungle huthe-khisti tako.

From above the head Puchhi wanikhen,

From below the feet Le hutikhen,

* Ttha dokha = idher udher; inhe, minhe = ihan, uhan or hither and thither

and here and there; the first with less of rest and definiteness.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 395

On the head Puchhi wanhe.

Under the >} touching

feet } Le huthe.

Above ‘) ..} Puchhi khenlonkha.

Higher {ee head | = |

than | =

eth + & ¢ Le khen-yonkha.

nder Ee

eles the feet | 3 |

than 5}

Above the mouth is the

Pe the Poth ia 1 Mukcbhyu wanim rek cho’no: mukchhyu hutimrekra.

chin

To, up to, as far as Bong.

As far as him Inung-bong.

To, as far as, Nepal Nepal bong.

Towards Nepal Nepal rek.

North of Nepal Nepal khen liriphumbe.

Near Nepal Nepal khewa.

Far from Nepal Nepal khen kholam.

Towards night Eksa dumhe.

Cruel toward his children Ang tamtawo rek yansa povi.

Sit above me Angkhen lonkha musche.

Sit below him Minung khen yonkha* musche.

Between us two Ungchi madumbe.

On me (touching) Ang wanhe.

Under me (touching) Ang huthe.

The water comes from

above and goes below

On the top of the hill Chhaju puchhibe wanhe,

In the mid ascent of the

Lonkha rek khenti yumi, yonkha rek giklam.

hill Chhaju madumbe.

At the base of the hill Chh4ju phumbe huthe.

From top of hill Chhaju wanikhen.

From middle of hill Chhaju madumkhen.

From base of hill Chhaju hutikhen.

He dwells above ine Ang khen lonkha muschem.

He dwells below me Ang khen yongha muschem.

Sit on me Ang wanhe musche,

Pressed under me Ang huthe napta.

Underneath the chair Chouki buthe.

Lower than the chair (in

position) Chouki khen yonkha.

Put under the table Mech huthe or hutibe tako.

Take out from under the

table Mech hutikhen thosto,

Go through the door Kamung khen lokla.

Go through the hole Hom kudikha, or Hom madumbe thekla.

Go through the river

(wading) Gang thek thekha la’la.

Go over the river (by

boat) Gang thek thekha la’la.

Go over (by over) the

couch Khat lumlumha la’la.

Go under (by under) the

couch Khat homlung khen lok’la or kudikha la’la.

* Lonkha and yonkha refer mainly to the course of the water in this mountain

country and to relative position on a hill slope.

8396

Come with me

Go without me

Strike with force

Strike without force

Sit before me

Sit behind him

Before-behind the door

Opposite, in front of,

vis-a-vis

Sit at my side on my

flank

Towards the side

Before nizht fall

After night fall

At night fall

Just as night falls

Since dawn

Since I came

After my arrival

After to-morrow

By night fall

Up to-night

Until night

Towards night

Towards dawn

At dawn

During the night

While it was night

By the time I arrive

Before my arrival

After my coming

Round about the house

About the house

In the middle of the

village

On this side the river

On that side the river

He pierced him through

the body

Go by the door

At a distance from the

house

Near to the fire

Near me

After that

Before that

Instead of that

In lieu of him

For the sake of me

For the leve of me

On this side of, short of,

not so far as, the house

On that side of, or beyond

the house

Far from the house

With a house, i.e. having Kem not’he or govhe.

Without a house want- 1 Kem mang not’he.

ing

With me accompanying

Without me leaving

Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5.

Ang nung phi.

Ang ma nosa la’la,

Chotiba to’po.

Choti mang khot’khot’ha to’ po.

Ang honko musche.

Anungna musche.

Kamung-honko-nungna.

Kakphang.

Ang khuk be musche.

Khuk rek.

Eksa madumsa.

Eksa dumkhen. Eksa dumdumha,

} Eksa dumhe.

Nomoloksing khen.

Ang phitv’ khen.

Ang dong khen nungna,

Nukun khen.

d Eksa bong. Eksa dum bong.

Eksa let’he.

Dang dang dumhe. -

Nomo lokhe..

Eksa nung.

Kksa not’nung,

Ang dongsinghe,

Ang dong singkhen honko.

Ang dong singkhen nungna.

Kemmu thelim phoksiv.

Kemkhukhe itha dokha.

Mulungmu madumbe.

Gangmu imba or Gang imba.

Gang homba.

Chho chepchepha sastum.

Kamung lomkhen la’la.

Kem khen kholam.

Mé khewa.

Ang khewa.

Minung nongna.

Wathim honko.

Inung let’chhing.

Inung jyapcbhing. Minung jyapcbhing.

Ang lisi. Ang duli khen.

Gochbhan chhanha.

Minung honko.

Kem khen imba or Kemmu itha.

Kem khen homba or Kemmu dokha.

Kem khen kholam,

Kem not}khen,

Kem mang

Kem not?nam,

Kem mang nosa.

not’khen.

Ang nung. fait:

Go wat’watha, Angma nosa,

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 397

For the purpose of, on

account of, the house Kem lisi.

In the middle of the

house Kem ma dumbe.

Even with the table, on

level with table Mech nungteng tengha.

Through the house Kem kudikha. Kemmu madumna or madum khen.

Through the thigh Phekteng sat’sat’ha or madumna,

With a will (Bongré) Bong ni bong. Bongbongha. Bongha.

Without, against the will ;

(Malgré) Marg bongbongha. Mang bongha.

Willy, nilly Bongha mang bongha

In spite of her husband Rocho mang-honhonha.

For the love of her

busband Rocho chhan-chhan’ha.

After the manner of the

Newars Hengong-wo baha.

In the form of a fish Ho narungmu.

After the manner of the

Tibetans Chhogongwo baha.

In the guise of a Tibetan Chhogongwo narungbe or ndrungha.

Conjunetions.

And No such word.

Also, likewise Lé. Nung.

Or No word. Ki is used.

Nor Mang (not.)

Nor this, nor that Ti mang, ma mang,

Moreover Mekhen.

Besides Wanikhen.

In excess of Wanhe.

Than (comp.) Khen.

As Hagnado.

So Mimha.

As, so TYmha, Mimbha.

As well as Hagnado noh’ka

As ill as Hagnado mang noh’ka.

But No word,

Nevertheless ?

Notwithstanding Newword:

Though, yet Mithele.*

If Sa. Nam, with present tense. Phenf with preterite.

4 aa Can only be used with a verb; mang nosa, if there

nless 7 ;

Recent be not. Mapo nam, if he do not.

Whether or not Nole ma nole,

In the meanwhile the.

Thereon, upon that Mithe.

To wit, that is to say Id@he. It’he.

Because

Since t Mischepa.

Wherefore ae

For this cause } eee

* Passionate yet good; or, though passionate (he is) not harsh or eruel, Risiwa

mithele noh’ka, or Risibuk’vi mithele yansa mang povi.

+ If I come or shall come Phignonam. If I had come Phisung phen,

398

Therefore Mipanung.

For that cause

Yes (assent)

No (dissent)

Verbal negative

Verbal prohibitive

Noun primitive

Alas !

Bravo!

Hurrah!

No words.

Tha (prefix.)

No words,

Vayu Vocabulary.

Wathi panung.

Mang (prefix.)

Mang. Ma (prefix).

Vayu Verbs.—Vocabulary.

English.

Cause, tr.

Cause not

Be born, n.

Cause him to be born, tr.

Cause thyself to be born or to be born

for thyself

Cause me to be born, &c.

Beget or give birth to

Beget or produce me, or for me

Beget or produce for thyself

Beget for another

Cause to beget or to be begotten, or

produced

Cause thyself to beget, or to be be-

gotten for thyself

The same for another

Cause me to beget or to be begotten

Be not born

Cause not to be born

Beget not or give not birth to

Beget not for self

Beget not for another

Beget not for me

Live, n.

Live not

Cause him to live

Cause me to live

Cause thyself (or for thyself) to live

Cause to live for him, for his sake

Do not cause to live

Do not cause thyself to live

Die, nu.

Die not

Cause to die

Enable to die

Cause thyself to die

Cause me to die

Vayu.

Pha-(s)-to. Pingko (see on).*

Thapha-(s)-to. Tha ping.

Bok,’

Bok ping ko.

Bok pingche.

Bokpingsung

Pho’ko (Phok-ko),

Phoksung.

Phokche.

Phokto.

Phokpingko,

Phok pingche.

Phokpingto.

Phok pingsung,

Tha bok’.

Bok’ tha ping.

Tha phok’,

Tha phokche.

Tha phokto.

Tha phokgno.

Tha go.

Got’phato (phasto.) Got’pingko.

Got’pingsung. Got’phassung.

Got’pingche. Got phasche.

Gotpingto. Got phasto.

Got tha pha’to. Got tha ping.

Got tha pinche. Got tha phasche.

Met’,

Tha met’.

Met’pingko,

Met’pha’to (phasto.)

Met’ pingche.

Met’pingsung.

[No. 5.

* These two verbs are used to make causals. Pingko and Phasto are often iden-

tical, at other times more or less discriminated in a way that may be best appre-

ciated by a sample, thus Khut pingko is, cause to steal, and Khut phasto, make

a thief of.

1857.

Cause not to die

Cause not thyself to die

Kill, tr.

Kill thyself or for thyself, or do thou

thyself kill, int.

Cause to kill or be killed

Cause thyself to kill or to be killed,

or to be killed for thyself é

Cause him to klil or be killed for

another

Kill me or for me

Kill me not or do not kill for me

Cause me to kill or be killed, or for me

Cause not, &c.

Be, n.

Be not

Cause to be

Cause to be for self

Cause to be for me or me to be

Cause it to be for him

Do not cause to be

Do not cause me to be or it to be

for me

Become, n.

Become not

Cause to become

Cause to cause to become

Cause me or for me to become

Cause thyself or for thyself to become

Be able, ac. intr.

Enable, tr.

Cause to be able or to enable

Do, perform, make, tr.

Do not

Do for me

Do not for me

Do for self

Do not for self

Do for him

Do not for him

Do me, passive

Do self (see grammar).

Cause to do or to be done

Cause me to do or to be done to me

or to do or be done for me

Cause thyself to do or be done to or

for thyself

Cause to do or to be done to, for

another

Keep doing, intr.

Cease doing. Desist, intr.

Cease doing it, tr. Desist from it

Suffer, endure bodil

Submit coyectt f sired

Brace thy mind to sufferance

Observe, take heed of, examine,

think, intr.

Vayu Vocabulary.

399

Met’ thé pha’to.

Met’ tha ping.

Met’ tha phasche.

Met’ tha pinche.

Sishto.

Sishche.

Sit’ pingko.

Sit’ pingche.

Siv’ pingto.

Sishsung.

Tha sit gno.

Sit pingsung.

Sit tha pinggno.

No.

Tha no.

Not’ pingko.

Not’ pingche.

Not’ pingsung.

Not’ pingto.

Not’ tha ping.

Not’ tha ping gno.

Dum.

Tha dum.

Dum pingko.

Thum pingko.

Thum sung.

Thumche.

Phasche. Wonche.

Pha’to. Phasto. Wanto.

Phat pingko. Won pingko.

Pako.

Thapo.

Pasung.*

Tha pagno.

Panche.

Tha panche.

Pato.

Tha pato.

Posung.*

Ponche.

Papingko.

Thumto.

Dum pingche.

Papingsung.

Papingche.

Papingto.

Panapa nd. Papaha musche.

Wasche.,

Wa’ (s) to.

Ronehe. These two reflex verbs serve

to convey the only and very

vague idea of passivity.

W onche.

Chikche.

Chusche.

* See remarks on the verbs Péko, Tako and Jako.

Sn ar

4.00

English.

Observe it, take heed of it, think of

it, tr.

Observe me or for me

Cause to observe or to observe it, or

it to be observed, tr.

Cause to observe or to be observed for

thyself or thyself, intr.

Cause me to observe or me to be ob-

served, quasi passive

Understand, intr,

Understand it, tr.

Cause to understand or to be under-

stood

Understand me or for me*

Understand thyself or for thyself or

simply understand

Understand it for him or on his account

Understand not

Understand it not

Remember, intr.

Remember it, tr. (see observe)

Remember not

Remember it not

Do not cause to remember or to be

remembered

Forget, intr.

Forget it, tr.

Yorget me or for me

Forget me not

Forget thyself (= err.)

Forget not thyself or do not thou

forget

Forget him or it

Forget him not

Cause to forget (= deceive) or to be

forgotten

Cause me to forget or to be forgotten

Cause thyself to forget or to be for-

gotten

Cause him to forget or to be forgotten

on a third party’s account, or cause

it to be forgotten by him

Desire, n. and p.

Desire it or make him desire

Cause to desire or to be desired (per

alterum, hand per se)

Do not cause to desire or to be desired

Cause me to desire or be desired

Vayu Vocabulary. |

[No. 5.

Vayu.

Chuphto (Chusto.) Chikto.

Chussang. Chiksung.

Chut pingko. Chik pingko.

Chut pingche. Chik pingche.

Chut pingsung. Chik pingsung.

Sesche.

Seko.

Set’ phato (phasto.)

Sesung (Sessung.)

Sesche.

Sesto.

Tha sesche.

Tha se.

Chikche.

Chikto.

Tha chikche.

Tha chikto.

Tha chik pha’to (phasto).

Mangche.

Mangto.

Mang sung.

Tha mang gno.

Mangche.

Tha mangche.

Mangto.t

Tha mangto.

Mang pingko.

Mang pingsung.

Mang pha’to (phasto}.

Mang pingche.

Mang pingto (pingkto).

jected transitive)

Dak.t

Dakto.

(Doubly ob-

Dak pingko.

Tha dak ping.

Dak pingsung.

Dak pha’to (phasto).

Tha dak pha’to (phasto).

* The word, when used in the latter sense, with lisi, on account of, is frequently

put in the transitive form ang lisi seko, understand it for me.

results from the imperfect development of the voices.

+ Compare the transitive and eausal transitive,

Sénto, Pato, &c. or the transitives in ko.

The transitives in po have this form,

thus topo has topto; ipo, ipto; pipo, pipto, &c.

t Dak, like Bot: tell, is used rather as a passive than active.

Its form

passive; its sense both apparently. Dak gnom I desire or am desired. Daksung-

mi I desired or was desired.

In Khas, Newari, &c. it is much the same.

The alternative

Verbs in t6 have no form =

1857.]

English.

Cause thyself to desire or be desired

Cause him to desire or be desired on

another’s account, or him to desire it

Love or love it, trans.

Love thyself or love simply, intr.

Love me, p.

Love him, tr.

Love not

Love not it or him

Cause to love or to be lnved

Cause me to love or to be loved

Cause thyself to love or be loved

Cause him to love or be loved on an-

other’s account

Hate or hate it, trans.

Hate thyself or hate simply, intr.

Hate me, p.

Hate him or for him (see note voce

forget)

Cause to hate or to be hated

Cause thyself to hate or be hated

Cause him or it to hate or be hated

for another’s sake, or him to hate it

Be modest, n.

Cause to be modest

Laugh, ac. intr.

Laugh at, fer

Tride, :

Cause to laugh

Weep, n.

Weep for, tr.

Cause to weep

Dance, intr. and tr.

Sing, intr. and tr.

Hope

Fear, n.

Fear not

Frighten, tr.

Frighten not

Frighten me

Frighten thyself

Cause to frighten or be frightened

Cause me to frighten or to be frightened

Cause thyself to frighten or be fright-

ened

Cause him or it to frighten or be

frightened for another’s sake

Tremble, ac. intr.

Cause to tremble by own act or make

him tremble, tr.

Cause to tremble through another’s

agency or cause him to be made or

- to make to tremble

Tremble not

Make him not tremble

Cause him not to be made to tremble

or to make tremble

Be good, n.

Make good, tr.

Viyu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Dak pingche.

Dak pingto (pingkto)

Chhanto.

Chhanche.

Chhansung.

Chhanto.

Tha chhanche.

Tha chhanto.

Chhan pha’to. Chhan pingko.

Chhan pingsung. Chhan phasung.

Chhan pingche. Chhan phasche.

Chhan pingto.

Chekto.

Chekche.

Cheksung.

Chhan pha’to (phasto).

Chekto.

Chek pha’to.

Chek pingche.

Chek pingko.

Chek phasche.

Chek pingto.

Kho.

Khét’ pha’to (phasto).

Yische.

Chek phasto.

} Yishto.

Yit’pha’to (phasto).

Ok.

Okto.

Okpha’to (phasto).

Holi panche, intr.

Kwom panche, intr.

No such word.

Ram.

Tha ram

Ram pingko. Kham to (Arabic kh),

Ram tha ping. Tha cham to.

Ram pingsung. A/famsung.

Ram pingche. Ahamche.

Kham pingko.

Kham pingsung.

Holi pako, tr.

Kwom pako, tr.

Kham pingche.

Kham pingto.

Hokche.

Hokto.

Hok pingko,

Tha hokche.

Tha hokto.

Hok tha ping.

Noh’ka dum or ponche.

Noh’ka thumto or pako,

401

402 Vayu Vocabulary.

English. Vayu.

Make thyself good, intr. Noh’ka thumche or panche.

Be glad or gladden thyself, ac. intr. Bongche,

Gladden, tr. Bongto.

Gladden me Bongsung.

Gladden thyself or cause thyself to be

gladdened

Cause him to gladden or to be glad-

dened

Cause him to gladden or to be glad-

dened on another’s account

Cause me to gladden or to be gladdened

Be not glad

Gladden not

Be sad, vexed or sadden thyself

Sadden, vex, tr.

Cause to sadden or to be saddened

Cause thyself to be saddened

Cause to sadden or to be saddened in

lieu of or on another’s account

Cause not, &c. &c,

Speak, utter, n.

Utter not

Utter thyself or for thyself, intr.

Do thou not utter for self

Utter in lieu of another, or for him

Utter not for him

Cause to utter or to be uttered

Speak to, tell, narrate, talk to, tr.

Speak to me, tell me or for me

Speak to thyself or tell it for thyself

Cause to tell or to be told

Cause not to tell or not to be told

Tell on his account, tell his tale

Tell on my account, tell my tale

Let speech be had

Tell on your own account, tell your

own tale

Cause his tale to be told for him

Cause thy own tale to be told

Cause my tale to be told

Be silent or let silence be, n.

Silence, tr.

Cause to silence

Silence me

Silence thyself

Silence him on another’s account or

for another

* This last root, bot’ to tell, is only used as a passive.

Bosungmi, I was told.

+ All theae three are used actively also,

Cause me to tell mine.

+ Compare Davo pasung. This refers to the agent, do thou make speech for

me, whereas Giwon posung refers to silence as governing the verb, let silence prevail

See remarks on the verbs Pako, Tako and Jako,

thyself to tell thine.

for me.

Bong pingche.

Bong ping ko.

Bong ping to.

Bong pingsung.

Tha bongche.

Tha bongto.

Thukche.

Thukto.

Thuk pha’to.

Thuk pingche.

Thuk pingko.

Thuk ping to.

Thuk’tha pinn. Thuk tha ping to.

Hot’. Davo panche.

Tha hot.’ Davo tha panche,

Hosche (the s like English th.)

Tha hosche.

Hophto (Hosto.)

Tha hophto (hosto.)

Hot’ pingko.

Ishto. Chhisto. Davo pako.

Ishsung. Chhishsung. Bo’sung.*

(Bo’to, the transitive is lost.)

Ishche. Chhishche.

Itpingko. Chhit’ping ko.

ping ko,

It tha ping.

pa tha ping.

Davo pato.

Davo pasung.

Davo ponche.

Chhit tha ping.

Davo panche.

Davo pa pingto.

Davo pa pinche.

Davo pa pingsung.t

Giwon ponche.

Giwon pako.

Giwon pa pingko.

Giwon posung.t

Giwon panche,

Giwon pato,

Cause him to tell his tale,

true passive struggling into existence against the genius of the language.

[No. 5.

Davo pa-

Davo

Bot’guom, I am told.

Cause

They show signs of a

1857.]

English.

Call. Summon, tr.

Summon me or for me

Summon for thyself

Shout, vociferate, intr.

Shout to, for him

Learn ( = teach thyself,) intr.

Teach or teach him, tr.

Read, intr.

Write it, tr.

Write for thyself or write simply

Cause to write

Ask, question, tr.

Ask for self, or ask simply, or ask

thyself

Ask for me, or me

Ask it for him

Ask it not, tr.

Ask not, intr.

Ask not for me or me

Ask not for self

Ask not for him

Answer or answer him, tr.

Answer self or for self or answer simply

Answer me or for me

Answer him, or for him

Beg, intr.

Beg it, tr.

Beg me or for me, p.

Beg for thyself, intr.

Beg it for him, tr,

Approve, like, intr.

Approve it, like it, tr.

Cause him to approve or to approve

it, or it to be approved

Approve not

Approve it not

Approve me or for me

Approve thyself or for thyself

Approve him or approve for him

Cause me to approve or be approved

Cause thyself to approve or to be

approved or cause it to be approved

for thyself

Cause it to be approved or cause him

to approve it 3

Cause it to be approved for him

See, intr.

See it, tr.

See thyself or for thyself

See for him

See me or see for me

Cause to see or be seen

Cause thyself to see or be seen, or to

be seen for thyself

Cause to see or be seen for him

Show, intr.

Show it, tr.

Vayu Vocabulary.

f Yorpingte

403

Vayu.

Rangto. Khamto.

Rangsung. Khamsung.

Rangche. Khamche.

Tamche. Sangma-panche.

Tamto. Sangma-pako.

Lishche.

Lishto.

Lische.

Blekto

Blekche.

Blek pingko.

Jiko.

Lishche.

Jiche.

Jisung.

Jito.

Tha ji.

Tha jiche.

Tha jigno,

Tha jiche.

Tha jito.

Chhisto.

Chhische.

Chhissung.

Chhisto.

Biche (see Buy).

Biko.

Bisung.

Biche.

Bito.

Yosche.

Yophto (Yosto).

Yot’ pha’ to.

Tha yosche.

Tha yot’.

Yossung,

Yosche.

Yophto (Yosto).

Yot’pingsung.

Yot’ pingko.

Yot’ phasche.

Yot pingko.

Yot pingto.

Yengche.

Yengko.

Yengche,

Yeng to.

Yengsung.

Yeng pha’to.

Chusche.

Chuphto (chusto).

Yeng pingko,

Yeng pingche.

Yeng pingto.

Khunche.*

Khunto.

* The underlined AA” has a harsh Arabic sound.

4.04

English.

Show me or for me

Show thyself or for thyself

Show for him

Cause to show or be shown

Cause thyself to be shown or to show

Cause me to be shown or to show

Hide, ac. intr.

Hide it, tr.

Hide thyself (lie hid)

Cause thyself to lie hid

Let me hide myself

Cause him to lie hid

Cause me to lie hid

Cause it to be hid

Cause thyself to be hidden or cause it

to be hidden for thee

Hide me

Cause me to be hid

Cause it to be hid for him

Hear simply or hear thyself, intr.

Hear it, tr.

Cause thyself to hear or be heard

Cause him to hear or be heard

Hear me

Cause me to hear or be heard

Hear not

Hear it not

Hear not me

Cause me not to hear or be heard

Taste, ac. intr.

Taste it, tr.

Taste for thyself or thyself

Taste for him

Taste for me or taste me

Cause to taste or to be tasted

Blow, apply breath, intr.

Blow it, apply breath to it, tr.

Smell, ac. intr.

Smell it, tr.

Smell for thyself or thyself

Smell for him

Smell me

Cause to smell or to be smelt

Cause to smell or to be smelt for him

Smell not

Smell it not

Smell me not

Cause me to smell or be smelt

Cause thyself to smell or be smelt

Touch, ac. intr.

Touch it, tr.

Cause to touch or to be touched

Cause thyself to touch or be touched

Cause it to touch or be touched for him

Touch me or for me

Touch me not

Eat, ac. intr,

Eat it, tr.

Eat not

Viyu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Khvunsung

Khunche.

Khunto.

Khun pingko.

Khun pingche.

Khun pingsung.

Kinche.

Khiko.

Kinche.

Kin pingche.

Kin sung yu.

Kin pingko.

Kin ping sung.

Khit’pingko.

Khun pha’to.

Khit’ pingche.

Khisung.

Khit’pingsung.

Khit’ pingto.

Thasche.

Thako.

That’ pinche.

That pingko.

Thasung. Ang davo thako.

That’ pingsung.

Tha thasche.

Tha tha.

Tha tha gno.

Tha that’ ping gno.

Homche.

Hompo.

Homche.

Homto.

Homsung,

Homping ko.

Hosche.

Hosto,

Namche.

Napo (Nampo).

Namche.

Namto.

Nawmsung.

Namping ko.

Namping to.

Tha namche.

Tha nam.

Tha na (m) mo.

Nampingsung.

Nampingche.

Dusche.

Duphto (Dushto).

Dut’ping ko.

Dut’ pingche.

Dut’ping to.

Da (s) sung.

Tha dut’gno.

Janche (see buy).

Jako.

Tha janche,

| No. 5.

1857.]

English.

Eat it not

Eat me

Eat for me

Rat for thyself or do thou thyself eat,

or eat thy own share

Eat for him or eat his share

Eat not me

Eat not for me

Feed, tr.

Feed thyself, intr.

Feed not, tr.

Feed thyself not

Feed me

Feed me not

Cause to feed or to be fed

Cause thyself to feed or be fed

Cause it to feed or be fed for him

Cause me to feed or be fed

Drink—water

Drink not—water

Cause to drink or to be drank water

Cause not to drink or be drank water

Drink—beer, spirits, ac. intr.

Drink it, beer, &c. tr.

Drink not, beer, &c.

Drink it not, beer, &c.

Cause to drink or to be drank

Cause to cause to drink or to be drank

Don’t cause to drink

Don’t cause to cause to drink or be

drank

Don’t cause to cause thyself to drink

or to be drank

Don’t cause him to drink if, or it to

be drank by him in lieu of another

Drink me

Drink not me

Cause me to drink or to be drank

Cause me not to drink

Vomit, ac. intr.

Vomit it, tr.

Cause to vomit

Sleep, ac. intr.

Sleep not

Cause to sleep

Cause not to sleep

Cause thyself to sleep

Help to put him to sleep

Help to cause him to be put to sleep

Cause thyself to be put asleep

Wake, n.

Wake not

Awaken, tr.

Awaken not

Cause to awaken or to be awakened

Vayu Vocabulary.

405

Vayu.

Tha jo.

Josung (see posung).

Jasung.

Janche.

Jato.

Tha jogno

Tha jagno.

Khwa (s) to®¥

Khwasche.

Tha Khwat’.

Tha Khwasche.

Khwa (s) sung.

Tha Khwat’gno.

Khwat’? pingkos

Khwat pingche.

Khwat pingto.

Khwat pingsung.

Ti dak’.

Ti tha dak’,

Ti dak’ pingko.

Ti dak’ thaping.

Tunche.

Tunko.

Tha tunche.

Tha tun’.

Thunto or Tunpingko,

Thunpingko.

Tha thunto.

Thun thaping.

Thun thapingche.

Thun thapingko.

Tun sung.

Tha tun gno.

Thunsung,

Tha thun gno,

Lipche.

Lipto. Li’po.

Lip’ pingko.

Imche.

Tha imche,

Im pingko.

Im tha ping.

Hem che.

Hem to.

Hem ping to.

Hem ping che.

Buk’, Sipche.

Tha buk’. Tha sipche.

Po’ko or Pu’ko.f¢ Sipto.

Tha puk’. Tha sipto,

Puk’pingko. Sip pingko.

Hempo.

Tha hem.

* Kh = harsh guttural Arabic.

+ O aud u, like e and i, are hardly separable.

3 G

406

English.

Cause thyself to be awakened or to

awaken

Cause me to be awakened or to awaken

Awaken me

Awaken me not

Awaken thyself or do thou thyself

awaken him

Awaken for him

Awaken not for him

Dream, intr.

Dream it, tr.

Dream not

Dream it not

Cause to dream or to be dreamt

Cause thyself to dream or be dreamt of

Fart, ac. intr.

Fart at, tr.

Shit, n.

Shit it upon it, tr.

Piss, minge, intr. n.

Piss it, on ei t

A Tr.

Imminge

Kiss—give or take (osculor), tr.

Cause to kiss or be kissed

Cause thyself to kiss or be kissed

Kiss me

Kiss me not

Kiss him for me

Kiss him for him

Kiss (coe), tr.

Cause to kiss or he kissed

Cause thyself to kiss or be kissed

Kiss me

Cause me to kiss or be kissed

Kiss not

Kiss me not

Sneeze, ac. intr.

Sneeze not

Sneeze at, or make sneeze

Do not sneeze at or make sneeze

Cause him to sneeze at or him to be

made or to make to sneeze

Cause not, &c.

Do thou make me sneeze, &c.

Cause me to be made to sneeze, &c.

Do not sneeze at me or do not make

me sneeze

Cause thyself to be made to sneeze, &c.

Cause not thyself to be made to sneeze

or to sneeze or be sneezed at

Spit, ac. intr.

Spit at, on, tr.

Cause to spit or to be spat at

Viyw Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Puk’pingche.

Puk’pingsung,

Puk’sung.

Tha puk’gno.

Puk’che.,

Puk’to.

Tha puk’to.

Amung yengche.

Amung yengko.

Amung tha yengche.

Amung tha yeng.

Amung yengping ko.

Amung yengping che.

Peshche.

Peshto.

Dak’. Epidak.

Dakto. Epidakto.

Chepidak. Cheche.

} Chepidakto, Cheto.

Chugup pako.

Chugup paping ko.

Chugup paping che.

Chugup posung.

Chugup tha pogno.

Chugup pasung.

Chugup pato.

Hepto.

Hep pingko,

Hep pingche.

Hepsung.

Hep pingsung.

Tha hepto.

Tha hepmo.

Khikche.

Tha khikche.

Khikto. Khi’ko.*

Tha khikto.

Khik pingko.

Khik tha ping.

Khiksung.

Khik pingsung.

Tha khikgno.

Khik pingche.

Khik thaping che.

Tokche.

Tokto. To’ko.*

Tok pingko.

[No. 5.

* Khi’ko and To’ko like Li’po, vomit it, are falling out of use because of the

homophones, But they are the true forms and the others refer to a third party.

See the word exchange.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 4.07

English. aye.

Cause to spit or be spat at on another’s

account Tok pingto.

Spit on me or make me spit Toksung.

Cause me to spit or to be spat at Tok pingsung,

Cause yourself to spit or to be spat on Tokpingche.

Belch, ac. intr. Garat panche,

Belch at, tr. Garat pako.

Cause him to belch or to belch at or

to be belched at Garat papingko.

Belch me or for me Garat posung.

Belch him or for him Garat pato.

Cause me to belch or be belched at Garat papingsung,

Cause him to belch or to be belched at

on another’s account Garat papingto.

Cough, ac. intr. Khwen khwen panche.

Cough at, tr. ihwen khwen pako.*

Cough me, cause me to cough by own

agency Khwen khwen posung or pasung.*

Cause me to cough or to be coughed

at through another’s agency Khwen khwen papingsung.

Cause thyself to cough or to be coughed

at through same Khwen khwen papingche.

Hiccup, ac. intr, : ' Tukum panche,

Yawn, intr., tr. Wakum panche, intr. Wakum pako. tr,

Cause to yawn Wakum papingko.

Cause me to yawn Wakum papingsung.

Cause thyself to yawn Wakum papingche

Do thou thyself cause me to yawn Wakum posung. Wakum tha po.

Do not thou cause me to yawn Wakum thapogno.

Yawn not, intr. and tr. Wakum tha panche.

Lick, ac. intr. Popche.

Lick it, tr. Po’ po.

Cause to lick or be licked Pop pingko.

Lick me or for me Popsung,

Lick thyself or for thyself Popche.

Lick it for him Pop to.

Cause me to lick or be licked Pop pingsung.

Cause thyself to lick or to be licked Pop pingche.

Cause him to lick or be licked Poppingko.

The same, on account of, or in lieu of,

another Poppingto

Suck, a. intr. Pipche.

Suck it, tr. Pi’po (Pip-po).

Suck me or for me Pipsung.

Suck thyself or for thyself Pipche.

Suck it for him Pipto

Cause to suck or to be sucked Pip pingko

Cause me to suck or be sucked Pip pingsung.

Cause thyself to suck or be sucked Pip pingche.

Cause him to suck or be sucked Pip pingko.

Bite, tr. Chi’ko (chik-ko).

* Hence you can say in active intransitive knwen khwen pachungmi I coughed

=I made myself cough; in the transitive, knwen khwen pakungmi I coughed at

him, very often used ‘‘ for I made him cough’ which is properly khwen khwen

paping-kungmi; and in the passive, khwen khwen posungmi I was coughed = was

made to cough, which latter is more nicely expressed by khwen khwen pasungmi

shewing also the active agency.

2a 2

408

English.

Bite not

Cause to bite or to be bitten

Cause not to bite or be bitten

Bite me

Bite me not

Bite thyself

Bite him

Bite it for him

Cause me to bite or be bitten

Cause me not to bite or be bitten

Cause thyself to bite or be bitten

Cause him to bite or be bitten

The same on another’s behoof

Kick, tr.

Kick not

Kick me

Kick me not

Kick thyself or kick simply

Kick not thyself or do not kick

Kick him

Kick him not

Cause to kick or to be kicked

Cause me to kick or be kicked

Cause thyself to kick or be kicked

Cause him to kick or be kicked

The same on another’s behoof

Strike, tr.

Srike not

Strike thyself

Strike me

Cause him to strike or to be striken

Cause thyself, &c.

Seratch, tr.

Scratch thyself

Push, shove, tr.

Push not

Pull, tr.

Pull not

Walk, ac. intr.

Walk not

Walk it or cause it to walk, thou thyself

Walk it not

Cause to walk or to be walked by

another’s agency

Walk me thyself, cause me to walk or

be walked, by thy own agency

Cause to cause me to walk or be

walked, or have me walked

Cause thyself to walk or be walked or

have thyself walked

Run, intr.

Run not

Run it, cause it to run, thyself

Cause it to be run by another

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Tha chik’.

Chik pingko.

Chik tha ping.

Chik sung.

Tha chik gno,

Chikche.

Chi’ko.

Chikto.

Chik pingsung.

Tha chikping gno,

Chik pingche.

Chik pingko.

Chik pingto.

Theshto (Eng. th).

Tha thet’.

Thé (s) sung.

Tha thet’ gno.

Theshche. |

Tha thesfche.

Theshto.

Tha thet?

Thet’ pingko.

Thet’ pingsung,

Thet’ pingche.

Thet’ pingko.

Thet’ pingto.

To’po (top-po).

Tha top’.

Top che.

Topsung.

Top pingko.

Top pingche,

Phokto.

Phokche.

Theko.

Tha the,

Khinto.

Tha khinto,.

Khokche.

Tha khokche,

Khokto.

Tha khokto.

Khok pingko.

Khoksung.

Khok pingsung,

Khok pingche.

Lunla. Lun.

Tha lunla,*

Lunto.

Lunphato.

[ No. 5.

* Lun without the la makes the passive lungnom, which being also the neuter

form, lun lagnom, from lunla, is preferred to express the neuter sense though 14

also makes lagnom.

1857.]

English.

Cause me to run or be run

Cause thyself to run or be run

Run away, flee, intr.

Cause to flee

Creep, intr.

Jump, hop, intr.

Jump it or make it jump, tr.

Cause to make jump

Leap, intr.

Leap it, tr.

Cause to leap

Fly, n.

Cause to fly

Enable to fly

Swim, intr.

Swim it thyself or cause it to swim by,

thy own account

Cause it, him, to swim by other’s

agency or have it swam

Swim me, cause me to swim or make

me swim thyself

Cause me to be or made to swim by

another’s agency.

Cause thyself to swim or be swam

Wade, ac. intr.

Dive

Sink f 2° intr. = sink thyself

Sink it, make him dive, by thy own

agency

Cause to make dive or sink by other’s

agency, or have it sunk

Bathe = bathe thyself, intr.

Bathe him

Cause him to bathe or to be bathed

Wasb, intr. = wash thyself, only body

Wash him

Cause him to wash or to be washed

Dress, ac. intr. = dress thyself

Dress it

Cause it to dress or be drest

Dress me

Dress thyself

Undress (thyself), intr.

Undress it

Undress me

Cause it to undress or to be undressed

Don’t undress it

Be naked, n.

Denude thyself, ac. intr.

Denude him

Denude me

Denude it for another

Cause to denude or be denuded

Cause thyself to denude or be denuded

Cause me to denude or to be denuded

Cause me not to denude or to be

denuded

Be hungry, nu.

Make him hungry or cause him to be

made hungry

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Lunphasung,

Lunphasche.

Rula. Ru.

Ruto. Rut’pingko.

Hobu baha khokche,

Tuche,

Tuto,

Tupingko.

Hopche.

Hopto.

Hop pingko.

Bon.

Bonpingko.

Bonphato.

Hanche,

Hanto.

Hanpingko.

Hansung.

Hanpingsung.

Hanpingche.

Thekche.

Thamche.

Thamto.

Thampingko.

Denche.

Dento.

Denpingko.

Upche.

Upto.

Up pingko.

Chupche. Wasche.

Chupto. Wasto.

Chup pingko. Wat’pingko.

Chupsung. Wassung.

Chupche, Wasche.

Lusche.

Luphto (Lusto),

Lussung.

Lut’ pingko.

Lut’tha ping.

Gunang senti dum or ponche,

Gunang senti panche.

Gunang senti pako.

Gunang senti posung (pasung).

Gunang senti pato.

Gunang senti papingko.

Gunang senti papingche,

Gunang senti papingsung,

Gunang senti tha paping gno.

Suksamet’. Suksametvidum.

Suksa met’pingko not’ pingko,

409

410

English.

Make me hungry or cause me to be

made hungry

Make thyself hungry or cause thyself

to be made hungry

Be thirsty, n.

Make thirsty

Make me thirsty or enable me to make

or be made thirsty

Make thyself thirsty or cause thyself

to make or be made thirsty

Be not hungry

Make not hungry

Be not thirsty ~

Cause not to thirst

Be sleepy = cover sleep, n.

Make sleepy

Make not sleepy

Be cold (being), n.

Be cold (thing)

Make cold (being)

Make cold (thing)

Make not cold (being)

Make not cold (thing)

Be warm, n.

Warm him or it

Warm thyself

Cause thyself to be warmed or to warm

him

Cause him to be warmed or to warm

another

Warm me

Cause me to be warmed or to warm

another

Be dirty (become) n.

Dirty thyself, intr,

Dirty it, tr.

Dirty it for him

Cause to dirty or to be dirtied

Be clean, n.

Be not clean

Clean thyself, intr.

Clean it, tr.

Clean it for him

Clean not thyself

Clean it not

Be angry, n.

Make angry, tr.

Abuse, revile, tr.

* Any state of body that continu

expressed by the active participle—if

past or passive participle, thus impi yotvi is sleepy; impi yosta, asleep.

Véyu Vocabulary.

[ No.

Vayu.

Suksa met’ pingsung.

Suksa met’ pingche.

Tidaksa met’, or Tidakvi dum.*

Tidaksa met’ pingko.

Tidaksa met’ pingsung,

Tidaksa met’ pingche.

Suksa tha met’,

Suksa met’ tha ping.

Tidaksa tha met’,

Tidaksa met’ tha ping.

Impi yot’ or yosche. Impi yotvi dum.

Impi yot’ phato. Impi yotvi thumto.

Impi yot tha phato. Impi yotvi tha

thumto.

Jumsa met’.

Khimche,

Jumsa met’ tha ping.

‘ Do. do. do. phato.

Khimto.

( Jumsa met’ tha ping.

t Do. do. do. phato.

Tha khimto.

Jekhom ponchedum.

Jeto. Jekhom pako.

Jeche. Jekhom panche.

Je pingche.

Je pingko.

Je sung.

Je pingsung.

Penki or Penkimu dum.

Penki or penkimu no (be),

Penki or Penkimu panche.

Penki pako.

Penki pato.

Penki papingko.

Wota dum.

Wota tha dum,

Wota panche and woche,

Woto. Wota pako.

Wota pato.

Tha woche,

Tha woto.

Risi bok.’

Risi phokto or pho’ko.

Jishto.

Wota thapo.

es or is to come, like thirsty, sleepy, is

it be supposed complete, like asleep, by the

Met,

== die, and suksa met’ == die of hunger: tidaksa met’ = die of thirst, or literally,

of want of water,

1857.]

English.

Cause to revile

Abuse thyself

Abuse me

Quarrel, n.

Cause to quarrel

Cause me to quarrel or be quarrelled

with

Cause thyself to quarrel or be quarrelled

with

Cause him to quarrel or be quarrelled

with

Be friendly

Be united or reconciled, intr.

Make friendly

Unite

Reconcile, tr.

Cause to unite or to be united

Be not united = unite not yourselves

Unite not, tr.

Fight, n.

Cause to fight or to be fought

Cause not to fight or to be fought

Cause me to fight or be fought with

Cause thyself to fight or be fought with

Cause him to fight or to be fought

Be victorious, n.

Make him victorious

Cause to make victorious

Make thyself victorious

Make me victorious

Cause me to be made victorious

Conquer him, tr.

Conquer thyself

Conquer me

Cause him to conquer or be conquered

Ask aid to conquer thyself

Cause me to be conquered or to con-

quer

Be conquered

Succumb, n.

Cause to succomb by thy own act

Cause to succumb through another’s

agency

Cause me to succumb by thy own act

Cause me to succumb through another’s

agency

Work, trans.

Work for self, do own work

Work for him, do his work

Work for me, do my work

Cause to work or be worked

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Jit’pingko.

Jishcbe.

Jishsung.

Phwe.

Phwet’ pha’to (phasto/.

Phwet’ phasung.

Phwet’ phasche.

Phwet’ phato (phasto).

Tosche.*

Totnachhe, D. Toschine, Pl.

Tophto (Toshto),

Tot’ pingko.

Tha tosche.* (Tha toschine, P.)

Tha tot’.

Pat. Patnachhe, D. Patchine, P.

Pat pingko,

Pat tha ping.

Pat ping sung.

Pat ping che.

Pat ping ko.

Then.

Thento.

Then pingko.

Thenche.

Thensung.

Thenpingsung.

W onto.t

W onche.

Wonsurg.

Wonpingko.

Wonpinche.

Wonpingsung.

i Yang. Yangla (see note at Run),

Yangto.

Yang pingko.

Yangsang.

Yang ping sung.

Kam pako.

Kam panche.

Kam pato.

Se pasung.

am papingko.

ALL

* The genius of these tongues requires such a phrase as ‘ be reconciled’ to be

set down in the dual or plural.

So also fight, &c.

+ The comparison of the roots then and won will show how these tongues

attempt to fend off the equivoques resulting from imperfectly developed grammar,

Wonto is'used as a neuter with transitives, and phasche (not wonche) replaces it

with neuters, Top won tungmi, I can strike.

Im phaschungmi, I can sleep.

412 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5.

English. Vayu.

Cause thyself to work or thy work to

be done Kam papingche.

Cause to work for him or his work to

be done Kam papingto.

Play = amuse thyself, intr, Hanche (s’ amuser).

Make him play or do thou thyself

amuse him, tr. Hanto (amuser).

Cause him to be made to play or have

been amused (per alterum) Hanpingko.

Play with me Ang nung hanche.*

Amuse me Hansung.

Cause me to be amused Hanpingsung.

Be tired, n. Jyop’.f

Make tired or tire it Jyopto.

Tire thyself J yopche.

Tire me J yopsung.

Cause me to be tired or to tire Jyop pingsung.

Cause thyself to be tired or to tire Jyop pingche.

Cause him to be tired or to tire Jyop pingko.

Be rested, take rest, rest thyself Nekche.

Rest it, give rest Ne’ko (Nek-ko).

Cause to give it rest Nek’ pingto.

Cause thyself to have rest Nekpingche.

Do thou give me rest Neksung.

Cause me to have rest Nek pingsung.

Take not rest Tha nekche.

Give not rest Tia nek’.

Move, n. Duk’.

Move it, trans. Thukto. Duk’ pingko,

Cause it to be moved or to move it Thukpingko.

Be still, move not Tha duk’.

Make still, move it not Tha thukto.

Be quick, ac. intr. = quicken thyself Plakche.

Quicken, tr. Plakto.

Cause to quicken or to be quick Plakpingko.

Do thou quicken me Plaksung.

Cause me to be quickened Plakpingsung.

Cause thyself to be quickened Plakpingche.

Be slow, be dilatory, delay, n. Ga

Cause to be slow or delay it Gat’ pingko.

Stay, stop, stop thyself, intr. Thikche.

Stay him, stop him, tr. Thikto.

Cause him to be stopped or tostophim Thik pingko.

Let him depart Lat pingko.

Be intoxicated, n. Vi

Intoxicate, tr. Vit’phato.

Tell the truth Diksa hot, n. Diksa ishto, tr.

Cause to speak truth Diksa hotpingko, Diksa itpingko,

Mang diksa ishto.

Budhia hato.

Cause to lie Budhia hanpingko,

Believe, obey, tr. Honko.

Mang diksa hot’.

Tell falsehood

* Literally, amuse thyself with me, along with me. The sense is quite different

from that of hansung in which I am solely the amused party.

+ From jyop comes the Newari jyapu, a labourer, though one tongue has lost

the noun; the other, the verb! See Twist.

1857.] Viyu Vocabulary. 413

English. Vayu.

Cause to believe or obey, or to be

obeyed , Honpingko.

Disbelieve, disobey Tha hon.

Forbid, tr. Davoha thikto.

Prevent, tr. Thikto.

Present, offer. tr. Cho’-ko (chokko).

Offer not Tha chok’

Accept, intr. Dosche.

Accept it, tr. Doko

Accept it for self Dosche.

Accept it for him Dosto.

Accept not or refuse Tha dosche.

Accept it not or refuse it Tha do.

Choose, select, tr. Lwko. Luksung. Lukche. Lukto.

Cherish, protect, tr. Tunko.

Cherish thyself or thy own Tunche.

Cherish me Tunsung.

Cause me to be cherished or to cherish Tunpingsung.

Abandon, neglect, leave, tr. Was’to (WAsto).

Confine, imprison, tr. Thikto.

Set at liberty, tr. Teshto,

Have, intr. Gosche. Ungbe-penku né or dum.

eink want Wigs gosche. Ungbe penku tha nd or

tha dum.

Cause him to have Got’pingko. Wathim bepenku-thumto.

ee 6 have Tha got ping, Wathim be penku tha

thumto.

Give, trans. Hato. Mumto.

Give me or to me Hasung, Mumsung,

Give to or for thyself Hanche.* Mumche.

Give to him or for him Hato. Mumto.

Give not Tha hato. Tha mumto.

Cause to give or to be given Hapingko.

Cause not to give or not to be given Ha tha ping or Tha ha ping.

Give it back, return it to him Lipto (see take back).

Cause to return or to be returned Lip pingko.

Give again (more) Gessa hato.

Take, intr. Lasche. Dosche.}

Take it, tr. Lasto. Doho.

Take for thyself, i. e. appropriate Lasche. Dosche.

Take it for him Lashto. Dosto.

Cause to take or be taken Lakpingko. Dot pingko.

Take it back, quasi, return it to self Lipche (see give back).

Save, preserve, cure, him (life) Cholko.

Save, cure thyself Cholche.

Save me Cholsung.

Destroy (life) Sishto (see kill).

Keep, preserve (thing) Tako (see keep).

* Compare “Take.” The pronominalization of the Vayu verbs prevents a good

deal of that difficulty which the Turanians generally experience in furnishing simple

equivalents for the words ‘give’ and ‘ take,’ because the genius of the languages

exacts on all occasions a rigid attention to the results of action, the objective as

well as subjective results. Different roots or different modifications of the same

roots must necessarily convey the idea involved in each case.

+ See remark at buy. The result of taking is appropriation by self. Hence

the intr, verb. The words give and take might alone suffice almost to prove the

unity of the Turanian languages.

3 H

AVA

English.

Spoil (thing)

Be handsome

Make handsome

Adorn

Adorn thyself

Adorn him

Adorn it for him

Adorn her

Grow, animal plant, n.

Grow it, or cause to grow, tr.

Decay, n.

Decay it or cause to decay

Be adult or mature

Make mature

Steal, tr.

Steal for thyself

Steal for him, for another

Cause to steal or be stolen

Steal not

Cause not to steal or be stolen

Deceive, cheat, tr.

Deceive thyself

Deceive not

Deceive me

Cause me to be deceived

Accompany, intr.

Leave, quit, tr.

Remain with, intr.

Sit, = seat thyself, intr.

Seat, tr.

Cause to seat or to be seated

Cause thyself to be seated

Sit not

Seat not

Cause not, do not cause, to sit or be

seated

Stand, intr. |

Make stand

Make stand for another

Cause to make stand, to be erect

Stoop, intr.

Make stoop, tr.

Cause to make stoop

Lie down, intr.

Lay down, make lie down

Cause to be laid down or to lay down

Get up, if recumbent

Get up, if sitting

Remain standing, intr.

Fall, on ground, n.

Cause to fall, ditto

Fall from aloft, n.

Make fall or throw down or let fall

Do not make fall

* Final cho and mi are proper to the sexes.

Vayu Voeabulary.

Vayu.

Nasi pako.

Bingcho dum.* © Bingmi dam.

Bingcho thumto.

Bingcho pako.

Bingcho panche.

Bingcho pako.

Bingcho pato.

Bingmi pako.

Jongche. Hon (khon). Liche.

Jongto, Honto. Lito.

Ri. Rila.

Rito. Ripingko.

Bangcho dum.

Bangho pako.

Khbuko.

Khuche.

Khuto.

Khu pingko.t

Tha khu.

Khu tha ping,

Mangpingko (see forget).

Mangpingche.

Tha mangping.

Mang pingsung.

Mang pa pingsung.

Ko’na lala. Minung khokehe.

Was’ to.

Ko’na musche.

Musche (S’asseoir).

Muphto (Mushto).

Mut’pingko.

Mut’ pingche.

Tha musche.

Tha mut’.

Bangmi dum.”

Mut’tha ping or tha mut’ping.

Ipche = ereet thyself.

Vpo = erect it or him.

Ipto = erect it for him.

Tppingko.

Khungche.

Khungto.

Khung pingko.

Likehe. Likla.

Li’ko (Lik-ko).

Lik pingko.

Buk’ (see Wake).

Ipche (see stand).

Ipipha musche.

Lik.

Ruk’. Ruk’la.

Ruk’ pingko.

Duk’. Duk’la.

Tu’ko (Tukko) tuksung, tukche, tukto.

Duk pingko.

Tha tuk’. Duk’ tha ping.

See adjectives,

+ Khu pha’to (phasto) make a thief of him.

No.

1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 415

English. Vayu.

Get on, mount, n. Changche.

Mount him, cause to mount Changto.

Get off, dismount Lische, n. Listo, tr.

Put down. Place. Put, tr. Tako.

Put down or place for me Tasung.

Ditto ditto for self Tanche.

Ditto ditto for him Tato.

Lift up, raise* from ground, tr. Reko, without force. Guko, with force.

Lift up for self Resche. Gukche.

Ditto ditto for him Resto, Gukto.

Ditto ditto for me Ressung. Guksung.

Throw, tr. Jupto, jupsung jupche.

Catch with open hand or spread cloth, tr. Doko.

Catch with open hand for self Dosche.

Ditto ditto for him Dosto.

Catch by grasp, tr. Chhuko.

Ditto ditto for self Chhusche.

Ditto ditto for him Chhusto.

Keep, tr.

Snatch from, tr.

Throw away, tr. Squander, tr.

Squander your own

Be near, n.

Approximate thyself

Approximate it

Tako (see put.)

Lato, lasung lanche,

Hopto.

Hopche.

Khewa n6. Khewa ponche,

Khewa panche.

Khewa pako.

Be distant, intr. Khosche. Kholamdum.

Distance him, tr. Khot’phato. Kholam thumto.

Distance thyself Khot’ phasche.

Bring, trans. Pishto.

Bring me or for me Pishsung.

Bring thyself or for thyself Pishche.

Bring him or for him Pishto.

Fetch, comp.

Fetch it

Fetch it for me or fetch me

Fetch for thyself or do thou thyself fetch

Fetch for him

Cause to fetch or be fetched

Bala (= to bring go).

Pishto (Bala has no trans.)

Basung.

Banche,

Bato ?? (obsolete trans.)

Ba pingko.

Take away, tr. Lakto.

Take yourself off or take it away for

thyself Lakche.

Cause to take away or to be taken away Lak pingko.

Send, tr. Pingko.

Send it for thyself Pinech

Do thou thyself send or send thy own Pere

Send it for him or on his account or

send his things Pingto.

Send me or for me Pingsung.

Send him or it Pingko.

* Raise on the ground is ipo, = erect it or him, as ipche is erect thyself = sit

up or stand up.

For get up, to a sleeping man, you say sipche, to a sitting man,

ipche, to one lying down, buk’. Rise, as respects beings, is ipche or buk’ therefore,

but as respects the heavenly bodies the equivalent term is lok’, appear. Spe-

cialization is the soul and body of these tougues, which remedy defects of grammar

by multiplication of terms, so as to fend off mistakes in the best way available.

See note on Kuko. Quoad falling, ruk’ and duk’ apply to beings only. The word

for things is lik.’

oH 2

416

English.

Cause to send or be sent

Carry, bear, trans.

Carry it for thyself

Carry it for him

Carry it for me or me

Cause him, it, to carry or to be carried

Cross over

Cross it over

Cross under

Cross it under

Hold, take in hand, tr.

Grasp, tr.

Hold up, support, tr.

Let it fall or let it be fallen

Fall, n. (things only).

Throw down, tr.

Enter, n.

Cause to enter

Admit. Insert, tr.

Issue, n. ;

Cause to issue, expel, drive out

Ascend, go up, n.

Ascena, come up, n,

Descend, go down, n.

Descend, come down, n.

Cause to ascend or to be ascended

Cause to descend or to be descended

Arrive, n. here there

Cause to arrive, tr.

Depart, n.

Precede, n.

Follow, n.

Attend on,n.

Appear = show thyself, n.

Make it, him, appear

Cause to make appear

Vayu Vocabulary.

[ No.

Vayu.

Ping pingko. . Ping phato.

Kuko.*

Kunche,

Kuto.

Kusung.

Kupingko.

Lumthe.

Lumto.

Kudikhalala,

Kudikha latpingko.

Kuko (see carry).

Chhuko, chhusche chhuphto.

Doko (see catch),

Liklayu.

Lik’la. Lik.

Li’ko (Likko) liksung, likche, likto.

Bek’.

Phekto, pheksung, phekche.

Bek pingko.

Lok’.

Lokto, loksung, lokche.

Bek’.

Jok’.

Yonkha la’la.

Yu.

Bek’pingko. “Jok’pingko.

Yonkha lat pingko. Yut’ pingko.

Dong, Dongla.

Thongto.

Lakche} (see take away).

Honko ponche.

Nongna ponche

Ko’na ponche.

Khunche,

Khunto.

Khunpingko.

Yu la.

Disappear, n, — hide thyself, or lie hid Kinche.

Make disappear, make hide or make

lie hid

Cause to make disappear

Make disappear thy own person or

goods

Make disappear for another

Make me disappear

Be lost

Lose, n.

Lose it, tr.

Cause to lose it

Lose it not

* Kuko, like all transitives of its class, gives both the active and passive of

3rd person, preterite; thus, kukum, he carried or was carried.

must call the passive has no imperative.

form Kuyu, let thyself or him be carried.

senses of the imperative are conveyed, and hence the causal forin is often to be

regarded as the only representative in these tongues of the passive, as for example,

in Newari.

\ Damla.

Khiko.

Kinpingko.

Khit’pingko.

Khische.

Khisto.

Khissung.

Dam.

Thampo, thamsung, thamche, thampto.

Thampingko.

Tha tham.,

+ Lakche = va-t-en in French. La, to go, is the root.

But what we

From yu, to descend, you can indeed

In the causal form of the verb both

1857.]

English.

Cause it not to be lost or cause him

not to lose it

Search, tr.

Search not

Search me or for me

Search for thy own or for thyself or

do thou thyself search

Search for him, for his, on his account

Search not for him

Find, tr.

Find not

Cause to find or to be found

Find me or for me

Find for thyself or thy own

Find for him

Cause to find for me or me to be found

Cause to find for self or thyself to be

found

Cause to find for him or him to be

found

Begin, n.

Begin it, tr.

Cause it to begin or be begun

Continue

End, n.

End it

Cause it to end or be ended

Come, n.

Cause him, it, to come or to be come

Cause me to come or to be come

Cause thyself to come or be come

Cause him to come or to be come

Cause him to come on another’s account

Come not

Cause not to come

Go, n.

Cause to go

Go not

Do not cause to go

Get out of the way

Clear the way. Make get out of the

way

Clear the way for me

* Wait, ac. intr.

Wait for, expect, tr.

Wait for me

Wait for him

Cause to wait

Arrive, (1.) here, (2.) there.

Cause to arrive

Depart, n.

Dismiss, tr.

Return, intr.

Vayu Vocabulary.

417

Vayu.

Tham thaping.

Hoko.

Tha ho.

Hosung.

Hosche (Hoche).

Hophto ? (Hosto) Hoto ?

Tha hot (ho).

Lenko.

Tha leng.

Leng pingko.

Leng sung.

Leng che.

Leng to.

Leng pingsung.

Leng pingche.

Leng ping to.

Teshche.

Teshto.

Tet pingko.

The root is repeated with the substantive

verb to show continued action, as gik

nagik nomi, it is flowing and flowing.

Topna top nognom, I am striking.

Chusche.

Chuphto (chusto),

Chut pingko.

Phi (see on).

Phit’ pingko.

Phit’pingsung.

Phit’ pingche.

Phit pingko.

Phit pingto.

Tha phi.

Phit tha ping.

La’la (iterated root).

Lat’ping ko.

Tha la’la.

Lat tha ping.

Khikche.

Khikto.

Khiksung.

Rimche.

Rimto.

Rimsung.

Rimto.

Rimpingko.

(1.) Dong.

Dong pingko,

Lokla.

Lokto.

Lishche.

(2.) Dongla.*

Thongto.

* So also Bek’ = enter, is come in, and Bek’la, is go in.

418

English.

Make return, tr.

Increase in height, n. = grow

Heighten it

Heighten me. Make me grow

Increase, in bulk, n.

Increase thyself = grow

Increase it, tr. in bulk, tr.

Increase me in bulk

Increase in length, n.

Lengthen it

Lengthen me

Decrease of all sorts, n.

Decrease it

Add to, tr.

Deduct from, tr.

Cultivate (land), tr.

Cultivate it for me or my land

Cultivate it for him or his land

Cultivate for self

Dig, tr.

Dig for self

Dig thy own

Dig for him, dig his field

Dig me, for me, my field

Cause to dig or be dug

Cause thyself to dig or cause thy own

field to be dug

Cause him to dig for another, or an-

other’s field to be dug for him

Cause me to dig or my field to be dug,

or (if the field spoke) me to be dug

Dig not

Cause not to dig

Plough, tr.

Plough for self

Plough for him

Plough for me or, (if the field spoke)

plough me

Plough not

Plough not for self or plough not thy

own field

Cause not to plough, or be ploughed

Sow, tr.

Cause to sow or be sown

Cause not to sow, or be sown

Sow for me or sow met

Sow me not or sow not for me

Transplant, tr.

Transplant not

Véyu Vocabulary.

[No.

Vayu.

Lishto.

Jongche.

Jongto.

Jongsung.

Honta dum.

Honche.*

Honto (hard h),

Honta thumto.

Honsung.

Phinche. Phinta dum.

Phinto. Phinta pako.

Phinsung..

Yang. Yangila.

Yang pingko,

Khapto, khapche, khapsung,

Yangto, yangche, yangsung.

Vik yé ko.+

Vik yeksung.

Vik yekto.

Vik yekche.

Duko.

Dunche.

Duto.

Dusung.

Du pingko.

Jongta dum.

Du pingche.

Du pingto.

Du pingsung.

Tha du.

Du tha ping or Tha du ping.

Ruw’ko Ruk-ko,

Rukche.

Rukto.

Ruksung.

Tha ruk’,

Tha rukche.

Tha ruk’ ping.

Chho’ko (chhok-ko) chhoksung, chhok-

che, chhokto.

Chhok’ pingko,

Chhok’tbaping.

Chhok’sung.

Tha chbok’gno.

Luphto (Lusto) lussung, lusche.

Tha lut’.

Cause to transplant or to be transplanted Lut’pingko.

* H underlined thus, h. is a guttural.

+ This word means ‘ clear the jungle’ and alone suffices to show the state of the

country and of the people.

+ Sow me, (what the seed would say) is the true grammatical sense. But the

other is widely, nay alone, in use, the constructio ad sensum still overruling the

grammar.

1857.] | Vayu Vocabulary.

English.

Reap, -tr.

Reap not

Cause to reap or to be reaped

Cause not to reap or be reaped

Gather, pluck (flowers), no¢ greens, tr.

Gather not

Gather (cotton) 1 er

Pluck (fruit) f"

Gather not (cotton)

Gather (greens), tr.

Pluck up by roots, tr.

Eradicate not

Fell—tree, tr.

Fell not—tree

Breed cattle, tr.

Breed not

Slaughter cattle, tr.

Graze, intr. and tr.

Flay or decorticate, tr.

Flay not

Peel fruit

Shear, tr.

Shear not

Buy, ac. intr.

Buy it, tr.

Cause to buy or be bought

Buy it not

Buy not for him

Buy me or for met

Do thou thyself buy it or buy it for

thyself

Buy it for him

Buy it

Sell, tr.

Cause to sell or to be sold

Sell me or for me.

Sell thyself or for thyself, or thy own

Sell him, it, or for him or his

Sell not

Exchange or change, ac. intr.

Exchange it

Exchange me or it for me

Exchange it for him

Exchange not

Exchange it not

Exchange it not for him

Exchange me not or not for me

Vayu.

Peshto, pessung, pesche.

Tha pet’.

Pet’ping ko.

Pet’tha ping.

Tuko, tusung, tunche, tuto.

Tha tu.

Seko, sesung, senche, seto.

Tha se.

Peshto (see reap).

Photo phosung, phonche.

Tha photo.

Phoko, phossung phosche.

Thapho.

Tunko, tunsung, tunche, tunto.

Thatun.

Sishto (kill). Yukto (cut).

Gupche, intr. Gupto, tr.

Ta’ko, taksung, takche, takto.

Tha tak, ‘

Keko, kessung, kesche, kesto.

Yo’ko, yeksung, yekche, yekto.

Tha yek’.

Ingche.*

Ingko, ingsung, ingche, ingto.

Ing pingko.

Tha ing.

Tha ingto.

Ingsung.

Ingche.

Ingto (Ingkto).t

Ingko.

Thamto.

Thampingko.

Thamsung.

Thamche.,

Thamto.

Tha thamto.

Jyapche (see buy).

Jya’ po (Jyap po).

Jyap’sung,.

Jyap’to.t

Tha jyap’che.

Tha jyap’.

Tha jyap’to.

Tha jyapmo.

419

* See eat and take. In every act, of which the result returns to self, this form

is preferred to the transitive. The French tongue affords a good clue.

+ I have already said that buy me seems to be the truer sense, whence the

passive ingsungmi, I was bought.

But in the class of transitives to which ingko

belongs, ingsungmi is also the present and future tense of the active voice, viz. I

buy it or will buy it. Ingche, the intransitive, gives ingchung mi in both tenses, I

pay (i. e. will buy) and I bought,

~ This form solves the difficuity as to two transitive signs following a verbal

root, and enables me often to reach the primitive monosyllabic type of words—a

thing of the highest import to special and general philology.

A420

English.

Lend, tr.

Borrow, intr.

Pay debt, tr.

Pay not

Count, tr.

Count not

Measure or weight, tr.

Weigh not

Plaster, tr.

Make house, tr.

Make clothes, tr.

Make not clothes

Make clothes for me

Make for self

Make for him

Spin, tr.

Spin not

Weave, tr.

Weave not

Sew, tr.

Sew not

Grind, tr.

Work mine, tr.

Work iron, tr.

Work wood, tr.

Work clay, tr.

Cook, tr.

Be cooked = be ripe, be prepared, n.

Boil, tr.

Boil not

Roast, tr.

Ditto for me

Ditto for self

Ditto for another

Grill, fry, tr.

Cut, tr.

Cut not

Cut me or for me

Cut thyself or for thyself

Perforate, tr.

Pierce (being), tr.

Tear, tr.

Tear thy own, tear for thyself, tear

thyself

Split, tr.

Break , tear (long things), tr.

Break it, in pieces

Burst it (round things), tr.

Be broken or be burst, n.

Brew, tr.

Distill, tr.

Filtrate. Deficate, tr.

Be sharp, n.

Sharpen, tr.

Vayu Vocabulary.

[No. 5.

Vayu.

Penku hato, hasung, hanche.

Penku lasche (see buy),—lassung, lasto.

Thengko, phensung, phengche, phengto.

Tha pheng.

Hito, hisung, hinche, hito.

Tha hito.

Po’ko vel Puwko, puksung, pukche,

pukto.

Tha pok’.

Suto, susung, sunche.

Kem pako.

Jewa piko, pisung, pinche, pito.

Jewa tha pi.

Jewa pisung.

Jewa pinche.

Jewa pito.

Chenko, chingsung, chingche, chingto.

Tha cheng.

Pungko, pungsung, pungche, pungto.

Thapung.

Piko.

Tha pi.

Reko, resung, renche, reto.

Khani duko (dig).

Khakchingto’po (beat) topsung, topche,

topto.

Sing chu’ko (plane) chyuksung, chukche,

chukto.

Ko chyako (knead) chyassung, chydsche,

chyasto.

Khoko khossung, khosche, khosto.

Min, minko, minche, minto.

Khoko.

Tha kho.

Sunko.

Sunsung.

Sunche.

Sunto.

Chuko, chusung, chunche, chuto.

Yukto.

Tha yukto.

Yuksung.

Yukche.

Sa (s) to.

Chhepto, chhepche, chhepsung.

Jito, jisung, jinche, jito.

Suto.

Jinche,

Hakto. Chito, haksung, hakche, hakto,

Chi’ko (chik’-ko), chiksung, chikche,

chikto.

} Kheto, khesung, khenche,

Jik’. Jikla. Réla or Ré,

Swe pophto, possung, posche, posto.

Bukchapako.

Chi’po, chipsung, chipche, chipto.

Yep.

Yep phato. Chho’po. Chho’po, gives

chhopsung, chhopche, chhopto.

1857.]

English.

Be blunt, n.

Blunten.

Shake, tr.

Move, n.

Move it, tr.

Be still, n. (= move not).

Make still, tr.

Make blunt, tr.

Vayu Vocabulary. 421

Vayu.

Gnun.

Gnito, gnisung gnunche.

Hok’to, Hoksung, hokche.

Duk’.

Thukto, thuksung, thukche.

Tha duk’.

Tha thukto.

Contain or hold, (= Be contained and

contain it).

Vek, vekche, n. Vekto, vekphato, tr.

Make contain or cause to be contained Vek pingko.

Retain, sustain, tr.

Retain, intr.

Cause to retain

Ooze out, n.

Make ooze out

Stop it oozing out

Be full—belly (fill own belly), intr.

Fill it—belly, tr.

Be full—vessel

Fill it—vessel

Be empty, n.

Empty it, tr.

Shine, as sun, n.

Flow, as water

Cause to flow

Blow, as wind, intr.

Grow, as tree, ac. intr.

Cause to grow, or grow it

Decay, rot, nu.

Make decay

Flower, n.

Cause to flower

Fruit, n.

Cause to fruit

Be ripe, n.

Ripen, tr.

Ripen it for him

Be raw, n.

Make raw, tr.

Be cold (things only) intr.

Make cold, tr.

Be hot, intr., n.

Heat it, tr.

Be luminous, n.

Make luminous

Be dark, n.

Darken it, tr.

Light it (candle), tr.

Light, intr. (Be lighted)

Kindle it (fire), tr.

Doko.

Donche.

Dot’ pingko.

Jot’:

Jot’ pingko.

Rito, rdsung, rinche.

Tamche.

Tamto, tamsung, tamche, tamto,

Chinche. Dam. Phul dum,

Damto, dampingko, Phul pako, Chinko.

Polang dum.

Polang pako.

Kak. Chok’.

Gikla. Dengla.

Gik pingko.

Hujum ponche.

Liche.

Lito, lisung, liche, lito.

Rila. Méla.

Rit phato. Met’-pha’to (phasto).

But’.

But’ pha’to, phassung, phasche, phasto.

Sé

Set’pha’to (phasto).

Min.

Minko, minsung, minche, minto.

Minto.

hhalang-no-dum.*

Chhalang pako, posung, panche, pato.

Khimche.

Khimto, khimsung, khimche, khimto.

Jeche. Jekhomdum or ponche.

Jeto. Jekhom pako. Jeto gives jesung,

jenche, jeto.

Dang dang dum or ponche.

Dang dang pako.

Kung kung dum or ponche.

Kung kung pako.

Nako, nasung, nache, nato.

Nache.

Du’po, dupsung, dupche, dupto. Jos-

to, jossung, josche, josto.

Kindle, n. or

Be kindled ac. Josche. Dupche.

Kindle thyself intr.

* N6=be. Dum = become.

4.22 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 5.

English. Vayu.

Burn, i. e. destroy by fire, tr. Yemto, yemsung, yemche, yemto.

Be burnt (= go burnt, n. Yemla.

Burn thyself or burn it for self, ac. intr. Yemche.

Burn, corpse, tr. Umto, umsung, umche, umto.

Bury, corpse, tr. Khumpo, khumsung, khumche, khumto,

Melt, n. Yekla (see run),

Melt it, tr. Ye’ko (see cultivate).

Cause to melt Yek pingko.

Congeal, n. Ningla.* Nengle.

Congeal it, tr. Ningto. Nengto.

Congeal thyself Nengche.

Congeal me Nengsung.

Cause to congeal Ningpingko.

Share out, apportion, tr. Pleko, plesung, pleche, pleto.

Bring together, collect, tr. Ko’na pako. Hupto.

Collect for thyself, intr. Hupche.

Collect for me or me, p. Hupsung.

Separate, tr. Gege pako.

Divide, tr. Thuto, thusung, thunche.

Scatter, tr. Hampo.

Join, what broken, tr. Thuphto (Thusto) thussung, thusche.

Disjoin, undo, tr. Chhako, chhassung, chhasche, chhasto,

Mix, tr. Khunto, khunsung, khunche.

Unmix, tr. Thoto, thosung, thonche.

Save (money), tr. Hupto, hupsung, hupche.

Squander, tr. Hopto, hopsung, hopche.

Spread ete. hal posung, poche. Hampo, hamsung,

. hamche.

Fold, tr. Khoko, khossung, khosche.

Be shut, intr. Thikche,

Shut it, tr. Thikto.

Be open, open for thyself, intr. Honche.f

Open it, tr. Honko.

Press, squeeze, compress if, tr. Napto.

Compressed be, or compress thyself

or compress with own hand Napche.

Depress, tr. Phimto.

Be depressed, depress for thyself Phimche.

Express, tr. Pelto,

Be expressed, intr. Pelche.

Turn over carefully, tr. pa ct Lokswng,.qokoehey

Turn topsy turvy. Put in disorder Khalim, khulim, pako.

Spread in sun to dry (grain), tr. Blento or Bento, blensung, blenche.

Roll up, tr. Ku’ko (Kukko) kuksung, kukche, kukto.

Unroll, tr. Chhako, chhassung, chhasche, chhasto,

Be loose, be slack, n. Woso dum. Woso ponche.

Loosen, slacken, tr. Woso pako, posung, panche, pato.

Be tight Khwa (s) ta dum.

Tighten thy own or for thyself Khwasche,

Tighten, tr. Khwa (s) to khwassung, khwasche.

Cause to tighten Khwat’ pingko.

Gird thy loins, a. intr. Kikche.

Bind, tr. rr hee pansung, panche. Wampo,

wamsung, wamche, wamto.

* e and i, like o and u are constantly commuted.

+ Thikche and honche, shut thyself, and open thyself, addressed to the door.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 42

English.

Unbind, tr.

Pack, tr.

Unpack, tr.

Load, tr.

Unload, tr.

Put on, tr.

Take off, tr.

Take off (from fire),

Put in, insert, tr.

Take out, tr.

Pour in, tr.

Catch as poured in, tr.

Pour out on ground, tr.

Suspend, tr.

Take down what suspended, tr.

Take hold of, tr.

Quit hold of, tr.

Throw, tr.

Catch as thrown, tr.

Stay, stop, intr.

Stay it, stop it, tr.

Stop me

Let go, tr.

Enable to go, tr.

Be clean, n.

Make clean, tr.

Wash—things only, tr.

Wash thy own, intr.

Wash me or mine, p.

Rub or rub it, tr.

Rub thy own or rub simply, intr.

Rub me or mine

Be polished

Polish it, tr.

Polish it for thyself

Cover, tr.

Cover thyself

Cover me

Uncover, tr.

Uncover thyself or thy own

Shoot, with arrow, gun, tr.

Shoot me or for me

Shoot thyself or for thyself

Shoot it for him, tr.

Stone, hit with stone, tr.

Wring its neck, tr.

Wring not its neck

Wring clothes, tr.

Wring not clothes

Twist rope, tr.

Vayu.

Chhako (see unroll).

Khuli pako.

Khuli chhako.

Ku pingko.

Khuli tako, tosung, tanche, tato.

Cho’ko (chokko) choksung, chekche,

Luko, lusung, lusche, lusto.

Yo’po, yopsung, yopche, yopto.

Kheko, khessung, khesche, khesto.

Thophto, thossung, thosche.

Kheko, khesung, khesche, khesto.

Chosto, chhossung, chhosche.

Chisto, chissung, chische. Veko, vesung,

vesche, vesto.

Luko, lusung, lusche. luto.

Chhuko, chhusung, chhusche, chhuto.

Teshto, tesche, tessung.

Jupto, jupsung, jupche.

Doko, dossung, dosche, doto.

Lat’pingko.

Lat’ phato.

Wota dum. Woche.

Woto, wosung, woche.

Chhunche.

Chhunsung.

Khissung.

Liku ponche.

Liku pako.

Liku panche.

Supto.

Supche.

Rumsung. Supsung.

Honko, hongsung, honche, hongto,

Wo’po (wop-po).

Wopsung,

Chasto, chassung, chasche.

Khi’po (khippo) khipsung, khipche,

Tha £hip’.

Pelto, pelsung, pelche.

Tha pelto.

* In Newari Khipo is used only substantively, a rope. Just so the root kai

means the hand and to grasp in Telegu and Tamil, but to grasp only in Newari,

Whosoever will ¢hus search may discover the true extent, quoad words, of Tura-

nian affinities, not otherwise. See Tire.

312

424

English.

Untwist rope, tr.

Resemble, be like

Cause to resemble or liken simply

Cause to cause to resemble, or cause

to liken

Be unlike

Make unlike

Be white, n. (things, animals)

Be white (rationals only),

Whiten it,

Whiten him,

Whiten me

tr.

Whiten thyself or it for thyself or do

thou thyself whiten him or it

Whiten it for him

Be ripe (fruits)

Make ripe (ditto)

Be ripe (grains)

Make ripe (ditto)

Be wet or wet thyself

Wet it

Cause it to be wetted

Be dry (things only)

Dry it

Dry it in sun

Dry it at fire

Be flavoursome

Flavour it, tr.

Be sweet, n.

Sweeten it, tr.

Be sour

Make sour

Be bitter

Make bitter

Be knotted, intr.

Knot it, tr. .

Be great, n.

Make great, tr.

Be heavy, intr.

Make heavy, tr.

Be light (levis)

Make light, tr.

Be hard, intr.

Harden it, tr.

Cause to harden or to be hardened

Be soft, n.

Soften it, tr.

Be crooked

Crook it, tr.

Vayu Vocabulary.

Vayu.

Chhako (see loosen).

Tosche. Totvi dum,

Tophto. Totvi pako.

Tot’ pingko.

Mang totvi dum.

Mang totvi pako.

Dawang dum. Dawang ponche.

Bochho, dum, ponche.

Dawang pako.

Bochho pako.

Dawang. Bocho, posung or posung.

Dawang. Bochho, panche.

Dawang pato.

Ji.

Jito, jisung, jinche.

in,

Minko, minsung, minche, minto.

Na’-che (nasche).

Na’-to, nassung, nasche.

Nat’pingko.

Dungs, \

Dung pingko.

Boko or Bloko,* blosung, blosche, blosto.

Sungko, sungsung, sungche, sungto.

Chhumche.

Chhumto, chhumsung, chhumche

Chhinji, dum or poncle.

Chhinji, thumto or pako.

Jusche.

Justo.

Khasche.

Kha (s) to.

Rupche.

Rupto.

Hon (Khon).

Honto. Honta thumto.

Lishche. Lishtadum.

Lishto. Lit phato.

Oksang dum.

Oksang pako.

Chamche.

Chamto, chamsung, chamche.

Champingko.

Nalcho dum.

Nalcho pako.

Khokche. Khokta dum.

Kho’ko. Khokta-thumto, khoksung,

khokche, khokto.

* Every initial labial followed by a vowel admits ad libitum of an interposed

liquid, thus boko vel bloko and so bekto vel blekto = write. I may here add that

v and y are constantly used both to keep apart concurring vowels and to facilitate

the utterance of initial vowels.

1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 425

Adverbs and Prepositions compared.

English. Vayu.

Come, n. Phi.

Come in Bhitari phi. Bek’.

Come out Tongmaphi. Lok’.

Come back, to rear Nongna phi or ponche.

Come on, to front Honko phi. Honko ponche.

Come up Lonkha or Wanhe phi. Jok’.

Come down Yonkha or Huthe phi. Yu.

Come back = return Khalip phi or Lische.

Come again Gessa phi.

Come once Kophi phi.

Come twice Nakphi phi.

Come thrice Chhukphi phi.

Come four times Blikphi phi.

Come at once or in one place or together Kolube phi.

Come at once, at one time Kophe phi.

Come near Khewa phi.

Come close Ko’na phi.

Come apart Gege phi.

Come far away Kholam phi.

Come with Ko’na phi.

Come with me Ang nung phi.

Come alone Chhale phi.

Angma nosa phi. Ungma nosa phi.

Come without me—thee—him eeemahe

Come towards—me—thee—him { ce aie Ae i Ey ULSI

Come up to me, as far as my position Ang bong phi.

Come as far as this—that Tnung bong phi. Minung bong phi.

Come quickly Waliga phi.

Come slowly Pomha or Pomhana phi.

Come by and by, after awhile Omophe phi.

Come silently Giwonha phi.

Come noisily Tamnitam phi.

Come early Honko phi.

Come at sunrise Nomoloksinge phi.

Come at sunset Nomo thip singhe phi.

Come late Nongna phi.

Come loiteringly Ga’ gat’ha phi.

Come over—by top eee khen phi. Khak

Come under—by under way Hutti phi. Hutim khen phi.

Come through, between Madumna phi.

Come across Thekche phi* or Thek thekha phi.

Come to this—that side Imba phi. Homba phi.

Come constantly Phina phi ponche.

Come sometimes Kophi nakphi phi.

Come ever No such phrase.

Come never Hakhele} thaphi.

* Equal ‘ to cross and come,’ that is, crossing come = having crossed come, thek

thekha phi. The gerund of present time, theklie; is never used on such occasions.

+ Hakhele can only be used with the negative, like jamais in French,

4:26

English.

Never come again

Come by this side

Come by that side

Come to the right

Come by the left

Come from the west

Come to the east

Come towards the east

Come towards the west

Go towards the plains

Go as far as Nepal

Give a little

Give much

Give secretly

Give openly

Give gladly

Give sulkily

Give to-day

Give mutually

Give continually

Strike forcibly

Strike gently

A house

Of a house

To a house

A house

In a house

From the house

By (inst.) the house

ee \ the house

nto

ae } the house

As far as house

Towards the house

Before the house

Opposite, in front of, the house

Behind the house

To the rear of house

On, upon, the house

Above the house

From upon house

Beneath house

Below the house

From under house

Near the house

Far from house

At the house

On account of house

In lieu of a house

Through the house

Beyond the house

To right of house

To left of house

On this side the house

Vayu Vocabulary. [ No.

Vayu.

Hakhele gessa thaphi.

Inikhen phi.

Mini— Wathim—khenphi.

Jajabe phi.

Khanja khen phi.

Nomothip lung khen phi.

Nomolok lung be phi.

Nomolok lung rekphi.

Nomothiplung rekphi.

Gagin mulungrek la’la,

Nepal bong 14’1a.

Yanggnak hato.

Chhinggnak hato.

Khinta baha hato.

Khunta baha hato.

Yot’yot’ha or Bong ni bong or Bong-

bongha hato.

Mang yot’yot’ha-hato.

Tiri hato.

Haha, panachhe, pochhe, Duals.

Hanaha pako.

Chotiha to’po.

Pom hana to’po.

(no Dat. or acc. sign).

Kem be.

Kem khen.

Kem ha.

Kem bhitari.

Kem tongma.

Kem bong.

Kem rek.

Kem honko.

Kem kakphang. Kemmu bimli be.

{ Kem nongna, Kem senti be.

Kem wani be.

Kem khen lonkha.

Kem wani khen.

Kem hutti be.

Kem khen yonkha,

Kem hutti khen.

Kem khewa.

Kem khen kholam.

Kem be.

Kem mu lisi.

Kem mu let’chhing.

Kem mu madumna.,

Kem wathe or kem homba,

Kem mu jaja.

Kem mu khanja.

Kem mu imba or kem imba.

1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 427

English. Vayu.

On that side the house Kem mu or kem homba.

From this side the house Kem inikhen. Kem imbam khen.

rum that side the Ranke Kem wathi khen. Kem mini khen.,

Kem hombam khen.

With (having) a house Kem nothe. Kem got’he.

Without (wanting) a house Kem ma notvhe. Kem ma got’he.

SRA PRA BRA RDAAARADAADAD LLP LV LIL SPI PSF LDL I LISI

ne a at

Riis Lay f

JOURNAL

OF THE

PerAlTiCO SOCIETY.

PLP DL DLP PLIOOPOPDPYVPLPIPPVIPF PPYIPVYIVYIV IF PY VI

No. VI. 1857.

~~.

PEPALDIIYIYIYJYIVI Iv aad

Comparative Vocabulary of the Languages of the broken Tribes of

Neépil.—_By B. H. Hopason, Hsq., B.C. SN.

Continued from No. V.

Vayu DEcCLENSION.

1st of Pronouns.

Personals. Singular.

N. I, Go.

“G. Of me, Ang, conjunct, = my.* Angmu, disjunct, = mine,

oa tee +66. No sign.

In, at

i. ew: fang Bee

Ab, from me, Ang khen.

Ins. by me, G’ha (go- ha).

Soc. with me, Angnung,

Priv. without me, Ang ma nosa.f

Dual.

N. G6 nakpu, m. f. G6 nargung, n.f

* Ang the constructive form of g6, means my, before a substantive or qualitive

used substantivally, but before a transitive participle it means me or of me, e. g,

ang tovi, who beats me, or the beater of me. Yet ang topchyang is my club,

topchyang being the neuter form of tovi, used as a noun.

+ There is no proper privative particle, nor consequently, case. Ang ma nosa

or g6 ma nosa=if I be not, I not being, or my not being (present). In Khas,

man na bhai: in Newari, ji ma dusa.

Nakpo, nayung is the 2nd numeral which is gendered when used apart, but

doubtfully I think, and still more so when used as a dual sign. I find, however,

nakpu, nangmi, nayung for the three genders. Also hic et hee nakpu,

No, XC.—New Senizs, Von, X XVI. 3K

430 Vayu Vocabulary.

Conjunct.

G Angchi, excl. Ungchi, incl. i

Disjunct.

Angchimu, excl. Ungchimu, incl.

D, Ac. Gonakpu, m.f. Gonargung, n.

1.. - Angchi be, excl. Ungchi be, incl.

Ab. Angchi khen, excl. Ungchi khen, incl.

Ins. G6 nakpu ha or Gha nakpu ha.

Soc. Angchi nung, excl. Ungchi nung, incl.

Plural.

N. Go khata.

Conjunct.

G Angki, excl. Ungki, incl. oy

: Disjunct.

Angkimu, excl. Ungkimu, incl.

D. Ac. G6 khata. No sign.

L. Angki be, excl. Ungki be, incl.

Ab. Angki khen, excl. Ungki khen, incl.

Ins. Go khata ha or Gha khata ha.

Soc. Angkinung, excl, Ungkinung, incl.

Second person.

N. Gon.

G. Ung, conjunct = Thy. Ungmu, disjunct. = Thine,

D. Ac. Gon. No sign.

L. Ung be.

Ab. Ung khen.

Ins. Gon ha.

Ss. Ung nung.

Dual.

N. Gonchhe.

G. Ungcehhi, conj. Ungchhimu, dis}.

D. Ac. Gonchhe. No sign.

L. Ungcbhi be.

Ab. Ungcbhi khen.

Ins. Gonchhe ha.

Soc. Ungcbhi nung.

Third Personal,

N: Wathi. All 3 genders. -

G. Wathim, conj. Wathimmu, disj.

D. Ac. Wathi, No sign,

L. Wathim be.

Ab. Wathim khen, °

Ins. Wathi ha,

Soc. Wathim nung,

Dual.

N. Wathi nakpu, m. Wathi nangmi, f. Wathi nayung, n. c,

aforegone.

{ Wathim nakpum, conj. \

| Wathim nakpumu, dis).

G J Wathim nangmim, con}. be

: Wathim nangmimu, dis}.

| Wathim nayung, conj. kn aoe Ree

( Wathim nayungmu, disj. f° :

D. Ac. Wathinakpu, m. Wathi nangmi, f. Wathi nayung, n. and c.

| No. 6.

See note

Loc. Wathim nakpumbe, m. Wathim nangmi be, f. Wathim nay ung be

n. and c,

1857. ] Vayu : Vocabulary. 431

Ab. Wathim nakpum khen, m. Wathim nangmim khen, f. Wathim nayung

khen, n. and c.

Ins. Wathi nakpu ha, m, Wathi nangmi ha, f, Wathi nayung ha, n. and f.

Soc. Wathim nakpum nung, m. Wathim nangmim nung, f. Wathim nayung

nung, n. and c,

Plural.

N. Wathi khata, m. f. n.

G. | Wathim khatam, conj. Wathim khatamu, disj.

D. Ac. Wathi khata.

Loc. Wathim khata be.

Ab. Wathim khata khen.

Ins. Wathi khata ha.

Soc. Wathim khata nung.

Near demonstrative.

N. Y, All three genders.

: Tnung, conj. Inungmu, disj.

D. Ac. Y. No sign.

Loc. Tnung be.

Ab. Inung khen.

Ins, Tha.

Soc. Inung nung.

Dual,

N. Inakpu, m. Inangmi, f. Inayung, n. and ce

( Inakpum, con}.

| Inakpumu, disj.

| Inangmim, conj.

= 1 Inangmimu, dis}. } :

pene ee tn, and c.

| Inayungmu, disj.

D. Ac. Inakpu, m. Inangmi,f. Inayung, n.

L Inung nakpumbe, m. Inung nangmimbe, f. Inung nayung be, n.

Ab. Inung nakpum khen, m. Inung nangmim khen, f. Inung nayung

khen, n. c.

Ins. Inak poha, m. Inangmiha, f, MInayung ha, n. and c.

Soc. Inung nakpum nung, m. Inung nangmim nung, f. Inung nayung

nung, n. c.

Plural,

N. Ykhata. All genders.

G Inung khatam, conj. Inung khatamu, disj.

D. Ac. Ikhata.

Loc. Inung khata be.

Abl. Inung khata khen.

Ins. Ikhata ha.

Soc. Inung kKhata nung.

Remote demonstrative.

N. Mi. All genders.

G. Minung, conj. Minungmu, disj, &c. as in the last.

Interrogative and distributive pronoun, m, f. Who? Any one, Some

person. Suor Suna. Subs. and Adj.

nN. Sa. Suna.

G. Sam. Sanam, conj. Sumu. Sunamu, disj.

mene, Sa. Suna.

Loc. Sabe, Sunabe.

Abl. Sakhen, Sunakhen.

Tus. Suha, Sunaha.

Soc. Sunung, Sunanung.

432 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

Dual.

N. Su or Suna nakpu, m. Su or Suna nangmi, f. &c. as before.

Plural.

N. Sa or Sunakhata, &c. as before.

Interrogative and distributive pronoun, n. What? Any or something.

Mische.

a. Mischem, conj. Mischemu, disj. &c.

Dual.

N. Mische nayung, &c.

Plural.

N. Mische khata, &c.

Relative, interrogative and distributive pronoun and pronominal adjective

which, what, who.

N. Hanung, m, f. n.

G. H4nung,* conj. Hanungmu, disj. &c.

Dual.

N. Hanung nakpo, m. Hanung nangmi, f. Hanung nayung, n.

| Hanung nangmim, f,

3 Hanung nayung, n.

\ Hanung nakpumu,

dis}.

( Hanung nakpum, m.

conj.

| Hanung nangmimu,

| Hanung nayungmu,

And so on, like wathi, except that hanung has no inflexional shape (itself being

inflexional). Hence it has hanung nakpo and hanung khata, where wathi has wathim

nakpo and wathim khata. And this is likewise the case with the possessive pro-

nouns, all of which, though but genitives of the personals, are regarded as inde-

pendant and declined like the personals.

Thus also are declined the interrogative and relative of number and quantity,

with its correlative, or hatha, mitha = how much or many? and so much or many..

Thus also the adverbs of time and place, Inhe, here, Wathe and Minhe, there.

Hanhe, where? Ithe or Umbe or Abo, now; Mithe, then; Hakhe, when? with

all the rest of the adverbs that are not gerunds.

Observe that these adverbs are derived from the demonstratives in the locative

case. But, where, f, Miand Wathi, the pronouns take the inflexional m, or nung,

(whence come inungmu and wathimmu = his) the corresponding adverbs have no

inflexional mark, but remain immutable, only adding the declensional signs m or

mu, be, khen, &c. ; and thus we have ithamu and inhemu, of here, and ithakhen, inhe-

khen, from here, and abomu, of now, abokhen from now, not abommu, abomkhen,

Observe also that the conjunct possessives (genitives of the personals) are inde-

clinable, but that the disjunct are declinable like the personals, Ang, ung, wathim,

inung, minung, are inflexional forms merely, therefore angkhen = from me. But

angmu is a possessive pronoun proper, whence angmukhen-be-ha = from mine,

in mine, by mine.

* The conjunct form of the genitive of this pronoun has no sign, being marked

by position alone, as when two substantives meetis always admissible. Hanung is

itself a genitive — of whom, of which, e. g. hanung got ha, of which (and which) hand,

Hanungmu = whose, apart, or in reply. Hanungmu got = the hand of whom.

Hanung got = which hand.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 433

IIl.—Dercuession oF Nouns.

Substantive.

Ist.—Substantives proper.

Léncho, a man, m.

N. Loncho.

G. Loucho, conj.* Lonchomu, dis).

D. Ac. Léncho.

L. Lénchobe.

Ab. Loénchokhen.

Ins. Lénchoha.

Soc, Lénchonung.

Dual.

N. Léncho nakpo.t

G. Léncho nak pum,t conj. Loncho nak pumu, disj.

D. Ac. Léncho nakpo.

Loc. Lénchonak pube.

Abl. Léncho nakpukhen.

Ins. Loéncko nakpuha.

Soc. Loncho nakpu nung.

Plural.

N. Lénchokhata.t

G. Loénchokhatam,{ conj, Léncho khatamu, dis}.

D. Ac. Léoncho khata.

L. Loéncho khabe.

Abl. —- Léncho khata khen.

Soc. Loncho khata nung.

Thus also is declined the feminine noun mescho, a woman, the epicene noun

singtong, mankind, and all such without reference to gender. Neuters also are

similarly declined. But I add a specimen.

Sing, wood, a neuter.

i Sing.

G, Sing, conj. Singmu, disj. &c.

Dual.

N. Nang sing (nang is a contraction of Nayung)

Sing nayung.

c. Nang sing, conj. Nang singmu, disj. &c,

* The first of 2 substantives is by position alone a genitive, as loncho got, the

man’s hand. Sut apart, it must have the sign, as lonchomu, the man’s,

+ Generally in the Himalayan languages, the dual and plural signs are eschewed

in regard to substantives proper except where ambiguity would arise from omitting

them. In regard to appellatives and qualitives used substantivally, as all may be,

these signs are always annexed and also those of gender, because such words, (and

pronouns of the 3rd person also, to which the same rule applies) unlike the former

tell nothing of themselves on these points. Vayu, however, freely applies its dual

and plural signs and its sex signs, where it has any, to all nouns and pronouns,

though the structure of its verb renders such use of the dual and plural signs

superfluous, e. g. béli imchimem, the sheep are sleeping. Newari, though void of

such help, lacks a dual and plural of neuters,

~ We should rather read nakpu and khata for the reason given in a prior note.

Yet my informants, though they never apply the genitive to the conjunct form of

this case in the singular, do so in the dual and plural.

434 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

Plural.

N. Sing khata.

G. Sing khata, conj. Sing khatamu, disj. &c.

2nd.—Participles used substantivally (Remark. When they are used adjectiv-

ally, which they all are to a great extent, they precede the noun and are immutable,

like all other adjectives),

T6’vi, he or she who beats, the beater, m. and f,

N. To'vi, m; f.

iG; Toé’vi, conj. To’vimu, dis).

D. Ac...) To’vi, é&e,

Dual,

iN. To’vi nakpu, m. To’vi nangmi, f.

G. To’vi nakpu, m. conj. T6’vi nangmi, f. conj. Té’vi nakpumu, m. dis}.

To’vi nangmimu, f. dis}. &c. as before.

Plural.

N. Td’vi khata, m. f.

G. T6’vi khata, con}. To’vi khatamu, disj. &c. as before.

Topchyang, neuter of the above, what one strikes with, as club, stick, &c.

ine Topchyang.

G. Topchyang, conj. Topchyangmn, dis). &c.

Dual.

N. Nang topchyang.

G. Nang topchyang, conj. Nang topchyangmu, disj. &c.

Plural.

N. Topchyang khata.

G. Topchyang khata, conj. Topchyang khatamu, disj. &c.

So also Topta, who or what has been beaten, m. f. n. with the requisite adap-

tation of nakpu, nangmi or nang (nayung) in the dual.

3rd.—Qualitives used substantivally, e. g.

Khakchhing-wo, m.

Khakchhing-mi, f.

Khakchhing-mu, n. and c.

This and all the like are declined as above. And so also are the qualitives which

substitute the formative ‘‘ cho” for “wo’’ in the masculine, as Bang-cho, a mature

man; Bing-cho, a handsome man, &c. The feminines of these are in ‘‘ mi’’ as in

the last. They have no neuters in this form; but they can superadd the usual

m,. f.n., signs, as bang-cho-wo, a mature man, bang-cho-mi, a mature woman,

bang-cho-mu, a mature thing, and then of course they have the complete hic, hec,

hoc of gender,

4th.—The numerals, inclusive of the adverbial ones.

5th.—Derivative qualitives formed from abstracts, as Daksa-wo, the covetous

man, Daksa-mi, the covetous woman, from Daksa, covetousness. Choti-wo, the

strong man; Choti-mi, the strong woman, Choti-mu, the strong thing, from Choti,

strength, Suksa-wo, the hungry man; Suksa-mi, the hungry woman, from Suksa,

hunger ; and all such.

6th.—Nominal as well as pronominal genitives, which, with the m or mu forma-

tive, are all treated as distinct substantives, e. g. singmumu, the wooden one.

(Remark. The cacophonous iteration of the mu (though often truncated in the

second syllable, singmum) owing to the coincidence of the genitival and formative

signs, makes the use of such words rare when a possessive case meaning must be

assigned to them. They are used, however, freely in all other cases).

7th.—Simple or compound words indicating one’s country, profession or avo-

== the black one, being or thing.

1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 435

cation and the like, and which are not expressed participially,* form yet another

class of substantives, as Chhugong-wo = a Bhotia, or native of Tibet; Chhugong-

mi, a Bhotini or female of Tibet; Héngong-wo (m.), Hengong-mi (f.), a male

and female of Nepal proper ; Gyétimnamsang-wo-mi, a male and female stranger

or foreigner; Rakcho-wo-mi, a male and female ploughman, Bdéchhé-wo-mi, a

male and female European (white-body) Gaginmulung-wo-mi, a male and female

of the plains. In short, nouns of whatever sort (and the above enumeration has

been made here, though not strictly germain to grammar, expressly to show

the various sorts of nouns and their mode of construction) and pronouns also,

wherever used substantivally or disjunctly, and therefore declinable, all follow

the above single form of declension, And, on the other hand every noun and

pronoun when used conjunctly, that is, preceding a substantive which is thereby

qualified, is always indeclinable, and, for the most part, altogether unchangeable,

having no expressed grammatical affections whatever, the signs of genders being

neglected in use even where they exist. Indeed qualifying and qualified words

seem to be as much as possible regarded as constituting a single compound term ;

and, the more effectuslly to ensure this, one of the two elements (the one that

goes first in the compound) is customarily truncated; thus risa, a plantain, and

singphum, a tree, make risaphum; and topmung, to strike and ramum, I fear,

make topramum. And so also the inflexional forms of the personal pronouns

which are used as qualifying or adjectival words, are to be regarded as quasi agglu-

tinated and perfectly immutable prefixes of the substantive, entirely distinct from

the correspondent pronouns of the possessive kind, which latter stand apart and

are liable to declensional changes after the above model, like all other qualitives

used substantivally or disjunctly.

* The participles (in vi, ta, and tang) being inherently relative, assume a sub-

stantival character without the necessity of suflixing the usual appellative form.

atives in wo velcho, and mi, though these may be superadded, if to mark

the sex of the agent be specially required. Thus to’vi, the striker, the he or she

who strikes, is not only an adjective, as to’vi ta’wo, the beating boy, but an inde-

pendant noun, the beater. Nevertheless would you specify the sex, you can say

to’vi-wo, the male striker and to’vi-mi, the female striker,

436 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

Vayu VERBS.

1st.—Conjugation of neuters, conjugated froni the Sheer root.

Verb Phi to come.

Infinitive Mood.

Affirmative.— Phit’mung to come or to have come, aoristic.*

Negative-—Mang phit’mung, not to come, &c.

Gerunds.

Phit’he F § Phit’he with verbs in present tense,

ive ee ( Phitnung with verbs in preterite.

Phit’hephithe, or Phit’nung phit’nung, contiuuative present.

Phit’phitha, Past, having come.

Phit’singhe, Present or Fature, when coming.

Phit’khen. Past, after coming, after having come.

Participles.

Phit’vi. Present and future, who or what comes or will come. Also the comer

substantival.

Phis’ta. Past, who or what has come or came.

Phit’tang, 7

Verbal nouns, |

Phit’chyang, +

Phit’lung,

Phit’sing.

N. B.—The medial t’ and s’ are merely enunciative, not formative.

Imperative Mood.

These forms expressing respectively passive futurity or fitness

or habit, and instrumentality, locality and time, are hardly

or not at all useable, save with verbs more or less transitive.

See on to them in sequel.

Singular. Dual, Plural,

Phi, Phicbhe. Phine.

Negative.

Tha phi. Tha phichhe. Tha phine.

Indicative Moed.

Future tense, used also for preeent.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

: Phi chhokmi, excl. Phikokmi, excl.

1, Phignom. Phi chhikmi, incl. ee incl.

2. Phimi. Phi chbikmi. Phinem.

3. Phimi. Phi chhikmi, Phimem.

Preterite tense.

= A ¢( Phi chhongmi, excel. Phi kikéngmi, excl.

1. Phisungmi, 2 Phi chhingmi, incl. 1 Phi kikengmi, incl.

2. Phimi. Phi chhem., Phinem.

3, Phimi. Phi chhem. Phimem.

Subjunctive Mod.

Present tense.

, Phi chhoknam, excl. Phi koknam, excl.

nee { nam hike { Phi chhiknam, incl. Phi kenam, inel.

2. Phi-nam-sa Phi chhiknam, Phine nam.

3. Phi-nam-sa Phi chhiknam. Phime nam.

* The infinitive is also used adjectivally and is nearly the same as the participle

n “fang.

1857.| Vayu Vocabulary. 437

Preterite.

ey Phi chhong phen, excl. Phi ki kéng phen, excl.

ee Phen. Phi chhing phen, incl. Phi ki keng phen, incl.

2. Phi phen. Phi chhe phen. Phi ne phen.

3. Phi phen. Phi chhe phen. Phi me phen.

Interrogative Mood.

Present tense.

Singular.

1. Phigno ki ma. And so on, as in the subjunctive; that is, the terminal

2. Phi ki ma. m or mi is dropt and ki ma, = or not, is added in lieu

3. Phi ki ma. of the subjunctive signs, nam or sa and phen.

Negative Mood.

There is no separate negative verb.

The affirmative verb is conjugated with ma, the particle of negation, before it,

Ma phi gnom. Ma phi sungmi, &e.

Potential Mood.

Singular.

Se ate . (For all tenses, phasche being aoristic except in dual

z ae ee i peg and plural. Phasche, the reflex form of the verb pha,

3. Phit’ ai ee, is conjugated with the root phi to express power.

; P haa For phasche see im’che in sequel, or 5th conjugation.

Precative Mood.

Singular.

Present. Preterite.

1. Phi gno yu, Phisung yu. ¢ Drops the final m or mi of the ordinary verb

2. Phi yu. Phi yu. and substitutes for it the immutable verbal

3. Phi yu. Phi yu. particle ya,

Another form of the precative mood, equivalent to that which is usually joined

with the imperative in English (let me come, come thou, let him come, &c.) is

formed by compounding the infinitive of the main verb with the verb to give used

as an auxiliary, thus :—

Singular. Dual. Plural.

1. Phimung hasung. Phimung hachhong. Phimung hatikong.

8. Phimung hato. Phimung hatochhe, Phimung hatome.

The first ordinary form of the precative may be best rendered in English by O!

that I may or might come, &c.; this, by, Let me come, Let him come &c., liter-

ally, give me to come, give him to come, and so on for the dual and plural according

to the model of transitives in “to’’ in sequel.

Optative Mood.

Singuiar.

, : é and so on throughout the verb dak

1. Phit’ dakgnom, Phit’ daksungmi, to desire or oe which see in

Peek dak, Bt Capes sequel. The root of the pri-

3. Phit’ dakmi, Phit’ dangmi, ;

mary verb is prefixed.

Remark.—Duty, necessity and propriety, as well as desire, are expressed by this

mood, often in the impersonal form, mihi oportet vel decet, thus go phit dakmi, I

must, I ought to, come. It is necessary or proper for me to come.

Inchoative Mood.

Singular.

1. Phit’ teschungmi, } and so on according to the paradigm of intransitives in

2. Phit’ teschem, ; che; this mood being constructed from the root of the

3. Phit’ teschem, main verb and the reflex form of the verb to begin.

435 Vdyw Vocabulary. LNo. 6.

Finitiwe Mood.

Singular.

1. Phit’ chuschungini, and so on, as before noted, chusche being the reflex

2. Phit’ chuschem, ; form of the verb to end.

3. Phit’ chuschem,

Duty and necessity are expressed by the same word as wish or want, dak: con-

sequently the optative mood includes the former two. What it is good for one to

do, what is expedient or right, is expressed neariy as in English, e. g. Go phimung

noh’ka, = it is good for me (mihi) to come, &c.

‘Causal Mood.

Present. Preterite.

Sue : eile , dual and plural

_ Phit? ‘ hit? ie and so on for 1

2 EA pingeungmi, Bhi ning bang (""iyroughout the verb plasko

3, Pit? pingrals Phit’ ping kum, which see. The i of the

primary verb is prefixed.

Continuative Mood.

Present Tense.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

, io yaa f Phina phit’nochhokmi, Phina phit’nokokmi..

ee Phina phit’nochhikmi. Phina phit’nokem.

2. Phina phit’nonum. Phina phitnochhikmi. Phina phit’nonem.

3. Phina phit’nomi. Phina phit’nochhikmi. Phina phit’nomem.

Preterite.

¢ Phina phit’nochhongmi. Phina phit’nokikongmi.

¢ Phina phit’nochhingmi. Phina phit’nokikengmi.

2. Phina phit’nonum. Phina phit’nochhem. Phina phit’nonem.

3. Phina phit’nomi., Phina phit’nochhem. Phina phitnomem.,

Reciprocal Mood.

Present Tense.

1. Phina phit’panchung- ( Phina phit’panachhokmi. f Phina phit’pachikokmi.

mi, Phina phitpanachhikmi. | Phina phit’pachikem.

1, Phina phit’nosungmi.

2. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panachhikmi. Phina phit’pachinem.

3. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panacbhikmi. Phina phit’pachimem.

Preterite.

1. Phina phit’panchung- f Phina phit’panachhongmi. f Phina phit’ pachikongmi.

mi. Phina phit’panachhingmi. | Phina phit’pachikengmi.

2. Phina phit’panchem. Phina phit’panachhem., Phina phit’pachinem.

8. Phina phit’?panchem, Phina phit’panachhem. Phina phit’pachimem,

Remark.—Of the above two the first mood is formed by the root repeated with

intervening reflex sign, and the substantive verb nd, to be. The second is formed

by the same treatment of the root and the reflex form of the verb pa, to do, for

which see conjugation V. The 2nd or reciprocal mood is hardly useable in the

singular number. According to this paradigm of the neuter verb to come, are

conjugated also the verbs Ga to be dilatory, Ji, to ripen (fruit), Ri, to rot, Sé, to

fruit, Gd, to live, Ya, to descend, Vi, to be intoxicated, Phwé to quarrel, and, in a

word, all words presenting a cree ay in the imperative and which are all neues

Essentially the same is the conjugation of neuters having added to the sheer root

a conjunct and now (quoad force or meaning) obsolete consonant* which conso-

nant, however, according as it is labial, guttural or dental, occasions some slight

* Compare the so-called “euphonic additions’ to the root in the cultivated

Dravirian tongues.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 439

variations in the form of conjugation. Nasal endings make no change (e. g. dong

gnom, dongmi, dongmi). I subjoin a sample of each variation,

2nd,—Conjugation of neuters with a conjunct guttural, Dak’, to desire (Da-k) .

Infinitive Mood.

Affirmative. akmung

Negative. a dakmung, but ate

Gerunds. Participles.

Dak he, ‘’) Dakvi,

Bek te, | Dalia |

Dok dak Fa, i pu supra, Vesa Houiha! fut supra.

Dak sing he, | Dak chyang, | i ahaenie

Dak khen J ei lung, , ;

ak sing,

The negative of all is formed as in the infinitive, Mang dak he, Mang

dak vi, &c.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual, Plural,

Dak’ Dakchhe. Davgne.

Negative Imperative.

Tha dak. Tha dakehhe. Tha dangne.

Indicative Mood.

Present Tense.

Singular. Dual. f Plural.

2 ee Dak chhokmi, excl. f Dak kokmi, excl,

; ; Dak chhikmi, incl, Dak ken, incl.

This conjugation changes the radical

k into ng and lengthens the vowel

SS ee ee

2. Dakmi. Dak chhikmi. Daknem.

3. Dakmi. Dak chhikmi. Dakmem.

Preteriie.

Dak’ki kongmi, or Daki

1, Daksungmi Dak chhongmi. kongmi.

; * ) Dak ehhingmi. Dak’ki kengmi, or Daki-

kengmi.

2. Dangmi. Dak chhem, Dak nem or Dangnem.

3. Dangmi. Dak chhem. Dakmem.

The other moods as before.

Thus are conjugated Buk’, to get up, Bok’, to be born, Bek’, to enter, Lok’, to

issue, to appear, Gik’, to flow, Kak’, to shine (sun), Chok’, to glow (sun), Jik’ to

be broken, Jok’, to come up, Duk,’ to fall from aloft, Ruk’, to fali on ground,

Ok’, to weep, Juk’ to be wise, and all such words, as also the compounds épidak

cacare, chépi dak mingere, Tidak, to be thirsty.

3rd.—Conjugation of neuters with a conjunct labial (m or p): I. in m. Dam to

be full and to be lost, or to fill and to lose in the intransitive senses.*

Infinitive and participles as before.

Imperative.

Affirmative. Dam. Damche. Damne.

Negative. Tha dam. Tha damchhe. Tha damne,

* The Vayu neuter and passive conjugations coincide and the expressions often

tally with the equivalent English ones as daémi, it is lost, and it is filled or full,

that is, self-lost and self-filled. But the Vayu reflex verb, like the French, can

express the latter meaning otherwise, viz. by damchem which is equivalent to daml

used neutrally. Dam 1a lam is another equivalent form answering literally to

Khogiya in Urdu though Vayu never forms its passives like Urdu.

ole

440 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

Indicative Mood.

Present Tense. A @ a aa

1, Damum (Dam- { Dam chhokmi, excl. Dampopmi, Ss i} St

mum), Dam chhikmi, incl. Pphunen. 33 aS

2. Dami, Dam chhikmi. Damnem. e * 48

3. Dami. Dam chhikmi. io eee gaee

Preterite, r & : s

i Dam chhongmi, excl. Dampi kongmi. Beoge

cis cies il Ss Dam chhingmi, incl. pee ee 8 gq laa 5

2. Dami. Dam chhem. Damnem. es ape

3. Dami. Dam chhem. Damem. Jaen Ras

The other moods as before. In subjunctive, Damonam, Damnam Damnam.

Thus also conjugate Ram to be afraid, Dum to become, &c. II. in p.

Jydp’ to be tired.

Imperative.

Aff. Jydp.’ Jyop’chhe. Jyémne. Nie

Neg. Tha jyop. Tha jyop’chhe. Tha jydp’ne. ae a)

Indicative. nS &

an ©

Present. eats

Jyop chhokmi, excl Jyoppopmi S af 54

1 ep ma. Jyop chhikmi, incl. Jyoppem. rs a & 2

2, Jyop’mi. Jyop chhikmi. Jyopnem. s 22 a

3. Jyop’mi. Jyop chhikmi. Jyopmem. BAT 2

LJ : Jyop chhongmi. Jydépikongmi. FCS w

Tae ee Jyop cbhhingmi. eee Of y a

2. Jydmi. Jyop chhem. Jyémnem. 28750

3. Jyomi. Jyop chhem, Jyémem. Ju 4

Other moods as before. Subjunctive has jyop’monam, jyop’nam, jyopnam

Jyopsung phen, JyOm phen, Jy6m phen.

Thus also conjugate Thip, to set, (sun), Yép, to be sharp-edged, &c.

4th.—Conjugation of neuters with conjunct dental (t).

. Hot’, to utter, talk.

Infinitive and participles and gerunds as before.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural. 5 ES

Aff. Hot’. Hoschhe. Hone. i = Si

Neg. Tha hot’. Tha hoschhe. Tha hone. 22 a

Indicative present. a a

oO =

Hoschhokmi, excl. Hot’kokmi. wo OD a

% ’ =| a

1. Stee: Hoschhikmi, incl. {for ken, | fe

2. Hot mi; Hoschhik mi Hot’nem. bras ee E

3. Hot’mi. Hoschhikmi Hot’?mem. a Sie 3 >

Preterite. & a a

Singular. Dual. Plural. = 8 & a

14 : Hoschhongmi. Hotikong mi. ) =

of Sree Hoschhingmi. Hotikeng mi. 2 aa 5

2, Hénmi. Hoschhem. Hoénem, ea oe

J* S58

3. Hoénmi. Hoschhem. Hoénmem.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 441

Thus conjugate Pat’, to fight, Met’ to die, But’, to flower, &c.

Remark.—The verbs dung to be dry, dong to arrive, then to win, Yang, to lose

or decrease, Min, to be ripe, Hon, to be big, Bon, to fly, Lun, to run, and all

others ending in a nasal (n or ng) follow without change the sheer root paradigm,

or phi aforesaid,

5th.—Conjugation of reflex or active intransitive (including also some neuters)

verbs in che, that is, which have this (the only) reflex sign added to their root in

the imperative which always strikes the key note to the several conjugations, always

having the formative affix whenever there is one.

Im, to sleep.

Infinitive Mood.

Aff. Immung. To sleep or to have slept

Neg. Mang immung. Not to sleep, &c.

Remark.—Y-mung is as often used as immung. So that { may possibly be the

root, not im,

} aoristic.

Gerunds. Participles,

Im he, 7 | Imvi (fnvi), +)

Im nung, | Imta (imta),

Im im ha, tut supra. Imtang ee

Im sing hé, | Verbal nouns aaah aX put supra.

Im khen, J Imchyang,

Imlung,

Imsing, y}

Negatives, as in infinitive, that is, by prefixing mang.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

Aff. Imche. Im nachhé. Imchiné,

Neg, Tha imche, Tha imnachhé. Tha imchiné.

Indicative Present.

1 it Se Tmnachhokmi. Tmchikokmi.

F an Imnachhikmi. Imchikem.

2. Imchem, Imnachikmi., Imchinem.

3. Imchem. Imnachikmi. Imchimem.

Preterite,

Pipachunemi, Imnachongmi. Tmchikongmi,

Imnachingmi. Imchikengmi.

2. Imchem. Imnachhem. Imchinem.

38. Imchem. Imnachhem. Tmchimem.

Thus are conjugated all reflex verbs whatever, having the che sign whether they

be primitive or derivative (and all transitives can be so commuted) as chikche, to

remember, mangche, to forget, lische, to learn, musche, to sit, ipche, to get up,

khokche, to walk, pipche, to suck, sipche, to wake, lipche, to vomit, popche, to

lick, kinche, to lie hid, lunche, to run, dénche, to bathe, upche, to wash one’s

self, tesche,* to begin, chusche, to end, khwenkhwén panche, to cough, khikche,

to sneeze, liche, to grow (plant only), gosche, to be rich, vekche to contain,

dosche, to sustain or hold up, dunche, to dig for one’s self, phasche, to be able,

* Tesche gives, teshto set free, wonche, gives wonto, in comparison, be able,

442 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

wonche,* to master one’s self, be patient or firm, bongche* to be happy, giwdén

ponche, to keep silence, rusche, to flee away, kwompanche, to sing, yangche, to

decrease or lose, jonche, to grow or increase (animal only), yukche, to cut one’s

self, sische, to kill one’s self, tanche to put for one’s self, senche, to know one’s

self, or to know simply, hanche, to give to one’s self, phokche, to beget or give

birth to for one’s self, ingkche, to buy, jyapche, to exchange, khwasche, to

tighten one’s self, Khwasche, to feed one’sf self; tinkoche, to drink, janko-

che, to eat, chénche,t to piss, topche, to beat one’s self, yosche, to like, &c. &c.

Remark.—These verbs are aoristic in fact, though in the dual and plural they

are obliged to accommodate themselves to the inflexable forms of those numbers

and such (by and by will be seen) is the case also with the aoristic transitives in

“to.” The reflex duals and plurals however always retain their own special signs

or na and chi which are interchangeable for the sake of euphony, na being pre-

ferred to “chi’’ in the dual to prevent cacophonous repetition of the ch.

6th.—Conjugation of transitives in “to” not having a precedent sibilant.

The verb ha, to give.

Infinitive Affirmative,

Hamung, to give or to have given, aoristic.

Infinitive Negative.

Mang hamung. Not to give, &c.

Gerunds.

ae he. } Present, giving {oe main verb in present or future with

anung. main verb in preterite,

Hahe hahe.

i 5 Continuative present, continually giving.

Hanung hanung. } ane? ; oe

Haha ha. Past. Having given.

Ha singhe. Present or future. When giving.

Ha khen. Past. After having given, after giving.

Participles.

Havi. Who gives or gave or will give, aoristic. The giver.

Hata. Past (passive). Who or what has been given, - The given.

Hatang. Future passive. What will be given, what customarily given,

what fit to be given.

Verbal Nouns.

Expresses the instrument, as hachy4ng gdt, the hand that

Hachyang. gives. It is also used substantively in a neuter sense, thus

topchyang, a hammer. Hammerer is to’vi.

Halang. Expresses the place, halting, the place of giving.

Hasing. Expresses the time, hasing, the time of giving.

The negative of gerunds, participles and verbal nouns is expressed, as in the

infinitive, by the prefix mang, mang hahe, mang havi, &c,

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual, Piural.

Aff. Hato. Hachhe. Hane.

Neg. Tha hato. Tha hachhe. Tha hane.

* Tesche, gives, teshto, set free, wonche, gives, wonto, in comparison be able.

tT Kh underlined is the Arabic guttural.

{ Chénche of this sort from chént.

1857. | | Vayu Vocabulary. 443

Dual and Plural of Odject.

Dual. Hatochhé. Give to them two.

Plural, Hatomé. Give to them all.

Negative. Tha hatochhé. Tha hatome.

Indicative Mood.

Present or future.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

x , -++ Hachhokmi, excl. Hatikokmi, excl.

1, Hatungmi. { 4-Héchhikmi, incl. Hatikem, incl.

Dual and Plural of Object.

y 1. f£ Hatungchhem. I give to them two.

1. | Hatungmem. I give to them all.

2... Hatam. -++-Hachhikmi. -++Hanem.

Dual and Plural of Object.

2. +-Hatochhem. Thou givest to them two,

* fa -+-Hatomem. Thou givest to them all.

3. +--datum, -+ Hatochhem. -++ Hatomem.

Dual and Plural of Odject.

y J 3. -+Hatochhem. He gives to them two.

3. -+--Hatomem. He gives to them all.

Preterite.

, : Hacbhongmi, excl. j Hatikongmi, excl.

eenpra. HAchhinomi, incl. 1 HaAtikengmi, incl.

Dual and Plural of Object.

1. Hatungchhem. I gave to them two,

* <1. Hatungmem. I gave to them all.

2. Hatum. +-Hachhem. -+- Hanem.

Dual and Plural of Object.

y J 2. Hatochem.° Thou gavest to them two.

2. Hatomem. Thou gavest to them all.

3. -+-Hatum. +-Hatochhem. -+-Hatomem.

Dual and Piural of Object.

3. -+-Hatochhem. He gave to them two.

3. + Hatomem. He gave to them all.

Negative Mood.

Singular Indicative present.

Dual and plural in like manner, merely by prefixing

the negative particle ma. N. B.—Hato and all

other transitives of its class, are essentially aoristic.

See remark aforegone.

1. M4 hatungmi.

2. Mé hatum,

3. Ma hatum.

* The bracketed portions express peculiar forms of this language.

The mark -+- before any form signifies that it belongs also to the passive which

see. The difference is expressed in such cases by the use of the separate prefixed

pronouns in the instrumental case for the active; in the cbjective or accusative

case for the passive, or g’ha, gonha, wathiha, and go, gon wathi for the three per-

sons singular and so on for dual and plural.

AAA Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

Interrogative Mood.

Singular Indicative present.

1. Hatung ki ma. Dual and plural in like manner and all the rest of

2. Hato ki ma. the verb also; that is, cut off the final mi or m and

3. Hato ki ma. substitute ki ma.

& to

. Ha wontungmi,

. Ha wontum,

. Ha wéntum,

Potential Mood.

Singalar Indicative present.

and so on through the rest of the verb; wénto, to

can, being conjugated like hato, the root of which

is prefixed merely (wonto is used with transitives

and phasche with intransitives).

Optative Mood.

Singular Indicative present.

1. Ha dakgnom, and so on through the rest of the verb dak, to wish or

2. Ha dakmi, want, as before given. The root of the main verb

3. Ha dakmi, is prefixed as before.

Precative Mood.

(That I may give).

Singular Indicative present.

1. Hat And so on, after the manner of the interrogative mood

9. cue o as to the main verb, to which is added the immutable

3. sho ae verbal root expressive of wish in the nature of

ae prayer, hatung yu= oo! si mihi accedat dare.

Remark.-—The solicitive form, let me give, let him give, ha hasung, ha hato is

seldom used owing to the iteration of the same root in two different senses.

Subjunctive Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1. Hatung nam. Hatung phen,

2. Hato nam. Hato phen, and so on for dual and plural.

3. Hato nam. Hato phen,

Continuative Mood.

1. Ha na ha nédgnom,*

2. Ha na ha nonum, and so on as in the neuter verb phi.

3. Ha na ha nomi,

. Ha na ha panchem,

Reciprocal Mood.

Ha na ha panchungmi,} pr so on as before with reflex of the root

ache, pa, to make, conjugated like im-che.

* The reflex form of the verb mu, to sit, imperative musche, is often used in

this sense ha na ha muschungmi, muschem, muschem, &c. like imche. So Newari

has biye chona = I sit giving, I remain giving.

+ The transitive form of pa, to do, is sometimes preferred to the reflex, Haha

pangmi, pdmi, pomi, &c. See conjugation 10th.

1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 445

Causal Mood.

Imperative.

Singular. Duai. Plurat.

Aff. Ha pingko. Ha pingchhe. Ha pingne.

Neg. Ha tha ping. Ha tha pingche. Ha tha pingne,

Indicative present,

and so on according to the form of conjugating the

? 4

ingsungml,

: ~~» pi : transitive verb pingko, which see in sequel and to

= Ee which the root of the main verb is prefixed when

oo pEgm), causation is expressed.”

Passive Voice.

Imperative Mood.

Aff. Hasung. Hachhong. Ha ki kong.

Give thou to me. Give thou to us two. Give thou to us all.

Neg. Tha hagno. Tha hachhok. Tha ha kok. |

Dual and plural of agent.

Hasiing cbhé. Do ye two give to me.

Hastng né. Do ye all give to me.

Tha hasing chhé.

Thhasdug x6. The negative forms.

Indicative Mood.

Present.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

, : Hakokmi, excl,

ives Yd Hechhokmt, excl, Hakém, incl.

++ Hachbikmi, incl. i:

to me. ice NS RR er == gives to us all (sub-

ee ; audi ille vel iste).

Dual and plural of the ayent.

1. Hagnochhem. Give to me they two (or ye 2).

1. Hagnomem. Give to me they ail.

2. Hami., -++ Hachbikmi. -++- Hanem,

Dual and plural of agent.

2. Hami. Give to thee they two.

2. Hami. Give to thee they all.

3. +-Hatum. +-Hatochhem. +. Hatomem.t

* Causal verbs have all the complete forms of conjugation proper to primary

verbs; and, as they are constituted by transitives, they take, like transitives, the

reflex and passive and double objective forms, being conjugated from pingche and

pingsung and ping (k) to, as well as pingko. The reflex of hato is hanche, conju-

gated like imche: the quasi passive is hasting, for which see on, Hato has no

doubly objected form. Itself expresses give it to him or give him.

+ The forms marked with a cross precedent (+) are common to both voices,

See active. There is no infinitive of this quasi passive, The causal transitive

which carries a passive as well as active sense has it, thus Hamung, to give, ha-

pingmung, to be given, more properly, to cause to give. So Newari has biye, to

give, biyeke (ke the causal sign) to be given or cause to give. Newari has no

other semblance even of a passive. Vayu with its suffixed objective forms of the

pronoun has, as above seen. But this again is weakened by the special restriction

of the suffixes, thus hanum, gives or gave to thee, Z on/y and no other,

3 L

446

3. +Hatochhem.

3. +-Hatomem.

Singular.

1. Hasingmi.

1. Hasungchhem.

1. Hasungmem.

2. Hami.

+2. Hami.

+3. Hatum.

3. -++Hatochhem.

A +-Hatomem.

Vayu Vocabulary. [ No.

Dual and plural of agent.

Give to him they two.

Give to him they all.

Preterite.

Dual.

Hachhongmi, excl.

Hachhingmi, incl.

Plural.

Hakikongmi, excl.

+ Hakikengmi, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

Gave to me they two (or ye two).

Gave to me they all (any).

-++ Hachem. -+-Hanem.

Dual and plural of agent.

Gave to thee they two.

Gave to thee they all.

-+ Haétochhem. -+-Hatomem.

Dual and plural of agent.

Gave to him they two.

Gave to him they all.

A second passive may be formed by the passive participle and substantive verb,

of clear meaning, but eschewed owing to the relative sense inherent in the par-

ticiples.

1. Hata négnom.

2. Hata nonum.

3. Hata ndmi.

Passive potential,

(I can be given).

Present singular.

1. Ha wéngnom.

2. Ha wonmi.

3. Ha wontum.

Preterite.

1. Ha wonsungmi.,

2. Ha wonmi.

3. Ha wontum.

Indicative present singular.

And so on through the verb né, to be—an irregular

i verb which is given in the sequel.

this responds havi négnom of the active voice.

Bes Passive precative. Baa

ol] A Goce | a

a ee: (That I may be given). | 4 | 48

r A gee GS

ess Present singular. ris

Ss so ies

ae 1. Hagnoyu. | hE % =|

C525 2. Hayu. r£52°

ya ~

i a mo 3. Hatoyu. a9 ap

eis : Es]

stcseans Preterite. a *S

oO ba 90 ° ao S

Os woe | 1, Hasungyu. ean

ee ds 2. Hayu. een

a mo o | 3. Hatoyu. es

dropt, and theimmutable ver-

Remark.—To

bal particle ya, subjoined.

Remark.— Observe that in the potential mood, as in the causal below, the expres-

sion of the passivity is transferred from the truncated main verb, which shows

only its crude root, to the secondary verb.

Passive Causal,

(I am caused to be given (or to give)).

1. Ha pinggnom. 1. Ha pingsingmi.

Present. 2. Ha pingmi.

3. Ha pingnum.

2, Ha pingmi.

3. Ha pingmi.

Preterite.

And so on through dual and plural, following the conjugational forms of the

passive voice of the verb pingko, to send, which see.

1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 447

Passive Subjunctive.

(If I be given).

1, Ha gno nam. 1. Hastingphen.

2. Ha nam. Present. 2. Ha phen. Preterite.

3. Hato nam. 3. Hato phen.

Like the precative, only substituting the subjunctive particles for the single

precative one. And the interrogative mood of the passive merely substitutes the

particle of interrogation or kima, hagnoki ma, &c.

Special forms,

Active or passive, = agento objective.

ist.—I to thee.

Hanum. Give or gave to thee I only.

Hanochhem. Give or gave to you two I only. Aoristic.

Hanonem. Give or gave to you all 1 only.

2nd.—Thou to me.

yHagnom. Givest to me thou (or he). —

y Hagnochem, Give to me ye two (or they two) Present tense.

Hagnonem. Give to me ye all only. }

y Hasungmi. Gavest to me thou.

y Hasungchhem. Gave to me ye two. f Preterite.*

Hasungnem. Gave to me ye all.

Thus are conjugated all transitives in ‘‘td’’ that have the root only precedent,

as Woto, to cleanse, Lato, to snatch away, Chito, to split, Jito, to tear, Photo, to

eradicate, Chéto, immingere, Rito, to cause to rot or rot it, Lito, to cause to grow,

or grow it, &c. The verbs with a “p” before the sign, as lipto, to vomit, napto,

to compress, change the p into m in the plural imperative and in the second person

plural preterite, as namne, do ye all compress, and namnem, ye all compressed.

Those with a ‘‘k” before the sign, as thikt6, to shut, khikto, to cause to sneeze,

change the k into ng, as thingne, do ye all shut, and thingnem, ye all shutted it,

No other precedent letter makes any change, save the sibilant to which we shall

next proceed as forming a different conjugation. Meanwhile conjugate as above

yangto, to decrease, bongto, to please, Mangto, to cause to forget or to forget

him, phimto, to depress, khamto, to summon, shamto, to frighten, Thento, to

cause to win, Yemto, to burn, Umto, to burn corpse, Wodnto, to win, to be able,t

Pélto, to wring or extract juice, Tamto, to cry out, Damto, to fill, &c, &c.

7th conjugation of verbs in ‘‘t6” having a precedent sibilant (always palpably felt

in the reflex, sometimes not so in the transitive, wherein something like an abrupt

tone, however, indicates in such cases its latent presence, or else a sound like

English th, or ph, as pha’to, maphto, héthto for phasto, masto and hésto. But

observe, there is no true tone as in the 8th and 11th conjugations (to’po and

pho’ko) and the real euphonic intercalary letter is the sibilant, s).

* The forms preceded by the mark vy are not special but are repeated here to

illustrate such as are special. Compare the whole with those of the Peruvian

language of America apud Markham, p. 397. There are slight differences indicating

diverse degrees of decomposition, but the resemblance in substance and principle

is wonderful. I commend it to those who so dogmatically tell us it is not legi-

timate philology to heed such coincidences.

+ This neuter sense of wonto is restricted to its use as a compound, and it is so

used only with transitives. With intransitives the reflex form of pha to be able

is employed: top wontum, he can beat : imphaschem, he can sleep.

448 Pdyu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

The verb si, to kill.

Infinite.

Aff. Sit’mung, to kill, to have killed, ]

Neg. Mang sit’mung, not to kill, &c. JP ay destde

Gerunds. Participles.

Sithe,

Sitnung, | apie

Sit’he sit’he, t } eae t

Sit’ sitha, oe supra. ista, ut supra.

Sistang,

Sis’ singhe,

Sit’ khen.

Verbal Nouns.

Sischyang,

Sitling, ut supra.

Sitsing,

Their negatives are formed by prefixed mang, mangsit’he, mangsit’vi, &c.

Imperative.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

I. Sisto. Sischhe, Séné ? Sitne.

Dual and plural of object.

TT. Sistochhé. Do thou kill them two,

IIT. Sistome. Do thou kill them all,

Negatives.

I. Tha sit,’ Tha siscbhe. Tha séné ? Sitne.

II. Tha sit’chhik. Kill not them two.

III. Tha sit’me. Kill not them all.

Indicative present.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

ae Sischhokmi, excl. Sitkokmi, excl.

Tate Rae a9 Sischhikmi, incl. oF 1 Sitkem, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

1. Sinchhem. I kill them two.

1. Sinmem. I kill them all,

2. --Sitmi. +-Sischhikmi. -+-Sitnem.

Dual and plural of object.

2. Sischhikmi. Thou killest them two.

2. Sitmem. Thou killest them all.

3. +-Sitmi.f +-Siscbhikmi. -+Sitmem.

* Another form, = sinmi, sitmi, sitmi, is sitvi nognom, sitvi nonum, sitvi nomi,

and so on, formed by active participle aud substantive verb.

+ Compare with sinmi, sitmi, sitmi, the correspondent syana, syata, syata of

Newari. The root (si, sa vel sya) and the augments (n and t) are alike and alike

disposed, that is, the augment following the root. So also in both tongues the

augment of the 2nd and 3rd person, or t, constitutes the passive in all 3 persons

si-t-gnom ; si-t-mi, si-t-mi == Newari sya-ta, sya-ta, sya-ta. The si-t of the one

is precisely the sya-t or sha-t of the other, the t being that mark of action, apart

from one’s own, whereby the passive (with the help of the separate prefixed objec-

tive pronoun in both tongues alike) is denoted. And yet these two languages have

all the superficial marks of wide contrariety and opposition. In the vocabulary I

have pointed attention to identical roots or words used verbally in one of these

tongues, substantivally in the other, or of which the one has the primitive, the

other the derivative. What I would imply is that identical roots and constructive

principles may be found in this family of tongues where one would least expect

to find them.

185

OS ce

ot = wn = Lo

One

me.

and Sitne.

. +Sischhikmi.

. +Sitmem.

. Sistungmi.

. Sistungchhem.

. Sistungmem.

. Sistum.

. Sistochhem.

. Sistomem.

. +Sistum.

. *+Sistochhem.

. +Sistomem.

Present,

Ma sinmi.

. Ma sitmi.

&e.

Present,

. Sinki ma.

. Sitki ma.

. Sitki ma,

. Sit wontongmi.

. Sit wontum.

. Sit --wontum.

Present.

. Sit -+-dakgnom.,

. Sit 4--dakmi.

. Sit --dakmi.

* { Sischhongmi, excl.

Vayu Vocabulary. 449

Dual and plural of object.

He kills them two.

He kills them all.

Preterite.

2 Sistikéngmi, excl.

Sischhing mi, incl. Sistikéngmi, incl,

Dual and plural of object.

IT killed them two.

I killed them all.

-+-Sischhem,

Dual and plural of object.

+-Sénem ? Sitnem.*

Thou killedst them two.

Thou killedst them all.

-++Sistochhem. -+Sistomem,

Dual and plural of object.

He killed them two.

He killed them all.

Negative Mood.

Preterite.

1. Ma sistungmi.

2. Ma sistum.

3. Ma sistum.

&e. &e.

Interrogative Mood.

Preterite.

1, Sistung ki ma,

2. Sisté ki ma.

3. Sistd ki ma.

Potential Mood.

Aoristic.

though in dual and plural it is tensed and also in

and so on, like hato which also is aoristic in singular,

the passive voice.

Optative Mood.

Preterite.

1. Sit +-daksungmi,

2. Sit +-dangmi,

f &c. like dak aforegone.

3. Sit 4+dangmi,

Sénem, like Séne in the imperative must be an error though insisted on -to

Séko, to know, gives Sénem and Séne, regularly as Sisto, to kill, gives Sitnem

In the intransitives we have respectively senche and sische,

450 Viyu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

Precative Mood.

(That I may kill).

Present. Preterite.

1. Sin yu. 1. Sistung yu,

2. Sit yu. 2. Sisto yu, &c. as in the uncompounded verb.

3. Sit yu. 3. Sisto yu,

Subjunetive Mood.

Present. Preterite.

Ne ae P, Ste ns Pee nd so on as in the uncompounded

2. Sitnam, 2. Sistophen, wen

3. Sitnam. 3, Sistophen, 1 ;

Continuative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1. Sit’nasit’ nognom. Sit’nasit’? nésingmi «he :

he a > and so on conjugating the auxi-

2. Sitnasiv’ nénum. Sitnasit’ nonum, Kear after (ae eae oi

3. Sit’nasit’? ndmi. Sit’nasit némi, ati eee

Reciprocal Mood.

*.9 *.3 ya Ya *

1. Sit nasit panchungmi, &c. after the model of imche, which, like all

2. Sit’nasit’ panchem, : ae : : yen

Silt eR hay intransitives in che, is aoristic.

3. Sit’nasit’ panchem,

Causal Verb.

As before in all respects.

See Hato.

Passive VEBB.

Imperatwe Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Aff. Sisstng. Sischhéng. Sisti kong.

Neg. Tha sitgno. Tha sischhok. Tha sit k6k.

Dual and plural of agent.

Af Sissungchhé. Dv ye two kill me.

* (Sissungné. Do ye all kill me.

Neo, § Pha sitgnochhé, Do ye two not kill me.

““°S* 0 Tha sitgnoné. Do ye all not kill me,

Indicatwe present.

Singular. Dual, Plural,

1. Sit gnom +Sischhokmi, excl. +-Sit kékmi, excl.

=kills me (sub- -FSischhikmi, incl. +-Sit kém, incl.

audi ille vel iste). = kills us two, = kills us all.

Dual and plural of agent.

1. Sit gnochhem. Kill me they two (or ye two).

1. Sit gnomem. Kill me they all.

2. +-Sitmi. +-Sischhikmi. +-Sit?nem.

Dual and plural of agent.

(2. Sitmi. Kill thee they two (or we two).

(2. Sitmi. Kill thee they all (or we all).

“fF Sitmi. +f Sischhikmi, -+-Sitmem.

1857.]

oo 09

. +Sischhikmi.

. +Sitmem.

. Sissungmi.

. *Sissunechhém.

. Sissungmém.,

. Sinmi,

. Sinmi.

. Sistum.

. Sistochhem.

. Sistomem.

Sista not’nung, dumnung,

nét’mung, to be

Vayu Vocabulary.

Dual and plural of agent.

Kill him they two (or ye two).

Kill him they all.

Preterite.

+-Sischhdngmi, excl.

+-Sischhingmi, incl.

-+-Sistikéngmi, excl.

+Sistikéngmi, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

Killed me they two (or ye two).

Killed me they all,

Sischhem.

Dual and plural of agent.

Killed thee they two (or we two).

Killed thee they all (or we all).

Sistochhem. Sistomem.

Senem ? Sitnem.,

Dual and plural of agent.

Killed him they two.

Killed him they all.

SECOND FORM OF THE PASSIVE.

Infinitive Mood.

killed.

Pies dimung, to become $

Cuts mang not’mung, not to be killed

2 mang dimung, not to become ;

Gerunds.

Sista nét’he, dimhe, 3)

Sista not’not’ha, dumdumha, _—¢- ut supra.

Sista not’singhe, dumsinghe, |

Sista not’khen, dumkhen, a

Participles.

Sista not’vi or dumvi,

Sista no’ta or dumta,

Sista no’tang, dumtang,

ut supra.

Verbal nouns.

Sista not’ or dum-lun

£>

Sista not’? or dum-chyang,

ut supra.

Sista not’ or dum-sing,

Negatives by mang prefixed,

Singular.

Aff. Sista, nd dum.

Neg. By prefixed participle tha,

Imperative present.

Dual. Plural.

: noche. : none.

Bista dumche. \ ome dumne.

* Brackets before the repeated numbers (answering to 3 persons of verb), and

the crosses (+), as before explained.

452 Vayu Vocabulary. | No. 6.

Indicative present.

1. Sista ( négnom. i

; ¢ damum, |

nee nénum, | And so on according to the paradigms phi

Bi Risks dimi. c and dam. ‘

a nomi. |

3. Sista Bates J

Remark.—This form of the passive has a correspondent active form, sit’vi, nog-

nom vel dumum, and both are singularly free from doubt as to the sense, and

singularly correspondent with our English idiom, I am killing, I am killed, the

phrases being in effect, I am the killer and I am the killed.

But, owing to the inherence of the relative sense in the participles, these forms

are eschewed. The following correspondent forms in Khas and Newari are equally

available in those languages and equally eschewed for the same reason.

Khas.

Active. Passive.

1. Hannya hin. Hanyako han.

2. Hannya hos. Hanyako hos.

3. Hannya ho. Hanyako ho.

Newtrr.

1. Ji syahmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha,

2. Chha sy4hmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha, } kha or jalo.*

3. W6 syahmakha, or ju. Syanahmakha,

Special forms of action between the 2 first persons.

First form, I to thee.

S. Sit’num. Kill or killed or will kill thee I only.

D. Sit’nochhem. Kill or killed or will kill you two I only.

P. Sit’nonem, Kill or killed or will kill you all I only.

Second form, Thou to me.

S. Sit’gnom. Killst or wilt kill me thou (or he). Pekar aud

D, Sit’gnochhem. Kill or will kill me ye two (or they two). Fut ms

P. Sit’gnonem. Kill or will kill me ye all only. ata

S. 7Sit’sungmi. Killedst me thou (or he).

D. ySit’sungchhem., Killed me ye two (or they two). Preterite.

P. Sit’sungnem. Killed me ye all only.

The negative merely prefixes ma as in active voice.

The interrogative drops the final m or mi and substitutes ki ma, as in active

voice.

The potential is conjugated with the passive form of the secondary verb wonto.

Present and future. Preterite,

1. Sit’wéngnom. 1. Sit’ wénsingmi. oS ae

9. Sie weami 2 SAG atts an only pene

. Sit’wonmi. . Sit?won : fo

3. Sit'wontum. 3. Sit’wontum. like passive of Hato

Optative mood precisely as in the active voice, dakgnom, meaning I desire

and I am desired, and the passive expression being removed from the truncated

main verb.

* Kha and ja are substantive verbs in Newari, whereof the former is immutable,

and the latter becomes jalo in the preterite.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 453

Precative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1. Sit’ gno yu. 1. Sissung yu, and so on, by dropping final m or

2. Sit’ yu. 2. Sin yu, mi of the passive and substituting

3. Sit’ yu. 3. Sisto yu, immutable precative particle yu.

The subjunctive mood resembles the above, taking only its own signs in lieu of

yu, the precative sign.

Causal.

Present. Preterite.

2. Sit pingmi. 2. Sit pingmi, sive forms of the verb pingko,

1, Sit ping gnom. 1. Sit pingsungmi, and so all through all the pas-

3. Sit pingmi. 3. Sit pingkum, which see.

According to the above paradigm of sisto, conjugate also pisto to bring,*

khisto to rub, khwasto, to feed, phasto, to enable (pha’to), chasto, to hit with

stone (cha’to), khwasto (khwa’to), to tighten, dosto, to sustain for another,

(dophto) musto, to seat (muphto), testo, to set at liberty or cause to begin

(tezhto), thesto, to kick (thethto), chusto, to finish it (chuphto), chisto, to

suspend, isto, to tell, risto, to rot it, josto (jopto), to kindle, chhisto, to relate

(chhi’to), wasto, to abandon, yosto, to approve, like, nasto, to wet (na’to), lusto

(luphto), to transplant, thos’to (thophto) to take out, tosto (tophto), to reconcile,

to unite ; lis’to, to teach and to return; pes’to, to reap; las’to (lathto), to take

for another, &c, &c. N. B.—The intercalary silibant varies to sh, ph and English

th. It is least obscure with the vowel i; most so with the vowels 4, ti and 6.

8th,—Conjugation of transitives in po, not having a nasal (n. ng. m) before it.

The verb top’, to strike (potius, t6).+

Infinitive Mood.

Aff. To’mung,

Neg. Mang to’mung, BORStIGE

Gerunds. Participles.

Top’he, | To’ vi, a

Topnung, | Topta,

Toptopha, Lut supra. Toptang,

Topsinghe, |

Topki t "Qe

dpa J Verbal nouns. pat snpip

Topchyang,

Toplung, f

Topsing, J

Negatives of all by prefixed mang.

Imperative.

Singular. Dual, Plural.

To’ po. Topchhe. Tomne.

* Kh of khisto is a very peculiar sound verging upon a vague th, or hard h or

Sanscrit ksh: 4H, is hard Arabic, without the least vagueness.

+ The root is properly to, equal to ta vel da of Chinese, Newari, Sontal and tha,

the same aspirated, of Kuswar. The dubious adherence of the transitive sign, or

p, is highly significant,

3 M

454

To’ pochhe.

To’pome.

Tha top’.

Tha topebhik,

Tha top’me.

1. To’mi*

1. Tomchhem.

1. Tomem.

2. Tomi.

2. To’mem.

3.--To’mi.t

{ 2. Topchhikmi.

3.-+-To’pehhikmi.

3.4+-To’mem.

1. To’pungmi,

1. To’pungchhem.

1. To’ pungmem.

' 2. To’pum.

2. To’pochhem.

2. To’pomem.

3. --To’ pum.

3. +-To’pochhem.

3. -+-To’pomem.

Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

Dual and plural of object.

Do thou strike them two.

Do thou strike them all.

Negatives.

Tha topchhe. Tha topne,

Kill not them two.

Kill not them all.

Indicative present.

To’ popmi, excl.

Topchhokmi, excl. 4.

To’ pem, incl.

Topehhik mi, incl.

Dual and plural of object.

I strike them two.

I strike them all.

+Topchbik mi. -+-Topnem.

Dual and plural of object.

Thou strik’st them two,

Thou strik’st them all.

+-Topcehhikmi. -+- To’mem.

Dual and plural of object.

He strikes them two.

He strikes them all.

' Preterite.

eee nerae excl. 4. To'pikongmi, excl,

Topchhingmi, incl. To’pikengmi, iucl.

Dual and Plural of object.

I struck them two.

IT struck them all.

+Topchhem. +Tomnem,

Dual and plural of object.

Thou struck’st them two,

Thou struck’st them all.

+-To’pochhem. --To’pomem.

Dual and plural of object.

He struck them two.

He struck them all.

Negative by prefixed ma.

Optative mood by conjugating the verb to desire suffixed to the unchanging

form top’ of the main verb.

* It is noticeable very that the verbs in po have no mark of the first person

singular of present tense, so generally contradistinguished from the 2nd and 3rd,

or all other persons.

past daya, dala, dala).

Even Newari preserves this distinction, daye, dayu, (in the

+ Tomi with the prolonged tone instead of the abrupt one, means he places,

whereas to’mi, is he hits.

to’po = hit.

The former comes from tako = place; the latter from

a Se

185

7. Vayu Vocabulary. 455

Interrogative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

Tom’ ki ma. To’ pung ki ma, &c. by dropping the mi or

+Top’ ki ma. To’po ki ma, m final and substituting ki

+Top’ ki ma. +-To’po ki ma, ma.

Subjunctive by substituting nam in present and phen in past for the interro-

gative ki ma.

Qo bo

tl ag

Potential Mood.

Present and Past (Aoristic).

Top wontungmi,

Top wontum, &c. as in Hato and Nishto potentials.

+-Top wontum, !

Precative Mood.

Present. Past.

Tom yu. 1. To’ pungyu.

-+-Top yu. 2. To’ poyu. fe &c.

-+-Top yu. 3. +To’ poyu.

Continuative Mood.

Present tense.

Top na top nognom, *and so on, conjugating the auxiliary verb

Top na top nonum, n6 after the manner of phi, in dual and

Top na top nomi, plural.

Reciprocal Mood.

. Present.

Pop na top panchungmi, ia so on, conjugating panche after the model

Top na top panchem, of imche,

Top na top panchem.

Causal Verb.

As before in all respects. See prior samples.

Cause to strike, top’pingko (see trans. ‘‘ inké”).

Passtve VERB.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

Top sung Top chhong To’pi kong

== Hit me. = Hit us two. = Hit us all.

Top na top muschungmi (from musche, to sit) may also be used, = ddya

chona of Newari. So also the reciprocal can be expressed by top na top pangmi

or the transitive which moreover is apt to blend in sense with the continuative.

So also you can express the habitual present tense by to’ vi nognom, literally I am

the striker.

3M 2

4.56

Top sungchhe,

Top sungne.

Tha topmo.

Tha topmochhe.

Tha topmone,

Singular,

1. To’ mum

= hits me (suban-

di, he).

1. To’ mochhem.

1. To’ momem.

2. -+-To’ mi.

2. To’ mi.

3. +-To’ mi.

J3. Top chhikmi,

‘3. ° Top’ mem.

Singular.

Topsungmi.

1. Top sung chhem.

1. Top sung mem.

2. To’ mi.

Vayu Vocabulary. [ No.

Dual and plural of agent.

Hit me ye two.

Hit me ye all.

Negatives.

Tha topchhok.

Hit me not ye two.

Hit me not ye all.

Indicative Mood.

Dual. Plurai.

\itm chhokmi, excl. \ To’ popmi, excl.

Tha to’pok.

-+-Top chhikmi, incl. To’ pen, inel.

= hits us two. = hits us all.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (and ye two) hit me.

They all hit me.

+Top chhikmi.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (and we two) hit thee.

They all (and we all) hit thee.

-+-Top chhikmi.

Dual aud plural of agent.

They two (and ye two) hit kim.

They all hit him.

+Top nem.

--Topmem.

Preterite.

Dual, Plural.

{ ¥aeP chhongmi, excl. {bine pi kong mi, excl.

To’p chhingmi, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or ye two) struck me.

They all struck me.

-+Top chhem. -+-Tom nem.

Lo’pi keng mi, incl.

N. B.—The brackets and the initial crosses (+-) refer, as before explained to

forms of the verb scarcely reconcileable with our ideas of conjugation and yet not

easily separable from such as are so, and to forms common to the active and

passive voices, see on for another view of the subject.

Dual and plural of agent.

f2. To’ mi.

i2:. To’ viii:

3. --To’ pum.

They two (or we two) struck thee.

They all struck thee.

+To’ pochhem.

Dual and plural of agent.

-+-To’ pomem.

They two struck him.

J3. 4'To’ pochhem.

L3 + They all struck him.

To’ pomem.

A second form of passive is constructed from the past participle and the auxiliar

verb, as aforenoticed, thus—

1857 4 Vayu Vocabulary. 457

&c. according to the model of sheer neuters (see

2. Topta nonum, phi)

1. Topta nognom,*

3. Topta nomi,

Special Forms.

I.—I and thou.

S. Top num, I (only) strike or will strike or struck thee. +

D. Topnochhem, I (only) strike or struck you two. Aoristic.

P. Top nonem, I (only) strike or struck you all, J

II.—Thou and 1,

S.y Top’mum. Thou strik’st or wilt strike me. Binene sen

D.y Top’ mocbhem. Ye two strike or will strike me. pa a

Le Top’ monem. Ye all strike or will strike me. ais Saat

S.y Top sungmi. Thou struckedst me.

D. Top sungchhem. Ye two struck me. Preterite

P. Top sungnem. Ye all struck me.

The optative passive is precisely similar to the optative active. The negative

mood is formed, as before, by merely prefixing the particle of negation, or ma.

Interrogative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1. To’ mo ki ma, Topsung ki ma. Dual and plural by dropping m

2. +-Top ki ma. Tom ki ma. or mi final and substituting the

3. -+-Top ki ma. +-To’po ki ma. interrogative form.

Subjunctive mood by substituting nam and phen for ki ma, according to tense.

Potential Mood.

Present (or future). Preterite,

1. Top wongnom. 1. Top wonsungmi, and so on, conjugating with

2. Top wonmi. 2. Top wonmi, the passive of wonto like

3. #Top wontum. 3. +-Top wontum, the passive of hato.

Precative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1. To’mo yu. 1. Top sung yu. Dual and plural as in the

2+Top yu. 2. Tom yu. indicative, substituting yu

3+-Top yu. 3. +- To’po yu. for the final m or mi.

Causal Verb.

Formed as before with the passive of pingko added to top’. Top pinggnom,

&e., Top pingsungmi, &c. Like the above paradigm of roots in ’po are conjugated

also, chi’po, to defecate, wo’po, to shoot, i’po, to raise (make get up) du’po, to

kindle, khi’po, to make rope, pi’po, to suck, po’po, to lick, yo’po, to take off,

chho’po, to sharpen, and all others having no consonant but an abrupt tone (stand-

ing for truncated p) before the transitive sign.

9th.—Conjugation of transitives in po having a nasal (m. n, ng) before it.

* See prior note at Sishto. Here we have for Vayu to’vi nognom and topta

nognom, = khas kutnya hon and kutyako hon and dahma kha, daya’hma kha,

Newari.

458 Véyu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

The verb hom, to taste.

Infinitive Mood.

Aff. Hommung, to taste or to have tasted.* Aoristic.

Neg. Mang hommung, not to taste or to have tasted.

Gerunds. : t

HGH ES Présent, Tasting With main verb in present or future -

H with main verb in preterite.

om nung,

Hom hom ha. Past. Having tasted.

Hom sing he. Future or present. When tasting.

Hom khen. Past. After tasting. After having tasted.

Pariticiples.

Honvi or Homvi. Who tastes, did or will taste. Aoristic.

Homta or Howmpta. What is or has been taSted. Past and passive.

Homtang or Homptang. What will be tasted, what is usually tasted, what fit to

be tasted. Future passive.

Verbal Nouns.

Expresses the instrument as homchyang li, the tasting

tongue. It is also used substantively hom chyang,

the taster (organ, not man.)

Hom chyang.

Hom lung, expresses the locality, external to self,

Hom sing, expresses the time of tasting,

The negative forms of all the above are made by prefixing the privitive parti-

cle mang.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Hompo. Homchhe. Homne.

Dual and plural of object.

Hompochhe. Do thou taste those two.

Hompome. Do thou taste them all.

Negatives of the above.

Tha hom. Tha homchhe. Tha homné.

Tua bomchhik. Do not taste those two.

Tha homne. Do not taste them all.

Indicative Mood.

Present tense.

{tiem chhokmi, excl. Hom popmi, excl.

1, Hom sungmi. tHom chhikmi, incl. ih Hom pem, incl.

Dual and plural of object.

fi. Hom sungchhem. I taste them two.

1. Hom sungmem, I taste them all,

2. +Hom mi. --+-Hom chhikmi, -+-Homnem.

Dual and plural of object.

f2. Hom chhikmi. Thou tast’st them two.

(2. Hom mem. Thou tast’st them all.

3.4-Hom mi. +- Homehhikmi., -++ Homnem.

* Also used quite like au adjective hommung ti, drinking or palatable water

water fit for tasting or being tasted.

1857.] Vayu Vocabulary. 459

Dual and plural of object.

3, Homchhikmi, He tastes them two.

3.-++- Hommem. He tastes them all.

Preterite.

{++Hom chhongmi, excl, gare kongmi, excl,

1, Hom pungmt Hom chhingmi, incl. Hompi kengmi, incl.

Dual and plural of object.

Jf1. Hom pungchhem. T tasted them two.

UI. Hom pungmem. I tasted them all.

2. Hom pum, -+- Hom chhem. + Hom nem,

Dual and plural of object.

2. Hom pochhem., Thou tastedst them two.

2. Hom pomem. Thou tastedst them all.

3. Hom pum. -+ Hom pochhem. -+Hom pomem.

Dual and plural of object.

pH pochhem. He tasted them two.

flom pomem. He tasted them all.

Negative mood by prefixed ma.

Optative mood by conjugation of the verb dak suffixed to the root (hom) of the

main verb Hom dak gnom, &c.

Interrogative mood by dropping final mi or m and substituting the interrogation

form ki ma, thus—

Present. Preterite.

1. Hom sung ki ma. Hom pung ki ma,

2.-++ Hom kima. Hom po ki ma.

3.-+-Hom kima. -+- Hom po ki ma.

Subjunctive mood by substituting nam in the present and phen in the past for

ki ma, thus hom sung nam, if I taste; hom pung phen, if I had tasted, &c.

Potential mood by conjugating the aoristic transitive wonto after the root hom.

Precative Mood.

Present. Preterite.

1, Hom sung yu. Hom pung yu. cae merely substituting the

2. - Hom yu. Hom po yu. precative particle for the in-

3. + Hom yu. + Hom po yu. J terrogative.

Continuative Mood.

Hom na hom nognom, 7

Hom na hom nonum, ~&e. as before.

Hom na hom nomi, J

Reciprocal Mood.

Hom na hom panchungmi, ‘

Hom na hom panchem, -&c. as before,

Hom na hom panchem, J

Causal.

By conjugating the root hom with the causal verb pingko, as before.

4.60

Singular.

Aff. Hom sung.

Neg. Tha hommo.

Aff. Hom sungcbhe.

Aff. Hom sungne.

Neg. Tha hommochhe.

Neg. Tha hommone.

Singular.

1. Hom mum.

J1. Hom mochhem.

Ll. Hom momem.

Singular.

2. + Hommi.

2. Hommi.

3. -+Hommi.

3. -—- Hom chhikmi,

3. +Hom mem.

1, Hom sungmi.

Hom sungmem,.

+1; Hom sungchhem.

2. Hommi.

J 2. Hommi.

2. Hommi.

3.-+- Hompum.

3.-+ Hom pochem.

3.-+- Hom pomem.

Hompta nognom,

Hompta nonum,

Hompta nomi,

Payu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

PASSIVE.

Imperative Mood.

Dual. Plural.

Homchhong. Hom pi kong.

Tha homchhok. Tha hom pok.

Dual and plural of agent.

Do ye two taste me.

Do ye all taste me.

Do ye two taste me not.

Do ye all taste me not.

Indicative Mood.

Duai. Plural.

Hom chhokmi, excl. Hom popmi, excl.

Hom chhikmi, incl. Hom pem, incl,

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or ye two) taste me,

They all taste me.

Dual. Plural,

-+- Hom chhikmi. ++ Homnem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (and we two) taste thee.

They all (and we two) taste thee.

-++ Hom chhikmi. + Hommem,

They two (and ye) taste him.

They all taste him.

Preterite.

{ + Hom chhong mi, excl. 4 a kongmi, excl.

Hom chhing mi, incl. Hompi kengmi, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or ye two) tasted me.

They all tasted me.

-+-Homchhem. -+-Homnem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or we two) tasted thee.

They all (or we two) tasted thee.

-+- Hom pochhem. + Hom pomem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two tasted him.

They all tasted them.

2nd form of the passive.

ae as before throughout the auxiliary verb.

1857. | Véyw Vocabulary. 461

Special Forms.

I.—I and thou.

8. Homnum. I (only) taste or will taste or did taste ae 3

D. Hom nochem. I (only) taste or tasted you two. Aoristic.

lg Hom nonem. I (only) taste or tasted you all. |

I1.—Thou and I.

S.y Hommum. Thou (or he) tast’st or wilt taste me. Present

D.y Hom mochhem. Ye two (or they two) taste &c. or will ee

taste me.

Future.

ine Hom monem, Ye all taste or will taste me. ae

Preterite.

S.y Hom sungmi.* Thou (or he) tasted’st me. 7

D.y Homsungchhem. Ye two (or they two) tasted me. Preterite.

P Hom sungnem. Ye all (only) tasted me.

Negative Mood.

Is formed, as in active voice, merely by prefixing the privative particle ma.

Optatiwe Mood.

Concurs with the same in the active voice, dak having an active and passive

sense, and the neuter form dakgnom being also the passive form, dakgnom I

desire or am desired; the latter sense transferred to root. With the synonymous

verb yot’, to like, the voices can be distinguished, yosto being the active transitive

and yosung the passive, hence we have as optative active and passive.

Active voice. Passive voice.

1. Hom yonmi. Present iense. | 1. Hom yotgnom., Present tense.

2. Hom yotmi. Tee taste Wee Hom yonmi. I like to be

3. Hom yotmi. """ | 3. Hom yostum. tasted.

1. Hom yostungmi.

2. Hom yostum. Preterite.

3. Hom yostum,

1, Hom yossungmi.

2. Hom yonmi. Preterite.

3. Hom yostum.

Interrogative Mood.

Simply by dropping m or mi final and substituting ki ma.

Subjunctive Mood.

Simply by dropping the mi cr m and substituting nam for present and phen for

past tense, Hommonam : Homsungphen, &c.

Potential Mood.

By conjugating the passive of wonto, as before, added to the root hom.

Precative Mood.

By dropping the final m or mi, and substituting yu: Hommo yu: Homsung

yu, &c.

* The mark vy placed before some of these forms indicates that they are in-

cluded in the more ordinary forms of conjugation. They are repeated here for

illustration, The change of sense in dual and plural of preterite shows, in con-

junction with the whole system of conjugation, how restive the language is under

these trammels.

462 Vayu Vocabulary. [| No. 6.

Causal Mood.

As before by pingko added to the root.

Thus are conjugated, nampo, to smell; thampo, to lose; Ahumpo, to bury;

hempo, to cause to sleep; hampo, to spread; and all similar words. So also are

conjugated all transitives in ko having a nasal before them (n or ng) as pingko, to

send; chinko, to spin and to fill; punko, to weave; hdnko, to uncover; honko,

to obey; chhunko, to cleanse; tinko, to drink spirits and to cherish; sunko, to

dry at fire—only that the terminations dependant on the transitive change with

that sign, and as bompo makes hompopmi hompem, so pingko makes pingkokmi

pingkem.

10th.—Conjugation of transitives in ko not having any consonant between the

sign and the root.

The verb Ta, to place.

Infinitive Mood.

Aff. Tamung. Ma

Neg. Mang tamung. } Aoristic.

Gerunds. Participles,

Tahe, 2) Tovi,

Tanung, | Tota, ut supra.

Tataha, fut supra, Totang,

Tasinghe,

Taékhen,

Verbal nouns.

Tachyang,

Talung, ut supra.

Tasing,

Negatives of all by mang prefixed.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual, Plural.

Aff. Tako. Tachhe. Tane.

Neg. Tha to. Tha tochhe. Tha tone.

Dual and Plural of Object.

Takochhe. Put down those two.

Takome, Put down them all.

Negative.

Tha tochhik. Put not down them two.

Tha tome. Put not down them all,

Indicative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Pluraé.

i ’ Ta chhokmi, excl. . Takokmi

omi,* aay : 5 :

1. Tangmi. { Ta chhikmi, incl. i Takem.

Dual and Plural of Object.

1. Tangchhem. I put down them two.

1 Tangmem, I put down them all,

2.4-Tomi. +-Tochhikmi. +-Tonem.

* Also Tovi nognom, as elsewhere explained.

1857. ] Vayu Vocabulary. 4.63

Dual and Plural of Object.

2. Tochhikmi. Thou putst down them two.

2. Tomem, Thou putst down them all.

3.+-Tomi. +-Tochhikmi. -+-Tomem.

Dual and Plural of Object.

¢ 3.+- Tochhikmi. He puts down them two. '

(3.4 Tomem. * He puts down them ail.

Preterite.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

ee : , Ta chhongmi, Takikongmi.

caer. 14 chhingmi. Takikengmi,

Dual and Plural of Object.

1. Takungchhem. I placed them two.

1, Takungmem. I placed them all,

2. Takum. Tachhem, Tanem,

Dual and Plural of Object.

2. Takochhem. Thou put’st down them two.

2. Takomem. Thou put’st down them all.

3.4-Takum. + Takochhem. + Takomem.

Dual and Plural of Object.

3. Takochhem. He put down them two.

+3, Takomem, He put down them all.

}

Negative mood by prefixed ma.

Optative mood by dak conjugated after the ta root, as before given.

Interrogative mood by cutting off final mi or m and substituting the querying

formula ki ma.

Subjunctive mood by like truncation and substitution of nam for present and

phen for past tense.

Potential mood by conjugating wonto after the root ta.

Precative by the immutable particle yu substituted for final mi, m.

Causal by conjugating pingko added to root.

Continuative Mood.

- Ta nata nognom. and so on, conjugating the substantive verb no, to be

2. Ta nata nonum. after the model of phi to come and prefixing the

3. Ta nata nomi. iterated root with na interposed.

Reciprocal Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural,

. " Ta a - 7, ‘ be . 4 A 4 - . .

Pa nats Ponchungmi. ( a nata panachbok mi, Ta nata pachikokmi,

(Ta nata panachhikmi. Ta nata pachikem,

2. Ta nata panchem. Ta nata panachhikmi. Ta nata pachinem,

2. Ta nata panchem. Ta nata panachbik mi. Ta nata pachimem.

And so on for the preterite after the model of imche and all reflex verbs in che.

This is formed by the reflex of the verb pa to do, which is pauche added to the

iterated root as before. The construction ad sensum, which is the chief rule of this

tongue, restricts the reciprocal mood in use to the dual and plural.

3N2

464

Singular.

Aff. Tosung.

Neg. Tha togno.

( Tosungchhe,

oe ¢ Tosungne.

Ne Tha tosungchhe.

B- Tha tosungne.

Singular.

Tognom.

(1. Tognochhem.

U1. Tognomem,

2.-+- Tomi.

2. Tomi.

2. “Tomi.

3.-+- Tomi.

3. Tochhikmi,

3. Tomem.,

1, Tosungmi.

1. Tosungchhem.,

. Tosungmem,

2.) Ler.

2. Tomi.

2. Toru:

3. + Takum.

—

3.+ Takochhem,

3.4 Takomem.

1 Tota nognom,

2 Tota nonum,

3 Tota nomi,

Vayu Vocabulary.

PasstvE VOICE.

Imperative Mood.

Dual.

Tochhong.

Tha tochhok.

Dual and plural of agent.

Plurat.

Tokikong.

Tha tokok.

Do ye two place me.

Do ye all place me.

Place me not, ye two, ye all.

Indicative Mood.

Dual.

Tochhokmi.

Tochhikmi.

Plural.

f Tokokmi, excl.

Tokem, incl.

Dual and plural of agent.

They (or ye) two place me.

They all place me. *

+Tochhikmi. -+-Tonem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (and we) place thee.

They all (and we) place thee.

+-Tochhikmi. +-Tomem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (and ye) place him.

They all place him.

Preterite.

Tochhongmi. Tokikongmi, excl.

Tochhingmi. Tokikengmi, inel.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or ye’ placed me,

They all placed me.

Tochhem. Tonem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two (or we) placed thee.

They all (or we) placed thee.

-+ Takochhem.,

Dual and plural of agent. ,

=+ Takomem.

They two (or ye) placed him.

They all placed him,

2nd form of the passive,

&c. as before,

[ No. 6.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 465

Special forms.

I.—I to thee.

j Tonum. I (only) placed or will place thee.

D. Tonochhem. I (only) placed or will place you two. Aoristic.

P. Tononem, I (only) placed or will place you all.

IIl.—Thou to me.

S.y Tognom. Thou (or he) placest &c. me. Present

D.y Tognochhem. Ye two (or they two) place me. and

Ly Tognonem, Ye all (only) place me. Future.

Preterite.

S.y Tosungmi. Thou (or he) placed me.

D.y Tosungchhem. Ye two (or they two) placed me. Preterite.

is Tosungnem. Ye all placed me.

Negative Mood.

By prefixing ma merely.

Optative Mood.

T4 dakgnom, &c. as in active voice.

Ta ping dakgnom (the last as a neuter) seems to be more correct, but is eschewed,

though dakgnow, if allowed to be a passive, could hardly (one would suppose)

create the passive sense in the main verb in either form of this mood.

Interrogative Mood.

Togno ki ma. Tosung ki ma, and so on, dropping the final

To ki ma. To ki ma, m, mi and substituting the

-+ To ki ma. -+-Tako ki ma, interrogative ki ma.

Subjunctive Mood.

As in the interrogative but substituting nam in present and phen in ‘past tense

for the interrogatory form.

Potential Mood.

&c., like the passive of hato aforegone. Here also the

Ta won genom ; : a;

ns ? | passive sense lost in the truncated root is trans-

Ta won mi,

ferred to the secondary verb. Taping omi

-+T4 wontum, y . Taping wonchungmi,

I am able to be put down, is also admissible.

Causal Mood.

Ta ping chungmi. \ Ta ping gnom, *) &c., by the reflex or passive

Ta ping chem. | Ta ping mi, | causal of pingko conju-

Ta ping chem. rLa ping mi, gated like imche and

Iam put down by my | lam set down by an- | hompo, respectively.

own will, &c. J) other’s will, &c.

Continuative Mood.

Ta nataé pognom, &e., the iterated root conjugated with the passive

Ta nata pomi, of the verb pa, to do, which agrees with ta, to

Ta nata pomi. place.

Thus are conjugated jako, to eat, pako, to make, Thako, to hear, Nako, to

kindle, Chhako, to loosen, Chhuko, to seize, Doko, to catch, Khiko, to hide,

Duko, to dig, Seko, to understand, Reko and Guko, to lift up, Khoko, to cook,

Boko, to dry and all others having a nude root before the ko sign. But observe

466 Vayu Vocabulary. [ No. 6.

that tako, jako and pako change their 4 into 6 as in the aforegone paradigm,

whereas the rest suffer no such alteration, All alike take a half nasal betore the

intransitive sign che. It has already been remarked that transitives im “ko”

having a nasal before the sign, as pingko (potius pingko) to send, are conjugated like

transitives in po with a similarly placed nasal. But as pinko is the great former

of causatives I give it, before closing the conjugations, observing by the way

that the root ping, which is merely nasalized pi, seems to explain the Dravirian

causative sign.

Imperative.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Aff. Pingko (Pinko). Pingchhe. Pingne.

Neg. Tha ping. Tha pingchhe. Tha pingne.

Dual and plural of object.

Aft Pingkochhe. Do thou send them two.

* | Pingkome. Do thou send them all.

Nee { Tha pingchbik. Dual.

Indicative present.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

" Pingchhokmi, Pingkok mi.

2. Fingsungmt. 1 + Pingchhilkmi. { us Pingkem.

Dual and plural of object.

1. Pingsungchhem. T send them two.

1, Pingsungmem. I send them all,

2.+ Pingmi. -+- Pingchhikmi. -+Pingnem.

Dual and plural of object.

2. Pingchhikmi. Thou send’st them two,

2. Pingmem. Thou send’st them all.

3.-+ Pingmi. -+- Pinchhikmi. -+ Pingmem.

. Dual and plural of odject.

3. + Pingchhikmi. He sends them two.

3. + Pingmem. He sends them all.

Preterite.

; : Pingchhongmi., Pingkikongmi,

a ghang kumi) { ite Pingchhingmi. Pe OR

Dual and plural of object.

1. Pingkungchhem. I sent them two,

{ 1, Pingkungmem, i sent them all.

2. Pingkum. ++ Pingchhem. -+ Pingnem.

Dual and plural of object.

2. Pingkochhem. Thou send’est them two,

2. Pingkomem. Thou send’est them all.

3.4 Pingkum. + Pingkochhem. + Pingkomem,

JS 43. Pingkochhem.,

fay

3. Pingkomem.

Dual and plural of object.

He sent them two.

He sent them all.

Aff. Pinsung.

Neg. Tha pinggno.

Pingsungchhe.

Aff.

Pingsungne.

Neg. Tha pingsungchhe.

1. Pinggnom.

1, Pinggnochhem,

1. Pinggnomem,

2.-+- Pingmi.

2, Pingmi.

2. Pingmi.

3 -+ Pingmi,

{ et 3. Pingchhikmi.

3. Pingmem.

1. Pingsungmi.

Pingsungmem,

4 Pingsungchhem,

2. Pingmi.

Pingmi.

3.-+ Pingkum.

3. Pingkochhem.

{ ‘a 3. Pingkomem,

Vayu Vocabulary.

Passive VOIcn.

Imperative Mood.

Pingkikong.

Tha pingkok,

Pingchhong.

Tha pingchhok,

Dual and plural of agent.

Do you two send me.

Do you all send me.

Tha pingsungne,

Indicative Dood.

Present Tense.

{ + Pingchhokmi,

Pingchhikmi. Pingkem,

raaet es

Dual and plural of agent.

They two send me,

They all send me.

+-Pingchhikmi. +- Pingnem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two send thee.

They all send thee.

++ Pingchhikmi. + Pingmem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two send him.

They all send him. ,

Preterite.

op Eimechhowe mi. ats Pingkikongmi.

Pingchhingmi. Piugkikengmi.,

Dual and plural of agent

They two sent me.

They all sent me,

-++ Pingchhem. + Pinguem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two sent thee.

They all sent thee.

-+- Pingkochhem. -++ Pingkomem.

Dual and plural of agent.

They two sent him.

They all sent him.

467

11.—Conjugation of transitives in “ko” having an abrupt tone (equal iterate

sign) between the sign and the root,

The verb Phd, to beget, or give birth to.

Infinitive Mood.

Aff. Phok mung.

Neg. Mang phokmung,

468

Gerunds.

Phokhe.

Phoknung, &c.

Aff. Pho’ko.

Neg. Tha pho’ko.

Pho’kochhe.

— ee

ee Tha phokme.

Singular.

1. Phongmi.

1. Phongchhem.

1. Phongmem.

2. Phokmi.

2. Phokchhikmi.

2. Phokmem.

3. Phokmi.

3. Phokchhikmi.

3. Phokmem.

1, Pho’kungmi.

Pho’kungmem.

da Pho’kungchhem.

2. Pho’kum.

Phokomem.

AG: Phokochem.

3. Pho’kum.

ie Phokochhem.

Phokomem.

Reciprocal continuative, &c. compound with phok and the verbs nd and panche

as before.

No infinitive or participles save in the causal form phokpingmung, phokpinghe,

phokpingvi, &c.

Tha phokchhik.

Vayu Vocabulary.

Participles.

Phokvi.

Phokta, &c.

Imperative Mood.

Phokchhe.

Tha phokchhe.

Dual and plural of object.

Do thou beget two.

Do thou beget all.

Do not beget two.

Do not beget all.

Indicative Mood.

Dual.

Phokchhokmi, excl.

Phokchhikmi, incl.

Dual and plural of object.

I beget them two.

I beget them all.

Phokcbhikmi.

Dual and plural of object.

Thou begett’st them two.

Thou begett’st them all.

Phokchbhikmi.

Dual and plural of object.

He begets them two.

He begets them all,

Preterite.

Phokchhongmi, excl.

Phokchhingm], incl.

Dual and plural of object.

I begot two.

I begot all.

Phokchhem.

Dual and plural of object.

Thou begott’st two.

Thou begott’st all.

Phokochhem.

Dual and plural of object.

He begot two.

He begot all.

Passive Voice.

[No. 6.

Verbal nouns,

Phokchyang.

Phoklang.

Phoksing, &c.

Phonene.

Tha phokne.

Plural.

Phokkokmi, excl.

Phokkem, incl.

Phoknem.

Phokmem.

Phokikongmi, excl.

Phokikengmi, incl.

Phongnem,

Phokomem.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 469

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual, Plural.

Aff. Phoksung, Phokchhong. Pho’kikong.

Neg. Tha phokgno. Tha phokchhok. Tha pho’kok.

Dual and plural of agent.

A Phoksungchhe. Do ye two beget me.

* | Phoksungne. Do ye all beget me.

Ne Tha phoksungchhe.

*¢ Tha phoksungne.

Indicative Mood.

Singular. ‘) Dual and plural and agento-objective as in the last

1. Phokgnom. conjugation, only substituting phok for td, of

2. Phokmi. which the latter shows the ta root, internally

3. Phokmi. modified and the former, the iterate transitive

were ye

Preterite. sign, elsewhere suppressed, here brought forward,

1. Phoksungmi. for phok-gnom and phongmi both depend on

' 2. Phongmi. pho’-ko being really phok-ko,

3. Phongmi. a

Thus are conjugated ta’ko, to decorticate, kho’ko, to crook, pu’ko, to awaken,

chiko, to bite, ne’ko, to give rest, lu’ko, to choose, li’ko, to lay down or throw

down, cha’ko, to put upon, to make come up, ye’ko, to shear or clear the ground

for cultivation, chho’ko, to sow, po’ko, to weigh or measure, chwko, to plane

wood, lo’ko, to turn over, &c. Observe that in all these the latent iterate sign of

the imperative whose presence is only indicated by the abrupt tone (ta’ko) is pre-

served in the conjugation, whence from a common crude, or ta to place and to

decorticate, comes all the difference of tangmi, tomi, tomi and tangmi takmi,

takmi in the indicative, whilst in the preterite there is only the difference of the

abrupt accent, takungmi, takum, takum, and ta’kungmi, ta’kum, ta’kum. The

change of vowel is confined to the three verbs tako, jako and pako. All other

transitives in “ko” conjugated from the sheer root as Sé-ko, understand it,

follow the paradigm of tako, less that change of vowel; as imperative Se-ko,

Se-chhe, Se-ne, indicative, séngmi, sémi, sémi, &c. Compare with the transitives

in ’ko as above those in ’po, as to’po aforegone. Both follow the Dravirian rule

of iteration only disguised for the sake of euphony.

12th.—Conjugation (of Irregulars).

La, to go.

Imperative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

Aff. La’la, La’chhe. Lane.

Neg. Tha 1]a’la. Tha la’ chhik* Tha lane,

Indicative Mood.

Singular. Dual. Plural.

. La’ chhokmi. ( La’kokmi.

1. Lagnom. La’cbhikmi. ( La'kem.

2. La’lam. La’chhikmi. Lanem.

3. La’lam. La’chhikmi. Lamem,

* See first conjugation of neuters conjugated from the crude root,

3 0

470 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

Preterite.

25 : La’chhongmi, excl. La’kikongmi, excl.

eee ih cea incl. Lé’kikengmi, incl.

2. La’lam. La’chhem. Lanem.

3. La’lam. La’chhem. Lamem.,

13th.— Conjugation (of Irregulars).

N6, to be.

Present Indicative Singular.

1. Nognom. The residue is quite regular (see Ist conjugation) as also

2. Noénum. in the above verb, and indeed the dual and plural of all

3. Nomi or verbs whatever are nearly immutable, as will have been

Nom. seen.

Remark.— Both the above have an abrupt tone or obscure t’ before the gerund,

participle and verbal noun signs, as lat’he; not’he; lat’lat’ha, not’not’ha; lat’vi,

not’vi; la’ta, no’ta, also in the infinitive, lat’mung, not’mung.

14th and 15th.—Conjugations (of Irregulars), being those of the verb 14, to go,

as used in combination with other verbs,

I.—With transitives as top’, to béat II.—With neuters, as im, to sleep.

Indicative present Indicative present

singular. singular.

1, Top iangmi. >) Dual and plural, 1. Im lagnom. >) Dual and plural

2. Top lam. as in the un- 2. Im lam. are in the se-

3. Top lam. combined verb 3. Im lam. parate verb.

Preterite. \ lagnom, &c. Preterite,

1. Top lasungmi. 1. Im la sungmi. |

2. Top lam. 2. Im lam,

3. Toplachem. J 3. Im lam. J

Imperative.

Topla. Imla.

Remark,—In every conjunction of verbs the Ist loses the infinitive sign, and is

used in the crude state, whence the peculiar transfer of passive expression to the

subordinate verb, as before illustrated. But to this, hato in the sense of let, is an

exception, thus, let me strike, is topmung hasung, and topmung hanum, I let

thee strike.

The above fifteen conjugations with their accessories (see bracketed portions)

exhibit the whole scope of Vayu conjugation. But a reference to them will show

that it has been necessary, whilst striving to accommodate our forms to the genius

of this language, to interpolate into the transitives certain forms expressive of

both agent and object, and likewise to append to the passive certain other forms

which have been necessarily set apart from all the conjugations; not to mention

the perpetual coincidence of active and passive forms. It may now be of use to

exhibit the whole matter of conjugation in another shape seemingly more accom-

modated to the genius of the language, and which, though exhibiting a deal of

repetition, will be found convenient for comparisons when we proceed to the

Kiranti language, a language still richer than the Vayu tongue, in pronominal

combinations with the verb and wherein consequently many of the mere iterations

of the following diagram will take distinct shapes; whence we may infer that

decomposition has proceeded a good deal further in the Vayu language than in

the Kiranti tongue.

1857.]

Eat thou. 4

$2 CO ST OT C9 te

SNES

———=

~—

Ye two eat.

i Lt ee ————

SO OO NT DS OU Go to

—

neo

Ye all eat.

Vayu Vocabulary.

The verb ja, to eat.

Imperative Mood.

Singular.

. Janche, self, as agent or object, eat simply.

. Jako, It or him.

Jato, his or for him.

. Jakochhe, them two.

. Jatochhe, their two.

. Jakome, them all.

Jatome, their all.

. Jdsung, me.

. Jasung, mine.

. Jochhung, us two.

. Jachhung, our two.

. Jékikong, us all.

. Jakikong, our all,

Dual.

. Janachhe, selves.

. Jachhe, it.

. Jachhe, his, for him.

Jachhe, them two.

Jachhe, their two.

. Jachhe, them all,

. Jachhe, their all.

. Jésungchhe, me.

. Jasungchhe, mine.

. Jéchhung, us two.

. Jachhung, our two.

. Jokikong, us all.

Jakikong, our all.

Plural.

. Janchine, selves or simple action (functional).

. Jane, it.

. Jane, his, or for him.

. Jane, them two.

Jane, their two.

. Jane, them all.

. Jane, their all.

. Jdsungne, me.

. JAsungne, mine.

. Jéchhung, us two.

. Jachhung, our two.

. Jéokikong, us all.

. Jakikong, our all.

302

haa

| 6

IT eat or will eat. 7.

10.

We two eat or

will eat.

eee

CON Hom & b

(13

ore

| s

bai

We alleator |! 5

will eat. 4 6.

(13.

Véyu Vocabulary.

Indicative Mood.

Present and Future.

Singular.

. Janchungmi, self, as agent or object.

. Jangmi, it, him.

. Jatungmi, his or for him.

. Jangchhem, them two.

. datungchhem, their two.

. Jangmem, them all.

Jatungmem, their all.

. Jénum, thee.

. Janum, thine or for thee.

Joénochhem, you two.

. Janochhem, your two.

. Jdnonem, you all.

Janonem, your all.

Dual,

{ Janachokmi, excl.

J anachhikmi, incl.

oe nie: excl. ).

selves.

aouikemanel. (oo

. Jacbhokmi-chhikmi, his, for him.

. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, them two.

Jachhokmi-chhikmi, their two.

. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, them all.

. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, their all.

. Jomi, thee.

. JAachhokmi, thine.

. Jéchhikmi, you two.

. Jachhokmi, your two.

. Jonem, you all,

. Janem, your all,

Plural.

Janchikokmi, excl.)

Janchikem, incl. f

cee excl. |.

Jékem, incl. f*”

Jatikokmi, excl.

+ aeGRefa, incl.

selves.

lis, feciuita:

. Jakokmi-kem, them two.

- Jati-kokmi-kem, their two.

J4-kokmi-kem, them all.

. Jati-kokmi-kem, their all.

. Jomi or Jokokmi, thee.

. Jakokmi, thine.

. déchhikmi, you two.

. Jakokmi, your two.

. Jénem or Jékokmi, you all.

Janem or Jakokmi, your all.

1857. | Viyw Vocabulary. AT3

Singular.

ae!

| 3

Thou eat’st a :

wilt eat. g.

| 9

113

| 3

| 5

Y 6.

e two eat oe 7

will eat. 8.

10.

| 3

| 5

Ye all eat or J ei

will eat, 8.

(ee

—

(—

. Janchhem, self,

. Jdmi, it.

. Jatum, his, or for him.

. Jéchhikmi, them two.

. Jatochem, their two.

. Jomem, them all.

Jatomem, their all.

. Jognom, me.

. Jagnom, mine.

. Jéchhokmi, us two.

. Jémi, our two.

. Jéokokmi, us all.

. Jakokmi, our all.

Dual.

Janachhikmi, selves.

. Jéchhikmi, it.

. Jachbikmi, his.

. Jéchhikmi, them two.

. Jachhikmi, their two.

Jdéchhikmi, them all.

Jacbhikmi, their all,

. Jognochhem, me.

. Jagnochhem, mine.

J édchhok mi, us two.

. Jachhokmi, our two.

. Jdkokmi, us all.

. Jakokmi, our all.

Plural.

. Janchinem, selves.

. Jonen, it.

. Janem, its, his.

. Jonem, them two.

. Janem, their two.

Jonem, them all.

Janem, their all.

. Jognonem, me.

. Jagnonem, mine.

. Jochhokmi, us two.

Jachhokmi, our two,

. Jokokmi, us all.

. Jakokmi, our all,

474,

69 00 NTS Ot HR 09 DD

He eats or will | 10.

eat. | Le

12,

13.

( A

| 8

They two eat J 10

orwilleat. } 11

“) 42

COnAor Why =

They all eat or

will eat. 410.

Vayu Vocabulary.

Singular.

. Janchhem, self,

. Jémi, it.

. Jatum, his, for him,

. Jochhikmi, them two.

. Jatochhem, their two,

. Jomem, them all.

Jatomem, their all.

. J6mi, thee.

. Jdémi, thine.

Jochhikmi, you two.

Jachhikmi, your two.

Jonem, you all.

Jomi, your all.

. Jognom, me.

. Jagnom, mine.

Jochhokmi, excel.

Jochhikmi, incl. 2S "7°

. Jachhokwi-chhikmi, our two.

. Jokokmi-kem, us all.

. Jakokmi-kem, our all.

Dual.

. Janachhikmi, selves.

. Jochhikmi, it, him.

. Jatochhem, his, its.

. dochhikmi, them two.

. Jatochhem, their two.

Jochhikmi, them all.

. Jatomem, their all.

. Jdmi, thee.

. J6mi, thine.

. Jdéchhik, you two.

. Jochhikmi, your two.

. Jonem, you all,

. dJochhikmi, your all,

. Jognochhem, me.

. Jagnochhem, mine.

JS Jochhokmi, excl.

_Jochhikmi, incl.

Jachhokmi-chhikmi, our two.

Jokokmi-kem, us all.

us two.

. Jakokmi-kem, our all.

Plural.

. Janchimem, selves.

. Jomem, it.

. Jatomem, his, its, for him.

Jémem, them two.

. Jatomem, their two.

. Jdmew, them all.

Jatomem, their all.

Jémi, thee.

. Jé6mi, thine.

Jdéchhikmi, you two.

[No. 6.

1857.]

I ate.

We two ate.

(4y

LDH OOONS oR OO DOE

Viyu Vocabulary. 475

. Jatomem, your two.

. Jonem or Jomem, you all.

. Janem or Jatomem, your all.

. Jognomem, me.

. Jagnomem, mine.

{ Jochhokmi, excl.

* | Jochhikmi, incl.

. Jachhokmi-chhikmi, our two,

. Jokokmi-kem, us all.

Tus two.

19, Jakokmi-kem, our all.

Preterite Tense.

Singular.

. Janchhungmi, self, own.

. Jakungmi, it, him.

. Jatungmi, his, for him.

. Jakungchhem, them two.

Jatungchhem, their two, or for them two.

Jakungmem, them all.

Jatungmem, their all, or for them all.

J6num, thee.

. Janum, thine, or for thee.

. Jonochhem, you two.

. Janochhem, your two, or for you two.

. Jénonem, you all,

. Janonem, your all, or for you all.

Dual,

Janachhongmi, excl.

: selves, own.

Janachhingmi, incl. {

Jachhongmi, excl.) thi

Jachhingmi, incl. ¢ ey

nae oe his, for hin.

achingmi, incl.

Jachhongmi, excl.)

Jachhingmi, incl. (

Jachhongmi, excl,

: { Técbhingni, incl.

ie excl.)

* \dJachhingmi, incl.

se epriniiiee excl.

* \Jachhingmi, incl.

. J6mi, thee.

Jachhongmi, thine, for thee.

. Jdéchhem, you two.

. Jachhongmi, your two, or for you two.

Jénem or Jachhongmi, you all.

. Janum or Jachhongmi, your all, or for you all.

2 them two,

their two, or for them two.

them all.

beheir all, or for them all.

176

We all ate.

Oo Ms

16.

ld,

ibe

(18.

Thou at’st or

didst eat.

eS ee

—

PO DAT ore 99 bo

I |

ie)

Ye two ate.

Viyu Vocabulary.

Plural.

Janchhikongmi, excl.

tS ea bhikenen: incl. SelresiOui-

Jakikongmi, excl.

Jakikengmi, incl.

Jatikongmi, excl. ). : :

+ Tansee incl. hits, adder iiaeing

Jakikongmi, excl.

Rabies 4 incl.

Nua excl.

Jatikengmi, incl.

{Jakikongmi, excl,

\Jakikengmi, incl.

Jatikongmi, excl.

Jatikengmi, incl.

it, him.

them two,

t their two, or for them two.

them all.

} their all, or for them al}.

. Jdmi, thee.

. Jakikongmi, thine, or for thee.

Jdéchem or Jakikongmi, you two.

Jatikongmi, your two, for you two.

‘Jdénem, or Jakikongmi, you all.

Janem, or Jatikongmi, your all, for you all.

Singular.

. Janchhem, self, own.

. Jakom, it, him.

Jatum, his, for him.

Jakochhem, them two.

Jatochhem, their two, or for them two.

Jakomem, them all.

Jatomem, their all, or for them all.

. Jdsungmi, me.

Jasungmi, mine, for me,

. Jéchungmi, us two.

. Jachungmi, our two, or for us two.

. Jékikongmi, us all.

. Jakikongmi, our all, for us all.

Dual.

. Janachhem, selves, own.

. Jachhem, it, him.

Jachhem, its, his.

Jachhem, them two.

. Jachher, their two, for them two.

. Jachhem, them all.

Jachhem, their all, for them all. .

. Jdsungchhem, me,

. Jasungchhem, mine, for me.

. Jéchhungmi, us two.

. Jachhungmi, our two, for us two.

. Jokikongmi, us all.

: Jakikongmi, our all, for us all.

[ No. 6.

1857. ]

Vayu Vocabulary. 477

Plural.

( 1. Janchinem, selves, own,

|»

Neallate. < 7.

==)

OOM TRO

They ate.

m oO

ell eel oie

(0 os OPS

—

COnOO FR DH

They two ate. 4 ae:

2. Janem, it, him,

3. Janem, his, its.

Janem, them two.

. Janem, their two, for them two,

. Janem, them all.

Janem, their all, for them all.

. Jésungnem, me.

. Jasungnem, mine, for me.

. Jochhongmi, us two,

. Jachhongmi, our two, for us two.

. Jokikongmi, us all,

. Jakikongmi, our all, for us all.

Singular.

. Janchhem, self, own.

Jakum, it, him.

. Jatum, his, for him.

Jakochhem, them two.

. Jatochhem, their two, for them two.

Jakomem, them all.

. Jatomem, their all, for them all.

. Josungmi, me.

Jasungmi, mine, for me.

Jéchhongmi, excl.

Jéchhingmi, incl.

Jachhongmi, excl.

Jachhingmi, incl.

Jokikongmi, excl.

J 6kikengmi, incl. }

Jakikongmi, excl. \

Jakikengmi, incl.,

us two.

k our two, for us two.

us all.

our all, for us all.

. Jomi, thee.

. Jakum, thine.

. JOchhem, you two.

. Jachhem, your two, for you two.

. Joénem, you all.

. Janem, your all, for you all.

Dual.

. Janachhem, selves, own.

. Jakochhem, it, him.

. Jatochhen, his, its.

Jakochhem, them two.

. Jatochhem, their two, for them two.

. Jakochhem, them all.

. Jatochhem, their all, for them all.

. Josungchhem, me,

. Jdsungchhem, mine.

{ Jochhéngmi, excl.

We ake ais us two.

\Jéchhingmi, incl,

Continued,

478 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

11 Jachhongmi, excl. |

* \Jachhingmi, incl. f

Jékikongmi, excl.

a eee incl. has hs

Continuation,

our two, for us two.

They two ate. ‘ :

13 f Jakikongmi, excl.

* ‘| Jakikengmi, incl.

14, Jomi, thee.

our all, for us all.

Jakum, ¢

; Hien ee

. Jéchhem, you two.

Jachhem, your two, for you two.

. Jonem, you all.

Janem, your all, for you all.

Plural.

Janchimem, selves, own.

Jakomen, it him.

Jatomem, his its.

Jakomem, them two.

Jatomem, their two, for them two,

Jakomem, them all.

Jatomem, their all, for them ail.

Josungmem, me.

Jasungmem, mine.

Jochhongmi, excl.

Jochhingmi, incl. _

They all ate. 4 11, J Jachhongmi, excl.

* | Jachhingmi, incl.

| 12 Jdékikongmi, excl.

* | Jokikengmi, incl.

eee

CONTIGS O1

lam

a = : Al

—

SPEIRS eNE

us two.

our two, for us two.

us all,

Jakikongmi, excl.

13. Jakikengmi, Caen } our all, for us all.

14. Jémi, thee.

15. Jakum, Jakomem, thine,

16, Jéchhem, you two.

17. Jachhem, your two, for you two.

18. Jénem, you all.

19. Jénem, your all, for you all.

Remark.—The whole of the above forms will by and by, be seen to exist dis-

tinctly in the Bahing dialect of Kiranti, and nearly all in the Bontéwa and Khaling

dialects. In Vayu the principle is the same and many of the forms exist ; wherefore

we must conclude that the others have been lost; or shall we say that the process

of development was staid in mid course? ‘The more anomalies, the more instruc.

tion, and it is necessary to put so new and peculiar a matter in several lights in

order to judge of it truly. So that instead of apologising for the above almost

interminable details, I shall proceed to subjoin a comparison of Vayu and Quichna,

the latter from Markham ut supra, cit.

Quichna. Vayu.

I, I—thee.

S. I love thee, Munaiki. Chhanum.

feria: Chhanochhem, D.

P. TI love you, Munaikichik. Cretan! P.

S. I loved thee, Munarkaiki. Chhanum.

P. T loved you, Munarkikichik Cece

: Chhanonem, P,

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 479

II. He—thee.

S. He loves thee, Munasunki. Chhanmi.

P. He loves you, Munasunkichik ebkancubieey, Ds

: ia ; Chhanem, P.

S. He loved thee, Munasukanki. Chhanmi.

a aR J Chhanchhem, D,

P. He loved you, Munasukankichik. Vehionem P,

III. Thou—me.

S. Thou lovest me, Munahuanki. Chhangnom.

P. Thou lovest us, Munabuankichik, Ona hah =

Chhankokmi, P.

S. Thou loved’st me, Munahuarkanki. ; Cohansungmi.

A nit Obs Chhanchhonemi, D.

P. Thou loved’st us, Munahuarkankichik. HE WALatetis P.

IV. He—me.

S. He loves me, Munahuanmi. Chhangnom.

Chhanchhokmi, excl. D

f Chhanchhikmi, incl.

P. He loves us, Munahuanchik. : ie

Chhankokmi, excl. Pp

Chhankem, incl, :

S. He loved me, Munahuarka, Chhansungmi.

Chhanchhongmi, excl. Up

eared is Munahuarkanchik. Chhanchhingmi, incl, f°

: ved | Munahuarkaiku. Chhankikongmi, excl. |p

Chhankikengmi, incl. ;

Remark.—Chhan to love in Vayu = Muna in Quichna, is not a good word for

comparison because of its being of the aoristic class of transitives in “to.” Ina

tensed verb the resemblance to Quichna would have been more apparent. On the

other hand, I have given the Vayu dual as well as plural, because its dual form-

ative or chhik is almost identical with the Quichna plural sign or chik, whilst the

plural one differs, and nothing is more certain than that these signs are apt to

mingle and the dual to fall out of use.

By referring to the above diagram of the verb ja, to eat, it will be seen that the

Vayu has many other forms expressly representative of the agent and object and

therefore more significant than some of those here collated with the Quichna forms.

In Vayu the only forms which in the present state of the language refuse entirely

to mix in the stream of conjugation are those which express the action passing

from me to thee and no other. One cannot help imagining a system of conju-

gation with suffixed pronouns thus—

Ha, to give. To, to strike.

Singular. Plural, Singular, Plural.

: JS Hakem. j JS To’pem,

]1. Hagnom. WEarteibe 1. To’mum. Br ceny.

2, Hanum. Hanem, 2. Topnum. Topnem.

3 Hat J Hamem. 3. To fTo’mem.

° kmacahaml Hatem. i ei LTo’pem.

But the following explanations of the senses of the leading series of these forms

which is real (the subordinate is wholly hypothetical) will show how utterly such

a notion would mislead.

3P2

480 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

1 J Hagnom, gives to me thou or he any single person.

* | Hakem, gives to us any one in all numbers.

1 y'To’mum, beats me thou or he any one in singular number.

‘| To’pem, beats us any one in all numbers.

9 Hanum, gives to thee I only, Hami, for any other giver.

* | Hanem, gives to you all any save I. Hanonem, for me as the giver.

9 fTopnum, beats thee I only. To’mi, for any other beater or beaters.

* ‘| Topnem, beat you all, any save I, in all numbers.

Hatum, gives to him thou or he or any single person except me. Hatungmi,

| for me.

3./ Hamem. No such word.

Hatomem, gives to them any person or persons except me: Hatungmen,

for me.

{To’pum eke him any single person but me. Topungmi, for me.

3. < ’ \strikes him, the present tense is to’mi.

| To’'mem, strikes them all any person whatever.

Hato, to give, being aoristic hatum, is equally present and preterite. But top,

to strike, has for the present tomi, which moreover serves for all 3 persons alike in

the singular number.

Thus it appears that num and nem alone offer the appearance of uniformly

inflected personal suffixes, and that even in regard to these, the singular and plural

Senses are diametrically opposite. ;

But there are other complications resulting from the plurality of agents or of

patients which account at once for the specialities of the above explanations and

of those which follow. Thus—

1. Hagnom, gives to me any single person.

2. Hagnochhem, give to me any two persons.

3. Hagnonem, give to me ye all only.

4, Hagnomem, give to me they all only.

In the preterite hasting takes the place of hagndm ; and with the verb top’, to

beat, we have only the euphonic change of gnom to mum, the residue being alike

for both verbs; thus we have—

Present. Preterite.

1. To’mum. 1. Topsungmi.

2. To’mochhem. 2. Topsungchhem,

3. To’monem. 3. Topsungnem,

4. To’momem. 4. Topsungmem,

If to the above crowding of agents and patients round the action, we add the

fact that the distinction of activity and passivity in the action itself is almost lost

at the very corner stone of the whole structure of conjugation—because the sign

of action kat’? hexokin, viz., its having an object, is precisely that which denotes

at once the transitive verb and the passive voice; e. g. ha-to, give to him;

ha-tu-m, he is given and he gives—we shall at the same time perceive how difficult

it is to make these languages conform to our notions of conjugation (see and

compare Tickell and Philipps, voce Sontal) and shall also be prepared to hear that

a system at once so complex and so.incomplete has been very generally cast aside

either wholly (Newari, Lepcha, Bodpa, Malayalim, Burmah, Malay); or in part

(other Dravirian, Dhimali, Namsangnaga, &c.); and in this or that particular

mode, one group of tongues rejecting the dual (Dravirian cultivated) ; another,

the sex signs (Himalayan complex) ;* a third, the whole system of conjunct pro-

* The complex Himalayan tongues are Limbu, Kiranti, Hayu, Kiswar, Sinwar,

Dhimali, Bhramu, Chepang, Kusunda, &c,

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 481

nouns (Himalayan simple* and those above cited) : whilst the attempt to blend with

the action, agents as well as patients and both in the dual and plural numbers, has

been maintained only by Kiranti and some oceanic tongues, the Vayu, Sontal, &c.,

being now restricted to a duality and plurality on one side only, viz. that of the

agents or that of the objects. The Vayu can express (like the Sontal) several

agents and one patient ; or several patients and one agent; but not a plurality of

both. The Kiranti can express a plurality of both. But neither one nor the other

has effected the same sort and degree of amalgamation of its conjunct pronouns in

the case of its nouns as well as verbs, as the Himalayan Kuswar and the Ugro-

finnic tongues generally have done, which all alike have perfectly blended suffixes

for both; whilst the Kiranti with an equal fusion in both cases prefers the method

of prefix for the nouns,} and the Vayu, following the same Dravirian order of

arrangement has not reached the same completeness of development in ¢his respect

(therein further agreeing with Dravirian) though more in others. It has a perfectly

Separate set of possessives for combination (Ang, ing, 4 vel i); but to the noun

has got blended inseparably the 3rd of these (ang-upa, ung-upa, a-upa or wathim

u-pa) and thus a euphonic combination of the whole with the nominal root has

been prevented, as in Bodo which, however, as well as Vayu, can and occasionally

does, use as perfectly fused{ prefix forms as the Kiranti, and sometimes both the

disjunct and conjunct prefixually, and Dhimali likewise. From the verb Bodo

like Malayalim and several Nilgiri tongues, has dropt the pronoun: Diméali, like

Tamil, Uraon and Male, has kept it: in Vayu, as in Sontal and Ho, the pheno-

mena are complex,

I refer to the head of pronoun for some more remarks on this subject. In the

meanwhile and in conclusion of the topic of Vayu conjugation T beg to suggest

attention to the following collation of actives and passives of the several types, in

the 3rd persons of the present (or future) and preterite,

* The simple or nonpronominalized are Newari, Marmi, Girung, Magar, Khas

(mixed), Lep’cha, Palusen or Syar’pa (Serpa), Bodo, &c.

Compare Sontal and Kuswar.

, apu-ing dal-eng aing. Baba-im. Thatha-im-ik-an,

Whorewith apa-m : dal-me-am. Baba-ir. Thatha-ir-ik-an.

apa-t dal-e ai. Baba-ik. Thatha-ik-an.

T a-pa, my tib-a, T

i-po, thy father. tib-i, thou strike.

a-po, his tib-a, he

t Bodo. Vayu. Dhimali. Its verb.

a-pha. am-pa. ka-pa. Dengkhi-ka,

na-pha, um-pa. na-pa. Dengkhi-na.

bi-pha. a-pa. wa-pa. Dengkhi.

§ The full pronominal forms with the noun are—

angni apha. ang upa. kang apa kang ka-pa.

or 4 nang na-pa,. ] Which last

nangmi apha. ung upa. nang apa

bini-apha or wathim upa. oko apa eko wa-pa. quite agrees

nangni napha. with Kuki,

bini bipha.

———

[ No. 6.

Pdyu Vocabulary.

‘munysuig '¢

‘uNnySUg “E

‘NIV *¢

sa, 2

‘andwoy °¢

‘undwoy “¢

‘und om ‘¢

"cand 0A,

"WINnIYSIS *¢

‘unjwwmax ¢

"wnyWwak *¢

‘Bunwusudsutg

“SunWSULg

‘sunusuideg

sunweg

*Sunusuidwo py

*(Sunwmmoy) sunwoy

“sunvasuiddo jy

*(Sunvido jy) Suna .o Ay

“sunwsuldys

*SUNWIIG

‘sundsuidwa x

*(Sunm wad) sunvi x

“‘Sueysuidsurg “eysuidsulg *raSurdsutg

“guvysulg *eysuld ‘1ADUI

‘Suvysuideg "yy surdeg "rasuideg

“suvyed "29d "1A9d

“suv suid mopyT *eysuld wo *1ASUId WO Fy

‘Suejwoy “By WO *1AUD Fy

‘Sueysuiddo *eyouiddo srasutddo A

*duvjdo A “eydo A "1A OM i

suejsuldyis *eysuldyig “IASUIAIIG

"SUBIYSIG "eI4S19 TAI

‘Sueysuidua x *eisuidme x *raSuiduns X

*duezwo X "eyo "1at9

‘eaoge ayy JO sop diorqaeg pug SOAIPUYUT

"1UsUIg “Z MteDne st "T “wusald ae ‘TWSOIg ‘Z%

‘TUNySUlg “Z ‘tasunysud ‘T ‘msg ‘¢ “ISU °Z

‘puas 0} ‘oySulg ‘eseu e fq papovaid ,oy,, Ul SoAtjIsuBIT,

"IUOT °G "iuIsuNsOg *T "IWOd “€ "IMO T °S

mune “S ‘yasunyeg *T "med “€ "1MWOT

op 0} ‘oye ,,{O 5, UL SAAIjISUBAT,

‘IWUOH ‘ZS ‘IUISUNSWO FL ‘T "1UUO0FT °¢ ee oe

‘mndmoy °%

‘9388} 03 SodwoA,

“IU OM °S

‘und OM °%

“LUG °

"MUNJYSIS °SY

‘Tg °G

‘UINJWI °S

qwsundwoy ‘T

‘rusunsd OM *T

“1wSund OM ‘T

"s00Ys 03 ‘odo ,,{0d ,, Ul Saatjisuedy,

‘IWUSUNSSIG *T

2S ‘T

"yw Hf

smog © ‘7 “119

*jesvu @ fq popadoid od ,, Ul Saatyisue.y,

lec

*T[E] 07 ‘orysig ‘queyiqis Aq papaooid ..0},, Ul SOAI}ISURAT,

"1wUSUNSWIX *T

“wWsUNnyWeX ‘T

"asua} agldajatlg

‘a.nd 0} fo}WIA A

‘IGNA\ AVIQNNIG NI S@OIOA LO NOLLVITOD

“TUTLOM °§ “TLOM °G

“TUOM °§ “1H OM G

“IMIS “SE TUOIS 6

‘IWS “gS “LUIS °Z

‘mnjwWaz “gS Iwo Z

"manzwaK “¢ ‘mUNJWOK °Z

20} 9) UL SAAI}ISUBAT,

“TuUSunjWe x °

‘asuay Juasald

‘moUssUILg ‘T

"1msunssUulg ‘T

“mousog ‘T

"yusueg *T

‘nWuOY *{

“1mUUNSWOFT *f[

‘mun OM “T

bo CAL LT

‘MOUSIS “T

“MWS *T

"muNnmMI *

DAISSPG) .

aanoy f IA

@AISSEg) ,

aaAIsseg).

coe Al

Soke iit

SAIsseg |,

pa It

SAlssed |,

Stab :

aaisseg |,

aaroy f TA

aaisseg |,

aalay f “A

dAISSBG

dAljO V ‘Al

dAIsseg |

aajoy f Ul

aaisseg |

aanoy f il

aalsseg |

aanoy f |

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 483

A Sprcrmen oF THE Va’yu Lanavuace.

Ang ming Péchya nom. Ang thoko Vayu nomi (or Gé Vayu

gnom) Khasakhata Hayu itkem. Ungki davo be Vayu ischikem.

Go jekta dumsungmi. Hatha bong dumsungmi gha ma sengmi.

Lé got kulup chhuyung* wanikhen. Dhankuta mu khakchhing

puchhum chupvikhata pdéguha hata vik pachikokmi. Ang ké ma

nom. Ang tavo Gajraj Thapa nung nomi. Gonha kdphe nakphe

inang munang wathi yengkum. Wathim narung gonha blektum.

Wathim chho le pdkum. Honko 4 thum rami. Captanha thim

hénung hénpingkum. Ang davo lit’nung blining cholo chupsit khen

inhe ¢6 gonha mutpingkum. Davo chinggnak chamchem. Gon

sénche. Ungjita davo gha chitnum. Ang thumbe ithaji némi gonha

walige latpinggnom. Angki théko kdsi blingmu homba imba mus-

chikokmi (our tribe, we). Népal kharal khen Tambakosi bong mus-

chikokmi. Gdokhéta Awal be mutvi mang nokokmi. Kuswar, Botia, |

Dénwar, Awal be mutvi nomem. Awal mu ramsa ha gang khéva

ma muschikokmi. Vik mang pévi, ghadimu chokphi sétung jovi,

kem ma povi thoko Kustinda, Chépang bahamu chhaju puchhibe ma

muschikokmi. Angkimu kem nomi, vik le nomi; pagnamu vik nom,

memha, makai, ddsi, phaphar, boja, levi, rowa, masa, sdkaa, gdhun,

laru livi vik nom. Angki muilung kélube, Héngongwo baha. Lap-

cha, Limbu baha mang jahe, chhaju madimbe adhd pahe, muschi-

kokmi. Chhaju pichhibe bdja ma lichem, jomsitmu ming mische

le ma nom. Hanung bong jomsit lichem minung bong lat’lat’ha

muschikokmi. Ghakhata ha ruklung be rukkokmi, duklung be

dukkokmi. Phalamtt’vi, singchuk’vi, kdchénvi angki thok be m4

nomem. Kampdachyang, bingchopachydng gyétim gdt khen ingchi-

kokmi. Angki kem angki gdt ha pachikokmi. Angki wadschyéng

angki vik sétang rowa khen rdmekhata ha duri chinchingha jéwa

pungmem. Vayukhata khakchhingpuchhum povi (or chupvi) ma

nomem. Mische pa gyéti namsangmu séva md pdmem. Jéwa

Héngongwo got khen rangai pomem. Ldnchokhata dawangmi jéwa

waschimem. Meschokhata rangai pota waschimem Angki mulung

ithijila nomi. Nayung gét kulupha bakulup khen chholup* (or 1é

got kulup) bong miphta chhaju mddtimbe itha dékha hamta némem

* Phrases of numeration. See Vocabulary.

484 Vayu Vocabulary. [No. 6.

(or hamchimem). Angki kem chhdlung singha pota, diha wamta,

hiingling kdha rota, khistiha supta, gége gége pachimem. Kem

bhitari nayung kuna nochhikmi; k6élu, imlung; kolu kho’lung.

Tawokhata, tamikhata gégé té ma hokmi. Bangchodum khen biak

pachikokmi. Nayung got kulup ha ba kulup khen lé got kulup*

bong pénku haha ha rome ingchikokmi. Pénku phen mang wontike

nam rome upu kembe lat’lat’ha, kam papaha, phengkokmi. Mische

ma papaha me’ta singtong kébe khumpopmi. Khdcho, puk, chéli,

béli, méchho, jachikokmi, Gai, bhalu, phoka, ma jékokmi. Singwo-

khidu, diuidu, chalung, jakokmi. Sdve tungchikokmi, bukchhale

tungkokmi (note the 2 forms of the verb). Sdve, angki pota, ching-

enak tungkokmi. Bukchha, gyétim got khen ingta, yanggnak tung-

chikokmi. Angki chhobe ma blekchikokmi. Nokchhung saschi-

kokmi, mescho le, loncho le. Balung khen gyéti suna le ma dak-

kokmi. Angki chélvi Balung. Gyéti suna le ma nom. Vayu

thoko mu singtong sunaha Brahman Lama ma honmi (or honmem,

indefinite). Gyétim lom ma khokchikokmi. Angki vik hakhele ma

watkokmi. Upo met’khen tawokhata ha chhinggnak yanggnak ma

papdha lingmem. Tamikhata ha mische le ma lingmem. Imhamu

dawo dévi angki majhua nomi. Inung wanikhen povi suna le m4

nom. Angki théko gyétim got be lasta, yangta thoko, nati tolgongy

bong yapgmi. Finis.

TRANSLATION,

My name is Pate. Iama Vayu. The Khas tribe call us Hayu,

but our own name is Vayu. Jaman old man. I don’t know how

old, above sixty. Iam a cultivator of land assigned by the Raja to

the soldiers of the Dhunkuta regiment. I have no land of my own.

My son is in the service of Captain Gajraj Thapa. You saw him

here often and drew his portrait and measured him. He thought

that very queer and was a little alarmed. But the Captain reassured

him and he consented. I have been here four months to help you

to learn our language. It is very difficult. You must judge of all.

I can only answer your questions. I hope you will soon let me go

home. Our people dwell in the basin of (or along the course of)

* A phrase of numeration. See Vocabulary.

+ A phrase of measure. See Vocabulary. It is equal two handfuls.

1857. | Vayu Vocabulary. 485

the Kosi river from near the valley of Nepal proper to the Tamba

Kési. We are not Awalias (people inured to malaria or awal).

The Awalias dwell in the valley of the river, and are called Kuswar,

Botia, Dénwar, &. We can’t live there by reason of the malaria.

Nor do we dwell on the hill summits like the Kuisinda and Chépang,

who never cultivate, but live on wild herbs and fruits and never

build houses. We have houses and cultivate the soil, growing maize

and kéddo and buckwheat, and rice, cotton, millets, barley, wheat

and madder. We are fixed cultivators, like the Néwars, not migra-

tory ones like the Lepchas, Limbus and others. We occupy the

central parts of the hill slopes, which we cut into terraces. Rice

won't grow on the tops nor any sort of grain. We go up as high

as grain will grow. We use the plough or the spade, according to

the nature of the site we occupy. We have no craftsmen, smiths,

carpenters or potters—of our own tribe. We buy utensils and

ornaments from others. We build our own houses and our women

spin and weave the home-grown cotton, of which they make our

clothes. None of our race are soldiers, nor do we ever take service

(menial). The Néwars dye for us, if we need it; but the men

wear plain clothes. ‘Those of the women are sometimes dyed. Our

villages are very small, usually fifteen to twenty houses scattered

along the hill sides. Our houses are built of rough timber, plas-

tered and thatched with grass. Tworooms in a house—one for

cooking and the other for sleeping. We have no general dormitory

for all the grown girls, or boys of the village. We marry at matu-

rity, buying our wives. A wife costs fifteen or twenty rupees. If

we have no money we earn her by labour in her father’s house.

We bury our dead without any ceremonies. We do not tattoo our

bodies. Our ears we bore occasionally. We have no priest but the

exorcist, who is also our only physician. None of our tribe follow

the brahmans or lamas. We abide by our own creed and customs.

We eat fowls, pigs, goats, sheep, buffaloes. Not oxen, bears or

monkeys, but honey, milk, eggs. We drink beer and spirits. Much

of the former, as it is home-made; little of the latter, because we

must buy it. Our law of inheritance gives equal shares to all the

boys, and no share to the girls. Our head villager decides our

disputes. We never appeal from him. Our tribe is a broken one

and is reduced to very inconsiderable numbers.

486

Béhing Vocabulary.

| No. 6,

BAntine VocABULARY.

Nouns Substantive.

Air (wind), Ju.

Affection, Dwakcho.

Abuse, Waita. Khicho.

Abode, Bwagdikha.

Adulterer, Ryamnipo.

Adulteress, Ryamnimo.

Agriculturist, Byangsikokba.

Amaranth (grain), gosurani.

Aqueduct, Kalo. Pwalam.

Kh6li michi.

Ancle,

leg joint, :

Arm-all,

Arm, nt eT

Article, thing, Grékso.

Aunt- pat.

ener Momo.

Anger, Sokso.

Ant, Gagachingmo.

Anus, Dyala.

Arrow, Bla.

Ax, Kha.

Alder tree, Barsi.

Bag, Salama

Basket, Bainso.

Barley, No name. Jou is used.

Bamboo, Palam (all). Rikcho (small).

Bark of tree, Singkokte.

Back, Ching.

Back bone, Chinreisyé.

Belly, Koja.

Beast, quadruped, {

Being, animal, Samthiba,

Box, chest, No word.

Bat kind, Pakati.

{ male, Avo pakati.

Bat < female, Amo pakati.

young, Pakati atami,

Birth, No name.

Bird kind, Chikba.

male, Apo chikba.

Bird, female, Amo chikba, °

young, Chikbaatami.

Beer, Gnasi.

Bread, Shéblem,

Birch tree, Phyékulima.

Bed, Bldé’cho.

Bed chamber, Ipdikha.

Bed time, Ipcho béla.

Bee, SyGra (wasp, Yakuwéa )

Lékhdlithiba.

Lékholimigwakba.

Blacksmith, Teupteu’le.

Blood, Husi.

Buttocks, Kédsidyala.

| Battle, fight, Mocho.

Boat, Danga.

Bear, Wam.

Beard, Shé6 song, mouth hair or Yoli

sw6n.* chin hair.

Boar, Apo po.

Body, Ram.

Burden, load, Kiara.

Bone, Reusye.

Breast, Kiachu.

Breastnipple, Neucheu.

Bow, Li. [nima, f.

Bowman, Licha, m. Limicha, or Licha-

Bottom, lowest part, Hayu.

Boy, Tawa.

Buffalo kind, Mésyei.

male, Apo mésyeu.

Bato} femal, Amo mésyeu.

young, Mésyeu atami.

Bull, Bing.

Boundary, Rélu.

Breath, Sam.

Branch of tree. No word.

Lo’ba, younger.

Brother Yawa, elder.

Brotherhood he

Brethren 1 ee

Brother in-law, Chaiwa. Wadyalcha.

male, Apo gai atami.

Calf Pea Amo gai atami.

‘Pa. Dacho.

Grokso (thing).

Pwakuticho grokso (water

to drink vessel).

Cart, No word.

Cat kind, Birma.

male, Apo birma.

Cat 1

Can, cup,

female, Amo birma.

young, Birma atami.

Carpenter, Sing chokba.

Cheek, Chocho.

Chesnut tree, Syéli.

Chin, Yéoli. Yoli.

Childkind, Ta. Gikba. Tawa. Tamitawa.

Crinawal Pie a eee

emale, Tami.

Children, Tadau. ‘Tawatami.

* Séng vel Swon vel Swom.

is Vague.

The broad 6 passes into wa and the final nasal

1857.]

Clay, Phélemkhapi.

Cloth, W2’.

Cotton cloth, Linkhi wa.

Woollen cloth, Unke wa.

Silken cloth, No word,

Clothes, raiment, Wa.

Cloud, Kuksyal.

Colour, Moba,

: unamti ather).

Cold (frigor), ee ee ig )

Companion, Warcha.

Claw, nail, talon, Gyang.

Cane (calamus), Gari.

Cousin ee

Mat.

Cow, Gai, H. Amo bing.

Cough, Shetikhé.

Copper, No name.

Cowberd, Gai theulba.

Cotton, uncleaned, Linkhi.

Cotton, cleaned, Riwa.

Courage, No word.

Crow, Gagakpa.

Daughter, Tami (girl).

Daughter-in-law, Dyalmi.

Dance, Sili.

Day, Namti.

To-day, Ana.

Dust, Dyerbakh4pi (flying earth).

Darkness, Namring.

Desire, wisb, Dwakcho.

Ditch, No name,

Deer, Kisi.

male, Apo kisi.

Deer

female, Amo kisi.

~|® 4 7 ba

young, Kisi atami.

Door, Lapcho,

Disease, illness, No name.

; Guwapsya.

Dispute, *Mocho? Khicho? Infinitives.

Dog kind, Khlicha.+

male, Apo khlicha.

Dog fe, Amo khlicha,

young, Khlicha atami.

Death, No name.

Dream, Gna’mo.

Drink, Tu’mé. Tuchome.

Drunkard, Dukba. Tuba.

Dyer, Ryakba.

Earth—the te

Earth—a little | Khapi.

Ear, Sdmaneu (see nose).

Egg, Di. Badi (Ba = fowl).

Béhing Vocabulary.

i, i i

487

Elephant, No name,

Echo, Thololamstikha.

Enemy, No name.

Ewe, Amo bhéra.

Eye, Michi.

Eyebrow, Kur’mi swon’g,

Eyelash, Michi swon’g.

Elbow, Nyaksi.

Exorcist, Jamcha,

Earthquake, Khrinyam.

Evening, Namtheuba.

Face, Kali.

Feather, Chikbaswong ( = bird-hairf

Feast, acl ;

Festival, { PU

Father, Apo.

Father-in-law, Yeppa.

My father, Apa.

Thy father, Ipo.

His, her, its father, Apo.

Fever, Jusara (ague),

Bair Jyapdikha,

io place.

Fear, Nima. Gnima.

Ferry, Hamba glidikha.

Fire, Mi.

Fire-place, Mimudikha. Bwakal.

Field, arable, Ra. Byangsi.

Finger, Brepcho.

Finger-nail, Gyang. Brepchogyang,

Dwabo dyelkem.

Fellow countryman, | Paso dyel dim-

muryu.

é Dwabo thokkem.

a Adwabo thokkem.

Fish. Gaa.

Flavour, taste, Bro.

Flesh, Syé.

Flint, Chichilung.

Flour, Phél.

Flea, Chukbe.

Fence, Khor.

Floor, Khapi (earth).

Flower, Phung.

Ford, Pwaku hambag ludikha. §

Fly, Shedmo.

Food, Jawame. Jachome. Participles. ||

Fowl kind, Ba.

male, Swaretiiwaba.

Fowl female, Chwongkameuba.

young, Bukballo.

* Khicho, verbal, mcocho practical, dispute.

+ Khicha is Newari. The insertion of a labial is a common trick of these

tonguer. See note on Hayu verbs.

{ Quill is Basyurima.

§ Literally, water (of ) far side issuing place.

\| Jawame, what he eats.

Jachome, what any one eats, an edible substance.

3Q 2

488

Fowl] wild, Sabala ba.

Fowl’s egy, Ba di. [ dyelke,

Foreigner, Wangmedyeldim. Waugme-

Fist, No word.

Forehead, Kipi.

Filth, dirt, Riku.

Foot, Khboli blem.

Form, Moba.

Forest, jungle, Sabala.

Fruit, Sichi.

Frost, Phursa.

Frog, Krékra.

Friend, No name.

Garlic, No name.

Ginger, Petrim.

Girl, Tami.

Glue, cement, Kyapcho.

Kojacha, m.

SO Ge eehae i

Grandfather, Kiki.

Grandmother, Pipi.

Grandson, Chacha.

Granddaughter, Chachanima.

God, A god, no name.

Gold, Syetina.

Goat kind, Swongara, Songara,

male, Apo swongara.

Goat ese Amo swongara,

young, Swongara atami,

Goat herd, Swongara theulba.

Grass, Jim.

Grain, Jama.

Ghee, Butter, Gyawa. (oil.)

Groin, Téchi.

Hand, Gablem.

Handle, Rising.

Spade handle, Rakokchom rising.

Hair, Swoéng.

Hair of head, Cham,

Hair of body, Swong.

Herdsman, Bing.—Mésyeu-theulba.

Heaven, Dwamu, (sky.)

Head, Piya.

Heart, Thim. Theum,

Heat, Hatlo. Hatnam.

Heel, Cheuncheu leu.

Hail, Masi.

Hammer, Thyakchome.

Hammerer, Thyakba.

Hemp, Gra.

Hen, Amo ba.

* Kojachanima a female glutton.

Bihing Vocabulary.

So khyimchanima a house wife.

holder: and so also of all formatives in cha, Koja = belly.

[No. 6.

Hip, Khélimichi.—or Jilamichi.

Hope, No word.

hol ,

Hoof, { Meven pGyakseuled

Hog kind. P6.

male, Apo po.

Hog < female, Amo po.

voung, P6 atami.

Hole, Gwalyum.

Hoe spade, Kokchéme.

Husk, Phira.

Hook peg, Chachome.

Horn, Grong. [horn),

Goat’s horn, Swongara agrong (goat its

Honey, Sytira. Shara.

Horse kind, Ghoéra.

male, Apo ghéra.

Horse female, Amo ghora.

-young, Ghora atami,

House, Khyim.

Khyimcha, m.

Khyimchanima, f.

Home, Bwagdikha,

Hunger, Soli.

Husband, Wancha.

My husband, Wa wancha.

Thy husband, I wancha,

Her husband, A wancha.f

Instrument, | Rapachd.

Implement, { Grokso.

infant Jf Bébacha, m.

> | Bébachanima, f.

Ice, No name.

Intestines, Chisye,

Iron, Syal, syal.

Jaw, Ka’kam.

Joint, Michi.

Juice, Pwa’ku (water).

Knife Be’tho.

? \.Chwarchom.

Knee, Pokchi.

Knot, Khingna, (p. p.)

Kitchen, Kidikha.

King, Ho’po. Hwang.

Lamp, torch, To’si.

Language, speech, Lo.

Lip, Shéo-kokte (mouth leather).

Leaf, Swapho.

Tree’s leaf, Sing swApho.

Leather, Kokte (skin).

Leg-all, Kho’li.

Householder,

See house-

Khyim = house.

+ Wa, Y, A, are the pronominal prefixes of nouns and suffixes of verbs, a

thoroughly Dravirian trait and a fundamental.

Jyul—i I

Here is a sample of the suffixes u the Shia Pe a thot bp or place.

person = ur, wa or Oo.

Jyui—a He.

1857. | Bahing

Leg-true (tibia,) Phdphbdl.

Liar, Limochalba.

Light (lux,) Hathat.

Lightning, Ploksa.

Life, Sam, (breath).

Liver, Ding.

Louse, Tasyar.

Lungs, Syetipored.

Wapachogrokso.

ae eo

Load, Kara.

Dheptecha, m.

Lowlander, Bie: tinticntmedl &

Mat, Tharkimo bidcho.

Maize, Greleuwamo.

Master, Ho’po. Hwang.

Mark, Syancho.

Market, Jyapdikhalédikha.

Mason, Khyimpaba.

Mankind, Maryeu.

male, Wainsa.

Man jem Mincha.

young, Atami,

Maker, doer, Paba.

Madder. Deu.

Mare, Amo ghora,

Marriage, Grochyer.

Mill, hand or water, Khuruwa.

Millet (kangani), Basara,

Millet (kodo), Charja.

Millet (juwar), Binkhuma.

Millet (sama), Sama.

Milk, Neucheu.

Mist, Kuksyal.

Manner, ) ,

Mode, eee”

Monkey (all), Moreu.

Measure, the instrument, Khapcho.

Medicine, No name.

Mind, Theum.

Moon, Taisaba. La.

Month, La.

Morning, Didila.

Music, Tapcho.

Mother, Amo.

My mother, Ama.

Thy mother, Imo.

His, her, its mother, Amo,

Money (copper), Lalajima.

Mountain, Syerte.

Syértecha, m.

Syértechanima, f.

Mountain products, Syértedim.

Muryeu ata.*

Pabba.

Mountaineer,

* Wainsa and Mincha are used substantivally and adjectively.

Vocabulary. 489

Mouth, Shed.

Moustache, Sheoswo6n.

Muschito, Syapyél.

Mouse, Yeu.

Nipple, Netichet (milk).

Noise, Syanda.

Neck, Sheureu (French eu).

Name, Ning.

Night, Téngnachi.

Net, No name.

Needle, Léumje.

Noon (day), Nam-helscho,

Nose, Néu (French eu).

Neighbour, Kwaudaubwakba.

Nostril, Neu’lam (nose—way).

Navel, Sheupum.

Oar, No name,

Oil, Gyawa.

Oak-tree, Sébusarsi.

Odour, smell, Ari. Rf.

Onion, No name.

Ox kind, Bing,

male, Bing.

Ox female, Gai. Amo bing.

young, Gai atami. Bing Atami,

Ordure, Khli. fakhli.

Man’s ordure, Muryukhli or Muryu-

ae Gupsa khli or Gupsa

Tiger’s ordure, 4khii.

Pain, Detikha, H.

Palm of hand, Gublem agwalla.

Penis, Bli. (chiefly).

Place, Dikha (in composition of verbs

Plant, Waba, P.

Pleasure, Gyérsi.

Plough, Jdéchome.

Ploughman, Jéba, P.

Plain, Dyamba.

Plainsman, Llanes m.

Lowlander, { Dyambachanima, f,

Plate dish, Py,

Platter, fi

Parent, Kikba, p.t

Plantain, Gramochi.

Plantain tree, Gramochi sing.

Plantain fruit, Gramochi sichi.

Pine (tree), Tési.

Pepper (black), No name.

Palate, Kékolyam,

Pepper (red), Dukba.

Potter, Khapi yalba,

Peach, Khwdémalchi.

Peach tree, Khwomalchi sing.

Not Atami,

Man’s chiid or human child is Muryuatami = man his child. Better ata or atawo :

See child. Tami is used for the young of all animals.

+ e.g. Ip dikha sleeping-place = bed

t To this answers Gikba child ; or who begets and who is born.

kitchen.

chamber: Kidikha cooking-place =

490

Peach fruit, Khwomalchi sichi.

Price, Thing.

Priest, Nokso.

Poison Ning.

Ram, Apo bhéra.

Rat, Yéu (French eu).

Rain, Rya-wa.

Rains, the, Ryawa namti.

Rib, Chakh yamreusye,

Rice, unhusked, Bira.

Rice, husked, Shéri.

Rice, boiled, Mémara.

River any, Gilo.

Root, Syangri.

Rust, Gari.

Rudder, No word.

Road, Lam.

Rope, Gra.

Roof, Khyimpa.

Rhododendron, T'waksyel.

R, tree, Twoksyel sing.

R, flower, T'woksyel phung.

R. fruit, Twoksyel sichi.

Salt, Yuksi.

Silence, Licho. [digger).

Spade, spud, hoe, Rakékchome(—ground-

Spear, Héchéme.

Shape, form (and colour), Mdba.

Sheep kind, No name. Bhéra used.

Spirits (distilled), Héna.

Spindle, Ranta.

Spinner, Panba.

Skin, Kokte.

Scull, Piya réusye.

Shoe, sandal, Kholidi paschong.

Seed, Wachyar.

Seive, Riyangma.

Sleep, Ip’thi.

Sail of boat, No word.

Sand, No word.

Spittle, Richuka.

Snot, Neukhli = nose-filth,

Silk, No word.

Silver, No word.

Sport, play, Chamcho, (inf.) [Brother.

Sister, elder, Yawa, younger, Loba. see

Sisterhood, Yaba loba bum.

Sister-in-law, Wadyelmi.

Sitting chamber, Bwagdikha.

Spider, Bajeringmo.

Smith, Teupteulé. Teupteucha.

Snake, Basa.

Wali, m.

Bera teeta f.

Soldier, Kyakyamkhusiba.

Buhing Vocabulary.

}

| Summit, top, Gnari.

[No. 6.

Sky, Dwamu.

Son-in-law, Dyalcha,

my Wa—ta.*

thy Y—ta. see child.

his A—ta. \

Shoulder, Balam.

Shoulder-joint, Balam michi.

Shepherd, Bhéra theulba.

Side, Chakhyam, Pum.

Star, Sora.

Son,

Ajuju.

Snow, Phimu.

Summer, Hau-namti = hot or heat day.

Sweat, Gwaulau.

Storm, Gnolojai (= great wind).

Steam, Sam (breath).

Smoke, Kani.

Strength, Sokti.

Song, Swalong.

Sow, Amo po. Khomi.

Sugarcane, Byar.t

Sun, Nam.

Sunshine, Nam,

Sunrise, Namdhapcho.

Sunset, Namwamcho.

Still, Hechopa.

Stone, Lung.

Stomach, Koja.

Shade, shadow, Bala.

Straw, Jim (grass).

Sword, Bétho (knife),

Shield, No name.

Tail, Méri.

Testicie, Kollosichi.

Tiger, Gupsa.

Thigh, Jila.

Thirst Prakudwakcho.

* | Prakudwaktimi,

Thumb, Bombo.

Tooth, Khieu (French eu).

Tobacco, Kuni.

Turmeftic, Byuw’ma.

Toe, Khoélibrepcho.

Toe, great, Kholi bombo.

Toe—nail, Gyang.

Tongue, Lyam.

Time, No name.

To-morrow, Dilla.

Thread, Sale.

Thunder, Buk’bu.

: Kuncha, m.

ey fein. f.

Theft, Kunchaniwa.

Tree, Sing. Dhyaksi.

Tree—bark,Sing kokte. Dhyaksi kokte.

Béla used.

* Wa ta-wo, my son: Wa tami, my daughter: Wata my child, Ta is child =

Sontal and Uraon Da.

But ta is used also for son as sa is child and son in Bur-

mese, which language has also the mi suffix, sami a girl = tami Bahing and Hayu.

+ Sugar is Byar apwaku = juice of cane.

1857. | Bihing Vocabulary. 491

Tribe, Thok. Weaver, Wapaba.

Uncle, Pat. Popo. Water, Pwaku.

Uncle, Mat. Kuku. Water-spring, Pwaku blo.

Urine, Charnfku. Walnut, 4 ee Phoro sing.

Man’s urine, Murynacharniku, eas: fruit, Phoro sichi.

Goat’s urine, Swongara acharniku. Wife, Ming.

Vein, Sagra. Wrist, Gublemmichi.

Vegetable, Cheadle pale. Work, Ru.

Vetch, pea, Kyangyalyangma. Wizard, Krakra.

Village, Dyal. Witch, Krakranima.

Willasce Dyalpau, m. Witchcraft, Krakraniwa.

? | Dyalpaunima, f. Widow, Khlimi.

Victuals, Jachome. Widower, Khliwa.*

Vice, sin, No word. Whore, No name.

Voice, Syanda, (sound). Whoremaster, No name.

Valley, No word. Wealth, Grokso.

Vulva, Twarchi. Wing (bird’s), Baphlem, (ba = fowl).

Wax, Khéye. Witness, Kwoéba. Taba.

Wound, Banam. Year, Tho.

Wool, Bhéda swoén. Yesterday, Sanamti.

Wall, Atha. Antha. Yeast, No name.

Banning ADJECTIVES.

JS Neubat, m. and c. gender.

Good, UNeubanima: f

Bad, Ma neuba. Negative.

Deceitful, ]) Hanba, m. and c.

Cunning, { Hanbanima, f.

* wa, and mi are suffixes of gender. The formative suffix cha is equivalent

to wa, in words like li-cha, a bow man; Kin-cha, a thief, &c. The feminine of wa

is mi; Of cha is micha, as Koja-cha, a glutton; Koja micha, a female glutton; or

it is nima, as Kun-cha, a thief; Kunchanima, a female thief. Pau and pé are also

masculine signs, whereof the former makes its feminine by adding nima; the latter

by changing the po into mo, as dyal-pan, a villager; dyal paunima, a female villa-

ger; ryamni-po, an adulterer, ryamni-mo, an adulteress.

The participial suffix ba, which also makes nouns of the agent, and gives quali-

tives a substantival character, as thyak-ba, a or the hammerer: neu-ba, a or the

good one, is another masculine suffix, which takes nima for its feminine.

But participial nouns in ba are often regarded as of all genders, and when used

adjectivally, as all can be used, they take no sign of gender or number, or case ;

they precede the substantive which they qualify in their crude form, as neuba wain-

Sa, a good man, neuba wainsadau, good men, neuba wainsake, of a good man.

The inherent relative sense of the participles enables them to dispense with any

formative, but if it be specially necessary to express gender, such words when used

as nouns, can take the wa and mi sex signs, and also the signs of number always

supposing that their use is substantival.

Dravidian participles are formed from the gerunds (fide Caldwell) and need a for-

mative to give them the relative and participial sense. Such is not the case with

Kiranti participles, though these when used substantivally often takes the m, me,

formative and always if the participles be of the impersonated kind. See verbs.

Observe that the Vocabulary throughout is so constructed as to be a clue to

grammar as well as to vocables,

+ Participial, like most of the following, See and compare the verbs, Neu to be

good. Neu-gna, neu-ye, neu, I, thou, he, am good, Neu-ba who, or what is good,

all genders; Dual, Neubadausi; Plural, Neu-badau. Neu—itis good. Root of

verb and of noun. So Newari Bhing, which has Ji bhing, Chha bhing, Wo bhing

for 3 persons, and Bhing—hma-gu for major and minor of gender, aud Bhing hma,

nihma and Bhing ping, for dual and plural.

492

Ma hanba. Neg.

Aje. Ajebwakba,

Deukha giba, m. ¢,

Deukha gibanima, f,

. f paba, m. c.

Benevolent, 1 Grane | eats, f.

Paba. m.c.

Pabanima, f.

Tal eae m.

> ¢ Chwanchanima, f.

True, or truth speaking, Aje. Aje bwak-

ba,m.c. Aje bwakbanima, f.

False, or false | Limo. Limo bwakba, m.

speaking, f Limo. bwakbanima, f.

Passionate, | Soksa, bokba, m. ec.

hasty, fSoksa bokbanima, f.

Placid, patient, Soksa ma bokab.

Niba, m. c.

Nibanima, f.

Brave, Ma niba. Neg.

Constant-minded, | Theumjasiba, m,

Unchangeable, { Theumjasibanima, f.

‘Chonnctal’ ¢ Theum méjasiba, Neg.

Wasteful, { Warba, m. c.

profuse. { Warbanima, f.

Kakachyakba, m. n.

Kakachyakvanima, f,

Theum neuba, m. c.

Theum neubanima, f.

Harsh, unkind, Theum maneuba. Neg.

2 Biba, Bisiba, m. c.*

Obedient, Bibanima, Pacem f.

Disobedient, Ma biba. Ma bisiba.

Masculine, Wainsake iW

Feminine, Minchake: pGenitival pau

Mad, idiotic, Atheum ma neuba.

Sane of mind, Atheum neuba,.

Licit, Pachome, m, f. n.

Illicit, Ma pachome.

Bodily, Ramke, Genitival, both of

Mental, Theumke, f these: com. gender.

Soleumi byakba, m. c,

Sdleumi byakbanima, f.

Thirsty, Pwaku dwaktimi byakba.

Aklancho bwakba, m.

Naked, bwakbanima, f.

Clothed, Phisiba, m. c. Phisibanima, f.

Libidinous (man), Ming dwakba, m.

Candid, {

Malicious,

Industrious,

Neg.

Cowardly,

Niggardly,

Kind, gentle,

Hungry,

* Biba is the transitive, bisiba the intransitive forms.

Bahing Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Libidinous (woman), Wainsa dwakba-

nima, f,

Gluttonous, Kojacha, m. Kojamicha, f.

Drunkard, Dhékong- Hit f.

Drunken, Dukba, m. c. Dukbanima, f.

Foul-mouthed, f Khiba, m. ec.

Abusive, LKhibanima, f.

Alive, Blenba, m. c.

Living, | Blenbanima, f.

Dying, Byakchopaba,

Dead, Byakba,t m.c. Byakbanima, f,'

Sickening, , -paba, m. c.

Sick, Richo- pean f.

Sickened, sick, Riba, m. c. Ribanima, f,

Getting well, Swachopaba,

Got well, Swaba, m.c. Swabanima, f.

Healthy, Neuba, m. Neubanima, f.

Made well, Swapang.

Strong, Sokticha, m. Soktimicha, f.

Soktimathiba, m,

Soktimathibanima, f.

Sekti manthim, c.

Sleepy, Myelchopaba, m.

banima, f.

Asleep, Myelba, m.

Waking, Syainscho- {

Weak,

Myelchopa-

Myelbanima, f.

-paba. m. ¢.

-pabanima, f.

; -siba, m. c.

awake, Spans {AS BS

Awakening, Syainsipaba.

Awakened, Syainsipana.

Young, Akachime, | f

Youtstul, Yake,: fon" as

Swolacha, m.

Adult, Swolami or Swolamicha,

Old, aged, Gna-wa, m. Gna-mi, f.

Rimba, m, f. n.

Handsome, < Rimsokpa, m.

Rimsongma, f.

Ma rimba, |

Ugly, + Marimsokba. >Neg.

(Ma rimsongma J

( Laba, com. gen. and m.

¢ Labanima, f.

Dékho laba, m. and n.

Dékho labanima, f.

Gnolo, m. and n.

Gnoélonima, f.

Tall, high,

Short, low,

Great, big,

See verbs.

+ Byakchopaba is literally who makes to die, and so of all similar words: but

the form is doubtful, and in general the participle in ba, which is aoristic is used

in neuter verbs exclusively to express both are senses of dying and dead, sickening

and sick, the preterite particle being regarded as an appendage of trausitives only.

1857.] Bahing Vocabulary. 493

Small, Akachime. Yake.* See young. Married se ee dyumba, m.

Syénetiba, m. and n. (well in Gréchya dyumbanima, f.

Fat, { flesh). Grochya madyumba, m.

Syénetibanima, f. Unmarried, { Grits madyumbani-

Thin, Ryamba, m.andn. Ryambanima, f. ma, f,

Tired, ) Balba, m. and n. aed Chéba, m, Chébanima, f.

Weary, J Balbanima, f. Chochome. n.

Untired, | Ma balba. Machdéba. Ma chdbanima.

fresh, { Ma balbanima, “8. Ma chochome. Neg.

Lame, Sokopa, m.n. Sokopanima, f. New, Aninta, m, f. n.

Exempt,

Lamed, Sokopapana, c. Old, worn out, Amaisam, m. f, n.

Blind ae kwoba, m. n. Theumna (finished).

’ (Ma kwobanima, f. Ready, prepared,, Mingba Uidkeseed as

Blinded, Ma kwobapana. ‘itn ! food).

Deaf Ma Senay ee atu B. Unprepared ms ae

? Jf Ma nimbanima, f. Conac e mingba. ¢ Neg.

> Ma kina.

Fit ie nimbapana, m. n.

?{ Ma nimbanimapana, f. Read ( Rimsiba (adorned), m. c.

eae ( Rimsibanima, f,

Ma rimsiba, m.

cere | Ma rimsibanima, f.

Common, abundant, Tachome, n.

Rare, scarce, Ma tachome. Neg.

Public, apert, patent, Kwochome.

Private, latent, not to be seen, Khleu-

Ma bwakba, m. n.

at ne bwakbanima, f.

Deaf and dumb, { Glatid-wa, m,n.

= idiotic, Glatidwanima, f.

Alone, solitary, { Ree eens,

Warcha thiba, m. n.

ee | Wareha thibanima, f.

chome.

Jdékba. Teuba. Mimba, m.n. Neupaba, caus, pres. part.

: ; : : Successful P

Wise, | Sokbaiina Teubanima. Mim- P ” 2 Neupana, cau. past. part.

banima, f. posperoe Neupachome, c. f. p.

Foolish, Majokba. Mateuba. Ma-

mimba. Neg.

Learned, Parepaba, m. Parepabanima, f,

Ignorant, Ma pare paba.

Rich, Thiba, m. n. Thibanima, f.

Poor, Mathiba,m.n. Ma thibanima, f.

Talkative, Bwakba, m.n. Bwakbanima f.

Silent, Liba bwakba, m. c.f (silent who

remains),

Dirty = black, Kekem, m. f. n.

es Kekempuana, m. c.

peed, Pei autevan. £;

Clean = white, Bubum, m. f. n,

’ Bubumpana, m. c.

Cleansed, ee tea, f.

Ma neupana. Neg.

Unsuccessful, } y47¢ neeeaehaien|

Saleable, Léchome, p. f.

Sold, Lena, p. p.

Purchaseable, Jyapchome, p. f.

Purchased, Jyamna, p. p.

Similar, Deuba, m. n.

Resembling, | Deubanima, f.

Dissimilar, Ma deuba. Ma deubanima.

Myemme or i (that very

Myemgno, one) m, f. n.

Other, different, Kwagname. Wangme,

m. f. n.

Easy, doable, Pachome, p. f.

Unprosperous, ; Ma neupaba. |

The same,

* These two words are samples of adjectives proper. Such are very rare in this

tongue wherein the qualifying words are mostly participles, usable too substanti-

vally, like those formed by the affixes, cha and wa. This is another Dravidian trait ;

and the rarity of proper adverbs and prepositions, and the use of gerunds in lieu

of the one and of nouns in lieu of the other, (see Adverbs and Prepositions) are

two more such traits, to be added to those elsewhere set down.

+ I, thou, he, am alone, is Wa gicha bwa-gna, Ygicha bwangé, Agicha bwa =

my, thy, his loneliness,

{ The root bwa, to be (sit) and to speak, can hardly be distinguished in the

participles.

3 R

494:

Difficult, not doable, Ma pachome.

Phasiba,* p. n.

Phaschopaba, p. n. (about

to change).

2 Phasiba (self.)

? § Phana (other, tr.)

About to be changed, Phachome,

Caused to be changed, Phasipana, c. ref.

Phapana, c. tr.

Changeful,

Changeable, |

Changed

Ma bulsiba, n,

Ma hulba, tr.

Ma limsiba, n.

Ma lipba, tr.

Hulsiba, n.

Hulna, tr.

Limsiba, n.

Limna, tr.

About to be disordered, Lipchome.

Having, possessing, tenens, Thiba, m.c.

Thibanima, f.

Not having, { Ma thiba, m. c.

Orderly, set in order,

Disordered,

Disorderly,

Wanting, Ma thibanima, f,

Ornamented, Ey i

Rimsiba, refi.

Adorned, R; 3

impana, tr.

Ma rimba.

Plain, {ws rimsiba.

Ma rimpana,

Useful, Sichome, p. f. tr.

Useless, Ma sichome, Neg.

Quick-moving, active, Grukba, m. ec.

Grukbanima, f.

Slow moving, lazy, inert, Ma grukba,

Neg.

Wholesome, eatable, Jachome.

Unwholesome, Majachome.

Manufactured, wrought, Pana.

Mauufacturable, Pachome,

Sharp, Héba, n. p.

Sharpened, Hepana, tr. p.

Blunt, Ma héba.

Bluntened, Ma hépana.

Grinded, Khrina.

Grindable, Khrichome.

Spun, Panna.

Woven, Pana.

Platted, Pana.

Spacious, wide, ample, Bhyappa.

Contracted, narrow, Ma bhyappa.

Moving, capable of self-motion, Dukba,t

n. part. m.f.n. Dukbanima, f,

* Be changed is phaso = change thyself.

Bihing Vocabulary.

[ No. 6.

Moveable, capable of being moved, Duk-

chome, tr. p. f.

Motionless, Ma dukba, m. n.

Immoveable, Ma dukchome, tr.

Moved,f self, Dukba.

Moved, other, Dungna.

Caused to be moved, Dungpana.

Figured, self, Ram dyumba,

Figured, other, Ram dyumpana.

Figureable, Ramdyum pachome.

Unfigureable, Ramdyum ma pachome,

Luminous, shining, Chyarba (self,) n.

Self-illumed, Chyarsiba, refl.

Illumed by other, Chyarpana.

Illuminable, Chyarpachome.

Dark, Namrikba.

Darkened, Namringpana.

Flaming, burning self, Hoba (fire and

candle),

Kindled,

Inflamed.

Made to flame,

Kindleable,

Inflamable,

Burning, in process of being consumed

by fire, Deupba.

Burnt, consumed by fire, Deumpana.

Consumable by fire, Deumpachome.

Extinguishing (self) going out, Byakba.

Extinguished by another, Byangpana.

The upper, superior, Hateungme, m. f. n.

The lower, inferior, Hayungme.}

Right, Jumrolame,

Left, Perolame.

Central, Alimbudime.

Kastern, Namdhapdikhalame.

Western, Namwamdikhalame.

Northern, Hateulame.

Southern, Hayulame.

Passable,

Moceusiblhe } Gwakchome.

Impassable, Magwakchome.

Cultivated field, Jona.

Culturable, Jochome.

Uncultivated, Ma jdna.

Uncultivable, Ma jéchome.

Fruitful, rich (soil), Neuba (good).

Barren, sterile, Ma neuba.

Sandy, No word.

Clayey, Phélépheleme.

Calcarious, Chunnungme,

Hopana.

\ Hopachome.

Change it is phato. The former

gives for participles phasiba and phaschopaba = what changes or is about to

change ; and the latter, phaba, the changer, and phana, the changed.

+ The participle of Neuter verbs is single and aoristic, Dukba, is changing and

changed, et sic de ceteris. iy

Hateu, top, above: hayu, below, bottom.

1857.]

Saline, Yuksinuneme.

Muddy, Kyelchome.

Dusty, Byerbakhapinungme.

Brackish (water), Yuksinungme.

prt, {Become

Sweet, Broba.

Flowing, Gwakba.

Still, Ma gwakba.

Deep, Gleumba.

Shallow, Ma gleumba.

Jukhitame.

Jtinam.*

Windy, stormy (weather), | Battie

Fine, fair, Neuba.

Junamme.

Cold, je byangme,

Jukhitame.

Haulomi.

Hot, | Heston byangme.

Haulau dyumme.

Sunshiny, Namneume.

Cloudy, Koksyalbwalme.

‘Rainy, Ryawayume.

Cold (water), Chikba.

Gleugleum, conj.

air), Tc aera ‘iis}.

Moist, sappy green (wood), Apwaku-

nungme.

Juicy (fruit), Apwakunungme,

Juiceless, sapless, Apwakumanthime.

Wooden, Singke.

Woody, timber bearing, | Singdhyaksi-

Wooded, bwagdikha,

Stony, made of stone, Lungke.

Stony, stone bearing (place), Lung bwag-

dikha.

Iron, made of iron, Syelke.

Iron-producing, Syelgiba.

Leathern, made of leather, Kwoksyeuke,

Kokseke.

Skin-bearing (animal), Kwoksyeu thiba.

Kokse thiba.

nee clothes, &c.

Wooded (country), 1

Open, Aklauchom, (naked).

Jungly, Sabala dyumme.

Moba.

Sheuba.

Sabala bwakba.

Béhing Vocabulary.

Sabala bwakdikha.

; Ryangsiba, self.

Coloured, ae by other.

Caused to be coloured, Ryangpana.

Bubum (white),

Colourless, jas ryangna.

Ma ryangsiba,

Colourable, Ryakchome.

Red, Lalam.t

White, Bubum,

Black, Kyakyam.

Blue, No name.

Green, Gigim.

Yellow, Womwome.

Sweet, Jijim.

Sour, Jeujeum.

Bitter, Kaba.

Ripe, Jiba,

Ripened, Jiba, n. (self).

(other).

Raw, Achekhli.

That is raw, Achekhli bwakba.

That is made raw, Achekhli pana.

Rotten, (flesh, fruit, &c.) Jyipba.

Rotten (wood, &c.) Chyamba.

Coarse,

Fine,

Rough, Khwarbekhwarbem.

Smooth, Phélephélem.

Polished, Phélephélem.

Unpolished, Ma phélephélem.

Straight, Dyomba.

Gukba.

Crooked, { Gungepung or

Gung-gungme.

Full, Dyamba.

Filled, Dyampana.

Empty, Ashéti.

Emptied, Ashétipana.

Solid, Dyamba,

Hollow, Ashéti.

Heavy, Hyalba.

Light (levis), Hamba.

Great, Gnolo.

Small, Yake.

Long, Jhetba.

Short, Ma jhedba,

Wide, Bhyakba,

Narrow, Ma bhyakba.

High, Laba.

Jipana tr,

No words.

* Wind and windy, and cloud and cloudy, &c. are confounded usually : like ‘* cold”

in English which is both substantive and adjective.

7 Lalam adjectival.

and lal, lal wala or red and the red one.

The affixes jokpa (m) and jongma (f) are oftea substituted for me

Gigimmo, &c.

So also heat and hot,

Lalamme substantival = Newari, Hyawun and Hyawintgu

So Bubum and Bubumme Gigim aud

in reference to colour kyakyajokpa, the black.

o B 2

496

Low, Ma laba. Dekholaba.

Angular, Kona-bwakba.

Round, Khirkhirme.

Spherical, Pulpulme.

Pointed, Jeujeume.

Unpointed, Ma jeujeume.

Edged, Hé’ba.

Unedged, Ma hé’ba.

Broken, ) round

Burst, ; things, Bukba, Pwongna.

Broken (long things), Jikba.

Torn (cloth, &c.), Jiba,* n. China, tr.

Split (wood), Yésiba, int. Yéna, tr.

Intire, by negative prefix to allthe above.

Porous, Chapba,

Imporus, Ma chapba.

Open, Hongsiba.

Opened, Hongna.

Opening, about to open, Hongschopaba.

Shut, Tyangsiba.

Shutted, Tyangoa.

Shutting, about to shut, Tyangschopaba.

Spread, Hamsiba, n. Hamna, tr.

Folded, Plemsiba, n. Plemna, tr.

Expanded, blown (flower), Boba.

Caused to blow, Bopana. [paba,

Expanding, about to expand, Boscho-

Closed, shut = not expanded, Ma boba.

Tight, Khimsiba, n.

Tightened, Khimna, tr.

Loose, Thyelvim.

Loosened, Thyelvim pana.

Unsteady, loose, Ma jasiba.

Shaking, M4 jana.

Fixed, firm, Jasiba, n.

Cooked, Kina.

Boiled, Pwakumikina.

Roasted, Gryamna,

Grilled, Cheuna.

Hairy, Swon thiba.

Hairless, Swon ma thiba or Swon manthi.

Feathered, Swon thiba. {manthi,

Unfeathered, Swon ma thiba or Swon

Rising or risen (sun), Dhapba.

Sitting or set (sun), Wamba.

Issuing, coming out or come out (being)

Gluba.

Entering or entered (being) Woba.

Jingna.

Jana, tr.

Bihing Vocabulary.

[ No. 6.

Falling (being) Dokba, n.

Fallen, Dokba, n.

About to fall, Dokchopaba.

Falling (thing), U’ba.

Fallen (thing), Uba. |

Rising (being) Rapba. [bwakba.

Remaining, risen or standing, Rapso-

Risen or stood, Rapba. Rapso bwakba.

Raising, Rampaba,

Raised, Ramna, tr. Rampana, caus.

Putting down (man), Jyeulba.

Put down (things), Jyeulna. -

Sitting, Bwakba. Nisiba.

Seating, Bwang paba. Ni paba.

Seated, Bwapana. Nina.

Lying down, Glesiba, Ipba.

Laid down, Paiie pba:

esipana [mpana, tr.

Waking, Syainsiba.

Waked, Syainsiba.

Awakening, Syainsipaba.

Awakened, Syainsipana.

Sleepy, Myelcho dwakba,

Asleep, Myelba.

Sleeping, Myelba.

About to sleep, Myelchopaba.

Domestic, home made, Dwabodyel dim.

Foreign or foreign made, Wangmedyel

dim.

Rustic, Dyelpo, m. f.

Loving,

Desirous, (being)

Desiring,

Loveable

Desirable, ¢Dwakchome,

Written, Ryangna.

Read, Parepana.

Eaten, Jana.

Drank, Tana (pausing accent).

Payable, Chochome.

Paid, Choona (pausing accent).

Well odoured, Arineubame.f

Stinking, Arimaneubame.

Having odour (thing) or Nideiee

smelling (man), ; f

Belonging to a oe all Leuchake, m.

tan or native of ee

Tibet, Leuchanimake, f.

Dwakba, m.

Dwakbanima, f.

* Bukba, Jikba, as participles of neuter verbs which are aoristic, wear the form

of present participles and as adjectives mean breaking as well as broken, &c.

+ Me, m. affix, is a formative of all 3 genders —hma, gu of Newari, save that

these are major and minor of gender.

Mé like hma, gu, attaches to all qualitives

used substantively superadded to the gender sign as, gna-wa, gwa-mi = old (man

and woman) whence gnawame, gnamime= the old ones, male and female. So

swalo-cha-mi = mature, male and female, whence swalochame, swalomime.

1857.]

Tibetan, or produced | Leuchadyeldim.

in Tibet (thing), f Leuchadyelke.*

Nepalese, native of Nepal, No name.

Belonging to a high-

lander or native of

Hills,

: z Syertedim or

Highland thing, ) cyertedyeldim,

Of person of the | Dheptechake, m.

plains, Dheptechanimake, f.

Produce of plains, Dheptedim.

European (per- f Bubum-ramcha, m.

Syértichake, m.

Syértenimake, f.

son), Bubum-ramchanima. f.

European (goods), Bubum-ramthiba

dyeldim.

Woollen, made of wool, Unke.

Wooly, wool-bearing, Unthiba.

Hairy, made of hair, Swonke.

Hairy, (bair-bearing), Swonthiba.

Iron, made of iron, Syalke.

Golden, Syeunake.

Silver, made of silver, Chandike.

Wooden, made of wood, Singke.

Woody, full of trees, (place), Dhyaksi-

bwagdikha. [dikha.

Jungley, full of jungle, Sabéla bwag-

Kye-having (being), Michi thiba.

Foot-having (being), Kholi thiba.

Wealthy (being), Grokso thiba.

Wealthy (place), Grokso-bwagdikha.

Grain-having (man), Bara thiba.

Grain-producing (field), Bara neudikha,

Grain-abounding (place), Bara bwag-

dikha.}

CoMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES.

Great, Gnolo.

As great as this, Yam khwome gnolo,

Greater than this, Yam ding gnolo.

Greatest of all, Haupe ding gnolo.

Very great, Thé gnolo.

Small, Kachim. Ak4chim.

Small as this, Yam khomekachim.

Smaller than this, Yamding kachim,

Smallest of all, Haupe dingkachim.

Very small, Thé kachim,

Cold, Chikba.

Colder, Yam ding chikba.

Coldest, Haupe ding chikba.

Very cold, Thé chikba.

Hot, Gleuba,

* Ke is the general sign of relation when one substantive only is used.

Béhing Vocabulary.

497

Hotter, Yam ding gleuba.

Hottest, Haupe ding gleuba.

Very hot, Thé gleuba.

NUMERALS.

Cardinals.

1, Kwong.

2, Niksi.

3, Sam.

4, Lé.

5, Gno.

6, Rukba.

7, Channi.

8, Ya.

9, Ghia.

10, Kwaddyum.

11, Kwaddyum kwong,

= ten (and) one,

de. tee niksi.

13, is sam,

De a 1é,

15 &e. ,, Gno6.

20, Asim, {Kwong 4sim,

=a score, |—one score.

21, Asim

kwong, { Kwong asim,

=a score(and) one.) one score =

laewone and one.

22, Asim nikst. Kwongasim niksi,

30, Kwong asim, kwong 4phlo,

= one score, one its half,

31, Kwong asim, kwong aphlo kwong,

= one score, one half (and) one.

32, Kwong asim, kwong 4phlo niksi,

= one _ score, and one half and two.

40, Niksi Asim, = two score.

41, Niksi asim kwong,

42, Niksi asim niksi,,

50, Niksi asim aphlo = two score (and)

its half,

51, Niksi asim aphlo kwong.

52, Niksi asim aphlo niksi.

60, Sam 4sim.

70, Sam asim aphlo, = three score (and)

a half,

80, Le asim.

90, Lé Asim Aphlo.

100. Gné asim, = five score.

101, Gno asim kwong.

102, Gno asim niksi, = five score (and)

two. é

Ordinals. None,

When

two are expressed, the second takes the 4 prefix (his, her, its) unless the relation be

local and then dim (diem = in of) is used instead of the 4; e. g. hand of man,

Muryu 4 gu.

Rice of bazar, bazar dim shéri.

+ Bwagdikha =the place where is: diklia useable only with a verb: bwag from

bwako, esse in loco.

498

ADVERBIALS.

Once, Kwabala.

Twice, Nip pala.

Thrice, Sap pala.

Four times, Lep pala.

Five times, Gno pala.

Six times, Ra pala.

Seven times, Cha pala.

Eight times, Ya pala.

Nine times, Ghu pala.

Ten times, Kwaddyum pala.

Firstly, f Wanting, save as they coin-

Secondly, cide with the last.

NUMERAL ADJUNOTS.

They are doubtfully ascribable to this

tongue, or falling so fast out of use, that

what remains is a mere fragment. I

shall illustrate by comparison with Ne.

wari in which these generic signs are

undoubtedly normal and in full use. Ba-

hing, like Newari, has no division cor-

responding to the fully developed gender,

m. f. n. It has not even, as Newari

has, a division correspondent to the logi-

cal gender, or beings and things, which

is equivalent to the major and minor of

gender in the plural of Dravirian nouns

and verbs also.

English. Newari, Bahing.

Beings Hma sn

Things Ga } Le

Rationals — —

Brutes — ae

Vegetalia | , Me

Plants } Mas an

Timber trees /Sima, cing

Soft trees or | : afl bya he

grasses f ue. u ooo

Logs ‘Ka pte

Weapons \pv ui

peat ee L —

Pairs Jt a

Flowers Phé Li

Fruits Go Bwom

String of ,

ee Tya. Ths} Chyarchyar

Heap of things |Dén. Pacha |Khumna

Herd of pel Bathane: «

mals

Days Nhu. |Kha

In the use of these signs first comes

the numeral, then the sign, and then the

thing or being specified, e. g. Newari,

China ma si ma, Bahing, Kwong sing

one (timber) tree.

apum

Bihing Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Chha ma singhali ma, N.; Kwo 4pam

Séli apim, B, = one chesnut tree.

Sw6 nhu nhi N; Sam kha namti, B,

= three days. Nigo santola si, N; Ni

bwom santola sichi, B, = one orange.

Chhapukhwon, N ; Kwosyal bétho, B,

=one sword. Chhago singhali si N;

Kwobwom seti sichi, B, one chesnut

fruit.

BAutIne Pronovuns.

Singular.

I, Go.

Thou, Ga.

He, she, it, Harem, Yam, Myam.

Dual.

We, inclusive, Gosi.

We, exclusive, Gésuku.

Ye, Gasi.

They,

Myam dausi.

Plural,

We, inclusive, Gdi.

We, exclusive, Gdku.

Ye, Gani.

Yam dau.

They, /

Myam dau,

This, Yam.

That, Myam.

Harem dausi.

Yam dausi.

Harem dau.

j All genders: no sign.

Dual.

These, Yam dausi. .

Those, Myam dausi.

Plural.

These, Yam dau.

Those, Myam dau.

Self, Daubo (Dwabo).

Dual.

Dwabo dausi.

Plural.

Dwabo dau.

Myself, Wadaubo.

Tuyself, Tdaubo.

His, her, its-self, Xdaubo.

Dual,

Wasi daubo, excl.

* | Isi daubo, incl.

. Isi daubo,

. Asi daubo.

{ Wake daubo, excl,

* | Ike daubo, incl,

2. Ine daubo.

3. Ane daubo.

QS bo

Plural,

Any, some, person, Secu: subs. and adj, |

; m. and f, |

1857.]

Dual.

Seudausi.

Plural.

Seu dau.

Any, some, thing, Mara: subs. only: n,

Dual.

Mara dausi.

Plural.

Mara dau:

Another, Kwagname.

Dual.

Kwagname dausi.

Plural.

Kwagname dau.

Many or much, Dhékong:

mi f. 0.

No dual or plural.

Few. Little, Dékho: subs. adj:

m. f. -n.

The same, Myem.

Dual,

Myem dausi.

Plural.

Myem dau.

How many? Ssubs, adj. :

And how much ? \Gisko, Limi n,

As many, much, Gisko, ditto

So many, much, Metti, I ‘

All, Hwappe, ditto.

Half, Akwaphala. ditto.

The whole, Hwappe Haupe.

Seu. (Singular.

subs. adj.

Who ? inter, m. and f,

Seu dausi. Dual,

Seu dau. Plural.

Gyem, sing. subs. adj.

miwfsn.

Gyem dausi, D.

Gyem dau, P.

Who? rela.*

Béhing Vocabulary.

subs. adj. :

499

Myem, Sing. subs, adj. n.

Myem dausi, Dual.

| Myem dau, Plural.

Mara, Sing. subs. adj. m. f. n.

Mara dausi, Dual.

Mara dau, Plural,

What, rel., Mara.

What, correl. Maem.

Dual and Plural, Like.

Interrogative for both.

Whoever, )a- subs. adj.

Whatever, 1 tisko, { oe a

Dual, Gisko dausi, | ,.

Plural, Gisko dau, Vaitto,

How many ? Gisko, )

As reine Giiak os bois ee

So many, Metti.

Dual, Metti dausi.

Plural, Metti dau.

Hither, Yemka. Myemka.

Dual, Yemka dausi, Myemka dausi.

Plural, Yemka dau. Myemka dau.

Both, Nimpho, subs. and adj. m. f. n.

Several, No word.

Who? correl.:

What ?

My, Wat

Thy, I.

His, her, its, A.

Dual.

My, WaAsi, excl.+ I-si, incl.

Thy, I-si.

His, her, its, Asi.

Plural.

Our, Wake, excl.

Your, Ini.

Their, Ani.

Mine, Wake.

Thine, Ike.

His, hers, its, Ake.

Dual.

Our’s, Wasike, excl.

Your’s, Isike.

Their’s, Asike.

Ike, incl.

Isike, incl,

* Gyem takes the 4 prefix and is used interrogatively in a relative sense: which

of these persons or things will you take? A-gyemme ladi, wherein the disjunct

form is employed, gyemme.

+ The words father and mother in conjunction with their pronominal adjuncts

; wasi- po

are irregular a-pa isivpo

i-po isi-po

a-po asi-po

popo; i-popo; a-popo, &c.

wake-po.

ikepo.

ini- po.

ani-po.

other relations as popo, uncle, though but iterations of po, are regular, e. g.

Singular, Dual and Plural.

§ Wa-

500

Plural.

Our’s, Wakke, excl. Ikke, inct.

Your’s Fnike.

Their’s, Anike.

Own, Dauboke.

1. My own, Wa dauboke.

2. Thy own, I dauboke.

3. His, her, its own, A dauboke.

Dual.

i Wasi dauboke, excl.

: Ysi dauboke, inc.

Béhing Vocab ulary.

[No. 6.

a Y'si dauboke.

3 Asi dauboke.

Plural.

Wake dauboke.

Ike dauboke.

Ine dauboke.

Ane dauboke.

1. Mine own, Wake dauboke.

2. Thine own, ke dauboke.

3. His, her, its own, Ake dauboke, &c.

like the disjunctive mine.

BAHING VERBS.

Cause, Pato, tr. Papato, causal.*

Cause not, Ma pato.

Chapo, tr.

Can it, be able for it, Chainco. ipene

Do not can it, Ma chapo. Ma chamso.

Champato, tr.

Cham paso, intr.

Cham payi, passive.

Champapato, causal, tr.

Champapaso, intr. caus.

Champaépayi, pas. caus.

Enable not, Ma champato, &c,

Be born, Giko, n

Kiko, trans.

Kingso, refi.

Give birth to} Kingyi, pas.

or beget, Gingpato, tr. causal.

Gingpaso, intr. causal.

Gingpayi, pas. causal.

Cause to beget ee ae

or produce ci pas Sa

? _Kingpayi, pussive.

Be not born, Ma giko, Neg.

Beget or produce not, Ma kiko, Neg.

Cause to can

Enable

Bleno. (Blenno), n.

Blenpato, tr. causal.

Blenpaso, intr. causal.

Blenpayi, passive.

Live not, Ma bleno (blenno).

Byakko, n.

Byangpato, tr. causal.

Byangpaso, intr. caus.

Byangpayi, passive.

Sato, tr.

Saso, reflex. tr.

Sayi. passive.

Sapato, tr. caus.

Sapaso, reflex. caus.

Sapayi, passive.

Be (sum), Ka. Khe. Gno. Irreg. Defec,

Bwakko, n. (sit).

Bwangpato, tr. causal.

Bwangpaso, intr. caus.

Bwangpayi, passive.

Dymo, n

Dytmpato, tr. causal.

Dytmpaso, intr. causal.

Dyimpayi, passive,

Live,

Die,

Kill,

Bet (maneo),

Become,

* This is the causative of all verbs and is derived from the root pa, to do or

make.

causative, also bearing that sense.

It answers to the Hayu form “do for another.”

In Bahing it is the

+ These are = wonto and woncho of Hayu, the definite and indefinite of Hun-

garian ;

potential of all verbs.

{ Be in a certain place = sit.

defectives.

in English can it or be able for it and be able simply. Chapo forms the

Sheer entity is expressed by Ka, Khe, Gno,

1857.]

Higne, puakens fThiwo Neg. Ref.

3 | Bwala, Neg. Def,

Make to have, Thiyato, tr.

Cause to possess, | Bwalapato, tr.

Pawo, tr.

Paso, reflex

Payi, passive,*

Papato, tr. ¢.

Papaso, intr. c.

Papayi, passive, c.

J Pawomukho bwakho, n.

Pasogno bwakho, n.

Cease doing or to do, Pacho pléno, n,

Tyaro, tr.

Suffer, « Tyarso, reflex. tr.

pani, pas.

Do, make,

perform.

Keep doing,

Tyarpato, tr.

Cause to suffer, {Tern reflex.

Tyarpayi, passive.

Kwo-gno, tr. (see).

Kwé6-so, reflex.

Observe or } Kw6-yi, passive.

Examine, Kw6-pato, tr. causal.

Kwo paso, intr. causal.

Kw6-payi, passive, causal.

Teuto. Jokko. Mim-

to, tr.

gue Teuso. Jongso. Mim-

Know, °

Thiok rc gape ee

; Teuti. Jongyi. Mim-

ti, passive.

Teupato. Jongpato.

Cause to un-| 7p pe ores ee

eupaso, Jongpaso.

derstand, oy get ;

E q Mimpaso, intr. c.

xplain, Pence ee

eupayi. Jongpayi.

Mimpayi, pas, c.

Feel, { Limleto, trans.

Be sensible of,< Limléso, reflex.

bodily, | taiaitéyi, passive.

Mimto, trans.

Mimso, reflex.

Fes den Wii Mimti, passive.

? \ Mimpato, tr. causal.

Mimpaso, reflex. causal.

Mimpayi, passive, causal,

Bahing Vocabulary. 501

Plendo, tr.

Plenso, tr. reflex.

Barges, Plendi, passive.

Plen-pa-to-so-yi, causii.

Dwakko, intr.

Desire, Dwakto, tr.

love, Dwakti, passive.

Dwangpa-to-so-yi, c.

Gramdo, tr.

Gramso, reflex.

Hate, | : ’

Lust for | Doak reflex.

Gramdi, passive.

Grampa-to-so-yi, ¢.

Syanto, trs.

Syanso, reflex,

Syanti, passive,

Syanpato, &c. c.

Be modest, Gniine bédko, n.

Guiine bok-pa-to-se-

yi, tr. or

Gnuine_ pok-ko-so-

yi, ir.

Recognise,

Make modest,

Laugh, Riso, n.

Make laugh, Risipa-to-so-yi, c.

Laugh at, irride, Rito. Riso.

Riti, tr.

Weep, Gnwakko, n.

Make weep, Gnwangpa-to-so-yi, c.

Dance, Silimdévo,*+ tr.

Make dance, Silimdpa-to-so-yi, c.

Sing, Swalong paw6, tr.

Make sing, Swalong papato-so-yi, c.

Hope, No such word.

Fear, Guito, n.

Gnipato, tr. ¢

Frighten, rae reflex. c.

Gnipayi, passive,

Gnipapato, tr.

Cause to frighten, {ins reflex,

Gnipapayi, p.

Khiwo, n.

Khipato, causal.

Khipaso, c. reflex.

Khipayi, c. p.

Be good, Nytiwo or Nytba bwakko, n.

Become good, Nytiba dyimo, n,

Tremble,

* Observe, once for all, that the three forms of the transitive (primitive and

causal alike) refer to him (any one) to self and to me (the speaker).

Thus sa-to,

kill him or it; sa-so, kill thyself; sa-yi, kill me; that in verbs like to do, the

sense is modified of necessity but without essential change; and that the passive

has no imperative of the 2nd or 3rd person.

Hence the entry under the Ist, and

hence as will be seen in the grammar, the existence in the language of certain

special forms of the verb subsidiary to the so-called passive.

+ Sili— a dance.

The verb movo has the separate sense of to fight, but is

used with many nouns to verbalize them.

Nyuto, tr.

Nyidso, reflex.

Nytini, passive.

Nytiba dyumpato, tr. c.

Nydtba dyumpaso, refl. c.

Nytiba dyumpayi, pas. c.

Be glad, Ithim nyala. Gyerso.

Athim nydipato, tr.

Ythim nytipaso, reflex.

Wathim nyupayi,* passive.

Gyérsi pato-paso-payi.

Be vexed, snl yaad

f Detkha giwo.

UAthim manytipato.

Be satisfied, Rigno, n.

Satisfy, Rapato, c.

Bwakko, n.

Bwangpato, c. tr.

Bwangpaso, c. reflex.

Bwangpayi, c. passive.

Sddo, tr.

Make good,

Gladden,

Vex, sadden,

Utter, speak,

Articulate,

Relate, tell, speak seg Soéso, refl.

to or of, Sdyi. Sddi, pas.

Cause to re- (Sopato, tr. |

fates to lols. refi. [Bor bath the

tell, &e. | Sépayi, p.

Talk, eee pawo, tr.

: L6 paso, reflex.

GISCORTSE, Nao :

Lo payi, passive,

Lo papato, tr.

Cause to talk, < L6 papaso, reflex.

L6 papayi, passive.

Tell my, thy own, + Naa

E Yl 16 sdézno.

his, tale, ‘

A 16 ségno.

Be silent, Liba bwakko, n.

Liba bwang)pato, tr.

Silence, < Liba bwangpaso, reflex.

Liba bwangpayi, p.

Guase'ts Liba Dare papato, tr.

: Liba bwa papaso, reflex.

silence, } 7; BL Pn ae

Liba bwa papayi, p.

* Means, may I be gladdened. Be)

gladdened, the sheer passive, cannot be

expressed. I, thou, he, is gladdened =

Wathim nytipayi, [thim nytipane, Athim

nypada. The last—he gladdens and

is gladdened.

are much closer expressions for be glad

and gladden. The others are formed

from thim or theum, the heart, and the

conjunct pronouns, opposite is the phase

of the active and passive voices.

Bahing Vocabulary.

Gyérso and gyérsipato +

| Athim nyu pada,

[ No. 6.

| Bréto, tr.

Call, summon,< Bréso, reflex.

Bréti, passive,

Brépato, tr.

Cause to summon, < Brépdso, reflex.

Brépayi, passive.

Syanda pawo, tr.

Shout, vociferate, {ss paso, refl.

Syanda, payi. p.

Learn = teach thyself, Chayinso, n.

Teach, Chayindo, tr.

Teach thyself, Chayinso, reflex. tr.

Cause thyself to be

taught,

Teach me, Chayindi, passive.

Cause me to be taught, Chayinsipayi, c. p.

J No such word.

Chayinsipaso, c. r.

Read, \ Kwo-gno = see, is used.

Ryakko, tr.

Write, Ryangso, tr. reflex.

Ryangyi, p.

Ryakti p. = write for, or to me.

‘( Brecigpees bite

Cause to write, < Ryangpaso, reflex.

| Ryanepayi, p.

Hilo pawo, tr.

Ask, question,< Hilo paso, reflex.

Hilo payi, p.

Cause to ask, pie pag uk

or question Ee ee ——

’ Hilo papayi, p.

Answer, S6-gno, tr. (see tell).

..« { Puno: (Panne), tr;

Beg, solicit, punso. refl. Ponts p-

(Pan pato, tr.

/ Pun paso, reflex.

Pan payi, p.

Ta-wo, tr.

Get, obtain, find, < Ta-so, reflex.

Ta-yi, p.

Cause to beg,

fe veles tr;

Cause to get, &c. < Ta-paso, reflex.

| T4-payi, p.

Active.

Athim nydpadu.

Athim nytipadi.

Passive.

Wathim nydpayi.

Tthim nytipdne,

Athim nyGpada.

1857.]

Dwakto, tr.*

Approve, ike | Brame, reflex.

Dwakti, p.

Dwang pato, tr.

Cause to like, &c.

Dwang payi, p.

ce UR ee beatae

Ticawaveke Madwangso, &c.

pproves | wadwakti,

Kw6-gno, trans.

See, < Kwo-so, reflex.

Kwo-yi, passive.

Kwé6 pato, tr. c.

Show, EN paso, reflex. c.

Kw6 )ayi, p.

Hide, lie hid, Khledso, n. and reflex.

Hide it, Khleuito, tr.

Hide me, Khleati, p+

Cause to be hid, | Ki ieee

to be concealed, uae as Aint

Cause to cause to ‘Kite papato, tr.

Bars, Khleu p4payi, p.

Ninno, tr.

Hear, Nimo reflex.

Ninyi, pas.

Nin pato, tr.

Cause to bese Nn paso, reflex,

Nin payi, passive.

Dapto, tr.

Taste, {Dams reflex.

Dapti, passive.

Dam pato, tr.

Cause to taste, pe paso, reflex.

Dam payi, passive.

Marto, tr.

Blow, apply breath, 1 Mss reflex.

Mayi, passive.

Mii pato, tr.

Cause to blow, he paso, reflex.

Mu payi, passive.

(emo or Nammo, tr.

Namso, reflex,

USanyi, passive.

Smell, -

Nam pato, tr.

Cause to smell, < Nam paso, reflex.

Nam payi, passive.

Bihing Vocabulary.

Dwang paso, reflex.

Khleu papaso, refi.

5038

Khito, tr.

Touch, < Khiso, reflex.

Lknati, passive.

Kha pato, tr.

Cause to touch, 1K paso, reflex.

Khi payi, passive.

Jawo. Bawo, tr.

Eat,< Jaso. Baso, reflex.

Rice Bayi, passive.

(Ja pato, tr.

Cause to eat, = feed,< Ja paso, reflex.

La payi, pas.

Tugno, tr.

Drink, < Ttso, reflex.

\inayi, pas.

Tundo, tr.

Cause to drink, | Tim, reflex.

Tundi, pas.

Be intoxicated, Diko.t Neutro, pas.

Make intoxicated, {Bans es

tap ei ung paso, reflex.

or JIntoxicate, D Ane

. _Dung payi.

Mewo, tr.

Vomit, , Méso, reflex.

Meyi, pas.

Mé pato, tr.

Cause to vomit. < Mé paso, reflex.

Mé payi, pas.

Sleep, Ipo, n.

Im pato, tr.c.

Cause to sleep, < Im paso, reflex. c.

Im payi, pas. c.

Ipto, tr. These are equal

Gace to in sense to the

a Ipso, refl. < last, and exhi-

sleep,

bit a 2d mode of

Ipti, pas. making causals,

Wake, Syayinso, n.

fevers pato, tr.

Awaken, < Syayinsi paso, reflex,

[ syayinsi, payi, pas.

f Gnamung mowo, tr.

Gnamung m6s0, reflex,

Gnamung mopato, tr.

Cause to [G 5: shies roe

Gnamung mopaso, reflex.

. Gnamung mdpayi, pas.

Fart, Piso, n. Pisipato, &c. causal.

Fart. at him, Pito.. Piso, .Piti, tr.

Dream,

dream, iP

* The intransitive is dwakko = approve, whence transitive dwakto approve it

like the Hungarian determinate and indeterminate.

+ In this as in most verbs, the three forms refer respectively to me (Khleuti)

to him, or it, any being or thing (Khbleuto) and to self (thyself) (Khleuso) and

so precisely in the causal also, Khleu payi, Khleu pato and Khleu paso.

{ This neuter is conjugated as a passive Dungi, Dunge, Duga.

3082

504

Shit (cace), Wasi pato, &c. causal.

Cace supra ali quid vel aliquem, Wato, tr.

Piss (micaall ‘Charso, n.

ee’ \Charsi pato, causal.

Imminge, Charto, &c. tr.

Kiss (give and Chuppawo, tr.

= Chuppaso, reflex.

take osculo), ie

Chuppayi, pas.

Cause to kiss, Chuppa pato, &c. ¢.

Leuwo, tr. (French eu).

Kiss (coé), iiss reflex.

Leuyi, pas.

Be kissed, Leup4so, reflex. causal.*

f Hachhin méwo, &c. tr.

Sneeze ; ’

?\ Hachhiin mdpato, &c. causal.

Spit, Tewo, tr. Téso, reflex. Téyi, pas.

Té pato, tr.

Té paso, reflex.

Té payi, pas.

Té papato, &c. D. C.

Byamne mowo, &c. tr.

Byamne mopato, &c. causal.

Syékhé méwé, tr.

Sydkhé mépato, &c. c.

J Dikumi dokto, &c. tr.

| Dikumi dongpato, &e. c.

Cause to spit,

Belch,

Cough,

Hiccup,

Dwakko, tr.

Swallow, | Doane, reflex.

Dwangyi, pas.

Hapsa mowo, tr.

Hapsa mopato, &c. ce

( Tukko, tr.

Tungso, reflex.

Tungyi, pas.

Tung pato.

Cause to lick, {tins paso.

Yawn,

Lick,

Tung payi.

Bippo, tr.

Suck, < Bimso, reflex.

Bimyi, passive.

oe pato, tr.

Bim paso, reflex.

(Bim payi, pas.

Krato, tr.

Bite, Kraso, reflex,

Krayi, pas.

Kra pato, tr.

Kra paso, reflex.

Kra payi, pas.

Cause to suck,

Cause to bite,

Kick, Ta-to, tr. Ta-so, refi. Ta-yi pas.

Ta pato, tr.

Cause to kick, Ta paso, reflex.

| wa payi, pas.

Bihing Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

{ Teuppo, tr. (French eu).

Strike, 4 Teumso, reflex.

| Teumyi, pas.

Teum pato, tr.

Cause to strike, | ew paso, reflex.

Teum payi, pas.

Khwaro, tr.

Scrape or Khwarso, refiex.

Seratch = 4 Khwaryi, pas

(violently), vanes

Khwarpato, &c. c.

Bapto, tr.

Bamso, reflex.

Bapti, pas.

Bampato, &c. causal.

Nyapto, tr.

Nyamso, reflex,

Nyapti, pas.

Nyampato, &c. causal.

Syallo, tr.

Syalso, reflex.

Syalyi, pas.

Syal pato, &c. causal.

Walk, Gwakko, n.

Scratch (for ease,

itching),

Push,

Shove,

Pull,

Gwang pato, tr.

Cause to waik, { Goan paso, reflex,

Gwang payi, pas.

Walk about, f Khirso, n.

Take the air, \Khirsi pato, &e, c.

Run, Wanno, n. Wanpato, &c, c.

Run away, f Jukokato, n.

flee, Jingnikapato, &e. c.

Creep, Bisa khwongo gwakko, n.

= Snake-like walk.

Jump, hop, f Préko, n.

leap, Prong pato, &c. c

Fly, Byéro, n. Byer pato, &c. c.

Swim, No such word.

Hamba glagno, n.

Hamba glapato, &c. c.

Wade across, Gwaktako or Gwaksomami-

hamba gligno,f n.

Sink, Wamto, n.

Drown or cause to sink, Wampato, &c. tr.

Bathe, Chiso, n. Chisipato-paso-payi, c.

Cause to bathe or Ge ies

bathe him, Chikti, pas.

Cross over, {

Syappo, tr.

Syamso, reflex.

Syamyl, pas.

Syampato, &c. c.

Dress = dress § Phiso, reflex.

thyself, } Phisipato-pAso-payi, c.

Wash,

* The causal reflex is always used to express an act voluntarily suffered by the

party addressed.

T Literally, having walked issue on that side.

———————————— ee ——~S—

1857.]

Phikto, tr.

Phingso, reflex.

Phikti, pas.

Cause to cause to Phing pato, tr.

Cause to dress, '

= dress him,

dressor have dres- 4 Phing paso, reflex.

sed, Phing payi, pas.

Kleuto, tr.

Kleuso, reflex.

Kleu ie .

Klenti, pas.*

Kleupato-paso-payi, c.

Be naked, Iklaucho dytmo, n.

Make naked, Aklaucho pawo, tr.

AXklaucho-pa-

pato, tr. c.

a Sélyumi byakko, n.

aes § = hunger by die.

Solyumi byang pato,

Se. £62:

Pwaku dwakko, n.

Pwaku dwaktimi, byakko.

Pwaku dwang pato,

&c. tr. c.

Be sleepy, Myeldo, n. Ipthi dwangla, n.

Myel pato, tr. c.

Myel paso, reflex. c.

Myel payi, pas. c.

Ipthi dwang pato-paso-

ayi,

Be cold (to sentient { Jimi byakko, n.

being), = cold by die.

Make cold (ditto), eh oe Bene Daw:

paso-payi, c.

Be warm or hot, Gluglum dytimo, n.

Gluglum pawo-paso-payi,

tre

Make warm } Gluglum dyim pAato-p4so-

or heat, payi, c. or

Gluglum thydmto-thimso-

thimyi, c.

Be dirty, Kékém dytimo, n.

, Kékém pawo, &c. tr.

Make tnt, 4 Ken dyumpato, &c. or

Kékém thyumto, &c.

Be clean, Babim dytimo, n.

Make clean, cleanse, Bubtimpawo or bu-

bum dytim pato, tr.

Cause to jis papato, te

Undress,

Cause to make naked,

Make hungry,

Be thirsty,

Make thirsty,

Make sleepy,

Bubum papaso

cleanse 5 dak aes

? [Bubum papayi, causal.

Béhing Vocabulary.

Be angry, Sokso paso, tr. reflex.

Make angry, Sokso pawo, tr.

Cause to make angry, Soksopapato, &c. c.

Kbryakko, tr.

Abuse, revile

> Fevi'> | Khryangso, reflex.

Abase, ‘

Khryangyi, pas.

Humble, Khryany pato-paso-

Humiliate,

payi, causal,

Khiwo, tr.

Quarrel, 1 Rio, reflex.

pas.

Khi pato, tr.

Cause to quarrel, < Khi paso, reflex.

| Khi payi, pas.

Be reconciled, Deuwo, n.

P Deu pato, tr.

Reconcile, < Deu paso, reflex,

Deu payi, pas.

M6-wo, tr.

Fight, < Mo-so, reflex.

i. pas.

Cause to {i pe oe

ae M6 paso, reflex,

Sta? M6 payi, pas.

Be victorious or win, Glwaugno, n.

gee ( Giwau pato, tr.

Make victorious J eae

. 4 Glwau paso, reflex,

or make win, Be

Glwau payi, pas.

Be conquered, reli aye or

Syeuto or

succumb, lose, Shvé

1yoto, n.

Syeti pato, tr.

Syea paso, reflex,

Syeu payi, pas.

Ra pawo, tr.

Work, 1B paso, reflex.

Ra payi, pas.

Ri papato, tr.

Cause to work, SR papaso, reflex.

Ru papayi, pas.

Play, Chamso, n. or reflex.

Chamsi pato, tr.

Cause to play, + Chamsi paso, reflex.

Chamsi payi, pas.

Chamto, tr.

J Chamso, reflex.

= cause to Chamti, pas.

play, Cham pato-paso-payi,

causal.

Be tired, Ballo, n.

Cause to succumb f

or lose,

Amuse, divert,

* My informants say Kleuyi can only be said by the clothes, and that a man

must say Kleutigi, or Kleuti, — give me undressed or undress me.

Thus to Hindi Or and Pain answer Utar not Utar.

Kleuso is objected to.

So also

T Rupayi, says the work, do me: ripati, says the man, do for me. Compare

Hayu posung and pasung. So work is rapawo, and work for him, ripato. Rd is

a substantive = work.

506

Bal pato, tr.

Tire, Bal paso, reflex.

(Bal payi, pas.

Bal papato,

Cause to tire, ; Bal pis, |

Bal papayi,

Take rest, Naso, n. or intr,

Nasi pato, tr.

Give rest, Nasi péso, refl. |

Nasi payi, p.

Move, Dakko, n.* Yongso, reflex.

Cause to Dung pato. Dukto, tr.

double

causal.

causals.

move or 4 Dung paso. Dungso, refi.

move it, | Dung payi. Dukti, pas.

Cause to cause to {f Dung papato, tr. ¢,

move or cause< Dung papaso, refl. c.

it to be moved, | Dung papayi, pas. c.

Yokto, tr.

Remove, J Xone reflex.

Yokti, pas.

Be still, Jaso, ac. intr.

Be firm or steady, i Ma dukko.

Ma dukto, tr. neg.

Jato, tr.

Jaso, reflex.

Jati, pas.

Cause to make Ma dung pato, c. tr.

still, or firm, | Ja pato, c. tr.

Be quick, Grukko, n.

Make still, stabi-

litate, or steady,

Grung pato. Grukto.

Quicken, , Grung paso. Grungso.

Grung payi. Grukti.

Be slow, Wakha dyumo, n.

Make slow, Wakha pawo, tr.

Stay, stop,f Jaso, n. ac. intr.

Stop it or stay. it, Jato, tr.

Stop me, Jati.

Cause to be stopt, (¢ Japato, tr.

or cause to cause {neyo reflex,

to stop, Ja payi, pas.

Lacho giwo,

La )ato,

Lacho giyi, ] _.

La an pas.

Let thyself depart, pee ne ae ae

= ?

Let him depart,

Let me depart,

Be intoxicated, | Paks dyumo or

paso, n.

Dukba pawo, tr.

[ Dukba paso, reflex.

Dukba payi, pas.

| Dong pato-paso-

payi, c.

Make intoxicated, -

Bahing Vocabulary.

E NoNG!

Tell the truth, Aje bwakko, n.

Cause to tell Aje bwang pato, tr.

tr Aje bwang paso, reflex.

ruth, ‘J : asc

Aje bwang payi, pas.

-challo, n.

-bwakko n.

Limo bwang pato,

or Limo chal pato.

Tell falsehood, { Limo

Cause to tell, &c.

Bito, tr:

Believe, J Biso, reflex.

Obey, Biti, passive.

Bipato, &c. causal.

wasiallee Ma bito,

Dus Ma be, Negative.

} Ma biti,

Jeullo, tr. (put down,

place.)

Present, } Jeulso, reflex,

Offer, Jeulyi, pas.

Jeul pato-paso-payi,

causal.

Blawo, tr.

Blaso, reflex.

Blayi, pas.

Blapato, &c. causal.

Ma blawo, Neg.

Sheomi tyakko, tr.t

Accept (= take),

Refuse or Sheomi tyangso, reflex.

forbid, Sheomi tyangi, pas.

Sheomi tyang pato,

&c. caus,

Tyakko, tr.

Prevent, Tyangso, reflex.

Restrain hinder, ) Tyangyi, pas.

Tyangpato, &c. c.

Theullo, tr.

Theulso, reflex.

Cherish, < Theulyi pas.

Theulpato-paso-payi,

causal.

Wardo, tr. (= throw

away).

Abandon, ee ee

desert,

Wardi, pas.

Warpato, &c. causal.

Pleno, tr.

Plenso, reflex.

Plenyi, pas.

Plenpato, &c. causal.

fTyakko. See

Prevent.

Bwala, n. irreg.

Have, | nel n, reg.

Thiwo, n, reg.

Set at liberty,

Confine, imprison,

* Dukko, if leave not place.

+ Stay, remain, don’t go, is, Bwako = sit.

(word).

Yoéngso, if you do.

{ Literally, hinder by mouth

1857.] Béhing Vocabulary. 507

( Bwakba t Rim pato, tr.

| Thiba 1. -pawo, tr. Make hand- Rimba pawo, com.

Bwakba q some, gender,

Thiba | -paso, ae adorn Rimsdékpa pawo, mas.

Cause to have rene: _ Ri s : f

erase 4 Diba bepayi nae imsongma pawo, foem.

7. Pha F Bee Swalocha dyimo, mas.

Bwakba) sto. we.c aes ? < Swalomi dyimo, foem,

Mlb Ree tee cate ee ; (no neuter).

| Thipato-paso-payi. Make mature, fSwalocha pawo, m.

Ma bwala. or adult, \Swalomi pawo, f.*

Want Ma thiyela. Sokticha dyfimo, m.

Ma thiwo. Be strong {Soutiie dyimo, f. (no

Giwo, tr. Giso, reflex. neuter)

Give, 8 (Giyi), pas. Make strong, ( Sokticha pawo, m

Gipato-paso-payi, causal. Strengthen, @ Soktimicha pawo, f.

Give back ff Léti giwo-giso-giyi, Grow, Baro, n

return, ut supra. Bar pato, tr.

Give again f Anaiyo giwo-giso-giyi, ere Rea Bar paso, reflex.

(more), ut supra. toi etees Bar p4yi, pas.

Blawo, tr. ero Bar papato-papaso-

Take! Blaso, reflex, papayi, double caus.

Blapato-péso-payi, causal, Syo pato, tr.

Léto, tr. Decay it, Sy6 paso, reflex.

Take back (see ) Léso, reflex. Make decay, ) Syo payi, pas.

return), Léti, pas. Sy6 papato, &c. causal.

Lépato-paso-payi, caus. Kiawo, tr.

Take again f Anaiyo blawo-blaso-blayi, Steal Kiso, reflex.

eal, pane hi

(more), ut supra. Rob Kayi, pas.

Be saved, Bléno (blenno) (see live,) n. ? | Kapato, &c. c.

Blenpato, tr. Kupapato, double c.

| Blenpéso, reflex. Murder, Sato (see kill),

Save, <4 Blenpayi, pas. Hanto, tr.

| Blenpapito-papaso-papsyi, Deceive, } Hanso, reflex.

causal, Cheat, Hanti, pas.

Be well, Neuwo or Nyuwo, n.

Neupato. Neuto, tr.

Neupaso. Neuso, reflex.

Hanpato, causal.

Accompany (Nung ,

needs a noun or Ps :

K wangkho lawo, n.

Cure, make } Neupayi. Neuti, pas. pronoun),

well, Neupapato-papaso-papa- | Cause to accom: f Kwangkho lapato-paso-

yi, c. of neuter. pany, payi, tr. c.

Neupato-paso-pay i, c. of tr, Wato, tr.

Waso, reflex.

Wayi, pas.

Wapato, &c. causal.

Remain with, Kwangkho bwakko, n.

Cause to remain { Kwangkho bwapa-

aaa Le Leave, quit,

hlamso, reflex.

Khlamti, pas.

Khlam pato-paso-payi, c.

Khlam papato. Double c.

Spoil, de-

stroy, mar,

Rimmo, pn. with, to, causal.

Be hand- ) Rimba dyaimo, com. gender. | Sit, Niso, n. compare with the next.

some, ) Rimsdkpa dyimo, mas. Nito, tr.

Blayi, pas. Decay, Sydéwo or Sheowo, n.

Seat or set down,

Rimséngma dyumo, foem. Nisipato, c.

* Compare Newari lya-hma ju, and lyase ju; lya-hma juye-ki or ya, and lyase

juyeki or ya. Also Hayu Bang-cho dum, Bang-mi dum; Bang-cho pako or

thumto and Bangmi thumto or pako. The Bahing verbs dyumo and pawo have

the usual characteristics, given often afore. Rimo is a primitive neuter, whose

causal is rimpato.

Béhing

Nito, tr.

Niso, reflex.

Seat,” Niti, pas.

Nipato, causal.

» UNipapato, double causal.

Stand, Rapo, n.

Make stand, Rampato, ec.

Remain Rapsdgno bwakka, n.

standing, | Rapd mokho bwakko, n.

Ram _ pato -mokho

bwakko.*

Rapsogno bwapato.

Bwoéko or Bokko, n. (to

Be erect,

Keep him sanding}

recumbent).

Rapo (to sitter).

Stoop, Khimo, n.

Make stoop, Kham pato, &c. c.

Lie down, Gléso, n.

Lay down, Glésipato-péso-payi, c.

Get up (to a sitter), Rapo, n. (see stand).

Get up (to a Bwoko, nu. (see

recumbent), be erect).

Make get up, Bwong pato. Ram pato.

Fall (being), Doko, n.

Cause to fall, Dong pato-pdso-payi, c.

Slip down, { Bhliwo :

b} e

Slide down,

Cause to slip or slide, SUSE

payi, c.

Get on, mount, Wéeno, n.

Cause to mount, W6pato-paso- payi, c.

Dismount, Yuiwo, n.

Cause to dismount, Yapéto-paso-payi, c.

Jydlo, tr.

Jyulso, reflex.

Put, place, put down, Indies, pas.

deposit,

Take up, pe kies Guppo, tr.

Tikes Back ongso. Gumso, reflex.

; > CBokti. Gumyi, pas

; yi, pas.

Bong pato, &c,

Cause to take up, Lene pate, ve

Grepto, tr.

Grepso, reflex.

Grepti, pas.

Grem pato, &c. ¢.

Dato, tr.

Daso, reflex.

Dati, pas.

Dapato, &c, causal.

Throw,

Catch as thrown,

Vocabulary.

Jytlpato, causal.

Jyulpapato, d. c.

{ No.

Keep, Jyullo, tr. (see place).

Réto, tr.

Réso, reflex.

Réti, pas.

Ré pato, &c. c.

Throw away, f Wardo, tr.

Squander, | (see Abandon).

Be near, Nentha dyimo, n.

Approximate, Nentha dyampato, tr.

Be distant, Brabé dyafmo. Brawo, n.

Brapato, &c., tr.

Braba dyumpato, c. tr.

Bring (see come, ( Pito, tr.

piwo: pito is} Piso, reflex.

trans. or caus.) Piyi, pas.

=make come), | Pipato, &c. causal,

( Yuto, tr.

) Yuso, reflex.

Yati. pas.

Yupato, &c. c.

Kato, tr.

Kaso, reflex.

Snatch away,

Distance,

Bring down (see

Yuawo = come

down).

Bring up (see

a Kati, pas.

any Kuipato, &c. c.

Fetch, Blatha diwo, n. (to take go.)

Cause to fetch.) na qe aterpase-

payl, tr. c.

Lato, tr.

Laso, reflex.

Layi, pas.

Lapato, causal.

Phli-gno, tr.

Phli-so, reflex.

Phli-yi, pas.

Phli-pato, &c. causal.

Kiro, tr.

Kiuarso, reflex.

Karyi, pas.

Kurpato, &c. c.

Take away,

Send,

Carry, bear,

Siwo, tr.

Hold, take in } Siso, reflex.

hand, grasp, ) Siyi, pas.

Sipato, &c. causal.

Jato, tr.

Hold up, ) Jaso,t reflex.

Support, ) dati, pas.

Japato, &c. c,

Let it fall, Ucho giwo.

Fall (thing), Uto, n. and a,

Make fall or fell, U'pato, c. and Uto, tr.

Enter, Wdégno, n.

* In conjugation, this compound verb preserves the trans. of rampato and the

neuter of bwakko blended in one conjugation.

See grammar.

+ Jaso gives Jase, it is (self) supported, and Jéso or Japaso must be used for

“Be supported,” though there be a passive formed from Jati = support me.

All this results from the imperfect development of the passive voice which has no

imperative of the 2nd person.

1857.]

Cause to enter, f Wo6pato, ce.

Admit, insert, | Wondo, tr.

Issue, Gigno, n.

Cause to issue, Glipato. Glindo.

Ascend = climb tree, Wégno, n.

Ascend = come up, slope, Kawo,

Ascend = go up, slope, Hatru lawo. } =

Descend = come down, Yiwo, n.

Descend = go down, Hayu lawo, n.

Descend = climb down tree, Gligno, n.

Jwakdiwo, ; n. there, here.

Arrive, ¥ Jwakpiwo,

Jwakko, n.*

Jwangdipato,

Cause to arrive, , Jwangpipato, ¢ tr.

Jwangpato,

Depart, Gligno (issue).

Cause to depart, Glapate, &c.

Precede, Gnalla yongso, intr,

Cause to precede, Gnalla yongpato or

yokto, reflex.

Follow, Nétha yongso, intr.

‘: Notha yongpato, ref.

Cause to follow, Ean yokto, &

Attend on, Kwongkho bwakko. n.

Disappear, Khleuso, reflex. (see hide).

Khleuto, tr.

Khleuti, pas.

Appear, Kwainso paso, reflex.

Make appear, Kwainso pawo, tr.

Make me appear, Kwainso payi, pas.

Be lost, lose, Shéoto, n. and a.

Cause to lose, lose it, Shéopato-paso-

Cause to disappear,

payi, c.

Lamo, tr.

Search, < Lamso, reflex.

Lamyi, pas.

Lam pato, tr.

Cause to search, { Lam paso, reflex.

Vian payi, pas.

; Tawo, tr.

Find, | Tie, reflez.

Tayi, pas.

Ta pato, tr.

Ta paso, reflex.

Ta payi, pas.

Begin, Prénso, n.

Cause to find,

{ Prensi pato, tr.

Cause to begin, < Prénsi paso, reflex.

| prénsi payi, pas.

Bihing Vocabulary. 509

End, ? Ryipo, n.

Be ended, } Ryim pato, &c. tr.

End it, Theumo, tr.

Cause to be Theumso, reflex.

ended, or Theumyi, pas. .

finish, Theum pato, &c. causal.

Come, Piwo, n. Rawo, n.

Pipato. Rapato, tr.

Cause to } Pipaso. Rapaso, reflex,

come, } Pipaéyi, Rapayi, pas.

Pipapato. Rapapato, d. e.

Go, Diwo,y n. Lawo, n.

Lapato. Dipato, tr.

Lapaso. Dipaso, refi,

uapayl, Duipayi, pas.

Continue, Bwakko, n. (sit).

Bwapato, tr.

Bwapaso, reflex.

Bwapayi, pas.

Get out of the f Yongso, n,

Cause to go,

Cause to continue,

way, ‘\ULam plénno, tr.

Yokto, tr. Lamplén-

Cause to clear pato, tr.

the way or] Yongso, reflex. Lam-

plénpaso, reflex.

Yokti, pas, ‘ Lim-

plénpayi, pas.

Wait, Bwakko, n. (sit).

Cause to wait, Bwangpato-paso-payi.

Rimdo, tr.

Rimso, reflex.

Rimdi, pas.

Rimpato, &c. ¢.

ieeeree fhere, ) Jwak diwo, n.

there, | Jwak piwo, n.

fJwak dipato, &e.

UJwak pipato, &c.

fenare! eae n. (issue).

dwo, n. (go).

Cause to depart f Glupato, &c., c.

or dismiss, (Lapato, &c. ¢,

Return, Léto, n. See take

Cause to return, Lépato, &c. f back.

Be high, grow, Baro, n.

Make high, orfp

grow it, L

Be large, big, Gnolo dyumo, n,

Make big or enlarge, Guolo thyumto or

dyimpato, &c. c.

Be fat, Syéneawo,f n,

mike vet ou

of the way,

Wait for,

Expect,

Cause to arrive,

ar-pato-paso payi, c.

* Jwakko = arrive simple. The adjuncts tell whether by going (diwo) or by

coming (piwo).

+ See ‘‘ take away” lato, = cause to go but not used so.

+ Syé = flesh : neuba = good: neuwo = be good, whence neugna, 1 am good.

)

510 Bahing

Fatten, Syéneipato, &e. ec.

Be thin, Ryammo, n,

Make thin, Ryampato, &c. c.

Increase, Baro, n.

Cause to increase, Bar pato, &c. c.

Decrease, Syd-wo, n.

Cause to decrease, Sy6 pato, &c. c.

Be good, Neuwo, n.

Neuto, tr.

Neuso, reflex.

Neuti, pas.

Net pato, &c. c.

Be bad, Ma neuwo, neg.

Make bad, Ma neuto, &c. c. n.

Gapto, tr.

Gapso, reflex.

Gapti, pas.

Gampato, &c. causal.

Deduct from or lessen, Sy6é pato, tr.

(decrease).

Paposees tr.

Cultivate } Ché-so, reflex.

(earth), ) Choyi, pas.

Chopato, &e. ¢.

Koko (kokko), tr. def.

Kéngso, (?) refi. indef.

Koéngyi.* pas,

Kong pato, &c. ec,

Jdto, tr.

Jéso, reflex.

Jéti, pas.

Jopato, &c. ¢.

Phato, tr.

: Phiso, reflex.

Bow, Pha si

yi,f passive.

Phu pato, &c. ec.

Khleumo, tr.

Kchleumso, reftex.

Khleumyi, passive.

Khleum pato, &c. causal.

Riko (rikko), tr.

Ringso, reflex.

sa | Siteraee

Ring pato, &c. causal.

Make good,

Add to or

Augment,

Dig,

Plough,

Transplant,

* Kongyi, says field, dig me.

Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Cuther Préto, tr.

? “| Naso, reflex. Préso, reflex.

pluck Névi Sree

A ayi, pas. Préyi, p.

owers ) 37," 7 pre,

greens, | N&pato &c. c. Prépato,

ery

Ruko, tr.

Rungso, reflex.

Rungyi, pas.

Rungpato, &c. causal.

i Uo, n. and tr.

Uto, tr.

Uyi, pas.

Upato, tr.

Cause to fell, | Unis reflex.

Upayi, pas.

Theulo, tr.

Thetlso, reflex.

Thealyi, pas.

Thedlpato, &c. causal.

Chwaro, tr. (cut).

Chwarso, reflex.

Chwaryi, pas.

Chwarpato, &c. caus.

Chari pawo, tr.

Chari paso, reflex.

Chari payi, pas.

Chari papato, causal.

Wokko, tr.

Wongso, reflex.

Wongyi, pas.t

Wongpato, causal.

Krito, tr.

Kriso, reflex.

{Nace or.

Kradicate,

Fall,

Be felled,

Fell it,

Breed cattle,

Slaughter cattle,

Graze,

Flay or decorti-

cate or peel,

chew Kriti, pas.

Kripato, &c, Cc.

Khwaro, tr.

Shave, Khwarso, reflex.

Khwaryi, pas.

Khwarpato, c.

Jyappo, tr.

Jyamso, reflex.

Jyamyi, pas,

Jyampato &c., causal.

Dig for me is koktigi, and dig for him koktigiwo.

+ The reflex and passive forms of the verbs to dig, to plough, to sow and

all such are eschewed, because incapable of application by or to a human being

and the constructio ad seusum still overruling any feeling of grammatical uni-

formity with my unsophisticated informants.

The transitive and reflex forms of

such verbs often tally with Hungarian definite and indefinite.

+ Wongyi, says the skin, and Wongso, says man to skin, Wokti or Woktigi,

says One man to another, strip off my skin.

So also of “shear,” &c.

1857.]

Légno, tr.

Léso, reflex,

Leyi, pas.

Lépato, c.

Phato, tr.

Phaso, reflex.

Phayi, pas.

Phapato, ec.

Jyav giwo, tr.

Jyar giso, reflex.

Jyar giyi, pas.

Jyar gipato, &c. ¢.

Jyar olawo, tr.

Jyar blaso, reflex.

Jyar blayi, pas.

Jyar blapato, ec.

Ché-gno, tr.

Ch6-so, reflex.

Cho6-yi, pas.

Ch6-pato, ec.

Hikko, tr.

Hingso, reflex.

Hingyi, pas.

Hing pato, &c. c.

Thapo, tr.

Thamso, reflex.

Thamyi, pas.

Tham pato, &c. c.

Khlyakko, tr.

Khlangso, reflex.

Khlangyi, pas.

Khlang pato, &c. ¢.

Make house, Khim pawo (see make)

Make clothes, Wa pawo (see make).

Sale panng, tr.

Sale panso, reflex.

Sale panyi, pas.

Sale panpato, &c. c.

Weave, Wa pawo (supra),

Phyéro, tr.

Phyerso, reflex.

Sell,

Change or

Exchange,

Lend,

Borrow,

Pay debt,

Count,

Measure or

weight,

Plaster (wall),

Spin,

Sew, Phyéryi, pas.

Phyérpato, &c. c.

Khri-to, tr.

Grind; Khriso, reflex.

Khriyi, pas.

Khripato, &c. c.

Work mine, Khani kokko (dig).

Work iron, Syal teuppo (beat).

Singchokko, tr. (plane),

Singchongso, reflex,

Work wood, Singchongyi, pas.

Singchongpato, &c. c.

Khapi lwakto, tr. (knead),

Khapi lwangso, reflex.

Work clay, Khapi lwakti, pas.

Khapi lwangpato, &c. c.

Béhing Vocabulary.

Kiwo, tr.

Kiso, reflex.

Kiyi, pas.

Kipato, &c.c.

Be cooked, be prepared

(rice),

Cook,

Cause to be cooked, a a

&c. c.

Be ripe (fruit), Jiwo, n.

Ripen, Jipato, &c. c.

Boil, Kiwo, (cook).

Grémdo, tr.

Grémso, reflex.

| Grémdi, pas.

Grémpato, c.

Cheowo, tr.

} Cheoso, reflex.

Cheoyi, pas.

Cheo pato, &c. c.

Cut with knife

by one blow,

Cut with scissors, Krito (shear).

Séwo, tr.

Cut by frequent draw-) Séso, reflex.

ing, or saw, Séyi, pas.

Sepato, &c. c.

Ho6to, tr.

H6so, reflex.

Hoéyi, pas.

Hopato, &c. c.

Be torn, Jito, n.

Chito, tr.

Chiso, reflex.

Chiyi, pas.

Chipato, &c. c.

Be split, Yéso, reflex.

Yeto, tr.

Yéyi, pas.

Yépato, &c. °c.

Be broken, Jingso, reflex.

Jikko, tr. and n.

Jingso, reflex.

Jingyi, pas.

Jingpato, &c. c.

Be burst, Bukko, n.

Pwakko or Pukko, tr.

Pwangso, reflex,

Pwangyi, pas.

Pwangpato, &c. c.

Kiwo, tr. (cook).

Kiso, reflex.

Roast,

Grill,

Perforate or

pierce,

Tear,

Split,

Break,

Burst it,

Brew, Kiyi, pas.

\ Kipato, &c, causal.

Héto, tr.

ie Héso, reflex.

Distil, Aa)

Héyi, pas.

Hépato, &c, e.

372

; Ming-gno. n,

\ Chwaro (slaughter),

512 Bahing

Phyakto, tr.

Filtrate, faecued reflex.

Defecate, ) Thyangyi, pas.

Thyangpato, &c. ¢.

Be sharp, Syamso, reflex.

Syappo, tr.

Syamso, reflex.

Syamyi, pas.

Syampato, &c. c.

Be blunt, Khlamso, reflex.

Khlamto, tr.

Make blunt } Khlamso, reflex.

(or spoil), ) Khlamti, pas.

Khblampato, &c. c.

Sharpen,

Be shaken, Dungso, reflex. Dukko, n.

Dukto, tr.

Dungso, reflex.

Dukti, pas.

Dungpato, &c. ¢.

Be still,

Be firm, i Jaso, reflex.

Make still, 3s, tr.

Shake,

Jati, pas,

Make firm, Japato, &ec. Cc.

Be contained, Ringso, reflex.

Rikto, tr.

Contain, J Ringso, reflex.

fiold, Rikti, pas.

Ringpato, &c. c.

Be sustained, Jaso (see Be firm).

Sustain, Jato (see Make firm).

Be retained, Tyangso, reflex.

Tyakko, tr.

Retain, } Tyangso, reflex.

Keep in, ) Tyangyi, pas.

Tyanzpato. &e. c.

Ooze out, Chappo, n.

‘Cham pato, tr.

Cham paso, reflex.

Cham payi, pas.

Cham papato, c.

Be full (belly), Ru-gno, n.

f Ra pato, tr.

RU paso, refiex.

Ru payi, pas.

Ru papato, &c. c.

Be full (vessei), Dyammo, n.

Dyam paro, tr.

Dyam paso, reflex.

Dyam payi, pas.

Dyam papato, c.

Be empty, Asyeti dyumo, n.

Asyéti pawo, tr.

Asyéti paso, reflex.

Asyéti payi, pas.

Asyéti papato, &c. c.

Shine, Chyaro, n.

Make ooze out,

Fill (belly),

Fill (vessel),

Empty,

Vocabulary. [No. 6.

( Be dark, Namrikko, n.

Namring pato, tr.

Duden: ait paso, reflex.

amring payi, pas.

Namring papato, &c. ¢.

Be luminous, Hauhau dyimo, n.

Make luminous. Hauhau pawo, tr.

Blow as wind, Khito, n. Byéro, n. (fly).

Byér pato, &c. c.

BS MEL oe { Kibet ee:

Flow as water, Gwakko (go)

Cause to flow, Gwang pato, &c. c.

Flower, Boto, n.

Cause to flower, Bopato, &c. c.

Fruit, Sito, n.

Cause to fruit, Si-pato, &c. ¢.

Be ripe (fruit only), Jiwo, n.

Ripen, Jipato, &c. ¢.

Be ripe as grain, &c., Ming-gno, n.

Ripen, Ming pato, &c. c.

Be hot, Glé-wo, n.

Heat, Glépato, &c. ¢.

Be cold (thing only), Chhikko, n.

Make cold, Chhing pato, &c. c.

Be rotten, Jippo, n.

Make rotten, Jimpato, &c. c.

Be raw, Achekhl: dyamo, n.

Make raw, Achekhli pawo, tr.

Be lighted (lamp), Howo, n.

Hopato, tr.

é Hodpaso, reflex.

Light (lamp), < Hovert aan

Hépapato, c.

Be kindled (fire), Khryamso, reflex.

Cicryatnc i

. Khryamso, reflex.

Ee) ihicy aie pas.

Khryam pato, c.

Be burnt (destroyed by fire), Deuppo, n.

Deum pato, tr.

Deum paso, reflex. r

Deum payi, pas. it

Deum papato, c.

Chwé-wo, tr.

Chwé-so, reflex.

Chwé-yi, pas.

Chwé-pato, &c. c.

Be buried (= bury thyself), Thimso, r.

Thimmo, tr.

Thimso, reflex,

Thimyi, pas.

Thimpato, &c. ¢.

Be melted (= melt thyself), Yéngso, r.

Yoéng pato, tr.

Melt it, Yong paso, reflex.

Yong payi, pas.

Yong papato, &c. c.

Burn it,

Burn (corpse),

Bury it,

Cause to shine, Chyarpato-paso-payi, c. Be congealed, Jamidytimo, n,

1857.]

Congeal it, Jami pawo, tr.

Khuppo, tr.

Khumso, reflex.

Khumyi, pas.

Khum pato, &c. c.

Be collected, Khumso, supra,

Hammo, tr.

Hamso, reflex.

Hamyi, pas.

Hampato, &c. ¢.

Yokko, tr.

Yongso, reflex.

Collect, bring or

put together,

Spread,

Share out,

Apportion, } Yongyi. pas.

Yony pato, &c. ¢.

Separate, Phwakko, tr.

Phwangso, reflex.

Phwangyi, pas.

Phwang pato, &c. c.

Set together, Khuppo (see Collect).

Chyakko, tr.

Chyangso, reflex,

Chyangyi, pas.

Set apart with-

out division,

Divide (by cutting,

&c. what whole),

Chyangpato, &e. c.

Khryapto, tr.

Khryamso, reflex.

Khryamyi, pas.

Khryam pato, c.

Sapto, tr.

Samso, reflex.

Sapti, pas.

Sampato, &c, c.

Unite, join, what

divided or broken,

Knot it,

Join by knot,

Unknot, ¢ Prwakko, tr.

Loosen, Prwangso, reflex.

Unseam, ) Prwangyi, pas.

Unfold, Prwang pato, c.

Bra-wo, tr.

Bra-so, reflex.

Brayi, pas.

Brapato, &c. ¢.

Brapapato, a. c.

Hal-do, tr. Hil-so, reflex.

Mix, {waa pas.

Hil-pato, &c. ¢.

Phwakko.

(See Separate. )

Grokso pawo, tr.

Scatter,

Unmix. Separate

what mixed,

Acquire, gain by

labour or earn, ) Grokso payi, pas.

Grékso papato, c.

Blenpato. Khuppo, tr.

Save, (what Blenpaso. Khumso, refl.

ee eee Blenpayi. Khumyi, pas.

policy); Blenpapato. Khumpato,c.

Wardo, tr.

Warso, reflex.

Squander, « Wardi, pas.

Warpato, c.

Warpapato, d. ec.

Grdékso paso, refl..

Bahing Vocabulary. 513

Plepto, tr.

Plemso, reflex.

Plepti, pas.

Plempato, &c. c.

Prwakko, tr.

Prwangso, reflex.

Prwangyi, pas.

Prwang pato, &c. ¢.

Hékko, tr.

Hongso, reflex.

Hongyi, pas.

Hong pato, &c. ec.

Tyakko, tr.

Tyangso, reflex.

Tyangyi, pas.

Tyang pato, c.

Timto, tr.

Timso, reflex.

Timti, pas.

Timpato, ec.

Timpapato, d. ec.

(aurea, fr:

Compress or jim reflex.

Fold,

Unfold,

Open,

Shut,

Press,

Squeeze,

Depress,

Express, Nimyi, pas.

Nimpato, &c. c.

Lipto, tr.

Limso, reflex.

Lipti, pas.

Limpato, &e. ¢c.

Turn topsy turvy, Haldo, tr. (mix).

| Tyallo, tr.

Tyalso, reflex,

Roll up, i Ee aigaaaad,

Tyal pato, &e. c.

‘Prwakko, tr. (see unfold).

Prwangso, reflex.

Prwangyi, pas.

Prwang pato, &e. ¢.

Be loose, slack, Thyelvimdytimo, n.

Thyelvim pawo, tr.

Thyelvim paso, refl.

Thyelvim payi, pas.

Thyelvim papato, ec.

Be tight, Muske dyamo, n.

Tighten, Muske pawo, tr.

Chakko, tr.

Chingso, reflex.

Chuingyi, pas.

Ching pato, &e. c.

Prokko, tr.

Prongso, reflex.

Prongyi, pas.

Prong pato, c.

Kura pawo, tr.

Kira paso, reflex.

Kura payi, pas.

Ktira papato, c.

Unpack, Prwakko (see unro)).

Turn over

carefully,

Unroll,

Loosen, slacken,

Bind,

Unbind,

Pack,

514

Climb or get up, f Wogno, n.

tree, &. } Wo6pato.

Come down, Yiwo, n.

Kwado, tr.

Put on (fire), { Knivo, reflex.

Kwadi, pas.

Nito, tr.

Take off (fire), 4 Niso, reflex.

Niti, pas.

Piko, tr. Wondo,

F | Pineso, r. Wonso.

Put in Wonvi

onyl.

Pingpato, &e. Won-

pato.

Gleando, tr.

Glednso, refl.

aes cakes

See Wogno,

get in

(solid), | Pine p-

Pull out, Sate tks See issue,

Take out, te eed | Glugno.

&e. ¢.

Pour in (liquid), Piko (supra).

Dato, tr.

Daso, reflex.

Dati, pas.

Dapato, &e. ¢c.

Yuto, tr.

Take down [ vis rites, | See Yuwo,

01 | uyl, pas. [ame down.

Catch as poured,

Bring down, | Yapato,

&e. c.

Lwakto, tr.

Lwangso, reflex.

Lwakti, pas.

Cees &e. c.

Kato, tr.

Kuso, reflex.

Kiaiyi, pas.

Kapato, tr. c.

Stop, stay (to going f Jaso (reflect. or

man), intrans.)

Stop him, stay him, Jato, tr.

Stay or stop me, Jati, pas.

Cause him to stop, f Japato-paso-

stay, payi, c.

( Tyakko, tr.

Stay, stop, one who J Tyangso, reflex.

flees, or a road, ) Tyangyi, pas.

Tyang pato, &c. c.

reve s

Bara al { Tyakko, supra,

Let go, Lacho giwo.

Lane chapba pawo, tr.

Put up above,

See Kuwo,

Bring u

ere come up.

Enable Lane chapba paso, refl.

to go, } Lane chapba payi, pas.

Lane chapba papato, Kc. d.c.

Yallo, tr.

Rub, YAlso, reflex.

Yalyi, pas.

Yal pato, Cc.

Bihing Vocabulary.

| No. 6.

Phélephéle paso, reflex.

Phélephéle payi, pas.

Be polished, Phélephéle dyamo, n.

Cause to be f Phélephéle dyumpato-

polished, { paso-payi, c.

Sheumo, tr.

Sheumso, reflex.

Phélephéle pawo, tr.

Polish,

Cover, <q

Sheumyi, pas.

Sheum pato, &e. c.

Hoko, tr.

Bnceren ica reflex,

ongyi, pas.

Hongpato, &e. c.

Appo, tr.

Shoots race reflex.

my}, pas.

Ampato, &e. c.

Wirine. Chyardo, tr.

oe Chyurso, reflex.

Twist neck, Cl a aa i

cloth, &. ot

Chyurpato, &c. ¢.

Chéwo, tr.

Chéso, reflex.

Chéyi, pas.

Chépato, ec.

Be like, resemble, Deu-wo, n.

Make like, Deu pato- paso-payi, c.

Be white or clear, Bubum dydmo, n.

Bubum pawo, tr.

Bubum paso, reflex.

Bubum payi, pas.

Bubum papato, d. c.

Be wet, Jiso, reflex.

Jito, tr.

Jiso, reflex.

Jiti, pas.

Jipato, &e. c.

Be dry, Syeu-wo, n.

Make dry, Syeu-pato-paso- payi, c.

Blato, tr.

Dry in sun, {Bis reflex.

Blati, pas.

Gramdo, tr.

Gram<so, reflex.

Gramdi, pas.

Grampato, &e. ec.

Be flavoursome, Brégno, n.

Make flavoursome sens KE

: . ropaso, reflex.

or flavour it, Beihai

ropayi, pas.

Be sweet, Jijim dyimo, n.

Jijim dyimpato, tr. c.

Jijim pawo, tr.

Be sour, Phokko, n,

Make sour, Phong pato-paso-payi, c.

Be bitter, Kawo, n.

Make bitter, Kapate-paso-payi, e.

Twist or make

rope,

Make white or

clean ; whiten -

and cleanse,

Wet it,

Make wet,

Dry at fire,

Make sweet,

1857.]

Be knotted, Khingso, reflex.

Khikto, tr.

Khingso, reflex.

Khikti, pas.

Khingpato, &c. c.

Be great, Gndlo dyimo, n.

Make great, Gnodlo pawo, tr.

Be small, Yake or Kachim dyimo, n.

Make small, Yake or Kachim pawo, tr.

Be heavy, Hyallo, n. Hyalba dyimo, n.

Make heavy. Hyalpato, tr.

Be light, f Hammo, n.

(levis), \Hamba dyimo, n.

Make light, Hampato, tr. Hampapato, c.

Be bard, Tingko dytimo, n.

Harden, Tingko pawo, tr.

Be soft, Lobo dyimo, n.

Soften, Lobo pawo, tr,

Be straight, Dyamo, n.

Straighten, Dyampato-pdso-payi, c.

Be crooked, Giko, nu.

Kako, tr.

ate +) Kinayh reflex.

Knot it,

Make knotted,

Kingyi, pas.

King pato, &e. ¢.

Khiwo or

Be rich = have, hon dyuimo, | n.

Bwala,

Thipato, &c. ec.

Enrich = make J Thiba dy umpato-

have, paso-payi, ¢.

Bwalapato.

Ma thiwo.

Be poor, < Ma thiba dyaimo,

Ma bwala.

Ma thiba pawo.

Tnpoveri, | MA thi pato.

Ma bwala pato.

ADVERBS AND PREPOSITIONS

COMPARED.

Come, Piwo.

Come in (into the fKhyima gware piwo

house), or wogno,

Come out (of the ¢ Khyimatola piwo or

house), Glagno.

Come back, to rear, Notha piwo.

* These and all similars are imperatival gerunds.

Bahing Vocabulary.

515

Come on, to front, Gnalla piwo,

Come up, Yakhateu piwo or Kiwo.

Come down, Yakhayeu piwo or Liwo.

Come baek = ¢Létoko piwo, or

return, Léto.

Come again (repeat- Pauls or

ing), Ana-piwo.

Come once, Kwa bala piwo,

Come twice, Nip pala piwo.

Come thrice, Sap pala piwo.

Come four times, Lep pala piwo.

Come five times, Gn6 pala piwo.

Come six times, Ra pala piwo.

Come seven times, Cha pala piwo.

Come eight times, Ya pala piwo.

Come nine times, Ght pala piwo.

Come ten times, Kwaddyum pala piwo.

Come together, § Kwado pine or rane,

(place), { (verbs in plural).

Come at once, ( Kwa bala pine, (pine is

(time), t plural),

Come near, Nentha piwo.

Come close to him, Wake pimdi piwo.

Come apart, Hare piwo.

Come far away, Braba piwo.

Come with, Kwongkho piwo.

Come with me, G6 nung piwo.

Come alone, Giche piwo.

Come without 1c oe a

‘ Ga manthi piwo.

me, thee, him, i: hae

arem manthi piwo.

Come towards {ei la piwo.

me, thee, him, je eaderte

Come as far as this

or here, that or

there,

Come quickly, instantly, Bacheu piwo.

Come slowly, Wakha piwo.

Come by and by, Nein he Naic

piwo.

Come silently, Liba piwo.

Bréso or Bresomami or

Brésoko*—piwo.

Come early, Bacheu piwo.

Come late, Wakha piwo.

Come at sun-rise, Namdhamna* piwo.

Come at sun-set, Nam wamtana* piwo.

J Wakhawakhag wak-

lL koko* piwo.

Come over (by top), Khwatoko* piwo.

Eke sambh piwo.

Meke sambh piwo.

Come noisily,

Come loiteringly,

See verbs. When the expres-

sion is imperative the gerund sign is affixed to the imperative form of the verb;

when it is indicative, to the indicative form.

Come loiteringly is having loitered,

come. This is one of the many affinities with the Dravirian tongues.

516

Come under by f Hayu lang glignoko*

beneath, L piwo.

Alam lang

piwo.

Come between, Alimbu lang piwo.

Come across, paiaeooka piwe.

LGliso piwo

Come this side SJ Yése hamba) pi-

to jf that ? Hare bambaf wo.

Come constantly, Pisogno bwakko.

Come sometimes, Kayikayi piwo.

rawo,

piwo,

Come never, Gyanaiyo ma piwo.

Never come again, Gyanaiyo 4na ma piwo.

Come to, at, this side, Yékhola piwo.

Come by this side, Yékholang piwo.

Come to, at, that side, Mékhola piwo.

Come by that side, Mékhoidug piwo.

Come on the right, Jumrola piwo.

Come by the right, Jumrolang piwo.

Come on the left, Pérwla piwo.

Come by the left, Pérolang piwo.

Come to the east, Namdhapdi khalé piwo,

Come from the f Nam wamdikhalang

west, { piwo,

Come towards the house, Khyimla piwo,

Come from towards the f Khyim lang

Come through (by middle), 1

Come ever, Sadai

house, piwo.

Go towards the plains Dhepdela lawo

or diwo.

Go as far as Nepal, Népal sambh lawo.

Give a little, Akachi giwo.

Give much, Eko giwo.

Give secretly, Khleuso giwo.

Give openly, Kwainso paso giwo.

Give gladly, Gyarscho giwo.

Give sulkily, Ma gyarscho giwo.

Give to-day, Ana giwo.

Give to-morrow, Dilla giwo.

He gave yesterday, Sanamti gipta.

* These and all similars are imperatival gerunds.

Bahing Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Give mutually, Gi mose.

Hit mutually, Tyeum mose,

Kiss mutually, Lei mose.

Kill mutually, SA mose.

Give continually, Giso gno bwakko.

Hit continually, Teupsogno bwakko.

Sleep continually, Ipsogno-bwakko.

Strike forcibly, Soktimi teuppo,

Strike gently, Wakha teuppo.

A house, Khyim.

Of a house, Khyim ke, Khyim dim.

To a house, a house, arab tte aos

signs, )

In a house, Kbyim di.

From a house, Khyim ding,

By (inst.) house, Khyim mi.

Into (inside) house, Khyimaé gware.

Out of (outside) house, Kbhyima tola.

As far as house, Khyim sambh.

Towards or at the house, Khyim 1a.

From vicinity of house, Khyim lang.

Before the house, in Khyim 4 gnalla

front,

Behind the house, ? my 4

‘in Rea OR: “s Khyim a notha.

On the house )

(touching), f

Above the house

Khyim a tauredi,

Vehyim ding hatyu.

(remote),

Under, i Khyim

RO: Lene house (close), eee

Below the house Palit ,

fanart, Khyim ding hayu,

From under f Khyim ke hayu lang or

house, hayu ding,

In the under : P fla,

pr emee. { Kbyim ke hayu dit

In the above of f Khyim 4 taure di or

house, la.

f Khyim ke nentha or

Near the monse:S) Ihvae nentha.

See verbs. When the expres-

sion is imperative the gerund sign is affixed to the imperative form of the verb:

when it is indicative, to the indicative form.

This is one of the many affinities with the Dravirian tongues.

come,

Come loiteringly is having loitered,

+ Mose dual of mowo, which apart = fight: in composition of several verbs

= do, make.

t La _ expresses vicinity.

la-m of vicinity and la-ng, from vicinity.

house: whence di-m, of in and di-ng from

Khyim la, near, towards, at, the house: whence

So Di expresses inness, khyim di, in the

in. M final is attributive. See

adjectives and participles e. g. piba-me, I who come, I the comer, and kwagna

me, the other one, and lala-m, red.

§ Khyim nentha = the house is near and near the house, but the latter is better

with genitive sign: so also of khyim pumdi.,

in, also prevents the equivoque and is the true form for near the house,

having lost its sense as a noun cannot take the a.

Khyim @ pumdi, the house its side

Nentha

Nouns of place, however, take

dim rather than 4, as Khyim dim pumdi, literally, house in of side in.

1857.]

ig \ Khyim ding braba.

house,

J Khyim a pumdi.

meine house, | Khyim nentha.

On account of house, Khyim daso.

Bahing Vocabulary. a7

In lieu of house, or

In exchange for house, f

Through the house, Khyim 4 limbu lang.

Khyim a gnalla. =

house its beyond,

Khyim a phle.

Beyond the house,

BaniIne PREPOSITIONS.

At this time, Yekhonadi.

At that time, Myekbonadi.

At this place, Yekedi.

At that place, Myekedi.

In this year, Yem tho’di.

In that year, Myem tho’di.

In a little while, Ghyer Kwongmidi.

During, pending { Yem thomala theum.

this year, Yem - thobwana.

Pending his coming, Haremma pi thim.

At home, Khyim di.

In, within, the house, Khyim gware.

In the wilderness, Sabala di.

In my hand, Wa gu di.

In, at, Dorjiling, Dorjiling di.

Go into the house, Khyim gware lawo.

Aer a. Godi. “Wake di.

ey » JGadi. Ikedi.

me Haremdi, Akedi.

He gave to me, Go giwa.

He took it Go ding-*

from me,. 1 ding- fap

thee, him, | Harem ding-

He struck thee, Ga teupta.

Come into the house, Khyim gware piwo.

Go into the house, Khyim gware lawo.

Go into the water, Pwaku di wogno.

Come out of the

water,

The inside of the house, Khyim 4 gola.

The outside of the house, Khvim 4 tola.

Come from the outside f Khyim ke a

of the house, tolang piwo.

Come from the inside f Khyim 4 golang

of the house, \. glugno.

Come out from { Khyim ding 4 tola piwo

the house, or Khyim ding glugno.

Go with me, Go nung lawo.

Sit by me, Wake pumdi bwakko.

Pwaku ding glugno.

* More usual and correct perhaps is the inflective form Wake.

Come near me, Wake pumdi piwo.

Sit beside me, Wake 14 bwakko.

Sit on my knee, Wa phyemtodi bwakko.

Sleep in his bosom, Aphyemtodi ipo.

Put on thy shoulder, [ balamdi jeullo.

Throw in or into the { Me di piko.

fire, Mi gware piko.

Put on the fire, Mi taure jeullo.

Take off from the fire, Mi taureng blawo.

Put on, upon, the table, Mej taure jeullo.

Take off from the Mej taureng blawo.

table,

Get on, or mount, the ¢ Ghora taure

horse, wogno.

Get off, or dismount ] Ghora taureng

from, the horse, i glugno.

hes et Ghora taure jeullo.

Take off from the { Ghora taureng glun-

horse (goods), do or blawo.

On the head, Piya taure.

U Kholi yeu.

nder the feet, Sa oie e

10li gwayeu.

Put your cap on f Itakii piya taure

your head, _ jeullo,

Put grass under f{ A kholi gwayeu (ni-

his feet, chasmen) jim jeullo.

Above, higher than, his| A piya ding

head, hateu,

Beneath, lower than, | Wa kholi ding

my feet, hayeu. :

Above your house (lkhyim ding haten

is the canton- i la tilanga bwagdi

ment, kha.

I khyim ding hayeu

la ledikha jyap-

dikha.

Above the mouth is { Shed hateu la neu

the nose, 1 bwa,

But it is also

Below your house '

is the bazar,

equal my, Wakedi, in me or mine and Wakeding, from me or from my.

+ Gware = in, Gwayeu = under.

To the last answers ha-yeu the one, meaning

what touches, the other, what touches not, but lies below: so taure and ha-yeu, as

to what is above.

3 U

518

Below the mouth fSheé ha yeu la

is the chin, yoli bwa.

To, as far as, Nera. Pumdi.

As far as him, tale poms

arem néra.

As far as Nepal, Nepal pumdi.

Towards Nepal, Nepal pumla. Nepal la,

North of Nepal, Nepal ding hateu la.

Near Nepal, Nepal nentha.

Far from Nepal, Nepal ding braba.

Towards night, Namringna (day setting).

Towards morn- ies sona (day being

ing, born).

In the night, Teugnachidi.

In the day, Namtidi.

Cruel towards his § Tamitawake la deu-

children, { kha giba,

Be kind towards (Wake la neuwo.

me and mine, CWa ta ke la neuwo.

Sit above me, Wake ding hateu la bwako.

Sit between us §Wasike alimbu di

two, bwako.

Sit below him, Ake ding hayeu la bwako.

Put on me, Wake taure jyalo.

Put on him, Ake taure jydlo.

The water comes from f Pwaku hateu

above and goes be lang ya, ha-

low, yeu la la.

oe pop ef the { Syerte 4 gware di.

In the midst of the hill, Syerte 4 limbudi.

At the bottom of the hill, Syerte a pumdi.

From top of hill, Syerte a gware ding.

From middle of hill, Syerte 4 limbu ding.

From the bottom of fSyerte 4 pum

the hill, ding.

He dwells below hots ding hayeu la

me, bwa.

He dwells above § Wake ding hateu la

me, { bwa.

Sit on me, Wake taure bwako.

Press under me, Wake hayeu lam chimna.

(Gnari— hill top; Jujeu= tree top

or house top).

Underneath, under f{ Khosingba gwayeu

the chair, or a gwayeu.

Above, upon, the ¢Gu taure or, Gu a

hand, ; taure.

Put under, below, f Mej 4 gwayeu jy

the table, ulo.

Take out from under { Mej 4 gwa yeung

blawo.

Lapcho lang lawo or

Lapcho 4 limbu lang

the table,

Go through the

dacs, lawo.

Come through { Khyim gwarim piwo or

the house, Khyim 4 gwa lang piwo.

Go through the hole, Alam lang glugno,

Bihing Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Go through the river

Pwaku di gwakso

(wading),

{ glugno.

Ipdikha khwakso

lawo,

Go over the river in f Dunga di woso

boat, glugno.

Go under the couch, {P oe

glugno.

Go nung piwo.

Am-

nung lawo.

Harem-

Why should I gof Ga nung marcho

with thee, lagna.

Go without me, Go manthi lawo.

Strike with force, Sokti mi teupo.

Strike without force, Sokti manthi teupo.

Sit before me, Wa gnalla di bwako.

Sit behind me, Wa notha di bwako.

Before, behind f{ Lapcho 4 gnalla di.

Go over the couch, {

Come with me,

Go with him,

the door, Lapcho 4 notha la.

Opposite, Vis-a- { Wa gnalla la.

Vis-me, Wa gnalla di.

Sit at my side, Wake pumdi bwako.

Towards his side, Ake 4 pumla,

In the middle, Alimbu di.

To, at, the side, Apumdi.

Namrikso gnalla.

Teugnachi dyumtheum.

Namma riktheum,

Namma wamtheum.

Nam rikcho beladi.

ringna,

At night fall, ae {

Before night,

wamtana.

Nam wancho beladi.

Nam-wamso

Slhaeae { notha.

Nam wamtako.

Nam riktako.

Since dawn, Didila mekeng.

Before dawn, Didila gnalla.

After dawn, Didila notha.

Since I came, Gopitina mekeng.

Before my arrival, Gojokpicho gnalla.

After my arrival, Gojokpicho notha.

After to-morrow, Dilla mekeng.

Before to-morrow, Dilla ma dyumtheu.

‘ Nam ringna,

By night fall, one arn teeial

Until night or { Teugnachi sambh.

Up to night | Nam wamtana sambh.

Towards the house, Khyim 14.

Towards me, Wake 1a.

Towards night, Nam rikcho pawana.

Teugnachi lana,

Nam dhamna.

At dawn, Nam dhamna.

During the night, Teuguachi dyumna.

After night fall,

Towards dawn,

1857.]

By the time I arrive, Pignana.

By the time thou arrivest, Piyena.

By the time he arrives, Pina.

After my arrival, Go piso notha,

After thy arrival, Ga piso notha.

Round about the ( Khyim harela ye-

house, sela,

About the house, Khyim apumdi.

In the middle of the { Dyel Bea di

village,

On this side the river, Gulu yem pumdi.

On that side the G y

river, ; ulu myem pumdi.

He pierced him through f Ram hotako

the body, sata.

He went Le lang glutako

the door, lata.

Go by the door, Lapcho lang lawo.

Go by the road, Lamlang lawo.

Far from the house, Khyim ding braba,

Mi nentha,

Near the fire, ; Mi pumdi.

Mi 4 pumdi.

Near me, Wake pumdi.

, Yem ding notha.

After this, that, Myem tae notha.

i i lla.

Before this, that, { rae ae Goa

Instead of, in lieu of,

that,

For the sake of me, Wake daso.

For the love of thee I { Dwaktana ko-

{ Myem ke Aphle.

did it, patong.

For the love of me he .

dia it, { Dwakti kopapto.

As far as the house, Khyim a pumdi.

Short of, not so far as,

the house, Y

Beyond the house, Khyim harcla.

With a house there ¢ Khyim dyumna

may be a marriage \ groche dyum.

Without (wanting) a {ogre manthi

{ Khyim yesela.

house there cannot groche ma

be a marriage, dyum,

With a house het Kiya thi kheda

will marry if he groche pawa.

have, Ke.

Without a house { Khyim manthi kheda

he will i (or manthi) groche

marry, ma pawa.

With me, Go nung,

Without me, Go manthi.

With thy father, I po nung.

Without my father, Apa manthi.

I go not, Ma lagna.

| In the meanwhile, Yékhona.

Bihing Vocabulary. 519

father, an tawo. Apomanthime

orphan, tawo.

A child without / Npomanthiba

For the purpose of f Khyim pacho

building a house, daso.

In the middle of the f Khyim 4 limbu-

house, di.

Even with, on level { Khyim nung kwang

with, the house, khome.

! ; Gyerstako,

With a will (bongre), Gyerscio.

Without against the { Magyerstako.

will (malgre), Magyerscho.

Willy, nilly, Gyerscho ma gyerscho.

IE eg { Wancha ma visthim.

husband,

For the love of her ¢ Wancha dwak

husband, { tako.

After the manner of if Newar dau khwag

the Newars, ¢ no.*

In the form of fish, Gna khwogno.

After the manner of the f Leucha dau

Tibetans, khwogno.

In the disguise of

a Tibetan, { Leucha khwogno.

CoNJUNCTIONS.

And, No word for it.

Also, likewise, Yo.

Or, No term for it.

Nor, No word.

Nor this, f Yam ye ma.

Nor that, \Myam ye ma.

Moreover. Besides, Myam taure.

Than (comp.) Ding.

As, Gyekho.

So, Mekho.

As, so, like, fYé khwogno.

this, that, [Mé khwogno.

How ? what like, Gye khwogno.

How? in what way, Gyé-khopaso.

As well as, Yé khome neuba.

As ill as, Yé khome-ma neuba.

But, Naka.

Nevertheless. Notwithstanding, Naka.

Though, yet, still, Naka.

If, Khéda.—Khédda.

If not, unless, Ma kheda,.

Except, Waso.

Whether or not, Bwala ma bwala.

Mékhona.

Thereon, Myem taure.

To wit, that is f Daso data.

to say, ‘(UMara dayena.

* Khwogno = like; the word for manner or form is kho.

aU 2

520

J Marcho.

Why, UMaragna.

Because, since, § Yem papteko.

As, Myem paptako.

Yes, Aje (true),

Bihing Vocabulary.

[ No.. 6.

No, Maa, (it is not).

Verbal negative, Ma.

Verbal prohibitive, Ma,

Noun privitive, Ma.

Banting ADVERBS.

Adverbs of time.

To-day, Ana.

To-morrow, Dilla.

Yesterday, Sanamti.

Day after to-morrow, Niti.

Day before yesterday, Nikhabol.

This year, Yemthoche.

Last year, Santho.

Year before last, Niware.

Coming year, Mata.

Year after that, Niwa.

Now, Yékhona.

Then, Mékhona,

When ? Gyéna.

When, rel., Gyéna.

Then, correl , Mékhona.

Instantly, Bachéu.

By and by, Gyer kwongmi.

At once, at one time, Kwongkho.

Before, priorly, Gnalla,

After, afterwards, Nola.

Since, Gyéna.

Till, until, No word. It is expressed by

theum added to the root and the

negative, or by the negative gerund.*

eee \ Ana sambh (sambh is Khas.)

Till then, Metti namti.

Till when ? how long? Giskonamti.

Formerly, long ago, Nyéshé.

At present, now a days, Xnampilli.

Whilst, Mim, added to a verb, or the

gerund simply.t

Henceforth, |

Hereafter, f

Lf a)

Thereafter, yMemnatatimekeng.

Ever, No word.

Never, Genaiyo.

Often, Yako pala.

Anamekeng.

How often, Gisko pala.

Sometimes, No word.

Once or twice, Kwa bale nippale.

Once, Kwa bale.

Twice, Nippale.

Thrice, Sapale.

Four times, Seppale.

Five times, Gné pale.

Six times, Ra pale.

Seven times, Cha pale.

Eight times, Ya pale.

Nine times, Ghii pale.

Ten times, Kwaddyum pale.

Early, Bachem pasomami.

Late, Wakha pasomami.

In the day, Nam bwoktana.

At nig ace

ne the night, (Tengndehi dyumtana.

All day, Nam dongmoékho.

Daily, Namtike namti.

At sunrise, Namdhamna.

f Ba grina.

? Ba gricho pawano.

At dawn, Hauhaudyumchopawana.

Nam wamtana.

Nam wamcho pawana.

At dusk, No word.

: Nam rigna.

arene. eee dyumna.

From night till fTeugnachi mekeng

morn, didila sambh,

At noon, Namhelschodi.

At midnight, Teugnachi helschodi.

To-morrow morning, Dilla didiladi.

Yesterday at night, Sanamtiten gnachidi,

In two or three days, Nikkla sakkha.

In three or four days, Sakkha sekkha.

In four or five days, Sekkha gnokkha.

At cock crow

At sunset,

| How long? Gisko namti.

* e. g. stay till I come, géma pignana, or g6 ma pi theum, bwakd.

t+ e. g. whilst he lives I will not go, Harem blenmim g6 ma lagna.

Harem gwaktana dokta.

was walking he fell down.

Whilst he

1857.]

As long, rel. Gisko namti.

So long, correl, Metti namti,

Again, repeatedly, Anaiyo.

Again, returning, Létako,

Adverbs of Place.

Here, Yéke.

There, Myéke.

Where? Gyéke.

Where, rel. Gyéke.

There, correl, Méke. Mekegnd.

Here and there, Harela yesela.

Hither, , ,

Hereward, | Yékhold.

Thither, ue Fe

Thereward, P™! er

Hence, Yékeng.

Thence, Myékeng.

Whence? Gyélang.

Whence, rel. Gyélang.

Thence, correl. Myekeng.

By what way ? Agyem lamlang.

By this way, Yem lamlang.

By that way, Myem lamlang,

How near? Gisko nentha.

How far ? Gisko braba.

How far? i. e. to ,

ree damit, leyéla (where).

This far, Yeke (here).

That far, Myéke (there),

Near, Nentha,

Far, Braba.

How near ? Gisko nentha,

How far ? Gisko braba.

From after, Braba lang.

From near, Nentha lang,

In the near, Nentha di,

In the far, Braba di.

This near, Yeti nentha.

That near, Myeti nentha.

Anaiyo nentha.

Yemdinganaiyo nentha.

Nearest, very f Hauppeding nentha,

near, Thé nentha.

Rather near, Dekho nentha,

Rather far, Dekho braba.

Very far, Thé braba.

Up or upwards, (an accli- f Hateula.

vity whence water comes, | Yakayeula.

From up, from above) yy. Oy,

of slope, \VHateu lang.

Nearer,

Bihing Vocabulary.

521

From down, from bel

of slope,

Up (perpendicular), Tadre,

Gware.

Down (ditto), , Gwayveu.*

Vive atest

From above, perpendicular, Taureng.

Apumyeung.

From below, ditto, {ware

Gwayeung.

Upwards, ditto, Taurela.

Downwards, ditto, Gwayeula. Yeula.

Upwards (on slope), Hateula.

Downwards (on slope), Hayeula.

On the top, Ajujudi.

In, at, the bottom, Apumdi.

Ajujuding,

Ajuju lang.

From the bottom, Apumding.

Out (issuing), Gluko. Glutako,

In (entering), Woko. Wotako.

Out, outside, Atola (with noun).

In, within, Gware. Agware.

Towards this side, Yesehamba la.

Towards that side, Hare hamba la.

On this side, Yese hamba di.

On that side, Hare hamba di.

: Hare hamba. .

On both sides,{ yore hace di.

Round, Khirsoko,

Before, Gnalla.

After, Notha,

Opposite, vis a vis, Gnalla.

Abreast, Kwongkho,

Straight onwards, No word.

Onwards, forwards, Gnalla 1a,

Backwards, Nothala,

omy Hayevu lang,

| From the top,

Adverbs of manner, cnuse, quality,

quantity, &e.

Yékho.

Yekhopasa.

Mvekho.

Myekhopasa.

Gyegna.

Maragna.

Marha,

How P in what

way,

Thus, in that

way,

Why ? for what reason,

For this reason, Yé gnaP

For that reason, Myé gna ?

How P what like? Gyekhome.

This like, Yekhome.

* Taure and gware are chiefly prepositions and the latter means rather in below.

Gwayeu is better for the latter, or yeu.

verbs express the meanings,

But none of them quite answers. The

522 Béhing

That like, Myekhome.

How much ? how many ? Gisko.

As many, as much, Gisko,

So many, so much, Metti.

How often P Gisko pala.

How great? Gisko gndlo.

How small? Gisko yake.

Neuba pawoko.

Neuba paso.

Neuba pasomami,

Neuba pawako.

Neuba paptako.*

Ill, badly, wrongly, Maneuba paso, &c.

Wisely JS Jokso and Joksomami, &c.

’ \Teuso and Teusomami, &c.*

! f Majoksomami.

Foolishly, ‘L Mateusomami.t

Hungrily, Solimi.

Thirstily, Pwaku dwaktimi.

Well, rightly,

Pees Soksomi pawoko.

StlY? ) Sokso paso, &c,

Gladly, fGyersimi, Gyersipaso.

Joyfully, \Gyersoko.

Strongly, Soktimi. Soktipawoko, &c.

Weakly, Sokti manthimi.

Gently, Wakha paso or pawoko, &c.

Syandami yandapaso or pa-

soko or pawoko,

Silently, Liba dyumso,

With blows, Teupsomami. Teuptako.

Evenly, on level with, Deuso.

Evenly, straightly, smoothly, Deuso.

Much, a great | Dhékwong.

deal, Dhékong.

A little, Dékho.

Noisily,

Neither more nor less, Madékho ma thé.

Less, Dékho.

More, Tié.

Again (afresh), Gapti. Anaiyo.

Back (the same), Leti. Letako.

Thoroughly, f{Theumsomami.

Completely, (Yako. Hauppe.

Dekho bwaso.

Partially, < Dékho jyulsomami.

Dékho jyultako.

Vocabulary.

[No. 6.

Helpasoko.

Helpasomami.

Helpattako.

Helpawako.

Hampaso.

Hampasomami.,

Hampattako.

( Beives.

Tightly, < Khipsomami.

| epee:

(‘Thyelvim paso.

|e pasomami.

Heavily,

Lightly,

F Hampawoko.

Slackly, Thyelvim paptako.

Thyelvim pawako.

Greatly, Dhekong.

Slightly, trivialiy, Dékho.

In cowardly fGnimami. Gnitako.

way, Gniko.

Gnima manthimi.

Bravely, | Masso

Magnitako.

Modestly, Gnunemi. Gnune pawoko.

Impudently, Gnune manthi.

Secretly, Khleuscho mami.

Kwainsopascho.

Kwainsopaschomami.

Jestingly, Rischomami.

Seriously, Ajedaso mami.

Slowly, Wakha.

Gruksomami.

Hastily, erat,

Gruktako.

Mortally, Byaktam sambh.

Skin deep, Akokte sambh.

Together, Kwongkho.

Separately, Wang wang.

Singly or one

by one,

Solitarily, T'gicha.

With a companion, Warcha nung,

A foot, Gwakoko. Gwakso.

On horse back, Wognoko,

Truly Aje dasomami.

“>? \LAje dyumsomami.

Falsely, Limochelso,

Openly,

{ Kwong kwong paso.

* All these are gerundial, like the great majority of the adverbs. But if

imperation is involved, the gerund sign is added to the imperative, not to the

indicative.

+ Or with main verb in indicative, ma jogako for present and ma joktako for

preterite sense. See note at “wisely.” This is merely the negative form of the

same word obtained by prefixing the particle of negation or ma.

(The remainder in the neat volume.)

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

we $y 2

| i = i | Range of the Barometer 3 = Range of the Tempera-

| “En ES during the day. - ture during the day.

= Ze AE

Date. on = = 9

$34 | Max. | Min. | Dif. | $& | Max. | Min. | Diff.

s =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. |} Inches. o o 0 o

1 30.031 | 30.118 | 29.970 0.148 | 66.8 76.6 60.0 |166

2 099 |} 169 | 30.042 1127 66.7 76.0 59.4 | 16.6

3 .106 .204: .050 154 | 67.5 S41 5 |p0.0 | 17.1

4 Sunday.

5 .097 .150 .050 100 | 70.8 80.0 | 63.5 | 16.5

6 144 214 .099 115 Ve 71 80.2 63.5 | 16.7

7 .094 171 .021 150 | 71.9 81.0 63.8 | 17.2

8 .080 .156 -029 127 72.1 80.3 66.0 | 14.3

9 .095 191 .053 1388 | 69.1 | 77.4 62.8 | 14.6

10 .089 .160 041 119 67.9 76.5 60.7 | 15.8

11 | Sunday. |

12 .099 187 .040 147 67.2 77.4 59.7 117.7

13 A313 .190 .055 .135 65.6 76.0 56.7 | 19.3

14 .092 167 .045 122 | 66.3 76.6 57.4 | 19.2

15 .055 140 | 29.990 | .150 | 66.7 74.9 60.6 | 14.3

16 -060 .130 | 30.018 | 112 66.6 74.3 61.0 | 13.3

17 .037 114 | 29.975 .139 64.6 73.9 57.6) | 16.3

18 | Sunday. |

19 | 29.999! .089| .988| .151| 63.1 | 75.3 | 58.0 |17.3

20 30.004: .090 944 | 146 62.9 W31 54.6 | 18.5

21 .009 .108 .954 154 | 61.8 (eS 52.8 | 20.5

22 29.986 .076 .918 158 62.1 72.2 53.6 | 18.6

23 979 .067 .920 147 62.8 75.0 53.9 | 21.1

24 .968 .059 913 146 63.9 76.3 54.4 | 21.9

25 Sunday. |

26 .938 .015 887 128 | 69.3 81.6 59.4 | 22.2

27 .902 | 29.979 842 137 |, 714 » |. 82.26 |.68.6 | 18.6

28 881 956 833 123 | 73.7 | 84.1 | 65.4 | 18.7

29 .882 .955 .830 125 T3s0 84.5 64.4 | 20.1

30 .873 .951 .818 .133 roi s 84.9 63.8 | 21.1

31 .887 .965 841 124 TAA 84.3 66.4 | 17.9

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

the day.

il Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

5 Walaa So) eR aoe ylinere

5 Sook Shasta roatll a ooh Ute eau ee

Secale ace ei ye

3 e E = iS) Ne = 2 os Ne

Date." Fe, 2 A S 62 | EBs | & Fx

J ~~ % io) cs oe mS — ov = i=}

Satie 2 e = a= ae) eo8) o's

ea = 2 2 | M2) es | Ska! eos

S| a) = is iy oe [eee bat

i) = } aos Som) 88'6

a-| Pb g PAY ie So |3aea sos

= A O A a = < =

o o o ty) Inches.| T. gr. | T. gr.

1 61.6 5.2 58.5 8.3 0.498 5.51 | 1.75 | 0.76

2 62.0 4.7 59.2 7.5 .509 64. 59 78

3 63.3 A.2 60.8 6.7 537 94 48 80

4 | Sunday.

5 65.4 5.4 62.7 8.1 572 6.29 91 77

6 66.2 4.9 63.7 7.4: 591 50 78 79

vi 66.9 5.0 64.4: 7.5 .605 63 85 78 -

8 67.7 4:4 65.5 6.6 .628 .88 65 81

9 62.9 6.2 59.8 9.3 .520 5.73 2.05 74

10 60.9 7.0 56.7 | 11.2 469 17 4 69

11 Sunday

12 60.2 7.0 56.0 | 11.2 458 07 28 .69

13 59.4: 6.2 55.7 9.9 453 .03 1.97 72

14 61.3 5.0 58.3 8.0 AD AT .68 17

15 62.3 4.4, 59.7 7.0 518 74 49 -79

16 61.3 5.3 58.1 8.5 A491 43 78 75

7h 58.9 5.7 55.5 | 9.1 450 OL wah 74

18 Sunday

19 58.6 6.5 54.7 | 10.4 438 | 4.87 | 2.02 y(t

20 55.2 7.7 49.8 | 13.1 371 14 .29 .64

2) 55.2 6.6 50.6 | 11.2 381 .26 1.95 .69

22 54.6 7.5 49.3 | 12.8 365 07 | 2.20 65

23 56.1 6.7 51.4 | 11.4 092 38 .03 .68

24, 57.0 6.9 OZ re Ling 402 48 15 .68

25 Sunday.

26 62.6 6.7 59.2 | 10.1 .509 5.62 21 ae

27 66.6 4.8 64,2 7.2 .601 6.60 1.75 we

28 67.8 oan 64.8 8.9 613 71 2.25 75

29 65.9 7.4: O22) 11.1 563 15 ‘69 °>) Sie

30 65.9 7.8 62.0 | 11.7 559 10 .86 .68

31 67.2 7.2 63.6 | 10.8 590 43 72 70

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants.

Meteorological Observations. ill

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

‘o 2 . | Range of the Barometer | = 3 Range of the Temperature

vor J s 4 4

== for each hour during faa) = for each hour during

Hour - = ey the month. ate the month.

"loa & as aan

ao” ; ’ s 2 : af

eS | Max. Min. Diff. sel | Max. Min. Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches.| Inches.' Inches. Oo on 0 0

Mid-

night, 30.022 (| 30.148 [29.874 0.274 64.2 70.5 56.7 13.8

1 .014: .140 .870 .270 63.4 69.8 56.0 13.8

2 .010 118 .853 .265 62.5 69.0 55.0 14.0

3 |29.998 -106 841 .265 62.2 68.6 54.8 13.8

A .995 102 841 .261 61.5 68.2 54.2 14.0

5 .998 114 847 .267 60.9 67.8 53.5 14.3

6 130.020 13S .856 20d 60.5 Gi 53.0 14.1

7 .043 £55 .883 272 60.2 66.4 52.8 13.6

8 .072 191 .917 274, 62.0 68.6 54.6 14.0

9 .096 207 .936 271 65.9 tose 59.0 133

10 -102 .214 .949 .265 69.1 75.4: 62.0 13.4

11 .086 .201 .930 BAT AA 71.9 79.2 65.3 13.9

Noon. .055 G2 .909 .263-| 74.6 | 81.4 67.8 13.6

1 .018 .143 .876 .267 76.5 83.4 70.3 TS.

2 |29 993 123 .853 .270 Wigs, 84.4 71.8 12.6

3 .977 104, 834 .270 77.9 84.9 72.2 12.7

4, 971 .108 .830 .278 76.1 83.4 709 125

5 .973 38 .820 .293 74.7 816 69.0 12.6

6 .980 121 818 .303 72.0 78.8 66.2 12.6

v4 .997 .126 .838 .288 70.0 76 0 64.3 11.7

8 |30.017 .152 -856 .296 68 4 74.8 61.6 13 2

9 .030 .163 .873 .290 67.2 73 6 60.6 13.0

10 -035 By ir .879 .298 66.1 | 726 59.4 13.2

11 .032 .162 875 287 65.5 71.6 58.5 131

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the Observations made at the several hours

during the month.

iv Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Caleutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

2 . 2 |. S oe | sae tees

| 3 | = So A S -_ ee B-|-S ee

ole ee E > eh Q oer oe

Se 403 a2 E 25 Baa iso

s 2 ® ae Ss = Se ee hh ee

=i) S 3 su vO ea Pe, | eee

& 8 ef) a ais = = stim || Sef] obs

ae | ie ee ewe gee) BSL ees 2

= a tS) a = Seo hae gé

oy) 0 0 0 Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

he 60s | 34 | sea’! we poses | sea | nace) os

1 60.3 3.1 58.1 5s! AQ1 AT .06 84

2 59.5 3.0 57 A 5.1 480 .36 0.99 84

3 59.1 3.1 56.9 5.3 472 27 1.02 84

A: 58.7 2.8 56.7 4.8 469 24 0.92 .85

5, 58.0 2.9 55.7 5.2 A538 .08 .96 84

6 57.7 2.8 55.5 5.0 450 .05 .92 .89

7 57-5 27 55.3 A.9 AAT 02 .89 85

8 58.7 3.3 56.4 5.6 464 18 1.07 83

9 60.8 5.1 57.7 8.2 485 BF .69 76

10 62.3 6.8 58.9 10.2 504 56 2.22 72

11 63.6 — 8.3 59.4 12.5 O43 61 87 .66

Noon. | 64.7 9.9 59.7 14.9 518 65 3.55 61

1 65.5 11.0 60.0 16.5 023 .67 4.08 28

2 65.5 12.0 59.5 18.0 O15 57 AT 56

3 65.7 12.2 59.6 18.3 L6G 59 4) .55

4, 64.6 11.5 58.8 17.3 .503 46 Riri My

5 64.8 9.9 59.8 14.9 220 .66 3.97 .61

6 64.9 7.2 61.3 10.7 046 .99 2.51 71

7 64.2 5.8 61.3 8.7 046 6.01 1.99 “75

8 63.3 5.1 60.2 8.2 527 5.82 .80 .76

9 62.6 4.6 59.8 7 A, .b20 S75 .60 78

10 62.0 4.1 59.5 6.6 O15 70 .40 .80

Lt 61.8 3.7 59.6 5.9 516 a3. .20 82

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

Meteorological Observations. v

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Solar radiation, Weather, &ce.

“i ecirro cumuli.

ed |e |

So-8 |S.a0

.| 28 |S & 8) Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

2; 43 [83° of the Wind.

4 tas]

Al a” |ged

fe) Inches

1} 130.0 .. (iN. W. Cloudless till 6 a. M. scattered i till

8 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

2} 126.0 SN Cloudless.

3} 130.9 a N. W. & W. Cloudiess.

4) Sunday.

5| 135.5 a. JIN. We & S.-W: | Cloudless till 10 a. mM. scatd. \i & “i

till 5 p.M.cloudless & foggy afterwards.

6} 136.0 a, Variable. Cloudless till 4 Pp. Mm. scatd. i after-

wards, also fogey after sunset.

Wetae>,|-., |N.& N. W; Cloudless till 1 p. mM. scatd. -i till 6

P.M. cloudless afterwards. Also fogey

in the morning and evening.

8} 131.0 . | Variable. Scatd. \i & “i till 9 a.m. cloudless till

11 a. M. scatd. 7i till 4 Pp. m. cloud-

less afterwards.

9} 129.2 N. W. Cloudless ‘till 7 a. m. scatd. “i till

Noon, cloudless afterwards.

10) 127.0 Lica fl Ns Coo WWE Cloudless.

11) Sunday.

12) 133.5 a UNS NW: Cloudless.

13, 131.0 eT Ne Cloudless till 7 a. Mm. seatd. +i & \i till

6 pe. M. cloudless afterwards.

14) 129.0 . |W. & Calm. Cloudless till 6 a. mM. scatd. “i till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

15) 115.0 s W. Scatd. “i till Noon, scatd. i till 6

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

16} 111.5 N. Cloudless till 2 a. ., cloudy till 6 p.m.

) cloudless afterwards.

17) 131.0 é N. W. Cloudless till 6 a. M. scatd. \i & i till

6 ep. M. cloudless afterwards.

18) Sunday.

19) 133.0 ea ANN. WW Cloudless.

20) 129.0 Bae tal WM Cloudless.

21) 133.0 eo leave We Cloudless.

22) 132.0 - N. W. Cloudless.

23| 1380.4 N. &N. W. Cloudless.

24! 133.2 He N. W. & N. Cloudless.

25| Sunday.

26} 138.2 Calm & 8 Cloudless. [ing.

27| 141.0 Variable, Cloudless and heavy fogs in the morn-

28) 141.0 Ss. & W Cloudless and foggy in the morning.

29) 140.0 are Ss. W. Cloudless.

30) 143.0 ae N. W.&S. W. Cloudless.

31{ 134.0 se 8. & W. Cloudless.

Mi Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, VW~i nimbi, —i strati,

Vi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly «Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

on the month of January, 1857.

Montuty REsvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, we 30.022

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 4. M. on the Gth, .. 90.214

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the 30th, .. 29.818

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, 7 w. =: 0.896

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ia es 68.0

Max. Temperature, occurred at 3 P. M. on the 30th, oe ea 84.9

Min. Temperature, occurred at 7 A. M. on the 21st, ae 15 52.8

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, , 32.1

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, By. 61.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb na ecm iz 6.1

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, Be 58.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Daw Point, ne 9.8

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, ... ae . 0,493

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, ie “Se dee 5.44

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ie 2.09

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.72

Inches.

Rained No. days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, ... ro Nil.

Total amount of rain during the month, a3 m. &. Nil.

Prevailing direction of the W tdi seas mat hs N.W.&N.

Meteorological Observations. Vil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of January, 1857.

Montuny REsvUtts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour, Si |é 5 | 3 S é Ae Cae

A= ae el SEs] .|SF Slee]

N.|ce 477, [ce PIS: 08 bon [ot IB oe ts Ink IS | |

of days. |

Midnight. A 1 , 5] Fl PQ) PO F565

1 5 1 15] fa 72 9) 14

2 4 1 PAL Fal Pal) [lop tos

3 A Al 42) 1] 12) 7 4

4 A M3) t 3h Pa AB) is

5 Ay | 2) |3l 73! fll dg

6 6} | 1 2 a el EL D

7 5| § 4 1 2 2, 43 9 1

8 7 5 1 2 1-3 400 PBI

9 Cilla ari 1 ime 15 a Ve 6

10 10 5 12) gai 13 5

11 il A, 1 Zz He 2 6

Noon. 5) 15 ery Pay Pl We

if 5} fl 4, 4) 113

2 4. 6 6} {11

3 2 a DAW GL iit 8 Da

4 3) 3 8} 13

5 2 2 8) |15

6 i) 0 ia 6} {11

a 6 1 2 2 5| 111 1

8 7 2} 13i 73 ful 7a

9 9 3) [2] T3l jsi fal

10 8 3 2 4, 18) 72

11 7 3] 13 3 8 2)

‘

ee Shee

: a ' ny és ‘

= : 2 = ia

oe “a BS Se te Se te Oe

| - 2S ae <n : >} a

E oe Se ee ee

- i )

5 =a A NR Ca ORS a ALES Ta

: : : :

; [o ~ y

Z ; i “ - ~ : a — =

*; ao) Se Ree —~ os =

> : ee 2 ~ aS :

pa: 1 fe 4) Sb SPAS oF Sd GT SS te ‘. = = 3

Sage ie pes ee fet pS 5 As I. ee we = _ ee FE

5 = Pa i == aa 2 “ 4 és

a = ‘ : 4 - ~ > ae - i j

= ot a a |

= — pana I Et NR A ADS A ———— <n tient a : '

? 7 ‘ aa cee - a

‘inlet

Sieh se Bech ew te 7 ot SE we op Os te ce

eee i en a ee

< . ie 4 a ‘ ’ . .

ea c seuss ee - =) Se 23 st at 8 oe a oe oer E - Ss (os ae

= os — > SE SS Be oe ni Ne OF ale (=D ~~ ad SY

a j ; =. = a E : Se 2 =— |

_ :

ag wd! Chen Riker ari ‘

4 sameeren ahs: die ni vhhir -Spreangrhemiet Abani

Meteorological Observations. 1x

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 24” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

oo 5

2 o.3 Range of the Barometer 2 g Range of the Tempera-

Sp 2 = during the day. a 5 ture during the day.

oS °

Hos as

3 ao? : = 2 d

£ Son Max Min Diff. Se Max. | Min. | Diff

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 ) tr) ft)

1 | Sunday.

2 | 29.903 |29.987 | 29.850 0.137 74.5 83.6 67.2 | 16.4

3; .915 | 380.001 845 .156 73.1 84.2 63.2 | 21.0

4 ! 914 |29.989 | .853 | 136 | 75.4 | 860 | 68.0| 18.0

5 .928 | 30.006 .858 148 72.5 80.8 65.6 | 15.2

6 -985 .082 .926 156 70.2 78.9 62.8 | 16.1

7 ES oh .078 912 .166 rious 79.0 62.2 | 16.8

8 | Sunday

9 906 | 29.983 856 27 72.3 84,4 62.4 | 220

10 .956 | 30.043 .906 137 73.1 82.6 65.0 | 17.6

il 945 .038 881 od 71.6 81.1 64.4 | 16.7

12 .923 021 .858 163 69.9 79.8 62.0 | 17.8

13 879 | 29.961 .798 163 71.0 82.4 60.5 | 21.9

14 -869 947 807 140 73.3 84,2 63.6 | 20.6

15 =| Sunday.

16 890 968 .829 139 “iS 86.0 72.0 | 14.0

17 903 985 847 138 Udit 87.2 71.6 | 15.6

18 .962 | 30.043 1909 134 77.2 85.8 71.6 | 14.2

19 951 049 .862 187 76.1 86.1 69.4 | 16.7

20 902 | 29.995 .819 176 75.6 86.0 66.0 | 20.0

21 .832 908 787 151 77.2 86.0 40.8 | 15.2

22 | Sunday.

23 774 862 711 151 78.4 89.8 69.3 | 20.5

24: 817 904 .760 144 77.2 87.8 68.2 | 19.6

25 .805 874 £735 .139 78.6 87.9 70.0 | 17.9

26 “794 872 127 ol45 79.3 88.8 72.6 | 16.2

27 775 846 BOT 149 79.2 88.4 2 | Mega

28 odio 851 (7A 1 .140 79.4 89.7 @1.8:| 29

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

x Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

Sor the month of February, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

} E Cae ag Bo

2 ° A o 5-5 ¢ 8 = *

a 8 2 2 SS eae ee

al = = o & s wee. he &

= Bs 3 ‘oS c= 5 = S

Date.| @ = E 3 = se - Lelos

o S = am OS | alo Bi koe

at a Rh = 2i\ 68 | 2 | bee ae

oO s 3 =) een Sos

sd ma 2. = a s = | 230/62 & wo

a : a re | S> | $8 |B aa) 8 88

= A Oo Q = = < =

o oy) | 0 o Inches. | T. gr.} TT. gr.

1 | Sunday.

2 66.4: 8.1 62.3 12.2 | 0.565 6.16 | 3.02 | 0.67

3 65.2 7.9 61.2 B19 044 5.95 | 2.84 | .68

4 69.3 6.1 66.2 9.2 .642 6.99 AA | ,.74

5 65.5 7.0 62.0 10.5 009 Lt om) 72

6 62.1 8.1 58 0 12.2 489 5.38 .67 | .67

7 61.4 8.7 57.0 13.1 473 .20 83 65

8 |Sunday.

9 64.2 8.1 60.1 12.2 .525 RAS) 83 | .67

10 64.9 8.2 60.8 12.3 537 88 91 .67

11 61.5 40.1 56.4 15.2 464 .08 | 3.32 61

12 60.7 9.2 56.1 13.8 459 05. |, 2008 .63

13 62.7 83 58.5 125 498 45 80 | .66

14 65.7 7.6 61.9 11.4 557 6.09 75 .69

15 |Sunday.

16 72.1 5.8 69.2 8.7 -708 7.67 49 76

| 71.9 5.8 69.0 8.7 -704 .62 48 | .75

18 70.5 6.7 67.1 10.1 .661 i ad 46.| 72

19 67.9 8 2 63.8 12.3 593 6.45 3.18 | .67

20 66.9 mw 62.5 13.1 .568 18 30 | .65

21 69.0 8.2 64.9 12.3 615 .69 .26 .67

22 |Sunday.

23 69.9 8.5 65.6 12.8 .630 82 AQ .66

24 70.0 7.2 66.4 10.8 646 7.01 2.94. | .71

25 70.9 Met 67.0 11.6 .659 12 3.26 .69

26 "19 7.4 68.2 11.1 .686 41 a8.) 76

o, | 726 | 66 |-693 | 99 | mua | .67| 289-| .78

28 73 3 6.1 70,2 92 .732 1 71 75

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. x1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

c s Range of the Barometer for| = a Gia, See See ee

aio 2 ; = 2 ture for each hour

<g.4 each hour during the oo dau Wi

mo oy month. >, uring the

Hour. o zB iz: = 3 month.

mn: ——— ,- As Ae

of oO

e+ | Max. | Min. | Diff Si | Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO oO 0 re)

Mid-

nia 29.896 |29.984 |29.773 0.211 70.8 75.3 64.0 | 11.3

1 .889 .990 759 231 70.1 74.8 63.6 | 11.2

2 874 O71 745 DIG), Coat 74.0 63:7 | 103

3 863 .959 £734 225 69.0 13.5 62.4 | 11.1

4: 861 .952 .728 224 68.4 73.2 61.6 | 11.6

5 .869 .968 742 .226 68.0 Taek 61.2 | 11.9

ig 886 .983 763 .220 67.5 72.6 60.6 | 12.0

7 912 /|30.010 .800 .210 67.4: 72.8 60.5 | 12.3

8 .939 .048 .820 .228 70.0 75.8 64.0 | 11.8

| .961 074: 844: .230 73.5 79.2 68.2 | 11.0

1p .955 .066 .839 227 79.1 84.6 face ) ELA

971 .082 84.6 .236 76.4 82.3 71.4 | 10.9

| Noon.| .929 .040 .809 238 81.5 86.9 736 | 130

: 1 892 .003 ie .226 83.4 88.8 76.5 | 12.3

2 860 | 29.966 747 219 84.4: 89.4 "768 | 11:6

| 3 | .836 | 946 | .705 241 84.7 | 89.8 | 78.9 | 10.9

4 826 932, .697 .235 84.2 89.6 78.0 | 11:6

5 .826 .926 702 224 82.6 88.6 76.6 | 12.0

6 833 .939 715 224 79.5 84.0 73.6 | 10.4

7 848 .946 £726 .220 76.9 82.0 71.5 10.5

8 .869 979 .762 217 75.2 79.5 69.8 9.7

9 .889 .988 £784 «204 73.9 79.4 67.8 | 11.6

10 .900 991 .788 .2038 72.6 77.6 67.3 | 10.3

mt .899 .989 .786 .2038 71.6 76.4: 65.0 | 11.4

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month, ;

Xil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of Hebruary, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Elygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

2 2 Gee hy 5 PS MSS eee

es o Aa cS) am 1S 52,4 2.5

oe > E > ete aan alae, et

: 3 4 o i eelyes = ep A

ome 2 Ss 2 = 8 | Ota |S Sees eine

Bae 2) Salger (Se. 8 sea ae

is a a Se) Le

sa |r| 2 |ee|] 8s | #82 Seesleas 2

= Qa oO Q a es < S

Se AG ate ey Peele Sea SSS Se ee a ee

ft) ft) o Oo Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

Mid- 4.2 | 645 | 63 | 0.607 | 668 | 1.52 0.82

night, | 656 Fe

1 66:2 (| ‘39 | 64.9) 4) v5.9 601 61 49 82

2 i ce a? en 609 ig! 22 85

3 e518 || (Be2-| | 64", jie 601 62 14 85

4 6g |) iach | eaaa ee 586 4G 16 85

5 648° | B2-|. 629 | 52 576 37 16 85

6 645 | 3.0! 627. | 48 572 33 09 85

7 | 642 | 32 |: 628] 5a! 365 25 14 85

8 657 | 48 | 63.59) 65 588 46 BA 81

9 67.6 | 59 | 646 | 89 609 66 2.24 "5

10 683 | Si || 642% | 122 601 53 3.19 67

11 68.4 | 10.7 63.0 | 16.1 578 24 4,29 59

Noon.| 69.1 12.4 62.9 | 18.6 576 19 5.12 A159

1 69:4 | 14.0:| .62.4° | 21.0 567 06 .90 51

2 69.4 | 15.0 | 61.9 | 22.5 557 | 5.94 6.37 48

3 69.4 | 15.3 | 61.7. | 23.0 554 91 51 A8

Ay 69.2 | 15.0 | 61.7 | 22.5 554 91 33 8

5 68.7 |-13.9 | 61.7 | 20.9 | .554 93 5.75 51

6 69.0 | 10.5 | 63.7 |15.8 | 591 | 6.38 | 4.28 60

"7 68.3 | 86 | 640 | 12.9 | .597 A8 3.38 .66

8 681° | Fda] 64.5% | 10.7 607 61 2.76 7h

9 67.7 | 62 | 646 | 9.8 609 66 85 74

10 67.2 | 54 | 645 | 81 607 65 Ol ay

11 670 | ase) Gare 6.9 "| .611 .70 1.70 .80

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants,

Meteorological Observations. Xiil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

are

3.8

g| 4%

A| 2°

)

1) Sunday.

2| 140.0

3} 141.0

4) 139.9

5} 129.0

6) 133.2

wp. 130.0

8) Sunday.

9} 1386.0

10) 141.1

11} 134.0

12} 137.0

13} 140.0

14; 140.0

15) Sunday.

16) 136.1

17| 142.3

18} 140.6

19} 141.5

20| 142.0

ZY 137.9

22| Sunday.

22, 148.0

24| 138.5

25| 139.6

26} 143.9

27| 144.0

28} 138.0

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, “i Nimbi, —i Strati

> 3 >] ] > - |

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of Kebruary, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Oi:

Sas

92 et of the Wind. ;

Be 10 O

Inches.

; W. & calm & N. Cloudless.

: W.&S. Cloudless.

elas) Cloudless till 4 a. M. cloudy till 9 a. m.

Cloudless till Noon, scattered “i and

i afterwards.

ee N. W. &N. Cloudless till 5 a. M. scattered i till

Noon, cloudless afterwards.

ee N. & S. Cloudless.

a N. W. &N. Cloudless.

Eig N. W. &S. W. Cloudless.

aia W.&S. W. Cloudless.

Ze N. W.&N.& W. | Cloudless.

ae N. W. &S. W. Cloudless.

38 W.&S. EH. Cloudless.

ate LW Cloudless till Noon, scatd. %i and “i

till 5 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

wid S. & W. ‘Scattered clouds till 6 Pp. m. cloudless

afterwards.

Ba S. Cloudless till 7 a. M. scattered “i till 6

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

ze S.W.&S.&S. EH. | Cloudless till Noon, scattered i till 4

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

Bs S. W. & W. Cloudless.

aa S.W.& W. Cloudless.

ve Ss. W. Cloudless.

hs 8S. W. &S. Cloudless.

ae Variable. Cloudless.

a W.&N. W. Cloudless till 11 A. M. scattered i till 8

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

ea S. Cloudless till 5 A. M. scattered i & “i

till 7 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

es S. Cloudless till 10 a. M. seattered i till

6 p. M. cloudless afterwards.

oe VR Cloudless till 5 a. M. cloudy till 3 P.M.

cloudless afterwards.

Ww i Cirro cumuli,

XIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstiact of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

wn the month of February, 1857.

Mowtuiy Resuts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, * oe 29.887

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 a. mM. on the 6th, ee 30.082

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 27th, an 29.697

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, ea es 0.385

Co)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee ee 75.0

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 23rd, ee ee 89.8

fin. Temperature occurred at 7 a. M. on the 13th, oe se 60.5

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 29.3

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a ee 67.3

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above mean Wet Bulb Thermometer,.. aT,

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a ee 63.4:

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 11.6

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, eo ee 0.586

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, a nf ve 6.37

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ae 2.94:

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.68

Inches.

Rained No. days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, .. ee Nil.

Total amount of rain during the month, a. oe ee Nil.

Preyailing direction of the Wind, ee le oe Gary.

Meteorological Observations. XV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February, 1857.

On the 7th and 23rd February, the Meteorological Observations after ten

minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the

following circumstances.

7TH.

h. m.

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, ..

ae « ‘4) Qaim. & 4 10 Ps mu,

Ditto Maximum Barometer,.. iis «- 10 10 ditto & 9 50 ditto,

Between 7 20 & 7 30 4. M.

Ditto Minimum Temperature,

or half an hour after sunrise.

Ditto Maximum Temperature between, .. 2 50 &3 OP.M.

23BD.

h.; 7. h. m,

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, oe . 4 0am & 4 OPM.

Ditto Maximum Barometer,

ee -- 10 O ditto & 10 10 ditto.

7 0 ditto or half an hour

Ditto Minimum Temperature, ..

after sunrise.

(Between 3 30 p.M. & 4 40 P.M,

Ditto Maximum Temperature,- ~ during which time the Thermome-

\_ ter was stationary,

XVi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of February, 1857.

‘

Montury Resvrts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

MOF | hE bled eliele selefaae (ke oi} orl Glave

s|S\e2 s £ ele ls =| 2 |cl

N.siz ie! E. leis. Bic el ag lel W. leis isis

No. of days.

Midnight. | 2 il 7 6 A 2 2

1 2 1 8 5 3 3 2

2 1 8 6 3 3 2

3 1 9 5 3 3 2

4 2 7 By hha 2 3

5 Be 7 5 5 1 4

6 2) J1 i 2 6 3 A 2 3

7 4| | 2 1 5 A 4 3 1

8 4) | 2 1 2 4 1 3 A

9 6| | 2 2 6 i A 2

10 4) 13 2 2 A 4 2 2

11 4) 4d i 6 3 3 5

Noon. Z 1 5 4 4, 8

l i! 1 3 5 7 7

2 1 1 4 5 " 6

3 1 1 1 4 4 7 6

4 4 3 li 6 |

5 if 5 6 9 3

6 2 1 Y 5 7 2

7 1 1 8 5 5 3 i

8 2 8 5 5 3 il

9 2 9 4 5 3 1

10 3| 9 4 6 2

il 2| 9 4 6 3 |

Meteorological Observations. xvi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” Kast.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

we Ze

2 3 Range of the Barometer 5 3 Range of the Tempera-

“Bp E iS during the day. bs 5 ture during the day.

mS 9 As

Date. pO PS = 2

S 22 {| Max Min Diff oo Max. | Min. | Diff.

s =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. oO fC) ty) o

1 | Sunday

2 | 29.854 | 29.939 | 29.778 0.161 | 80.3 90.0 73.9 | 16.1

3 808 879 734 145 | 80.0 89.2 73.0 | 16.2

4, 844 929 .780 145 | 80.6 89.8 74.4 | 15.4

5 863 942 817 125 | 80.2 89.0 73.6 | 15.4

6 858 942 .803 139 | 80.3 88.8 73.6 | 15.2

7 868 .980 752 228 | 77.3 88.2 | 67.8 | 20.4

8 | Sunday

9 -969 | 30.080 .916 164 | 74.3 83.2 68.7 | 14.5

10 937 061 881 180 | 68.5 70.4: 66.8 | 3

if 914 | 29.972 829 143 | 71.6 80.4: 64.8 | 15.6

12 -941 | 30.023 889 134 | 72.9 Sig 65.0 | 16.9

13 980 064 935 129 | 76.5 85.8 67.4 | 18.4

14 .950 O31 888 143 | 78.6 88.6 7050) TES

15 | Sunday

16 885 973 .810 163 | 80.6 90.6 72.3 | 18.3

cy .878 957 O07 | LaOrl BL: 92.4: 71.8 | 20.6

18 845 .928 Ai 151] 80.8 90.8 72.4 | 18.4

19 812 .882 .748 134 | 80.8 92.6 69.8 | 22.8

20 115 859 .695 164 82.1 93.2 ZActs i Taek

21 771 .836 713 123 | 83.0 94,2 74.7 | 19.5

22 Sunday

23 733 .809 646 .163 | 83.8 95.1 75.6 | 19.5

24 719 807 .659 148 | 84.4 96.6 74.8 | 21.8

25 741 -816 676 140 | 84.7 96.2 | 75.4 | 20.8

26 -786 872 731 141 | 85.8 98.6 75.2 | 23.4

27 784. 879 .689 5190.) 86.7 1-300.2 76.4 | 23.8

28 675 759 583 176] 86.5 | 988 76.8 | 22.0

29 | Sunday.

30 731 815 681 134} 85.7 95.4 | 78.8 | 16.6

31 802 881 157 124 | 84.9 | 94.8 78.2 | 16.6

=] . aj P . * 3

Lhe Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

the day.

XVIll Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

Ps B S Bo | due hing

lia Pa ie 2 | ee Perea eee

: 5 BE dae : 2 et 2s

Date. |. = <= a x ‘5 Bo (oe Sd) 8S oe

aes a 2 2. | os eye as

g = Pos 4 Sno .

ao eS a mS aos a @ Se Se Ss

oa sp 5 bop oF o-8 | eae 6c oS

= a oO a a = S a

o fC) o fc) Inches.) V.-gr: 1) ee

1 | Sunday.

2 73.0 7.3 69.3 | 11.0 0.711 7.66 3.25 0.70

3 72.8 7.2 69.2 | 10.8 708 64: L7 71

4 74.3 6.3 (Api 9.5 £753 8.11 2.90 174

5 74.6 5.6 71.8 8.4: 771 31 .O7 76

6 74.9 5.4: 72.2 8.1 781 Al .50 ari,

v | 72.3 9.0 69.8 7.5 722 7.82 16 A hes

8 | Sunday.

9 67.8 6.5 64.5 9.8 .607 6.62 2 50 73

10 65.1 3A 63.4 5.1 .586 64 1.19 84

1 66.9 4.7 64.5 7.1 .607 67 73 79

12 67.2 5.7 64.3 8.6 .603 .60 2.13 76

13 69.5 7.9 66.0 | 10.5 .638 .92 83 aL

14 71.0 7.6 67.2 | 11.4 .664: 7.19 3.19 .69

15 | Sunday.

16 72.0 8.6 67.7 | 12.9 674: 27 74 .66

17 70.8 10.4: 65.6 | 15.6 .630 6.78 4.43 61

18 69.6 11.2 64.0 | 16.8 597 A2 .65 08

19 70.3 10.5 65.0 | 15.8 617 65 AZ .60

20 72.0 10.1 66.9 | 15.2 657 7.06 45 OL

21 OL 19 fe Se il at 2 753 8.08. | 3.74 .68

22 Sunday.

23 75.8 8.0 71.8 | 12.0 Ary 20 .85 68

24 75.4 9.0 7049 \ 13.5 748 .0O 4.31 .65

25 77.3 7A (aso | 11.1 .817 73 3.69 70

26 76.2 9.6 | 714) 14.4 761 12 4.71 63

27 76.5 10.2 71.4 | 15.3 761 LO 5.08 .62

28 76.3 10.2 71.2 | 15.3 756 .05 05 .62

29 | Sunday.

30 77.0 8.7 72.6 | 13.1 790 43 4.37 .66

31 77.0 Ye (a0 | LL.9 801 5D 3.94 .69

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants,

Meteorological Observations.

XIX

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

Hour,

Mean Height of

the Barometer

at 32° Faht.

8 ae

KOUMNANEWNE SE Koo aonnos OD eH

<I co to a

oO a = a

ae oO a ©

dependent thereon.

Range of the Barometer

for each hour during

the month.

a | eee eee | ee

Inches.| Inches.| Inches.

29.977 |29.690 | 0.287

.966 | .686 .280

950 | .682 .268

ae “Dek .267

935 .665 .270

940 | .683 257

963 694 .269

30.005 | .714 291

-064 | .750 .310

061 758 303

-080 | .759 321

066 | .738 328

.035 .720 315

29.997 | .675 322

.969 | .652 317

Jol 617 .Ba4

942 .998 344

945 084: 361

951 083 .068

.958 .601 857

-980 | .632 348

-988 ; .652 .030

992 .659 3098

.980 .666 014

Mean Dry Bulb

Thermometer,

Range of the Temperature

for each hour during

the month.

Diff.

. The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month.

XX Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

= 3 = é S a6 Ss5a| a8

Sy Fly 2 be ee oe? rr

2 : : Me es PEs | efs

Hour. | 23 A ic So . B00 3 Oe aw ie Se

S 2 $5] 2 os oS ‘gS 2 a oe ce

$ 4 OQ a se) AS, ey cha Bea | $Fq

S53 bs E re) Se | Soa, | Seve

a OQ 5 Qa = = oe) a > oO g S

7) ) 0 Cy) Inches. |Troy grs./Troy grs.

Mid- | 77 | 34 | 710 | 51 | 0.751 | 817 | 146 | 0.88

rite ‘ : : : i

1 72.2 3el 70.6 4.7 TAL 07 33 .86

2 71.9 Zia 70.4: A: A: 736 04 22 87

3 71.4 2.8 70.0 4.2 A | 7.94 15 87

4 71.1 2.6 69.8 3.9 722 89 07 88

5 70.7 2.6 69.4 3.9 713 .80 .04 88

6 70.4 2.5 69,1 3.8 .706 72 04: 88

74 70.8 2.3 69.6 35 17 84 0.95 89

8 72.3 3.7 70.4 5.6 £736 8.00 1.60 83

9 73.3 5.8 70.4 8.7 £736 7.95 2.58 .76

10 TSch 8.0 69.7 12.0 .720 7A 3.63 .68

af 74.0 | 10.9 68.5 | 16.4 692 41 5.08 59

Noon 73.8 13.4 67.1 20.1 661 03 6.34 53

1 73.7 15.3 66.0 23.0 .638 6.75 7.33 48

2 4320 16.4 65.3 24.6 .623 59 87 46

3 73.4 17.1 64 8 25.7 613 48 8.24 4A

4, 73.3 16.9 64.8 25.4 613 50 .09 A5

5 73.0 15.4 65.3 23.1 .623 61 7.23 48

6 73:7 LAL 68.1 16.7 684: 7.29 5.17 59

if 74.1 8.2 | 70.0° | 12.8 727 81 3.77 67

8 73.4 6.9 69 9 10.4 125 82 .09 72

a 73.3 5.6 70.5 8.4, 739 8.00 2.47 76

10 72.8 4.5 70.5 6.8 739 02 1.96 80

il 72.7 3.9 70.7 5.9 744, 08 .69 83

—$$$_$___

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed eer the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations.

Xxi

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Solar radiation, Weather, &c.

SRE

38 ome

Ga \s23

- es 23

Re} HS 18.809

CS os Sat

Al = pe +

fe) Inches

1) Sunday

(

| 186.7 ae

139.6 ifs

5| 136.2 ee

135.4

138.0 | 0.30

8) Sunday

9} 129.2 oe

TO) ke 0.14

il) 131.0 | 0.52

12) 134.0 ee

13; 146.0 oe

14| 140.0 ee

15) Sunday.

16; 141.5 ae

17; 139.0 x

18) 135.0 ee

19| 138.8 ee

20; 135.0 oe

21) 144.0 oe

22) Sunday.

23} 138.8 a

24; 145.0 oe

25) 136.5 oe

26) 154.8 we

27; 143.0 ee

28} 139.6 ee

29| Sunday.

30) 138.0 ee

31); 134.0 ee

Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, %i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, V-i nimbi, —i strati

“Mi cirro cumuli,

Prevailing direction

of the Wind.

en ee. | - 0 ee

N.W.&N.& W.

N.& KE.

N. & N. E.

General Aspect of the Sky.

Cloudless till 3 a.m. cloudy till 9 a. mM.

cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 6 a. M. scattered i till

6 p. m. cloudless afterwards.

Variable aspect till 3 P. M. cloudless

afterwards.

Variable aspect till 2 P. mM. cloudless

afterwards.

Cloudless till 7 a. mM. seatd. i till 4

p. M. cloudy, with hghtning & thun-

der & rain afterwards.

Cloudy till 10 a. mM. scatd. i & “i

afterwards.

Scatd. \i & i till 6 a. mM. cloudy

afterwards ; also rain between 9 A. M.

& 1p. M.

Scatd. i & i till 1 Pp. mM. cloudy

afterwards, also rain & thunder &

lightning between 8 & 11 P. M.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 10 a. m. seatd. “i till 5

p. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

Cloudless till 2 Pp. m. seatd. i till 6

P. M. cloudless afterwards.

Cloudless.

XXil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Montuty Resvtts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, wae 29-839

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 10 a. m. on the ‘oth, ... 30.080

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 6 P. M. on the 28th, opi 2O.08o

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, is vze 0 0.497

)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, as cae 80.5

Max. Temperature, occurred at 4 P. M. on the 27th, se cewek LOO.

Min. Temperature, occurred at 6 a. M. on the 11th, saa ‘iis 64.8

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, og 35.4

Co)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, sas a Tat

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, ... 7.8

Computed Mean’ Dew Point for the month, 2 de 68.8

Mean Dry Buib Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, ee 11.7

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, as ove oe 10698

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, ah a) ah 7.52

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, ty 3.46

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.69

Inches.

Rained 3 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, +e san 0.52

Total amount of rain during the month, ie a od 0.96

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ,,. a aig Ss. & 8S. W.

Meteorological Observations. XXlil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

Montury Re&svxts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Date.

Rain on.

Rain on

Calm.

Rain on.

Midnight.

ary

WW Oe S&S TAT Ord O1

BSR WWW Re DD Ww Ww

j=)

fool

HKHOOMNANMAWNH

NHOALADR wD ww DO

BNE Ebb wD

He et ee

ft ft

Noon,

me be

ww rs

I bo bo bo

RPOMODNTAMURwODH

Hm oo Co bo bo bo bo

—

DWNNWNHNEAADOWE

bo Ww GO tH WH dD

LHe

Xxiv . Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of March, 1857.

On the 21st March, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after

ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office,

they indicate the following circumstances :—

m. he. mm.

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,... 20 A.M.and 4 OP.™M.

Ditto Minimum Temperature,.........4.

30 do ee half an hour

Ditto; Maximum Barometer, ...i00.80e2-e0nee06 9 30° do. and T1750 ido.

2 after sunrise.

Ditto Maximum Temperature, ........ O P.M.

On Saturday, the 7th March, 1857. A Western gale sprung up

at + past 5 p.m. and blew for three quarters of an hour. During

the prevalence of the gale there was much thunder and lightning

and also a little rain.

Meteorological Observations. 9.6

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

oS oo 3

oS 8 during the day. ae ture during the day.

‘3 Ee =o

TH & Qs

° go 38) 5 ee 5 :

2 So Max Min Diff Sa Max. | Min. | Diff.

=) = =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 0 oO fC)

29.794 | 29.868 | 29.733 0.135 84.1

.780 860 .710 .150 84.4

793 857 £733 124 84.2 93.6 78.4 | 15.2

817 914. 733 181 84.3

854: 329 773 .156 81.9

0854: 932 -730 202 78.9

-858 932 778 154: 77.0

835 S05 ch 2 fae .168 78.2 87.2 69.4 | 17.8

10 794 .866 .696 170 81.0 90.2 74.0 | 16.2

J1 778 848 .669 SS. 81.6 92.8 1.6 | 21.2

12 | Sunday

13 .699 Ai | .632 139 84.1 93.8 774.0 |: 16:8

14 -699 772 632 .140 84:4: 94.6 76.6 | 18.0

15 698 775 .606 169 86.6 96.2 79.8 | 16.4

16 624 720 528 192 87.7 98.4 80.2 | 18.2

17 -622 .687 065 122 88.5 98.1 SEZ | 26.9

18 -700 769 644 125 86.7 94.8 81.0 | 13.8

19 | Sunday

20 727 794, .663 131 85.0 92.5 77.0 | 15.5

21 748 829 671 158 82.8 93.8 75.0 | 18.8

22 .780 864 698 166 19.9 89.7 Lb"): 38:6

23 824 911 .693 218 76.3 84.8 71.3 | 13.5

24 -802 893 728 165 79.5 89.8 69.5 | 20.3

25 .786 860 -698 162 83.0 92.0 75.6 | 16.4

26 | Sunday

27 731 792 660 132 85.7 94.8 78.5 | 16.3

28 789 872 703 169 83.9 94.3 74.6 | 19.7

29 722 806 633 173 85.4: 96.0 77.0 | 19.0

30 655 732 563 169 87.3 98.8 79.8 | 19.0

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day.

XXVI Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

0 Pa 1) o > a

E . 2: |e8 |£5

= : ° A @ i ie a = a

2 Ay ° Ss » Dy 5 S

a 2 2 ae Rs BER | a" a) e83

= = 3 ae a. 2 Ole ES

ad aa) 2 a as 2 = |S Bo] s 2 a

§ 4 a 5 an o> So iSaaieok

a a OD a) = = < =

0 Oo ty) Oo Inches. | T. gr.| T. gr.

1 772 6.9 73.7 10.4 | 0.819 8.78 | 3.43 | 0.72

2 77.5 6.9 74.0 10.4: 827 86 Ae eee

3 77.9 6.3 74.7 9.5 846 9.05 519° |. 3374

4 virgen 7.2 73.5 10.8 814 8.70 58 | .71

5 | Sunday

6 72.4 9.5 67.6 14.3 672 7.23 1° 42h | 163

7 73.1 5.8 70.2 8.7 732 Ol | 2hee 276

8 71.5 5.5 68.7 8.3 .677 yi ee ae

9 71.9 6.3 68.7 9.5 697 5A 71 | 74

10 75.8 52 73,2 78 806 8.68 46 | .78

11 76.2 5A 93.5 8.1 814 76 Da tL

12 Sunday.

13 78 2 59 75.2 8.9 .860 9.20 | 3.01 | .75

14 78.4 6.0 754 9.0 865 26 05 | .75

15 80.1 6.5 76.8 9.8 .905 63 || eS

16 79.7 8 0 95.7 12.0 873 28 | 4.28 | .68

17 78.1 10 4 72.9 15.6 797 8.45 | 5.43 | .61

18 80.4: 6.3 "72 9.5 .916 9.75 |" 3:48 1) 74

19 Sunday.

20 78.7 6.3 95.5 9.5 868 iyi 26 | 294

21 74.8 8.0 70.8 12.0 746 8.00 75 | .68

22 74.8 5.1 72,2, 0.7 781 Al | 2.37 | .78

23 70.1 6.2 67 0 9.3 .659 Fe We 52 | 74

24 72.4 vl 68.8 10.7 .699 A | Bae oe

25 76.4 6.6 73.1 99 .803 8.61 2k | Pee

26 | Sunday.

27 78.9 6.8 75.5 10.2 .868 9.27 68 | .72

28 76 0 7.9 720 11.9 .776 8.30 83 | .68

29 76.0 9.4 71.3 14,1 £758 10 | 4.58 | .64

30 78.9 8.4 94.7 12.6 846 99 42 | .67

All the Ji the Hc tromebeical clandentdtee aexaipated ‘bjt Wemaganroct warren elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXVIl

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

6 8 Range of the Barometer for = 3 Apes ou ie eemperte

2 Os : S ture for each hour

Bes each hour during the Ao .

20 5 g during the

= Ey month, PP io) month

Hour. | = 3 2, As :

ioe) o

Sa | Max. | Min. | Diff. | 36 | ‘Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. 0 ) ty) ty)

.. 29.760 | 29.863 |29.577 | 0.286 | 788 | 83.6 | 71.4] 12.2

1 751 854 O74 .280 78.4: 83.2 70.7 | 12.5

2 .738 846 566 .280 78.1 83.2 70.6 | 12.6

3 £739 .862 571 291 77.5 83.0 70.4 | 12.6

4: 749 855 621 234 76.9 81.0 69.4 | 11.6

5 £753 .860 .608 252 76.9 81.6 69.4 | 12.2

6 776 895 617 .278 76.7 81.2 69.7. | 11.5

i) £798 .906 648 258 Ciel 82.0 71.00) ILO

8 .822 919 .667 252 80.6 85.0 74.1 | 10.9

9 832 930 .680 250 83.6 88.2 75.6 | 12.6

10 .830 932 687 245 85.9 91.0 76.7 | 14.3

il 818 918 .681 237 88.4: 93.4 78.0 | 15.4

Noon.| .799 905 .668 237 89.9 95.2 79.6 | 15.6

1 .766 885 .636 .249 91.4: 96.6 81.6 | 15.0

2 .736 846 .600 246 92.3 97.8 84.3 | 13.5

3 -710 838 .570 268 92.3 98.8 83.2 | 15.6

4 .687 814 548 266 91.4 98.4, 80.4 | 18.0

5 .682 802 529 273 89.3 96.8 80.0 | 16.8

6 .697 814 528 286 85.9 92.0 75.4 | 16.6

7 .720 834 541 293 83.4: 89.3 v2.8} 27.5

8 £753 864 574 290 81.7 86.4 70.6 | 15.8

9 .776 898 591 307 80.1 85.0 70.0 | 15.0

10 775 922 .602 .320 79.1 84.2 70.0 | 14.2

11 773 932 598 304 78.5 84.1 70.4 | 18.7

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month,

XXVil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

o o =| o oO CO om °o s 4

BeBe) Bush ee Se sl eee

2 See [OB ed Seen

3S co) oy s cae w Bi [0 o 2 a S

2 o 2 3 a) SS o--. |s = & .| to as

a 3 = ge) Ais |b. ° |S 6 see es

one om 2. pO 8 ae ae 26 Sal aS Ea

re b 8 pa |) 8S. | S$ ae. Se aes a

= a iS) Q = = < =

ft) ) fy) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

Se m9 | 3:6 | 734) |. Bae) 0811 te%e. | T66 0.84

“1 VAG. | 25 1) 931 33 1 908 70 61 84

2 vag A BA) 73D 5.1 | .801 67 55 185

3 743 1 380) "Hols 5.0 | .787 54 50 85

A W291 RO.) OYA ls Aer: 7B 51 135 .86

5 WA 1 Best. BT eee |! 792 61 25 87

6 "3906 | 9.8-|. 92.5. | 42 787 56 24 87

"7 TAG | Sas 7 0n | aee 801 67 A3 .86

8 w59 | 94.7 | YR jt) | Si 78 223 7 80

9 768 196.8 |. ‘734 toe 811 69 3.34 72

10 Big | 83M) Yaa. tos 811 64. 4.23 67

11 78.1 1103 | 72.9 | 15.5 797 45 5.39 61

Noon.| 78-2 | Wy) 78s 107-6 783 27 6.19 57

‘I 79.0 | 12.4 | 72.8 | 18.6 795 38 72 56

2 79.1 |13.2 | 72.5 | 19.8 787 28 722, 53

3 "8.5 | 13.8 | 71.6 | 20.7 766 05 AD 52

4 78.3 118.1 | 71.7 | 19.7 768 09 Ol da

2 78.3 111.0 | 72.8 | 16.5 795 41 5.80 59

6 W749 |: 8.0.| 739 | 120 824 79 4.08 68

8 75.9 | BS.) L730. 87 801 .60 2.77 76

9 75.1 5.0 | 72.6 | 7.5 790 52 32 79

10 94.97 4.4 92.5 6.6 TST 51 .02 81

11 742 | 43 | 72.0 | 6.5 776 38 1.97 81

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XX1X

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

Ra |&5

o2 |sad |

| “3 |OS 8) Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

ees. |S .o 2 of the Wind.

oS o 8 3 oe

Al = ae

co) Inches.

1} 130.5 se Ss. Cloudless till Noon, scatd. i till 9 p.m.

cloudless afterwards.

2} 132.0 sel Me Cloudless till 1 Pp. mM. scattered “i or

i till 6 P. mM. cloudless afterwards.

3) 135.0 ae Flying clouds the whole day.

4| 128.0 wok ee Cloudy.

5| Sunday.

Stage | ..~|S.&8. W. Cloudy.

4) 209:2 } 1.13 |S. Cloudy, also raining & thundering &

lightning between 7 P. Mm. & midnight.

8} 124.0 -- | Variable. Cloudy till 7 p.m. cloudless afterwards.

9) 135.4 . |S &W.&S. W. Cloudy the whole day; also drizzling

between 3 & 6 a. M. & also at 8 P. ML

(a 0.15 |S. Cloudy, also raining at 6 P. M.

11} 138.5 iets Cloudless at 8 a. M. scatd. “i afterwards,

also raining at 8 Pp. M. also thunders

and lightning between 8 & 11 P. wu.

12) Sunday.

ae f2e0 | lf. |S. Scatd. clouds nearly the whole day,

also drizzling at 7 P. M. [ wards.

14| 133.0 ae ho Cloudless till 4 a. mM. scatd. i after-

15) 131.0 pian) ites Cloudless nearly the whole day.

16} 136.0 od tees Cloudless.

17| 147.0 ee S. Cloudless, [ wards.

18} 131.7 weg Bs Cloudless till 3 A. M. scatd. clouds after-

19} Sunday.

20) 124.0 55 UB srt 32 Cloudy.

21} 130.0 | 0.42 |S. Cloudy & drizzling between 2 & 4 a. M.

and also between 8 & 9 P. M.

: 22} 125.0 | 0.10 |S. Cloudy, also rain at 8 P. M. also thun-

| dering & lightning from 8 P.M. to

| midnight.

2 re ae) see NN. We Cloudy, also drizzling at 9 P. m.

24) 132.0 PE USE Cloudless till 4 a. wm. scatd. clouds till

5 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

25, 140.0 | .. |S. Cloudy nearly the whole day.

26| Sunday.

27| 139.0 sax | Dade Sank. Cloudless till Noon, cloudy afterwards.

28} 131.6 «. |S. (S.H.gale between| Cloudy, also thundering and lightning

midnight &14.M.)| and raining before sunrise and also

after sunset.

29| 139.0 *- S. Cloudless.

30} 141.0 - 8. & 8. W. Cloudless till 5 a. mM. scatd. i & +i till

5. Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

\ i Cirro cumuli,

Ex Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Monturty Resunts.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ee ee 29.760

Max. height of the Barometer occurred at 10 A. M. on the 7th and

11 P. m. on the 8th, oe : she ae 29.982

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 61 P. M. on the 16th, oe 29.528

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, oe ee 0.404

fe)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ee ee 83.2

Max. Temperature occurred at 3 P. M. on the 30th, oe ae 98.8

Min. Temperature occurred at 4&5 a. M. on the 9th, .. whe 69.4

Extreme range of the Temperature during the month, .. die 29.4

re)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, a; Ags "6.2

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 7.0

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. a ne 724

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 10.5

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, dis us 0.792

Troy grains,

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ae a we 8.49

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ae 3.40

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.71

Inches.

Rained 10 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, do one 1.13

Total amount of rain during the month, an ee ais 1.80

Prevailing direction of the Wind, oe He if Ss.

Meteorological Observations. XXX

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

Monruty Resvxts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour.

és} .|5 E 5 ce] . |g 5

slAle] |s elel jefe lel s ls

N.|e tz ce] E. lois. E. a let Wists lel dS le

No. of days

Midnight. 1 4

1 A 1

2 1 3 1

3 3 ~g

4 2 2 2|2

5 E 3 2 Bey dl

6 i 4. 3 1 4

7 2 3 3 3 2

8 nh 5 3 3 1

9 1 3 5 3

10 1 3 Fe 1

11 2 6 2

Noon. 3 6 D}

1 2 7 2

2 3 6 3

3 1 2 6 3

Lb 2 6

5 6 1

6 1 5 i

7 4) 2 3 1

8 22) Li Le 2 yA | ee |

9 si ae 2 3 g'3

10 1] 1] 2 5 1 1

11 Lich 2 4, 1 1

XXXil Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of April, 1857.

On the 24th April, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes

intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following

circumstances.

h. m. h. m.

Luact Time of Minimum Barometer, .. os 5 23804a.M.& 4 35 P.M.

Ditto Maximum Barometer,.. oe «» 9 50 ditto&10 40 ditto.

Between 5 20 & 5 30 4. M.

Ditto Minimum Temperature,

or qr. of an hour before sunrise.

(Between 3 20 & 40P.M.

Ditto Maximum Temperature, < during which time the Thermome-

\_ ter was stationary.

Meteorological Observations. XXxill

Abstract of the Results of the Howrly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1” North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

Feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

Sisal, Sea | 2 os S

: Bus Range of the Barometer a 3 Range of the Tempera-

“i & 3 during the day. p & ture during the day.

m So As

Date. a cs a

S S2 | Max. Min Diff Sa Max. | Min. | Diff.

= =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. rey 0 0 oO

1 | 29.689 | 29.778 | 29.627 | 0.151] 88.4 100.0 | 79.5 | 20.5

2 641 726 4G 180 | 87.4 96.7 . 1.79.7 | 17.0

3 | Sunday

4, 596 .656 532 124 | 88.3 99.6 | 82.0 | 17.6

5 622 707 044 163 | 87.4 96.6 80.6 | 16.0

6 584 646 497 149 | 87.0 93.2 81.7 | 11.5

7 618 .680 12 168 | 86.5 93.6 69.0 | 24.6

8 570 .627 A92 135 | 83.0 93.6 73.0 | 20.6

9 530 593 485 108 | 80.7 91.6 | 73.6 | 18.0

10 | Sunday

ig .667 731 597 134 | 81.7 90.2 | 74.5 | 15.7

12 .650 704 047 157 | 86.3 94.6 | 81.6 | 13.0

13 694: 756 611 145 | 86.3 94.1 80.1 | 14.0

14 722 787 658 129 | 85.3 93.0 | 78.2 | 148

15 694: £758 603 155 | 87.3 94.4 81.1 | 13.3

16 .668 733 582 151 | 87.6 95.6 | 82.0 | 13.6

17 | Sunday

18 506 568 413 155 | 86.8 96.4 | 78.8 | 17.6

19 514, 581 423 158; 88.5 97.0 | 81.6 | 15.4

20 586 734: 502 232 | 84.9 92.0 76.6 | 15.4

21 633 736 551 185 |. 84.4 94.0 75.5 | 18.5

22 .688 «75D 610 145 | 82.1 90.0 75.4 | 14.6

23 691 £758 616 142 | 85.7 93.8 80.4 | 13.4

24 | Sunday

25 628 .687 548 139 | 86.1 93.8 | 80.4 | 13.4

26 540 611 432 179 | 87.0 94.5 | 80.8 | 13.7

: 27 437 510 345 165 | 86.8 95.7 | 81.6 | 14.1

: 28 410 .480 337 143 | 86.3 97.5. | 79.8 | 17.7

| 29 - A89 559 432 127 | 86.9 94.2 | 80.2 | 14.0

30 519 587 450 137]. 87.1 94.6 78.8 | 15.8

31 | Sunday.

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived, from the twenty-four hourly observations made, during

the day.

XXXIV Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. (Continued.)

a E Saree rma ae

° o = =

E S| Su aiia® | a. |e

ae es a Bi] ee ec ee

Date. canes = a Ss So >a | ® Bap

BK 3 a = ae Sia Ee oo} nis

oe) Q ra eae O's a“ oOo 8 o°D

= D = 2 Sos ms =o gH a 2 2.3

i a Sy Ais S. s |of8 bal

a 3 S| 82 | Bia (eine eS

o A ie 3 P> Py oF ® -m = Suen) 6 oS

a A 0 A a = pe a

o 0 o 0 Inches.| "T. gr. | Titer

1 77.9 10.9 72.0 | 16.4 0.776 8.23 5.61 0.60

2 80.1 7.3 76.4 | 11.0 893 9.51 3.94 71

3 | Sunday.

4, 80.8 7.5 77.0 |°11.3 .910 67 4.13 -70

5 80.9 6.5 77.6 9.8 928 87 3.08 By ies

6 80.8 6.2 Fil 9.3 931 92 37 75

7 80.1 6.4: 76.9 9.6 908 66 4A: 74:

8 78.7 4.3 76.5 6.5 896 61 2.21 SL

9 . 77.0 3.7 75.1 5.6 857 23 Lei 84:

10 | Sunday.

J1 78.1 3.6 76.3 5.4 890 59 78 84

12 81.1 5.2 78.5 7.8 .955 | 10.18 2.84: 78

13 80.9 5.4 78.2 8.1 .946 .09 .93 78

14 80.0 5.3 77.3 8.0 .919 9.82 82 .78

15 81.4: 5.9 78.4 8.9 952 | 10.12 3.29 76

16 81.7 5.9 78.7 8.9 961 22 .30 76

17 | Sunday.

18 80.7 6.1 77.6 9.2 .928 9.89 32 75

a9 83.1 5.4 80.4: 8.1 1,014 | 10.76 12 .78

20 TES Ev 74.4 | 10.5 0.838 8.95 54: 12

21 77.0 7A Cf ae ele We | .809 .65 .66 70

22 771. 5.0 74.6 7.5 843 9.05 2.46 79

23 79.9 5.8 77.0 8.7 -910 ara 3.09 76

24 | Sunday. i

25 80.3 5.8 77.4 8.7 .922 83 12 .76

26 80.4: 6.6 fig 3.9 913 72 57 73

27 79.8 7.0 7am | 10.5 .890 48 73 ia

28 19.1 6.6 76.4 9.9 893 53 49 73

29 81.6 5.3 78.9 8.0 .967 | 10.30 2.95 78

30 81.6 5.5 78.8 8.3 964 27 3.06 77

31 | Sunday.

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich Constants,

Meteorological Observations. XXXKV

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

oe Range of the Barometer | = 5 Range of the Temperature

oo Ss :

| for each hour during Ae for each hour during

H ‘eo the month. PS the month.

our, = a Q, a 5

= a) ap ° é s = c :

3-2 | Max. Min, Diff. Se, | Max. Min. Diff.

= a |

Inches. | Inches.| Inches.| Inches. ty) 0 rt) oO

Mid-

night. 29.618 | 29.726 |29.412 | 0.314 81.2 85.4 73.0 12.4

EI .603 719 408 oll 81.1 84.8 74.8 10.0

2 591 .705 AlL .294 | 80.9 84.2 74.7 9.5

3 582 .696 .400 .296 80.9 84.0 74.6 9.4,

4 .585 0G -400 .007 80.7 83.8 74.5 9.3

5 600 «719 .405 814 | 80.5 83.3 74.8 8.5

6 .618 -746 410 .036 80.8 83.8 75.0 8.8

7 637 .765 .416 849 82.0 85.4: 75.3 10.1

8 652 774 425 049 84.4: 87.2 77.0 10.2

9 .658 787 431 .856 86.7 90.8 78.0 12.8

10 .656 Es ABA .843 89.2 92.6 80.0 12.6

11 643 -776 A427 349 | 91.0 95.2 82.8 12.4

Noon. .627 .766 415 ols) 92.3 96.4. 85.0 11.4

1 .598 £731 .386 845 93.6 99.6 87.6 12.0

2 .570 .693 364 229 | 94,1 99.4: 88.6 10.8

3 .550 .687 344 043 93.7 | 100.0 80.6 19.4

4 .530 .679 oT 842 92.9 99.9 76.4 23.5

5 B27 .661 .046 015 91.4 98.0 73.6 24.4:

6 043 .658 »067 .291 88.4: 94.0 74.6 19.4

| -563 701 ool .820 85.8 90.7 75.6 15.1

8 .589 -734 | 402 002 84, 2 88.6 75.6 13.0

9 .612 -730 -406 O24 83.5 87.2 75.5 Lh

10 .620 -740 .398 842 82.6 | 86.6 75.0 11.6

11 .617 -736 .399 007 81.6 | 86.4 69.0 17.4

The Mean Height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

Thermometers are derived from the observations made at the several hours

during the month,

XXXVI Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.—( Continued.)

= 3 3 B rr sO ooag | 33

ad RE kal ai eee es

3) a c) = eS) oe Swen

>) le > EB > a4 2 Pasig 25 S|

om ° ce) fo) » 3 Sen Qe

Hou. | 28 3 A S fe 0° oo) Let ae

g 2 3 2 el Oe Peg Pesce | tas ares

go 3 3 34 ~ oO Se a == a os

$ 4 Fa 2. = ek ge) Solem ie Ba

S38 | pb a |e] > | ssl | ee8 | es8

= fa tS) a = = Made Bec gs

oO 0 o o | Inches. |Troy grs.|Troy grs.

Mid- | 77 | 35 | 75.9 | 53 |o879 | 947 | 174 | 0.88

Bee , : / : : : d

1 77.8 3.3 76.1 5.0 885 53 64: 85

2 77.9 3.0 76.4 4.5 .893 .62 48 87

3 78.0 2.9 76.5 4.4: .896 67 A3 87

4 78.0 2.7 76.6 4.1 899 .69 .30 .88

5 78.0 2.5 76.7 3.8 902 72 26 .89

6 78.3 2.5 77.0 3.8 .910 81 .26 .89

7 79.0 3.0 77.8 4.5 925 94, 53 87

8 80.1 4.3 Tt9 6.5 937 10.02 2.29 81

9 81.0 5.7 78.1 8.6 943 04 3.14 76

10 81.8 74 78.1 11.1 943 00 4.16 71

11 82.1 8.9 77.6 13.4 928 9.81 5.12 66

Noon 82.4 9.9 77.4 14.9 922 71 19 63

1 82.8 10.8 77.4 16.2 922 .69 6.39 60

2 83.1 11.0 77.6 16.5 928 73 59 60

3 82.5 11.2 76.9 16.8 908 52 61 59

4 81.8 Le 76.2 16.7 887 39 AA 59

5 82.0 9.4 77.3 14.1 919 70 5.40 64,

6 80.7 qi 76.8 11.6 905 09 4.25 69

4 79.6 6 2 76.5 9.3 896 57 3.26 75

8 78.7 5.5 75.9 8.3 879 A2 2.82 77

9 78.5 5.0 76.0 7.5 882 45 55 79

30 78 3 4.3 76.1 6.5 885 .00 18 81

d1 77.8 3.8 75.9 5.7 879 46 1.88 83

_ —_—

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. XXXVI1

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor Generals Office, Calcutta,

an the month of May, 1857.

Solar radiation, Weather, &c.

Hae |S5

3-8 od es deers

.| 23 | & §} Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

$/ 43 (4.36 of the Wind. 3

| = a

A) a” [Ree

0 Inches.

Bb} 4400 | 2. J & Cloudless.

2} 145.0 5 NI Cloudless.

3| Sunday (afterwards.

4) 138.0 Be S Cloudless till Noon, scattered clouds

5| 142.0 gat “ise Cloudless. [ wards.

6} 124.5 S. (high.) Cloudless till 5 a. M. scattered i after-

7} 181.4 | 2.88 | S.& 8S. EH. (high.) | Cloudy, also a gale with much rain and

hailstones and thunder and lightning

between 10 and 11 P. M.

8} 125.0 | 0.88 |S. E. &S8. Cloudy, also raining at 3 Pp. M.; also

raining and hailing with thunder and

lightning at 6 P. M. | i i eee

9} 116.0 ; 142 |8.H. &S. Cloudy, also raining between 3 and

10| Sunday.| 0.57 [7 A. M.

Ly LE TE a ie Bel Cloudy, also very slightly drizzling at

12) 136.0 de 8 Ditto ditto at 6 P. M.

13} 129.0 | 036 |S. EH. &8. Cloudy, also raining with thunder and

rayisy2) -. | 8. &N. E, Cloudy. [lightning at 8 P. mM.

15} 148.0 | .. | Calm&S. Cloudless till 5 a.m. scattered i till 8

Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

16; 144.0 | 0.08; S Cloudless till 64. m. scatd. Ciafterwards ;

also little rain between Gand 7 Pp. M.

17| Sunday.| 1.81 [also raining at 6 P. M.

yi. | h..- | 8S. & SB, Cloudless till 4.4. m. cloudy afterwards ;

a) 135.0-| 4 8. Cloudless till 5 a.m. cloudy afterwards.

20; 125.4 | 0.32 | S. EH. & EH. Cloudy till 10 a. m. cloudless till 4

p. M. cloudy afterwards, also a gale

accompanied by rain and thunder

and lightning between 7 and 9 P. M.

21; 133.0 | 0.15 | N.W.&S. E. Cloudy, also raining at 10 and 11 P. mM.

22; 134.8 | 0.12 | N. &S8. Cloudy, also raining between 8 & 9 P. M.

23; 139.0] .. 8S. &S. E. Cloudless till 10 a. M. scattered i till

3 P. M. scattered \-i afterwards.

24) Sunday.| 0.80 (afterwards.

25) 121.0 ae S. E. &S. Cloudless till 5 A. M. scattered clouds

26) 132.0 | .. 8, Cloudless till 4 a. M. scattered clouds

27' 142.0 e S. W. Cloudy. [afterwards.

me) 193.0 | as Ss. & 8. W. Cloudless till 10 a.m. scatd. -iand “i

till 4 Pp. mM. cloudy afterwards, Also a

N. W. gale and a little drizzling be-

tween 4 past 5 P.M. and 5’ to6 P.M.

29) 140.8 sie S. Cloudy till 4 Pp. m. cloudless afterwards.

30) 128.0 | 0.44 |58.&N. E, Cloudless till 1 P. M. scattered \i & ~i

31) Sunday. till 5p. M, cloudy afterwards. Also a

west gale between 6-40 & 7 P. M. and

likewise rain during the gale and for

2 hours afterwards.

Ni Cirri, i cirro strati, “i cumuli, ~i cumulo strati, \-i nimbi, —i strati,

Wi cirro cumuli,

XXXVI Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Montury REsurtTs.

Inches,

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, oe e- 29.600

Max. height of the Barometer, occurred at 9 A. M. on the 14th, eet, | 20.1 OF

Min. height of the Barometer, occurred at 4 P. M. on the 28th, we w2e.da7

Extreme Range of the Barometer during the month, ate -- 0.450

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, A de 86.0

Max, Temperature, occurred at 3 Pp. M. on the Ist, we «- 100.0

Min. Temperature, occurred at 11 Pp. M. on the 7th, “e ee 69.6

Extreme Range of the Temperature during the month, .. ee 31.0

te)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, ile a 79.9

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 6.1

Computed Mean Dew Point for the month, | ae Se 76.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed Mean Dew Point, .. 9.2

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of vapour for the month, .. oe «= 4) 0.905

Troy grains.

Mean weight of vapour for the month, ve oe ee 9.65

Additional weight of vapour required for complete saturation, oe 3.26

Mean degree of Humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.75

Inches.

Rained 16 days. Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, oe oe 2.38

Total amount of rain during the month, als oe fis 9.33

Prevailing direction of the Wind, .. oe oe S.&58. HE.

Meteorological Observations. XXXIX

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

Monturty REsvuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour,

when any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour.

Rain on.

S. EB

Rain on.

Calm 3

Rain on.

Rein on,

Rain on.

N. W.

Rain on.

Midnight.

PFPwmNnwNnNrFNW bd

NNWNwWNHEH

led

—

(ow)

wo nnwnwryoe

BOOMS OUP Oo bo

a et

Noon,

ft be

—

EDN DHE NWH HEHE

ise

MPOUMDNTOAAA

Dm ww dO dO dO ww DO

AOWONUOWALRA DoD

mb DH He 0 bo bo & ww OD

bo DH we bo bo be

a jt

xl Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of May, 1857.

On the 23rd May, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after

ten minutes intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office,

they indicate the following circumstances :—

Di. (30, be. mn;

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer,......0.6. 2 20 4.M.and 5 OP.M.

Ditto Maximum Barometer,.......... 9 30 do. and 10. 30 do.

(Between 5 Oand6 O a.m.

during the whole of which

interval the Thermometer

stood at the same reading

| 80.4 which was the lowest

\. temperature during the day.

Ditto Maximum Temperature,........ 2 20 P.M.

Ditto Minimum Temperature,...e.... ,

On the 7th, a Southerly breeze blew from 10 a. m. till4 P.M;

after which a South Easterly breeze springing up; the sky became

overcast and distant flashes of sheet-lightning were constantly

visible on the Hast side. Things continued in this state till 10 P. wu.

when it commenced raining heavily. At 20 minutes past 10 P. m.

the South Hasterly breeze which had been blowing since 4 P. M.

became a gale. After the gale had set in, it continually veered its

directions. At 11 p. mu. all was quiet again. During the prevalance

of the gale there was much rain, thunder, and lightning and an

incessant fall of hailstones.

Also the undermentioned gales occurred during the month.

May 20th, between 6 and 7 a.m. a N. E. gale blew for about

10 minutes; only one side of the gale passing over Calcutta, the

whole body of the gale going by the East thereof.

May 20th, between 7 and 8 p.m. a S. W. gale blew for abont

three quarters of an hour; during which and for upwards of an

hour afterwards, there was much lightning and thundering, accom-

panied with little rain.

May 28th, between 5 and6 p.m. a N. W. gale blew for about

20 minutes.

May 30th, between 6 and 7 Pp. M. a W. gale blew for about

20 minutes, during which there was little rain.

Meteorological Observations. xli

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

Latitude 22° 33’ 1’ North. Longitude 88° 20’ 34” East.

. feet.

Height of the Cistern of the Standard Barometer above the Sea level, 18.11

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon. \

15 636 £707 561

16 .598 675 505

= = a3 Range of the Barometer = 2 Range of the Tempera-

“Bp ac during the day. me ture during the day.

o = Fa)

rns as cared

é ao? ; a % ;

£ S34 Max Min Diff is Max Min. | Diff

Gl. alles =

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. ty) f) ft) )

1 | 29.569 | 29.648 | 29.490 0.158 86.7 92.8 81.4 | 11.4

2 045 612 A461 151 86.9 92.4: 83.6 8.8

3 551 .616 ASL 135 86.9 92.2 81.6 | 10.6

4 .550 .599 472 127 87.0 92.9 80.3 | 12.6

5 604: .655 534: 121 84.9 93.8 80.6 | 13.2

6 .627 .663 081 082 85.8 93.2 81.3 | 11.9

7 | Sunday

8 567 .625 485 140 87.8 95.0 83.8 | 11.2

. 534 578 475 103 88.7 96.0 82.8 | 13.2

10 .065 613 A494 119 89.3 97.2 83.4 | 13.8

11 -620 675 572 103 89.0 96.2 83.4 | 12.8

12 -610 .662 .525 137 87.7 95.8 78.0 | 17.8

13 584 .635 .509 126 86.6 92.5 82.0 | 10.5

14 | Sunday

17 .557 .607 489 118 86.1 94.6 81.7 | 12.9

18 527 .588 .467 121 85.6 93.6 82.0 | 11.6

19 468 512 869 143 84.2 90.0 82.0 8.0

20 -396 448 316 132 85.5 90.6 80.8 2.8

21 | Sunday

| 22 302 300 .249 104; 81.5 86.1 fia 7.0

23 392 509 316 .193 82.4: 88.3 78.2 | 10.1

24, -549 .618 493 125 83.3 87.4 79.0 8.4

25 573 615 502 113 84.5 91.3 80.6 | 10.7

26 533 575 477 .098 82.3 88.8 79.0 9.8

27 488 540 442 .098 81.2 88.4: hi Osh, hd Ai

28 | Sunday.

29 .380 413 334 079 80.2 82.5 78.8 3.7

30 A421 459 351 108 79.5 84.5 77.4 pal

The Mean height of the Barometer, as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

ee eee are derived from the twenty-four hourly observations made during

the day,

xhi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

an the month of June, 1857.

Daily Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

: Ecc iiaga’'> 00] ote a NE

= ° (an) o acs Sey iS =|

a 3 Fl ii 2 c= | 2s ee

er a 3

RUG eee onc ecle

Date. a a E fs 3 2S S aS os

s 3 A ie a ee Sete ous,

o a) = ao Be 2.9 | "65 S/he a

tS 2 2 2 Sos os = S Salo je

) = = Os i) St Sis sl ae

so om Sy ‘5 ss" s® |S 30] 6 2 wo

& & a = ale o> S.8 | Stele eS

= A 5 a = = |< A

o ty) a) oO Inches. | T.gr.| T. gr.

1 80.9 5.8 78.0 8.7 | 0.940 | 10.01 | 3.17 | 0.76

2 81.3 5.6 78.5 8.4: .955 18 .07 77

3 81.4: 5.5 78.6 8.3 .958 21 04 77

4 82.1 4.9 79.6 7.4 .989 54 | 2.75 79

5) 78.7 6.2 75.6 9.3 871 9.31 | 318 75

6 80.4: 5.4 FU er: 8.1 931 94 | 2.89 78

7 | Sunday

8 82.1 5.7 79.2 8.6 976) |)110:37 1 S23.) 9G

9 82.2 6.5 78.9 9.8 OF 26 .70 74

10 82.6 6.7 79.2 101 .976 .80 .86 73

il 82.0 70 78 5 10.5 £955 12 96 | .72

12 81.0 6.7 77 6 10,1 .928 9.87 .69 73

13 80.2 6.4 77.0 9.6 .910 .69 45 74:

14 | Sunday

15 80.8 6.2 77.7 93 .931 92 37 75

16 80.5 6.2 77.4: 93 922 83 35 75

17 80.5 5.6 MEY 8 4 931 94 01 77

18 80.5 5.1 CTS, ad. 987.) dl0:00. |: 246 78

19 80.5 3.7 78.6 5.6 958 26 | 1.98 84

20 80.3 5.2 VIRUS 7.8 931 9.94 | 2.78 78

21 | Sunday

22 78.3 3.2 iG. 4.8 902 £40.) de6d 86

23 78.5 3.9 76.5 5.9 .896 63 98 83

24 79.5 3.8 77.6 5.7 .928 95 98 83

25 80.1 4.4 “ie 0°6 .937 | £0.02 | 2.33 81

26 79.4 2.9 Wo 4.4: .937 08 ; 150 87

27 78.8 2.4 413 3.6 .928 9.99 22 89

28 | Sunday.

29 78.2 2.0 77.2 3.0 916 89} 0:99 |. 8%

30 77.0 2.5 75.7 3.8 873 43 | 1.23 | .89

All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorologicai Observations.

Kllil

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c. of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon,

‘6 3 _ | Range of the Barometer for = Fs Range os the Cats

Bis each hour during the oe pee ae pour

Hour. ms a Q E ; 7

= = |

Inches. | Inches. | Inches. | Inches. Oo o mig °

. 29.536 |29.651 |29.387 | 0.314 | 824 | 852 | 787) 65

1 | 524 | 642 | «301 341 | 822 | 85.0 | 786| 6:4

2 514 635 304 | 831 82.0 84.8 | 78.6] 6.2

3 509 .635 .297 | 338 81.9 85.5 | 78.4) 7.1

A 510 .638 274 | 864 81.8 84.2) 78.21 %6.0

5 523 646 278 368 81.7 S49" e782 | “6.0

6 543 657 .289 368 8L9 | 846 | 782! 64

7 558 687 305 382 82.8 85.4 | 79.0] 6.4

8 567 .698 320 378 84.6 67.8.) 80.0 1078

9 573 707 324 383 86.6 90.6 | 79.2 | 11.4

10 573 692 1315 377 87.9 92.6 | 80.2 | 12.4

11 565 680> | ) 312 368 9.4 94.1 80.4 | 13.7

Noon.| .548 662 301 361 90.5 95.0 | 80.2 | 148

it 530 .637 295 342 90.7 96.4 | 81.3 | 15.1

2 513 615 274: 341 90.0 97.2 | 78.0 | 19.2

3 495 598 .268 330 89.6 G7.2, 178.3 | 18.9

4 A73 584: 249 335 88.5 96.4 | 78.0 | 18.4

5 AT3 620 259 361 S77 94.8 | 77.8 | 17.0

6 484: 611 277 334 86.2 92:0 | 77.0'| 15.0

7 500 .608 303 305 85.0 89.6 Ti | 32:2

8 526 635 327 308 83.9 88.0 | 78.0 | 10.0

9 5389 .663 335 328 83.3 86.7 78.8 7.9

10 552 663 | .353 310 83.0 86.8 | 79.0] 7.8

11 550 | 649 | .349 300 82.7 85.6 | 79.0| 66

The Mean Pei of the Barometer,

Thermometers are

during the month,

derived from the ‘Observations made at the several

as likewise the Mean Dry and Wet Bulb

hours

xliv

Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

Hourly Means, &c, of the Observations and of the Hygrometrical elements

dependent thereon.

a ® a o Bs oom ° a 28

: i suaie Se lather

3 S 5 2 th i) te cenit Se ees

32 2 3 2 = legit O°, | eR anges

es 5 3 a2) Fas 1 Pls 6 ieee

20 a. a Pid so |S SF. S/e8 E55

$5 P g per | § Sor) Bae (Sh Oe a Ss

= fa S) a = a <q a

o i) ty) ) Inches. | T. gr. | T. gr

Mid- | ys9 | 3.6 | .77.1 | 6S) 0.913. |992. | 1.99, |!) Oe5

DRE, : : : : : ‘ : !

aL 79.0 3.2 774 4.8 .922 “ol .63 86

2 79.0 3.0 77.5 4.5 .925 94, 53 87

3 79.0 2.9 77.5 4.4: .925 96 48 87

4: 79.0 2.8 77.6 4.2 .928 oe AL 88

5 79.0 of 77.6 4.1 .928 ALN] 08 88

6 via 2.8 77.7 4.2 931 10.02 42 88

7 To 3.1 78.1 4.7 943 12 63 86

8 80.4: 4.2 78.3 6.3 .949 16 2.23 82

9 81.2 5.4 78.5 8.1 .955 18 .96 78

10 81.5 6.4 78.3 9.6 .949 07 3.57 74:

11 82.1 7.3 78.4 11.0 952 08 4.17 71

Noon. 82.5 8.0 78.5 12.0 955 10 .62 .69

1 82.4 8.3 78.2 12.5 946 9.98 82 67

2 82.0 8.0 78.0 12.0 940 .95 .00 .69

3 81.8 im 77.9 7 937 22 41 .69

4 81.5 a0) 78.0 10.5 .940 OT, 3.91 72

5 80.9 6.8 77.0 10.2 .925 84 12 73

6 80.3 5.9 77.3 8.9 ae 1) .80 BL) 75

7 80.0 5.0 77.5 7.5 .925 88 2.65 afc

8 79.5 44: 77.3 6.6 I) 84: ts) 81

9 79.4: 3.9 774 5.9 922 89 04 83

10 79.4 3.6 77.6 5.4 .928 97 1.85 84

11 19.3 3.4 77.6 5.1 .928 97 75 85

; All the Hygrometrical elements are computed by the Greenwich constants.

Meteorological Observations. xlv

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

Solar Radiation, Weather, &c.

aa [Se

aeiia6.,

O-rs S&S 2S

| 23 | & &| Prevailing direction General Aspect of the Sky.

$| 4% |338)] ofthe Wind.

Ss 4 las]

Sloe (ae?

) Inches.

1) 125.5 <=, {s:4(bieh,) Cloudy.

2} 129.0 sis S. (high.) Cloudy.

= ee ae Fhe (ves) Cloudy.

AR) 2. .. |S. (high before sun-| Cloudy.

rise.)

5| 119.0 . | 8. (high 10 a. M. to} Cloudy.

1 P.M.)

Gh 127.0" | . Ss. Cloudy, also slightly drizzling at 8 P. M.

7| Sunday

8} 125.0 S.&8. W. Scatd. clouds. [ wards.

9} 130.0 5 S. Scatd. i till 3 Pp. M. cloudless after-

10} 134.0 ga Se Cloudless till 6 a. Mm. scatd. i & ~i till

4. Pp. M. cloudless afterwards.

11} 129.7 S. Seatd. clouds.

12) 134.0 | 1.50 |S. Scatd. clouds, also raining at 8 & 9 P.M.

13) 124.0 8. Cloudy.

14) Sunday

15) 127.0 | 0.36 | 8. Cloudless till 5 a. M. scatd. clouds till

7 Pp. M. cloudless afterwards, also rain-

ing at 3 P. M. | wards.

16; 121.0 a ASA Cloudless till 5 a. M. scatd. clouds after-

17} 127.8 A Be Cloudless till 6 a. M. cloudy afterwards,

also a very loud clap of thunder fol-

lowed by a little drizzling at 2 P. M.

18} 124.0 oo 4 eH. eS. K. Cloudy.

19) be | Pane ae NN: Cloudless till 44. M. cloudy till 8 Pe. mM.

cloudless afterwards.

20; ae 2 REE, Cloudless till 5 a. M. cloudy afterwards.

21| Sunday. | 0.75

22; ae Po Be3s Cloudy and occasionally raining.

23] ee 0.61 | E. Cloudy and constantly raining.

y | ae 0.50 | 8. Cloudy and occasionally raining before

noon.

25) 118.0 -. |S. &8. W. Cloudy.

26} ae 1.28 |S. &S, E,& 8. W. | Cloudy and also raining between 1 &

5 P.M. [10 P. mM.

27; s- 1.69 |S.W.&8.& W. | Cloudy and much rain between 1 &

28] Sunday.| 0.14

29) ke 0.96 |S. W. & W. Cloudy and constantly raining.

BO} ae 2.51 |W. & S. W. Cloudy & also raining between 1 & 4. P. M,

Ni Cirri, i Cirro strati, %i Cumuli, ~i Cumulo strati, VW-i Nimbi, —i Strat?

\ i Cirro cumuli,

xlvi Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

Monruty Resurs.

Inches.

Mean height of the Barometer for the month, ne es 29.528

Max. height of the Barometer oceurred at 9 A. M. on the 15th, A 29.707

Min. height of the Barometer occurred at 4 P. M. on the 22nd, os 29.249

Extreme range of the Barometer during the month, a es 0.458

Ce)

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer for the month, ie an 85.3

Max. Temperature occurred at 2 & 3 Pp. M. on the 10th, .. ee 97.2

Min. Temperature occurred at 6 P. M. on the 27th, ats a 77.0

Extreme range of the Temperature during the mouth, .. Pi 20.2

)

Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer for the month, as ob 80.3

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above Mean Wet Bulb Thermometer, .. 5.0

Computed Mean Dew-point for the month, .. <a 3 77.8

Mean Dry Bulb Thermometer above computed mean Dew-point, .. 7.5

Inches.

Mean Elastic force of Vapour for the month, a4 5. 0.934

Troy grains.

Mean Weight of Vapour for the month, ee “if ate 9.97

Additional Weight of Vapour required for complete saturation, ate 2.67

Mean degree of humidity for the month, complete saturation being unity, 0.79

Inches,

Rained 15 days, Max. fall of rain during 24 hours, aig of 2.51

Sotal amount of rain during the month, oe oa =4 10.30

Prevailing direction of the Wind, ae r. oe S.

Meteorological Observations. xlvii

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

: in the month of June, 1857.

Montaxuy REsvuts.

Table showing the number of days on which at a given hour any particular wind

blew, together with the number of days on which at the same hour when

any particular wind was blowing it rained.

Hour. i J 3 3 S is S S|

fo} Pao ln ° ° . (=) fo) . lo) £ fo)

gyale] jel ls E je] |e] * |e] € |z

NJe17 a] E. |]. Bl 3 let W. leis Isls ie

No. of days.

Midnight. | oe i 3

1 3 1 ie vs

2 3 : 2 1

3 3 1 3

4 at EL gk 3

5 1 2 Ae 2 E

6 2 2 a 1 2

7 2 2 1 2 1 1 ta

8 1 3 Diehedianys, & 5 u

9 ae ee! 3 4] 1p 2

10 2 1 Zh San (ae ee

11 1 yg 1 4 2 1

Noon. 2 1 5 2 1

1 2 2 Ly 4 | 1j 2] 2

2 5 | 2 ee Le Ae

3 4s\\ Weds) 1 3 3/1

4 1 2 a a St. eed

5 1 2 Ss [2 oof ae» 1

6 L 3 4 | 1 2. PORE Sec

7 Seite o: 2 3 |] 1

8 1) 1) 1 5 | 2) 2 2 1 1

10 it 5 1 #4. Uy 1

11 1 5 | 1 1 r

xlviit Meteorological Observations.

Abstract of the Results of the Hourly Meteorological Observations

taken at the Surveyor General's Office, Calcutta,

in the month of June, 1857.

On the 20th June, 1857, the Meteorological Observations after ten minutes

intervals being taken at the Surveyor General’s Office, they indicate the following

circumstances.

“Ss h. m.

Exact Time of Minimum Barometer, ..

mM. 10 50

h. m. h. m.

M. Between 510 & 6 O during

ike whole of which interval the ther-

Ditto Minimum Temperature, J ™ometer stood at the same reading

80.8 which was the lowest tempera-

mm. 10) "0

Ditto Maximum Barometer, .

L ture during the day.

hm,

(P. M. at 20 past noon and also at 4

Ditto Maximum Temperature, 2 the thermometer ge at 90. 8,

| at the former, and at 90.7 at the

latter time.

Baye

A ate isoe py

uae aoe :

gee

ited

eases

e-@resaeh ors

eee *—

ane ord

2< eke eo

Pees

a 6~ 4

et ae

= Se BOSSE

bve*6-0e

: - a

o=@-

4=s°

‘a~ o-

JApnde Re Gm en we USS

2 0 -0~ Be Ome

at ea

Pr -1 td

errr

at 3" - o 6° +4 G~

ose ee naee oe Bst~est

aa oe

Spay enn yous

ete-o-ee r= pe ae

—e-9-

a0 a B= e

eT eae ee ees

~~ aa eae eee

Pd ok eee

38 -2- a

ene gee

ples 0— B= wn de

eke e

atae iF

pres err rd ets to oe ee -

“gaa “ Sol Soho Ses

eo 2 Ot

ee ee

; 35.

enw a-6

<a >"

ann *

628 BON Oe RED

Pee eee

Red

. ee

(oe ere

oa - 3%

sea ©

whee

~erds

=Qu te aR ee- &->- Bh = “¢

“ae ONS

one Oo - 8

—p>poe=net~ es”

» =

aye Swe ao

o~ ee

“arene

~~ a ~9>5~

eo ek

-F

#~a=0

ae De Ore Behe ke

e846 4°92 4~ bn eos Oe

naa!

wwarare ; . ptt Se

ee aahs ah A~s B= h~ Boe”

pret Teer ret ay ot

<5 zey=ee

eee etl ok bl kre

at oe oe tlre Se ari

Terr rer es Ti ae poe

Perey es al be ae

A6= 8586-8" ow

o- “= e-@-e* “on

<7 eer e~

: ae fe

2-s-s

eee Sa

a Pa Spare

Panwtat ; : eh

a= OK

bos

“yachts Seeks

~ 8. aes

Visoe

ecieaswe ines

Pd =

acete

‘mere 624 8502

= ecesasil 58

mao teee

Ee bal

e-en578 8

te ee ae

Qreeteees

anwar ath aegat:

+4. 6-8-0 2—8>*~

saree

sa ae oe

~q~2- O"e

Se hao

ee ee bel ek rel

@-e~

A per

iter et et

zest

»~ ab

ents p edu te

end

’

+P 5d ep Rete)

e-4 @*e"

~e-0~@

re ee ee

~4~ 26

———3

tg-645-0-6-

* Pin gener

saps asrs

Stetetenet

Bose?

=<4-%

vd <& eae

oe"

oh oie

= ~ —~

Fh dhabaeetOs

Heya ee

= -

Pye ey

+o @—~ S20 05

RAE E HS

SP PES er rm

fy *

yb OSe-

ot ae. #414 34

bee tasetees! #4

eee